vnx.su x trail t30 sm - Часть2 PDF

TRANSFER
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
TF
TRANSFER
TF
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER .................................................................. 3
Precautions .............................................................. 3
Service Notice .......................................................... 4
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis .................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
Special Service Tools ............................................... 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 8
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH)
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................ 9
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ..................................... 9
TRANSFER OIL ........................................................ 10
Replacement .......................................................... 10
DRAINING ........................................................... 10
FILLING ............................................................... 10
Inspection ............................................................... 10
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ......................... 10
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM .........................................11
Power Transfer Diagram .........................................11
System Description .................................................11
ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING ..............11
4WD CONTROL UNIT .........................................11
4WD MODE SWITCH ......................................... 12
4WD INDICATOR LAMP AND LOCK INDICATOR
LAMP .................................................................. 12
4WD WARNING LAMP ....................................... 12
System Diagram ..................................................... 13
COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION ..... 14
CAN Communication .............................................. 14
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .................................... 14
CAN Communication Unit ...................................... 14
TYPE 1/TYPE 2 .................................................. 15
TYPE 3 ................................................................ 16
TYPE 4/TYPE 5 .................................................. 17
TYPE 6 ................................................................ 18
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ............................................ 20
Fail-safe Function ................................................... 20
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ........................ 20
BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 20

Location of Electrical Parts ..................................... 21
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 22
Wiring Diagram 4WD ..................................... 23
LHD MODELS ..................................................... 23
RHD MODELS .................................................... 26
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms .................. 29
4WD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference
Values ..................................................................... 30
4WD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE ..... 30
CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD) ..... 31
FUNCTION .......................................................... 31
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE ................ 31
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE ............................... 32
DATA MONITOR MODE ...................................... 33
ACTIVE TEST MODE ......................................... 34
4WD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER .............. 34
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM .................... 35
Power Supply Circuit for 4WD Control Unit ............ 35
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 35
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE .............................. 35
4WD Control Unit .................................................... 36
ABS System ........................................................... 36
4WD Solenoid ......................................................... 37
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 37
COMPONENT INSPECTION .............................. 39
4WD Actuator Relay ............................................... 40
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 40
4WD Mode Switch .................................................. 42
MONITOR MODE ................................................ 42
TF-1
http://vnx.su
Engine Control Signal ............................................. 44

CAN Communication Line ...................................... 45
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS .............. 46
4WD Indicator Lamp and LOCK Indicator Lamp Do
Not Turn ON for Approx. 1 Second When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON .................................... 46
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The
Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON .............................. 47
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several
Seconds after Engine Started ................................. 48
4WD Mode Cannot Be Switched after Engine Is
Started .................................................................... 49
Heavy Tight-corner Braking Symptom Occurs
When The Vehicle Is Driven in AUTO Mode and The
Steering Wheel Is Turned Fully to Either Side after
The Engine Is Started ............................................. 50
Vehicle Does Not Enter 4WD Mode Even Though
4WD Warning Lamp Turned to OFF ....................... 51
While Driving, 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly
(When Flashing in Approx. 1 Minute and Then Turning OFF) ................................................................. 52
While Driving, 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly
(When Continuing to Flash until Turning Ignition
Switch OFF) ............................................................ 53
4WD CONTROL UNIT ...............................................54

Removal and Installation .........................................54
REMOVAL ............................................................54
INSTALLATION ....................................................54
SIDE OIL SEAL .........................................................55
REMOVAL ............................................................55
INSTALLATION ....................................................55
AIR BREATHER HOSE .............................................56
Components ............................................................56
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY ...........................................57
COMPONENTS ...................................................57
REMOVAL ............................................................57
INSTALLATION ....................................................58
Disassembly and Assembly ....................................59
COMPONENTS ...................................................59
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION ...................................60
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................64
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................68
SELECTING ADJUSTING SHIMS .......................69
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................70
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ......76
General Specifications ............................................76
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................76
PRELOAD TORQUE BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...76
PRELOAD TORQUE AFTER DISASSEMBLY
AND REASSEMBLY ............................................76
BACKLASH ..........................................................76
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT .......................76
SELECTIVE PARTS ............................................76
TF-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) AIR BAG and SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EDS001W1
The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER, used along B
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of
this Service Manual.
C
WARNING:
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perTF
formed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
E
Bag Module, see the SRS section.
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or
harness connectors.
F
Precautions
EDS001V6
Before connecting or disconnecting the 4WD control unit

harness connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect battery ground cable. Because battery voltage is
applied to 4WD control unit even if ignition switch is turned
OFF.
SEF289H
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from 4WD control unit, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break).
When connecting pin connectors, make sure that there are
no bends or breaks on 4WD control unit pin terminal.
M
SEF291H
Before replacing 4WD control unit, perform 4WD control

unit input/output signal inspection and make sure whether
4WD control unit functions properly or not. Refer to TF-30,
"4WD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values" .
SDIA1848E
TF-3
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice
EDS001V7
After overhaul refill the transfer with new transfer oil.

Check the oil level or replace the oil only with the vehicle parked on level ground.
During removal or installation, keep inside of transfer clear of dust or dirt.
Replace all tires at the same time. Always use tires of the proper size and the same brand and pattern.
Fitting improper size and unusual wear tires applies excessive force to vehicle mechanism and can cause
longitudinal vibration.
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the transfer. It is important to prevent the internal
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required,
be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or
reassembly.
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them
with a new ones if necessary.
Gaskets, seals, O-rings and lock nuts should be replaced any time when the transfer is disassembled.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, use it.
Observe the specified torque when assembling.
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere
with the operation of the transfer.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis

When reading wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".
PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING".

When performing trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".
TF-4
http://vnx.su
EDS001V8
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
PFP:00002
A
EDS002V6
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST3127S000
Preload gauge
Measuring preload torque
TF
ZZA0503D
ST33220000
Drift
a: 37 mm (1.46 in) dia.
b: 31 mm (1.22 in) dia.
c: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
Removing drive pinion
F
ZZA1046D
KV381054S0
Puller
Removing pinion rear bearing outer race
Removing pinion front bearing outer race
Removing gear ring oil seal
H
ZZA0601D
ST30031000
Replacer
Removing pinion front bearing inner race
ZZA0700D
ST33200000
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
Removing gear ring bearing inner race

(adapter case side)
Installing companion flange
M
ZZA1002D
ST33061000
Drift
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
Removing gear ring bearing inner race

(transfer case side)
ZZA0810D
TF-5
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST30720000
Drift
a: 77 mm (3.03 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
Installing gear ring bearing outer race

Installing gear ring bearing inner race


(adapter case side)

(adapter case side)
Installing transfer case oil seal
ZZA0811D
ST33230000
Drift
a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
c: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
Installing gear ring oil seal
ZZA1046D
ST27863000
Drift
a: 74.5 mm (2.933 in) dia.
b: 62.5 mm (2.461 in) dia.

ZZA1003D
KV40101630
Drift
a: 68 mm (2.68 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.

ZZA1003D
KV38102510
Drift
a: 71 mm (2.80 in) dia.
b: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.

(adapter case side)
ZZA1003D
KV38100300
Drift
a: 54 mm (2.13 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
c: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
ZZA1046D
TF-6
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST33400001
Drift
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 47 mm (1.85 in) dia.
Installing pinion front bearing outer race
Installing pinion sleeve oil seal
C
ZZA0814D
ST30901000
Drift
a: 79 mm (3.11 in) dia.
b: 45 mm (1.77 in) dia.
c: 35.2 mm (1.386 in) dia.
Installing pinion front bearing inner race
TF
E
ZZA0978D
TF-7
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
EDS002V7
Tool name
Description
Drift
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 73 mm (2.87 in) dia.
Installing side oil seal (installing adapter case

oil seal)
NT115
Drift
a: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.

PDIA0893E
Drift
a: 90 mm (3.54 in) dia.

(adapter case side)
PDIA0893E
TF-8
http://vnx.su
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

NVH Troubleshooting Chart
PFP:00003
A
EDS001V9
Transfer oil leakage
TF-68
TF-68
TF-59
TF-59
2
GEAR (Worn or damaged)
BEARING (Worn or damaged)
OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)
O-RING (Worn or damaged)
C
LIQUID GASKET (Damaged)
TRANSFER OIL (Level too high)
TF-10
Noise
TRANSFER OIL (Wrong)
SUSPECTED PARTS
(Possible cause)
TRANSFER OIL (Level low)
Reference page
Symptom
TF-59
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. The numbers indicate the order of the inspection. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
TF
TF-9
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER OIL
TRANSFER OIL
Replacement
PFP:KLD30
EDS001W2
DRAINING
CAUTION:
When draining oil, protect exhaust tube with cover.
1. Run the vehicle to warm up the transfer body sufficiently.
2. Stop engine, and remove drain plug to drain the transfer oil.
3. Apply recommended sealant to drain plug. Install drain plug on
transfer and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-59,
"COMPONENTS" .
SDIA0512E
FILLING
1.
Remove filler plug and add gear oil until oil level reaches the
specified limit near filler plug mounting hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity
: Refer to MA-17, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Oil capacity
: Approx. 0.31
2.
3.
(1/2 lmp pt)
CAUTION:
Carefully fill the oil. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes)
Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check the oil level again.
Apply recommended sealant to filler plug. Install filler plug on
transfer and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS" .
Inspection
SDIA0513E
EDS001W3
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL

1.
2.
Check oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking oil level.
Before installing filler plug, apply recommended sealant. Install
filler plug on transfer and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to
TF-59, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA0513E
TF-10
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM
Power Transfer Diagram
PFP:47850
A
EDS001VA
TF
SDIA1607E
System Description
EDS001VB
ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING

Operation Principle
1.
2.
3.
4.
The 4WD control unit supplies command current to electric controlled coupling (4WD solenoid).
The control clutch is engaged by electromagnet and torque is
detected in control clutch.
The cam operates in response to control clutch torque and
applies pressure to main clutch.
The main clutch transmits torque to front wheels according to
pressing power.
I
SFIA0284E
Transmission torque to the rear wheels is determined according to command current.
SDIA1844E
4WD CONTROL UNIT
4WD controls distribution of drive power between front-wheel

drive (100:0) and 4WD (50:50) conditions according to signals
from sensors.
Self-diagnosis can be done with CONSULT-II.
SDIA2285E
TF-11
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

4WD MODE SWITCH
AUTO Mode
Electronic control allows optimal distribution of torque to front/rear wheels to match road conditions.
4WD mode makes possible stable driving, with no wheel spin, on snowy roads or other slippery surfaces.
On roads which do not require 4WD, AUTO mode contributes to improved fuel economy by driving in conditions close to front-wheel drive.
Sensor inputs determine the vehicle's turning condition, and tight cornering/braking are controlled by distributing optimum torque to rear wheels.
LOCK Mode
Front/rear wheel torque distribution is fixed, ensuring stable driving when climbing slopes.
Vehicle will switch automatically to AUTO mode if vehicle speed increases. If vehicle speed then
decreases, the vehicle automatically returns to direct 4-wheel driving conditions.
LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically, when the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 30 km/h
(19 MPH). The LOCK indicator light keeps illuminating.
NOTE:
If there is a significant difference in pressure or wear between tires, full vehicle performance is not available.
LOCK mode may be prohibited, or speeds at which LOCK mode is enabled may be restricted detecting tire
conditions.
2WD Mode
Vehicle is in front-wheel drive.
NOTE:
If front wheels are slipping in 2WD mode, do not switch to AUTO or LOCK. This can cause difficulties for
the system.
Even if the 4WD mode switch is in 2WD mode, the 4WD control unit occasionally automatically change to
AUTO mode depending on the driving condition (For example; Depressing the acceleration firmly). This is
not malfunction. However, 4WD indicator lamp dose not illuminate.
4WD INDICATOR LAMP AND LOCK INDICATOR LAMP

The following is the indications of indicator lamp.
Condition
4WD indicator lamp
LOCK indicator lamp
AUTO mode
ON
OFF
LOCK mode
ON
ON
2WD mode
OFF
OFF
Lamp check
Turns ON for approx. 1 second when ignition switch is turned ON.
SDIA2298E
4WD WARNING LAMP

Turns ON when there is a malfunction in 4WD system. It indicates that the vehicle is in fail-safe mode and
change to front-wheel drive or shifting driving force-4WD (Rear-wheels still have some driving torque).
Also turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON, for purpose of lamp check. Turns OFF approximately for 1
seconds after the engine starts if system is normal.
4WD Warning Lamp Indication

Condition
4WD warning lamp

Turns ON when ignition switch is turned ON. Turns OFF
approx. 1 seconds after engine start.
Lamp check
4WD system malfunction
ON
Protection function is activated due to heavy load to electric controlled coupling. (4WD system is not malfunctioning and 4WD system
changes to 2WD mode.)
TF-12
http://vnx.su
Rapid flashing: 2 times/second

(Flashing in approx. 1 minute and then turning OFF.)
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

Condition
4WD warning lamp

Slow flashing: 1 time/2 seconds
(Continuing to flash until turning ignition switch OFF)
Large difference in diameter of front/rear tires

Other than above (system normal)
OFF
System Diagram
B
EDS001VC
TF
SDIA1866E
TF-13
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
Component parts
Function
Controls driving force distribution by signals from each sensor and switch from front wheel driving
mode (100:0) to 4WD mode (50:50).
2WD mode is available by fail-safe function if malfunction is detected in electrical system.
4WD control unit

Wheel sensors
Detects wheel speed.
4WD solenoid
Controls electric controlled coupling by operation signal from 4WD control unit.
Electric controlled coupling
Transmits driving force to rear final drive.
4WD mode switch
4WD warning lamp
Able to select from 2WD, AUTO or LOCK mode.
Illuminates if malfunction is detected in electrical system of 4WD system.
There is 1 blink in 2 seconds if rotation difference of front wheels and rear wheels is large.
There are 2 blinks in 1 second if load is still applied to driving parts.
4WD indicator lamp
Indicate operation with optimal distribution of torque to front/rear wheels.
LOCK indicator lamp
Indicate that 4WD system is under direct 4-wheel driving mode.
ABS actuator and electric unit

(control unit) (without ESP) or
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit (with
ESP)
Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to 4WD control unit.
Vehicle speed signal
Stop lamp switch signal (brake signal)
Transmits the following signals via CAN communication to 4WD control unit.
ECM
Unified meter control unit
Accelerator pedal position signal
Engine speed signal
Transmits conditions of parking brake switch via CAN communication to 4WD control unit.
CAN Communication
EDS0027K
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
EDS002XA
Body type
Wagon
Axle
Engine
4WD
YD22DDTi
Transmission
M/T
Brake control
CAN system type
QR20DE/QR25DE
YD22DDTi
A/T
M/T
ABS
1
TF-14
http://vnx.su
QR25DE
A/T
ESP
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

TYPE 1/TYPE 2
System diagram
TF
PKIA6458E
Input/output signal chart

T: Transmit R: Receive
Signals
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
H
4WD control unit
Combination meter
4WD mode indicator lamp signal
4WD warning lamp signal
A/C compressor feedback signal
ECM
ABS warning lamp signal
Engine coolant temperature signal
Engine speed signal
MI signal
R
R
R
R
R
Parking brake switch signal
Stop lamp switch signal

ASCD SET lamp signal
Glow indicator lamp signal*
A/C switch signal*
*: YD engine models only
TF-15
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

TYPE 3
System diagram
PKIA6457E

ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
A/T position indicator lamp signal

A/T self-diagnosis signal
TCM
R
T
Closed throttle position signal
Engine A/T integrated control signal

Engine speed signal
MI signal
O/D OFF indicator signal

Output shaft revolution signal
R
R
R
R
R
T
Overdrive control switch signal
PN range signal
R
R

R
Wide open throttle position signal
T
T
R
T
TF-16
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM
Signals
ECM
TCM
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
ASCD CRUISE lamp signal
TYPE 4/TYPE 5
System diagram
TF
PKIA9634E
Signals
ECM
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
Steering angle
sensor

2
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
A/C compressor feedback signal*
A/C switch signal*1

T
T
Brake warning lamp signal
Engine speed signal
ESP OFF indicator lamp signal
R
R
R
R
Glow indicator lamp signal*1
MI signal

R
SLIP indicator lamp signal
R
T
Steering angle sensor signal
TF-17
http://vnx.su
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

*1: YD engine models only
*2: QR engine models only
TYPE 6
System diagram
PKIA9635E

ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
R
T
Engine and A/T integrated
Engine speed signal
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R

MI signal


Steering
angle sensor

TCM
PN range signal
T
T
TF-18
http://vnx.su
R
T
ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM
Signals
ECM
TCM
ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
Steering
angle sensor
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
B
R
T
TF
TF-19
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Fail-safe Function
PFP:00004
EDS001VE
If any malfunction occurs in 4WD electrical system, and control unit detects the malfunction, 4WD warning
lamp on combination meter turns ON to indicate system malfunction.
When 4WD warning lamp is ON, vehicle changes to front-wheel drive or shifting driving force-4WD (Rearwheels still have some driving torque).
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis
EDS001VF
BASIC CONCEPT
To perform trouble diagnosis, it is the most important to have understanding about vehicle systems (control and mechanism) thoroughly.
It is also important to clarify customer complaints before inspection.
First of all, reproduce symptoms, and understand them fully.
Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. In some cases,
it will be necessary to check symptoms by driving vehicle with
customer.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. It is dangerous to make an
easy guess like "maybe the customer means that...," or
"maybe the customer mentions this symptom".
SEF233G
It is essential to check symptoms right from the beginning in

order to repair malfunctions completely.
For intermittent malfunctions, reproduce symptoms based on
interview with customer and past examples. Do not perform
inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent malfunctions are
caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be effective to shake
suspected harness or connector by hand. When repairing without any symptom diagnosis, you cannot judge if malfunctions
have actually been eliminated.
After completing diagnosis, always erase diagnostic memory.
Refer to TF-33, "How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results" .
For intermittent malfunctions, move harness or harness connector by hand. Then check for poor contact or reproduced open circuit.
TF-20
http://vnx.su
SEF234G
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Location of Electrical Parts
EDS001VG
TF
L
SDIA2299E
TF-21
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Circuit Diagram
EDS001VH
TDWB0010E
TF-22
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram 4WD
EDS001VI
LHD MODELS
TF
TDWB0011E
TF-23
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TDWA0021E
TF-24
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
TF
TDWA0022E
TF-25
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
RHD MODELS
TDWB0012E
TF-26
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
TF
TDWA0024E
TF-27
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TDWA0025E
TF-28
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms
EDS001VJ
If 4WD warning lamp turns ON, perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-32, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
Symptom
Condition
Check item
4WD indicator lamp and LOCK indicator
lamp do not turn ON for approx. 1 second
when the ignition switch is turned to ON.
(4WD indicator lamp and LOCK indicator
lamp check)
4WD warning lamp does not turn ON when
the ignition switch is turned to ON.
(4WD warning lamp check)
A
Reference page
CAN communication line

Ignition switch: ON
Power supply and ground for 4WD control unit
B
TF-46

Ignition switch: ON
TF-47
TF

Power supply and ground for 4WD control unit
4WD warning lamp does not turn OFF several seconds after engine started.
Engine running
E
TF-48
4WD solenoid
4WD actuator relay (integrated in 4WD
control unit)
Wheel sensor
4WD mode switch

4WD mode cannot be switched after engine
is started.
Engine running
TF-49

Heavy tight-corner braking symptom occurs
when the vehicle is driven in AUTO mode
and the steering wheel is turned fully to
either side after the engine is started. (See
NOTE.)
While driving
AUTO mode
Steering wheel is
turned fully to either
sides
4WD mode switch

TF-50
4WD solenoid
Mechanical malfunction of electric controlled coupling (clutch sticking etc.)
4WD solenoid
Vehicle speed: 10 km/h
(6 MPH) or less
Vehicle does not enter 4WD mode even
though 4WD warning lamp turned to OFF.
Operating condition of parking brake

(6 MPH) or more
While driving, 4WD warning lamp flashes

rapidly. (When flashing in approx. 1 minute
and then turning OFF.)
While driving, 4WD warning lamp flashes
slowly. (When continuing to flash until turning ignition switch OFF)
Mechanical malfunction of electric controlled coupling (Mechanical engagement of clutch is not possible.)
While driving
AUTO mode and

LOCK mode
While driving

(12 MPH) or more
K
TF-51
4WD solenoid
Mechanical malfunction of electric controlled coupling (Mechanical engagement of clutch is not possible.)
Protection function is activated due to

heavy load to electric controlled coupling. (4WD system is not malfunctioning.)
TF-52
Tire size is different between front and

rear of vehicle.
TF-53
NOTE:
Light tight-corner braking symptom may occur depending on driving conditions in AUTO mode. This is not malfunction.
Heavy tight-corner braking symptom occurs when vehicle is driven in the following conditions: LOCK mode, steering
wheel is turned fully to either sides, and accelerator pedal was depressed.
TF-29
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4WD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values
EDS001VK
4WD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE

Specifications with CONSULT-II
Monitor item [Unit]
Content
Condition
Display value
Vehicle stopped
FR RH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed (Front wheel

right)
0.00 km/h (0.00 mph)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
Check air pressure of tire under
standard condition.
Vehicle stopped
FR LH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed (Front wheel

left)
0.00 km/h (0.00 mph)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
standard condition.
Vehicle stopped
RR RH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed (Rear wheel

right)
Approximately equal to
the indication on speedometer (Inside of 10%)
0.00 km/h (0.00 mph)
Vehicle running
CAUTION:
standard condition.
Vehicle stopped
0.00 km/h (0.00 mph)
Vehicle running
RR LH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed (Rear wheel

left)
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Power supply voltage for

4WD control unit
Ignition switch: ON
Battery voltage
THRTL POS SEN [%]
Throttle opening condition
When depressing accelerator pedal

(Value rises gradually in response to
throttle position.)
0 - 100%
CAUTION:
standard condition.
Engine speed
: At idle
ETS SOLENOID [A]
STOP LAMP SW [ON/OFF]
ENG SPEED SIG [RUN/STOP]
ETS ACTUATOR [ON/OFF]
4WD WARN LAMP [ON/OFF]
4WD MODE SW [2WD/AUTO/

LOCK]
Monitored value of current at

4WD solenoid
Condition of brake pedal

operation
Condition of engine running
Operating condition of 4WD

actuator relay (integrated in
4WD control unit)
4WD warning lamp condition
Input condition from 4WD

mode switch
Engine speed
: 3,000 rpm or more constant
2WD
Approx. 0.000A
AUTO
Approx. 0.000A
LOCK
Approx. 0.000A
2WD
Approx. 0.000A
AUTO
Approx. 0.000 - 1.500A*
LOCK
Approx. 2.800A
Brake pedal: Depressed
ON
Brake pedal: Released
OFF
Engine stopped
(Engine speed: Less than 400 rpm)
STOP
Engine running
(Engine speed: 400 rpm or more)
RUN
Engine stopped (Ignition

switch: ON)
OFF
Engine running
ON
4WD warning lamp: ON
ON
4WD warning lamp: OFF
OFF
4WD mode switch
TF-30
http://vnx.su
2WD
2WD
AUTO
AUTO
LOCK
LOCK
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Monitor item [Unit]
4WD MODE MON [2WD/AUTO/
LOCK]
DIS-TIRE MONI [mm]
P BRAKE SW [ON/OFF]
Content
Condition
Control status of 4WD

(Output condition of 4WD indicator lamp and LOCK indicator lamp signal)
Improper size tire installed

condition
Condition of parking brake
4WD mode switch

(Engine running)
Display value
2WD
2WD
AUTO
AUTO
LOCK
LOCK
Vehicle running with normal size tire

installed
0-4 mm
Vehicle running with improper size

tire installed (Front/rear tire size difference, wear condition)
4-8 mm, 8- mm
Parking brake operated
ON
Parking brake not operated
OFF
TF
*: The values are changed by throttle opening and engine speed.
CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)
E
EDS001VL
FUNCTION
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
Diagnostic test mode
Function
F
Reference
page
Self-diagnostic results
Self-diagnostic results can be read and erased quickly.
TF-32
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the 4WD control unit can be read.
TF-33
CAN diagnostic support monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from
the 4WD control unit and also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
TF-34
4WD control unit part number can be read.
TF-34
Active test
ECU part number
CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
For details, refer to the separate CONSULT-II Operations Manual.

Turn ignition switch OFF.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data
link connector on vehicle.
Turn ignition switch ON.
L
PBIB0376E
4.
Touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL).
BCIA0029E
TF-31
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5.
6.
Touch ALL MODE AWD/4WD.

If ALL MODE AWD/4WD is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service
procedure.
BCIA0030E
SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE

Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Perform CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"

.
Start engine and drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
Stop vehicle. With engine at idle, touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
NOTE:
The details for TIME are as follow:
0: Error currently detected with 4WD control unit.
Except for 0: Error detected in the past and memorized
with 4WD control unit.
Detects frequency of driving after DTC occurs (frequency
of turning ignition switch ON/OFF).
SDIA2217E
Display Item List

Items (CONSULT-II screen
terms)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Check item
CONTROLLER FAILURE
[C1201]
Malfunction has occurred inside4WD control unit.
TF-36, "4WD Control Unit"
ABS SYSTEM
[C1203]
Malfunction related to wheel sensor has been detected by ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (without ESP) or ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit (with ESP).
TF-36, "ABS System"
4WD SOLENOID
[C1204]
Malfunction related to 4WD solenoid has been detected.
TF-37, "4WD Solenoid"
4WD ACTUATOR RLY

[C1205]
Malfunction has been detected from 4WD actuator relay integrated

with 4WD control unit, or malfunction related to 4WD solenoid has
been detected.
TF-40, "4WD Actuator

Relay" or TF-37, "4WD
Solenoid"
MODE SW
[C1209]
More than two switch inputs are simultaneously detected due to

short circuit of 4WD mode switch.
TF-42, "4WD Mode Switch"
ENGINE SIGNAL 1
[C1210]
Malfunction has been detected from ECM.
TF-44, "Engine Control Signal"
CAN COMM CIRCUIT

[U1000]
Malfunction has been detected from CAN communication line.
TF-45, "CAN Communication Line"
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED.
No NG item has been detected.
CAUTION:
If CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] is displayed with other DTCs, first perform the trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line.
Make sure that ABS warning lamp turns OFF by driving for a minute at vehicle speed of 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more after
turning ignition switch OFF if 4WD warning lamp turns ON with system malfunction of ABS SYSTEM [C1203]. 4WD
warning lamp may not turn OFF if it is normal unless ignition switch turns OFF at once and engine restarts after that.
TF-32
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
Perform applicably inspection of malfunctioning item and then repair or replace.
Start engine and drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute.
Make sure that ABS warning lamp turns OFF.
B
NOTE:
Make sure that ABS warning lamp turns OFF by driving for a minute at vehicle speed of 30 km/h
(19 MPH) or more after turning ignition switch OFF if 4WD warning lamp turns ON with system
malfunction of ABS SYSTEM [C1203]. 4WD warning lamp may not turn OFF if it is normal unless C
ignition switch turns OFF at once and engine restarts after that.
Turn ignition switch OFF to erase memory.
TF
Start engine and select SELF-DIAG RESULTS mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with CONSULT-II.
Touch ERASE on CONSULT-II screen to erase DTC memory.
CAUTION:
E
If memory cannot be erased, perform applicably diagnosis.
Drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approx. 1 minute. Be sure 4WD warning lamp is OFF.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Perform CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE. Refer to TF-31, "CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE"

.
Touch DATA MONITOR.
Select from SELECT MONITOR ITEM, screen of data monitor mode is displayed.
NOTE:
When malfunction is detected, CONSULT-II performs REAL-TIME DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
Display Item List
: Standard
I
: Not applicable
SELECT MONITOR ITEM

Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
FR RH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed calculated by front wheel

sensor RH signal is displayed.
FR LH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed calculated by front wheel

sensor LH signal is displayed.
RR RH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel

sensor RH signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR [km/h] or [mph]
Wheel speed calculated by rear wheel

sensor LH signal is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Power supply voltage for 4WD control unit.
THRTL POS SEN [%]
Throttle opening status is displayed.
ETS SOLENOID [A]
Monitored value of current at 4WD solenoid.
STOP LAMP SW [ON/OFF]
Stop lamp switch signal status via CAN

communication line is displayed.
ENG SPEED SIG [RUN/STOP]
Engine status is displayed.
Operating condition of 4WD actuator relay

(integrated in 4WD control unit) is displayed.
4WD WARN LAMP [ON/OFF]
Control status of 4WD warning lamp is displayed.
4WD MODE SW [2WD/AUTO/LOCK]
4WD lock switch signal status via CAN

communication line is displayed.
TF-33
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor item (Unit)
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
Remarks
4WD MODE MON [2WD/AUTO/LOCK]
Control status of 4WD is displayed.

(Output condition of 4WD LOCK indicator
lamp signal)
DIS-TIRE MONI [mm]
Improper size tire installed condition is displayed.
P BRAKE SW [ON/OFF]
Parking switch signal status via CAN communication line is displayed.
Voltage [V]
The value measured by the voltage probe

is displayed.
Frequency [Hz]
DUTY-HI (high) [%]
DUTY-LOW (low) [%]
PLS WIDTH-HI [msec]
PLS WIDTH-LOW [msec]
The value measured by the pulse probe is

displayed.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Description
Use this mode to determine and identify the details of a malfunction based on self-diagnostic results or data
monitor. 4WD control unit gives drive signal to actuator with receiving command from CONSULT-II to check
operation of actuator.
Test Item
Test item
Condition
Description
ETS S/V
(Detects 4WD solenoid)
Vehicle stopped
Engine running
No DTC detected
Change command current value to 4WD solenoid, and then change driving mode. (Monitor value is normal if it is within approximately 10% of
command value.)
Qu: Increase current value in increments of 0.20A
Qd: Decrease current value in increments of 0.20A
UP: Increase current value in increments of 0.02A
DOWN: Decrease current value in increments of 0.02A
CAUTION:
Do not continuously energize for a long time.
4WD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER

Ignore the 4WD control unit part number displayed in the ECU PART NUMBER.
Refer to parts catalog to order the 4WD control unit.
TF-34
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM

Power Supply Circuit for 4WD Control Unit
PFP:00000
A
EDS001VM
CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE

Data are reference value.
Monitor item [Unit]
BATTERY VOLT [V]
Condition
Ignition switch: ON
Display value (Approx.)
Battery voltage
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.
TF

Disconnect 4WD control unit harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
Check voltage between 4WD control unit harness connector terminals and ground.
Connector
M107
Terminal (Wire color)

7 (GY) - Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Battery voltage
9 (P/L) - Ground
SDIA2304E
5.
6.

Connector
M107
Voltage (Approx.)
7 (GY) - Ground
0V
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following. If any items are damaged, repair or
SDIA2321E
replace damaged parts.
10A fuse (No. 8, located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link
box)
Harness for short or open between battery and 4WD control unit harness connector terminal 9
Harness for short or open between ignition switch and 4WD control unit harness connector terminal 7
Ignition switch. Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
TF-35
http://vnx.su
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between 4WD control unit harness connector
M107 terminals 10 (B/R), 11 (B/R) and ground.
Continuity should exist.
Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power
in harness or connectors.
SDIA2305E
3. CHECK DTC
Start engine.
Does 4WD warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Perform the self-diagnosis, repair or replace damaged parts. Refer to TF-32, "SELF-DIAG
RESULT MODE" .
4WD Control Unit
EDS001VN
Check the following if CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1201] is displayed in self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II.
1. PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select SELF-DIAG RESULTS mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with CONSULT-II.
3. Touch ERASE.
4. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
5. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Is the CONTROLLER FAILURE [C1201] displayed?
YES >> Replace 4WD control unit. Refer to TF-54, "4WD CONTROL UNIT" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
ABS System
EDS001VO
Check the following if ABS SYSTEM [C1203] is displayed in self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II.
1. CHECK DTC WITH ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) OR ESP/TCS/ABS/
CONTROL UNIT
Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (without ESP) or ESP/TCS/ABS control unit (with ESP). Refer to BRC-27, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without ESP) or BRC-79, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS"
(with ESP).
Is any malfunction detected by self-diagnosis?
YES >> Check the malfunctioning system.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
TF-36
http://vnx.su
2. CHECK DTC AFTER DRIVING
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Start engine and drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) for at least 1 minute.
3. Make sure that ABS warning lamp turns OFF.
4. Perform erase self-diagnostic results. Refer to TF-33, "How to Erase Self-diagnostic Results" .
5. Stop vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Turn ignition switch ON.
7. Perform self-diagnosis.
Is the ABS SYSTEM [C1203] displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
TF
3. CHECK 4WD CONTROL UNIT

Check 4WD control unit input/output signal. Refer to TF-30, "4WD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference
Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check 4WD control unit pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector. If
any items are damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
4. CHECK DTC
Perform the self-diagnosis, after driving a vehicle for a while.

OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) (without ESP) or ESP/
TCS/ABS control unit (with ESP) again. Refer to BRC-27, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (without ESP) or
BRC-79, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" (with ESP).
4WD Solenoid
EDS002VH

Monitor item [Unit]
Condition
K
Display value
2WD mode
Engine speed: At idle
AUTO mode
Approx. 0.000A
LOCK mode
ETS SOLENOID [A]

Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or more constant
2WD mode
Approx. 0.000A
AUTO mode
Approx. 0.000 - 1.500A*
LOCK mode
Approx. 2.800A
Check the following if 4WD SOLENOID [C1204] is detected in self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II.
TF-37
http://vnx.su
1. CHECK 4WD SOLENOID SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Start engine.
Select DATA MONITOR mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with CONSULT-II.
Read out the value of ETS SOLENOID.
Condition
Display value
2WD mode
Engine speed: At idle
AUTO mode
Approx. 0.000A
LOCK mode
Engine speed: 3,000 rpm or
more constant
2WD mode
Approx. 0.000A
AUTO mode
Approx. 0.000 - 1.500A*
LOCK mode
Approx. 2.800A
SDIA1885E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check voltage between 4WD control unit harness connector terminal 9 and ground.
Connector
Terminal (wire color)
Voltage (Approx.)
M107
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
10A fuse (No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link
SDIA2306E
box)
3. CHECK 4WD SOLENOID CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Check resistance between 4WD control unit harness connector
terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
Resistance (Approx.)
M107
1 (OR) - 2 (L/W) (Ground)
2.45
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SDIA2307E
TF-38
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK 4WD SOLENOID

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect 4WD solenoid harness connector.
Check resistance between 4WD solenoid harness connector
B152 terminals 1 and 2.
1-2
: Approx. 2.45
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> 4WD solenoid is malfunctioning. Replace electric controlled coupling. Refer to RFD-22, "Disassembly and
Assembly" .
TF
SDIA3278E
5. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN 4WD CONTROL UNIT AND 4WD SOLENOID

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect 4WD control unit harness connector and 4WD solenoid harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminal 1 (OR) and
4WD solenoid harness connector B152 terminal 2 (LG).
4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminal 2 (L/W) and
4WD solenoid harness connector B152 terminal 1 (L/W).
1 (OR) - 2 (LG)
2 (L/W) - 1 (L/W)
: Continuity should exist.


OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace damaged parts.
SDIA3279E
Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
7. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace 4WD control unit.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.
2.

TF-39
http://vnx.su

3.
Check resistance between 4WD solenoid harness connector

B152 terminals 1 and 2.
1-2
4.
: Approx. 2.45
If NG, replace the electric controlled coupling. Refer to RFD-22,

"Disassembly and Assembly" .
SDIA3278E
4WD Actuator Relay
EDS001VQ

Monitor item
Condition
Display value
Engine stopped (Ignition switch: ON)
OFF
Engine running
ON
Check the following if 4WD ACTUATOR RLY [C1205] is displayed in self-diagnosis results of CONSULTII.
1. CHECK 4WD SOLENOID SYSTEM

Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TF-32, "SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE" .
Is the 4WD SOLENOID [C1204] displayed?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD solenoid. Refer to TF-37, "4WD Solenoid" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK 4WD ACTUATOR RELAY SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. (Do not start engine.)
2. Select DATA MONITOR mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with CONSULT-II.
3. Start engine and read out ON/OFF signaling action of ETS
ACTUATOR.
Monitor item
ETS ACTUATOR
Condition
Display value
Engine stopped (Ignition switch: ON)
OFF
Engine running
ON
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
SDIA1897E

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
TF-40
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK DTC

OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
TF
TF-41
http://vnx.su

4WD Mode Switch
EDS002VI

Monitor item
Condition
4WD MODE SW [2WD/AUTO/LOCK]
4WD mode switch
Display value
2WD
2WD
AUTO
AUTO
LOCK
LOCK
Check the following if MODE SW [C1209] is detected in self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II.
1. CHECK 4WD MODE SWITCH SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
With CONSULT-II
Select DATA MONITOR mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with CONSULT-II.
Read out monitor 4WD MODE SW with operating 4WD mode
switch.
Monitor item
4WD MODE SW
Condition
4WD mode switch
Display value
2WD
2WD
AUTO
AUTO
LOCK
LOCK
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SDIA1898E
2. CHECK 4WD MODE SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Operate 4WD mode switch and check continuity between 4WD
control unit harness connector terminals and ground.
Connector

5 (BR/W) - Ground
M107
12 (BR) - Ground
14 (L) - Ground
Condition
Continuity
4WD mode switch: AUTO
Yes
Except the above
No
4WD mode switch: 2WD
Yes
Except the above
No
4WD mode switch: LOCK
Yes
Except the above
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
TF-42
http://vnx.su
SDIA1893E
3. CHECK 4WD MODE SWITCH

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect 4WD mode switch harness connector.
mode switch harness connector terminals.
Connector
Terminal
2-4
M39
3-4
4-7
Condition
Continuity
Yes
Except the above
No
Yes
Except the above
No
Yes
Except the above
No
TF
SDIA2302E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace 4WD mode switch.
4. CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN 4WD CONTROL UNIT AND 4WD MODE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect 4WD control unit harness connector and 4WD mode switch harness connector.
Check continuity between the following terminals.
4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminal 5 (BR/W)
and 4WD mode switch harness connector M39 terminal 2 (BR/
W).
4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminal 12 (BR) and
4WD mode switch harness connector M39 terminal 7 (BR).
4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminal 14 (L) and
4WD mode switch harness connector M39 terminal 3 (L).
5 (BR/W) - 2 (BR/W)
12 (BR) - 7 (BR)
14 (L) - 3 (L)

K
SDIA2303E

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
TF-43
http://vnx.su
6. CHECK 4WD INDICATOR LAMP AND LOCK INDICATOR LAMP

1.
2.

Check 4WD indicator lamp and LOCK indicator lamp ON for approx. 1 second when turned ignition
switch ON.
Do 4WD indicator lamp and LOCK indicator lamp ON for approx. 1 second?
NO
>> Go to TF-46, "4WD Indicator Lamp and LOCK Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON for Approx. 1 Second When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON" .
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect 4WD mode switch harness connector.
mode switch harness connector terminals.
Connector
Terminal
2-4
M39
3-4
4-7
4.
Condition
Continuity
Yes
Except the above
No
Yes
Except the above
No
Yes
Except the above
No
SDIA2302E
If NG, replace 4WD mode switch.
Engine Control Signal
EDS002VJ
Check the following if ENGINE SIGNAL 1 [C1210] is displayed in self-diagnosis results of CONSULT-II.
1. CHECK DTC WITH ECM

Perform self-diagnosis with ECM. Refer to EC-52, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (QR engine
models with EURO-OBD), EC-562, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (QR engine models without
EURO-OBD), EC-991, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (YD engine models with EURO-OBD), EC1359, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" (YD engine models without EURO-OBD).
NO
>> GO TO 2.

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
any item is damaged, repair or replace damaged parts.
3. CHECK DTC
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis with ECM again. Refer to EC-52, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (QR engine models with EURO-OBD), EC-562, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information"
(QR engine models without EURO-OBD), EC-991, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (YD
TF-44
http://vnx.su

engine models with EURO-OBD), EC-1359, "Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" (YD engine models without EURO-OBD).
CAN Communication Line
EDS002VK
Check the following if CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] is detected in self-diagnosis results of CONSULTII.
1. CHECK CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON and start engine.
2. Select SELF-DIAG RESULTS mode for ALL MODE AWD/4WD with in CONSULT-II.
3. Perform the self-diagnosis.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] displayed?
YES >> Print out CONSULT-II screen and go to TF-14, "CAN
Communication Unit" .
NO
>> INSPECTION END
TF
G
SDIA1850E
TF-45
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS

PFP:00007
4WD Indicator Lamp and LOCK Indicator Lamp Do Not Turn ON for Approx. 1
Second When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON
EDS001VT
1. CHECK SYSTEM FOR CAN COMMUNICATION LINE

Is the CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] displayed?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for CAN communication line. Refer to TF-14, "CAN Communication
Unit" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK 4WD CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connector
Voltage (Approx.)
7 (GY) - Ground
M107
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
SDIA2304E
5.
6.

Connector
M107
Voltage (Approx.)
7 (GY) - Ground
0V
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SDIA2321E
10A fuse (No. 8 located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link
box)
TF-46
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK 4WD CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.


OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
TF
SDIA2305E

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
5. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace unified meter control unit assembly. Refer to DI-32, "Disassembly and Assembly for
Combination Meter" .
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to
ON
EDS001VU

Unit" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
TF-47
http://vnx.su
3. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds after Engine Started
EDS001VV
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK 4WD CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Connector
Voltage (Approx.)
7 (GY) - Ground
M107
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
SDIA2304E
5.
6.

Connector
M107
Voltage (Approx.)
7 (GY) - Ground
0V
9 (P/L) - Ground
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SDIA2321E
10A fuse (No. 8 located in the fuse block (J/B) or No. 37, located in the fuse and fusible link
box)
TF-48
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK 4WD CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.


OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
TF
SDIA2305E

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
5. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
4WD Mode Cannot Be Switched after Engine Is Started
EDS001VW
1. CHECK 4WD WARNING LAMP

Confirm 4WD warning lamp.
Does 4WD warning lamp turn on?
YES >> Go to TF-48, "4WD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds after Engine Started" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD MODE SWITCH

Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD mode switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4WD Mode Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG

Unit" .
NO
>> GO TO 4.
TF-49
http://vnx.su

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
5. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
Heavy Tight-corner Braking Symptom Occurs When The Vehicle Is Driven in

AUTO Mode and The Steering Wheel Is Turned Fully to Either Side after The
Engine Is Started
EDS001VX
NOTE:
Light tight-corner braking symptom may occur depending on driving conditions in AUTO mode.
This is not malfunction.
Heavy tight-corner braking symptom occurs when vehicle is driven in the following conditions:
LOCK mode, steering wheel is turned fully to either sides, and accelerator pedal was depressed.

Unit" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD MODE SWITCH

Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD mode switch system. Refer to TF-42, "4WD Mode Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. Refer to EC-52, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (QR engine models with EURO-OBD), EC-562, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (QR engine models without EUROOBD), EC-991, "Emission-related Diagnostic Information" (YD engine models with EURO-OBD) or EC-1359,
"Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)" (YD engine models without EURO-OBD).
NO
>> GO TO 4.
TF-50
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK SYSTEM FOR 4WD SOLENOID
Perform trouble diagnosis for 4WD solenoid system. Refer to TF-37, "4WD Solenoid" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
5. CHECK ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING

2. Set the selector lever (shift lever) to N (neutral) position and disengage the parking brake.
TF
3. Lift up the vehicle.
4. Rotate the propeller shaft by hand.
5. Hold rear wheel of right and left lightly.
E
Does rear wheel rotate?
YES >> Replace electric controlled coupling for mechanical malfunction (clutch sticking etc.). Refer to
RFD-22, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
F
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 7.
Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
Vehicle Does Not Enter 4WD Mode Even Though 4WD Warning Lamp Turned to
OFF
EDS001VY
CAUTION:
Make sure that parking brake is securely released if the symptom has occurred at vehicle speed of 10
km/h (6 MPH) or more.
TF-51
http://vnx.su

1. CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL

With CONSULT-II
3. Operate parking brake and read out monitor P BRAKE SW.
Monitor item
P BRAKE SW
Condition
Display value
Parking brake operated
ON
Parking brake not operated
OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
Parking brake switch
SDIA1933E
Brake warning lamp circuit. Refer to DI-34, "Wiring
Diagram WARN /LHD Models" or DI-42, "Wiring Diagram WARN /RHD Models" .
2. CHECK 4WD SOLENOID

Check 4WD solenoid. Refer to TF-39, "COMPONENT INSPECTION" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace electric controlled coupling for malfunction of 4WD solenoid. Refer to RFD-22, "Disassembly and Assembly" .

Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
4. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace electric controlled coupling for mechanical malfunction (mechanical engagement of
clutch is not possible.). Refer to RFD-22, "Disassembly and Assembly" .
While Driving, 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly (When Flashing in Approx.
1 Minute and Then Turning OFF)
EDS001VZ
NOTE:
This symptom protects drivetrain parts when a heavy load is applied to the electric controlled coupling and
multiple disc clutch temperature increases. It is not a malfunction.
When this symptom occurs, stop vehicle and allow it to idle for some times. Flashing will stop and system will
be restored.
TF-52
http://vnx.su

While Driving, 4WD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly (When Continuing to Flash
until Turning Ignition Switch OFF)
EDS001W0
NOTE:
1. CHECK TIRE
C
Check the following.
Tire pressure
TF
Wear condition
Longitudinal tire size (There shall be no difference of tire size between front and rear tires.)
OK or NG
E
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Drive at vehicle speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for 5 seconds or more after repairing or
replacing damaged parts. (Initialize improper size tire information.)
F
CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF TIRE DIAMETER
2.
With CONSULT-II
1. Start engine.
2. Drive at 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for approx. 200 seconds.
4. Check monitor DIS-TIRE MONI.
Display of DIS-TIRE MONI
0-4mm>>INSPECTION END
Except for 0-4mm>>GO TO 3.
K
SDIA1900E
Values" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
4. SYMPTOM CHECK
Check again.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
TF-53
http://vnx.su
4WD CONTROL UNIT

4WD CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
PFP:41650
EDS001W4
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove front speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove driver box. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Disconnect 4WD control unit connector.
Remove 4WD control unit.
SDIA1881E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
TF-54
http://vnx.su
SIDE OIL SEAL

SIDE OIL SEAL
PFP:33142
A
EDS0004S
NOTE:
Transfer side oil seal is attached to transaxle assembly. Replace it when transfer assembly is removed
from vehicle.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove RH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove side shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gear ring oil seal inside of transfer.
Remove oil seal with a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage adapter case.
TF
G
TFB0202D
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. As shown in the figure, install oil seal so that it becomes flush with the case end
surface, using suitable drift.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seal.
When installing, do not incline oil seal.
Install side shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage gear ring oil seal inside of transfer.
Install RH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Check oil level. Refer to TF-10, "Inspection" .
K
PDIA0928E
TF-55
http://vnx.su
AIR BREATHER HOSE

AIR BREATHER HOSE
Components
PFP:31098
EDS001YM
SDIA1859J
1.
Air breather hose
2.
Transfer assembly
3.
Breather tube
EDS0004T
Note the following, when removal and installation.

CAUTION:
Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the air breather hose caused by bending or
winding when installing it.
Be sure to insert air breather hose into breather tube (metal connector) until hose end reaches the tube's base.
SCIA2663J
Be sure to insert the hose till the paint mark.
SDIA1824J
TF-56
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
PFP:33100
A
EDS0004U
COMPONENTS
B
TF
PDIA0927E
1.
Transaxle assembly
2.
Transfer assembly
3.
Side shaft
4.
Transfer gusset
(YD engine models only)
5.
Grommet
6.
Insulator
7.
Center member
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-2, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove RH drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove side shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" .
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil seal.
Remove air breather hose. Refer to TF-56, "AIR BREATHER HOSE" .
Remove transfer gusset (YD engine models only).
Support transaxle assembly with a jack.
Remove center member. Refer to EM-82, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" (QR engine models), EM-219,
"ENGINE ASSEMBLY" (YD engine models).
Remove suspension member. Refer to FSU-12, "FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER" .
Remove rear engine mounting bracket. Refer to EM-82, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" (QR engine models),
EM-219, "ENGINE ASSEMBLY" (YD engine models).
Support transfer assembly with a jack.
Remove bolts fixing transaxle assembly and transfer assembly.
Remove the transfer assembly from vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage oil seal of transaxle.
TF-57
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
When installing the transfer to the transaxle, install the mounting

bolts following the standard below.
Bolt No.
Quantity
65 (2.56)
40 (1.57)
Bolt length
mm (in)
Tightening torque
Nm (kg-m, ft-lb)
34.3 (3.5, 25)
CAUTION:
SDIA1178E
When installing transfer to transaxle, be careful not to damage oil seal of transaxle.
When installing transfer gusset, tighten mounting bolts with the specified torque. Refer to TF-57, "COMPONENTS" . (YD engine models only)
After the installation, check the oil level and oil leakage. Refer to TF-10, "Inspection" .
TF-58
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
EDS001YQ
COMPONENTS
TF
SDIA3122E
1.
Pinion lock nut
2.
Companion flange
3.
Pinion sleeve oil seal
4.
Pinion rear bearing
5.
Dust cover
6.
Pinion sleeve
7.
O-ring
8.
Collapsible spacer
9.
Pinion front bearing
10. Drive pinion
11. Pinion sleeve shim
12. Adapter case oil seal
13. Drain plug
14. Adapter case
15. Oil gutter
16. O-ring
17. Gear ring bearing adjusting shim

(Adapter case side)
18. Gear ring bearing (Adapter case

side)
19. Gear ring oil seal
20. Gear ring
21. Drive gear
22. Gear ring bearing (Transfer case

side)
23. Gear ring bearing adjusting shim

(Transfer case side)
24. Oil defense
25. Filler plug
26. Transfer case oil seal
27. Transfer case
28. Breather tube
29. Plug
TF-59
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY INSPECTION
Backlash
1.
2.
3.
Install a bolt to the companion flange.

Fit a dial indicator onto the bolt.
Measure the circumference backlash of the companion flange,
and make sure it satisfies the standard below.
Backlash
: 0.13 - 0.19 mm (0.0051 - 0.0075 in)
If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to

check and adjust each part.
SDIA1937J
Tooth Contact
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the pinion sleeve assembly. Refer to TF-64, "Pinion Sleeve Assembly" .
Apply red lead to the drive gear.
CAUTION:
Apply red lead to both the faces of 3 to 4 gears at 4 locations evenly spaced on the drive gear.
Install the pinion sleeve shims and pinion sleeve assembly.
Refer to TF-74, "Pinion Sleeve Assembly" .
Remove the plug on the upper side of the transfer case.
When installing plug, apply recommended sealant on screw
part, and tighten it at the specified torque. Refer to TF-59,
"COMPONENTS" .
TFB0212D
5.
Rotate the companion flange back and forth several times, and
check the drive pinion gear to drive gear tooth contact by viewing from the plug hole.
SDIA1938E
TF-60
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
A
TF
SDIA0520E
6.
If tooth contact is poorly adjusted, adjust pinion height (dimension X) in the following manner.
L
SDIA0517E
TF-61
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
If the tooth contact is near the face (face contact), or near the
heal (heel contact), thin the pinion sleeve shims to move the
drive pinion closer to the drive gear.
Refer to TF-77, "Pinion Sleeve Shim" .
SDIA0518E
If the tooth contact is near the flank (flank contact), or near the
toe (toe contact), thicken the pinion sleeve shims to move the
drive pinion farther from the drive gear.
Refer to TF-77, "Pinion Sleeve Shim" .
SDIA0519E
Pinion Bearing Preload Torque

1.
2.
3.
Rotate the companion flange back and forth 2 to 3 times. Check for unusual noise, rotation malfunction,
and other malfunctions.
Rotate the companion flange at least 20 times to check for smooth operation of the bearing.
TF-62
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
4.
Using the preload gauge, measure the preload torque of the pinion bearing.
Tool number
: ST3127S000
Preload torque
: 0.10 - 0.39 Nm (0.01 - 0.04 kg-m, 1 - 3 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Every rotational part shall rotate smoothly with the specified gear oil.
If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble the
pinion sleeve assembly to check and adjust each part.
C
SDIA2076E
TF
Total Preload Torque

1.
Measure pinion bearing preload torque (P1 ). Refer to TF-62, "Pinion Bearing Preload Torque" .
Pinion bearing preload torque (P1)

: 0.10 - 0.39 Nm (0.01 - 0.04 kg-m, 1 - 3 in-lb)
2.
3.
4.
Install the pinion sleeve shims and pinion sleeve assembly.

Rotate the companion flange at least 20 times to check for smooth operation of the bearing.
Using the preload gauge, measure the total preload torque.
Tool number
: ST3127S000
Total preload torque

With all oil seals
: P1 + 0.16 - 0.22 Nm (0.016 - 0.023 kg-m, 1.4 - 1.9 in-lb)
Without transfer case oil seal and adapter case oil seal
: P1 + 0.06 - 0.12 Nm (0.006 - 0.013 kg-m, 0.6 - 1.1 in-lb)
If measured value is out of the specification, disassemble it to

SDIA2077E
check and adjust each part. If measuring the total preload
torque after the disassembly, measure it with the transfer case oil seals and gear ring oil seals
removed, then install the oil seals.
Companion Flange Runout

1.
2.
Fit a dial indicator onto the companion flange face (inner side of
the propeller shaft mounting bolt holes).
Rotate the companion flange to check for runout.
Runout limit
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

M
Fit a test indicator to the inner side of the companion flange

(socket diameter).
Runout limit
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in)

SDIA2078E
If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure
below to adjust.
While changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion gear by 90 at a time, check runout
and determine which phase angle minimizes the runout.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace the companion
flange.
If the runout is out of the specification after replacement of companion flange, adjust the assembly status
of the pinion bearings and drive pinion gear, or replace the pinion bearings.
TF-63
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
Pinion Sleeve Assembly
1.
Remove pinion sleeve mounting bolts.
SDIA1803J
2.
3.
4.
Using the plastic hammer, tap companion flange to remove pinion sleeve assembly.
Remove the pinion sleeve shim.
Remove the pinion lock nut.
SDIA1861J
5.
Using the drift, remove drive pinion assembly from pinion sleeve
with a press.
Tool number
6.
7.
: ST33220000
Remove companion flange.

Remove the O-ring from pinion sleeve.
SDIA1806E
8.
9.
Using the flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the pinion sleeve oil

seal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the pinion sleeve.
Remove the pinion rear bearing inner race.
TFB0286D
TF-64
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
10. Using the puller, remove the pinion rear bearing outer race.
Tool number
: KV381054S0
C
SDIA2079E
TF
11. Using the puller, remove the pinion front bearing outer race.
Tool number
: KV381054S0
12. Remove dust cover.

F
G
SDIA1558E
13. Remove the collapsible spacer from the drive pinion.

14. Using the replacer, press the pinion front bearing inner race out
of the drive pinion.
Tool number
: ST30031000
SDIA1559E
Adapter Case
1.
Remove the adapter case mounting bolts.
SDIA1862J
TF-65
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
2.
3.
Using the plastic hammer, tap the adapter case to remove.

Remove the O-ring.
TFB0290D
4.
Using the flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the adapter case oil

seal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the adapter case.
TFB0291D
5.
Using the brass rod, tap the gear ring bearing adjusting shim
from the cutout on the adapter case to remove the gear ring
bearing adjusting shim and gear ring bearing outer race.
SDIA0529E
6.
7.
Remove the oil gutter.

Remove the drain plug.
SDIA0530E
Drive Gear Assembly

1.
2.
Remove the adapter case. Refer to TF-65, "Adapter Case" .

Remove the drive gear assembly from the transfer case.
TF-66
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
3.
Using the drift and replacer, remove the gear ring bearing inner
race (adapter case side) on the gear ring.
Tool number
: ST33200000
B
C
SDIA1560E
TF
4.
Using the drift and puller, remove the gear ring bearing inner
race (transfer case side) on the gear ring.
Tool number
: ST33061000
G
SDIA1561E
5.
6.
Remove the drive gear mounting bolts.

Using the plastic hammer, tap the drive gear to remove the drive
gear from the gear ring.
SDIA1807J
7.
Using the puller, remove the gear ring oil seal from the gear ring.
Tool number
: KV381054S0
SDIA1808E
Transfer Case
1.
2.
3.
Remove the adapter case. Refer to TF-65, "Adapter Case" .
Remove the drive gear assembly from the transfer case. Refer to TF-66, "Drive Gear Assembly" .
TF-67
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
4.
Using the flat-bladed screwdriver, remove the transfer case oil

seal.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the transfer case.
TFB0297D
5.
Remove the oil defense.
SDIA1533E
6.
7.
Using the brass rod, tap the gear ring bearing adjusting shim
evenly from the 2 cutouts on the transfer case to remove the
gear ring bearing adjusting shim and gear ring bearing outer
race.
Remove the filler plug, plug and breather tube.
SDIA0536E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Gears
Check the gear faces and shaft for wear, cracks, damage, and seizure.
CAUTION:
If a malfunction is detected on the drive gear or drive pinion, replace the drive gear and drive pinion as
a set.
Bearings
Check for seizure, peeling, wear, corrosion, sticking/abnormal noise/roughness in hand turning, and other
damage.
CAUTION:
When replacing the bearing, always replace the inner race and outer race as a pair.
Washers and Shims
Check for seizure, damage, and unusual wear.
Oil Seals
Discard old oil seals, replace with new ones.

If wear, deterioration of adherence (sealing force of lips), or damage is detected on the lips, replace them.
TF-68
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
SELECTING ADJUSTING SHIMS
A
Measurement points
TF
SDIA1179E
Gear Ring Bearing Adjusting Shim (Transfer Case Side)

1.
2.
Measure the points F, H, I, R and U shown in the measurement points.

Convert the values F, H, I, R and U according to the standards below.
F:
H:
I:
R:
U:
3.
4.
Value obtained by subtracting 163.00 mm (6.42 in) from

the reading [in increments of 0.01 mm (0.0004 in)].
Check dimension Z on the drive gear side face.

NOTE:
Dimension Z indicates the difference between the optimum engagement and the standard dimensions in
increments of 0.01mm (0.0004 in) written on the drive gear side face.
Use the formula below to calculate gear ring bearing adjusting shim (transfer case side) thickness T1 .
T1 = (I - F + H + Z - U - R) 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) + 1.49 mm (0.0587 in)
5.
Select the gear ring bearing adjusting shim (transfer case side).
For information on selecting an adjusting shim, refer to TF-76, "Gear ring Bearing Adjusting Shim
(Transfer Case Side)" .
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
If no adjusting shim with the calculated value is available, select the thicker and closest one.
Gear Ring Bearing Adjusting Shim (Adapter Case Side)

1.
2.
Measure the points F, H, J, K, U and V shown in the measurement points.

Convert the values F, H, J, K, U and V according to the standards below.
TF-69
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
F:
H:
J:
K:
U:
V:
3.
4.

Check dimension Z on the drive gear side face.

NOTE:
Dimension Z indicates the difference between the optimum engagement and the standard dimensions in
increments of 0.01mm (0.0004 in) written on the drive gear side face.
Use the formula below to calculate gear ring bearing adjusting shim (adapter case side) thickness T2 .
T2 = (K + F - H - Z + U - J - V) 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) + 1.49 mm (0.0587 in)
5.
Select the gear ring bearing adjusting shim (adapter case side).
For information on selecting an adjusting shim, refer to TF-77, "Gear ring Bearing Adjusting Shim
(Adapter Case Side)" .
CAUTION:
Only one adjusting shim can be selected.
If no adjusting shim with the calculated value is available, select the thicker and closest one.
Pinion Sleeve Shim

1.
2.
3.
Measure the points L, N and Q shown in the measurement points.

Check the dimension S written on the gear end of the drive pinion.
NOTE:
The dimension S indicates the difference between the optimum engagement and the standard dimensions
in increments of 0.01 mm (0.0004 in) written on the gear end of the drive pinion.
Use the formula below to calculate pinion sleeve shim thickness T3 .
T3 = [74.6 mm (2.937 in) + S] + N + Q - L
4.
Select the pinion sleeve shim.

For information on selecting a pinion sleeve shim, refer to TF-77, "Pinion Sleeve Shim" .
CAUTION:
Only one pinion sleeve shim can be selected.
ASSEMBLY
Transfer Case
1.
Select the gear ring bearing adjusting shim (transfer case side). Refer to TF-69, "SELECTING ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
TF-70
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
2.
Using the drifts, install the selected gear ring bearing adjusting
shim (transfer case side) and gear ring bearing outer race
(transfer case side).
Tool number
: ST30720000
B
C
SDIA3171E
TF
3.
Install the oil defense, and tighten the mounting bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS" . The clearance between the oil defense and transfer case (dimension A)
should be the following.
Clearance between oil defense and transfer case

Dimension A
: 1.0 - 3.5 mm (0.04 - 0.138 in)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the mounting bolts.
G
TFB0283D
4.
Using the drift, drive the transfer case oil seal until it becomes
flush with the case end.
Tool number
: ST30720000
CAUTION:
When checking the total preload torque, measure it without the oil seal, then install the oil seal.
Do not reuse the oil seal.
Apply multi-purpose grease onto oil seal lips, and gear
oil onto the circumference of the oil seal.
SDIA1564E
5. Apply recommended sealant to filler plug and plug before installing them to the transfer case. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS"
.
6. Apply recommended sealant to breather tube and install it to the transfer case.
7. Install the drive gear assembly. Refer to TF-71, "Drive Gear Assembly" .
8. Install the adapter case. Refer to TF-72, "Adapter Case" .
9. Install the pinion sleeve assembly. Refer to TF-74, "Pinion Sleeve Assembly" .
10. Check backlash, preload torque, tooth contact, and companion flange runout. Refer to TF-60, "ASSEMBLY INSPECTION" .
CAUTION:
Measure the total preload torque without the oil seal.
Drive Gear Assembly

1.
Using the drift, drive the gear ring oil seal into the gear ring.
Tool number
: ST33230000
CAUTION:
The oil seal back position after the installation shall be
56.5 mm (2.22 in) from the gear ring end.
SDIA1809E
TF-71
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
2.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Apply recommended thread locking sealant into the thread hole

for the drive gear.
Completely clean and degrease the drive gear back face, thread
holes, and drive gear mounting bolts.
Apply recommended thread locking sealant onto the first and
second threads under the thread hole chamfering of the drive
gear on 3 or more different points.
Install the drive gear to gear ring, and apply anti-corrosive oil
onto threads and seats on the mounting bolts, and then tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS" .
SDIA0541E
CAUTION:
Temporary installation before tightening the bolts through to the completion of the tightening
should be within 90 seconds.
If the thread locking sealant is applied aside, quickly wipe it off.
Apply gear oil to gear ring bearing inner race (transfer case
side). Using the drifts, install gear ring bearing inner race.
Tool number
A: ST30720000
B: ST27863000
C: KV40101630
SDIA1566E
5.
Apply gear oil to gear ring bearing inner race (adapter case
side). Using the drifts, install gear ring bearing inner race.
Tool number
6.
7.
8.
A: ST30720000
B: KV38102510
Install the drive gear assembly to the transfer case.

Install the adapter case.
Check backlash, preload torque, tooth contact, and companion
flange runout. Refer to TF-60, "ASSEMBLY INSPECTION" .
CAUTION:
SDIA1810E
Adapter Case
1.
2.
3.
Select the gear ring bearing adjusting shim (adapter case side). Refer to TF-69, "SELECTING ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
Install the oil gutter.
Using the drifts, install the selected gear ring bearing adjusting
shim (adapter case side) and gear ring bearing outer race
(adapter case side).
Tool number
: ST30720000
SDIA3172E
TF-72
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
4.
5.
6.
7.
Using the suitable drift, drive the adapter case oil seal until it
becomes flush with the case end.
CAUTION:
When checking the total preload torque, measure it without the oil seal, then install the oil seal.
Apply recommended sealant on drain plug and install it to the
adapter case. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS" .
Apply multi-purpose grease lightly and evenly onto an O-ring,
and install it to the adapter case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the O-ring.
Install the adapter case to the transfer case, and apply anti-corrosive oil onto threads and seats on the mounting bolts. Tighten
to the specified torque.
Bolt symbol
8.
Bolt length
mm (in)
35 (1.38)
30 (1.18)
C
PDIA0922E
TF
Tightening torque
Nm (kg-m, ft-lb)
15.2 (1.6, 11)
Check backlash, preload torque, tooth contact, and companion

flange runout. Refer to TF-60, "ASSEMBLY INSPECTION" .
CAUTION:
H
SDIA2318E
TF-73
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
Pinion Sleeve Assembly
1.
2.
3.
Select the pinion sleeve shim. Refer to TF-69, "SELECTING ADJUSTING SHIMS" .
Install dust cover.
Using the drift, install the pinion rear bearing outer race.
Tool number
: KV38100300
SDIA1569E
4.
Using the drifts, install the pinion front bearing outer race.
Tool number
A: ST33400001
B: ST30901000
SDIA1570E
5.
Apply gear oil to pinion front bearing inner race and mating position on the drive pinion. Using a drift, install pinion front bearing
inner race to the drive pinion.
Tool number
6.
7.
: ST30901000
Install a collapsible spacer to the drive pinion.

CAUTION:
Do not reuse the collapsible spacer.
Apply gear oil to pinion rear bearing inner race and install it to
the pinion sleeve.
SDIA1571E
8.
Using the drift, install pinion sleeve oil seal to the pinion sleeve.
Tool number
: ST33400001
CAUTION:
SDIA1572E
TF-74
http://vnx.su
TRANSFER ASSEMBLY
9.
Using the drift and press in the companion flange.

Tool number
: ST33200000
10. Apply anti-corrosion oil onto threads and seat of the pinion lock
nut and adjust the pinion lock nut tightening torque and pinion
bearing preload torque (P1 ), using a preload gauge.
Pinion lock nut tightening torque

: 128 - 294 Nm (13 - 29 kg-m, 95 - 216 ft-lb)
Pinion bearing preload torque (P1 )
: 0.40 - 0.78 Nm (0.04 - 0.08 kg-m, 4 - 6 in-lb)
11.
12.
13.
14.
C
SDIA1811E
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the pinion lock nut.
Adjust the lower limit of the pinion lock nut tightening torque first.
While confirming the preload torque, tighten pinion lock nut by 5 to 10. Because preload will
increase suddenly.
If specified preload torque is exceeded, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten again. Never
loosen the pinion lock nut for further preload torque adjustment.
After the adjustment, rotate the companion flange back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for
unusual noise, rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions.
Apply multi-purpose grease lightly and evenly onto an O-ring, and install it to the pinion sleeve.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the old O-ring.
Assemble the selected pinion sleeve shim.
Install the pinion sleeve assembly, and apply anti-corrosive oil onto threads and seats on the mounting
bolts. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to TF-59, "COMPONENTS" .
Check backlash, preload torque, tooth contact and companion flange runout. Refer to TF-60, "ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION" .
The total preload torque is as follows:
Total preload torque
With all oil seals installed
: P1 + 0.45 - 0.47 Nm (0.045 - 0.048 kg-m, 3.9 - 4.1 in-lb)
: P1 + 0.35 - 0.37 Nm (0.035 - 0.038 kg-m, 3.1 - 3.2 in-lb)
TF
TF-75
http://vnx.su
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)

General Specifications
Applied model
PFP:00030
EDS000I6
QR20DE
QR25DE
Transfer model
TY20A
Oil capacity (Approx.)
0.31 (1/2)
(lmp pt)
Gear ratio
Number of teeth
YD22DDTi
0.404
Drive pinion
17
Drive gear
42
Inspection and Adjustment
EDS0004Y
PRELOAD TORQUE BEFORE DISASSEMBLY

Item
Specification [Nm (kg-m, in-lb)]
Pinion bearing (P1 )
0.10 - 0.39 (0.01 - 0.04, 1 - 3)
Gear ring bearing to pinion

bearing (Total preload)
With all oil seals
P1 + 0.16 - 0.22 (0.016 - 0.023, 1.4 - 1.9)
P1 + 0.06 - 0.12 (0.006 - 0.013, 0.6 - 1.1)
PRELOAD TORQUE AFTER DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY

Item
Specification [Nm (kg-m, in-lb)]
Pinion bearing (P1 )
0.40 - 0.78 (0.04 - 0.08, 4 - 6)
Gear ring bearing to pinion

bearing (Total preload)
With all oil seals
P1 + 0.45 - 0.47 (0.045 - 0.048, 3.9 - 4.1)
P1 + 0.35 - 0.37 (0.035 - 0.038, 3.1 - 3.2)
BACKLASH
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
Drive gear to drive pinion gear
0.13 - 0.19 (0.0051 - 0.0075)
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT

Unit: mm (in)
Item
Runout limit
Companion flange face
0.1 (0.004)
Inner side of the companion flange
0.1 (0.004)
SELECTIVE PARTS
Gear ring Bearing Adjusting Shim (Transfer Case Side)
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
0.80 (0.0315)
0.83 (0.0327)
0.86 (0.0339)
0.89 (0.0350)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.95 (0.0374)
0.98 (0.0386)
1.01 (0.0398)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.07 (0.0421)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.13 (0.0445)
1.16 (0.0457)
1.19 (0.0469)
Part number*
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
AD300
AD301
AD302
AD303
AD304
AD305
AD306
AD307
AD308
AD309
AD310
AD311
AD312
AD313
Thickness
Part number*
1.22 (0.0480)
1.25 (0.0492)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.31 (0.0516)
1.34 (0.0528)
1.37 (0.0539)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.43 (0.0563)
1.46 (0.0575)
1.49 (0.0587)
1.52 (0.0598)
1.55 (0.0610)
1.58 (0.0622)
1.61 (0.0634)
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
TF-76
http://vnx.su
AD314
AD315
AD316
AD317
AD318
AD319
AD320
AD321
AD322
AD323
AD324
AD360
AD361
AD362
Thickness
1.64 (0.0646)
1.67 (0.0657)
1.70 (0.0669)
1.73 (0.0681)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.79 (0.0705)
1.82 (0.0717)
1.85 (0.0728)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.91 (0.0752)
1.94 (0.0764)
1.97 (0.0776)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.03 (0.0799)
Part number*
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
AD363
AD364
AD365
AD366
AD367
AD368
AD369
AD370
AD371
AD372
AD373
AD374
AD375
AD376

Gear ring Bearing Adjusting Shim (Adapter Case Side)
Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
0.80 (0.0315)
0.83 (0.0327)
0.86 (0.0339)
0.89 (0.0350)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.95 (0.0374)
0.98 (0.0386)
1.01 (0.0398)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.07 (0.0421)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.13 (0.0445)
1.16 (0.0457)
1.19 (0.0469)
1.22 (0.0480)
Part number*
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
33147
5V200
5V201
5V202
5V203
5V204
5V205
5V206
5V207
5V208
5V209
5V210
5V211
5V212
5V213
5V214
Thickness
Part number*
1.25 (0.0492)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.31 (0.0516)
1.34 (0.0528)
1.37 (0.0539)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.43 (0.0563)
1.46 (0.0575)
1.49 (0.0587)
1.52 (0.0598)
1.55 (0.0610)
1.58 (0.0622)
1.61 (0.0634)
1.64 (0.0646)
1.67 (0.0657)
33147
33147
33147
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
5V215
5V216
5V217
5V218
5V219
5V220
5V221
5V222
5V223
5V224
5V260
5V261
5V262
5V263
5V264
Thickness
1.70 (0.0669)
1.73 (0.0681)
1.76 (0.0693)
1.79 (0.0705)
1.82 (0.0717)
1.85 (0.0728)
1.88 (0.0740)
1.91 (0.0752)
1.94 (0.0764)
1.97 (0.0776)
2.00 (0.0787)
2.03 (0.0799)
2.06 (0.0811)
2.09 (0.0811)
Part number*
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
33123
5V265
5V266
5V267
5V268
5V269
5V270
5V271
5V272
5V273
5V274
5V275
5V276
5V277
5V278
TF
Pinion Sleeve Shim

Unit: mm (in)
Thickness
0.77 (0.0303)
0.80 (0.0315)
0.83 (0.0327)
0.86 (0.0339)
0.89 (0.0350)
0.92 (0.0362)
0.95 (0.0374)
Part number*
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
5V214
5V200
5V201
5V202
5V203
5V204
5V205
Thickness
Part number*
0.98 (0.0386)
1.01 (0.0398)
1.04 (0.0409)
1.07 (0.0421)
1.10 (0.0433)
1.13 (0.0445)
1.16 (0.0457)
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
5V206
5V207
5V208
5V209
5V210
5V211
5V212
Thickness
1.19 (0.0469)
1.22 (0.0480)
1.25 (0.0492)
1.28 (0.0504)
1.31 (0.0516)
1.34 (0.0528)
Part number*
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
33155
5V213
5V215
5V216
5V217
5V218
5V219
TF-77
http://vnx.su
TF-78
http://vnx.su
PROPELLER SHAFT
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
PR
PROPELLER SHAFT
PR
CONTENTS
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT ...................................... 3
On-Vehicle Inspection .............................................. 3
APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION .......... 3
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION ........................ 3

Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
COMPONENTS ..................................................... 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
INSPECTION ........................................................ 4
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 6
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ........ 7
General Specifications .............................................. 7
Journal Axial Play ..................................................... 7
Propeller Shaft Runout ............................................. 7
PR-1
http://vnx.su
Symptom
Vibration
PR-3
NVH in RFD section
NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU, and RSU section

NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in FAX and RAX section
NVH in BR section
NVH in PS section
Center bearing mounting (insulator) cracks, damage or deterioration

Excessive joint angle
Rotation imbalance
Excessive runout
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
Shake
PR-6
Noise
Excessive center bearing axial end play
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS

Center bearing improper installation
Reference page
Uneven rotating torque

: Applicable
http://vnx.su
PR-2
PFP:00003
EDS0027A
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT

On-Vehicle Inspection
PFP:37000
A
EDS0027B
APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION
Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.
If center bearing is noisy or damaged, replace propeller shaft assembly.
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION

C
If vibration is present at high speed, inspect propeller shaft runout first.

1. Measure propeller shaft runout at runout measuring points by
rotating final drive companion flange with hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit
PR
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
F
PDIA0421E
Propeller shaft runout measuring points

Dimension
A: 469.5 mm (18.48 in)
B: 429 mm (16.89 in)
2.
3.
4.
If runout still exceeds specifications, separate propeller shaft at

final drive companion flange or transfer companion flange; then
rotate companion flange 90, 180, 270 degrees and install propeller shaft.
Check runout again. If runout still exceeds specifications,
replace propeller shaft assembly.
Check the vibration by driving vehicle.
PDIA0174E
PR-3
http://vnx.su

EDS0027C
COMPONENTS
PDIA0198E
1.
Center bearing mounting bracket

(Upper)
4.
Propeller shaft (2nd shaft)
2.
Propeller shaft (1st shaft)
3.
Center bearing mounting bracket

(Lower)
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Move A/T selector lever to N range position or set M/T shift lever to neutral position.
Release parking brake.
Put matching marks onto propeller shaft flange yoke and final
drive and transfer companion flanges.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage propeller
shaft flange and companion flanges.
Loosen mounting nuts of center bearing mount brackets.
Remove fixing nuts and bolts from propeller shaft companion
flanges.
Remove center bearing mounting bracket fixing nuts.
Remove propeller shaft.
SDIA1822E
CAUTION:
If constant velocity joint was bent during propeller shaft assembly removal, installation, or transportation, its boot may be damaged. Wrap boot interference area to metal part with shop cloth or
rubber to protect boot from breakage.
INSPECTION
Inspect propeller shaft runout at measuring points. If runout

exceeds specifications, replace propeller shaft assembly.
: 0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
PDIA0420E
PR-4
http://vnx.su

Propeller shaft runout measuring points
Dimension
A: 469.5 mm (18.48 in)
B: 429 mm (16.89 in)
C
PDIA0174E
Journal axial play
PR
As shown in the figure, while fixing yoke on one side, check axial
play of joint. If outside the standard, replace propeller shaft
assembly.
: 0 mm (0 in)
Check propeller shaft for bend and damage. If damage is

detected, replace propeller shaft assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble joints.
Check center bearing for noise and damage. If noise or damage
is detected, replace propeller shaft assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not disassemble center bearing.
G
PDA0005D
PR-5
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
Align matching marks to install propeller shaft to final drive and transfer companion flanges, and then
tighten to specified torque. Refer to PR-4, "COMPONENTS"
When installing center bearing, position bearing cushion overlap

upward as shown in the figure.
Install center bearing mounting bracket (Lower) with its arrow

mark facing forward.
Adjust position of mounting bracket sliding back and forth to prevent play in thrust direction of center bearing insulator. Install
bracket to vehicle.
After assembly, perform a driving test to check propeller shaft

vibration. If vibration occurred, separate propeller shaft from
final drive or transfer. Reinstall companion flange after rotating it
by 90, 180, 270 degrees. Then perform driving test and check
propeller shaft vibration again at each point.
PDIA0422E
1.
2.
If propeller shaft or final drive has been replaced, install them as follows;
Install propeller shaft while aligning its matching mark A with the
matching mark B on the joint as close as possible.
Temporarily tighten bolts and nuts.
PDIA0423E
3.
Press down propeller shaft with matching mark C facing upward.

Then tighten fixing bolts and nuts to the specified torque. Refer
to PR-4, "COMPONENTS" .
PDIA0424E
PR-6
http://vnx.su

Applied model
3F63A-DOJ75
Number of joints
Coupling method with transfer
Flange
Type of journal bearings
Shaft outer diameter
A
EDS0027D
QR20DE, QR25DE, YD22DDTi
Propeller shaft model
Shaft length
PFP:00030
Shell type (Non-disassembly type)

1st (spider to cardan joint center)
1,041 mm (40.98 in)
2nd (cardan joint center to spider)
934mm (36.77 in)
1st
63.5 mm (2.500 in)
2nd
70.0 mm (2.76 in)
Journal Axial Play
PR
E
EDS0027E
Model
3F63A-DOJ75
Journal axial play
0 mm (0 in)
Propeller Shaft Runout
EDS0027F
G
Model
3F63A-DOJ75
0.6 mm (0.024 in) or less
PR-7
http://vnx.su
PR-8
http://vnx.su
REAR FINAL DRIVE
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
RFD
REAR FINAL DRIVE
RFD
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Service Notice or Precautions .................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
REAR FINAL DRIVE SYSTEM ................................... 7
Sectional View .......................................................... 7
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL ........................................ 8
Changing Differential Gear Oil ................................. 8
DRAINING ............................................................. 8
FILLING ................................................................. 8
Checking Differential Gear Oil .................................. 8
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL ........................... 8
FRONT OIL SEAL ...................................................... 9
REMOVAL ............................................................. 9
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 9
SIDE OIL SEAL .........................................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ....................................................11
ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING .................. 12
Removal and Installation ........................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY ............................ 14

REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
Components ........................................................... 16
Pre-inspection ......................................................... 17
TOTAL PRELOAD ............................................... 17
DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH ... 18
DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT ...................................... 19
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT ....................... 19
TOOTH CONTACT .............................................. 19
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 22
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 22
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 25
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) ...... 32
General Specification ............................................. 32
Drive Gear Vibration ............................................... 32
Total Preload ........................................................... 32
Side Gear Clearance Adjustment ........................... 32
Drive Pinion Gear Preload Adjustment ................... 32
Side Bearing Preload Adjustment ........................... 32
THRUST WASHER FOR ADJUSTMENT OF SIDE
GEAR BACK CLEARANCE .................................... 32
DRIVE PINION GEAR PRELOAD ADJUSTING
SHIM ....................................................................... 32
ADJUSTING SHIM FOR SIDE BEARING PRELOAD ...................................................................... 33
RFD-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions
PFP:00001
EDS001YY
Check for the correct installation status prior to removal or disassembly. If matching marks are required,
be certain they do not interfere with the function of the parts when applied.
Overhaul should be done in a clean work area, it is preferable to work in dustproof area.
Before disassembly, using steam or white gasoline, completely remove sand and mud from the exterior of
the unit, preventing them from entering into the unit during disassembly or assembly.
Check appearance of the disassembled parts for damage, deformation, and unusual wear. Replace them
with a new ones if necessary.
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time when the unit is disassembled.
In principle, tighten bolts or nuts gradually in several steps working diagonally from inside to outside. If
tightening sequence is specified, observe it.
Clean and flush the parts sufficiently and blow-dry them.
Be careful not to damage sliding surfaces and mating surfaces.
When applying sealant, remove the old sealant from the mounting surface; then remove any moisture, oil,
and foreign materials from the application and mounting surfaces.
Always use shop paper for cleaning the inside of components.
Avoid using cotton gloves or shop rags to prevent entering of lint.
During assembly, observe the specified tightening torque, and apply new differential oil, petroleum jelly, or
multi-purpose grease as specified for each vehicle, if necessary.
RFD-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EDS002VE
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST27861000
Drift
a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
b: 52 mm (2.05 in) dia.
Installing final drive front oil seal
RFD
ZZA0832D
KV38100200
Drift
a: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
Installing final drive front oil seal
Installing final drive side oil seal
F
ZZA1143D
ST3127S000
Preload gauge
H
ZZA0503D
ST33052000
Drift
a: 22 mm (0.87 in) dia.
b: 28 mm (1.10 in) dia.
Removing side bearing inner race
ZZA1023D
ST33230000
Drift
a: 51 mm (2.01 in) dia.
b: 41 mm (1.61 in) dia.
c: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
M
ZZA1046D
ST23860000
Drift
a: 38 mm (1.50 in) dia.
b: 33 mm (1.30 in) dia.
Installing pinion rear bearing inner race
ZZA0534D
ST35271000
Drift
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
Installing center oil seal
ZZA0814D
RFD-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST22360002
Drift
a: 29 mm (1.14 in) dia.
b: 23 mm (0.91 in) dia.
c: 150 mm (5.91 in)
Installing coupling front bearing
ZZA0546D
KV389L0010
Dummy cover set
Checking backlash
Checking drive gear runout
Checking tooth contact
Removing and installing drive pinion nut
Removing drive pinion nut
PDIA0894E
KV38108500
Drive pinion socket
ZZA1205D
KV38108400
Pinion nut wrench
ZZA1206D
EDS002VF
Tool name
Description
Flange wrench
Removing and installing companion flange

lock nut
NT771
Drift
a: 54.5 mm (2.146 in) dia.
Removing and installing carrier case and rear

cover (2 pieces are used)
PDIA0893E
Pin punch
a: 4.5 mm (0.177 in) dia.
Removing and installing lock pin
NT410
RFD-4
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool name
Description
Drift
a: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
Installing pinion rear bearing outer race
NT109
Stand
RFD
E
ZZA1050D
Drift
a: 39.7 mm (1.563 in) dia.
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
Installing side bearing inner race
G
ZZA0936D
Power tool
Loosening nuts and bolts
I
PBIC0190E
RFD-5
http://vnx.su
Symptom
Refer to RFD-19, "TOOTH CONTACT" .
Refer to RFD-24, "INSPECTION" .
Refer to RFD-18, "DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH" .
Refer to RFD-19, "COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT" .
Refer to RFD-8, "Checking Differential Gear Oil" .
NVH in PR section.
NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU and RSU sections.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in FAX and RAX section.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in PS section.
Tooth surfaces worn

Backlash incorrect
Companion flange excessive runout
Gear oil improper
PROPELLER SHAFT
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
Noise
Gear contact improper

Refer to RFD-24, "INSPECTION" .
Reference page
Gear tooth rough

: Applicable
http://vnx.su
RFD-6
PFP:00003
EDS001Z1
REAR FINAL DRIVE SYSTEM

REAR FINAL DRIVE SYSTEM
Sectional View
PFP:38300
A
EDS001ZL
RFD
I
SDIA0141E
RFD-7
http://vnx.su
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL

DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
PFP:KLD30
EDS0027G
DRAINING
1.
2.
3.
Stop engine.
Remove drain plug and drain oil.
Set a gasket on drain plug and install it to final drive assembly
and tighten to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse gasket.
PDIA0454E
FILLING
1.
Remove filler plug. Fill with new oil until oil level reaches the
specified level near filler plug mounting hole.
Oil grade and Viscosity:
Refer to MA-17, "Fluids and Lubricants" .
Oil capacity:
Approx. 0.55
2.
(1 Imp pt)
After refilling oil, check oil level. Set a gasket to filler plug, then
install it to final drive assembly. Refer to RFD-16, "Components"
.
CAUTION:
Checking Differential Gear Oil
PDIA0453E
EDS0027H
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL
Make sure that oil is not leaking from final drive assembly or around it.
Check oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Do not start engine while checking oil level.
Set a gasket on filler plug and install it on final drive assembly.
Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
CAUTION:
PDIA0453E
RFD-8
http://vnx.su
FRONT OIL SEAL

FRONT OIL SEAL
PFP:38189
A
EDS001Z2
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Put matching mark on the thread edge of electric controlled coupling. The matching mark should be in line with the matching
mark on companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage electric controlled coupling.
RFD
E
PDIA0455E
3.
Remove companion flange lock nut, using a flange wrench.

Then remove companion flange.
PDIA0456E
4.
Remove front oil seal from coupling cover, using a flat-bladed

screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage coupling cover.
L
PDIA0457E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Apply multi-purpose grease to front oil seal lips.

Install front oil seal until it becomes flush with the case end,
using the drifts.
Tool number
A: KV38100200
B: ST27861000
CAUTION:
PDIA0038E
RFD-9
http://vnx.su
FRONT OIL SEAL

3.
4.
5.
Align the matching mark of electric controlled coupling with the

matching mark of companion flange, then install the companion
flange.
Install companion flange lock nut with a flange wrench, tighten
the to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse companion flange lock nut.
Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation"
.
PDIA0455E
RFD-10
http://vnx.su
SIDE OIL SEAL

SIDE OIL SEAL
PFP:38343
A
EDS001Z3
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove rear drive shaft with power tool. Refer to RAX-10, "REAR DRIVE SHAFT" .
Remove side oil seal, using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage carrier case and rear cover.
RFD
E
PDIA0431E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Tool number
3.
Apply multi-purpose grease to side oil seal lips.

Install side oil seal until it becomes flush with the case end,
using the drift.
: KV38100200
CAUTION:
Install rear drive shaft. Refer to RAX-10, "REAR DRIVE
SHAFT" .
I
PDIA0432E
RFD-11
http://vnx.su

PFP:38760
EDS0027J
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Put matching mark on the thread edge of electric controlled coupling. The matching mark should be in line with the matching
mark on the companion flange.
CAUTION:
For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage electric controlled coupling.
NOTE:
When replacing electric controlled coupling, matching mark is
not necessary.
PDIA0455E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove companion flange lock nut, using a flange wrench.

Remove companion flange.
Disconnect 4WD solenoid harness connector and remove connector bracket.
Remove electric controlled coupling breather hose from coupling cover.
PDIA0456E
7.
8.
Remove coupling cover with electric controlled coupling from

carrier case.
Remove electric controlled coupling from coupling cover.
PDIA0458E
RFD-12
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Install electric controlled coupling to spline of drive pinion inside

carrier case.
CAUTION:
Align the pin on electric controlled coupling with the
groove of carrier case.
Be careful not to damage center oil seal.
Set 4WD solenoid harness guide to carrier case.
PDIA0912E
3.
Apply liquid gasket to mating surface of coupling cover. Overlap

both ends of the bead for at least 3 mm (0.12 in).
Use sealant (Three bound 1217 or equivalent).
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant adhering to the mounting surfaces.
Also remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering
to the mounting surfaces.
RFD
PDIA0451E
Install coupling cover to carrier case with arrow facing upward,

temporarily tighten reamer bolts to the positions shown in the
figure.
5. Tighten reamer bolts and coupling cover mounting bolts to the
specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
6. Install electric controlled coupling breather hose to coupling
cover.
7. Install connector bracket and connect 4WD solenoid harness
connector.
8. Install companion flange.
NOTE:
When reusing electric controlled coupling, align the matching
mark of electric controlled coupling with the matching mark of
companion flange, then install companion flange.
9. Install companion flange lock nut with flange wrench, tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
CAUTION:
Do not reuse companion flange lock nut.
10. Install propeller shaft. Refer to PR-4, "Removal and Installation"
.
4.
K
SDIA0587E
PDIA0455E
RFD-13
http://vnx.su
REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY

PFP:38300
EDS001ZA
PDIA0433E
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Final drive mounting bracket
3.
Harness bracket
4.
Drive shaft
5.
Propeller shaft
6.
Rear final drive assembly
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove drive shaft with power tool. Refer to RAX-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear final drive breather hose and electric controlled coupling breather hose.
Support rear final drive assembly with a suitable jack.
Remove rear final drive mounting nut at rear suspension member.
PDIA0434E
7.
Remove rear final drive mounting bolts at final drive mounting

bracket, and then remove rear final drive assembly.
If necessary, remove final drive mounting bracket.
CAUTION:
Secure rear final drive assembly to a suitable jack while
removing it.
PDIA0435E
RFD-14
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
A
Refer to RFD-16, "Components" about each tightening torque.
When installing breather hoses, refer to the figure and following.

CAUTION:
Make sure there are no pinched or restricted areas on the
breather hose caused by bending or winding when installing it.
For installation of rear final drive breather hose, the vehicle side
end shall be inserted to cross member. Install metal connector
side of this hose to rear cover by inserting it with aiming painted
marking to the front of vehicle.
RFD
H
PDIA0436E
For installation of electric controlled coupling breather hose, the

vehicle side end shall be inserted to cross member. Install its
metal tube to rear final drive assembly and direct the metal tube
hose side end to the front of vehicle.
When oil leaks while removing final drive assembly, check oil
level after the installation. Refer to RFD-8, "Checking Differential
Gear Oil" .
PDIA0437E
RFD-15
http://vnx.su

Components
EDS001ZB
PDIA0932E
1.
Companion flange lock nut
2.
Companion flange
3.
Front oil seal
4.
Coupling cover
5.
Connector bracket
6.
Reamer bolt
7.
Coupling front bearing
8.
Bearing shim
9.
Electric controlled coupling
10. 4WD solenoid harness
11. Center oil seal
12. Drive pinion nut
13. Pinion front bearing
14. Carrier case
15. Collapsible spacer
16. Drive pinion adjusting shim
17. Pinion rear bearing
18. Drive pinion
19. Side oil seal
20. Side bearing adjusting shim
21. Side bearing
22. Drive gear
23. Differential case
24. Side gear thrust washer
25. Side gear
26. Pinion mate thrust washer
27. Pinion mate gear
28. Pinion mate shaft
29. Lock pin
30. Rear cover
31. Filler plug
32. Drain plug
33. Gasket
RFD-16
http://vnx.su

Pre-inspection
EDS001ZC
TOTAL PRELOAD
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain the oil.

Remove electric controlled coupling assembly. Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Electric Controlled Coupling
Assembly" .
Rotate the drive pinion back and forth in 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise and rotation malfunction.
Rotate the drive pinion at least 20 times to check for smooth
operation of the bearing.
Fit the drive pinion socket onto the drive pinion spline. Using the
preload gauge below, measure the total preload.
Tool number
RFD
A: ST3127S000
B: KV38108500
Total preload
:1.33 - 2.15 Nm (0.14 - 0.21 kg-m, 12 - 19 in-lb)
PDIA0048E
If outside the standard, disassemble, check, and adjust each

part. Adjust the pinion bearing and side bearing preload.
Adjust the pinion bearing preload first, then adjust the side bearing preload.
Side bearing preload

: 0.64-0.98 Nm (0.07 - 0.09 kg-m, 6 - 8 in-lb)
When the preload torque is large

On pinion bearings : Replace the collapsible spacer.
On side bearings
: Use thinner side bearing adjusting shims.
When the preload is small

On pinion bearings : Tighten the pinion nut.
On side bearings
: Use thicker side bearing adjusting shims.
Side bearing adjusting shims

Thickness
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
1.90 mm (0.0748 in)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in)
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)
Part number*
38453
38453
38453
38453
Thickness
4N200
4N201
4N202
4N203
2.05 mm (0.0807 in)

2.10 mm (0.0827 in)
2.15 mm (0.0854 in)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in)
Part number*
38453
38453
38453
38453
4N204
4N205
4N206
4N207
RFD-17
http://vnx.su

DRIVE GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH
1.
2.
3.
Drain the oil.

Remove the rear cover. Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Differential Assembly" .
Following the procedure below, install a dummy cover set to the
carrier case.
Tool Number
a.
: KV389L0010
Fit dummy cover shims to the right and left side bearing adjusting shims.
PDIA0474E
b.
c.
d.
e.
Temporarily tighten a dummy cover to the carrier case.

Position a dummy cover spacer to the dummy cover.
Tighten rear cover mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
Tighten dummy cover spacer mounting bolts evenly to the specified torque.
: 5.9 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 in-lb)
4.
Fit a dial indicator to the drive gear face to measure the backlash.
Backlash
: 0.10 - 0.15 mm (0.0039 - 0.0059 in)
If outside the standard, change the thickness of the side bearing

adjusting shims.
Tool number
: KV389L0010
PDIA0049E
When the backlash is large:

Make the drive gear back adjusting shims thicker, and the drive gear front adjusting
shims thinner.
When the backlash is small:
Make the drive gear back adjusting shims thinner, and the drive gear front adjusting
shims thicker.
Side bearing adjusting shims
Thickness
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
1.90 mm (0.0748 in)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in)
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)
Part number*
38453
38453
38453
38453
Thickness
2.05 mm (0.0807 in)
2.10 mm (0.0827 in)
2.15 mm (0.0854 in)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in)
4N200
4N201
4N202
4N203
RFD-18
http://vnx.su
Part number*
38453
38453
38453
38453
4N204
4N205
4N206
4N207

DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT
1.
2.
3.
Tool Number
4.
5.
Drain the oil.

Remove the rear cover.Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Differential Assembly" .
Attach dummy cover set. Refer to RFD-18, "DRIVE GEAR TO
DRIVE PINION BACKLASH" .
: KV389L0010
Fit a dial indicator to the drive gear back face.

Rotate the drive gear to measure runout.
Runout limit
: 0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
RFD
If outside the repair limit, check drive gear assembly condition;

foreign material may be caught between drive gear and differential case, or differential case or drive gear may be deformed, etc.
CAUTION:
Replace the drive gear and drive pinion gear as a set.
PDIA0050E
COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT

1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
: 0.13 mm (0.0051 in)
Fit a test indicator to the inner side of the companion flange

(socket diameter).
Runout limit
5.
Fit a dial indicator onto the companion flange face (inner side of
the propeller shaft mounting bolt holes).
Runout limit
: 0.19 mm (0.0075 in)

PDIA0439E
If the runout value is outside the repair limit, follow the procedure
below to adjust.
Check for runout while changing the phase between companion flange and drive pinion gear by 90 step,
and search for the point where the runout is the minimum.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the phase has been changed, replace the companion
flange.
If the runout value is still outside of the limit after the companion flange has been replaced, possible cause
will be an assembly malfunction of the drive pinion gear and the electronically controlled coupling, malfunctioning coupling bearing, or malfunctioning of electronically controlled coupling.
TOOTH CONTACT
1.
2.
3.
Drain the oil.

Remove the rear cover. Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Differential Assembly" .
Attach dummy cover set. Refer to RFD-18, "DRIVE GEAR TO
DRIVE PINION BACKLASH" .
Tool Number
4.
5.
: KV389L0010
Thoroughly clean drive gear and drive pinion teeth.

Lightly apply a mixture of powdered ferric oxide and oil or the
equivalent. Apply it to 3 to 4 teeth of drive gear drive side.
PDIA0051E
RFD-19
http://vnx.su

6.
Rotate the drive gear back and forth in several times, check
drive pinion gear to drive gear tooth contact.
CAUTION:
Check tooth contact on drive side and reverse side.
SDIA0570E
SDIA2549E
7.
If the tooth contact is improperly adjusted, follow the procedure

below to adjust the pinion height (dimension X in the figure).
SDIA0517E
RFD-20
http://vnx.su

Drive pinion adjusting shim
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.70 mm (0.0669 in)

1.73 mm (0.0681 in)
1.76 mm (0.0693 in)
1.79 mm (0.0705 in)
1.82 mm (0.0717 in)
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
1.88 mm (0.0740 in)
1.91 mm (0.0752 in)
1.94 mm (0.0764 in)
1.97 mm (0.0776 in)
38154 4N200
38154 4N201
38154 4N202
38154 4N203
38154 4N204
38154 4N205
38154 4N206
38154 4N207
38154 4N208
38154 4N209
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)

2.03 mm (0.0799 in)
2.06 mm (0.0811 in)
2.09 mm (0.0823 in)
2.12 mm (0.0835 in)
2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
2.18 mm (0.0858 in)
2.21 mm (0.0870 in)
2.24 mm (0.0882 in)
38154 4N210
38154 4N211
38154 4N212
38154 4N213
38154 4N214
38154 4N215
38154 4N216
38154 4N217
38154 4N218
RFD
In case of face contact or heel contact, thicken the drive pinion

gear adjusting shims to move the drive pinion gear closer to the
drive gear.
K
SDIA0571E
In case of flank contact or toe contact, thin the drive pinion gear
adjusting shims to move the drive pinion gear farther from the
drive gear.
SDIA0572E
RFD-21
http://vnx.su

EDS001ZD
DISASSEMBLY
Removal of Electric Controlled Coupling Assembly
1.
2.
3.
4.
Using a drive pinion flange wrench, remove companion flange lock nut.
Using a puller, remove the companion flange.
Remove coupling cover.
Using flat tip screwdriver, remove front oil seal from the coupling
cover.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the coupling cover.
PDG0213D
5.
6.
Remove electric controlled coupling assembly from the carrier case.

Using a puller, remove coupling front bearing from the electronically controlled coupling.
CAUTION:
When the bearing is replaced with new one, readjust the
shim between bearing and the coupling.
PDIA0177E
Removal of Differential Assembly

1.
2.
Using flat tip screwdriver, remove side oil seal from the carrier
case assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the carrier case and rear cover.
Remove rear cover mounting bolts.
PDG0216D
3.
4.
Fit a drift to the right and left side bearing adjusting shims individually. Press differential case assembly and side bearing to
remove carrier case assembly and rear cover.
CAUTION:
The pressure shall be as low as possible to remove carrier
case assembly and rear cover. The maximum pressure shall
be 10 kN (1 ton, 1.1 US ton, 1.0 Imp ton).
NOTE:
Differential case assembly, side bearings, and adjusting shims
are compressed and integrated in the carrier case and rear
cover.
Remove side bearing adjusting shims and side bearing outer
race.
RFD-22
http://vnx.su
PDIA0896E
5.
6.
CAUTION:
Mark the side bearing adjusting shims so that the original mounting positions (right/left) can be
identified later.
Remove drive gear mounting bolts, and remove drive gear from the differential case.
Using a puller and the drift below, remove side bearing inner
race.
Tool number
: ST33052000
C
RFD
PDIA0178E
7.
8.
Using the pin punch, pull the lock pin out of the pinion mate
shaft.
Remove pinion mate shaft, pinion mate gears, pinion mate
thrust washers, side gears, side gear thrust washers from the
differential case.
H
PDIA0897E
Removing Drive Pinion Assembly

1.
2.
3.
Tool number
4.
Remove Electric controlled coupling assembly. Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Electric Controlled Coupling
Assembly" .
Remove differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-22, "Removal of Differential Assembly" .
Fit the drive pinion socket onto the drive pinion spline. Using the
pinion nut wrench, remove drive pinion nut.
A: KV38108400
B: KV38108500
Remove center oil seal.
M
PDIA0054E
5.
6.
7.
Press the drive pinion gear assembly out of the carrier case.
Remove pinion front bearing inner race.
Remove collapsible spacer.
SDIA0576E
RFD-23
http://vnx.su

8.
Using a puller, remove pinion rear bearing inner race from the
drive pinion.
PDIA0179E
9.
Using a brass rod, tap the pinion front bearing outer race evenly
from the 2 cutouts on the carrier case and remove pinion front
bearing outer race.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the carrier case.
10. Using a brass rod, tap the drive pinion adjusting shim evenly
from the 2 cutouts on the carrier case and remove drive pinion
adjusting shims and pinion rear bearing outer race.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the carrier case.
SDIA0564E
INSPECTION
Clean up the disassembled parts. Then, inspect if the parts are wear or damaged. If so, follow the measures below.
Content
Measures
If the gear teeth do not mesh or line-up correctly, determine the cause and adjust, repair, or replace
as necessary.
If the gear are worn, cracked, damaged, pitted or chipped (by friction) noticeably, replace with a
new gears.
If found any chipped (by friction), pitted, worn, rusted, scratched mark, or unusual noise from the
bearing, replace with a new bearing ASSY (as new set).
Hypoid gear
Bearing
Side gear thrust washer and

Pinion mate thrust washer
Replace with a new one if found any cracks or damage on the surface of the tooth.
Replace with a new one if found any worn or chipped mark on the contact sides of the thrust
washer.
Side gear and Pinion mate

thrust washer
Replace with a new one if found that it chipped (by friction), damaged, or unusual worn.
Oil seal
Oil seals must be replaced with a new one whenever disassembled.
Differential case
Replace with a new one if found any wear or cracks on the contact sides of the Differential case.
Replace with a new one if found any chipped marks (about 0.10mm, 0.0039in) or other damage on
the contact sides of the lips of the companion flange.
Companion flange
RFD-24
http://vnx.su

ASSEMBLY
Assembly of Drive Pinion Assembly
1.
Assemble with a drive pinion adjusting shim of the same thickness as was installed prior to disassembly. Using the suitable
drift, press a pinion rear bearing outer race into the carrier case.
CAUTION:
At first, using a hammer, tap the bearing outer race until it
becomes square to the carrier case.
Do not reuse the pinion rear bearing outer race.
RFD
PDIA0898E
2.
Using the drift below, press a pinion front bearing outer race into
the carrier case.
Tool number
: ST33230000
F
CAUTION:
At first, using a hammer, tap the bearing outer race until it
becomes square to the carrier case.
Do not reuse the pinion front bearing outer race.
PDIA0067E
3.
Using the drift below, press a pinion rear bearing inner race into
the drive pinion.
Tool number
: ST23860000
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the pinion rear bearing inner race.
K
PDIA0068E
4.
a.
After checking and adjusting the tooth contact and backlash of

the hypoid gear following the procedure below, assemble a collapsible spacer to the drive pinion.
CAUTION:
Be careful of the mounting direction of the collapsible
spacer.
Do not reuse the collapsible spacer.
Apply differential oil to the pinion rear bearing, and assemble the
drive pinion to the carrier case.
PDIA0239E
RFD-25
http://vnx.su

b.
Assemble a pinion front bearing inner race to the drive pinion.

Using the drift and suitable stand, press the pinion nut as far as
it can be tightened.
Tool number
c.
: ST23860000
Temporarily tighten the removed pinion nut to the drive pinion.

NOTE:
Use the removed pinion nut only for the preload measurement.
PDIA0899E
d.
Fit the drive pinion gear socket onto the drive pinion spline.
Using the pinion nut wrench, tighten the pinion nut to the specified preload torque.
Tool number
e.
f.
g.
A: KV38108400
B: KV38108500
C: ST3127S000
CAUTION:
The pinion nut is tightened with no collapsible spacer. Be
careful not to overtighten it. While measuring the preload,
tighten it by 5 to 10.
Apply differential oil to the side bearings, and install new side
bearing adjusting shims with the same thickness or re-install the
old ones to the same mounting position they were in prior to disassembly. Install the differential case assembly to the carrier
case. Refer to RFD-28, "Installation of Differential Assembly" .
Install a dummy cover set to check and adjust the tooth contact.
Refer to RFD-19, "TOOTH CONTACT" .
Check and adjust the backlash. Refer to RFD-18, "DRIVE
GEAR TO DRIVE PINION BACKLASH" .
PDIA0058E
h.
i.
5.
Remove dummy cover set, and remove differential case assembly.

Remove pinion nut, pinion front bearing inner race, and remove
drive pinion gear.
Install the drive pinion gear with a collapsible spacer to the carrier case.
SDIA0576E
RFD-26
http://vnx.su

6.
Using the drift and suitable stand, press the pinion front bearing
inner race to the drive pinion as far as a pinion nut can be tightened.
Tool number
7.
: ST23860000
B
Apply anti-corrosive oil to the thread and seat of the pinion nut,
and temporarily tighten the pinion nut to the drive pinion.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the pinion nut.
C
PDIA0899E
RFD
8.
Fit the drive pinion gear socket onto the drive pinion gear spline.
Using the pinion nut wrench, adjust the pinion nut tightening
torque and pinion bearing preload torque.
Tool number
A: KV38108400
B: KV38108500
C: ST3127S000
Pinion nut tightening torque

: 98 - 431 Nm (10 - 43 kg-m, 73 - 317 ft-lb)
Pinion bearing preload

: 0.69 - 1.17 Nm (0.07 - 0.11 kg-m, 7 - 10 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the pinion nut.
Adjust the lower limit of the pinion nut tightening torque

first.
If the preload torque exceeds the specified value, replace

the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Never
loosen the pinion nut to adjust the preload torque.
After adjustment, rotate the drive pinion gear back and forth
2 to 3 times to check for abnormal noise, rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions.
PDIA0058E
RFD-27
http://vnx.su

9.
Install center oil seal as shown in the right figure.

Tool number
: ST35271000
10. Install the differential case assembly. Refer to RFD-28, "Installation of Differential Assembly" .
CAUTION:
Do not install the rear cover.
11. Install the dummy cover set, and check backlash, drive gear
back runout, and tooth contact. Refer to RFD-19, "TOOTH CONTACT" .
12. Remove the dummy cover, then install the rear cover, and drive
in the oil seal. Refer to.RFD-28, "Installation of Differential
Assembly" .
13. Check overall preload torque. Refer to RFD-17, "TOTAL PRELOAD" .
14. Connect electric controlled coupling assembly. Refer to RFD-30,
"Installation of Electric Controlled Coupling Assembly" .
15. Check companion flange runout. Refer to RFD-19, "COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT" .
PDIA0464E
Installation of Differential Assembly

1.
2.
3.
Assemble new side gear thrust washers with the same thickness as the ones installed prior to disassembly or reinstall the old ones on the side gears.
Assemble the side gears, side gear thrust washers, pinion mate gears, and pinion mate thrust washers to
the differential case, and temporarily assemble the pinion mate shaft.
Measure the side gear end play following the procedure below,
and select the appropriate side gear thrust washers.
Using a thickness gauge, measure the clearance between
side gear back and the differential case at 3 different points,
while rotating the side gear. Average the 3 readings, and
select the appropriate side gear thrust washer so that the
mean value is within specifications below. (Measure the clearance of the other side as well.)
Side gear end play standard:
0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less. Every gear shall rotate
smoothly with no abnormal feeling of drag.
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
0.74 mm (0.0291 in)

0.77 mm (0.0303 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
38424 4N200
38424 4N201
38424 4N202
0.83 mm (0.0327 in)

0.86 mm (0.0339 in)
38424 4N203
38424 4N204
4.
CAUTION:
Before measurement, place differential case straight up
so that side gear to be measured comes upward. To prevent the side gear from tilting, insert thickness gauges
with the same thickness from both sides.
Select a side gear thrust washer for right and left individually.
Assemble the selected side gear thrust washer to the differential case.
RFD-28
http://vnx.su
SDIA0583E

5.
Using the pin punch, drive a lock pin into the pinion mating shaft.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the lock pin.
C
PDIA0897E
RFD
6.
Using the suitable drift, press a side bearing inner race into the
differential case.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the side bearing inner race.
G
PDIA0901E
7.
Apply locking sealant onto the thread of the drive gear.

CAUTION:
The drive gear back, threaded holes, and drive gear bolts shall be cleaned and decreased sufficiently.
8. Assemble the drive gear to the differential case, and tighten it with drive gear bolt. Refer to RFD-16,
"Components" .
9. Apply differential oil to the side bearings, and assemble new side bearing adjusting shims (2 pieces for
one side) with the same thickness as the ones installed prior to disassembly or re-install the old ones, with
a side bearing outer race to the differential case.
If the side bearing adjusting shims have been already selected, use them.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the side bearing outer race.
10. Fit the suitable drifts to the right and left side bearing adjusting
shims individually. Compress differential case assembly and
side bearing to install the carrier case assembly to differential
case assembly.
CAUTION:
The drift shall be placed on the center of the adjusting
shims.
The pressure shall be as low as possible to install the
carrier case assembly into the differential assembly. The
maximum pressure shall be 1 ton.
PDIA0900E
If the adjusting shims are installed by tapping, the carrier
case may be damaged. Avoid tapping.
11. Install a dummy cover set, check and adjust the backlash, drive gear back runout, tooth contact, and overall preload torque. Refer to RFD-17, "Pre-inspection" .
12. Remove dummy cover set.
RFD-29
http://vnx.su

13. Apply a continuos bead of sealant around the carrier case mating surface on the rear cover as shown in the figure. Overlap
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant on the mounting surface, then remove
any moisture, oil, and foreign material on the application
and mounting surfaces.
PDIA0240E
14. Fit the suitable drifts to the right and left side bearing adjusting
shims individually. Compress differential case assembly and
side bearing to install the rear cover.
CAUTION:
The drift shall be placed on the center of the adjusting
shims.
The pressure shall be as low as possible to install the
rear cover. The maximum pressure shall be 10 kN (1 ton,
1.1 US ton, 1.0 Imp ton)
If the rear cover is forced in by tapping, the rear cover
may be damaged by the adjusting shims. Avoid tapping.
PDIA0896E
15. Tighten rear cover mounting bolts to the specified torque. Refer to RFD-16, "Components" .
16. Using both drift, drive the oil seal until it becomes flush with the
case end.
Tool number
: KV38100200
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seals.
Apply multi-purpose grease onto the oil seal lips, and differential oil onto the circumference of the oil seal.
17. Check overall preload torque. Refer to RFD-17, "TOTAL PRELOAD" .
PDIA0448E
Installation of Electric Controlled Coupling Assembly

1.
Using the drift below, install the coupling front bearing to the
electric controlled coupling.
Tool number
: ST22360002
CAUTION:
At disassembly, be sure to install shim between electric
controlled coupling and bearing. Chamfering side of shim
should be coupled to install.
PDIA0060E
2.
Assemble the electric controlled coupling assembly to the drive pinion gear.
RFD-30
http://vnx.su

3.
Using the drift below, drive an oil seal until it becomes flush with
the case end.
Tool number
A: KV38100200
B: ST27861000
CAUTION:
Do not reuse oil seals.
Apply multi-purpose grease onto the oil seal lips, and differential oil onto the circumference of the oil seal.
C
PDIA0449E
RFD
4.
Apply a continuous bead sealant around the carrier case mating

surface on the coupling cover as shown in the figure. Overlap
CAUTION:
Remove old sealant on the mounting surface, then remove
any moisture, oil, and foreign material from the application
and mounting surfaces.
G
PDIA0241E
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Assemble the coupling cover to the carrier case assembly with

the arrow facing upward, temporarily tighten reamer bolts to the
positions shown in the figure.
Tighten the reamer bolts and coupling cover mounting bolts to
the specified torque.
Assemble the companion flange.
Using a flange wrench, tighten the companion flange nut to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the companion flange nut.
Check companion flange runout. Refer to RFD-19, "COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT" .
SDIA0587E
RFD-31
http://vnx.su

General Specification
PFP:00030
EDS001ZE
Applied model
QR20DE, QR25DE, YD22DDTi
Final drive model
R145
Drive gear pitch diameter
145
Gear ratio
2.466
Number of teeth (Drive gear/Drive pinion)
37/15
Oil capacity (approx.)
0.55
Number of pinion gears
(1 lmp pt.)
2
Drive pinion adjustment spacer type
Collapsible
Drive Gear Vibration
EDS001ZF
Vibration limit at drive gear back
0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less
Total Preload
EDS001ZJ
Total preload with oil seal installed
1.33 - 2.15 Nm (0.14 - 0.21 kg-m,12 - 19 in-lb)
Drive gear backlash
0.10 - 0.15 mm (0.0039 - 0.0059 in)
Side Gear Clearance Adjustment

Side gear back clearance
EDS001ZG
0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less. Every gear shall rotate smoothly with no abnormal feeling of drag.
Drive Pinion Gear Preload Adjustment
EDS001ZH
Adjustment of drive pinion gear
Collapsible spacer
Drive pinion gear preload
0.69 - 1.17 Nm (0.07 - 0.11 kg-m,7 - 10 in-lb)
Side Bearing Preload Adjustment
EDS001ZI
Adjustment of side bearing
Adjusting shim
Side bearing preload
0.64 - 0.98 Nm (0.07 - 0.09 kg-m,6 - 8 in-lb)
THRUST WASHER FOR ADJUSTMENT OF SIDE GEAR BACK CLEARANCE

Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
0.74 mm (0.0291 in)

0.77 mm (0.0303 in)
0.80 mm (0.0315 in)
38424 4N200
38424 4N201
38424 4N202
0.83 mm (0.0327 in)

0.86 mm (0.0339 in)
38424 4N203
38424 4N204
EDS002V9
DRIVE PINION GEAR PRELOAD ADJUSTING SHIM
EDS002VA
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.70 mm (0.0669 in)

1.73 mm (0.0681 in)
1.76 mm (0.0693 in)
1.79 mm (0.0705 in)
1.82 mm (0.0717 in)
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
1.88 mm (0.0740 in)
1.91 mm (0.0752 in)
1.94 mm (0.0764 in)
1.97 mm (0.0776 in)
38154 4N200
38154 4N201
38154 4N202
38154 4N203
38154 4N204
38154 4N205
38154 4N206
38154 4N207
38154 4N208
38154 4N209
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)

2.03 mm (0.0799 in)
2.06 mm (0.0811 in)
2.09 mm (0.0823 in)
2.12 mm (0.0835 in)
2.15 mm (0.0846 in)
2.18 mm (0.0858 in)
2.21 mm (0.0870 in)
2.24 mm (0.0882 in)
38154 4N210
38154 4N211
38154 4N212
38154 4N213
38154 4N214
38154 4N215
38154 4N216
38154 4N217
38154 4N218
RFD-32
http://vnx.su

ADJUSTING SHIM FOR SIDE BEARING PRELOAD
EDS002VB
A
Thickness
Part number*
Thickness
Part number*
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)

1.90 mm (0.0748 in)
1.95 mm (0.0768 in)
2.00 mm (0.0787 in)
38453 4N200
38453 4N201
38453 4N202
38453 4N203
2.05 mm (0.0807 in)

2.10 mm (0.0827 in)
2.15 mm (0.0854 in)
2.20 mm (0.0866 in)
38453 4N204
38453 4N205
38453 4N206
38453 4N207
RFD
RFD-33
http://vnx.su
RFD-34
http://vnx.su
FRONT AXLE
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
FAX
FRONT AXLE
FAX
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Caution ..................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools (SST) ..................................... 3
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE ...................... 7
FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS ................................ 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTON AFTER REMOVAL .......................... 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
Disassembly and Assembly ..................................... 8
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................. 9
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ............................................. 11

REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ....................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY ................ 14
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 15
Wheel Bearing ........................................................ 19
Drive Shaft .............................................................. 19
ZF100SS86, ZF100SS86F, ZF100SS86F+B ...... 19
Dynamic Damper .................................................... 19
FAX-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
PFP:00001
EDS0005P
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on
ground.
Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushes. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft.
Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the service
location.
Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean
cover must be placed over parts.
Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by
blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
FAX-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (SST)
PFP:00002
A
EDS0005Q
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV401 04100
Attachment
Removing wheel hub and bearing

assembly
FAX
ZZA0804D
E
ST36230000
Sliding hammer

assembly
F
ZZA0803D
G
ST30031000
Bearing replacer
Removing inner race on outer side of wheel

bearing
ZZA0700D
HT7252000
Ball joint remover
Removing tie-rod outer end and lower ball

joint
S-NT146
ST33061000
Drift
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38.0 mm (1.496 in) dia.

bearings
M
ZZA0969D
KV38100200
Drift
a: 65 mm (2.65 in) dia.
b: 49 mm (1.93 in) dia.
Removing wheel bearing
ZZA1143D
KV401052S0
Drift set
KV40105210
KV40105220
Drift
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
KV40105230
Installing splash guard
ZZA1101D
FAX-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV40106200
Drift
a: 114.3 mm (4.50 in) dia.
b: 105.3 mm (4.15 in) dia.
Removing wheel bearings, installing splash

guards
ZZA0936D
KV401047S0
Drift set
KV40104710
Drift
a: 76.3 mm (3.004 in) dia.
b: 67.9 mm (2.673 in) dia.
KV40104720-1
KV40104720-2
KV40104730
Installing wheel bearings and splash guard
ZZA0808D
ST30022000
Drift
a: 110 mm (4.33 in) dia.
b: 46 mm (1.81 in) dia.
Installing splash guard
ZZA0920D
KV401053S0
Drift set
KV40105310
Drift
a: 89.1 mm (3.508 in) dia.
b: 80.7 mm (3.177 in) dia.
KV40105320
KV40105330
Installing wheel hub
ZZA0808D
ST35271000
Drift
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
Assembling support bearings

Installing wheel bearing
ZZA0837D
KV38107800
Protector
a: 29 mm (1.14 in) dia.
KV38105500
Protector
a: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
Installing drive shaft
ZZA0835D
KV40101840
Collar
a: 67 mm (2.64 in) dia.
b: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
Installing sensor rotor
ZZA1113D
FAX-4
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST17130000
Drift
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (1.57 in) dia.
Disassembling support bearing
C
ZZA0836D
FAX
ST33252000
Drift
a: 82 mm (3.23 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
Assembling support bearing
E
ZZA0838D
F
KV38100500
Drift
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA0701D
ST35271000
Drift
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
Installing wheel bearing
ZZA0814D
ST35300000
Drift
a: 45.1 mm (1.776 in) dia.
b: 59 mm (2.32 in) dia.
K
L
ZZA0881D
FAX-5
http://vnx.su

PFP:00003
EDS00127
Symptom
FRONT
AXLE
NVH in PR section.
NVH in RFD section.
NVH in RAX and RSU sections.
Refer to FRONT AXLE in this chart.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in WT section.
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in PS section.
DIFFERENTIAL
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
FRONT AXLE
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
Parts interference
Shake
FAX-7, FAX-11
PROPELLER SHAFT
DRIVE
SHAFT
Improper installation, looseness
FAX-14
Joint sliding resistance
Noise
Reference page
Imbalance
Noise
Shake
Vibration
Shimmy
Judder
Poor quality ride or handling
: Applicable
FAX-6
http://vnx.su
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE

PFP:40202
A
EDS0005R
Inspect to check that there is no excessive play, cracking, wear, or

other damage to front axle.
Turn front wheels (left/right) and check the play.
Check that no nails or other foreign objects are embedded.
Retighten all axle nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
FAX
SMA525A
FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS

With the vehicle raised, inspect the following.
Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Check that there is no looseness of front wheel bearings.
Axial end play
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Rotate wheel hub and check that there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there are any
irregular conditions, replace the wheel bearing.
EDS0005S
M
SDIA0131E
1.
Steering knuckle
2.
Splash guard
3.
Wheel bearing assembly
4.
Snap ring
5.
Wheel hub
6.
Hub bolt
7.
Cotter pin
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove tyre. Remove brake hose lock plate from strut.

Remove brake caliper from steering knuckle. Hang it in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer
to BR-27, "FRONT DISC BRAKE" .
CAUTION:
Avoid depressing the brake pedal with brake caliper removed.
Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-114, "WHEEL SENSORS" .
CAUTION:
Do not pull on wheel sensor harness.
FAX-7
http://vnx.su

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove cotter pin. Use a hub lock nut wrench to remove lock
nut from drive shaft.
Remove disc rotor from wheel hub.
Remove cotter pin. Use a ball joint remover to remove tie rod
from steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
When using a ball joint remover, install nuts temporarily.
Remove steering knuckle from strut.
Remove drive shaft from steering knuckle.
Remove cotter pin. Use a ball joint remover to remove transverse link from steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
When using a ball joint remover, install nuts temporarily.
SFA649A
INSPECTON AFTER REMOVAL

Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each parts, replace if necessary.
Ball Joint Inspection
Check for boot breakage, axial looseness, and torque of transverse link ball joint. Refer to FSU-10,
"INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL" .
INSTALLATION
Refer to FAX-7, "Removal and Installation" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Refer to component parts location and do not reuse non-reusable parts.
EDS0005T
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Set steering knuckle on bench vise at point where strut is

attached. Use a sliding hammer (SST) and attachment (SST) to
remove wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
When placing onto vise, be careful not to damage strut
mounting surface of steering knuckle. Use an aluminum
plate or another suitable tool.
FAC0104D
2.
3.
4.
As shown in the figure, use a puller (suitable tool), drift (SST),

and bearing replacer (SST) to remove inner race of outer wheel
bearing from wheel hub.
Use a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool to remove snap ring.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the steering knuckle.
Fix steering knuckle to bench vise. Use a flat-bladed screwdriver
and hammer to remove splash guard from steering knuckle.
SDIA0588E
FAX-8
http://vnx.su

5.
Use a drift (SST) and a press to remove wheel bearing.

A
C
SDIA0589E
FAX

Wheel Hub
Check wheel bearings for damage, seizure, and corrosion. Also check wheel hubs for cracks (using a die
test or other method). Replace if any irregular conditions are found.
Steering Knuckle
Check steering knuckle for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Replace if any irregular conditions are
found.
Snap Ring
Check snap ring for wear or other damage. Replace if any irregular conditions are found.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Use a drift (SST) to install splash guard onto steering knuckle.

CAUTION:
Discard the old splash guard; replace with a new one.
FAC1217D
Install splash guard in position shown in the figure.

L
SDIA0590E
2.
3.
Use a drift (SST) and a press to press-fit wheel bearing onto

steering knuckle.
CAUTION:
Discard the old wheel bearing; replace with a new one.
Install snap ring onto steering knuckle.
SDIA0591E
FAX-9
http://vnx.su

4.
5.
6.
Use a drift (SST) and a press to install wheel hub.

As shown in the figure, apply a load of 34,324 49,033 N
(3500 5,000 kg, 7718 11,025 lb). Rotate in forward and
reverse directions 10 times each to ensure a good fit.
At a rotation speed of 102 rpm, place a spring balance at the
point where strut is joined (upper-side bolt hole). Measure rotating torque. Refer to FAX-19, "Wheel Bearing" .
Rotating torque
Spring balance
reading
: 1.645 Nm (0.17 kg-m, 15 in-lb) or

less
: 10.6 N (1.1 kg, 2.4 lb) or less
SDIA0592E
NOTE:
If a load of 34,300 49,033 N (3,500 5,000 kg, 7718 11,025 lb) cannot be applied, carry out the following actions.
Assemble drive shaft and tighten wheel hub lock nuts to specified torque. Then rotate in forward and
reverse direction 10 times each to ensure a good fit.
At a rotation speed of 102 rpm, place a spring balance on hub bolt to measure torque.
Rotation torque
Spring balance reading
: 2.215 Nm (0.22 kg-m, 19 in-lb) or less

: 37.2 N (3.8 kg, 8.4 lb) or less
FAX-10
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
PFP:39100
A
EDS0005U
FAX
G
SDIA2333E
1.
Support bearing bracket
4.
Cotter pin
2.
Side flange
3.
Drive shaft
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove tyre from vehicle.

Remove cotter pin. Use a hub lock nut wrench to remove lock
nut.
Remove wheel sensor from steering knuckle. Refer to BRC-114,
"WHEEL SENSORS" .
Use a pitman arm puller to remove tie rod from steering knuckle.
Remove lock plate from strut. Disconnect brake hose from strut.
Refer to BR-11, "Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping
and Brake Hose" .
Remove steering knuckle and strut installation bolts and nuts.
CAUTION:
SFA649A
Do not apply an excessive angle (22 or more) to drive shaft
joint. Firmly support steering knuckle so that slide joint is not excessively extended.
Use a puller to remove drive shaft from steering knuckle.
As shown in the figure, use a wheel wrench or other tool to
remove drive shaft from transaxle.
CAUTION:
When removing drive shaft from vehicle, be careful to
avoid interfering with brake hose, wheel sensor harness,
and other parts.
When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive
angle (22 or more) to drive shaft joint. Also be careful
not to excessively extend slide joint.
Do not lift drive shaft, with axle attached, by grasping
MAA0384D
counter shaft only.
Do not allow drive shaft, with transaxle inserted, to hang down without support for counter
shaft, wheel joints, and other parts.
When the drive shaft listed below have been removed, check that a circular clip is attached to the end.
FAX-11
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

Drive shaft with circular clip
Engine type
Right
Left
QR20DE and QR25DE
YD22DDTi
: Applicable
: Not applicable
Remove installation bolts from right-side drive shaft support bearing bracket. Then remove bracket from
engine.
Remove installation bolts from right-side drive shaft and remove drive shaft from side shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL

Move joint in up/down, left/right, and axial directions. Check for
motion that is not smooth and for significant looseness.
Check for cracking and damage of boots, and for grease leakage.
RAA0030D
INSTALLATION
1.
Install support bearing bracket onto engine and tighten installation bolts to specified torque. Refer to FAX11, "Removal and Installation" .
Install drive shaft to side shaft and tighten installation bolts to specified torque. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal
and Installation" .
In order to prevent damage to differential side oil seal, first fit a
protector onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft. Slide drive
shaft slide joint and tap with a hammer to install securely.
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that circular clip is securely fastened.
Model type
Protector SST No.
RH
KV38107800
LH
KV38105500
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Insert drive shaft into steering knuckle. Install lock nut and then
temporarily tighten lock nut. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and
Installation" .
Install installation bolts for steering knuckle and strut.
Use lock plate to fix brake hose to strut.
Install tie rod to steering knuckle.
Install wheel sensor.
Tighten lock nuts to specified torque. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal
and Installation" .
Install cotter pin.
CAUTION:
Discard the old cotter pin; replace with a new one.
SDIA0593E
SDIA0603E
FAX-12
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

EDS0005V
FAX
J
SDIA2336E
DISASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove boot bands.

Fix shaft to bench vise.
CAUTION:
When fixing shaft to bench vise, be sure to protect it with a copper or aluminum sheet.
Put match marks on shaft and spider assembly.
CAUTION:
Use paint or similar substance for alignment marks. Do not
scratch the surface.
Remove snap ring. Remove spider assembly from shaft.
Remove boot from shaft.
Remove dynamic damper from shaft.
SDIA0594E
FAX-13
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
As shown in the figure, use a bearing replacer (suitable tool) and

puller (suitable tool) to remove sensor rotor from drive shaft.
Press shaft in a vise.
CAUTION:
When retaining shaft in a vise, always use copper or aluminum plates between vise and shaft.
Remove boot bands. Then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
SDIA0595E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Screw a drive shaft puller (suitable tool) 30 mm (1.18 in) or more

into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly
out of shaft.
CAUTION:
If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive
shaft assembly.
Align sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove them
by pulling directly.
Remove circular clip from shaft.
While rotating ball cage, remove old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper towels.
SDIA0606E

Shaft
Replace shaft if there is any runout, cracking or other damage.
Joint Sub-Assembly
Make sure there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.

Make sure there is no foreign material inside joint sub-assembly.
Check joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks or fractures.
CAUTION:
If there are any irregular conditions of joint sub-assembly components, replace the entire joint
sub-assembly.
Slide Joint Side

Housing and spider assembly
If roller or roller surface of spider assembly has scratch or wear, replace housing and spider assembly.
If there is circumferential looseness or rough rotation of spider roller, replace spider assembly.
NOTE:
Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set.
FAX-14
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

ASSEMBLY
Transaxle Side
1.
2.
Wind serrated part of drive shaft with tape. Install boot band and
boot to shaft. Be careful not to damage boot.
CAUTION:
Discard the old boot band and boot: replace with new ones.
Remove protective tape wound around serrated part of shaft.
FAX
SDIA0597E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line up alignment marks which were made when spider assembly was removed. Install spider assembly, with serration chamfer
facing drive shaft.
Secure spider assembly with snap ring.
CAUTION:
Discard the old snap ring: replace with new ones.
Apply Nissan genuine grease or equivalent to spider assembly
and sliding surface.
Install sliding joint housing to spider assembly. Add remaining
grease up to the amount listed below.
Grease amount
7.
SDIA0598E
: 132 - 142 g (4.69 - 5.04 oz)
Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by * marks) shown

in the figure.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by *
marks) of joint, boot may come off. Remove all grease from
surfaces.
SDIA0599E
8.
Check that boot installation length L is the length indicated

below. Insert flat bladed screwdriver or similar tool into smaller
side of boot. Remove air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length:

84 - 86 mm (3.31 - 3.39 in)
CAUTION:
Boot may break if boot installation length is less than
standard value.
Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside
surface of boot.
FAX-15
http://vnx.su
SDIA0600E
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

9.
Secure big and small ends of boot with new boot bands as
shown in figure.
CAUTION:
Rotate housing and check that boot installation position
does not change. If position changes, reinstall boot bands.
SDIA0601E
Wheel Side
1.
2.
Use a drift (SST) to press-fit sensor rotor into joint sub-assembly.

CAUTION:
Discard the old sensor rotor; replace with a new one.
Insert the amount of grease (NISSAN genuine grease or equivalent) into joint sub-assembly serration hole until grease begins to
ooze from ball groove and serration hole. After inserting grease,
use a shop cloth to wipe off old grease that has oozed out.
SDIA0619E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wind serrated part of shaft with tape. Install new boot band and
CAUTION:
Discard old boot band; replace with new ones.
Attach new circular clip to shaft. At this time, circular clip must fit
securely into shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Discard old circular clip; replace with new ones.
Insert the amount of new grease (NISSAN genuine grease or
equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot.
Grease amount
: 115 125 (4.01 4.41 oz)
FAX-16
http://vnx.su
SFA800
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

7.
8.

in the figure.
CAUTION:
If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by*
marks) of shaft and housing, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surface.
Make sure boot installation length L is the length indicated
below. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool into smaller
side of boot. Bleed air from boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length L : 100 103 mm (3.94
4.06 in)
9.
C
SDIA1505E
FAX
CAUTION:
Boot may brake if boot installation length is than standard value.
Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
Install new larger and smaller boot bands securely with a suitable tool.
H
RAC1133D
CAUTION:
Secure boot band so that dimension M shown at right
satisfies the following:
Dimension M
: 2.0 3.0 mm (0.079 0.018 in)
10. After installing housing and shaft, rotate boot to check whether
or not the actual position is correct, secure boot with new boot
bands again.
L
DSF0047D
Dynamic Damper
When dynamic damper has been removed, secure with bands

as shown in the figure so that measurements from fixed-joint
side are as listed below.
CAUTION:
Discard the old dynamic damper: replace with a new one.
FAC0156D
FAX-17
http://vnx.su
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT

Mounting Dimensions
Drive shaft model
Applied model
ZF100SS86
All
ZF100SS86F+B
LHD: QR20DE A/T models

RHD: QR25DE A/T models
QR25DE: M/T models
Specification
Dimension A
Dimension B
Left
205 - 215 mm (8.07 - 8.46 in)
70 mm (2.76 in)
Right
207 - 213 mm (8.15 - 8.39 in)
QR20DE/YD22DDTi: M/T models
70 mm (2.76 in)
50 mm (1.97 in)
FAX-18
http://vnx.su

Wheel Bearing
PFP:00030
A
EDS000IG
Axial end play
0.05 mm (0.0020 in)
Rotating torque
1.645 Nm (0.17 kg-m, 15 in-lb) or less
10.6 N (1.1 kg, 2.4 lb) or less
Installation location of spring scale
FAX
SDIA0148E
Drive Shaft
EDS000IH
ZF100SS86, ZF100SS86F, ZF100SS86F+B

Joint type
Transaxle side
115 - 125 g (4.01 - 4.41 oz)
132 - 142 g (4.69 - 5.04 oz)
100 - 103 mm (3.94 - 4.06 in)
84 - 86 mm (3.31 - 3.39 in)
Grease amount
Boot length
Dynamic Damper
Drive shaft model
Wheel side
EDS000II
Applied model
ZF100SS86
ALL
ZF100SS86F+ B
RHD: QR25DE A/T models

QR25DE: M/T models
Specification
Dimension A
Dimension B
Left
205 - 215 mm (8.07 - 8.46 in)
70 mm (2.76 in)
Right
267 - 273 mm (10.51 - 10.75 in)
QR20DE/YD22DDTi M/T models
70 mm (2.76 in)
50 mm (1.97 in)
FAC0156D
FAX-19
http://vnx.su
FAX-20
http://vnx.su
REAR AXLE
D DRIVELINE/AXLE
SECTION
RAX
REAR AXLE
RAX
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Caution ..................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
WHEEL HUB (4WD) ................................................... 6
REAR WHEEL BEARING ..................................... 6
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 7
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 8
REAR DRIVE SHAFT ............................................... 10

REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 11
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 12
Wheel Bearing ........................................................ 15
Drive Shaft .............................................................. 15
RAX-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
PFP:00001
EDS00060
When installing rubber parts, final tightening must be carried out under unladen condition* with tires on
ground.
*: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
After installing removed suspension parts, check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing drive shaft.
Perform work in a location which is as dust-free and dirt-free as possible.
Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
The disassembly and service location must be clean. Care must be taken to prevent parts from becoming
dirty and to prevent the entry of foreign objects.
Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean
cover must be placed over parts.
Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with kerosene which shall be removed by
blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
RAX-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EDS00061
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV40104100
Attachment

assembly
RAX
ZZA0804D
E
ST36230000
Sliding hammer

assembly
F
ZZA0803D
G
ST33061000
Drift
a: 28.5 mm (1.122 in) dia.
b: 38.0 mm (1.496 in) dia.

bearings
ZZA0969D
I
ST15242000
Drift
b: 69 mm (2.72 in) dia.
ZZA0881D
KV40105310
Drift
a: 75 mm (2.95 in) dia.
b: 62 mm (2.44 in) dia.
Installing wheel hubs
M
ZZA1003D
ST30720000
Drift
a: 77.0 mm (3.031 in) dia.
b: 55.5 mm (2.185 in) dia.
ZZA0811D
Drift
ST33200000
a: 60.0 mm (2.362 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
ZZA1002D
RAX-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV38107800
Protector
a: 29 mm (1.41 in) dia.
Installing drive shaft
ZZA0835D
Drift
KV38100500
a: 80 mm (3.15 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
ZZA0701D
KV40101840
Collar
a: 67 mm (2.64 in) dia.
b: 85 mm (3.35 in) dia.
ZZA1113D
RAX-4
http://vnx.su

PFP:00003
A
EDS000FK
Symptom
REAR
AXLE
Noise
Shake
Vibration
Shimmy
Judder
: Applicable
RAX-5
http://vnx.su
C
NVH in PS section.
NVH in BR section.
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart.
ROAD WHEEL
NVH in WT section.
TIRES
NVH in WT section.
REAR AXLE
RAX
STEERING
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
Refer to REAR AXLE in this chart.
NVH in FAX and FSU sections.
NVH in PR section.
RAX-6, RAX-10
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
NVH in RFD section.
Shake
DIFFERENTIAL
Parts interference
PROPELLER SHAFT
DRIVE
SHAFT
Joint sliding resistance
Noise
Imbalance
Reference page
RAX-12
WHEEL HUB (4WD)

WHEEL HUB (4WD)
PFP:43202
EDS00065
Inspect to check that there is no excessive play, cracking, wear, or other damage to rear axle.
Turn rear wheels (left/right) and check the play.
SMA525A
REAR WHEEL BEARING

With vehicle raised, inspect the following.
Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Check that there is no looseness of rear wheel bearing.
Axial end play
: 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
Rotate wheel hub and check that there is no unusual noise or other irregular condition. If there are any
irregular condition, replace wheel bearing.
EDS00066
SDIA0132E
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Lock nut
3.
Wheel hub
4.
Hub bolt
5.
Back plate
6.
Axle housing
7.
Wheel bearing
8.
Snap ring
RAX-6
http://vnx.su
WHEEL HUB (4WD)

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A
Remove tyre.
Remove wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
B
Discard the old hub lock nut; replace with new one.
Remove brake caliper from axle housing and hang it up somewhere.
C
CAUTION:
Avoid depressing the brake pedal while the brake caliper is
removed.
RAX
Remove disc rotor and parking brake assembly from back plate
and axle housing.
SRA711A
Remove wheel sensor from axle housing.
E
Remove axle housing from strut.
Remove nut and bolt from axle housing side of radius rod.
Remove nuts and bolts from axle housing side of front and rear parallel link. Remove axle housing from
F
vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Refer to component parts drawing for tightening torque. For installation, follow removal procedure in
reverse order.
EDS00067
DISASSEMBLY
1.
Set axle housing on bench vise. As shown in the figure, use

attachment (SST) and sliding hammer (SST) to remove wheel
hub and bearing assembly from axle housing.
CAUTION:
When placing onto bench vise, be careful not to damage
strut mounting surface of steering knuckle. Use an aluminum plate or another suitable tool.
K
FAC0104D
2.
3.
4.
Use a bearing replacer (suitable tool), puller (suitable tool), and

drift (SST) to remove inner race of outer-wheel bearing from
wheel hub.
Remove back plate installation bolt and anchor block. Remove
back plate from axle housing. Refer to PB-4, "Components"
Use a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool to remove snap ring.
SDIA0154E
RAX-7
http://vnx.su
WHEEL HUB (4WD)

5.
Use a drift (SST) to remove wheel bearing from axle housing.
SDIA0155E

Wheel Hub
Inspect wheel hub for deformation, cracks, and other damage. If any irregular conditions are found,
replace wheel hub.
Axle Housing
Inspect axle housing for deformation, cracks, and other damage. If any irregular conditions are found,
replace axle housing.
Snap Ring
Check snap ring for deformation, cracks, and other damage. If any irregular conditions are found, replace
snap ring.
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Use a drift (SST) to press fit wheel bearing into axle housing.
CAUTION:
Discard the old wheel bearing; replace with a new one.
Use a flat-bladed screwdriver or similar tool to install the snap
ring.
Install back plate and anchor block onto axle housing. Refer to
PB-4, "Components" .
SDIA1349E
4.
5.
Use a drift (SST) to install wheel hub onto axle housing.

After completing step 4, apply an additional load of 49,030 N
(5,000 kg, 11,025 lb). Rotate axle housing in forward and
reverse directions 10 times each to ensure a good fit.
SDIA0157E
6.
Place a spring balance at the point where the strut is joined (upper side bolt hole) and measure rotating
torque when spring is pulled at a speed of 8 -12 rpm. Refer to the RAX-15, "Wheel Bearing" item.
Rotating torque
: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less

: 12.8 N (1.30 kg, 2.87 lb) or less
NOTE:
If a load of 49,030 N (5,000 kg, 11,025 lb) cannot be applied:
Install to drive shaft and tighten wheel hub lock nut to specified torque. Rotate in forward and reverse
direction 10 times each to ensure a good fit.
At a rotating speed of 8 - 12 rpm, place a spring balance on hub bolt and measure rotating torque.
RAX-8
http://vnx.su
WHEEL HUB (4WD)

Rotating torque
: 1.126 Nm (0.11 kg-m, 10 in-lb)

: 19.70 N (2.01 kg, 4.43 lb)
RAX
RAX-9
http://vnx.su
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

REAR DRIVE SHAFT
PFP:39600
EDS000FL
SDIA0604E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove axle housing. Refer to RAX-7, "REMOVAL" .

NOTE:
In order to remove the rear drive shaft assembly, the rear axle is removed. At this time it is recommended
that front and rear parallel links on axle side be loosened (not removed). This will facilitate wheel alignment inspection and adjustment which are carried out later.
As shown in the figure, use a wheel wrench or similar tool to
remove drive shaft from rear final drive.
DSR0015D
Move the joint in the up/down, left/right, and axial directions. Check for any rough movement or significant
looseness.
Check boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
In order to prevent damage to rear final drive side oil seal, first fit
a protector (SST) onto oil seal before inserting drive shaft. Slide
drive shaft into slide joint and tap with a hammer to install
securely.
CAUTION:
Be sure to check that circular clip is securely fastened.
Install rear axle. Refer to RAX-7, "INSTALLATION" .
DSR0010D
RAX-10
http://vnx.su
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

EDS000FM
RAX
F
SDIA0605E
1.
Sensor rotor
2.
Joint sub assembly
3.
4.
Boot bands
5.
Boot
6.
Shaft
7.
Boot
8.
Boot bands
9.
Spider assembly
10. Snap ring
11. Housing (Slide joint)
Circular clip
12. Circular clip
DISASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove boot bands.

CAUTION:
When fixing shaft to bench vise, be sure to protect it with a copper or aluminum sheet.
Make alignment marks on shaft and spider assembly.
CAUTION:
Use paint or similar substance for alignment marks. Do not
scratch the surface.
Remove snap ring. Remove spider assembly from shaft.
Remove old grease on slide joint assembly with paper towels.
Remove circular clip and dust shield from slide joint assembly.
M
SDIA0594E
Wheel Side
1.
2.
3.
As shown in the figure, use a bearing replacer (suitable tool) and

puller (suitable tool) to remove sensor rotor from drive shaft.
CAUTION:
When fixing shaft to bench vise, be sure to protect it with a
copper or aluminum sheet.
Remove boot bands. Remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
SDIA0595E
RAX-11
http://vnx.su
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

4.
5.
6.
7.
Screw a drive shaft puller (suitable tool) 30 mm (1.18 in) or more

into threaded part of joint sub-assembly. Pull joint sub-assembly
out of shaft.
CAUTION:
If joint sub assembly cannot be removed after five or more
unsuccessful attempts, replace the entire drive shaft
assembly.
Remove circular clip from shaft.
Remove old grease.
SDIA0606E

Shaft
Replace shaft if there is any runout, cracking, or other damage.
Joint Sub-Assembly
Check that there is no rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.

Check that there is no foreign material inside joint.
CAUTION:
If there are any irregular conditions of joint assembly components, replace the entire joint assembly.
Slide Joint Side

Housing and spider assembly
If roller or roller surface of spider assembly has scratch or wear, replace housing and spider assembly.
NOTE:
Housing and spider assembly are components which are used as a set.
ASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side
1.
2.
CAUTION:
Discard the old boot band and boot; replace with new ones.
SDIA0597E
3.
4.
5.
6.
Line up alignment marks which were made when spider assembly was removed. Install spider assembly, with serration chamfer
facing drive shaft.
Secure spider assembly with snap ring.
CAUTION:
Discard the old snap ring; replace with a new one.
Apply grease (Nissan genuine grease or equivalent) to spider
assembly and sliding surface.
Install housing to spider assembly. Add remaining grease (Nissan genuine grease or equivalent) up to the amount listed
below.
Grease amount
: 40 - 50 g (1.41 - 1.77 oz)
RAX-12
http://vnx.su
SDIA0598E
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

7.

in the figure.
CAUTION:
marks) of joint, boot may come off. Remove all grease from
surfaces.
C
SDIA0599E
RAX
8.


78.6 - 80.6 mm (3.094 - 3.173 in)
CAUTION:
Boot may break if boot installation length is less than
standard value.
Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside
surface of boot.
9.
G
SDIA0600E
shown in figure.
CAUTION:
SFA395
Wheel Side
1.
Use a drift (SST) to press-fit sensor rotor into joint sub-assembly.

CAUTION:
Discard the old sensor rotor; replace with a new one.
SDIA0602E
RAX-13
http://vnx.su
REAR DRIVE SHAFT

2.
3.
CAUTION:
Discard the old boot band and boot; replace with new ones.
SDIA0597E
4.
5.
Attach circular clip to shaft. At this time, circular clip must fit
securely into the shaft groove. Attach nut to joint sub-assembly.
Use a wooden hammer to press-fit.
CAUTION:
Discard the old circular clip; replace with a new one.
Insert the amount of grease (Nissan genuine grease or equivalent) listed below into housing from large end of boot.
Grease amount
: 35 - 45 g (1.23 - 1.59 oz)

RAC0049D
6.
7.

in the figure.
CAUTION:
marks) of joint sub-assembly, boot may come off. Remove
all grease from surfaces.
66.7 - 68.7 mm (2.626 - 2.705 in)
SDIA0607E
CAUTION:
Boot may break if boot installation length is less than standard value.
Be careful that screwdriver tip does not contact inside surface of boot.
shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
8.
SFA395
RAX-14
http://vnx.su

Wheel Bearing
Rotation torque
PFP:00030
A
EDS000ID
1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 in-lb) or less
12.8 N (1.30 kg) or less
C
Installation location of spring balance
mm (in)
RAX
SDIA0148E
Axial end play
0.05 mm (0.0020 in) or less
Drive Shaft
Specified amount of grease
Boot length
EDS000IE
Final drive side
40 - 50 g (1.41 - 1.77 oz)
Wheel side
35 - 45 g (1.23 - 1.59 oz)
Final drive side (L2 )
78.6 - 80.6 mm (3.094 - 3.173 in)
Wheel side (L1 )
66.7 - 68.7 mm (2.626 - 2.705 in)
J
SDIA0618E
RAX-15
http://vnx.su
RAX-16
http://vnx.su
FRONT SUSPENSION
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
FSU
FRONT SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Caution ..................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ........................... 5
Components ............................................................. 5
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service .......................... 6
LOOSENESS, BACKLASH AND DAMAGE OF
MOUNTING PARTS AND CONNECTIONS .......... 6
Wheel Alignment ...................................................... 6
DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 6
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6
INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER, AND
KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES ........................ 6
STEERING ANGLE INSPECTION ........................ 7
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER ................. 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 8
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY .................. 8
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9
TRANSVERSE LINK ................................................. 10
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
STABILIZER BAR ..................................................... 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 11
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ............................. 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Wheel Alignment (Unladen) .................................... 13
Ball Joint ................................................................. 13
Wheelarch Height (Unladen) .................................. 13
FSU-1
http://vnx.su
FSU
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
PFP:00001
EES0006Z
When installing rubber bushings, final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on flat, level ground. Oil will shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
Unladen condition means that fuel, coolant and lubricant are full and ready for drive. However, spare tire,
jack, and hand tools should be unloaded.
After installing the removed suspension parts, always check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
Replace the caulking nut with a new one. Install a new nut without wiping the oil off before tightening.
FSU-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EES00070
Tool number
Tool name
Description
HT7252000
Ball joint remover
Removing tie-rod outer and lower ball

joint
D
S-NT146
FSU
ST3127S000
Preload gauge
Measuring ball joint sliding torque
F
ZZA0806D
KV991040S1
CCK gauge attachment
1. KV99104020 Adapter A
2. KV99104030 Adapter B
3. KV99104040 Adapter C
4. KV99104050 Adapter D
5. KV99104060 Plate
6. KV99104070 Guide bolt
7. KV99104080 Spring
8. KV99104090 Center plate
Measuring wheel alignment
ZZA1167D
J
ST35652000
Strut attachment
Disassembling and assembling strut
K
ZZA0807D
EES000JC
Tool name
Description
M
Attachment wheel alignment
a: screw M24 x 1.5 pitch
b: 35 mm (1.38 in) dia.
c: 65 mm (2.56 in) dia.
d: 56 mm (2.20 in) dia.
e: 12 mm (0.47 in) dia.
Measure wheel alignment
S-NT148
FSU-3
http://vnx.su
Symptom
Vibration
Shimmy
Judder
: Applicable
http://vnx.su
FSU-4
NVH in WT section.
NVH in RAX section.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in PS section.
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
ROAD WHEEL
NVH in WT section.
TIRES
NVH in RAX and RSU section.
NVH in RFD section.
DIFFERENTIAL
NVH in PR section
PROPELLER SHAFT
FSU-11
Shake
Stabilizer bar fatigue
FSU-6
Incorrect wheel alignment
FSU-5
Parts interference
Suspension looseness
Bushing or mounting deterioration
Noise
Spring fatigue
FSU-8
FRONT SUSPENSION
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection

FSU-5
Reference page

PFP:00003
EES000ID
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

Components
PFP:54010
A
EES00071
FSU
SEIA0568E
FSU-5
http://vnx.su

1.
Upper mounting plate
2.
Strut spacer
3.
Strut mounting insulator
4.
Strut mounting insulator bracket
5.
Thrust bearing
6.
Spring upper seat
7.
Upper rubber seat
8.
Bound bumper
9.
Coil spring
10. Strut
11. Axle assembly
12. Cotter pin
13. Clamp
14. Bushing
15. Stabilizer bar
16. Washer
17. Connecting rod
18. Suspension member
19. Member pin stay
20. Transverse link
21. Steering stopper bracket
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
EES00072
LOOSENESS, BACKLASH AND DAMAGE OF MOUNTING PARTS AND CONNECTIONS

Lift vehicle and inspect the following:
Check mounting point of each component for looseness, backlash and damage.
Check lower ball joint end play.

1. Attach a dial gauge so that the contact rests on the brake caliper.
2. Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position. Do not depress brake pedal.
3. Measure axial end play by placing an iron pry bar or something similar between transverse link and steering knuckle.
Axial endplay
4.
: 0 mm (0 in)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
If axial end play is outside the standard, remove transverse link and check lower ball joint.
Wheel Alignment
EES00073
DESCRIPTION
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions. Unladen conditions means that fuel, coolant, and
lubricant are full. However, spare tyre, jack, and hand tools should be unloaded.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check the tyre for improper air pressure and wear.

Check road wheels for runout.
Check wheel bearing axial endplay.
Check lower ball joint axial endplay.
Check strut operation.
Check each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation.
Check each link and arm for cracks, deformation, and other damage.
Check the vehicle posture.
INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER, AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES
1.
Camber, caster, and kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted.

Before inspection, mount front wheels onto turning radius gauge. Mount rear wheels onto a stand that has
same height so the vehicle will remain horizontal.
Measure camber, caster and kingpin inclination of both right and
left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge.
Camber, caster and kingpin inclination:
FSU-13, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS)"
2.
If camber, caster or kingpin inclination is not within specification,

inspect front suspension parts. Replace dam-aged or worn out
parts.
SRA096A
FSU-6
http://vnx.su

Toe-in
A
Measure toe-in using the following procedure.

WARNING:
Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before

pushing it.
1. Bounce front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture.
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of tread (rear side) of both tyre at the
same height as hub center. These are measuring points.
AFA050
4.
5.
6.
Measure distance A (rear side).

Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180degrees
(1/2 turn).
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try
the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push
vehicle backward.
Measure distance B (front side).
Total toe-in:
FSU-13, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS)"
FSU
G
SFA234AC
STEERING ANGLE INSPECTION

1.
2.
Set wheels in straight-ahead position. Move vehicle to set front wheels on turning radius gauge.
Turn steering wheel fully to right and left, and measure steering angle. Refer to PS-45, "SERVICE DATA
AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
FSU-7
http://vnx.su
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER

PFP:54302
EES00074
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tyre. Remove brake caliper and hung it aside.

CAUTION:
Avoid depressing brake pedal with brake caliper removed.
Remove electrical wires of wheel sensor from strut.
Remove brake hose lock plate.
Remove mounting bolts and nuts securing steering knuckle to strut.
Remove mounting nuts on upper mounting plate and remove upper mounting plate and strut from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Refer to FSU-5, "Components" in Front Suspension Assembly for tightening torque. Tighten in the
reverse order of removal.
Be sure arrows on strut mount insulator and spring upper seat
are positioned as shown. Also be sure notch in strut spacer is
positioned as shown. Then install strut.
Assemble upper mounting plate with its notch facing toward the
outside.
SEIA0123E
EES00075
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install strut attachment (SST) to strut and fix it in a vise.

CAUTION:
When installing strut attachment (SST), wrap a shop cloth
around strut to protect it from damage.
Slightly loosen piston rod lock nut.
WARNING:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut completely. If it is
removed completely, coil spring jumps out and may cause
serious damage or injury.
Compress coil spring using a spring compressor.
SEIA0124E
WARNING:
Make sure that the pawls of the two spring compressors are firmly hooked on the spring. The
spring compressors must be tightened alternately so as not to tilt the spring.
After making sure coil spring is free between upper and lower seats after Step 3. Remove piston rod lock
nut.
Remove small parts on strut.
Remove strut spacer, strut mount insulator, strut mounting insulator bracket thrust bearing, spring upper
seat, and upper rubber seat. Then remove coil spring.
Remove bound bumper from spring upper seat.
Gradually release spring compressor (commercial service tool), and remove coil spring.

Strut
Check strut for deformation, cracks, and damage, and replace if necessary.
Check piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion, and replace if necessary.
Check welded and sealed areas for oil leakage, and replace if necessary.
FSU-8
http://vnx.su

Insulator and Rubber Parts
A
Check strut mount insulator for cracks and rubber parts for wear. Replace them if necessary.
Coil Spring
Check for cracks, wear, and damage, and replace if necessary.
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (commercial

service tool), and install it onto the strut.
C
CAUTION:
Face tube side of coil spring downward. Align lower end to
spring seat as shown in the figure.
D
WARNING:
Be sure spring compressor is securely attached to coil
spring. Compress coil spring.
FSU
Connect bound bumper to spring upper seat.
CAUTION:
SEIA0125E
Be sure to install bound bumper to spring upper seat
F
securely.
When installing bound bumper, use soapy water. Do not use machine oil or other lubricants.
Install small parts to the strut.
G
Connect upper rubber seat, spring upper seats, thrust bearing, strut mount insulator, and strut spacer.
Temporarily install piston rod lock nut.
CAUTION:
H
Do not reuse piston rod lock nut.
Be sure arrows on strut mount insulator and spring upper seat
are positioned as shown. Also be sure notch in the strut spacer
I
is positioned as shown.
Be sure coil spring is properly set in spring rubber seat. Gradually release spring compressor.
J
CAUTION:
Be sure upper rubber seat is properly aligned to spring
upper seat and coil spring.
K
Tighten piston rod lock nut to the specified torque.
SEIA0123E
7.
Remove strut attachment (SST).
SEIA0124E
FSU-9
http://vnx.su
TRANSVERSE LINK
TRANSVERSE LINK
PFP:54500
EES00076
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove steering knuckle from transverse link. Refer to FAX-7, "REMOVAL" .

Remove mounting nuts and washers on lower portion of stabilizer connecting rod.
Slightly loosen transverse link mounting bolts.
Remove transverse link mounting bolts and nuts, and remove transverse link from suspension member.

Visual Inspection
Check transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks, and other damage. Replace the entire transverse
link assembly if cracks, deformation or any other damage is found.
Ball Joint Inspection

CAUTION:
Before measurement, move the ball joint at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Swing Torque Inspection
Hook spring scale at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm spring

scale measurement value is within specifications when ball stud
begins moving.
Swing force:
0.50 - 3.4 Nm (0.06 - 0.34 kg-m, 5 - 30 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance:
7.94 - 53.97 N (0.81 - 5.50 kg, 1.79 - 12.2 lb)
If the value is outside the standard, replace transverse link.

SEIA0122E
Rotating Torque Inspection
Attach mounting nut to ball stud. Check that rotating torque is

within specifications with a preload gauge (SST).
Rotating torque:
0.50 - 3.4 Nm (0.06 - 0.34 kg-m, 5 - 30 in-lb)
If the value is outside the standard, replace transverse link.
FAC1021D
Axial Endplay Inspection
Move tip of ball joint in axial direction to check for looseness.

Axial endplay
: 0.1 mm (0.004 in) or less
If any looseness is noted, replace transverse link.
INSTALLATION
Refer to FSU-5, "Components" for tightening torque. Tighten in the reverse order of removal.
Tighten transverse link mounting bolts with vehicle unladen and all four tyre on flat, level ground.
After installation, check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Wheel Alignment" .
FSU-10
http://vnx.su
STABILIZER BAR
STABILIZER BAR
PFP:54611
A
EES000HH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove mounting nuts on upper portion of stabilizer connecting rod.

Remove stabilizer clamp mounting bolts.
Remove stabilizer from the vehicle.

Check stabilizer, connecting rod, bushing and clamp for deformation, cracks and damage, and replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Refer to FSU-5, "Components" in the reverse order of removal.

Stabilizer uses pillow ball type connecting rod. Position ball joint
with case on pillow ball head parallel to stabilizer.
FSU
SFA449BB
FSU-11
http://vnx.su
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER

FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
PFP:54401
EES00078
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove tyre. Raise vehicle.

Remove mounting nut on lower portion of stabilizer connecting rod from transverse link.
Remove transverse link from suspension member, and move the transverse link outward.
Remove front exhaust tube mounting rubber from suspension member.
Support engine or transmission with a jack.
Remove center member from vehicle. Refer to TF-57, "TRANSFER ASSEMBLY"
Remove steering gear mounting bolts. Remove steering gear and power steering tube bracket from suspension member.
8. Hang steering gear.
9. Remove rear engine mount insulator from suspension member.
10. Remove body-side mounting bolts from member pin stay.
11. Set a jack under suspension member, and remove suspension member mounting nuts.
12. Slowly lower jack to remove suspension member from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Refer to FSU-5, "Components" for tightening torque in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, perform final tightening of each part under unladen conditions with tyre on ground.
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Wheel Alignment" .
FSU-12
http://vnx.su

PFP:00030
A
EES000J6
Suspension type
Independent Macpherson strut
Shock absorber type
Double-acting hydraulic
Stabilizer bar
Standard equipment
Wheel Alignment (Unladen)
EES00079
Drive type
4WD
Engine type
QR20DE and QR25DE
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Caster
Kingpin offset
Total toe-in
Distance (A - B)
YD22DDTi
Minimum
054 ( 0.9)
Nominal
024 ( 0.4)
Maximum
036 (0.6)
Left and right difference
45 (0.75)
Minimum
142 (1.7)
Nominal
227 (2.45)
Maximum
312 (3.2)
Left and right difference
45 (0.75)
Minimum
1206 (12.1)
Nominal
1330 (13.5)
Maximum
1336 (13.6)
Minimum
0 mm (0 in)
Nominal
1 mm (0.04 in)
Maximum
2 mm (0.08 in)
FSU
Refer to PS-45, "Steering Angle" .
Wheel turning angel
J
: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Ball Joint
EES0007A
Swing torque
0.5 - 3.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.35 kg-m, 5 - 30 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance (cotter pinhole position)
7.94 - 53.97 N (0.81 - 5.50 kg, 1.79 - 12.2 lb)
Turning torque
0.5 - 3.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.35 kg-m, 5 - 30 in-lb)
Axial endplay
Wheelarch Height (Unladen)
EES000J9
SFA818A
Applied model
QR20DE and QR25DE engine
YD22DDTi engine
215/70R15 and 215/65R16
215/65R16
Front (Hf)
773 mm (30.43 in)
771 mm (30.35 in)
Rear (Hr)
786 mm (30.94 in)
785 mm (30.91 in)
FSU-13
http://vnx.su

: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
FSU-14
http://vnx.su
REAR SUSPENSION
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
RSU
REAR SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Caution ..................................................................... 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Special Service Tools(SST) ...................................... 3
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ............................. 5
Components ............................................................. 5
Wheel Alignment ...................................................... 6
DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 6
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ............................... 6
CAMBER ............................................................... 6
TOE-IN .................................................................. 6
COIL SPRING AND STRUT ....................................... 8
REMOVAL ............................................................. 8
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 8
DISASSEMBLY ..................................................... 8
ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 9
FRONT PARALLEL LINK ......................................... 10

REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
REAR PARALLEL LINK ........................................... 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 11
RADIUS ROD ............................................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER ............................... 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Wheel Alignment (Unladen) .................................... 14
Wheelarch Height (Unladen) .................................. 14
RSU-1
http://vnx.su
RSU
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
Caution
PFP:00001
EES0007C
Final tightening of bushings must be carried out under unladen condition with tyre on the ground. Oil will
shorten life of bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
Unladen condition means that fuel, coolant and lubricant are full and ready for drive. However, spare
tyre, jack, and hand tools should be unloaded.
After installing the removed suspension parts, always check wheel alignment and adjust if necessary.
Replace the caulking nut with a new one. Install a new nut without wiping the oil off before tightening.
RSU-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools(SST)
PFP:00002
A
EES0007D
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST3565 2000
Strut attachment
Disassembling and assembling strut
D
ZZA0807D
EES000JD
Tool name
RSU
Description
F
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
G
S-NT717
RSU-3
http://vnx.su
Symptom
Vibration
Shimmy
Judder
Poor quality ride or

handling
: Applicable
http://vnx.su
RSU-4
NVH in RFD section.

NVH in WT section.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in RAX section.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in PS section.
DIFFERENTIAL
TIRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
STEERING
NVH in PR section.
PROPELLER SHAFT
RSU-5
Stabilizer bar fatigue
RSU-6
Spring fatigue
Incorrect wheel alignment
Parts interference
Shake
RSU-5
Bushing or mounting deterioration
Noise
Suspension looseness
RSU-8
REAR SUSPENSION
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection

RSU-5
Reference page

PFP:00003
EES000IE
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

Components
PFP:55020
A
EES0007E
RSU
SEIA0569E
RSU-5
http://vnx.su

1.
Strut spacer
2.
Strut mounting insulator
3.
Strut mounting insulator bracket
4.
Upper rubber seat
5.
Bound bumper
6.
Coil spring
7.
Strut
8.
Rear axle assembly
9.
Rear suspension member
10. Member stopper
11. member stopper
13. Rear parallel link
14. Toe-in adjusting bolt
12. Washer
15. Front parallel link
16. Radius rod
17. Stabilizer bar
18. Clamp
19. Bushing
20. Connecting rod
EES0007F
Check axle and suspension parts for excessive play, wear, and damage.
Move rear wheels (RH/LH) to check abnormal free play.
Retighten all nuts and bolts to the specified torque.
Check strut for oil leakage and damage.
Wheel Alignment
EES0007G
DESCRIPTION
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions. Unladen conditions means that fuel, coolant, and
lubricant are full. However, spare tyre, jack, and hand tools should be unloaded.
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the tyre for improper air pressure and wear.

Check road wheels for runout.
Check wheel bearing axial endplay.
Check strut operation.
Check each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation.
Check each link and arm for cracks, deformation, and other damage.
Check the vehicle posture.
CAMBER
Camber is preset at factory and cannot be adjusted.
Camber
: RSU-14, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)"
If the camber is not within specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn rear suspension parts.
TOE-IN
Measure toe-in using the following procedure.
Always perform following procedure on a flat surface.
Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce rear of vehicle up and down to stabilize the posture.
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of tread (rear side) of both tyre at the
same height as hub center. This mark is a measuring points.
AFA050
RSU-6
http://vnx.su

4.
5.
6.
Measure distance A (rear side).

Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180 degrees
(1/2 turn).
If the wheels have rotated more than 180 degrees (1/2 turn), try
the above procedure again from the beginning. Never push
vehicle backward.
Measure distance B (front tyre).
Total toe-in:
Refer toRSU-14, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
7.
C
SFA234AC
If measured value is outside standard, adjust it with adjusting

bolt on rear parallel link.
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust equally on RH and LH side with adjusting
bolt.
RSU
G
SEIA0126E
RSU-7
http://vnx.su
COIL SPRING AND STRUT

PFP:55302
EES0007H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tyre.
Remove brake hose lock plate and remove brake hose from strut.
Remove mounting nuts and washers on upper portion of stabilizer connecting rod.
Remove strut-to-axle housing mounting bolts and nuts.
Remove luggage side lower finisher in luggage compartment. Remove mounting nuts on strut spacer.
Then remove strut from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Refer to RSU-5, "Components" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal.
EES0007I
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install strut attachment (SST) to strut and fix it in a vise.

CAUTION:
When installing a strut attachment (SST), cover strut with
shop cloth to avoid damage.
Remove cap and slightly loosen piston rod lock nut.
CAUTION:
Do not remove piston rod lock nut completely. If it is
removed completely, coil spring jumps out and may cause
serious damage or injury.
Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (commercial
SEIA0124E
service tool).
CAUTION:
Be sure spring compressor is securely attached to coil spring. Compress coil spring.
After making sure coil spring is free between upper and lower seats after Step 3. Remove piston rod lock
nut.
Remove small parts on strut.
Remove strut spacer, strut mounting insulator, strut mounting insulator bracket, spring upper seat,
upper rubber seat, and bound bumper. Then remove coil spring from strut.
Gradually release spring compressor, and remove coil spring.

Strut
Check strut for deformation, cracks, and damage, and replace if necessary.
Check piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion, and replace if necessary.
Check welded and sealed areas for oil leakage, and replace if necessary.
Insulator and Rubber parts.
Check strut mount insulator for cracks and rubber parts for wear. Replace them if necessary.
Coil Spring
Check coil spring for cracks, deformation, and damage, and replace if necessary.
RSU-8
http://vnx.su

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (SST), and

install it onto the strut.
CAUTION:
Install coil spring with its identification paint facing down.
Align its lower end with spring seat on strut as shown at
left.
Be sure spring compressor is securely attached to coil
spring. Compress coil spring.
Install small parts to the strut.
Attach bound bumper, upper rubber seat, spring upper seat,
strut mount insulator and strut spacer. Position piston rod lock
nut.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston rod lock nut.
SEIA0127E
RSU
As shown in the figure, set spring upper seat. Mark on it

should face outside of vehicle.
Be sure coil spring is properly set in upper and lower rubber
seats. Gradually release a spring compressor (SST).
CAUTION:
Be sure upper and lower rubber seats are properly aligned
to strut, coil spring, and spring upper seat.
Tighten piston rod lock nut to the specified torque.
Remove strut attachment (SST).
H
SEIA0128E
RSU-9
http://vnx.su
FRONT PARALLEL LINK

FRONT PARALLEL LINK
PFP:55120
EES0007J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove tyre, Raise vehicle.

Remove wheel sensor wire.
Remove front parallel link mounting bolts and nuts. Remove front parallel link from vehicle.
Replace front parallel link assembly if it is in following condition: deformed, cracked, or damaged, or if the
bushing was damaged.
INSTALLATION
Refer to RSU-5, "Components" for tightening torque and reverse the removal procedure for installation.
RSU-10
http://vnx.su
REAR PARALLEL LINK

REAR PARALLEL LINK
PFP:55121
A
EES0007K
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove rear parallel link mounting bolts and nuts. Remove it from vehicle.
If rear parallel link has deformation, cracks, or damage, replace rear parallel link assembly. If its busing
has damage, also replace rear parallel link assembly.
INSTALLATION
D
Suspension member-side mounting bolt is also used as toe-in adjusting bolt. Tighten bolt with vehicle
unladen and tires on the ground. After tightened, be sure to carry out toe-in adjustment. Refer to RSU-6,
RSU
"TOE-IN" .
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust equally on RH and LH side with adjusting bolt.
F
RSU-11
http://vnx.su
RADIUS ROD
RADIUS ROD
PFP:55110
EES0007L
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove radius rod mounting bolts and nuts and remove radius rod from vehicle.
Check radius rod and busing for deformation, cracks, and damage, and replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
RSU-12
http://vnx.su
REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER

REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER
PFP:55501
A
EES0007M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Remove tyre. Raise vehicle.

B
Remove cotter pin. Remove wheel hub lock nut by using a wheel hub lock nut wrench.
Remove wheel sensor and wiring.
Remove brake caliper and brake hose lock plate, and hang them aside.
C
Remove mounting bolts and nuts on lower portion of strut.
Remove axle-side mounting bolts of parallel link and remove rear drive shaft from axle housing.
Remove suspension member-side mounting bolt of parallel link and remove parallel link from suspension D
member.
Remove mounting bolts and nuts on lower portion of strut.
RSU
CAUTION:
After removing drive shaft, position axle housing onto strut.
Remove propeller shaft.
F
Remove rear exhaust tube.
Remove electronically controlled coupling connector and air breather hose from final drive.
Set a jack under rear final drive.
G
Remove front and rear mounting bolts from rear final drive.
Remove rear final drive from suspension member.
Place jack onto rear suspension member. Remove rear suspension member mounting bolts. Lower jack H
slowly to remove rear suspension member from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Refer to RSU-5, "Components" for tightening torque. Install in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, perform final tightening of each part under unladen conditions with tyre on ground.
Check wheel alignment. RSU-6, "Wheel Alignment" .
RSU-13
http://vnx.su

PFP:00030
EES000J7
Suspension type
Parallel link and strut
Shock absorber type
Double-acting hydraulic
Wheel Alignment (Unladen)

Camber
Total Toe-in
Distance (A - B)
EES0007N
Minimum
125 ( 1.42)
Nominal
040 ( 0.67)
Maximum
005 (0.08)
Minimum
0 mm (0 in)
Nominal
1 mm (0.04 in)
Maximum
2 mm (0.08 in)
: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tyre, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
Wheelarch Height (Unladen)
EES000J8
SFA818A
QR20DE and QR25DE engine
YD22DDTi engine
215/70R15 and 215/65R16
215/65R16
Front (Hf)
773 mm (30.43 in)
771 mm (30.35 in)
Rear (Hr)
786 mm (30.94 in)
785 mm (30.91 in)
Applied model
: Fuel, radiator coolant and engine oil full. Spare tyre, jack, hand tools and mats in designated positions.
RSU-14
http://vnx.su
ROAD WHEELS & TYRES
E SUSPENSION
SECTION
WT
ROAD WHEELS & TYRES
CONTENTS
ROAD WHEEL ............................................................ 3
Inspection ................................................................. 3
ALUMINUM WHEEL ............................................. 3
STEEL WHEEL ..................................................... 3
ROAD WHEEL AND TYRE ASSEMBLY .................... 4
Balancing Wheels (Adhesion Balance Weight Type)

..... 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 4
Rotation .................................................................... 5
Road Wheel .............................................................. 6
Tire ........................................................................... 6
WT
WT-1
http://vnx.su

PFP:00003
EES000J1
NVH in RFD section.
NVH in RAX and RSU sections.
Refer to TYRES in this chart.
Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart.
NVH in RAX section.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in PS section.
TYRES
ROAD WHEELS
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKE
STEERING
Incorrect tyre size
DIFFERENTIAL
Non-uniformity
NVH in PR section.
Deformation or damage
PROPELLER SHAFT
Uneven tyre wear
Incorrect tyre pressure
Imbalance
Shake
Shimmy
Judder
Poor quality ride

or handling
Noise
Shake
Shimmy, Judder
Poor quality ride

or handling
Vibration
ROAD WHEEL
Symptom
Noise
Reference page
TYRES
Out-of-round
WT-3
: Applicable
WT-2
http://vnx.su
ROAD WHEEL
ROAD WHEEL
Inspection
PFP:40300
A
EES000J2
ALUMINUM WHEEL
1.
2.
a.
b.
Check tyres for wear and improper inflation.

Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If
deformed, remove wheel and check the wheel runout.
Remove tyre from aluminum wheel and mount on a tyre balance
machine.
Set dial indicator as shown in the illustration.
Wheel runout (Dial indicator value):

Refer to WT-6, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)"
SFA975B
WT
STEEL WHEEL
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Check tyres for wear and improper inflation.

Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If
deformed, remove wheel and check the wheel runout.
Remove tyre from steel wheel and mount wheel on a tyre balance machine.
Set two dial indicators as shown in the illustration.
Set each dial indicator to 0.
Rotate wheel and check dial indicators at several points around
the circumference of the wheel.
Calculate runout at each point as shown below.
Radial runout = (A + B)/2
Lateral runout = (C + D)/2
f.
: 0.5 mm (0.020 in)

: 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Select maximum positive runout value and the maximum negative value.
Add the two values to determine total runout.
In case a positive or negative value is not available, use the
maximum value (negative or positive) for total runout.
If the total runout value exceeds the limit, replace steel wheel.
Wheel runout:
Refer to WT-6, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)"
L
SFA981B
WT-3
http://vnx.su
ROAD WHEEL AND TYRE ASSEMBLY

Balancing Wheels (Adhesion Balance Weight Type)
PFP:40300
EES000QZ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove inner and outer balance weights from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch road wheel during removal.
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from road wheel.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch road wheel during removal.
After removing the double-faced adhesive tape, wipe off traces of releasing agents from road
wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
a.
b.
If a tyre balance machine has both an adhesion balance weight mode setting and a drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for road wheels.
Set road wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tyre balance machine.
When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with
a value closest to the calculated value above and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the
designated angle in relation to road wheel.
CAUTION:
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the
mating surface of road wheel.
Indicated unbalance value 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) = 40 g (1.41 oz) balance
weight (closer to calculated a balance weight value)
Note that a balance weight value must be closer to the calculated balance weight value.
Example:
37.4 = 35 g (1.23 oz)
37.5 = 40 g (1.41 oz)
SMA054D
Install balance weight in the position shown in the figure.
When installing balance weights to road wheels, set it into the
grooved area on the inner wall of road wheel as shown in the figure so that the balance weight center is aligned with the wheel
balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Always use genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
Do not install more than three sheets of balance weight.
SEIA0166E
WT-4
http://vnx.su

c.
3.
4.
5.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install

two balance weight sheets in line with each other (as shown in
the figure).
CAUTION:
Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
Start wheel balancer again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION:
Do not install more than two balance weights.
Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual
unbalance values are 10 g (0.35 oz) each or below.
If either residual unbalance value exceeds 10 g (0.35 oz), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance):
Maximum allowable
unbalance
Dynamic (At rim flange)

Static (At rim flange)
SMA056D
WT
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz) (one side)

Less than 20 g (0.70 oz)
Rotation
F
EES000J3
After rotating the tyres, adjust the tyre pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for
1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tyre, etc.).
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten the wheel nuts diagonally
by dividing the work two to three times in order to prevent
the wheels from developing any distortion.
Tightening torque of wheel nut:

98 - 118 Nm (10 - 12 kg-m, 72 - 87 ft-lb)
SMA829C
WT-5
http://vnx.su

Road Wheel
EES0023W
Allowable value
Standard item
Aluminum
Steel
Lateral deflection
Less than 0.3 mm

(0.012 in)
Less than 0.5 mm

(0.020 in)
Vertical deflection
Less than 0.3 mm

(0.012 in)
Less than 0.8 mm

(0.031 in)
Deflection limit
Allowable quantity of
residual unbalance
PFP:00030
Dynamic
(At rim flange)
Less than 10g (0.35 oz) (one side)
Static
(At rim flange)
Less than 20g (0.70 oz)
Tire
EES0023X
Unit: kPa (kg/cm , psi)
Tire size
Air pressure
Front tire
Rear tire
215/60R17 96H
200 (2.0, 29)
200 (2.0, 29)
215/65R16 98H
215/65R16 98S
220 (2.2, 29)
220 (2.2, 29)
215/70R15 98H
215/70R15 98S
200 (2.0, 29)
200 (2.0, 29)
WT-6
http://vnx.su
BRAKE SYSTEM
F BRAKES
SECTION
BR
BRAKE SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
BRAKE PEDAL .......................................................... 6
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment .................... 6
Components ............................................................. 7
REMOVAL ............................................................. 7
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ......................... 7
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 7
BRAKE FLUID ............................................................ 8
Checking Brake Fluid Level ..................................... 8
Checking Brake Line ................................................ 8
Changing Brake Fluid ............................................... 8
Bleeding Brake System ............................................ 9
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE .................................... 10
Hydraulic Piping ..................................................... 10
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and
Brake Hose .............................................................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and
Brake Hose ............................................................ 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Inspection ............................................................... 13
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .................................. 14
Components ........................................................... 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................... 14
MODELS WITHOUT ESP (PISTON STOPPER
APPLIED.) ........................................................... 15
MODELS WITHOUT ESP (PISTON STOPPER
NOT APPLIED.) .................................................. 17
MODELS WITH ESP ........................................... 19
BRAKE BOOSTER ................................................... 23
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 23
FUNCTION INSPECTION ................................... 23
AIRTIGHTNESS INSPECTION ........................... 23
REMOVAL ........................................................... 23
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
VACUUM LINES ....................................................... 25
Inspection ............................................................... 26
VISUAL INSPECTION ......................................... 26
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION ............................. 26
FRONT DISC BRAKE ............................................... 27
Component ............................................................. 27
Inspection ............................................................... 27
PAD THICKNESS ................................................ 27
Pad Replacement ................................................... 28
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
Caliper Removal and Installation ............................ 28
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 29
Caliper Disassembly and Assembly ....................... 29
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 29
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 30
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 30
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE ................. 31
REAR DISC BRAKE ................................................. 32
Component ............................................................. 32
Inspection ............................................................... 32
PAD WEAR INSPECTION ................................... 32
BR-1
http://vnx.su
BR
Pad Replacement ................................................... 33

REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION .................................................... 33
Caliper Removal and Installation ............................ 34
REMOVAL ........................................................... 34
INSTALLATION .................................................... 34
Caliper Disassembly and Assembly ....................... 34
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 34
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION ............................... 35
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 36

General Specifications ............................................38
Brake Pedal ............................................................38
Check Valve ............................................................38
Brake Booster .........................................................38
Front Disc Brake .....................................................38
Rear Disc Brake ......................................................39
BR-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EFS002F9
C
WARNING:
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
E
BR
harness connectors.
Precautions for Brake System
EFS000BZ
Clean dust on brake pads, shoes, drums, and back plates with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with
compressed air.
Recommended fluid is brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas such as the body. If brake fluid is splashed or spilled
on painted areas, wipe it off and flush the area with water immediately.
Use only clean brake fluid when cleaning master cylinder and disc brake components.
Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene to clean. They will ruin the rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
Always use a flare nut torque wrench to securely tighten brake
tube flare nuts.
Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the related parts. If damage,
deformation or excessive wear is detected, replace affected
parts with new ones.
Before starting operation, be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF
and disconnect the ABS actuator and control module connector
or battery cables.
When installing brake piping, be sure to check torque.
SBR820BA
BR-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EFS00217
Tool number
Tool name
Description
GG94310000
Flare nut torque wench
a: 10 mm (0.39 in)/12 mm (0.47 in)
Removing and installing brake piping
NT406
EFS00218
Tool name
Description
Brake fluid pressure gauge
Measuring fluid pressure
S-NT151
BR-4
http://vnx.su
Symptom
BRAKE
Noise
Shake
Shimmy, Judder
http://vnx.su
BR-5
DIFFERENTIAL
STEERING
DRIVE SHAFT
NVH in PS section
NVH in RAX section
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section
NVH in RFD section
NVH in PR section
BR-30, BR-36
BR-30, BR-35
BR-27, BR-32
BR-27, BR-32 .

ROAD WHEEL
TYRES
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
PROPELLER SHAFT
Drum out of round
Rotor thickness variation
Rotor rust
Rotor deflection
Rotor deformation
Rotor runout
Rotor damage
Rotor imbalance
Shims damaged
Possible cause and

SUSPECTED PARTS
Pads - uneven wear
BR-27, BR-32
Reference page
Pads - damaged

PFP:00003
EFS000TK
B
BR
X: Applicable
BRAKE PEDAL
BRAKE PEDAL
On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment
PFP:46501
EFS000C1
Adjust clearance between dash panel and brake pedal upper surface
to the following dimensions.
SFIA0348E
H1
1.
2.
Brake pedal height
M/T model
156 - 166 mm (6.14 - 6.54 in)
A/T model
164 - 174 mm (6.46 - 6.85 in)
M/T model
80 mm (3.15 in) or more
A/T model
H2
Pedal height when depressed

[With engine running and at a depression force of 490 N (50 kg,110.6
lb)]
Clearance between stopper rubber and threaded end of stop lamp switch
0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.0291 - 0.0772 in)
Pedal play
3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in)
Loosen stop lamp switch by rotating it counter-clockwise by 45.

Loosen input rod lock nut (A), then rotate input rod, set pedal to
the specified height, and tighten lock nut (A).
CAUTION:
Confirm threaded end of input rod remains inside the clevis.
: 16 - 21 Nm (1.6 - 2.2 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb)
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pull pedal by hand and hold it. Press stop lamp switch until its
threaded end contacts the stopper rubber.
While holding it against the stopper rubber, turn the switch clockwise by 45 and secure it.
CAUTION:
Be sure stopper rubber to stop lamp switch screw threaded
end gap (C) is within the specifications.
Check pedal free play.
CAUTION:
Be sure stop lamps go off when pedal is released.
Start engine and check brake pedal depressed height.
SFIA0160E
BR-6
http://vnx.su
BRAKE PEDAL
Components
EFS001CI
BR
SFIA1797E
1.
Snap pin
2.
Stop lamp switch
4.
Clevis pin
5.
Brake pedal assembly
3.
Clip
EFS000C2
REMOVAL
Be careful not to deform brake tube.
1. Remove instrument lower driver panel. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
2. Remove steering column assembly from steering member. Refer to PS-11, "STEERING COLUMN" .
3. Remove stop lamp switch from brake pedal assembly.
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from brake booster clevis.
5. Remove brake pedal assembly mounting nuts. Pull brake booster toward engine compartment to the
extent that does not deform brake tube.
6. Remove brake booster clevis from input rod.
7. Remove the mounting bolts from the bracket, and remove the pedal assembly from the vehicle.
Check brake pedal for the following.
Bent brake pedal
Deformed clevis pin
Cracks in welded area
Cracked or deformed clevis pin stopper
SBR997
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal. Be careful of the following:
Adjust brake pedal assembly after installing it.
BR-7
http://vnx.su
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
Checking Brake Fluid Level
PFP:KN100
EFS000C5
Confirm reservoir tank fluid level is within the specifications

(between MAX and MIN lines).
Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
If warning lamp remains illuminated after parking lever is
released, check brake system for fluid leakage.
SFIA0066J
Checking Brake Line
EFS001C5
CAUTION:
If leakage occurs around joints, retighten or, if necessary, replace damaged parts.
1. Check brake line (tube and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or
other damage. Replace and damaged parts.
2. Check for oil leakage by fully depressing brake pedal while
engine is running.
SBR389C
Changing Brake Fluid
EFS000C3
CAUTION:
Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4.
Always keep fluid level higher than minimum line on reservoir tank.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away water immediately.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to bleed valve.
2. Drain brake fluid gradually from bleed valve of each wheel while
depressing brake pedal.
3. Turn OFF ignition switch. Remove ABS actuator connector.
BRA0007D
BR-8
http://vnx.su
BRAKE FLUID
4.
5.
6.
Be sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank. Refill with

new brake fluid.
Connect a vinyl tube to bleed valve.
Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress
pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve. Release brake pedal.
Repeat this process a few times at 2-3 second intervals until
new brake fluid flows out.
For bleeding procedure. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
C
BRA0006D
Bleeding Brake System
EFS000C4
CAUTION:
Carefully monitor brake fluid level at master cylinder during bleeding operation.
E
Fill reservoir with new brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT 4. Make sure it is full at all times while bleeding air out of system.
Place a container under master cylinder to avoid spillage of brake fluid.

BR
While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level.
For models with ABS, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator connectors or battery ground cable.
G
Bleed air in the following order.

Right rear brake, left front brake, left rear brake, right front brake
1. Turn OFF ignition switch. Remove ABS actuator connector.
H
3. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
I
4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen air bleeder and bleed air.
5. Close bleed valve.
6. Slowly release brake pedal.
J
7. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque.
: 6.9 - 8.8 Nm (0.7 - 0.9 kg-m, 61- 78 in-lb)
8.
Repeat steps 2 - 7. Occasionally refill master cylinder reservoir tank. Be sure to keep it at least half-full.
BR-9
http://vnx.su
BRAKE PIPING AND HOSE

Hydraulic Piping
PFP:46210
EFS000C6
RHD MODELS
SFIA1798E
SFIA1799E
BR-10
http://vnx.su

LHD MODELS
A
BR
SFIA2137E
L
SFIA2138E
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose
EFS000C7
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not allow brake fluid to spill or splash on painted surfaces. Brake fluid can seriously damage
paint. If it gets on a painted surface, wipe it off immediately and wash it away with water.
Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
Cover brake fluid line joints to prevent dust and other foreign material.
2. Drain brake fluid gradually from bleed valve of each wheel while depressing brake pedal.
BR-11
http://vnx.su

3.
4.
5.
Using a flare nut wrench, loosen brake tube flare nuts and disconnect brake tube from brake hose.
Remove union bolts and disconnect caliper assembly from
brake hose.
First remove lock spring from brake tube and strut mounting
positions. Then remove brake hose.
SFIA0347E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Refill with new brake fluid DOT 3 or DOT4.

1. Connect brake hose to caliper assembly and tighten union bolt to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Securely connect brake hose to the protrusion on the cylinder body.
Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolt.
2. Connect brake hose to strut and fix with lock spring.
3. Connect brake hose to brake tube. Temporarily tighten flare nuts by hand as far as they will go. Secure
them with the lock spring.
4. Using a flare nut torque wrench, tighten to the specified torque.
: 15 - 17 Nm (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb)
5.
6.
Refill brake fluid until new brake fluid comes out of each bleed valve.
Afterwards, bleed air.
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose
EFS000C8
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not allow brake fluid to spill or splash on painted surfaces. Brake fluid can seriously damage
paint. If it gets on a painted surface, wipe it off immediately and wash it away with water.
Do not bend or twist brake hose sharply, or strongly pull it.
Cover brake fluid line joints to prevent dust and other foreign material.
2. Drain brake fluid gradually from bleed valve of each wheel while depressing brake pedal.
3. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube flare nuts and disconnect brake tube from brake hose.
4. Remove lock spring.
SFIA0046E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

1. Connect brake hose to the brake tube. Temporarily tighten flare nut by hand as far as it will go.
2. Fix brake hose by lock plate.
BR-12
http://vnx.su

3.
Tighten flare nut by using a flare nut wrench with the specified
torque.
: 15 - 17 Nm (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb)

4.
5.
Refill brake fluid until new brake fluid comes out of each bleed
valve.
Afterwards, bleed air.
C
SBR820BA
Inspection
EFS000C9
CAUTION:
If any leaks on joints, retighten it. Replace any damaged parts.
E
1. Check hose, tube, and joints for fluid leaks, damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and
loose connections.
2. Run engine. Depress brake pedal and hold it for approximately 5 seconds while checking each part for BR
leaks.
G
BR-13
http://vnx.su
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER

Components
PFP:46010
EFS000CB
SFIA1800E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Reservoir cap
3.
Oil strainer
4.
Pin
5.
Cylinder body
6.
Piston stopper (Some models with

ABS does not apply.)
7.
Grommet
8.
O-ring
9.
Secondary piston assembly
10. Primary piston assembly
11. Snap ring
12. Guide assembly
13. Plate
14. Stopper cap
15. Primary piston assembly
16. Secondary piston assembly
EFS001CG
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wipe it off immediately and wash it away with water.
1. Drain brake fluid.
2. Remove fluid level sensor harness connector.
3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect master cylinder assembly and brake tube.
4. First remove master cylinder assembly mounting nuts. Then remove master cylinder assembly.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Connect brake tube to master cylinder assembly and temporarily tighten flare nut by hand.
Connect master cylinder assembly to brake booster assembly and tighten mounting nuts to the specified
torque.
Tighten brake tube flare nuts.
: 15 - 17 Nm (1.5 - 1.8 kg-m, 11 - 13 ft-lb)
4.
Connect fluid level sensor harness connector.
BR-14
http://vnx.su

5.
Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air from the brake piping.
A
EFS001CH
MODELS WITHOUT ESP (PISTON STOPPER APPLIED.)

Disassembly
CAUTION:
Remove master cylinder reservoir tank only when necessary.
1. Using a slotted flat-bladed screwdriver as shown in the figure,
lever up stopper cap tabs and remove stopper cap. While
removing, be sure to hold cap securely to prevent the master
cylinder piston from popping out.
E
BRA0533D
2.
BR
Secure cylinder body flange in a vise as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:
Secure cylinder body flange with chamfered pin insert
hole, facing upward.
When securing in the vise, use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
BRA0588D
3.
4.
5.
Using a pin punch [tool: diameter Approx. 4 mm (0.16 in)],

remove reservoir tank mounting pins.
Remove master cylinder assembly from the vise.
Remove reservoir tank and grommet from the cylinder body.
L
SFIA0342E
6.
7.
8.
Using a Phillips flat-bladed screwdriver, press and hold piston

pin as shown in the figure. Remove piston stopper from the cylinder body.
Carefully pull primary piston assembly straight out to prevent
damage to the cylinder inner wall.
Tap flange against a wood block to loosen secondary piston
assembly. Carefully pull secondary piston assembly straight out
to prevent damage to the cylinder inner wall.
BRA0590D
Inspection After Disassembly
Check cylinder inner wall for damage, wear, corrosion, and pinholes. Replace cylinder if damage, wear, or
corrosion is detected.
BR-15
http://vnx.su

Assembly
CAUTION:
Never use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly processes.
Be sure there is no foreign material on the cylinder inner wall, piston, and cup seal. Be careful not
to damage parts with a service tool during assembly.
Do not drop the parts. Do not use any dropped parts.

1.
Apply brake fluid to the inner wall of cylinder body and contact
surface of piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston
assembly and primary piston assembly into the cylinder body in
this order.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse primary and secondary piston assemblies.
Always replace primary and secondary piston assemblies

as kit.
Pay attention to orientation of the piston cup. Insert it

straight in order to prevent the cups from catching between
the cylinder's inner wall and piston.
2.
SFIA0248E
Visually check secondary piston slit position through cylinder

body secondary tank boss hole and install piston stopper.
BRA0590D
3.
Hold piston with stopper cap. Press stopper cap in until its tabs
fully engage groove on the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse stopper cap.
4. Apply brake fluid to grommet before pressing it into cylinder
body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse grommet.
BRA0535D
5. Secure cylinder body flange in a vise as shown in the figure.

CAUTION:
Secure cylinder body flange with chamfered pin insert hole

facing upward.
When securing in the vise, use copper plates or cloth to

protect the flange.
6. Install reservoir tank to cylinder body. Tilt reservoir tank as
shown in the figure to the extent that the mounting pin can be
inserted and insert mounting pin. When mounting pin passes
through pinhole in master cylinder, return reservoir tank to the
upright position. Push mounting pin all the way through the
opposite pinhole in the reservoir tank.
BR-16
http://vnx.su
SFIA0343E

CAUTION:
Do not reuse reservoir tank mounting pin.
Do not reuse reservoir tank.
Be sure to insert pin from the chamfered pinhole on the cylinder body.
MODELS WITHOUT ESP (PISTON STOPPER NOT APPLIED.)

CAUTION:
Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
Disassembly (Piston Assembly)

1.
2.
Using a flat-bladed screwdriver as shown in the figure, lift up the

tabs on the stopper cap and remove it from the master cylinder.
NOTE:
Remove stopper cap while holding it because the piston in master cylinder may pop out.
Carefully pull primary piston assembly straight out to prevent the
cylinder inner wall from being damaged.
BR
BRA0031D
3.
Tap flange using a soft block, such as wood, and carefully pull
secondary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder body
inner wall from being damaged.
J
BRA0033D
Inspection After Disassembly (Piston Assembly)

Cylinder body
Check inner wall of cylinder for damage, abrasion, corrosion, and pinholes. Replace the cylinder body if
detected.
Assembly (Piston Assembly)

CAUTION:
Do not use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, the
piston, or the cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.

1. Apply fluid to cylinder inner wall body and contact surface of the
piston assembly. Then insert secondary piston assembly and
primary piston assembly into cylinder body in this order.
CAUTION:
Pay attention to the orientation of the piston cup, and
insert straight to prevent the cup from being caught by
cylinder inner wall.
Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling
the new inner kit.
Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemSFIA2051E
blies.
BR-17
http://vnx.su

2.
Holding down the piston with the stopper cap, push the stopper
cap tabs so they are firmly into the cylinder grooves, then attach
the stopper cap.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the stopper cap.
BRA0035D
Disassembly (Reservoir Tank)

1.
Secure master cylinder assembly into a vise with the chamfered

pin insert hole on cylinder body facing upward.
CAUTION:
When setting the master cylinder assembly in a vise, be
sure not to over-tighten.
When securing in a vise use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
BRA0588D
2.
3.
4.
Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: diameter approximately 4 mm (0.16 in)], remove mounting pins on the reservoir
tank.
Remove reservoir tank and grommet from cylinder body.
SFIA0342E
Assembly (Reservoir Tank)

1.
2.
Apply brake fluid or rubber lubricant to a grommet, and then install it into cylinder body after installing
grommet to reservoir tank.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the reservoir tank and grommet.
Secure master cylinder assembly into a vise with the chamfered
pin insert hole on cylinder body facing upward.
CAUTION:
When setting the master cylinder assembly in a vise, be
sure not to over-tighten.
When securing in a vise use copper plates or cloth to
protect the flange.
BRA0588D
BR-18
http://vnx.su

3.
Tilt reservoir tank as shown in the figure for the mounting pin to
be inserted. Return the reservoir tank to the upright position
when mounting pin passes through pinhole in the cylinder body.
Push mounting pin to the opposite pinhole of the reservoir tank,
so that it is the same condition as the insertion side.
CAUTION:
Be sure to insert pin from the chamfered pinhole of cylinder body.
Do not reuse the mounting pin.
C
SFIA0342E
MODELS WITH ESP

Disassembly
CAUTION:
While working, cover primary piston rod with cloth to prevent it from being damaged.
Only remove reservoir tank when absolutely necessary.

1. Place the side of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin
insertion hole up, and secure the cylinder body flange section
with a vise as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
When securing in a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect flange.
BR
BRA0558D
2.
3.
4.
Using a pin punch [commercial service tool: approximately 4

mm (0.16 in) dia.], remove reservoir tank mounting pin.
Remove reservoir tank and grommet from cylinder body.
L
BRA0559D
5.
Push in the primary piston and remove stopper pin from the cylinder body secondary-side tank boss hole.
BRA0560D
BR-19
http://vnx.su

6.
7.
8.
Remove the snap ring while pushing primary piston in to prevent

piston from popping out.
Holding primary piston rod, pull primary piston assembly, plate,
and guide straight out.
Remove plate and guide from primary piston.
CAUTION:
When removing plate from primary piston rod, make sure
the inside of plate does not damage rod.
BRA0561D
9.
Tap flange using a soft block such as wood, and carefully pull
the secondary piston assembly straight out to prevent cylinder
inner wall from being damaged.
BRA0033D
Inspection After Disassembly

Master cylinder
Make sure there is no damage, friction, rusting, or pinholes on the cylinder inner wall, and replace if there
are any non-standard conditions.
Assembly
CAUTION:
Never use mineral oils such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
Make sure there is no foreign matter such as dirt or dust attached to the inner cylinder walls, piston, or cap seal, and use care to avoid damaging parts with the assembly tools.
Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.

1. Apply brake fluid to the inside surface of cylinder body and the
contact surface of piston assembly, and apply the silicon grease
in the inner kit to primary piston rod.
2. Insert secondary piston and primary piston into cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the primary and secondary piston assemblies.
Be sure to replace the assembly without disassembling
new inner kit.
Pay attention to the orientation of piston cup, and insert
PFIA0263E
straight to prevent cup from being caught by cylinder
inner wall.
BR-20
http://vnx.su

3.
Visually inspect the secondary piston slit through the piston

stopper mounting hole and then install the piston stopper while
pushing in the primary piston.
C
BRA0560D
4.
Insert plate and guide into cylinder body.

CAUTION:
Make sure not to damage primary piston rod.
Pay attention to the orientation of guide assembly.
Do not drop O-ring.
Make sure guide and/or plate are not inserted at an angle.
BR
G
SFIA1293E
5.
Cover primary piston rod with cloth to prevent it getting damaged, and attach snap ring with primary piston pushed in.
CAUTION:
Make sure the area around snap ring is snug in the cylinder body bore groove.
Do not reuse snap ring.
K
BRA0561D
6.
Apply brake fluid to grommet and attach reservoir tank to master

cylinder.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse grommet.
NOTE:
Attach reservoir tank in the orientation shown in the figure.
BRA0568D
BR-21
http://vnx.su

7.
Place the side of cylinder body with chamfering around the pin
insertion hole up, and secure the cylinder body flange section
with a vise.
CAUTION:
When securing in a vise, use copper plates or cloth to protect flange.
BRA0558D
8.
Tilt reservoir tank so that mounting pin can be inserted as shown

in the figure, and insert mounting pin. When mounting pin has
passed the master cylinder pinhole, return reservoir tank to a
level position. Attach mounting pin to the opposite mounting pin
hole of reservoir tank so that it is the same as the insertion side.
CAUTION:
Be sure to insert pin from the chamfered pinhole of cylinder body.
Do not reuse reservoir tank and mounting pin.
SFIA0702E
BR-22
http://vnx.su
BRAKE BOOSTER
BRAKE BOOSTER
PFP:47200
A
EFS000CC
FUNCTION INSPECTION
With engine stopped, discharge stored vacuum by depressing brake
pedal several times at 5 second intervals. With brake pedal fully
depressed, start the engine. Confirm that clearance between brake
pedal and floor panel decreases when engine vacuum stabilizes.
BRA0037D
AIRTIGHTNESS INSPECTION
Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute. Stop it after

applying vacuum to the booster. Depress brake pedal several
times with normal force to discharge the stored vacuum. Confirm that clearance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases as the brake pedal is depressed.
Run engine. Depress and hold brake pedal then stop engine.
Keep brake pedal depressed for 30 seconds or more and make
sure the pedal stroke does not change.
BR
SBR365AA
EFS000CD
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If

brake booster is tilted or inclined during installation, dash
panel may damage the threads.
Be sure to install check valve in the correct orientation.

1. Remove vacuum piping from the brake booster.
SFIA0139E
2. Remove master cylinder.
3. Remove snap pin and clevis pin on the clevis of input rod. Remove input rod from the brake pedal.
4. Remove brake booster and brake pedal assembly mounting nuts.
5. Remove booster assembly from the engine compartment.
BR-23
http://vnx.su
BRAKE BOOSTER
Output rod length inspection
1.
2.
Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to the brake
booster.
Check output rod length.
3.
Reference value at vacuum of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg,

19.69 inHg):
Without ESP models
: 10.4 mm (0.409 in)
With ESP models
: -6.2 mm (-0.244 in)
SBR208E
INSTALLATION
1.
Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that length B (in
the figure) satisfies the specified value.
Length B standard
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
: 125 mm (4.92 in)
After adjusting B, temporarily tighten lock nut to install booster

assembly to vehicle.
Connect brake pedal to input rod clevis.
Connect brake pedal assembly mounting nuts and tighten to the
specified torque.
Connect master cylinder to booster assembly.
Adjust brake pedal height and play.
Tighten input rod lock nut to the specified torque.
Bleed air. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
BR-24
http://vnx.su
SGIA0060E
VACUUM LINES
VACUUM LINES
PFP:41920
A
EFS000CE
RHD MODELS
B
BR
G
SFIA2093E
1.
Vacuum hose
4.
Clamp
2.
Vacuum tube
3.
Clip
LHD MODELS
SFIA2094E
1.
Vacuum hose
2.
Clip
3.
Clamp
CAUTION:
Because vacuum hose contains a check valve, it must be installed in the correct orientation. Refer
to the stamp or label to confirm correct installation. Brake booster will not operate normally if
hose is installed in the wrong direction.
BR-25
http://vnx.su
VACUUM LINES
Insert the vacuum hose at least 24 mm (0.94 in).

Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
SBR225B
Inspection
EFS000CF
VISUAL INSPECTION
Check for improper assembly, damage and aging.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION

Airtightness Inspection
Use a hand-held vacuum pump to check.
When connected to booster side (1):
Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa
(10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds under
a vacuum of 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.69
inHg)
When connected to engine side (2):
No vacuum will be applied
SFIA0210E
BR-26
http://vnx.su
FRONT DISC BRAKE

FRONT DISC BRAKE
Component
PFP:41000
A
EFS000CG
BR
G
SFIA2142E
1.
Torque member
2.
Slid pin boot
3.
Slid pin
4.
Outer shim cover
5.
Outer shim
6.
Outer pad
7.
Pad retainer
8.
Inner pad
9.
Inner shim
10. Inner shim cover
11. Piston boots
12. Piston
13.
14. Cylinder body
15. Slid pin bolt
17. Bleed valve
18. Brake hose union bolt
piston seal
16. Copper washer
WARNING:
Clean brake pads with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne particles or
other materials.
CAUTION:
When cylinder body is open, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
Be careful not to damage piston boot or spill brake fluid oil on rotor. Always replace shims when
replacing pads.
If shims are rusted or show peeling of the rubber coat, replace them with new shims.
It is not necessary to remove torque member mounting bolt and brake hose union bolt except for
disassembly or replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, suspend cylinder body with wire so
as not to stretch brake hose.
Burnish the brake pad contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE" .
Inspection
EFS000CH
PAD THICKNESS
Check pad thickness by lifting vehicle, removing the wheel, and
looking through check hole on cylinder body. If necessary, use a
scale.
Standard pad thickness
Pad wear limit
: 11 mm (0.43 in)
: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
MAA0439D
BR-27
http://vnx.su
FRONT DISC BRAKE

Pad Replacement
EFS000CI
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
When replacing brake pads, always replace inner shims, outer shims, and shim covers as a set.
1. Remove master cylinder reservoir tank cap.
2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
SBR433D
3.
Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers,
shims and pad return springs.
SBR932C
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply brake grease on back of the pad and both sides of the shim. Install inner shim and inner shim cover
to inner pad, outer shim to outer pad.
Apply brake grease on a pad sliding part of pad retainer. Install pad retainers, pads and pad return springs
to torque member.
Connect cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION:
When replacing pads with new ones, press piston in until the pads can be installed. Carefully monitor brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level. Brake fluid will return, raising master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level.
Insert lower sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Check brakes for drag.
Caliper Removal and Installation
EFS000CJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Drain brake fluid gradually from bleed valve while depressing brake pedal.
Remove union bolts and torque member mounting bolts, and
remove caliper assembly.
Remove disc rotor.
SBR979B
BR-28
http://vnx.su
FRONT DISC BRAKE

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

1. Install disc rotor.
2. Install caliper assembly. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Before installing caliper assembly, wipe brake fluid and grease on steering knuckle washer seats
and caliper assembly mounting surface.
3. Connect brake hose to caliper assembly and tighten union bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse copper washer for union bolts.
Securely assemble brake hose to protrusions on cylinder body.
4. Bleed air. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
EFS000CK
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
Be careful not to pinch your fingers in the piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the cylinder inner wall.
1. Place a wooden block as shown in the figure. Blow air into union
bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
BR
BRB0032D
2.
Using flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seals.

L
SFIA0141E

Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Check cylinder inner wall for corrosion, wear and damage. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected,
replace the cylinder body.
Minor flaws caused by corrosion or foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with fine
sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks and damage. If wear, cracks or damage is detected, replace the applicable part.
BR-29
http://vnx.su
FRONT DISC BRAKE

Piston
CAUTION:
The piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with sandpaper.
Check piston surface for corrosion, wear and damage. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected, replace the
applicable part.
Sliding Pin, Pin Bolt, and Pin Boot

Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage and cracks. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected,
replace the applicable part.
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION

Visual Inspection
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks and serious damage. If uneven wear, cracks or serious
damage is detected, replace it.
Run Out Inspection

1.
2.
Using wheel nuts, fix disc rotor to wheels hub. (2 or more positions)
Using a dial indicator, check run out.
Measurement point:
At a point of 10 mm (0.39 in) from the outer edge of
the disc.
Run out limit
: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in) or less
3.
NOTE:
Make sure that wheel bearing axial endplay is with in the specifications before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-7, "On-Vehicle
Inspection" .
If the run out is outside the limit, find the minimum run out point
by shifting the mounting positions of disc rotor and wheel hub by one hole.
BRA0013D
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If the thickness is
outside the standard, replace the disc rotor.
Standard thickness : 28.0 mm (1.102 in)
Wear limit
: 26.0 mm (1.024 in)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions):
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
SBR020B
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
When assembling, do not use rubber grease.
1. Apply rubber lubricant to piston seals, and install them to cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seals.
SFIA0154E
BR-30
http://vnx.su
FRONT DISC BRAKE

2.
Apply brake fluid or rubber lubricant to piston boots. Cover piston end with piston boot. Install cylinder side boot lip properly
into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston boot.
C
SFIA0155E
3.
Apply brake fluid to piston. Press piston into cylinder body by

hand. Assemble piston side boot lip properly into groove on piston.
CAUTION:
Press piston evenly and change pressing point to prevent
cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
BR
G
SBR574
BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE
Burnish the brake pad contact surfaces according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing
drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on a straight smooth road at 50 km/h (31 MPH).
2. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring vehicle to a complete stop from 50 km/h (31 MPH).
Adjust brake pedal/foot pressure such that vehicle stopping time equals 3 to 5 seconds.
3. To cool the brake system, drive vehicle at 50 km/h (31 MPH) for 1 minute without stopping.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, 10 times or more to complete the burnishing procedure.
BR-31
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

REAR DISC BRAKE
Component
PFP:44000
EFS0017X
SFIA2143E
1.
Pad retainer
2.
Outer shim cover
3.
Outer shim
4.
Outer pad
5.
Pad retainer
6.
Inner pad
7.
Inner shim
8.
Inner shim cover
9.
Sliding pin boot
10. Sliding pin
11. Sliding pin bolt
12. Cylinder body
13. Copper washer
14. Brake hose
15. Union bolt
16. Copper washer
17. Bleed valve
18. Piston seal
19. Piston
20. Piston boot
21. Retaining ring
22. Torque member
WARNING:
Clean dust on brake caliper and pad with a vacuum dust collector. Do not blow with compressed
air.
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while removing cylinder body because piston will pop out.
Do not remove brake hose and torque member mounting bolts unless disassembling or replacing
caliper assembly. Hang the cylinder body with a wire so that the brake hose is not under tension.
Be careful not to damage piston boot. Do not allow brake fluid to get the rotor.
Inspection
EFS0017Y
PAD WEAR INSPECTION

Check pad thickness by lifting vehicle, removing tyre and wheel, and
looking through check hole on cylinder body. If necessary, use a
scale.
standard thickness
pad wear limit
: 8.5 mm (0.335 in)

: 2.0 mm (0.079 in)
BRA0010D
BR-32
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

Pad Replacement
EFS0017Z
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
1. Remove master cylinder reservoir tank cap.
2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
E
BRB0302D
3.
BR
Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers,
and shims.
L
SBR042C
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply brake grease on back of the pad and both sides of the shim. Install inner shim and inner shim cover
to inner pad, outer shim to outer pad.
Install pad retainers to torque member and install pads.
Connect cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION:
When replacing pads with new ones, press piston in until the pads can be installed. Carefully monitor brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level. Brake fluid will return, raising master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level.
Insert lower sliding pin bolt and tighten to the specified torque.
Check brakes for drag.
BR-33
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

Caliper Removal and Installation
EFS00180
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Drain brake fluid gradually from bleed valve while depressing
brake pedal.
Remove union bolt and remove brake hose from caliper assembly.
Remove union bolts and torque member mounting bolts, and
remove caliper assembly.
Remove disc rotor.
SFIA0143E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:

1. Install disc rotor.
2. Install caliper assembly. Tighten mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Wipe brake fluid and grease on axle assembly washer seats and caliper assembly mounting surface. Install caliper assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse the copper washer for union bolts.
Securely assemble brake hose to protrusions on cylinder body.
4. Bleed air. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Caliper Disassembly and Assembly
EFS00181
DISASSEMBLY
WARNING:
Be careful not to pinch your fingers in the piston.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the cylinder inner wall.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove caliper assembly from vehicle.

Remove sliding pin from cylinder body. Then remove pads, shims, shim covers, and pad retainers from
caliper assembly.
Remove sliding pin boots from torque member.
Using flat-bladed screwdriver (as shown in the figure), remove
retaining ring.
SBR028A
BR-34
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

5.
Place a wooden block as shown in the figure. Blow air into union
bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
C
BRD0041D
6.
Using flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seals.

E
BR
G
SFIA0340E

Cylinder Body
CAUTION:
Use new brake fluid to clean. Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Check cylinder inner wall for corrosion, wear and damage. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected,
replace the cylinder body.
Minor flaws caused by corrosion or foreign material can be removed by polishing the surface with fine
sandpaper. Replace the cylinder body, if necessary.
Torque Member
Check for wear, cracks and damage. If wear, cracks or damage is detected, replace the applicable part.
Piston
CAUTION:
The piston sliding surface is plated. Do not polish with sandpaper.
Check piston surface for corrosion, wear and damage. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected, replace the
applicable part.
Sliding Pin, Pin Bolt and Pin Boot

Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage and cracks. If corrosion, wear or damage is detected,
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION

Visual Inspection
Check surface of the disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks and serious damage. If uneven wear, cracks or serious damage is detected, replace it.
Run Out Inspection

1.
Using wheel nuts, fix the disc rotor to wheels hub. (2 or more positions)
BR-35
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

2.
Using a dial indicator, check run out.

Measurement point:
At a point of 10 mm (0.39 in) from the outer
edge of the disc.
Run out limit:
0.07 mm (0.0028 in) or less
3.
NOTE:
Make sure that wheel bearing axial endplay is with in the specification before measuring runout. Refer to FAX-7, "On-Vehicle
BRA0013D
Inspection" .
If the run out is outside the limit, find the minimum run out point by shifting the mounting positions of disc
rotor and wheel hub by one hole.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If the thickness is
outside the standard, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness : 16.0 mm (0.630 in)
Wear limit
: 14.0 mm (0.551 in)
Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions):
0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
SBR020B
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
When assembling, do not use rubber grease.
1. Apply rubber lubricant to piston seals, and install them to the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston seals.
SFIA0156E
2.
3.
Apply brake fluid to piston boots. Cover piston end with piston
boot. Install cylinder side boot lip properly into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse piston boot.
Press piston into cylinder body by hand. Assemble piston side
boot lip properly into groove on the piston.
CAUTION:
Press piston evenly and change pressing point to prevent
the cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
SFIA0157E
BR-36
http://vnx.su
REAR DISC BRAKE

4.
Fix piston boot with retaining ring.

A
CAUTION:
Be sure boot is securely engaged in groove on cylinder
body.
Do not reuse retaining ring.
B
5. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
6. Install torque member to axle assembly and tighten mounting
C
bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Wipe brake fluid and grease on axle assembly washer seats
SFIA0158E
and torque member mounting surface. Install torque member to
D
axle assembly.
7. Install pads, pad retainers, shims, and shim covers to torque member and assemble cylinder body.
8. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque.
E
CAUTION:
BR
Do not reuse union bolt copper washer.
10. After installing caliper assembly, refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake
System"
G
BR-37
http://vnx.su

PFP:00030
EFS000CQ
Unit: mm (in)
Brake model
Front brake
AD31VD
Cylinder bore diameter
44.4 2 (1.748 0.08)
Pad
Length x width x thickness
132.0 52.5 11.0

(5.20 2.067 0.433)
Rotor outer diameter x thickness
280 28 (11.02 1.10)
Brake model
Rear brake
AD9VA
34.9 (1.374)
Pad
Length x width x thickness
83.0 33.0 8.5

(3.268 1.299 0.335)
Rotor outer diameter x thickness
292 16 (11.50 0.63)
Master cylinder
Control valve
Valve model
25.4 (1)
Electronic control type
Booster model
Brake booster
C215T
Diaphragm diameter
Primary
230 (9.06)
Secondary
205 (8.07)
Recommended brake fluid
DOT 3 or DOT 4
Brake Pedal
EFS000CR
Pedal play
3 - 11 mm (0.12 - 0.43 in)
Looseness at clevis pin
1 - 3 mm (0.04 - 0.12 in)
Brake pedal height (from dash panel top surface)

Depressed pedal height under a force of 490 N (50 kg,110.6 lb)
(from dash panel top surface)
M/T model
156 - 166 mm (6.14 - 6.54 in)
A/T model
164 - 174 mm (6.46 - 6.85 in)
M/T model
A/T model
Clearance between threaded end of stop lamp switch and pedal stopper
0.74 - 1.96 mm (0.0291 - 0.0772 in)
Check Valve
EFS000CS
Vacuum leakage [at vacuum of 66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69

inHg)]
Within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds
Brake Booster
EFS000CT
Vacuum type
Vacuum leakage [at vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69
inHg)]
Within 3.3 kPa (25 mmHg, 0.98 inHg) of vacuum for 15 seconds
Input rod installation standard dimension
125 mm (4.92 in)
Front Disc Brake
EFS000CU
Brake type
Brake pad
Disc rotor
AD31VD
Standard thickness (new)
11 mm (0.43 in)
Repair limit thickness
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
28.0 mm (1.102 in)
26.0 mm (1.024 in)
Runout limit
0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
BR-38
http://vnx.su

Rear Disc Brake
EFS000CV
A
Brake type
Brake pad
Disc rotor
AD9VA
8.5 mm (0.335 in)
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
16.0 mm (0.63 in)
14.0 mm (0.55 in)
Runout limit
0.07 mm (0.0028 in)
BR
BR-39
http://vnx.su
BR-40
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
F BRAKES
SECTION
PB
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL ................................... 2
Components ............................................................. 2
REMOVAL ............................................................. 2
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 2
Adjustment ............................................................... 3
PARKING BRAKE SHOE ........................................... 4
Components ............................................................. 4
REMOVAL ............................................................. 4
INSPECTION ........................................................ 6
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 6
Parking Brake ........................................................... 9
PB
PB-1
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL

Components
PFP:36010
EFS0017I
SFIA3052E
1.
Control lever assembly
2.
Cap
3.
Parking brake warning lamp switch
4.
Screw
5.
Adjusting nut
6.
Front cable
7.
RH rear cable
8.
LH rear cable
:Multi-purpose grease
NOTE:
In regard to the notation of torque in the illustration, NEW shows an ISO standard, OLD shows a conventional standard, and the measurements of hexagonal width across flats are in parentheses.
EFS0017J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove center console.

Disconnect parking brake warning lamp switch connector.
Remove cable mounting bolt. Loosen cable and remove adjusting nut.
Remove cable from toggle lever of disc brake.
SFIA2453E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse adjusting nut.
1. Operate parking brake lever with a force of 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb). Check a stroke is within specified number
of notches. (Check it by hearing clicks of ratchet.)
Lever stroke
: 6 - 7 notches
PB-2
http://vnx.su

2.
3.
4.
5.
Check control lever assembly for bend, damage and cracks, and replace if there is.
Check cables and equalizer for wear and damage. If a malfunction is detected, replace the applicable
part.
Check parking brake warning lamp switch. If a malfunction is detected, replace the applicable part.
Check each part for deformation, or damage by contact with other parts. If a malfunction is detected,
Adjustment
1.
EFS0017M
Insert a deep-well socket wrench into opening of parking brake

lever. Rotate adjusting nut to fully loosen cable. Return parking
brake lever and adjust rear brake shoe clearance.
PB
SFIA2453E
2.
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Rotate tyres & foot wheels to be sure that there is no drag.

After adjusting clearance of rear shoes, with no drag on rear
brake, adjust cable as follows:
Pull parking brake lever up so that a deep-well socket wrench
can be inserted.
Insert a deep-well socket wrench into opening of parking brake
lever. Rotate adjusting nut to adjust a lever stroke.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
Operate parking brake lever 3 to 4 times with a force of 196 N
(20 kg, 44 lb). Be sure lever stroke is within the specified number of notches.
Return parking brake lever completely. Be sure there is no drag on rear brake.
MAA0182D
PB-3
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Components
PFP:44060
EFS0017K
SFIA0199E
1.
Parking cable
2.
Back plate
3.
Anchor block
4.
Brake shoe
5.
Return spring
6.
Return spring
7.
Spring
8.
Retainer
9.
Shoe hold pin
10. Adjust assembly LH
11.
Adjuster assembly RH
12. E-ring
13. Toggle lever
14. Pin
15. Pin
16. Toggle lever
EFS0017N
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Clean dust on brake disc and back plate with a vacuum dust
collector.
1. Remove tyre. With parking brake lever completely returned,
loosen adjusting nut.
2. Remove rear disc brake caliper.
SFIA2453E
PB-4
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

3.
Remove disc rotor. If it cannot be removed, do as follows:

Remove adjusting plug attached to disc as shown in the figure. Insert flat-bladed screwdriver through plug. Turn adjuster
to make clearance between brake shoe and drum.
C
SBR046CA
4.
Push retainer as shown in the figure to compress spring.

Remove brake shoe holding pins from mounting holes in back
plate.
PB
G
SFIA0279E
5.
Pull brake shoes apart and remove adjuster assembly. Then

remove lower-side return spring.
SFIA0280E
6.
Remove connecting pin between parking brake cable and toggle

lever as shown in the figure, and remove toggle lever.
SBR095C
PB-5
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

INSPECTION
Visually check the lining for wear, damage, and peeling.

Using a scale, check thickness of lining.
Standard lining thickness
Lining limit (A)
: 3.5 mm (0.138 in)

: 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
CAUTION:
If necessary, remove brake shoe, and check as follows.
Check shoe sliding surface for wear and damage.
Check anti rattle pin for wear and corrosion.
Check return spring for sagging.
Check adjuster for rough operation.
Visually check inside of drum for wear, damage, and cracks.

Using a pair of vernier calipers, check inside of drum.
Standard inner diameter
Maximum inner diameter
SBR021A
: 172 mm (6.77 in)

: 173 mm (6.81 in)
SBR768A
INSTALLATION
1.
Apply brake grease to the contact area of show at left.
SBR047C
PB-6
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

2.
Attach upper-side return springs to brake shoe as shown in the

figure. Be sure to install return spring B over return spring A.
PB
G
SFIA0281E
3.
Orientation of adjusters is different for LH adjuster and RH

adjuster. Assemble adjusters so that threaded part is expanded
when rotating it to direction shown by arrow. Contract adjuster to
assemble.
CAUTION:
When adjuster was disassembled, apply brake grease to thread.
SFIA2426E
4.
Assemble torque lever in direction of installation as shown in the

figure.
SBR096C
PB-7
http://vnx.su
PARKING BRAKE SHOE

5.
After assembly, be sure that each part is installed properly.
SBR048C
6.
Fix disc rotor with wheel nut, and adjust brake shoe clearance.
Remove adjusting hole plug. Turn star wheel on until disc rotor
locks. Then turn star wheel in the opposite direction for 6
notches.
7. Rotate disc rotor to be sure that there is no drag. Then install
adjusting hole plug.
8. Adjust parking brake cable.
CAUTION:
If brake shoes were replaced with new ones. Carry out break-in
operation.
SBR097CA
PB-8
http://vnx.su

Parking Brake
Type
Brake lining
Drum (disc)
PFP:00030
A
EFS000D2
DS17H
3.5 mm (0.138 in)
1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Standard inner diameter (new)
172 mm (6.77 in)
Wear limit of inner diameter
173 mm (6.81 in)
Lever stroke [operating force 196 N (20 kg,44 lb)]
6 to 7 notches
Brake warning lamp stroke
Within 1 notch
PB
PB-9
http://vnx.su
PB-10
http://vnx.su
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
F BRAKES
SECTION
BRC
BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
ABS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Brake System .................................. 4
Precautions for Brake Control .................................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................ 6
System Diagram ....................................................... 6
ABS Function ........................................................... 6
EBD Function ........................................................... 6
Fail-Safe Function .................................................... 6
ABS, EBD SYSTEM .............................................. 6
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ........................................ 7
CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 8
System Description .................................................. 8
CAN Communication Unit ........................................ 8
TYPE 1/TYPE 2 .................................................... 8
TYPE 3 .................................................................. 9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................11
How to Proceed With Diagnosis ..............................11
BASIC CONCEPT ................................................11
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART ................................ 12
ASKING COMPLAINTS ...................................... 13
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET ................... 13
Component Parts Location ..................................... 14
Schematic .............................................................. 15
Wiring Diagram ABS ..................................... 16
LHD MODEL ....................................................... 16
RHD MODEL ....................................................... 20
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard ............. 24
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 24
CONSULT- II Functions .......................................... 25
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION ........................... 25
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
... 25
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 27
DATA MONITOR ................................................. 29
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 31

Correct and Quick Diagnosis .................................. 33
DIAGNOSIS PRECAUTIONS ............................. 33
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 34
BASIC INSPECTION 1 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT,
LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION ......... 34
BASIC INSPECTION 2 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION .................................................................... 34
BASIC INSPECTION 3 ABS WARNING LAMP... 34
Inspection 1: Wheel Sensor System ....................... 35
INSPECTION PROCEDURE .............................. 35
Inspection 2: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 1 ............................................................... 37
Inspection 3: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground Circuit ............ 37
Inspection 4: ABS Actuator Relay or ABS Motor
Relay Power System .............................................. 38
Inspection 5: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 2 ............................................................... 39
Inspection 6: G Sensor System .............................. 40
Inspection 7: CAN Communication System ............ 42
Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently ....................... 42
Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction ............... 43
Symptom 3: Longer Stopping Distance .................. 43
Symptom 4: ABS Does Not Work ........................... 44
Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration and ABS Operation
Noise ...................................................................... 44
WHEEL SENSORS ................................................... 45
REMOVAL ........................................................... 45
INSTALLATION ................................................... 45
G SENSOR ................................................................ 46
REMOVAL ........................................................... 46
INSTALLATION ................................................... 46
SENSOR ROTOR ..................................................... 47
REMOVAL ........................................................... 47
INSTALLATION ................................................... 47
BRC-1
http://vnx.su
BRC
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY) ........................................................................... 48

ESP/TCS/ABS
PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... 49
(SRS) AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................................................................. 49
Precautions for Brake System ................................ 49
Precautions for Brake Control ................................ 49
PREPARATION ......................................................... 50
Special Service Tools ............................................. 50
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ............................................ 51
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position .......................................................................... 51
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................................... 52
System Diagram ..................................................... 52
ESP Function .......................................................... 52
TCS Function .......................................................... 52
ABS Function .......................................................... 53
EBD Function ......................................................... 53
Fail-Safe Function .................................................. 53
ESP/ TCS SYSTEM ............................................ 53
ABS, EBD SYSTEM ............................................ 53
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram ....................................... 54
CAN COMMUNICATION ........................................... 55
System Description ................................................. 55
CAN Communication Unit ....................................... 55
TYPE 4/TYPE 5 ................................................... 55
TYPE 6 ................................................................ 56
How to Proceed With Diagnosis ............................. 58
BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 58
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART ................................. 59
ASKING COMPLAINTS ....................................... 60
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET .................... 60
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location... 61
Schematic ............................................................... 62
Wiring Diagram ESP/TCS/ABS ..................... 63
LHD MODEL ........................................................ 63
RHD MODEL ....................................................... 69
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard .............. 75
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II ......... 75
CONSULT-II Functions ........................................... 77
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION ........................... 77
... 77
SELF-DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 79
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 81
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 84
For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis ........................... 86
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS ..................... 86
Basic Inspection ..................................................... 87
BASIC INSPECTION 1 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT,
LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION ......... 87
BASIC INSPECTION 2 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPEC-
TION ....................................................................87
BASIC INSPECTION 3 ABS WARNING LAMP,
ESP OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR
LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING LAMP INSPECTION ....................................................................88
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System ........................89
INSPECTION PROCEDURE ...............................89
Inspection 2 Engine System ...................................91
Inspection 3 ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit System ...91
Inspection 4 Pressure Sensor and the Circuit
between Pressure Sensor and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit. ...................................................................91
Inspection 5 Steering Angle Sensor and Circuit
between Steering Angle Sensor and ESP/TCS/ABS
Control Unit. ............................................................93
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side G sensor and the Circuit
between Yaw Rate/Side G sensor and ESP/TCS/
ABS Control Unit. ....................................................95
Inspection 7 Solenoid Valve, ESP Switch-over Solenoid Valve and Circuit .............................................96
Inspection 8 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay and Circuit
...99
Inspection 9 Actuator Relay and Circuit ................ 101
Inspection 10 Stop Lamp Switch and Circuit ......... 103
Inspection 11 ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Power
Supply Circuit ........................................................ 103
Inspection 12 When EMERGENCY BRAKE is
indicated in the Self-Diagnostic Results ................ 105
Inspection 13 When ST ANG SEN SIGNAL is Indicated in the Self-Diagnostic Results ..................... 105
Inspection 14 Brake Fluid Level of Reservoir Tank,
Communication Circuit between ESP/TCS/ABS
Control Unit and Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch.106
Inspection 15 CAN Communication Circuit, ESP/
TCS/ABS Control Unit and Steering Angle Sensor.107
Component Check ................................................ 107
ESP OFF SWITCH ............................................ 107
ESP RELAY BOX ............................................... 107
ESP ACTUATOR ............................................... 108
Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently ..................... 110
Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction ............. 111
Symptom 3: Longer Stopping Distance ................. 111
Symptom 4: ABS Does Not Work ......................... 111
Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration and ABS Operation
Noise ..................................................................... 111
Symptom 6: ESP OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ................................................................... 112
Symptom 7: SLIP Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate ....................................................................... 112
Symptom 8: Vehicle Jerks During ESP/TCS/ABS
Control .................................................................. 113
WHEEL SENSORS ................................................. 114
Removal and Installation ....................................... 114
REMOVAL .......................................................... 114
INSTALLATION .................................................. 114
SENSOR ROTOR .................................................... 115
REMOVAL .......................................................... 115
INSTALLATION .................................................. 115
BRC-2
http://vnx.su
ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT .............................116

Removal and Installation .......................................116
REMOVAL ..........................................................116
INSTALLATION ..................................................116
ESP/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND RELAY BOX ......117
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR .................................118
REMOVAL ..........................................................118
INSTALLATION ..................................................118
ESP OFF SWITCH .................................................. 119

Removal and Installation ...................................... 119
REMOVAL ......................................................... 119
INSTALLATION ................................................. 119
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ................................ 120
REMOVAL ......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION ................................................. 120
BRC
BRC-3
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
[ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
[ABS]
EFS005X6
The Supplemental Restraint System such as AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER, used along
WARNING:
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
harness connectors.
EFS004GX

Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas such as body. If brake fluid is splashed, wipe it off
and flush area with water immediately.
Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene to clean. They will ruin rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
Using a flare nut torque wrench, securely tighten brake tube
flare nuts.
Brake system is an important safety part. If a brake fluid leak is
detected, always disassemble the affected part. If a malfunction
is detected, replace part with a new one.
Before working, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect harness connectors of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
or battery cable from negative terminal.
SBR820BA
Precautions for Brake Control
EFS004FV
During ABS operation, brake pedal lightly vibrates and a mechanical noise may be heard. This is normal.
Just after starting vehicle after ignition switch ON, brake pedal may vibrate or motor operating noise may
be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of operation check.
Stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on rough, gravel,
or snow-covered (fresh, deep snow) roads.
When an malfunction is indicated by ABS or another warning lamp, collect all necessary information from
customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and check for simple causes before starting diagnostic servicing. Besides electrical system inspection, check booster operation, brake fluid level,
and oil leaks.
If tyre size and type are used in an improper combination, or brake pads are not Genuine NISSAN parts,
stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna, or antenna lead-in wire (including wiring) near control module, ABS function
may have a malfunction.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) Have been installed, check for incidents such as harness
pinches, open circuits, and improper wiring.
BRC-4
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
[ABS]
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EFS004GU
Tool number
Tool name
Description
GG94310000
Flare nut torque wrench
a: 10mm (0.39 in)
Installing each brake piping
D
NT406
BRC
BRC-5
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Diagram
PFP:00000
EFS004FZ
SFIA2004E
ABS Function
EFS004G0
The Anti-Lock Brake System is a function that detects wheel revolution while braking, and it improves
handling stability during sudden braking by electrically preventing 4 wheel lock. Maneuverability is also
improved for avoiding obstacles.
In case of the electrical system breaks down, then the Fail-Safe function starts, the ABS becomes inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp turns on.
Electrical System Diagnosis by CONSULT-II is available.
EBD Function
EFS004G1
Electronic Brake Distributor is a function that detects subtle slippages between the front and rear wheels
during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the Brake Fluid Pressure
which results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
In case of the electrical system break down, then the Fail-Safe function is starts, the EBD and ABS
becomes inoperative, and the ABS warning lamp is turned on.
Fail-Safe Function
EFS004G2
ABS, EBD SYSTEM

In case of the electrical problems with the ABS, the ABS warning lamp will turn on. In case of electrical problem with the EBD, ABS warning lamp will turn on. Simultaneously, the ABS become one of the following conditions of the Fail-Safe function.
1. For ABS trouble, only the EBD is activated and the condition of the vehicle is the same condition of vehicles without ABS equipment.
2. For EBD trouble, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of the vehicle is the same as
the condition of vehicles without ABS, EBD equipment.
NOTE:
In condition 1 described above, an ABS self diagnosis sound may be heard. That is a normal condition
because a self diagnosis for Ignition switch ON and the First Starting are being performed.
BRC-6
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ABS]
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EFS004G3
BRC
J
SFIA2173E
BRC-7
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ABS]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
EFS0061E
EFS0061F
Body type
Wagon
Axle
4WD
Engine
YD22DDTi
Transmission
QR20DE/QR25DE
M/T
Brake control
YD22DDTi
A/T
M/T
ABS
CAN system type
QR25DE
A/T
ESP
TYPE 1/TYPE 2
System diagram
PKIA6458E

Signals
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control unit
Combination meter
ECM
Engine speed signal
MI signal
R
R
R
R
R
R
BRC-8
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ABS]
Signals
ECM
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control unit

Combination meter
A/C switch signal*
TYPE 3
System diagram
BRC
K
PKIA6457E
L
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM

TCM
R
T
Engine speed signal
MI signal
R
R
R
R
R
R
BRC-9
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ABS]
Signals
ECM

TCM
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
T
R
Combination
meter
R
PN range signal
R
R

R
T
T
R
T
BRC-10
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Proceed With Diagnosis
PFP:00004
A
EFS004G6
BASIC CONCEPT
Most important point to perform diagnosis is to understand systems (control and mechanism) in vehicle
thoroughly.
First of all, reproduce symptom, and understand it fully.
it will be necessary to check symptom by driving vehicle with
customer.
NOTE:
Customers are not professionals. Do not assume maybe customer means... or maybe customer mentioned this symptom.
EFJ0028D
It is essential to check symptoms right from beginning in order to

repair a malfunction completely.
For an intermittent malfunction, it is important to reproduce
symptom based on interview with customer and past examples.
Do not perform inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent
malfunctions are caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be
effective to shake suspected harness or connector by hand.
When repairs are performed without any symptom check, no
one can judge if malfunction has actually been eliminated.
After diagnosis, make sure to carry out erase memory. Refer to
BRC-27, "Operation Procedure" .
Always read GI General Information to confirm general precautions. Refer to GI-4, "General Precautions" .
BRC
I
SEF233G
BRC-11
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART
SFIA0953E
BRC-12
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
ASKING COMPLAINTS
Complaints against malfunction vary depending on each person.

It is important to clarify customer complaints.
Ask customer about what symptoms are present and under
what conditions. Use information to reproduce symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use diagnosis sheet so as not to miss information.
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET

E
BRC
LFIA0176E
BRC-13
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Component Parts Location
EFS004G7
SFIA2201E
BRC-14
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Schematic
EFS004G8
BRC
TFWA0078E
BRC-15
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Wiring Diagram ABS
EFS004G9
LHD MODEL
TFWA0079E
BRC-16
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
BRC
TFWA0080E
BRC-17
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
TFWA0081E
BRC-18
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
BRC
TFWA0082E
BRC-19
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
RHD MODEL
TFWA0083E
BRC-20
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
BRC
TFWA0084E
BRC-21
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
TFWA0085E
BRC-22
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
A
BRC
TFWA0086E
BRC-23
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
EFS004GA
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II

CAUTION:
The display shows the control unit calculation data, so a normal value might be displayed even in the
event the output circuit (harness) is open or short - circulated.
Data monitor
Monitor item
Display Content
FR LH SENSOR
FR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
Wheel speed calculated using signals

from all four wheel
sensors
DOCILE G-SEN. 1
DOCILE G-SEN. 2
Fore-and-aft G
detected by G sensor
ABS IN SOL
ABS OUT SOL
Operation status of all

solenoids
STOP LAMP SW
Brake pedal operation
MOTOR RELAY
ACTUATOR RELAY
ABS WARN LAMP
BATTERY VOLT
EBD FAIL SIG

ABS FAIL SIG
EBD SIGNAL
ABS SIGNAL
Motor and motor relay

operation status
Actuator relay operation status
ABS warning lamp on

condition (Note 2)
Battery voltage supplied to ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)
Fail signal status
EBD operation
ABS operation
Condition
Reference values
for normal operation
Vehicle stopped
0 km/h (0 MPH)
While driving (Note 1)
Nearly matches
the speedometer
display ( 10% or
less)
When vehicle is stopped on

level ground
OFF
When G sensor is tilted toward

the front with G sensor mounting bolt removed
ON
When the actuator solenoid

operates or during a fail-safe
ON
When the actuator relay operates and the actuator solenoid

does not operate
OFF
Brake pedal depressed
ON
Brake pedal not depressed
OFF
When the motor relay and

motor are operating
ON
When the motor relay and

motor are not operating
OFF
When the actuator relay is

operating
OFF
When the actuator relay is not

operating
ON
ABS warning lamp ON
ON
ABS warning lamp OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON
10 - 16V
EBD Fail
ABS Fail
ON
EBD normal
ABS normal
OFF
EBD active
ABS active
ON
EBD not active

ABS not active
OFF
Reference: Inspection
checklist
BRC-35, "Inspection 1:
Wheel Sensor System"
BRC-40, "Inspection 6: G
Sensor System"
ABS Actuator Relay or
ABS Motor Relay Power
System"
Stop lamp switch circuit
System"
BRC-34, "BASIC
INSPECTION 3 ABS
WARNING LAMP"
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
Power Supply and
Ground Circuit"
EBD system
ABS system
Note 1: Confirm tyre pressure is normal.

Note 2: ABS warning lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned on or when an malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned on (when system is normal).
BRC-24
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
CONSULT- II Functions
EFS004GB
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION

In a diagnosis function (main function), there are SELF-DIAG RESULTS, DATA MONITOR, CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR, ACTIVE TEST, FUNCTION TEST, ECU PART NUMBER.
Diagnostic
test mode
B
Function
Reference
SELF-DIAG
RESULTS
DATA MONITOR
Input/Output data in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) can be read.
CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and also shifts some parameters in a
specified range.
FUNCTION
TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is OK or NG.
ECU PART
NUMBER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) part number can be read.
BRC-27, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS"
BRC-29, "DATA MONITOR"
E
BRC-31, "ACTIVE TEST"
BRC

1.
2.
3.

Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
CAUTION:
If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
4.
SKIA3098E
5.
Touch ABS in the SELECT SYSTEM screen.

If ABS is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link
Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
SFIA1816E
BRC-25
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
6.
Select the required diagnostic location from the SELECT DIAG

MODE screen.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
SFIA2435E
BRC-26
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an malfunction is detected in the system, ABS warning lamp on the combination meter turn on. In this case,
perform self-diagnosis as follows:
B
Operation Procedure
1.
2.

Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
C
CAUTION:
D
4. Start engine and drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
5. After stopping the vehicle, with the engine running, touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL), ABS, E
SELF-DIAG RESULTS in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
If START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) is touched immediately after starting the engine or turning on BRC
the ignition switch, ABS might not be displayed in the System Selection screen. In this case,
repeat the operation from step 1.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by
G
touching PRINT.)
When NO FAILURE is displayed, check the ABS warning lamp.
7. Conduct the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
H
component.
8. Start engine and drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
CAUTION:
I
When a wheel sensor short-circuit is detected, if the vehicle is not driven at 30 km/h (19 MPH)
for at least 1 minute, the ABS warning lamp will not turn off even if everything is normal.
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
J
10. Start the engine and touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL), ABS, SELF-DIAG RESULTS, ERASE
MEMORY in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the diagnostic memory.
CAUTION:
K
If the diagnostic memory is not erased, re-conduct the operation from step 4.
11. For the final inspection, drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that
the ABS warning lamp a off.
L
BRC-27
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Display Item List
Suspect Systems
Malfunction detecting condition
RR RH SENSOR-1
When the circuit in the rear RH wheel sensor is open.
RR LH SENSOR-1
When the circuit in the rear LH wheel sensor is open.
FR RH SENSOR-1
When the circuit in the front RH wheel sensor is open.
FR LH SENSOR-1
When the circuit in the front LH wheel sensor is open.
FR LH SENSOR-2
When the circuit in the front LH wheel sensor is short-circuited.

Or when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard. When
the distance between the wheel sensor and sensor rotor is too
large and the sensor pulse cannot be recognized by the control
unit.
RR RH SENSOR-2
When the circuit in the rear RH wheel sensor is short-circuited.

unit.
FR RH SENSOR-2
When the circuit in the front RH wheel sensor is short-circuited.

unit.
RR LH SENSOR-2
When the circuit in the rear LH wheel sensor is short-circuited. Or

when the sensor power voltage is outside the standard. When
unit.
MAIN RELAY
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the actuator relay

system.
FR LH IN ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the front left inlet
solenoid system.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the front left outlet solenoid system.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the rear right inlet
solenoid system.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the rear right outlet solenoid system.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the front right

inlet solenoid system.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the front right outlet solenoid system.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the rear left inlet
solenoid system.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
When the control unit detects an malfunction in the rear left outlet
solenoid system.
Inspection system
Wheel Sensor System"(Note 1)
System"
System"
LOW POWER VOLTAGE
When the ABS actuator and electric unit power voltage is lower
than normal.
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
Power Supply and
Ground Circuit"
EMERGENCY BRAKE
When the ABS actuator and electric unit malfunctions (pressure

increase is too much or too little).
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 2"
ABS CONTROLLER
When there is an internal malfunction in the ABS actuator and

electric unit.
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 1"
BRC-28
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Suspect Systems
Inspection system
A
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
PUMP MOTOR
G - SENSOR
CAN Communication
System" (Note 2)
During actuator motor operation with ON, when actuator motor

turns OFF or when control line for actuator motor relay is open.
System"
Decel G-sensor is malfunctioning, or signal line of Decel G-sensor is open or shorted.
G Sensor System"
When there is an malfunction in the CAN communication system.
Note 1: After completing repairs of shorted sensor circuit, when ignition switch is turned ON, ABS warning
lamp turns on. Check that ABS warning lamp turns off while driving vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for
approximately 1 minute according to self-diagnosis procedure. In addition, if wheel sensor 2 is displayed for
wheels, check wheel sensor circuit and also check control unit power voltage.
Note 2: When malfunctions are detected in several systems, including CAN communication system [U1000],
troubleshoot CAN communication system.
BRC
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch ABS, DATA MONITOR in order on the CONSULT-II screen.

Return to the Monitor Item Selection screen, and touch ECU INPUT SIGNALS, MAIN SIGNALS or
SELECTION FROM MENU. Refer to the following information.
When START is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List

SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Item (Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
FR LH SENSOR
[km/h]
Wheel speed calculated by front

LH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR
[(km/h]

RH wheel sensor signal is displayed.
RR LH SENSOR
[km/h]
Wheel speed calculated by Rear

RR RH SENSOR
[km/h]
Wheel speed calculated by Rear

DECEL G-SEN 1
(ON/OFF)
Decel G-sensor 1 (ON/OFF) status

is displayed.
DECEL G-SEN 2
(ON/OFF)
Decel G-sensor 2 (ON/OFF) status

is displayed.
FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front left inlet ABS solenoid valve

(ON/OFF) status is displayed.
FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front left outlet ABS solenoid

valve (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear right inlet ABS solenoid valve

RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear right outlet ABS solenoid

BRC-29
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
SELECT MONITOR ITEM
Item (Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front right inlet ABS solenoid

FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front right outlet ABS solenoid

RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear left rear inlet ABS solenoid

RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear left outlet ABS solenoid valve

STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status

is displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF)
ABS motor relay (ON/OFF) condition is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF)
ABS actuator relay (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP

(ON/OFF)
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
BATTERY VOLT
(V )
The voltage supplied to the ABS

control unit is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
EBD FAIL SIG

(ON/OFF)
EBD fail-safe signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
ABS FAIL SIG

(ON/OFF)
ABS fail-safe signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
: Applicable
: Not applicable
BRC-30
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
ACTIVE TEST
A
CAUTION:
Do not perform active test while driving.
Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
Active test can not be performed with ABS warning lamp on.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch ABS, ACTIVE TEST in order on the CONSULT-II screen.

The test item selection screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
BRC
PBR976C
4.
5.
With the MAIN SIGNALS display shown in reverse, touch START.

The Active Test screen will be displayed, so conduct the following test.
NOTE:
When the active test is conducted while depressing pedal, pedal depression amount will change, but
this is normal.
Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, TEST STOP will be displayed.
To conduct a retest after TEST STOP is displayed, touch BACK and conduct the from the step 3.
Test Item
Solenoid valve
CAUTION:
The example shown is for the front right wheel. The procedure for the other wheels is the same as
given below.
1. For ABS solenoid valve, touch UP, KEEP, and DOWN.Then
use screen monitor to check that solenoid valve operates as
shown in Solenoid Valve Operation Chart. Refer to Solenoid
Valve Operation Chart.
SFIA0678E
ABS solenoid valve
Operation
FR RH SOL
UP
KEEP
DOWN
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
BRC-31
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
ABS Motor
Touch ON, OFF on the display screen and make sure ABS motor
relay is operating as shown in the table below.
Operation
ON
OFF
MOTOR RELAY
ON
OFF
ACTUATOR RLY
ON
ON
SFIA0593E
BRC-32
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Correct and Quick Diagnosis
EFS004GC
DIAGNOSIS PRECAUTIONS
Before performing the trouble diagnosis, always read the general information (GI) to confirm the general
precautions. Refer to GI-4, "General Precautions" .
After completing service, always erase the self-diagnosis results. Refer to BRC-27, "Operation Procedure" .
When inspection of the continuity or voltage between units is performed, check connector terminals for
disconnection, looseness, bend, or collapse. If any non-standard condition is detected, repair or replace
applicable part.
Intermittent malfunctions may be caused by a poor connection in the harness, connector, or terminal.
Move harnesses, harness connectors, or terminals by hand to make sure all connections are solid and
undamaged.
If a circuit tester is used for the check, be careful not to forcibly extend any connector terminal.
While a phenomena like those shown in the following table may occur, this is not malfunction because the
system is working normally.
Symptom
Motor operation noise
Symptom description
Normal
System operation check

noise
When the engine is started, you may barely be able to hear a slight
thudding sound from the engine room, but this sound is made by the
system operation check and is normal.
Normal
ABS operation (longer stopping distance)
Stopping distance may be longer for vehicles with ABS when the vehicle
drives on rough or snow-covered roads. Use lower speeds when driving
on these kinds of roads.
Normal
ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp
: ON
: OFF
ABS warning lamp
Remarks
Ignition switch OFF
For approximately 1 second after ignition switch ON
After approximately 1 second after ignition switch ON. (When system is normal)
Turns off 1 second after engine start
ABS malfunction
When there is an ABS actuator and electric unit malfunction (power or ground
malfunction)
EBD malfunction
http://vnx.su
BRC
Just after the engine starts, the motor operating noise may be heard.
This is a normal status of the system operation check.
BRC-33
Result
This is the sound of the motor operating inside ABS actuator, and there
may be some low sounds while the ABS is operating.
Condition
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Basic Inspection
EFS004GD
BASIC INSPECTION 1 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check fluid level in the brake reservoir tank. If fluid level is low, refill the brake fluid.
Check the brake piping and around the ABS actuator for leaks. If there is leaking or oozing fluid, check the
following items.
If ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connection is loose, tighten the piping to the specified
torque and re-conduct the leak inspection to make sure there are no leaks.
If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) screw,
replace the damaged part and re-conduct the leak inspection to make sure there are no leaks.
When there is fluid leaking or oozing from a part other than ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
connection, if the fluid is just oozing out, use a clean cloth to wipe off the oozing fluid and re-check for
leaks. If fluid is still oozing out, replace the damaged part.
CAUTION:
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) cannot be disassembled.
Check the brake pad degree of wear. Refer to BR-27, "PAD THICKNESS" in Front Disc Brake and BR32, "PAD WEAR INSPECTION" in Rear Disc Brake.
BASIC INSPECTION 2 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION

Make sure the battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. In addition, check
the battery voltage to make sure it has not dropped.
BASIC INSPECTION 3 ABS WARNING LAMP

1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure that when the ignition switch is turned ON, the ABS warning lamp turns on for approximately 1
second. If they do not turn on, perform CAN communication system diagnosis. Refer to BRC-42, "Inspection 7: CAN Communication System" .
Check if the ABS warning lamp turns off approximately 1 second after the ignition switch is turned ON, If it
do not turn off, perform self-diagnosis.
if ABS warning lamp has not turned off 10 seconds after the engine has been started, perform self-diagnosis of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Always erase the self-diagnostic results after completing self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-27, "Operation Procedure" .
BRC-34
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Inspection 1: Wheel Sensor System
EFS004HB
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
Check each part according to CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results, and then identify the parts to be replaced.
CAUTION:
Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.
1. CHECK TYRE
C
Check air pressure, wear and size.

Are air pressure, wear and size within standard?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Adjust air pressure, or replace tyre.
2. CHECK SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check sensor and sensor rotor.
Check sensor rotor rubber for damage.
Check sensor for disconnection or looseness.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair sensor mount or replace sensor rotor.
BRC
3. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

H
Check the self-diagnostic results.

Self-diagnosis results
FR RH SENSOR-1,-2
FR LH SENSOR-1,-2
RR RH SENSOR-1,-2
RR LH SENSOR-1,-2
Is above displayed on self-diagnosis displayed?

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect connector between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and
malfunctioning wheel sensor, and check for deformation, disconnection and looseness. Repair or replace
if necessary.
2. Reconnect connectors, drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute, and then
perform self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
>> Poor connection of connector terminal
NG
>> GO TO 5.
BRC-35
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
5. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS

1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect malfunctioning wheel

sensor connector and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) connector.
Check continuity between terminals. (Also check continuity
when the steering wheel is turned right and left and when the
sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.)
SFIA2015E
Power supply circuit
Signal circuit
Ground circuit
Wheel sensor harness

connector
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control
unit) harness connector E69
Wheel sensor harness

connector
ABS actuator and

electric unit (control unit) harness
connector E69
(Signal)
24 (W)
1 (W)
9 (B)
2 (B)
9 (B), 24 (W)
Front LH
(E59)
22 (L/W)
1 (L/W)
7 (L/Y)
2 (L/Y)
7 (L/Y), 22 (L/W)
Rear RH
(B130)
28 (B/W)
1 (B/W)
13 (L/R)
2 (L/R)
13 (L/R), 28 (B/W)
Rear LH
(B126)
26 (BR)
1 (BR)
11 (BR/W)
2 (BR/W)
11 (BR/W), 26 (BR)
Wheel
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control
Front RH
(E17)
Ground

Signal circuit
Ground circuit

: Continuity should not exist.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness and connector that have malfunction.
6. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR

1.
2.
Replace wheel sensor that resulted in malfunction by self-diagnosis.

Reconnect connectors, drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute, and then
Is above displayed on self-diagnosis display?

OK
>> Wheel sensor has malfunction.
NG
>> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Perform to self-diagnosis again, and make sure that the result shows NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
BRC-36
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Inspection 2: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 1
EFS004HC

B
Check self-diagnostic results.

ABS CONTROLLER

YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Perform self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Inspection 3: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and
Ground Circuit
EFS004HD
BRC
Check self-diagnostic results.

LOW POWER VOLTAGE

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector, and
check the terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair
or replace the terminal.
2. Connect the connector securely and perform self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 3.
BRC-37
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON or OFF, and then check continuity and voltage between each connector terminal
and ground.
Signal
Power
supply
Signal
Ground
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit) har- Ground
ness connector
E69
29 (L)
ABS actuator and

electric unit (control unit) harness
connector E69
Measurement condition
Measured
value
Battery
voltage
Ignition
switch ON (Approx.
12V)
SFIA2019E
Ignition
switch
OFF
Approx.
0V
Ground
Measurement condition
Measured
value
Ignition
switch
OFF
Continuity
should
exist.
16 (B),30 (B)
OK or NG
OK
>> Check battery for terminal looseness, low voltage, etc. If
any malfunction is found, repair malfunctioning parts.
NG
>> Corresponding harness circuit malfunctions. Repair circuit.
Inspection 4: ABS Actuator Relay or ABS Motor Relay Power System


IN ABS SOL
OUT ABS SOL
MAIN RELAY (ACTUATOR RELAY)
PUMP MOTOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
BRC-38
http://vnx.su
SFIA2020E
EFS004HE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector, and check
the terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Connect the connector securely and perform self-diagnosis again.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR RELAY OR ABS MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
For the ABS actuator relay, measure voltage between harness
connector E69 terminal 15 (L/W) and ground. For the ABS motor
relay, measure voltage between harness connector E69 terminal
1 (Y) and the ground.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

harness connector E69
BRC
Ground
Voltage
Battery voltage
(Approx. 12V)
1 (Y), 15 (L/W)
SFIA2021E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Circuit malfunction between the battery and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Repair
circuit.
4. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) GROUND CIRCUIT
J
Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control

unit) harness connector E69 terminals 16 (B), 30 (B) and ground.
harness connector E69
Ground
Continuity
16 (B), 30 (B)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Open or short in harness. Repair or replace the harness.
Inspection 5: ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) 2
M
SFIA2022E
EFS004HG

EMERGENCY BRAKE
Even when EMERGENCY BRAKE and any other items are indicated in self-diagnosis display (Note),
replace control unit.
Note: Emergency brake is indicated when the control unit itself detects an internal malfunction.
YES >> Replace ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Perform self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
BRC-39
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Inspection 6: G Sensor System
EFS004HH
1. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

G - SENSOR

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and G sensor connector, and check the terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector securely, and perform self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN G SENSOR AND ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect G sensor and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connectors.
Check continuity between G sensor harness connector M57 and ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) harness connector E69.
G sensor harness
connector M57
ABS actuator and

electric unit (control
1 (B/W)
21 (B)
2 (R/L)
12 (R/L)
3 (PU/W)
10 (PU/W)
4 (SB)
25 (SB)
Measured
value
Continuity
should
exist.
SFIA2024E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Circuit malfunction of G sensor. Repair harness.
BRC-40
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
4. CHECK G SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Check voltage between G sensor harness connector M57 terminal 5 (L) and ground.
Voltage
: Battery voltage (Approx. 12V)

C
D
SFIA2025E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> G sensor power supply circuit malfunction. Repair circuit.
5. CHECK G SENSOR
1.
2.
BRC
Remove G sensor from the vehicle. Refer to BRC-46, "G SENSOR" .

Connect the following terminals between G sensor and connector.
G sensor connector
Harness connector M57
1 (B)
2 (R/L)
5 (L)
SFIA2026E
3.
Check voltage between the following G sensor terminals when

ignition switch turns ON and G sensor is in the following condition.
G sensor status
G sensor harness connector

M57 terminals 5
(L) - 4 (SB)
G sensor harness connector

M57 terminals 5
(L) - 3 (PU/W)
Horizontal
Approx. 5V
Approx. 5V
Longitudinally
tilt by 20
Approx. 10V
Approx. 10V
Longitudinally
tilt by 40
Approx. 5V
Approx. 10V
SFIA2027E
BRC-41
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
OK or NG
OK
>> ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) malfunction. Replace ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit).
NG
>> G sensor malfunction. Replace G sensor.
Inspection 7: CAN Communication System
EFS004HI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector, and check
the terminal for deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or
replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> Connector terminal connector is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently
EFS004HJ
1. CHECK START
Check longitudinal brake force distribution using a brake tester.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check brake system.
2. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE

Check to make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. Refer to Front: FAX-7, "OnVehicle Inspection" , Rear: RAX-6, "On-Vehicle Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair.
3. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor for the following.
Sensor installation for damage
Sensor rotor installation for damage
Sensor connector engagement
Sensor harness
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace wheel sensor or sensor rotor.
Repair harness.
4. CHECK ABS WARNING LAMP DISPLAY

Make sure that the warning lamp turns off approximately 1 second after the key switch is turned on or when
driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> Normal
NG
>> Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-27, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
BRC-42
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction
EFS004HK
1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE
Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-6, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment" .
Is the stroke too large?
YES >> Bleed air from the brake piping. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system fluid leakage, etc. Repair if necessary. Refer to Brake pedal: BR-7, "Components" , brake
booster and master cylinder: BR-23, "Removal and Installation" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. PERFORMANCE CHECK
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS. Check if braking force is
E
normal in this condition. Connect connector after inspection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. Wheel Sensor Inspection in BRC-42, "Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently" .
BRC
NG
Symptom 3: Longer Stopping Distance
EFS004HL
CAUTION:
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer with the ABS operating than when
the ABS is not operating.
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector to deactivate ABS.
In this condition, check stopping distance. After inspection, connect connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO BRC-42, "Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently" .
NG
>> Bleed air from the brake piping. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Check brake system.
BRC-43
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ABS]
Symptom 4: ABS Does Not Work
EFS004HM
CAUTION:
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h or lower.

driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor in BRC-42, "Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently"
.
NG
Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration and ABS Operation Noise
EFS004HN
CAUTION:
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
When shifting gears
When driving on slippery road
During cornering at high speed
When passing over bumps or grooves (Approx. 50 mm or more)
When pulling away just after starting engine (Approx. 10 km/h or more)
1. SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check if pedal vibration or operation sounds occur when the engine is started.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) Switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NG
>> GO TO 3. Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor in BRC-42, "Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently"
.
BRC-44
http://vnx.su
WHEEL SENSORS
[ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
PFP:47910
A
EFS004GR
BRC
J
SFIA1100E
REMOVAL
Pay attention to the following when removing sensor.
CAUTION:
As much as possible, avoid rotating sensor when removing it. Pull sensors out without pulling on
sensor harness.
Take care to avoid damaging sensor edges or rotor teeth. Remove wheel sensor first before
removing front or rear wheel hub. This is to avoid damage to sensor wiring and loss of sensor
function.
INSTALLATION
Pay attention to the following when installing sensor. Tighten installation bolts to specified torques.
When installing, check that there is no foreign material such as iron chips on pick-up and mounting hole of
the sensor. Check that no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove any foreign material and clean the mount.
When installing front sensor, be sure to press rubber grommets in until they lock at the three locations
shown in the figure (2 at strut and 1 at body panel). When installed, harness must not be twisted.
BRC-45
http://vnx.su
G SENSOR
[ABS]
G SENSOR
PFP:47930
EFS004GY
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike the G sensor, because it is sensitive to impact.
Do not use power tool, etc. Because G sensor is weak for the impact.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove center console. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL

ASSEMBLY" .
2. Disconnect G sensor connector.
3. Remove mounting nuts and remove G sensor.
NOTE:
There is not need to detach the G sensor main body from a bracket.
SFIA0065E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal observing the precautions above.
BRC-46
http://vnx.su
SENSOR ROTOR
[ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
PFP:47970
A
EFS004GZ
REMOVAL
Front
1.
2.
Remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "Removal and Installation" in FAX Front axle/Drive shaft.
Remove sensor rotor from drive shaft. Refer to FAX Front axle/Drive shaft FAX-13, "Disassembly and
Assembly" .
Rear
1.
2.
Remove drive shaft. Refer to RAX-10, "Removal and Installation" in RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft.
Remove sensor rotor from drive shaft. Refer to RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft RAX-11, "Disassembly and
Assembly" .
INSTALLATION
Front
1.
2.
Install sensor rotor to drive shaft. Refer to FAX Front axle/Drive shaft FAX-13, "Disassembly and
Assembly"
BRC
Connect drive shaft. Refer toFAX-11, "Removal and Installation" in FAX Front axle/Drive shaft.
Rear
1.
2.
Install sensor rotor to drive shaft. Refer to RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft RAX-11, "Disassembly and
Assembly"
Connect drive shaft. Refer to RAX-10, "Removal and Installation" in RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft.
BRC-47
http://vnx.su
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)

[ABS]
ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)

PFP:47660
EFS004GT
SFIA1813E
The above figure shows RH model. LH model figure is the mirror image.
Pay attention to the following when removing actuator.

CAUTION:
Before servicing, disconnect battery terminals.
To remove brake tube, use flare nut wrench to prevent flare nuts and brake tube from being damaged. To install, use flare nut torque wrench (special service tool).
Do not apply excessive impact to actuator, such as dropping it.
Do not remove and install ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) by holding harness.
After work is completed, bleed air from brake piping. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
BRC-48
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
EFS004H7
C
WARNING:
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be perD
E
BRC
harness connectors.
EFS0019O

Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is splashed
on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene. They will ruin rubber parts of hydraulic system.
Using a flare nut torque wrench, securely tighten brake tube
flare nuts.
Before working, turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the
connectors for the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and control unit or
the battery negative terminal.
Burnish the brake pad contact surfaces after refinishing or
replacing drums or rotors, after replacing pads or linings, or if a
soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-31, "BRAKE
BURNISHING PROCEDURE" .
SBR820BA
WARNING:
Clean brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize risk of health hazard from powder caused
by friction.
Precautions for Brake Control
EFS0019P
During the ESP/TCS/ABS operation, the brake pedal vibrates lightly and its mechanical noise may be
heard. This is a normal condition.
Just after starting the vehicle after ignition switch ON, the brake pedal may vibrate or the motor operating
noise may be heard from the engine compartment. This is a normal status of the operation check.
The stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when the vehicle drives on rough,
gravel, or snowy (fresh deep snow) road.
If a malfunction is indicated by the ABS warning lamp, or other warning lamps, collect the necessary information from the customer (what symptoms are present under what conditions) and find out the possible
causes before starting the service. Besides the electrical system inspection, check the booster operation,
brake fluid level, and oil leaks.
If the tyre size and type are used in a improper combination, or the brake pads are not NISSAN genuine
parts, the stopping distance or steering stability may deteriorate.
If there is a radio, antenna, or antenna lead-in wire (including wiring) near the control unit, the ESP/TCS/
ABS function may have a malfunction.
If aftermarket parts (car stereo, CD player, etc.) have been installed, check harnesses for pinches, open,
and improper wiring.
BRC-49
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EFS00219
Tool number
Tool name
Description
GG94310000
Flare nut torque wrench
a:10mm (0.39 in) / 12mm (0.47 in)
Installing each brake piping
NT406
BRC-50
http://vnx.su
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
PFP:00000
A
EFS0019R
In case of doing work that applies to the list below, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
Situation
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
Removing/Installing ESP/TCS/ABS control unit
Replacing ESP/TCS/ABS control unit
Removing/Installing steering angle sensor
Removing/Installing steering components
Removing/Installing suspension components
Change tyre to new ones
Tyre rotation
Adjusting wheel alignment
: Required
: Not required
BRC
CAUTION:
To adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor, make sure to use CONSULT-II.
(Adjustment cannot be done without CONSULT-II.)
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
2. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition
switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION:
3. Touch ABS, WORK SUPPORT and ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT on CONSULT-II screen in
this order. Refer to BRC-77, "CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE" .
Touch START.
CAUTION:
Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle
sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch END. (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends automatically.)
6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION:
Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then
SFIA0371E
stop.
8. Select DATA MONITOR, SELECTION FROM MENU, and STR ANGLE SIG on CONSULT-II screen.
Then make sure STR ANGLE SIG is within 0 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1
to 7.
9. Erase memory of ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and ECM.
4.
BRC-51
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
System Diagram
PFP:00000
EFS0019X
SFIA2012E
ESP Function
EFS0019W
1.
The Electronic Stability Program is called the ESP for short. ESP is indicated as ESP on CONSULT-II
screen.
2. In addition to the ABS/TCS function, ESP detects a driver's steering operation amount and brake operation amount from steering angle sensor and pressure sensor. Using the information from yaw rate/side G
sensor and wheel sensors, ESP judges the driving condition (conditions of understeer and oversteer) to
improve the stability by controlling brake on 4 wheels and engine output.
3. During ESP operation, SLIP indicator lamp flashes to inform the driver of the operation.
CAUTION:
During ESP operation, body and the brake pedal lightly vibrate and their mechanical noise may be
If vehicle is rotated on a turn table, or rolled and rocked on a ship, the ABS warning lamp,
ESP OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp may turn on. In this case, start engine on a normal road again. If the ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp turn
off after the restart, it is normal.
When driving in a steep slope such as a bank, ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, and
SLIP indicator lamp may turn on. In this case, start the engine on a normal road again. If ABS
warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp turn off after the restart, it is normal.
TCS Function
1.
2.
EFS0019V
With the wheel sensor signals from 4 wheels, the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit detects a wheel spin. If a
wheel spins, the control unit controls brake fluid pressure to the spinning wheel, and cuts the fuel to the
engine. It also closes the throttle valve to reduce the engine torque. Furthermore, throttle position is controlled to the appropriate engine torque.
If a wheel spins, the TCS system works and function by applying brake fluid pressure to the spinning
wheel.
BRC-52
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
3. During TCS operation, it informs a driver of system operation by flashing SLIP indicator lamp.
CAUTION:
During TCS operation, body and brake pedal lightly vibrate and the mechanical noise may be
Depending on road circumstances, a driver may have a sluggish feel. This is not malfunction,
because the optimum traction has the highest priority by TCS operation.
When the vehicle is passing through a road where the surface friction coefficient varies, downshifting or depressing the accelerator pedal fully may activate TCS temporarily.
ABS Function
EFS0019U
1.
In cases of braking suddenly or braking on slippery road (ice road), ABS functions prevent wheels from
lock, improve the stability in sudden braking, and make efficient avoidance of obstacles with steering D
manipulation by detecting wheel speed and controlling brake fluid pressure.
2. EBD is integrated in ESP/TCS/ABS system.
E
CAUTION:
During ABS operation, brake pedal lightly vibrates and its mechanical noise may be heard. This is
a normal condition.
When starting engine, or just after starting vehicle, brake pedal may vibrate or the motor operating BRC
noise may be heard from engine compartment. This is a normal status of the operation check.
The stopping distance may be longer than that of vehicles without ABS when vehicle drives on
G
rough, gravel, or snowy (fresh deep snow) road.
EBD Function
EFS004HO
Electronic Brake Distributor is a function that detects subtle slippages between front and rear wheels during braking, and it improves handling stability by electronically controlling the brake fluid pressure which
results in reduced rear wheel slippage.
In case of electrical system break down, the fail-safe function is activated, EBD and ABS becomes inoperative, and ABS warning lamp and brake warning lamp are turned on.
Fail-Safe Function
EFS004HP
ESP/ TCS SYSTEM

In case of throttle control system trouble, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are turned on, and
the condition of vehicle is the same as the condition of vehicles without ESP/TCS equipment. In case of trouble to the throttle control system, the ABS control continues to operate normally without ESP/TCS control.
CAUTION:
If the fail-safe function is activated, then perform the self- diagnosis for ESP/TCS/ABS control system.
ABS, EBD SYSTEM

In case of electrical malfunctions with the ABS, ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. In case of electrical malfunctions with the EBD, brake warning lamp, ABS warning lamp,
ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. Simultaneously, the ESP/ TCS/ABS become one
of the following conditions of the fail-safe function.
1. For ABS trouble, only the EBD is activated and the condition of vehicle is the same condition of vehicles
without ESP/TCS/ABS equipment.
2. For EBD trouble, the EBD and ABS become inoperative, and the condition of vehicle is the same as the
condition of vehicles without ESP/TCS/ABS, EBD equipment.
NOTE:
In condition 1 described above, an ABS self-diagnosis sound may be heard. That is a normal condition
because a self-diagnosis for Ignition switch ON and The first starting are being performed.
BRC-53
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
EFS0019T
SFIA1663E
BRC-54
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
A
EFS0061G
EFS0061H
Body type
Wagon
Axle
4WD
Engine
YD22DDTi
Transmission
QR20DE/QR25DE
M/T
Brake control
YD22DDTi
A/T
QR25DE
M/T
ABS
CAN system type
E
A/T
ESP
3
TYPE 4/TYPE 5
System diagram
BRC
PKIA9634E

Signals
ECM
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit

2
Steering angle
sensor
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
A/C switch signal*1

T
T
R
R
Engine speed signal
R
R
BRC-55
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Signals
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
ECM
Steering angle
sensor
4WD control
unit
MI signal
Combination
meter
R
R
R


TYPE 6
System diagram
PKIA9635E

ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
R
T


Steering
angle sensor

TCM
T
T
BRC-56
http://vnx.su
R
R
CAN COMMUNICATION
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
R
T
PN range signal
R
T
BRC
R
Combination
meter

4WD control
unit

MI signal
Steering
angle sensor
T
T

BRC-57
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Proceed With Diagnosis
PFP:00004
EFS005VY
BASIC CONCEPT
Most important point to perform diagnosis is to understand systems (control and mechanism) in vehicle
thoroughly.

First of all, reproduce symptom, and understand it fully.
it will be necessary to check symptom by driving vehicle with
customer.
NOTE:
Customers are not professionals. Do not assume maybe customer means... or maybe customer mentioned this symptom.
SEF234G
It is essential to check symptoms right from beginning in order to

repair a malfunction completely.
For an intermittent malfunction, it is important to reproduce
symptom based on interview with customer and past examples.
Do not perform inspection on ad hoc basis. Most intermittent
malfunctions are caused by poor contacts. In this case, it will be
effective to shake suspected harness or connector by hand.
When repairs are performed without any symptom check, no
one can judge if malfunction has actually been eliminated.
After diagnosis, make sure to carry out erase memory. Refer to
BRC-27, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
SEF233G
For an intermittent malfunction, move harness or harness connector by hand to check poor contact or false open circuit.
Always read GI General Information to confirm general precautions. Refer to GI-4, "General Precautions" .
BRC-58
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART
A
BRC
SFIA1664E
BRC-59
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
ASKING COMPLAINTS
Complaints against malfunction vary depending on each person.

It is important to clarify customer complaints.
Ask customer about what symptoms are present and under
what conditions. Use information to reproduce symptom while
driving.
It is also important to use diagnosis sheet so as not to miss information.
SBR339B
EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET
SFIA2202E
BRC-60
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
EFS005VZ
BRC
SFIA1814E
BRC-61
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Schematic
EFS005W0
TFWB0075E
BRC-62
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Wiring Diagram
ESP/TCS/ABS
EFS005W1
LHD MODEL
BRC
TFWB0084E
BRC-63
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0085E
BRC-64
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
TFWB0086E
BRC-65
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0087E
BRC-66
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
TFWB0076E
BRC-67
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0088E
BRC-68
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
RHD MODEL
A
BRC
TFWB0089E
BRC-69
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0090E
BRC-70
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
TFWB0091E
BRC-71
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0092E
BRC-72
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
A
BRC
TFWB0077E
BRC-73
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
TFWB0093E
BRC-74
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard
EFS005W2
REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II
CAUTION:
The displayed item is the data calculated by the control unit, so it may indicate a normal value even if
an output circuit (harness) is open or shorted.
Data monitor
Data monitor item
Contents
Condition
FR RH SENSOR
FR LH SENSOR
RR RH SENSOR
RR LH SENSOR
ACCEL POS SIG
ENG RPM
STR ANGLE SIG
YAW RATE SEN
SIDE G-SENSOR
PRESS SENSOR
Reference value in
normal operation
Vehicle stopped
0 [km/h]
During driving (Note 1)
Almost in accordance with the

speedometer display (within 10%)
Accelerator pedal not

depressed (ignition switch is
ON)
0%
Accelerator pedal depressed

(ignition switch is ON)
0 100%
With the engine stopped
0rpm
Engine running
Almost in accordance with

tachometer display
Steering wheel angle

detected by steering
angle sensor
Straight-ahead condition
Approx. 0
Steering
720 to 720
Yaw rate detected by

yaw rate sensor
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 d/s
During driving
70 to 70d/s
Transverse acceleration detected by side G

sensor
Vehicle stopped
Approx. 0 m/s2
During driving
24.3 to 24.1m/s2
With the ignition switch

turned ON and brake pedal
released.
Approx. 0 bar
With the ignition switch

turned ON and brake pedal
depressed.
40 to 300bar
Wheel speed
Open/close condition
of throttle valve (linked
with accelerator pedal)
With the engine running
Brake fluid pressure

detected by pressure
sensor
BATTERY VOLT
Battery voltage supplied to the ESP/TCS/

ABS control unit
MOTOR RELAY
Motor relay
ON/OFF condition
ACTUATOR RLY
Actuator relay
ON/OFF condition
STOP LAMP SW
Operating status of
brake pedal
PARK BRAKE SW
Parking brake status
(Reference) Check items

for malfunction
Wheel sensor circuit
BRC
Engine speed signal circuit
Steering angle sensor

and circuit
Yaw rate sensor and circuit
Pressure sensor and circuit
Ignition switch ON
10 16V
ABS not activated.
OFF
ABS activated.
ON
Ignition ON and Vehicle

stopped.
OFF
Engine running and Vehicle

stopped.
ON
Depress brake pedal.
ON
Release the brake pedal.
OFF
Parking brake activated
ON
Parking brake not activated
OFF
http://vnx.su
E
Control unit communication circuit between the
ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit and ECM
Side G sensor and circuit
BRC-75
ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit power supply circuit
and ground circuit
Motor relay and circuit
Actuator relay and circuit
Stop lamp switch circuit

Parking brake switch circuit
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Data monitor
Data monitor item
Contents
Condition
OFF SW
ABS WARN LAMP
OFF LAMP
SLIP LAMP
FR LH IN SOL
FR LH OUT SOL
FR RH IN SOL
FR RH OUT SOL
RR LH IN SOL
RR LH OUT SOL
RR RH IN SOL
RR RH OUT SOL
USV [FR-RL]
USV [FL-RR]
HSV [FR-RL]
HSV [FL-RR]
V/R OUTPUT
M/R OUTPUT
FLUID LEV SW
EBD FAIL SIG

ABS FAIL SIG
TCS FAIL SIG
VDC FAIL SIG
ESP OFF SW
ON/OFF condition
ABS warning lamp status (Note 2)
ESP OFF indicator

lamp status (Note 3)
SLIP indicator lamp

status (Note 4)
Solenoid valve operation
ESP switch-over solenoid valve status
Actuator relay activated

(ON/OFF)
Actuator motor and

motor relay status (ON/
OFF)
Brake fluid level warning switch status.
System fail signal status
ESP OFF switch ON

(When ESP OFF indicator
lamp is ON.)
Reference value in
normal operation
ON
ESP OFF switch circuit
ESP OFF switch OFF

(When ESP OFF indicator
lamp is OFF.)
OFF
When ABS warning lamp is

ON.
ON
ABS warning lamp circuit
When ABS warning lamp is

OFF.
OFF
When ESP OFF indicator

lamp is ON.
ON
When ESP OFF indicator

lamp is OFF.
OFF
When SLIP indicator lamp is

ON
ON
When SLIP indicator lamp is

OFF.
OFF
Actuator (solenoid valve) is

active (Active Test with CONSULT-II) or actuator relay is
inactive (in fail-safe mode).
ON
When the actuator (solenoid

valve) is not active and actuator relay is active (ignition
switch ON).
OFF
When the actuator (switchover solenoid valve) is active

(Active test with CONSULTII) or the actuator relay is inactive (when fail-safe mode).
ON
When the actuator (switchover solenoid valve) is inactive

or the actuator relay is active
(ignition switch ON).
OFF
When the actuator relay is

active (the engine is running).
ON
When the actuator relay is not

active (before the engine get
started and in the fail-safe
mode).
OFF
When the actuator motor and

motor relay are active (Active
test with CONSULT-II).
ON
When the actuator motor and

motor relay are inactive.
OFF
When brake fluid level warning

switch is ON.
ON
When brake fluid lever warning

switch is OFF.
OFF
Malfunctions condition
(When system failed)
BRC-76
http://vnx.su
(Reference) Check items

for malfunction
ESP OFF indicator lamp

circuit
SLIP indicator lamp circuit
Solenoid valve and circuit
Switch-over solenoid
valve and circuit
Actuator relay and circuit
Actuator motor, motor

relay, and circuit
OFF
Brake fluid level warning

switch, brake warning
lamp and circuit.
EBD system
ABS system
TCS system
ESP system
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
(Note 1): Check the pressure of the tyre in normal condition.
(Note 2): ON/OFF timing of the ABS warning lamp
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON (when the system is in normal operation).
(Note 3): ON/OFF timing of the ESP OFF indicator lamp
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected ESP OFF switch is ON.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON (when the system is in normal operation) or when ESP OFF switch
is OFF.
(Note 4): SLIP indicator lamp ON/OFF timing
ON: For approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON, or when a malfunction is detected.
OFF: Approximately 2 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON (when the system is in normal operation) and ESP/TCS function is
not activated.
Flashing: ESP/TCS function is active during driving.
CONSULT-II Functions
EFS005W3
CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION

In a diagnosis function (main function), there are WORK SUPPORT, SELF-DIAG RESULTS, DATA MONITOR, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, ACTIVE TEST, FUNCTION TEST, ECU PART NUMBER.
Diagnostic
test mode
Function
WORK SUPPORT
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately
by following the indications on CONSULT-II.
BRC-51, "Adjustment of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position"
SELF-DIAG
RESULTS
BRC-79, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS"
DATA MONITOR
Input/Output data in the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit can be read.
CAN DIAG
SUPPORT
MNTR
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of communication can be read.
ACTIVE TEST
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-II drives some actuators apart from the
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and also shifts some parameters in a specified range.
FUNCTION
TEST
Conducted by CONSULT-II instead of a technician to determine whether each system is OK or NG.
ECU PART
NUMBER
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit part number can be read.
BRC
Reference
H
BRC-81, "DATA MONITOR"
BRC-84, "ACTIVE TEST"

1.
2.
3.

Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector.
CAUTION:
4.
SKIA3098E
BRC-77
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
5.
Touch ABS in the SELECT SYSTEM screen.

If ABS is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link
SFIA1816E
6.
Select the required diagnostic location from the SELECT DIAG

MODE screen.
For further information, see CONSULT-II Operation Manual.
SFIA2436E
BRC-78
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Description
If an malfunction is detected in the system, ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp on the combination meter turn on. In this case, perform self-diagnosis as follows:
While CONSULT-II is used, ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp may be
turned on in a case of no malfunctioning.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.

Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector.
CAUTION:
E
Start engine and drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
After stopping vehicle, with the engine running, touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL), ABS, SELFBRC
DIAG RESULTS in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
If START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) is touched immediately after starting engine or turning on the
ignition switch, ABS might not be displayed in the System Selection screen. In this case, repeat G
the operation from step 1. If it cannot be shown after several attempts, ESP/TCS/ABS control unit
may have malfunctioned.
6. The self-diagnostic results are displayed. (If necessary, the self-diagnostic results can be printed out by H
touching PRINT.)
When NO FAILURE is displayed, check ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp.
I
7. Perform the appropriate inspection from the display item list, and repair or replace the malfunctioning
component.
8. Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute.
J
CAUTION:
In a case that a wheel sensor is malfunctioning, ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp,
SLIP indicator lamp will turn on. If vehicle is not driven at approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) or K
more for at least approximately 1 minute after repair of the wheel sensor system, ABS warning
lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp may not turn off even if everything is
normal. Check again to make sure that there is no malfunction on other parts.
L
9. Turn ignition switch OFF to prepare for erasing the memory.
10. Start engine and touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL), ABS, SELF-DIAG RESULTS, ERASE
MEMORY in order on the CONSULT-II screen to erase the diagnostic memory.
M
If ABS is not indicated, go to GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
CAUTION:
If the diagnostic memory is not erased, re-perform the operation from step 5.
11. For the final inspection, drive at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute and confirm that
ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp and SLIP indicator lamp are OFF.
3.
4.
5.
BRC-79
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Display Item List
Self-Diagnostic item
FR LH SENSOR 1
Circuit of front LH wheel sensor is open.
RR RH SENSOR 1
Circuit of rear RH wheel sensor is open.
FR RH SENSOR 1
Circuit of front RH wheel sensor is open.
RR LH SENSOR 1
Circuit of rear LH wheel sensor is open.
FR LH SENSOR 2
Front LH wheel sensor is shorted or input signal is malfunction.
RR RH SENSOR 2
Rear RH wheel sensor is shorted or input signal is malfunction.
FR RH SENSOR 2
Front RH wheel sensor is shorted or input signal is malfunction.
RR LH SENSOR 2
Rear LH wheel sensor is shorted or input signal is malfunction.
MAIN RELAY
During the actuator relay operating with OFF, when the actuator
relay turns ON. Or when the control line for the relay is shorted to
the ground.
Check route
Wheel sensor and circuit. Refer to BRC-89
Actuator relay and circuit. Refer to BRC-101
During the actuator relay operating with ON, when the actuator
relay turns OFF, or when the control line for the relay is open.
Stop lamp switch and circuit. Refer to BRC-103
STOP LAMP SW
Stop lamp switch circuit is open.
PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
Pressure sensor signal line is open or shorted, or pressure sensor is malfunction.
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
Neutral position of steering angle sensor is dislocated, or the

steering angle sensor is malfunction.

and circuit. Refer to
BRC-93
YAW RATE SENOR
Yaw rate sensor is malfunction, or the yaw rate sensor signal line
is open or shorted.
Yaw rate/side G sensor

BRC-95
FR LH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of front LH wheel inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

or the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the
ground.
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of front LH wheel outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
RR RH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of rear RH wheel inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of rear RH wheel outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
FR RH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of front RH wheel inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of front RH wheel outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
RR LH IN ABS SOL
Circuit of rear LH wheel inlet solenoid valve is open or shorted, or

the control line is open or shorted to the power supply or the
ground.
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
Circuit of rear LH wheel outlet solenoid valve is open or shorted,

ground.
BRC-80
http://vnx.su
Pressure sensor and circuit. Refer to BRC-91
Solenoid valve and circuit. Refer to BRC-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Self-Diagnostic item
USV LINE [FL-RR]
ESP switch-over solenoid valve 1 on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power
supply or the ground.
USV LINE [FR-RL]
ESP switch-over solenoid valve 1 on the secondary side is open

circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the
power supply or the ground.
HSV LINE [FL-RR]
ESP switch-over solenoid valve 2 on the primary side is open circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the power
supply or the ground.
HSV LINE [FR-RL]
ESP switch-over solenoid valve 2 on the secondary side is open

circuit or shorted, or the control line is open or shorted to the
power supply or the ground.
PUMP MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY (note)
During the actuator motor operating with ON, when the actuator
motor turns OFF, or when the control line for actuator motor relay
is open.
During the actuator motor operating with OFF, when the actuator
motor turns ON, or when the control line for relay is shorted to
ground.
Check route
B
ESP switch-over solenoid valve and circuit.
Refer to BRC-96 .
E
Actuator motor, motor
relay, and circuit. Refer
to BRC-99
BRC
Wheel sensor input is malfunction.
Wheel sensor and circuit. Refer to BRC-89
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[ABNORMAL]
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit battery voltage is too low.
ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit battery voltage circuit and ground circuit.
Refer to BRC-103
ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
Neutral position correction of steering angle sensor is not finished.
ST ANG SEN COM CIR
CAN communication system or steering angle sensor is malfunction.
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
Side G sensor is malfunction, or circuit of side G sensor is open

or shorted.
Yaw rate/ Side G sensor

BRC-95
EMERGENCY BRAKE
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit malfunction (pressure increase is too

much or too little.)
ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit. Refer to BRC-105
CONTROLLER FAILURE
ESP/TCS/ABS internal malfunction of control unit
ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit. Refer to BRC-91
ABS SENSOR
[ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
CAN communication line is open or shorted.
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit internal malfunction.
Battery voltage for ECM is interrupted instantaneously for

Approx. 0.5 seconds or more.
Neutral position adjustment of steering angle

sensor. Refer to BRC105
and CAN communication
circuit. Refer to BRC-107
Communication circuit
between ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit and units.
Refer to BRC-107
BR FLUID LEVEL LOW
Brake fluid level drops or communication line between the ESP/

TCS/ABS control unit and brake fluid level warning switch is open
or shorted.
Communication circuit
between the ESP/TCS/
ABS control unit and the
brake fluid level warning
switch.
Reservoir tank fluid.
Refer to BRC-106
ENGINE SIGNAL 1-4, 6
Major engine components are malfunction
Engine system. Refer to

BRC-91
(note) ACTUATOR RLY on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator motor relay and circuit.
DATA MONITOR
For details of the data monitor function, refer to CONSULT-II Instruction Manual.
BRC-81
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After turning OFF ignition switch, connect CONSULT-II and CONVERTER to data link connector.
CAUTION:
Touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL), ABS, DATA MONITOR in order on the CONSULT-II screen.
CAUTION:
When START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) is touched immediately after starting engine or turning on
ignition switch, ABS might not be displayed in the system selection screen. In this case, repeat
the operation from step 1.
Return to the Monitor Item Selection screen, and touch ECU INPUT SIGNALS, MAIN SIGNALS or
SELECTION FROM MENU. Refer to the following information.
When START is touched, the data monitor screen is displayed.
Display Item List

Data Monitor item selection
Data Monitor Item (Unit)
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
GEAR (A/T MODEL)
The gear position determined

from A/T PNP switch signal is displayed.l
SLCT LVR POSI (A/T MODEL)
Shift position determined from the

A/T PNP switch signal is displayed.
FR RH SENSOR [km/h]

FR LH SENSOR [km/h]

RR RH SENSOR [km/h]
Wheel speed calculated by rear

RR LH SENSOR [km/h]
Wheel speed calculated by rear

ACCEL POS SIG

(%)
Throttle valve open/close status

judged by the CAN communication signal is displayed.
ENGINE RPM
(rpm)
Engine speed judged by the CAN

communication signal is displayed.
CAN COM START

(ON/OFF)
Communication status of CAN

communication is displayed.
STR ANGLE SIG

()
Steering wheel angle detected by

the steering angle sensor is displayed.
YAW RATE SEN

(d/s)
Yaw rate detected by the yaw rate

sensor is displayed.
SIDE G-SENSOR
Transverse acceleration detected

by the side G sensor is displayed.
Brake fluid pressure detected by

the pressure sensor is displayed.
(m/s2 )
PRESS SENSOR
(bar )
BRC-82
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
BATTERY VOLT
(V )
Voltage supplied to ESP/TCS/

ABS control unit is displayed.
MOTOR RELAY
(ON/OFF )
Motor relay signal (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
ACTUATOR RLY
(ON/OFF )
Actuator relay signal (ON/OFF)

status is displayed.
STOP LAMP SW
(ON/OFF)
Stop lamp switch (ON/OFF) status

is displayed.
PARK BRAKE SW
(ON/OFF)
Parking brake switch (ON/OFF)

OFF SW
(ON/OFF)
ESP OFF switch (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
ABS WARN LAMP

(ON/OFF)
ABS warning lamp (ON/OFF) status is displayed.
OFF LAMP
(ON/OFF)
ESP OFF indicator lamp (ON/

OFF) status is displayed.
SLIP LAMP
(ON/OFF)
SLIP indicator lamp (ON/OFF)

FR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front LH wheel inlet solenoid

FR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front LH wheel outlet solenoid

RR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear RH wheel inlet solenoid

RR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear RH wheel outlet solenoid

FR RH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
FR RH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Front RH wheel inlet solenoid

Front RH wheel outlet solenoid

RR LH IN SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear LH wheel inlet solenoid

RR LH OUT SOL
(ON/OFF)
Rear LH wheel outlet solenoid

M/R OUTPUT
(ON/OFF)
Motor relay activation signal (ON/

OFF) status is displayed.
FLUID LEV SW
(ON/OFF)
Brake fluid level warning switch

SNOW MODE SW
(ON/OFF)
OFF is displayed.
BST OPER SIG

(ON/OFF)
OFF is displayed.
M MODE SIG
(ON/OFF)
OFF is displayed.
BRC-83
http://vnx.su
BRC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Remarks
ECU INPUT
SIGNALS
MAIN
SIGNALS
SELECTION
FROM MENU
OD OFF SW
(ON/OFF)
OFF is displayed.
EBD SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
EBD operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
ABS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
ABS operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
TCS SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
TCS operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
VDC SIGNAL
(ON/OFF)
ESP operation (ON/OFF) status is

displayed.
: Applicable
: Not applicable
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
Do not perform active test while driving.
Make sure to completely bleed air from the brake system.
Active test cannot be performed when EBD, ABS, TCS or ESP operation is malfunction.
ABS and brake warning lamps turn on during the active test.
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect CONSULT-II and CONVERTER to data link connector and start engine.
CAUTION:
Touch START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) on the display screen.
Touch ABS.
Touch ACTIVE TEST.
The test item selection screen is displayed.
Touch necessary test item.
SFIA1172E
7.
8.
With the MAIN SIGNALS display shown in reverse, touch START.

The ACTIVE TEST screen will be displayed, so perform the following test.
NOTE:
When the active test is performed while depressing pedal, the pedal depression amount will change,
but this is normal.
Approximately 10 seconds after the operation is begun, TEST STOP will be displayed.
To perform a retest after TEST STOP is displayed, touch BACK and perform the test from the step 6.
Test Item
Solenoid valve
BRC-84
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
CAUTION:
The example shown is for front right wheel. The procedure for the other wheels is the same as given
below.
When performing an active test of the ABS function, select the main item for each test item. In addition,
when performing an active test of the ESP/TCS function, select the item menu for each test item.
For ABS solenoid valve, touch UP, KEEP, DOWN on the display screen.
For ABS solenoid valve (ACT), touch UP, ACT UP, ACT
KEEP and confirm that solenoid valves (IN, OUT, USV, HSV)
operate as shown in the table below.
E
SFIA0591E
BRC
ABS solenoid valve
Operation
ABS solenoid valve (ACT)
UP
KEEP
DOWN
UP
ACT UP
ACT KEEP
FR RH IN SOL
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FR RH OUT SOL
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
OFF
OFF
USV [FR - RL]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
HSV [FR - RL]
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON*
OFF
*: ON for 1 to 2 seconds after the touch, and then OFF
ABS Motor
Touch ON, OFF on the display screen and make sure ABS motor
relay is operating as shown in the table below.
Operation
ON
OFF
MOTOR RELAY
ON
OFF
ACTUATOR RELAY
ON
ON
L
SFIA0593E
BRC-85
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis
EFS005W4
PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS
Before performing diagnosis, always read precautions. Refer to BRC-58, "How to Proceed With Diagnosis" .
If ESP/TCS/ABS control unit steering angle sensor, steering system parts or suspension system parts
have been replaced, or if alignment has been adjusted, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle
sensor before driving. Refer to BRC-51, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
After diagnosis is finished, be sure to erase memory. Refer to BRC-79, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS" .
When checking continuity and voltage between units, be sure to check for disconnection, looseness,
bend, or collapse of connector terminals. If any malfunction is found, repair or replace connector terminals.
For intermittent symptoms, possible cause is malfunction in harness, harness connector, or terminals.
Move harness, harness connector, and terminals to check for poor connections.
If a circuit tester is used for the check, be careful not to forcibly extend any connector terminal.
To use CONSULT-II to perform self-diagnosis of ESP/TCS/ABS control unit active tests, or work support,
first stop work, then connect CONSULT-II and select ABS.
While self-diagnostic results of CONSULT-II shows malfunction, if CONSULT-II active test is performed,
an engine system malfunction may be indicated. In this case, start engine to resume the normal screen.
ESP/TCS/ABS system electronically controls brake operation and engine output. The following symptoms
may be caused by normal operations:
Symptom
Symptom description
Result
This is noise of motor inside ESP/TCS/ABS control unit. Slight noise

may occur during ESP, TCS, and ABS operation.
Motor operation noise
When the vehicle speed goes over 20 km/h (12.5 MPH), motor and
valves operating noise may be heard. It happens only once after ignition
switch is ON. This is a normal status of the system operation check.
System operation check

noise
When engine starts, slight click noise may be heard from engine room.
This is normal and is part of system operation check.
ESP/TCS operation
(SLIP indicator lamp blinking)
TCS may activate momentarily if wheel speed changes when driving

over location where friction coefficient varies, when downshifting, or
when fully depressing accelerator pedal.
When checking speed meter etc. with a 2-wheel-drive chassis dynamometer, vehicle speed is not increased by pressing down on the accelerator.
Normal
Normal
Normal
Cancel the ESP/TCS
function for the
inspection on a chassis dynamometer.
ABS operation (Longer stopping distance)
On roads with low friction coefficients, such as snowy roads or gravel

roads, vehicles with ABS may require a longer stopping distance. Therefore, when driving on such roads, avoid overconfidence and keep speed
sufficiently low.
Normal
Insufficient feeling of acceleration
Depending on road conditions, driver may feel that feeling of acceleration is insufficient. This is because traction control, which controls
engine and brakes to achieve optimal traction, has the highest priority
(for safety). As a result, there may be times when acceleration is slightly
less than usual for the same accelerator pedal operation.
Normal
ON and OFF Timing for ABS Warning Lamp, ESP OFF Indicator Lamp, SLIP Indicator Lamp,
Brake Warning Lamp
: ON
: OFF
ABS warning
lamp
SLIP indicator
lamp
Brake warning
lamp [Note 1]
Remarks
Ignition SW OFF.
Approx. 2 seconds after ignition switch is turned ON.
[Note 2]
Approx. 2 seconds later after

ignition switch ON.
[Note 2]
Go out 2 seconds after

ignition switch is turned
ON.
Condition
BRC-86
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Condition
ABS warning
lamp
SLIP indicator
lamp
Brake warning
lamp [Note 1]
Remarks
ESP OFF SW is turned ON.

(ESP/TCS function is OFF.)
There is an ESP/TCS/
ABS control unit malfunction. (Power,
ground or system malfunction)
ESP/TCS/ABS malfunction.
When ESP/TCS is not functioning normally.
EBD malfunction.
NOTE:
1. Brake warning lamp will turn on in case of operating parking brake (switch turned ON) or of actuating
brake fluid level switch (brake fluid is insufficient).
2. After starting engine, turn off.
Basic Inspection
EFS005W5
BRC
BASIC INSPECTION 1 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
Check fluid level in the brake reservoir tank. If fluid level is low, refill brake fluid.
Check brake piping and around ESP actuator for leaks. If there is leaking or oozing fluid, check the following items.
If ESP actuator connection is loose, tighten piping to the specified torque and re-perform the leak
inspection to make sure there are no leaks.
If there is damage to the connection flare nut or ESP actuator screw, replace the damaged part and reperform the leak inspection to make sure there are no leaks.
When there is fluid leaking or oozing from a part other than ESP actuator connection, if fluid is just oozing out, use a clean cloth to wipe off the oozing fluid and re-check for leaks. If fluid is still oozing out,
replace the damaged part.
CAUTION:
ESP actuator body cannot be disassembled.
Check brake pad degree of wear. Refer to BR-27, "PAD THICKNESS" in Front Disc Brake and BR-32,
"PAD WEAR INSPECTION" in Rear Disc Brake
BASIC INSPECTION 2 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION

Make sure battery positive cable, negative cable and ground connection are not loose. If looseness is
detected, tighten the cables. In addition, check the battery voltage to make sure it has not dropped and alternator is normal.
BRC-87
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
BASIC INSPECTION 3 ABS WARNING LAMP, ESP OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR
LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING LAMP INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make sure ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp (when ESP OFF switch is OFF), and SLIP indicator lamp turns on approximately 2 second, and brake warning lamp turns on when ignition switch is turned
ON. If they do not, check ESP OFF indicator lamp and then ESP OFF switch. Refer to BRC-107, "ESP
OFF SWITCH" . Check CAN communications. Refer to CAN Communication Inspection. If there are no
malfunctions with ESP OFF switch and CAN communication system, check combination meter. Refer to
DI-4, "COMBINATION METERS" .
Make sure ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, SLIP indicator lamp turn off approximately 2 second after turn ignition switch ON, and brake warning lamp turns off after engine starts. If lamps do not turn
off, perform self-diagnosis.
With engine running, make sure ESP OFF indicator lamp turns on and off when ESP OFF switch is turned
ON and OFF. If indicator lamp status does not correspond to switch operation, check the ESP OFF switch
system. Refer to BRC-107, "ESP OFF SWITCH" .
Make sure ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp turn off 2 seconds after
engine is started. If ABS warning lamp, ESP OFF indicator lamp, and SLIP indicator lamp have not turned
off 10 seconds after engine has been started, perform self-diagnosis of ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
After performing the self-diagnosis, be sure to erase the diagnostic memory. Refer to BRC-27, "SELFDIAGNOSIS" .
CAUTION:
Brake warning lamp turns on when parking brake is operated (switch on) and brake fluid level
switch is activated (leak of brake fluid).
BRC-88
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System
EFS005W6
Check each part according to CONSULT-II self-diagnostic results, and then identify the parts to be replaced.
CAUTION:
Do not check between wheel sensor terminals.
1. CHECK TYRE
C
Check air pressure, wear and size.

Are air pressure, wear and size within standard?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Adjust air pressure, or replace tyre.
2. CHECK SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check sensor and sensor rotor.
Check sensor rotor rubber for damage.
Check sensor for disconnection or looseness.

Is inspection result OK?
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair sensor mount or replace sensor rotor.
BRC

H

ABS SENSOR [ABNORMAL SIGNAL]
FR RH SENSOR-1
FR RH SENSOR-2
FR LH SENSOR-1
FR LH SENSOR-2
RR RH SENSOR-1
RR RH SENSOR-2
RR LH SENSOR-1
RR LH SENSOR-2
Is above displayed on self-diagnosis displayed?

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect connector between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and malfunctioning
wheel sensor, and check for deformation, disconnection and looseness. Repair or replace if necessary.
2. Reconnect connectors, drive vehicle at 30 km/h or more for approximately 1 minute, and then perform
self-diagnosis.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 5.
BRC-89
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
5. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR HARNESS

1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect malfunctioning wheel

sensor connector and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector.
Check continuity between terminals. (Also check continuity
when the steering wheel is turned right and left and when the
sensor harness inside the wheel house is moved.)
SFIA2200E
Signal circuit
Ground circuit
Wheel sensor (harness

connector)
ESP/TCS/
ABS control unit
(harness
connector
E122)
Wheel sensor (harness

connector)
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
(harness connector E122)
(Signal)
16 (W)
1 (W)
15 (B)
2 (B)
15 (B), 16 (W)
Front LH
(E59)
10 (L/W)
1 (L/W)
8 (L/Y)
2 (L/Y)
8 (L/Y), 10 (L/
W)
Rear RH
(B130)
12 (B/W)
1 (B/W)
11 (L/R)
2 (L/R)
11 (L/R), 12 (B/
W)
Rear LH
(B126)
14 (BR)
1 (BR)
13 (BR/W)
2 (BR/W)
13 (BR/W), 14
(BR)
Wheel
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
Front RH
(E17)

Signal circuit
Ground circuit
Ground


OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness and connector that have malfunction.
6. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR

1.
2.
Replace wheel sensor that resulted in malfunction by self-diagnosis.

Reconnect connectors, drive vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more for approximately 1 minute, and then
OK
>> Wheel sensor has malfunction.
NG
>> Replace ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
Perform to self-diagnosis again, and make sure that the result shows NO DTC IS DETECTED.
FURTHER TESTING MAY BE REQUIRED.
BRC-90
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 2 Engine System
EFS005W7
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK 1

B

ENGINE SYSTEM 1
ENGINE SYSTEM 2
ENGINE SYSTEM 3
ENGINE SYSTEM 4
ENGINE SYSTEM 6
Are any items other than above indicated in the self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Repair or replace affected items.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
BRC

1.
Perform the ECM self-diagnosis and repair or replace affected items, then perform the ECM self-diagnosis again.
2. Perform the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> Repair or replace affected items. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
Inspection 3 ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit System
EFS005W8
1. SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT CHECK

CONTROLLER FAILURE
Are any items other than CONTROLLER FAILURE indicated in the self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Repair or replace affected items. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> Replace ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
Inspection 4 Pressure Sensor and the Circuit between Pressure Sensor and
ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit.
EFS005W9

PRESS SEN CIRCUIT
Is PRESS SEN CIRCUIT indicated in the self-diagnosis results?

>> GO TO 2.
BRC-91
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]

1.
Disconnect connectors of pressure sensor and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit, and connect them again correctly.
2. Perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
YES >> Repair or replace the poorly connected connector, then perform the self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. PRESSURE SENSOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION

1.
2.
Disconnect connectors of pressure sensor and ESP/TCS/

ABS control unit.
Check for continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and
pressure sensor (harness connector E67).
SFIA2192E
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit

Pressure sensor
(ESP actuator harness connector E67)
69 (P/L)
30 (P/L)
68 (L/OR)
31 (L/OR)
67 (G/B)
32 (G/B)
Continuity
Yes

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the disconnected harness.
4. PRESSURE SENSOR INSPECTION

Check the PRESS SENSOR value in DATA MONITOR.
Condition
Brake pedal depressed
Brake pedal released
PRESS SENSOR (Data monitor)

Positive value
Approx. 0 bar

YES >> Perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> Pressure sensor malfunction. Replace ESP actuator (with the pressure sensor).
BRC-92
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 5 Steering Angle Sensor and Circuit between Steering Angle Sensor
and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit.
EFS005WA

C
ST ANGLE SEN CIRCUIT
Perform the inspection 15.

Refer to BRC-107, "Inspection 15 CAN Communication Circuit, ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and Steering
Angle Sensor" .
Is ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
>> GO TO 2.
BRC
1.
Repair or replace the poorly connected connector

Check connector housing for disconnect, loose, bent and collapse terminals
If any malfunction are detected, repair or replace the applicable part.
2. Perform the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
BRC-93
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
3. STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector and steering angle sensor connector.
2.

steering angle sensor (harness connector M81).
SFIA2032E

2 (Y/R)
3.

(harness connector M81)
3 (Y/R)
Continuity
Yes
Check for the continuity between the steering angle sensor and
ground.
SFIA2033E

2 (B/R)
ground
Continuity
Yes

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
4. DATA MONITOR CHECK

Perform the STR ANGLE SIG value in DATA MONITOR and check that it is in normal condition.
Steering condition
Straight-ahead
Turn the wheel to the right by 90
Turn the wheel to the left by 90
STR ANGLE SIG (Data monitor)

5 to + 5
Approx. + 90
Approx. 90

YES >> Perform the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> Replace the spiral cable (with the steering angle sensor) and adjust the neutral position of steering angle sensor. BRC-51, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
BRC-94
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 6 Yaw Rate/Side G sensor and the Circuit between Yaw Rate/Side G
sensor and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit.
EFS005WB

C
YAW RATE SEN
SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT
D
CAUTION:
When vehicle on a turn-table at an entrance of parking lot or on a moving unit, ESP OFF indicator
lamp turns ON, and the self-diagnosis with CONSULT-II may indicate that yaw rate sensor system is E
malfunction. In this case, yaw rate sensor is not malfunction. Move the vehicle from the turn-table or
other moving unit, and restart the engine. This will return the status normal.
Are YAW RATE SENSOR and SIDE G-SEN CIRCUIT indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
BRC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END

1.
2.
Disconnect connectors of yaw rate/side G sensor and ESP/TCS/

ABS control unit.
yaw rate/side G sensor.
J
SFIA2180E

Yaw rate/side G-sensor

(harness connector B112)
78 (L/B)
1 (L/B)
77 (Y/B)
2 (Y/B)
34 (OR)
3 (OR)
79 (LG/R)
4 (LG/R)
18 (GY/L)
5 (GY/L)
80 (W/R)
6 (W/R)

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
BRC-95
http://vnx.su
Continuity
L
Yes
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
3. YAW RATE SENSOR/SIDE G SENSOR CIRCUIT CHECK

Check that YAW RATE SEN and SIDE G-SENSOR are in normal operation in DATA MONITOR.
Vehicle status
YAW RATE SEN

(DATA MONITOR)
SIDE G-SENSOR
(DATA MONITOR)
While the vehicle is stopped
4 to + 4 /s
Right turn
Left turn
Negative value
Positive value
1.1 to + 1.1 m/s2

Negative value
Positive value

NO
>> The yaw rate/side G sensor malfunction. After replacing the sensor, perform the self-diagnosis of
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit again.
Inspection 7 Solenoid Valve, ESP Switch-over Solenoid Valve and Circuit
EFS005WC

FR LH IN ABS SOL
FR LH OUT ABS SOL
RR RH IN ABS SOL
RR RH OUT ABS SOL
FR RH IN ABS SOL
FR RH OUT ABS SOL
RR LH IN ABS SOL
RR LH OUT ABS SOL
USV LINE [FL-RR]
USV LINE [FR-RL]
HSV LINE [FL-RR]
HSV LINE [FR-RL]
Are any self-diagnosis result items above indicated?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END

1.
Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector and solenoid valve connectors. Securely connect them
again.
Are any self-diagnosis result items indicated again?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the poorly connected connector.
BRC-96
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
3.
1.
2.
SOLENOID VALVE INPUT SIGNAL CHECK.
Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector.

Turn ignition switch ON and check the voltage between ESP/
TCS/ABS control unit and body ground.
D
SFIA2193E

Body ground
Voltage
BRC
26 (W/G)
5 (G/OR)
6 (PU/W)
53 (P)
55 (R/Y)
3 (Y/G)
4 (GY/R)
Battery voltage (approx.12V)

I
25 (LG)
49 (B/W)
50 (R/G)
54 (W/L)
K
52 (PU)
YES >> Check ESP/TCS/ABS control unit power supply circuit.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
BRC-97
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
4.
1.
2.
SOLENOID VALVE LINE CHECK

Disconnect connectors for ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and ESP actuator.
ESP actuator (harness connector E67and E68).
SFIA2194E

ESP actuator
(harness connector E67 and E68)
26 (W/G)
3 (W/G)
5 (G/OR)
1 (G/OR)
6 (PU/W)
7 (PU/W)
53 (P)
5 (P)
55 (R/Y)
15 (R/Y)
3 (Y/G)
14 (Y/G)
4 (GY/R)
17 (GY/R)
25 (LG)
16 (LG)
49 (B/W)
26 (B/W)
50 (R/G)
25 (R/G)
54 (W/L)
28 (W/L)
52 (PU)
27 (PU)
Continuity
Yes

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Harness disconnection between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and the ESP actuator
BRC-98
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
5.
1.
2.
ACTUATOR SOLENOID INSPECTION
Disconnect ESP actuator connector and ESP relay box harness connector.
Check the resistance value at ESP actuator.
B
D
SFIA2181E
ESP Actuator
(Actuator side)
ESP Relay box

Resistance
BRC
3(W/G)
1(G/OR)
7(PU/W)
6.0 11
5(P)
26(B/W)
25(R/G)
40
15(R/Y)
14(Y/G)
17(GY/R)
3.0 5.0
16(LG)
28(W/L)
27(PU)
NO
>> Replace ESP actuator assembly.
Inspection 8 Actuator Motor, Motor Relay and Circuit
EFS005WD

PUMP MOTOR
ACTUATOR RLY (NOTE)
NOTE:
ACTUATOR RLY on the CONSULT-II self-diagnosis results indicates the malfunction of the actuator relay
and circuit.
Are PUMP MOTOR and ACTUATOR RLY (NOTE) indicated in the self-diagnosis results?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
BRC-99
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]

1. Disconnect connectors for ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and the actuator. Securely connect them again.
Are any self-diagnosis items indicated again?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
3. ACTUATOR MOTOR, MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION

1.
2.
Disconnect relay box harness connectors.

Check the voltage between the harness connector E55 and
body ground.
SFIA2206E
ESP Relay box

10 (W/R)
Body ground
Voltage value
Battery voltage (approx. 12V)

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Check the fuse 50A.
Check for the continuity between battery and relay box terminal No. 10.
4. ACTUATOR MOTOR AND MOTOR RELAY CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
Disconnect connectors for ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and the

relay box.
Check for continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit, the
relay.
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
(harness
connector E122)
ESP relay box

(harness
connector
E56and E57)
20 (R/B)
4 (R/B)
7 (G/W)
8 (G/W)
Continuity
Yes

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Harness malfunction between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit, the ESP relay box.
5.
MOTOR RELAY UNIT INSPECTION
Check the motor relay as a unit.

NO
>> Replace the motor relay.
BRC-100
http://vnx.su
SFIA2182E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 9 Actuator Relay and Circuit
EFS005WE

B

MAIN RELAY
Is MAIN RELAY indicated in the self-diagnosis results?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END

E
1. Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector. Securely connect them again.

2. Perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
Is the same self-diagnosis item indicated?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
BRC
3. ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION

1.
2.

Check ESP/TCS/ABS control unit ground circuit.
K
SFIA2195E

Body ground
Continuity
Yes
28 (B)
29 (B)

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Poor connection on ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector or harness disconnection.
BRC-101
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
4.
1.
2.
ACTUATOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Disconnect the relay box connectors.
Check the voltage between the harness connector and body
ground.
SFIA2183E
ESP relay box

9 (BR)
Body ground
Voltage value

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check the fuse 30A.
Check for the continuity between battery and the relay box terminal No. 9. If it is not OK,
replace the fuse or harness.
5. ACTUATOR RELAY POWER CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
Disconnect connectors for ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and the

relay box.
the relay box.
SFIA2184E

ESP relay box

2 (Y/R)
5 (Y/R)
36 (L/Y)
7 (L/Y)
Continuity
Yes

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> The harness disconnection between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and the relay box.
6. ACTUATOR RELAY UNIT INSPECTION

Check the actuator relay as a unit.
NO
>> Replace the actuator relay.
BRC-102
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 10 Stop Lamp Switch and Circuit
EFS005WF

B

STOP LAMP SW
Is STOP LAMP SW indicated in the self-diagnosis results?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2. STOP LAMP INSPECTION

E
1. Disconnect connectors for stop lamp switch and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
2. Securely connect them again.
3. Start the engine.
4. Repeat depressing brake pedal carefully several times, then perform the self-diagnosis again.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
BRC
3. STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
Disconnect connectors for stop lamp switch and ESP/TCS/

ABS control unit.
Check for the continuity between the stop lamp switch and ESP/
TCS/ABS control unit.
K
SFIA2185E

48 (P)
STOP LAMP SW
2 (P)
Continuity
M
Yes

NO
>> The harness disconnection between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and stop lamp switch.
Inspection 11 ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Power Supply Circuit


BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL]
Is BATTERY VOLTAGE [ABNORMAL] indicated in the self-diagnosis results?

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
BRC-103
http://vnx.su
EFS005WG
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]

1. Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector. Securely connect them again.
2. Perform the self-diagnosis.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
3. ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1

1.
2.

Turn ignition switch ON (engine not running), and check the voltage between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and body ground.
SFIA2186E

1 (G/R)
Body ground
Voltage value

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
4. ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT INSPECTION 1

Check ESP/TCS/ABS control unit ground circuit.
SFIA2187E

Body ground
Continuity
Yes
28 (B)
29 (B)

NO
>> Harness disconnection or improper installation of the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
BRC-104
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
5. ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT INSPECTION 2

1.
2.
Check the fuse 10A.

Check for continuity between the battery positive terminal and
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
D
SFIA2188E

1 (G/R)
Battery terminal
Continuity
positive
Yes
BRC

YES >> Check battery for a loose terminal and low voltage or malfunction.
NO
>> Replace the fuse 10A.
Harness disconnection
Inspection 12 When EMERGENCY BRAKE is indicated in the Self-Diagnostic

Results
EFS005WH

J
EMERGENCY BRAKE
When any items other than EMERGENCY BRAKE is displayed in the self-diagnosis results, follow the
instructions below.
CAUTION:
EMERGENCY BRAKE is indicated when the control unit itself is detected internal malfunction. If this
display item was indicated, replace the control unit.
Is EMERGENCY BRAKE is indicated in the self-diagnosis results?
YES >> Replace ESP/TCS/ABS control unit, and perform the self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Inspection 13 When ST ANG SEN SIGNAL is Indicated in the Self-Diagnostic

Results
EFS005WI

ST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL
When any items other thanST ANGLE SEN SIGNAL is displayed in the self-diagnosis results:
YES >> Check and repair the applicable items. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> Perform the steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment. GO TO 2.
BRC-105
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]

Turn ignition switch OFF, and ON to erase the self-diagnosis results. And perform the ESP/TCS/ABS control
unit self-diagnosis again.
Is the same self-diagnosis item indicated again?
YES >> After replacing spiral cable (with the steering angle sensor), perform the neutral position adjustment. Then conduct the self-diagnosis again.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Inspection 14 Brake Fluid Level of Reservoir Tank, Communication Circuit

between ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and Brake Fluid Level Warning Switch
EFS005WJ

BR FLUID LEVER LOW
Does the brake warning lamp turn on?

YES >> Check the pad for wear. Check the brake fluid for leakage.
NO
>> GO TO 2.

1. Disconnect connectors for the brake fluid level switch and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
2. Securely connect connectors. Perform the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis again.
Is the same self-diagnosis item indicated again?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Poor connection of connector. Repair or replace the poorly connected connector.
3. CIRCUIT CHECK BETWEEN BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING SWITCH AND ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT
1.
Disconnect connectors for brake fluid level switch and ESP/

TCS/ABS control unit.
SFIA2196E
2.
Check for the continuity between the brake fluid level switch and the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
40 (Y/B)
Brake fluid level switch

1 (Y/B)

NO
BRC-106
http://vnx.su
Continuity
Yes
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Inspection 15 CAN Communication Circuit, ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and

Steering Angle Sensor
EFS005WK
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector, and check the terminal for
deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction, repair or replace the terminal.
2. Reconnect connector to perform self-diagnosis.
Is CAN COMM CIRCUIT or ST ANG SEN COM CIR displayed in the self-diagnosis display items?
YES >> Print out the self-diagnostic results, and refer to LAN-4, "CAN COMMUNICATION" .
NO
>> Connector terminal connection is loose, damaged, open, or shorted.
Component Check
EFS005WL
ESP OFF SWITCH
Disconnect the ESP OFF switch connector. Check for continuity

between the terminal No. 1 and No. 2.
1-2
BRC
: Pressing the switch will make a continuity, and releasing it will stop the continuity.
H
SFIA1822E
ESP RELAY BOX
Disconnect the relay box connectors. Check for continuity, resistance value, and insulation between any pair of terminals in the relay
box.
L
SFIA1823E
BRC-107
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Continuity and resistance
SFIA0907E
ESP ACTUATOR
Take each connector off from the actuator. Then check electric circulation and resistance in between terminals.
SFIA2190E
CAUTION:
Confirm that the earth of actuator motor is completely removed.
BRC-108
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Continuity and resistance
A
BRC
SFIA0909E
Check the resistance

Standard value ()
Solenoid valves
Outlet ~ Outlet
Outlet ~ Inlet
Inlet ~ Inlet
ESP switch-over solenoid valve
Primary-side 1 - Secondary-side 1
Primary-side 2 - Secondary-side 2
Primary-side 1 - Primary-side 2, Secondary-side 2
Secondary-side 1 - Primary-side 2, Secondary-side 2
BRC-109
http://vnx.su
: 6.0 - 10.0
: 9.0 - 16.0
: 12.0 - 22.0
: 12.0 - 22.0
: 6.0 - 10.0
: 9.0 - 16.0
: 9.0 - 16.0
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Actuator operation check
1.
2.
Connect 9 and 10 terminals of actuator to 40 and 41 terminals of

relay box.
Measure the motor voltage (No.4 terminal to body earth) with
oscilloscope. Then check the motor reverse voltage occasioned
time.
The motor reverse voltage occasioned time is more than 0.1
sec.
CAUTION:
Perform checking of motor relay unit. Then confirm that
relay functions.
Driving actuator motor is with in 4 sec. to prevent heating
up.
Standard condition of the motor reverse voltage occasioned time is: Battery voltage is 12V. Temperature 20.
when the battery voltage or temperature is lower than the
standard, the motor reverse voltage occasioned time
becomes slightly shorter.
SFIA1824E
Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently
EFS005WM
1. CHECK START
Check longitudinal brake force distribution using a brake tester.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. CHECK FRONT AND REAR AXLE

Check to make sure that there is no excessive play in the front and rear axles. Refer to Front: FAX-7, "OnVehicle Inspection" , Rear: RAX-6, "On-Vehicle Inspection" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair.
3. CHECK WHEEL SENSOR AND SENSOR ROTOR

Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor for the following.
Sensor installation for damage
Sensor rotor installation for damage
Sensor connector engagement
Sensor harness
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace wheel sensor or sensor rotor.
Repair harness.
BRC-110
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> Normal
NG
Symptom 2: Unexpected Pedal Reaction
C
EFS005WN
1. CHECK BRAKE PEDAL STROKE

D
Check brake pedal stroke. Refer to BR-6, "On-Vehicle Inspection and Adjustment" .
Is the stroke too large?
YES >> Bleed air from the brake piping. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
E
Check brake pedal, brake booster, and master cylinder for mount play, looseness, brake system fluid leakage, etc. Repair if necessary. Refer to Brake pedal: BR-6, "BRAKE PEDAL" ,
brake booster and master cylinder: BR-23, "BRAKE BOOSTER" .
BRC
NO
>> GO TO 2.
G
Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector to deactivate ABS. Check if braking force is normal in this
condition. Connect connector after inspection.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. Wheel Sensor Inspection in Refer to BRC-89, "Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor System" .
NG
Symptom 3: Longer Stopping Distance
EFS005WO
CAUTION:
The stopping distance on slippery road surfaces might be longer with the ABS operating than when
the ABS is not operating.
Turn ignition switch OFF. Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector to deactivate ABS. In this condition, check stopping distance. After inspection, connect connector.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO BRC-110, "Symptom 1: ABS Works Frequently" .
NG
>> Bleed air from the brake piping. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Check brake system.
Symptom 4: ABS Does Not Work
EFS005WP
CAUTION:
ABS does not operate when speed is 10 km/h or lower.

driving.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor in Refer to BRC-89, "Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor
System" .
NG
Symptom 5: Pedal Vibration and ABS Operation Noise
EFS005WQ
CAUTION:
Under the following conditions, ABS is activated and vibration is felt when brake pedal is lightly
depressed (just place a foot on it). However, this is normal.
BRC-111
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
When shifting gears

When driving on slippery road
During cornering at high speed
When passing over bumps or grooves (Approx. 50 mm or more)
When pulling away just after starting engine (Approx. 10 km/h or more)
1. SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check if pedal vibration or operation sounds occur when the engine is started.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. SYMPTOM CHECK 2
Check symptoms when electrical component (headlamps, etc.) Switches are operated.
Do symptoms occur?
YES >> Check if there is a radio, antenna, antenna lead wire, or wiring close to the control unit. If there is,
move it farther away.
NG
>> GO TO 3. Check wheel sensor and sensor rotor in Refer to BRC-89, "Inspection 1 Wheel Sensor
System" .
Symptom 6: ESP OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate
EFS005WR
1. ESP OFF INDICATOR LAMP INSPECTION

Does ABS warning lamp and ESP OFF indicator lamp illuminate?
YES >> ESP/TCS/ABS control unit malfunction. Repair or replace the control unit.
NO
>> Combination meter system malfunction. Check the combination meter.
Symptom 7: SLIP Indicator Lamp Does Not Illuminate
EFS005WS
1. SLIP INDICATOR LAMP CONNECTOR INSPECTION

Check connectors for ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and meter vehicle-side harness.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the disconnected connector.
2. SLIP INDICATOR LAMP POWER CIRCUIT INSPECTION

Disconnect the meter connector. Check that the voltage between the
vehicle-side harness terminal and body ground is battery voltage
(Approx. 12V).
YES >> GO TO Refer to BRC-107, "Inspection 15 CAN Communication Circuit, ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and Steering Angle Sensor" .
NO
>> Fuse inspection
Inspection for harness and connectors between fuse
block and meter
Check the power supply circuit (battery and ignition
switch circuit).
BRC-112
http://vnx.su
SFIA2207E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
Symptom 8: Vehicle Jerks During ESP/TCS/ABS Control
EFS005WT
1. SYMPTOM CHECK 1
Check if the vehicle jerks during ESP/TCS/ABS control.

OK or NG
OK
>> Normal
NG
>> GO TO 2.

Perform self-diagnostic of ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
Are self-diagnostic results indicated?
YES >> Check the corresponding items, make repairs, and perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK CONNECTOR
BRC
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector and check the terminal for
deformation, disconnection, looseness, and so on. If there is a malfunction.
2. Securely connect connectors. Perform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis.
YES >> If poor contact, damage, open or short circuit of connector terminal is found, repair or replace.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK ECM AND A/T SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT

I
Perform ECM and A/T self-diagnosis.

ECM self-diagnosis
QR engine (With EURO-OBD)
:EC-72, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS"
QR engine (Without EURO-OBD)
YD engine (With EURO-OBD)
YD engine (Without EURO-OBD)
A/T self-diagnosis
EURO-OBD
:AT-40, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION"
EXC.F/EURO-OBD
:AT-242, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION"

YES >> Check the corresponding items, make repairs.
NO
>> Replace ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and perform to self-diagnosis again.
BRC-113
http://vnx.su
WHEEL SENSORS
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
WHEEL SENSORS
PFP:47910
EFS001CD
SFIA2203E
REMOVAL
Pay attention to the following when removing sensor.
CAUTION:
As much as possible, avoid rotating sensor when removing it. Pull sensors out without pulling on
sensor harness.
Take care to avoid damaging sensor edges or rotor teeth. Remove wheel sensor first before
removing front or rear wheel hub. This is to avoid damage to sensor wiring and loss of sensor
function.
INSTALLATION
Pay attention to the following when installing sensor. Tighten installation bolts to specified torques.
When installing, check that there is no foreign material such as iron chips on pick-up and mounting hole of
the sensor. Check that no foreign material has been caught in the sensor rotor. Remove any foreign material and clean the mount.
When installing front sensor, be sure to press rubber grommets in until they lock at the three locations
shown in the figure (2 at strut and 1 at body panel). When installed, harness must not be twisted.
BRC-114
http://vnx.su
SENSOR ROTOR
[ESP/TCS/ABS]
SENSOR ROTOR
PFP:47970
A
EFS001CE
REMOVAL
Front
1.
2.
Remove drive shaft. Refer to FAX-11, "REMOVAL" in FAX Front axle/Drive Shaft.
Remove sensor rotor from drive shaft. Refer to FAX Front axle/Drive shaft FAX-13, "DISASSEMBLY"
Rear
1.
2.
Remove drive shaft. Refer to RAX-10, "REMOVAL" in RAX Rear Axle/Drive Shaft.
Remove sensor rotor from drive shaft. Refer to RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft RAX-11, "DISASSEMBLY"
D
INSTALLATION
Front
1.
2.
Install sensor rotor to drive shaft. Refer to FAX Front axle/Drive shaft FAX-15, "ASSEMBLY"
Connect drive shaft. Refer to FAX-12, "INSTALLATION" in FAX Front Axle/Drive Shaft.
Rear
1.
2.
Install sensor rotor to drive shaft. Refer to RAX Rear axle/Drive shaft RAX-12, "ASSEMBLY"
Connect drive shaft. Refer to RAX-10, "INSTALLATION" in RAX Rear Axle/Drive Shaft.
BRC
BRC-115
http://vnx.su
ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT

[ESP/TCS/ABS]
ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT

PFP:47660
EFS001B0
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-3.

Remove the instrument lower panel. Refer to IP-3.
Remove the glove box cover. Refer to IP-3.
Remove the ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
SFIA1825E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal.
BRC-116
http://vnx.su
ESP/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND RELAY BOX

[ESP/TCS/ABS]
ESP/TCS/ABS ACTUATOR AND RELAY BOX

PFP:47850
A
EFS001CR
BRC
J
SFIA0927E
The above figure shows LH model. RH model figure is the mirror image.
Pay attention to the following when removing actuator.
Be careful of the following.
CAUTION:
Before servicing, disconnect the battery terminals.
To remove the brake tube, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tube from
being damaged. To install, use a brake tube torque wrench.
Do not remove and install the actuator by holding the harness.
After completing the work, bleed the brake piping of air. Refer to BR-9, "Bleeding Brake System" .
Make sure to connect the ground terminal securely.
BRC-117
http://vnx.su
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR

[ESP/TCS/ABS]
YAW RATE/SIDE G SENSOR

PFP:47931
EFS001CS
CAUTION:
Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side G sensor, because it is sensitive to impact.
Do not use power tool, etc. Because yaw rate/side G sensor is weak for the impact.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SRS-41, "DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT" .
Disconnect the harness connector.
Remove the mounting bolts, and remove the yaw rate/side G
sensor.
SFIA2191E
INSTALLATION
BRC-118
http://vnx.su
ESP OFF SWITCH

[ESP/TCS/ABS]
ESP OFF SWITCH

PFP:25145
A
EFS001CQ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-13,

"Instrument Driver Lower Panel" .
Push the ESP OFF switch's pawls and remove the switch from
the instrument lower driver panel.
SFIA2208E
INSTALLATION
BRC
BRC-119
http://vnx.su
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

[ESP/TCS/ABS]
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR

PFP:25554
EFS004HA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove spiral cable assembly. Refer to SRS-33, "SPIRAL CABLE" .

Remove steering angle sensor from spiral cable assembly.
SFIA1404E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
After work, make sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-51, "Adjustment of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
BRC-120
http://vnx.su
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
G STEERING
SECTION
PS
POWER STEERING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for Steering System .............................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Special Service Tools [SST] ..................................... 4
NVH Trouble shooting Chart .................................... 5
POWER STEERING FLUID ........................................ 6
Checking Fluid Level ................................................ 6
Checking Fluid Leakage ........................................... 6
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System ................................. 6
STEERING WHEEL .................................................... 8
CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION ..... 8
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY ................ 8
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION STEERING
WHEEL ................................................................. 8
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE .................................................................. 8
CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..... 9
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
STEERING COLUMN ................................................11
COMPONENT ......................................................11
REMOVAL OF LOWER SHAFT, HOLE COVER,
CLAMP AND HOLE COVER SEAL .....................11
INSTALLATION OF LOWER SHAFT, HOLE
COVER, CLAMP AND HOLE COVER SEAL ...... 12
REMOVAL OF STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY ...................................................................... 12
INSTALLATION OF STEERING COLUMN
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 13
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ................ 13

COMPONENT ..................................................... 14
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 14
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 14
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY ...................... 15
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ............ 16
COMPONENT ..................................................... 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
COMPONENT ..................................................... 18
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ............................... 27
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service ......................... 27
OIL PUMP PULLEY HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
INSPECTION ...................................................... 27
Removal and Installation (QR20DE and QR25DE
engine models) ....................................................... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
Disassembly and Assembly(QR20DE and
QR25DE engine models) ........................................ 28
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY ............. 28
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 28
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 29
Removal and Installation (YD22DDTi engine
model) ..................................................................... 32
Disassembly and Assembly (YD22DDTi engine
model) ..................................................................... 33
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY ............. 33
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 34
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 35
HYDRAULIC LINE .................................................... 37
PS-1
http://vnx.su
PS
Component ............................................................. 37
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 41
Components ........................................................... 42
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ........................ 44
Steering Wheel ....................................................... 45
PS-2
Steering Angle .........................................................45

Steering Column .....................................................45
Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket .................45
Steering Gear ..........................................................46
Oil Pump .................................................................46
Steering Fluid ..........................................................46
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EGS000IZ
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions for Steering System
EGS00049
In case of removing steering gear assembly, make the final tightening with grounded and unloaded vehi- PS
cle condition, and then check wheel alignment.
Observe the following precautions when disassembling.
Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
H
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
I
Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere
with their operation.
Do not reuse non-reusable parts.
J
Before assembling, apply the specified grease to the directed parts.
K
PS-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools [SST]
PFP:00002
EGS0004A
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ST3127S000
Preload gauge
1. GG9103000
Torque wrench
2. HT62940000
Socket adapter
3. HT62900000
Socket adapter
Inspecting of steering wheel rotating torque

and rotating torque for ball joint
S-NT541
ST27180001
Steering wheel puller
Removing steering wheel
S-NT544
KV489Q0020
Teflon ring correcting tool
a: 50 mm (1.97 in) dia.
b: 36 mm (1.42 in) dia.
C: 100 mm (3.94 in)
Installing rack Teflon ring
S-NT550
KV48103400
Preload adapter
Inspecting rotating torque
ZZA0824D
KV48103500
Oil pressure gauge
KV48102500
Hydraulic pressure gauge adapter
1. KV4810250001
Eye joint
2. KV4810250002
Flare joint
3. KV4810250003
Bolt
4. KV4810250004
Washer
Measuring oil pump relief pressure
ZZA0839D
KV48105210
Sprocket holder
Removing power steering oil pump
ZZA1191D
PS-4
http://vnx.su
Symptom
STEERING
Outer socket ball joint end play
Steering fluid leakage
Steering wheel play
Steering gear rack sliding force
Drive belt looseness
: Applicable
Judder
http://vnx.su
PS-5
Shake
Vibration
Shimmy
PROPELLER SHAFT
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
TYRES
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKES
Steering linkage looseness
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
Steering column deformation or damage
Mounting rubber deterioration
Improper installation or looseness or tilt lock lever
Improper steering wheel
Outer socket ball joint rotating torque
Noise
Outer socket ball joint swinging force

Air in hydraulic system
NVH in BR section
NVH in FAX section

NVH Trouble shooting Chart
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU, RSU section
NVH in RFD section
NVH in PR section
PS-18
PS-11
PS-13
PS-16
PS-14
PS-8
EM-13,EM-137
PS-8
PS-8
PS-6
PS-21
PS-21
PS-21
PS-6
PS-6
Reference page
Fluid level

PFP:00003
EGS000A9
Use chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
PS
POWER STEERING FLUID

Checking Fluid Level
PFP:KLF20
EGS001BV
Check fluid level with engine stopped.

Make sure that fluid level is between MIN and MAX.
Fluid levels at HOT and COLD are different. Do not confuse
them.
HOT
COLD
: Fluid temperature 50 - 80 C (122 - 176F)

: Fluid temperature 0 - 30C (32 - 86F)
CAUTION:
The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive
fluid will cause fluid leakage from the cap.
Do not reuse drained power steering fluid.
Recommended fluid is Type DEXRONTM III or equivalent.
Checking Fluid Leakage
SGIA0232J
EGS001BW
Check hydraulic connections for fluid leakage, cracks, damage,

looseness, or wear.
1. Run engine until the fluid temperature reaches 50 to 80 C (122
to 176F) in reservoir tank, and keep engine speed idle.
2. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right
stop.
3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and
carefully, check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
SGIA0506E
than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may
be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not overtighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to PS-27, "POWER STEERING OIL
PUMP" .
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating from steering gear.
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
EGS001BX
If air bleeding is not complete, the following symptoms can be observed.
Bubbles are created in reservoir tank.
Clicking noise can be heard from oil pump.
Excessive buzzing in the oil pump.

NOTE:
Fluid noise may occur in the steering gear or oil pump. This does not affect performance or durability of
the system.
1. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right stop with engine off.
CAUTION:
Turn steering wheel while filling reservoir tank with fluid so as not to lower fluid level below the
MIN line.
2. Start engine and hold steering wheel at each lock position for 3 seconds at idle to check for fluid leakage.
3. Repeat step 2 above several times at approximately 3 second intervals.
CAUTION:
Do not hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Check fluid for bubbles and while contamination.
PS-6
http://vnx.su

5.
6.
Stop engine if bubbles and white contamination do not drain out. Perform steps 2 and 3 above after waiting until bubbles and white contamination drain out.
Stop the engine, and then check fluid level.
PS
PS-7
http://vnx.su
STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL
PFP:48430
EGS001BY
CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION
Check installation conditions of steering gear assembly, front suspension, axle and steering column.
Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial
direction.
Steering wheel axial end play : 0 mm (0 in)
Check steering gear assembly mounting bolts and nut for looseness. Refer to PS-16, "COMPONENT" .
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY
Turn steering wheel so that front wheels come to the straight-ahead position. Start engine and lightly turn
steering wheel to the left and right until front wheels start to move. Measure steering wheel movement on
the outer circumference.
Steering wheel play : 0 - 35 mm (0 - 1.38 in)
When the measurement value is outside the standard value, check backlash for each joint of steering column and installation condition of steering gear assembly.
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION STEERING WHEEL
Make sure that steering gear assembly, steering column and steering wheel are installed in the correct
position.
Perform neutral position inspection after wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Wheel Alignment" .
Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position and confirm steering wheel is in the neutral position.
Loosen outer socket lock nut and turn inner socket to left and right equally to make fine adjustments if
steering wheel is not in the neutral position.
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE

1.
2.
3.
4.
Park vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake.

Start engine.
Bring power steering fluid up to adequate operating temperature. [Make sure temperature of fluid is
approximately 50 to 80C (122 to 176F).]
Check steering wheel turning force when steering wheel has
been turned 360 from neutral position.
Steering wheel
turning force
: 36 N (3.7 kg, 8.2 lb) or less
NOTE:
Multiply the distance (L) from the hook of spring scale to the
center of steering wheel by the measurement value with a
spring scale.
Perform the following manner when the guideline value is
hard to be measured.
Park vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake.
Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-30, "DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE" .
Start engine at idle, then check steering wheel turning force with
pre-load gauge [SST].
a.
b.
c.
Steering wheel
turning force
5.
a.
SST491B
: 706 Ncm (72 kg-cm, 62 in-lb)
If steering wheel turning force is out of the specification, check

rack sliding force and relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump.
Regarding relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump, refer to PS-27,
"OIL PUMP PULLEY HYDRAULIC PRESSURE INSPECTION" .
Disconnect lower shaft and steering knuckle from steering gear
assembly. Refer to PS-11, "COMPONENT" , FAX-7, "Removal
and Installation" .
PS-8
http://vnx.su
SGIA1050J
STEERING WHEEL
b.
c.
Start and run engine at idle to make sure steering fluid has reached normal operating temperature.
While pulling outer socket slowly in 11.5 mm (0.453 in) range
from neutral position, make sure rack sliding force is within
specification.
Rack sliding force:
d.
206 - 264 N
(21.0 - 26.9 kg, 46.3 - 59.3 lb)
If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering

gear assembly.
SST090B
CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
Check front wheel turning angle after toe-in inspection. Place

front wheels on turning radius gauges and rear wheels on
stands. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning
angles for LH and RH road wheels.
PS
FAA0016D
With the engine at idle, turn steering wheel from full left stop to
full right stop and measure the turning angles.
I
Inner wheel (Angle: A)

Outer wheel (Angle: B)
Minimum
36 00 (36.0)
Nominal
39 00 (39.0)
Maximum
40 00 (40.0)
31 00 (31.0)
K
SGIA0055E
Measure rack stroke if angles are outside the specified value.

Rack stroke L
: 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
Disassemble steering gear assembly to check the cause that

rack stroke is outside of the standard.
Steering angles are not adjustable. Check steering gear assembly, steering column assembly and front suspension components for wear or damage if any of the turning angles are
different from the specified value. Replace any of them, if any
non-standard condition exists.
SGIA0629J
PS-9
http://vnx.su
STEERING WHEEL
EGS001BZ
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When reconnecting spiral cable, fix cable with a tape so that fixing case and rotating part keep aligned. This
will omit neutral position alignment procedure during spiral cable installation.
1. Set front wheels in the straight-ahead direction.
2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-30, "DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE" .
3. Remove steering wheel lock nut after steering is locked.
4. Remove steering wheel with the steering wheel puller [SST].
SGIA0080E
INSTALLATION
Reverse the removal procedure for installation attentive to the following operation.
NOTE:
About the neutral position, wind spiral cable lightly clockwise until it
is tightened. Turn it counterclockwise (approximately 2.5 turns and a
quarter of a turn) and stop turning it after aligning it with the adjustment mark. (Since service parts are fixed with a stopper with the
neutral position adjusted, installation is possible without any adjustment after removing the stopper.)
CAUTION:
Do not run spiral cable idle needlessly. And do not turn it more
than necessary (or it leads to disconnection of the cable).
SHIA0145E
PS-10
http://vnx.su
STEERING COLUMN
STEERING COLUMN
PFP:48810
A
EGS00094
COMPONENT
B
PS
SGIA0903E
1.
Steering wheel
2.
Combination switch & spiral cable
3.
Steering column assembly
4.
Hole cover seal
5.
Clamp
6.
Hole cover
7.
Lower shaft
CAUTION:
Do not give axial impact to steering column assembly during removal and installation.
Do not move steering gear assembly when removing steering column assembly.
REMOVAL OF LOWER SHAFT, HOLE COVER, CLAMP AND HOLE COVER SEAL
1.
2.
3.
Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position.

Remove fixing bolt and nut between column shaft (joint part) and
lower shaft (upper side), and then separate lower shaft from column shaft (joint part).
Raise vehicle.
SGIA0908E
PS-11
http://vnx.su
STEERING COLUMN
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove fixing bolt of lower shaft (joint part), and then remove
lower shaft from vehicle.
Lowering vehicle.
Loosen clamp, and then remove hole cover seal from hole
cover.
Remove clamp and hole cover from dash panel.
SGIA0909E
INSTALLATION OF LOWER SHAFT, HOLE COVER, CLAMP AND HOLE COVER SEAL
Installation in the reverse order of the removal. For tightening torque, refer to PS-11, "COMPONENT" .
When installing lower shaft to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below.
Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position.
NOTE:
To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear sub assembly and measure the distance of inner socket, and
then measure the intermediate position of the distance.
Align rear cover cap projection with the projection of gear sub assembly.
Install slit part of lower shaft aligning with the projection of rear
cover cap. Make sure that the slit part of lower shaft is aligned
with both the projection of rear cover cap and the marking position of gear sub assembly.
SGIA0910E
REMOVAL OF STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-30, "DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE" .
Remove steering wheel. Refer to PS-10, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove steering column cover (upper and lower), ignition key finisher and instrument driver lower panel.
Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Remove combination switch & spiral cable from steering column assembly. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Disconnect each switch connectors installed to steering column assembly, and then disconnect harness
from steering column assembly.
Remove key interlock cable from steering column assembly. Refer to AT-402, "KEY INTERLOCK CABLE"
.
Remove fixing bolt and nut between column shaft (joint part) and
lower shaft (upper side), and then separate lower shaft from column shaft (joint part).
SGIA0908E
PS-12
http://vnx.su
STEERING COLUMN
9.
Remove steering column assembly mounting nuts, then remove

steering column assembly from vehicle.
C
SGIA0911E
Check each part of steering column assembly and lower shaft for damage or other malfunctions. Replace
if there are.
Measure the length L as shown in the figure if vehicle has been
involved in a minor collision. Replace steering column assembly
if outside the standard.
Steering column length L
: 405.3 mm (15.96 in)
Measure steering column rotating torque using preload gauge.

Replace steering column assembly if outside the standard.
Rotating torque
PS
0 - 0.2 Nm
(0 - 0.021 kg-m, 0 - 1 in-lb)
H
SGIA0883E
INSTALLATION OF STEERING COLUMN ASSEMBLY

Installation is the reverse order of removal. For tightening torque, refer to PS-11, "COMPONENT" .
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

Make sure that steering wheel operates smoothly by turning several times from full left stop to full right stop.
PS-13
http://vnx.su
STEERING COLUMN
EGS00095
COMPONENT
SGIA0904E
1.
Column shaft
2.
Jacket tube
3.
Adjusting stopper
4.
Adjusting bolt
5.
Column mounting bracket
6.
Tilt lever stopper
7.
Tilt lever
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the lock nut (for securing column shaft), and then remove column shaft from jacket tube.
Secure adjusting bolt, then remove lock nut (for securing tilt lever) and adjusting stopper.
Loosen adjusting bolt, and then remove tilt lever and tilt lever stopper.
Remove adjusting bolt and column mounting bracket from jacket tube.
Check jacket tube and column shaft for deformation or damage. Replace if there are.
Check tilt mechanism components for malfunction. Replace if there are.
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of the disassembly. For tightening torque, refer to PS-14, "COMPONENT" .
Tighten lock nut (for securing tilt lever) to the specified torque so that tilt lever locks when tilt lever turns
from unlock to lock. Refer to PS-14, "COMPONENT" .
PS-14
http://vnx.su
STEERING COLUMN
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
A
Check tilt mechanism operating rage.
SGIA0884E
PS
PS-15
http://vnx.su
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE

PFP:49001
EGS0004I
COMPONENT
SGIA1205E
1.
Cotter pin
2.
Steering gear assembly
3.
Power steering tube bracket
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove tyres from vehicle.
Remove stabilizer bar. Refer to FSU-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove fixing bolt of lower shaft (joint part), and then separate
lower shaft from steering gear assembly.
SGIA0909E
5.
Remove cotter pin, and then loosen nut.
SDIA2510E
PS-16
http://vnx.su

6.
Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle so as not to

damage ball joint boot using the ball joint remover (suitable tool).
CAUTION:
Temporarily tighten the nut to prevent damage to threads
and to prevent the ball joint remover (suitable tool) from
suddenly coming off.
C
SGIA1164E
7.
8.
9.
Remove high-pressure piping and low-pressure hose of hydraulic piping, and then drain power steering fluid. Refer to PS-37,
"HYDRAULIC LINE" .
Remove the power steering tube bracket mounting bolts and
nuts, and then remove power steering tube bracket from steering gear assembly.
Tilt steering gear assembly to prevent any contact with other
parts and then remove it from right side of vehicle.
PS
SGIA0912E
INSTALLATION
Installation in the reverse order of the removal. For tightening torque, refer to PS-16, "COMPONENT" .
When installing lower shaft to steering gear, follow the procedure listed below.
Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position.

NOTE:
To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear sub assembly and measure the distance of inner socket, and
then measure the intermediate position of the distance.
Align rear cover cap projection with the projection of gear sub assembly.
Align slit part of lower shaft with the projection of rear cover cap.
And then install it onto rear cover cap of steering gear assembly.
Make sure that the slit part of lower shaft is aligned with both the
projection of rear cover cap and the marking position of gear sub
assembly.
After installation, bleed air from the steering hydraulic system.

Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
Perform final tightening of nuts and bolts on each part under

unladen conditions with tyres on level ground when removing
steering gear assembly. Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSUSGIA0910E
6, "Wheel Alignment" .
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor after checking

wheel alignment. Refer to BRC-51, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position" .
PS-17
http://vnx.su

EGS0004J
COMPONENT
SGIA1206E
PS-18
http://vnx.su

1.
Outer socket
2.
Inner socket
3.
Boot clamp
4.
Boot
5.
Boot clamp
6.
Lock plate
7.
Spacer
8.
Rack assembly
9.
Rack Teflon ring
10. O-ring A
11. Rear cover cap
12. Rear housing assembly
13. O-ring B
14. Pinion assembly
15. O-ring C
16. Cylinder tubes
17. Gear housing assembly
18. Rack oil seal
19. End cover assembly
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly.

Remove rear cover cap from gear sub assembly.
Measure adjusting screw height H, and loosen adjusting
screw.
CAUTION:
Do not loosen adjusting screw 2 turns or more.
Replace steering gear assembly if adjusting screw is
loosened 2 turns or more and it is removed.
PS
SGIA0624E
4.
5.
6.
Remove mounting bolts of gear sub assembly, then remove

gear sub assembly from gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not overhaul gear sub assembly because it is non overhaul part. If there is something wrong with gear sub-assembly, change it to new one.
Remove O-ring C from gear housing assembly.
Loosen outer socket lock nut, and remove outer socket.
SGIA0018E
7.
8.
Remove boot clamp on the small and big ends, and remove
boot.
CAUTION:
Do not damage inner socket and gear housing assembly
when removing boot. Inner socket and gear housing
assembly must be replaced if inner socket and gear housing assembly are damaged because it may cause foreign
material interfusion.
Move spacer ring to rack assembly side, raise caulking part (at
two points of part A) of lock plate and loosen inner socket, then
SGIA0363E
remove inner socket from rack assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing lock plate, be careful not to damage the surface of rack assembly. If damaged rack
assembly surface will cause oil leak. Therefore, if the rack assembly surface is damaged, replace
rack assembly.
PS-19
http://vnx.su

9.
Drill out the punch crimping part of gear housing assembly outer
rim with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit. [Drill for approximately 1.5 mm
(0.059 in) depth.]
STC0013D
10. Remove end cover assembly with a 36 mm (1.42 in) open head
(suitable tool).
CAUTION:
Do not damage rack assembly surface when removing.
Rack assembly must be replaced if damaged because it
may cause oil leakage.
11. Pull rack assembly together with rack oil seal out from gear
housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage cylinder inner wall when removing rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause oil leakage.
SST081B
12. Heat rack Teflon ring to approximately 40C (104F) with a

dryer, and remove rack Teflon ring and O-ring A from rack
assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage rack assembly. Rack assembly must be
replaced if damaged because it may cause oil leakage.
SGIA0151E
13. Push rack oil seal inside with a 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an
extension bar to push out rack oil seal from gear housing
assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner
wall. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged
because it may cause oil leakage.
SGIA0179E

Boot
Check boot for cracks. Replace if there are.
Rack Assembly
Check rack assembly for damage or wear. Replace if there are.
Gear Sub Assembly
Check pinion gear for damage or wear. Replace if there are.

Rotate pinion and check for torque variation or rattle. Replace if there are.
PS-20
http://vnx.su

Gear Housing Assembly
A
Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if there are.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket

1.
Swinging torque
Hook a spring balance at the point shown in the figure and
pull the spring balance. Make sure that the spring balance
reads the specified value when ball stud and inner socket
start to move. Replace outer socket and steering gear assembly if they are outside the standard.
E
SGIA0896E
Items
Measuring point of spring
balance
Swinging torque
Spring balance measurement
2.
Outer socket
Inner socket
Stud cotter pin mounting hole
Measuring point at * mark shown

in the figure
0.3 - 2.9 Nm
(0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3.0 - 25 in-lb)
1.0 - 7.8 Nm
(0.10 - 0.80 kg-m, 9.0 - 69 in-lb)
4.84 - 47.4 N
(0.49 - 4.84 kg, 1.08 - 10.7 lb)
5.2 - 41 N
(0.53 - 4.1 kg, 1.17 - 9.07 lb)
Rotating Torque
Make sure that the reading is within the following specified
range using the preload gauge [SST]. Replace outer socket if
the reading is outside the specified value.
Outer socket
rotating torque
PS
0.3 - 2.9 Nm
(0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3.0 - 25 in-lb)
K
L
SGIA0083E
3.
Axial end play

Apply an axial load of 490 N (50 kg, 111 lb) to ball stud using a
dial indicator. Measure amount of stud movement, and then
make sure that the value is within the following specified
range. Replace outer socket and steering gear assembly if
the measured value is outside the standard.
Outer socket
Inner socket
: 0.5 mm (0.02 in) or less

: 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less
SGIA0057E
PS-21
http://vnx.su

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Apply Type DEXRONTM III or equivalent to O-ring A. Put an O-ring A into rack Teflon ring.
Heat rack Teflon ring to approximately 40C (104F) with a
dryer. Assemble it to mounting groove of rack assembly.
SGIA0153E
3.
4.
Install the Teflon ring correcting tool [SST] from tooth side of
rack to fit rack Teflon ring on rack. Compress the ring with tool.
Apply multi-purpose grease to rack oil seal and install rack oil
seal, and then assemble rack assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Do not damage retainer sliding surface by rack assembly.
Replace gear housing assembly if damaged.
Do not damage gear housing assembly inner wall by rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if
damaged because it may cause oil leakage.
Install rack oil seal in a direction so that the lip of inner oil
seal and the lip of outer oil seal face each other.
SGIA1207E
SGIA0205E
a.
Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) 100 mm

(3.94 in).] Around rack assembly teeth to avoid damaging rack
oil seal (inner). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull oil seal
along with OHP sheet until they pass rack assembly teeth, and
remove OHP sheet.
SGIA0097E
PS-22
http://vnx.su

b.
Insert rack oil seal (inner) into rack assembly piston (rack Teflon
ring). Push retainer to adjusting screw side by hand, and move
the rack assembly inside the gear housing assembly so that the
rack oil seal (inner) can be pressed against the gear housing
assembly.
C
SGIA0935E
c.
d.
Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) 100 mm

(3.94 in).] Around the edge to avoid damaging rack oil seal
(outer). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull oil seal along
with OHP sheet until they pass rack edge, and remove OHP
sheet.
Install end cover assembly to rack edge, and move rack assembly until it contacts with gear housing assembly.
PS
SGIA0157E
5.
Tighten end cover assembly to specified torque using a 36 mm

(1.42 in) open head (suitable tool).
CAUTION:
Do not damage rack assembly. Replace it if damaged
because it may cause oil leakage.
SST081B
6.
7.
8.
Crimp gear housing assembly at one point using a punch as

shown in the figure so as to prevent end cover assembly from
getting loose after tightening end cover assembly.
TM
Apply Type DEXRON

III or equivalent to O-ring C, and then
install O-ring C to gear housing assembly.
Install gear sub assembly to gear housing assembly.
SGIA0871E
9.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Install inner socket to rack assembly according to the instructions.

Attach spacer ring to rack assembly.
Install lock plate to inner socket.
Apply locking sealant (Three Bond TB1111 or equivalent) to the
thread of inner socket. Screw inner socket into rack assembly
and tighten at the specified torque.
Clinch lock plate at two points on rack groove.
Install spacer ring to lock plate as shown in the figure.
SST866C
PS-23
http://vnx.su

CAUTION:
When installing spacer ring, avoid damaging it.
10. Decide on the neutral position for the rack.
Rack stroke L
: 66.5 mm (2.618 in)
11. Install rear cover cap to gear sub assembly.

CAUTION:
Make sure that the projection of rear cover cap is aligned
with the marking position of gear housing assembly.
SGIA0629J
12. Apply a coat of Three Bond TB1111 or equivalent to the thread

(2 turns thread), and then screw in the adjusting screw until it
reaches height H from gear housing assembly measured
before disassembling.
13. Move rack 10 strokes throughout the full stroke so that the parts
can fit with each other.
SGIA0624E
14. Measure pinion rotating torque within 180 of neutral position

of the rack using the preload gauge [SST] and preload adapter
[SST]. Stop the gear at the point where highest torque is read.
15. Loosen adjusting screw and retighten to 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48
in-lb), and then loosen by 20 to 40.
STC0036D
16. Measure pinion rotating torque using the steering gear preload
adapter [SST] and preload gauge [SST] to make sure that the
measured value is within the standard. Readjust if the value is
outside the standard. Replace gear assembly if the value is out
side the standard after readjusting or adjusting screw rotating
torque is 5 Nm (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) or less.
Pinion rotating torque standard
Around neutral position
(Within100) Average A
1.67 2.25 Nm
(0.17 0.22 kg-m, 1.3 1.6 ft-lb)
Maximum variation B
0.98 Nm (0.10 kg-m, 1 ft-lb)
SGIA0936E
17. Apply a coat of Three Bond TB1111 or equivalent to inner socket and turn pinion fully to left with inner
socket installed to gear housing assembly.
PS-24
http://vnx.su

18. Set dial gauge as shown in the figure. Measure vertical movement of rack assembly when pinion is turned clockwise with
torque of 4.9 Nm (0.5 kg-m, 43 in-lb). Readjust adjusting screw
angle if the measured value is outside the standard. Replace
gear assembly if the measured value is still outside the standard
or adjusting screw rotating torque is 4.9 Nm (0.5 kg-m, 43 in-lb)
or less.
C
SGIA0465E
Vertical movement of rack

Measuring point
0.265 mm (0.0104 in) or less

Rack axial direction
5 mm (0.197 in) from housing end surface
Rack radial direction
Axial direction of the adjusting screw
19. Install large end of boot to gear housing assembly.

20. Install small end of boot to inner socket boot mounting groove.
21. Install boot clamp to boot small end.
PS
SGIA0550E
22. Install large side of boot clamp.

NOTE:
Do not reuse large side of boot clamp.
Tighten large side of boot with boot clamp (stainless wire).
: 370 mm (14.57 in)
Wrap clamp around boot groove for two turns. Insert a flatbladed screwdriver in loops on both ends of wire. Twist 4 to
4.5 turns while pulling them with force of approximately 98 N
(10 kg, 22 lb).
Wire length L
SGIA0163E
Twist boot clamp as shown. Pay attention to relationship

between winding and twisting directions.
SGIA0164E
PS-25
http://vnx.su
Twisted point of clamp is in the opposite side of adjusting

screw as shown in the figure (to prevent contact with other
parts).
SGIA0214E
Bent cut end of the wire toward rack axial as shown in the figure after twisting the wire 4 to 4.5 turns so that cut end does
not contact with boot.
CAUTION:
Keep gap from cylinder tube 5 mm (0.20 in) or more.
23. Install cylinder tube to gear housing assembly.
SGIA0260J
24. Adjust inner socket to standard length L, and then tighten lock
nut to the specified torque. Refer to PS-18, "COMPONENT" .
Check length of inner socket L again after tightening lock nut.
Make sure that the length is the standard.
Inner socket length L
169.67 mm (6.68 in)
CAUTION:
Adjust toe-in after this procedure. Length achieved after
toe-in adjustment is not necessary the above value.
SGIA0167E
PS-26
http://vnx.su
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP

PFP:49110
A
EGS000AF
OIL PUMP PULLEY HYDRAULIC PRESSURE INSPECTION

Before starting following procedure, check tension of belt.
1. Raise vehicle. Connect oil pressure gauge between oil pump
discharge connector and high pressure hose. Then bleed the
hydraulic circuit.
2. Start engine. Run engine until oil temperature reaches 50C 80C (122 - 176F)
CAUTION:
Leave valve of hydraulic pressure gauge fully open while
starting and running engine. If engine is started with
valve closed, hydraulic pressure in oil pump goes up.
This will relief pressure along with abnormal increase of
oil temperature.
Care must be taken to keep hose clear of belt and other parts when engine is started.
3. Fully close hydraulic pressure gauge valve with engine at idle. Measure relief pressure.
4.
5.
Relief oil pressure

YD22DDTi models
: 8,000 - 8,800 kPa (81.60 - 89.76 kg/cm2 , 1,160 - 1,276 psi)
Except YD22DDTi models
: 8,500 - 9,300 kpa (98 - 104 kg/cm2 , 1,390 - 1,480 psi)
SST834-H
REMOVAL
PS
After measurement, open valve slowly.

CAUTION:
Never keep valve closed for 10 seconds or longer.
If relief pressure is outside specification, disassemble and service oil pump. Refer to PS-28, "Disassembly and Assembly(QR20DE and QR25DE engine models)" , PS-33, "Disassembly and Assembly
(YD22DDTi engine model)" .
After inspection, remove oil pressure gauge from hydraulic circuit. Add fluid. Be sure to bleed the system
completely. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
Removal and Installation (QR20DE and QR25DE engine models)

1.
2.
3.
4.
EGS000AG
Loosen adjusting screw and oil pump mounting bolt. Then, remove belt.
Remove union bolt and hose for oil pump.
Remove oil pump bracket attaching bolt.
Remove oil pump from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Paying attention to following items, install in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, adjust belt tension. Refer to EM-13, "DRIVE BELTS" .
After installation, be sure to bleed system. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
PS-27
http://vnx.su

Disassembly and Assembly(QR20DE and QR25DE engine models)
EGS000AH
SGIA0645E
1.
Pulley
2.
Front bracket
3.
Drive shaft seal
4.
Casing
5.
Inlet connector seal
6.
Inlet connector
7.
Flow control valve spring
8.
Flow control A valve
9.
Dowel pin
10. Flow control B valve assembly
11. Side plate (front)
12. Cartridge
13. Rotor
14. Vane
15. Rotor snap ring
16. Side plate (rear)
17. Side plate inner seal
18. Side plate outer seal
19. Body seal
20. Rear body
21. Rear bracket
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY

Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items
are found.
Oil leak from any point shown in the figure
Deformed or damaged pulley
Poor performance
SST984A
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fix power steering pump in a vise.

CAUTION:
When fixing pump in a vise, use aluminum plates to protect steering pump mounting surface.
Remove rear bracket mounting bolts. Remove rear bracket from rear body.
Remove three front bracket attaching bolts and remove front bracket from casing.
Remove four rear body attaching bolts and remove rear body from casing.
Remove body seal from casing.
Remove side plate (rear) from cartridge. Remove side plate inner and outer seals from side plate (rear).
PS-28
http://vnx.su

7.
Remove rotor snap ring using a snap ring pliers and remove pulley from casing.
CAUTION:
When removing rotor snap ring, be careful not to damage
pulley shaft.
8. Remove following parts from casing: cartridge, rotor, vane, side
plate (front), flow control valve A, flow control valve spring, and
flow control valve B assembly
CAUTION:
Do not drop flow control A valve and flow control B valve
assembly to floor. If dropped, they may be deformed.
9. Remove inlet connector attaching bolt and remove inlet connector from casing.
10. Remove inlet connector seal from inlet connector.
11. Using a screwdriver or equivalent tool, remove drive shaft seal from casing.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage casing surface with screwdriver.
C
SGIA0059E

Inspecting Casing and Rear Body
Check casing and rear body for internal damage. If rear body is damaged, replace rear body. If casing is
PS
damaged, replace power steering pump assembly.
Cartridge Inspection
Check cartridge for damage. If damaged, cartridge, rotor, and vane must be replaced as a set.
Inspecting Side Plate
Check side plates (front and rear) for damage. If damaged, side plates (front and rear) must be replaced
as a set.
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Apply multi-purpose grease to lip of drive shaft seal. Using a

drift, install drive shaft seal to casing.
CAUTION:
Drive shaft seal is not reusable. Never reuse drive shaft
seal.
If removed dowel pin cannot be inserted to casing by hand, tap
it with hammer.
SST038A
3.
Connect flow control valve A, flow control valve spring and flow
control valve B assembly as shown.
SGIA0061E
PS-29
http://vnx.su

4.
Align dowel pin A on flow control valve A with notch B in side

plate (front) as shown. Install side plate (front) to casing.
SGIA0062E
5.
6.
Install cartridge onto front side plate with smaller slit of cartridge
facing casing.
Connect pulley to casing.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage drive shaft seal when installing
pulley.
SST497A
7.
Connect rotor to pulley shaft with punch mark on rotor facing

casing.
SST289A
8.
Connect vane to rotor with arc of vane in contact with cartridge.
SST843A
PS-30
http://vnx.su

9.
Connect rotor snap ring to slit of pulley shaft, using a hammer

and a 10-mm socket.
CAUTION:
Rotor snap ring is not reusable. Never reuse rotor snap
ring.
Be careful not to damage rotor and pulley shaft.
If rotor is damaged, power steering pump assembly must
be replaced.
C
SGIA0063E
10. Align dowel pin A on flow control valve A with notch B in side
plate (rear) as shown. Install side plate (rear) to cartridge.
11. Apply DEXRONTM III or equivalent to body seal. Install it to casing.
CAUTION:
Body seal is not reusable. Never reuse body seal.
PS
SGIA0064E
12. Apply DEXRONTM III or equivalent to side plate inner and outer
seals. Install them to side plate (rear).
CAUTION:
Side plate inner and outer seals are not reusable. Never
reuse side plate inner and outer seals.
13. Fix power steering pump in a vise.
CAUTION:
When fixing pump in a vise, use aluminum plates to protect
steering pump mounting surface.
14. Attach rear body to casing and tighten four mounting bolts diagSGIA0065E
onally to specified torque.
15. Install rear bracket to rear body. Tighten mounting bolts to specified torque.
16. Connect front bracket to casing and tighten mounting bolts (3) to specified torque.
17. Connect inlet connector seal to inlet connector slit. Install inlet connector to casing with attaching bolts.
CAUTION:
Inlet connector seal is not reusable. Never reuse inlet connector seal.
PS-31
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation (YD22DDTi engine model)
1.
EGS000AI
Remove chain case cover.
SST884C
2.
3.
4.
Revolving crank pulley, set sprocket holder [SST].

Fix sprocket holder [SST] with chain cover fixing bolts.
Using suitable tool, remove sprocket fixing nut and washer.
CAUTION:
Do not remove Tool while power steering oil pump is
removed.
SST885C
5.
Remove power steering pump fixing bolts, then remove it.
SST886C
6.
7.
Apply Gasket to the installation surface of the engine chain case

cover as shown in the figure before installing the chain case
cover to the engine.
Bleed air after installation. Refer to PS-6, "Air Bleeding Hydraulic System" .
SST890C
PS-32
http://vnx.su

Disassembly and Assembly (YD22DDTi engine model)
EGS000AJ
PS
J
SGIA0646E
1.
Rear bracket
2.
Rear body
3.
Dowel pin
4.
Side plate seal
5.
Cam ring
6.
Vane
7.
Rotor
8.
Side plate
9.
O-ring (Outer)
10. O-ring (Inner)
11. Front body
12. Drive shaft rear oil sear
13. Drive shaft front oil seal
14. Drive shaft
15. Snap ring
16. O-ring
17. Outlet connector
18. Connector seal
19. Flow control valve
20. Flow control valve spring
21. Inlet connector
22. O-ring
23. Copper washer
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY

Disassemble power steering oil pump only when any of following
cases meets.
If oil leak is found on oil pump.
Oil pump pulley is deformed or damaged.
Performance of oil pump is low.
SST883C
PS-33
http://vnx.su

DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Parts which can be disassembled are strictly limited. Never disassemble parts other than those
specified.
Disassemble in as clean a place as possible.
Clean your hands before disassembly.
Do not use rags; use nylon cloths or paper towels.
Follow the procedure and cautions in the Service Manual.
When disassembling and reassembling, do not let foreign matter enter or contact the parts.
1. Remove rear bracket and rear body.
2. Remove side plate seal, cam ring, vane, rotor and side plate.
SST887C
3.
Remove out connector and then remove connector seal, flow

control valve and flow control valve spring.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the flow control valve.
Do not disassemble the flow control valve.
SST036A
4.
Remove oil seal
SST888C
5.
6.
Remove snap ring, then draw drive shaft.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop drive shaft.
Remove inlet connector.
SST889C
PS-34
http://vnx.su

If pulley is cracked or deformed, replace it.

If an oil leak is found around pulley shaft oil seal, replace the seal.
If serration on pulley or pulley shaft is deformed or worn, replace it.
ASSEMBLY
1.
Assemble oil pump, noting the following instructions.

Make sure O-rings and oil seal are properly installed.
Always install new O-rings and oil seal.
Be careful of oil seal direction.
Cam ring, rotor and vanes must be replaced as a set if necessary.
Coat each part with DEXRONTM III or equivalent when

assembling.
E
SST036A
2.
Pay attention to the direction of rotor.
PS
I
SST289A
3.
When assembling vanes to rotor, rounded surfaces of vanes

must face cam ring side.
SST843A
PS-35
http://vnx.su

4.
Insert pin 2 into pin groove 1 of front housing and front side
plate. Then install cam ring 3 as shown at left.
Cam ring
: D1 is less than D2
SST472C
PS-36
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
HYDRAULIC LINE
Component
PFP:49721
A
EGS0004O
CAUTION:
Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor.
QR20DE LH MODEL
C
PS
SGIA0944E
PS-37
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High-pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
Eye-joint (assembled to high-pressure side hose)
10. Eye-bolt
QR20DE RH MODEL
SGIA0945E
PS-38
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High-pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
10. Eye-bolt
QR25DE LH MODEL
C
PS
SGIA0946E
PS-39
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High-pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
10. Eye-bolt
QR25DE RH MODEL
SGIA0947E
PS-40
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High-pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
10. Eye-bolt
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Insert hose securely until it contacts tube spool.

CAUTION:
Do not apply fluid.
SGIA0514E
Install eye-bolt with eye-joint (assembled to high-pressure hose)

protrusion facing with pump side cutout, and then tighten it to
the specified torque after tightening by hand.
PS
I
SGIA0854E
PS-41
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
Components
EGS00168
CAUTION:
Securely insert harness connector to pressure sensor.
YD22DDTi LH MODEL
SGIA0948E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
PS-42
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
Eye-joint (assembled to high-pressure side hose
10. Eye-bolt
YD22DDTi RH MODEL
PS
SGIA0949E
1.
Reservoir tank
2.
Suction hose
3.
High pressure hose
4.
Oil pump assembly
5.
6.
Pressure sensor
PS-43
http://vnx.su
HYDRAULIC LINE
7.
O-ring
8.
Copper washer
9.
Eye-joint (assembled to high-pressure side hose
10. Eye-bolt
Insert hose securely until contacts tube spool.

CAUTION:
Do not apply fluid.
SGIA0514E
Install eye-bolt with eye-joint (assembled to high-pressure hose)

protrusion facing with pump side cutout, and then tighten it to
the specified torque after tightening by hand.
SGIA0854E
PS-44
http://vnx.su

Steering Wheel
PFP:00030
A
EGS0004P
Steering wheel axial end play
0 mm (0 in)
Steering wheel play
0 - 35 mm (0 - 1.38 in)
Steering Angle
EGS0004Q
Inner wheel
Minimum
36 00 (36.0)
Nominal
39 00 (39.0)
Maximum
40 00 (40.0)
Outer wheel
31 00 (31.0)
Steering Column
EGS0004R
Steering column length L
405.3 mm (15.96 in)
PS
SGIA0883E
Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket
EGS0004S
Steering gear type
PR24AD
Swing torque
Outer socket
0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3.0 - 25 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance

Measuring point: cotter pin hole of stud
4.84 - 47.4 N (0.49 - 4.84 kg, 1.08 - 10.7 lb)
Rotating torque
0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3.0 - 25 in-lb)
Axial endplay
Swing torque
1.0 - 7.8 Nm (0.10 - 0.80 kg-m, 9.0 - 69 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance
Measuring point at* mark shown in the figure
Inner socket
Axial endplay
5.2 - 41 N (0.53 - 4.1 kg, 1.17 - 9.07 lb)

Inner socket length L
169.67 mm (6.68 in)
SGIA0950E
PS-45
http://vnx.su

Steering Gear
EGS0004T
Steering gear model
PR24AD
Rack neutral position, dimension L (rack stroke)
66.5 mm (2.618 in)
SGIA0629J
Oil Pump
EGS0004U
Oil pump relief hydraulic pressure

YD22DDTi models
Except YD22DDTi models
8,000 - 8,800 kPa (81.60 - 89.76 kg/cm2 , 1,160 - 1,276 psi)

8,500 - 9,300 kPa (98 - 104 kg/cm2 , 1,390 - 1,480 psi)
Steering Fluid
EGS0004V
Fluid capacity
Approx. 1.0
PS-46
http://vnx.su
(1-1/8 US qt, 7/8 lmp qt)
SEAT BELTS
H RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SB
SEAT BELTS
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precaution for Seat Belt Service .............................. 2
AFTER A COLLISION ........................................... 2
SEAT BELTS .............................................................. 3
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt ............. 3
REMOVAL ............................................................. 3
INSTALLATION ..................................................... 3
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt ............. 4
REMOVAL/WITH 2-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT ................................................... 4
INSTALLATION/WITH 2-POINT TYPE REAR
CENTER SEAT BELT ........................................... 4
REMOVAL/WITH 3-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT ................................................... 4
INSTALLATION /WITH 3-POINT TYPE REAR
CENTER SEAT BELT ........................................... 5
SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM ............................... 6
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..... 6
System Description ................................................... 6

SEAT BELT OPERATION ...................................... 6
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME AND SEAT BELT
WARNING LAMP .................................................. 7
Time Chart for Seat Belt Warning Lamp and Chime..... 7
Schematic ................................................................. 8
Wiring Diagram S/WARN/For LHD models ....... 9
Wiring Diagram S/WARN/For RHD models ..... 12
Terminal and Reference Value for Time Control Unit... 15
Work Flow ............................................................... 16
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom .................... 16
Time Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Check ..................................................................... 16
Seat Belt Warning Lamp Power Supply Check ...... 17
Seat Belt Warning Lamp Check (Driver side) ......... 17
Seat belt Warning Lamp Check (Passenger Side)... 19
Seat Belt Buckle Switch Check .............................. 20
Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Pressure Switch
Check ..................................................................... 22
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection ............................ 24
SB
SB-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EHS000MW
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precaution for Seat Belt Service
EHS000BE
CAUTION:
Before removing the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect
both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
Do not use electrical test equipment for seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
After replacing or reinstalling seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting seat belt pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" .
Do not use disassemble buckle or seat belt assembly.
Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
Never oil tongue and buckle.
If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the whole seat belt
assembly.
If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine seat belt assembly.
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioner
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
SB-2
http://vnx.su
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
PFP:86884
A
EHS0005W
SHIA0243E
CAUTION:
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 SB
minutes.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove adjuster cover.

Remove shoulder anchor bolt.
Slide the floor anchor cover.
Remove floor anchor bolt.
Remove pre-tensioner seat belt retractor fixing screws to remove seat belt assembly.
Remove front seat. Refer to SE-26, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove screw, and remove seat cushion inner finisher.
Remove anchor bolt to remove seat belt buckle.
SHIA0244E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
SB-3
http://vnx.su
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
EHS0005X
REMOVAL/WITH 2-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT
SHIA0044E
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fold rear seat cushion up.

Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove outer anchor and floor anchor bolts.
Remove anchor bolts securing seat belt retractor. Remove seat belt assembly.
INSTALLATION/WITH 2-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT

REMOVAL/WITH 3-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT
SHIA0045E
LH/RH Rear Seat Belt

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove outer anchor and floor anchor bolts.
Remove rear seat belt retractor.
SB-4
http://vnx.su
SEAT BELTS
Center Rear Seat Belt
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove seat belt retractor cover.
Remove anchor bolts securing center seat belt retractor.
Remove rear seatback. Refer to SE-33, "SEATBACK" .
Remove rear seatback board.
Remove hog ring securing upper portion of rear seatback trim.
Remove rear seat belt guide.
F
SHIA0050E
8.
9.
Remove screws securing rear seat belt.

Remove rear center seat belt assembly from rear seatback.
SB
SHIA0049E
INSTALLATION /WITH 3-POINT TYPE REAR CENTER SEAT BELT

SB-5
http://vnx.su
SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM

PFP:25045
EHS000H6
SHIA0329E
System Description
EHS000GP
Power is supplied at all times,
to time control unit terminal 1
through 10A fuse [No. 28, located in fuse block (J/B)].

When ignition switch in the ON or START position,
power is supplied
through 10A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)].
to combination meter terminal 2
through 10A fuse [No. 11, located in the fuse block (J/B)],
Ground is supplied at all times,
through body ground M27 and M70.

When drive the vehicle, unified meter control unit transmits a vehicle speed signal to time control unit,
through unified meter control unit terminal 33
to time control unit terminal 36.
SEAT BELT OPERATION

( ): without power seat
Driver Side
When driver side seat belt is unfastened,
ground is supplied
through seat belt buckle switch terminal 13 (1)
SB-6
http://vnx.su

through body ground B8 and B18.
Then time control unit recognizes the driver seat belt buckle switch signal.
Passenger Side
When passenger side belt is unfastened and occupant is sitting,

ground is supplied
through seat pressure switch terminal 3
through seat pressure switch terminal 4
through body ground B107 and B119.

Then time control unit recognizes the passenger seat belt buckle switch signal.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME AND SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP

Driver side
When the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (16 MPH) with front driver side seat belt unfastened (seat belt
switch ON), warning chime will sound for approximately 90 seconds and seat belt warning lamp is flashed.
If the seat belt are fastened, then unfastened again, warning chime will sound and seat belt warning lamp is
flashed.
Passenger side
When the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (16 MPH) with front passenger side seat belt unfastened (seat belt
switch ON) and occupant is sitting (seat pressure switch is ON), warning chime will sound for approximately SB
90 seconds and seat belt warning lamp is flashed.
If the seat belt are fastened, then unfastened again, warning chime will sound and warning lamp is flashed.
Time Chart for Seat Belt Warning Lamp and Chime
EHS000H5
PHIA0644E
SB-7
http://vnx.su

Schematic
EHS001FG
THWB0001E
SB-8
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram S/WARN/For LHD models
EHS000GR
SB
THWB0002E
SB-9
http://vnx.su
THWB0003E
SB-10
http://vnx.su

A
SB
THWB0004E
SB-11
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram S/WARN/For RHD models
EHS000H1
THWB0005E
SB-12
http://vnx.su

A
SB
THWB0006E
SB-13
http://vnx.su
THWB0007E
SB-14
http://vnx.su

Terminal and Reference Value for Time Control Unit
EHS000H3
A
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
15
16
17
21
22
36
W/G
B/R
G
BR/W
G/OR
LB
(A/T models)
L/Y
(M/T models)
ITEM
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
Battery voltage
Battery power supply

Seat belt warning lamp
(driver side) signal

(passenger side) signal
Seat belt warning lamp (driver

side) is illuminated.
Seat belt warning lamp (driver

side) is not illuminated.
Battery voltage
Seat belt warning lamp (passenger side) is illuminated.
Seat belt warning lamp (passenger side) is not illuminated.
Battery voltage
Ground
Turn ignition switch ON
Ignition switch ON or
START signal
Turn ignition switch ON or

START
Seat belt buckle switch

(driver side) signal

(passenger side) signal
Battery voltage
Seat belt buckle switch (driver

side) is unfastened.
Seat belt buckle switch (driver

side) is fastened.
Battery voltage
Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) is unfastened.*
Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) is fastened.*
Battery voltage
SB
I
When the vehicle speed is

approx. 40km (25MPH).
J
ELF1080D
NOTE:
*: When seat pressure switch is ON.
SB-15
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EHS001FQ
Check the symptom and customer's requests.

Understand the outline of system. Refer to SB-6, "System Description" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the malfunction. Refer to SB-16,
"Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
Does power seat system operate normally? If Yes, GO TO 5, If No, GO TO 3.
INSPECTION END.
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom
EHS000GS
NOTE:
Always check the Work Flow before troubleshooting. Refer to SB-16, "Work Flow" .
Symptom
Diagnoses/Service procedure
Seat belt warning system do not operate.

Seat belt warning lamp (driver side) do not
illuminated.
SB-16
1. Seat belt warning lamp check (driver side)
SB-17
2. Seat belt buckle switch check
SB-20
3. If the above system are normal, replace time control unit.

Seat belt warning lamp (passenger side) do
not illuminated.
Reference page
Time control unit power supply and ground check
1. Seat belt warning lamp check (passenger side)
SB-19
2. Seat belt buckle switch and seat pressure switch check
SB-22
3. If the above system are normal, replace time control unit.
Seat belt warning lamp does not illuminated

(both driver side and passenger side)
Seat belt warning lamp power supply check
SB-17
Seat belt chime does not activate.(Seat belt

warning lamp is operated)
Vehicle speed signal check
SB-24
Time Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EHS001FV
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace fuse.
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector.
Check voltage between time control unit and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(Wire color)
(+)
M30
1 (L)
M31
17 (G)
Condition
()
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ignition switch OFF
Battery voltage
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace time control unit power supply circuit.
SB-16
http://vnx.su
PHIA0649E
Check continuity between time control unit harness connector M30

terminal 16 (B/R) and ground.
16 (B/R) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace time control unit.
NG
>> Replace harness or connector.
D
PIIA8641E
Seat Belt Warning Lamp Power Supply Check
EHS000GT
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No.11, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

1.
2.
3.
SB
Disconnect combination meter connector.

Check voltage between combination meter connector M44 terminal 2 (Y/G) and ground.
2 (Y/G) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination meter.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between combination meter
and fuse block (J/B).
Seat Belt Warning Lamp Check (Driver side)
K
PHIA0641E
EHS001DO
1. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Connect battery power supply to combination meter connector
M44 terminals 2 and 10 (LHD models) 37 (RHD models), and
check the illumination.
LHD models
2 (BAT+) 10 (BAT-)
RHD models
2 (BAT+) 37 (BAT-)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
PHIA0642E
SB-17
http://vnx.su
2. CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY

1. Disconnect time control unit connector.
2. Check the following.
LHD models
Check continuity between combination meter connector M44

terminal 10 (R) and time control unit connector M30 terminal 8
(R).
10 (R) 8 (R)

terminal 10 (R) and ground.
10 (R) Ground
PHIA0648E
RHD models
Check continuity between combination meter connector M44 terminal 37 (R) and time control unit connector M30 terminal 8 (R).
37 (R) 8 (R)
Check continuity between combination meter connector M44 terminal 37 (R) and ground.
37 (R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat belt warning lamp (Driver side) is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between combination meter and time control unit.
SB-18
http://vnx.su

Seat belt Warning Lamp Check (Passenger Side)
EHS000GU
1. CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.

Connect battery power supply to combination meter connector
M44 terminals 2 and 37 (LHD models) 10 (RHD models), and
check the illumination.
LHD models
2 (BAT+) 37 (BAT-)
RHD models
2 (BAT+) 10 (BAT-)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
PHIA0642E
2. CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY

1. Disconnect time control unit connector.
LHD models

terminal 37 (W/G) and time control unit connector M30 terminal
15 (W/G).
37 (W/G) 15 (W/G)
SB

terminal 37 (W/G) and ground.
37 (W/G) Ground
PHIA0643E
RHD models
Check continuity between combination meter connector M44 terminal 10 (W/G) and time control unit connector M30 terminal 15 (W/G).
10 (W/G) 15 (W/G)
Check continuity between combination meter connector M44 terminal 10 (W/G) and ground.
10 (W/G) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat belt warning lamp (Passenger side) is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between combination meter and time control unit.
SB-19
http://vnx.su

Seat Belt Buckle Switch Check
EHS000GW
1. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between time control unit connector M31 terminal
21 (BR/W) and ground.
(+)
21 (BR/W)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Driver side seat belt buckle switch

Fasten
Battery voltage

Unfasten
()
Ground
PHIA0632E
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH HARNESS CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect time control unit connector and seat belt buckle
switch (driver side) connector.
with power seat
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 21 (BR/W) and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector B302 terminal 13 (R).
21 (BR/W) 13 (R)
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 21 (BR/W) and ground.
21 (BR/W) Ground
without power seat
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 21 (BR/W) and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector B10 terminal 1 ( * ).
21 (BR/W) 1 ( * )
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 21 (BR/W) and ground.
21 (BR/W) Ground
NOTE:
*:
LHD models
RHD models
:BR/W
:W/B
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between time control unit and seat belt buckle switch.
SB-20
http://vnx.su
PHIA0633E
3. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) terminals 13 (1) and 14 (2).
Terminal
13 (1)
14 (2)
Condition
Continuity

Fasten
No

Unfasten
Yes

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace seat belt buckle switch (driver side).
PHIA0634E
SB
4. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

with power seat
Check harness continuity between seat belt buckle switch

(driver side) connector B302 terminal 14 (OR) and ground.
14 (OR) Ground
without power seat

Check harness continuity between seat belt buckle switch
(driver side) connector B10 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between seat belt buckle
switch and ground.
PHIA0629E
SB-21
http://vnx.su

Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Pressure Switch Check
EHS000GX
1. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

22 (G/OR) and ground.
NOTE:
When performing the following procedure, a person is sitting on the
passenger side seat. (As a result, the seat pressure sensor is turned
ON.)
Terminal
(wire color)
(+)
Condition
Voltage (V)
()
22 (G/OR)
Ground
PHIA0630E
Passenger side seat belt buckle

switch Fasten and seat pressure
switch ON.
Battery voltage
Passenger side seat belt buckle

switch Unfasten and seat pressure switch OFF.
OK or NG
OK
>> Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK SEAT BELT BACKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT HARNESS CONTINUITY

1.
2.

Disconnect time control unit connector and seat belt buckle
switch (passenger side) connector.
with power seat
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 22 (G/OR) and seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) connector B352 terminal 13 (R).
22 (G/OR) 13 (R)
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 22 (G/OR) and ground.
22 (G/OR) Ground
without power seat
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 22 (G/OR) and seat belt buckle switch (passenger side) connector B113 terminal 1 (G/OR).
22 (G/OR) 1 (G/OR)
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 22 (G/OR) and ground.
22 (G/OR) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between time control unit and seat belt buckle switch.
SB-22
http://vnx.su
PHIA0631E
3. CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)

1.
2.
Disconnect seat pressure switch harness connector.

Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch (passenger
side) harness connector B352 (B113) terminal 13 (1) and seat
belt pressure switch harness connector B401 terminal 3.
Terminal
13 (1)
Condition
Continuity
Passenger side seat buckle switch

Fasten
No
Passenger side seat buckle switch

Unfasten
Yes
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace seat belt buckle switch (passenger side).
PHIA0635E
SB
4. CHECK SEAT PRESSURE SWITCH

Check continuity between seat pressure switch terminal 3 and 4.
Terminal
3
Condition
Continuity
Seat pressure switch ON
Yes
Seat pressure switch OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace seat pressure switch.
PHIA0637E
5. HARNESS CONTINUITY INSPECTION

M
Check continuity between seat pressure switch harness connector

B401 terminal 4 ( * ) and ground.
4 ( * ) Ground
NOTE:
*:
With power seat models
Without power seat models
:OR
:B
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between seat pressure switch
and seat belt buckle switch.
SB-23
http://vnx.su
PHIA0638E

Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection
EHS000GZ
1. VEHICLE SPEED INPUT SIGNAL INSPECTION

Check the signal between control unit connector M31 terminal 36 (*) and ground with oscilloscope when vehicle speed is approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH).
Terminal
(+)
()
36
(L/B: A/T models)
(L/Y: M/T models)
Ground
Voltage
ELF1080D
PHIA0647E
OK or NG
OK
>> Vehicle speed signal is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. HARNESS CONTINUITY INSPECTION

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and combination meter
harness connector.
terminal 33 (L/W) and time control unit M31 terminal 36 (L/W).
33 (L/W) 36 (L/W)
4.

terminal 33 (L/W) and ground.
33 (L/W) Ground
PHIA0640E
OK or NG
OK
>> Vehicle speed signal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to DI-20, "How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis" .
NG
>> Replace or replace harness between combination meter and time control unit.
SB-24
http://vnx.su
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
H RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SRS
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions for SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER Service ..................................... 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) ....... 6
SRS Configuration ................................................... 6
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter ..... 6
Front Side Air Bag .................................................... 7
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 8
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction ................................. 8
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ....................................... 8
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR ............... 8
WORK FLOW ........................................................ 9
Wiring Diagram SRS /LHD models ................11
Wiring Diagram SRS /RHD models .............. 13
CONSULT-II Function ............................................ 15
DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II ............... 15
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITH CONSULT-II .............................................. 15
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 16
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II) ..... 16
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
WITHOUT CONSULT-II ...................................... 16
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS... 16
SRS Operation Check ............................................ 17
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1 ........................... 17
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULTII ..................... 19
Diagnostic Code Chart ........................................... 22
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II ................. 24
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART ........... 25

Trouble Diagnosis: AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn OFF ......................................................... 28
Trouble Diagnosis: AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does
Not Turn ON ........................................................... 29
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE .................................... 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
SPIRAL CABLE ........................................................ 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 34
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .............. 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 35
INSTALLATION ................................................... 36
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE ............................ 37
REMOVAL ........................................................... 37
INSTALLATION ................................................... 38
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR ................... 39
REMOVAL ........................................................... 39
INSTALLATION ................................................... 39
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ................... 40
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..................................... 41
REMOVAL ........................................................... 41
INSTALLATION ................................................... 41
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. ................................ 41
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER ..................................................... 42
Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner ...................................................................... 42
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL ..................... 42
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG
SRS-1
http://vnx.su
SRS
MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) ................... 43

DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE) .................................................................... 46
DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE
MOUNTED IN VEHICLE ..................................... 47
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER ..................................... 47
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS .......................................... 48
For Frontal Collision ................................................ 48
WHEN SRS (EXCEPT THE FRONT SIDE AIR
BAG) IS ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION: ..............48

WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION: ...................................................................48
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION) ...................................................................48
For Side Collision ....................................................49
WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN
THE SIDE COLLISION: .......................................49
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE
COLLISION: .........................................................49
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION) ......50
SRS-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EHS001B0
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions for SRS AIR BAG and SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER Service
EHS000BH
G
Do not use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3 minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt SRS
pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, do not work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes
have passed.
Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks pointing towards the front of the
I
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required.
The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Do not attempt to J
turn steering wheel or column after removal of steering gear.
Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad
side facing upward and place front side air bag module standing with stud bolt side setting bottom.
K
Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section
PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" in PG section

When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section

Check for any service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
SRS-3
http://vnx.su
EHS001NG
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EHS000CF
Tool number
Tool name
Description
HT61961000 and HT62152000

combined
Tamper resistant TORX bit
Size: T50
a: 3.5 (0.138) dia.
b: 8.5 - 8.6 (0.335 - 0.339) dia.
c: approx. 10 (0.39) sq.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT361
KV99105300
Air bag module bracket
Anchoring air bag module
S-NT354
KV99106400
Deployment tool
Disposing of air bag module and front seat

belt pre-tensioner
S-NT357
KV99109700
Deployment tool adapter for front

seat belt pre-tensioner
Deployment tool adapter for

driver air bag module
Connecting between the deployment tool

and front seat belt pre-tensioner

and driver air bag module
SHIA0038J
KV99109000
Deployment tool adapters for side
air bag

and side air bag module
ZZA1190D
KV99108300
Deployment tool adapters for front
passenger air bag

and front passenger air bag module
ZZA1166D
SRS-4
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
EHS000CG
A
Tool name
Description
B
Tamper resistant TORX bit
Size: T30
C
S-NT757
SRS
SRS-5
http://vnx.su

SRS Configuration
PFP:28556
EHS000CH
PHIA0037E
The air bag deploys if the diagnosis sensor unit activates while the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
The collision modes for which supplemental restraint systems are activated are different among the SRS systems. For example, the driver air bag module and front passenger air bag module are activated in a frontal collision but not in a side collision.
SRS configurations which are activated for some collision modes are as follows;
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Driver air bag module
Front passenger air bag module
Front LH seat belt pre-tensioner
Front RH seat belt pre-tensioner
Front LH side air bag module
Front RH side air bag module
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter

The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed to
both the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat. It operates
simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a frontal
collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level
occurs, seat belt slack resulting from clothing or other factors is
immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle passengers are
securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and
the restraining force of the seat belt exceeds a specified level, the
load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt
web tension while maintaining force.
SRS-6
http://vnx.su
EHS000CI
SRS444

Front Side Air Bag
EHS000CJ
Front side air bag is built-in type.

The front seatbacks with built-in type side air bag have the labels
shown in figure at right.
D
PHIA0039E
SRS
SRS-7
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis Introduction
PFP:00004
EHS000CL
CAUTION:
Service Manual. SRS wiring harness can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connector.
Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged,
replace it with a new one.
Keep ground portion clean.
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
The SRS self-diagnosis results can be read by using AIR BAG warning lamp and/or CONSULT-II.
The User mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system malfunction through the operation of the AIR BAG warning lamp.
The Diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
The mode applications for the AIR BAG warning lamp and CONSULT-II are as follows:
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Display type
AIR BAG warning lamp
ON-OFF operation
CONSULT-II
Monitoring
NOTE:
Seat belt pre-tensioner malfunction is indicated by AIR BAG warning lamp.
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR

A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a malfunction. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Information From Customer

WHAT..... Vehicle model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Preliminary Check
Check that the following parts are in good order.
Battery (Refer to SC-3, "How to Handle Battery" .)
Fuse (Refer to SRS-11, "Wiring Diagram SRS /LHD models" or SRS-13, "Wiring Diagram SRS
/RHD models" .)
System component-to-harness connections
SRS-8
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WORK FLOW
A
SRS
L
PHIA0297E
*1: SRS-8, "Preliminary Check".
*2: SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check".
*4: SRS-24, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4".
SRS-9
http://vnx.su
*3: SRS-19, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2".
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EHS000CM
PHIA0020E
SRS-10
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram SRS /LHD models
EHS000CO
SRS
THWA0031E
SRS-11
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
THWA0032E
SRS-12
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram SRS /RHD models
EHS000D6
SRS
THWA0033E
SRS-13
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
THWA0034E
SRS-14
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CONSULT-II Function
EHS000O6
DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II
SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
A current Self-diagnosis result (also indicated by the number of warning lamp flashes in the Diagnosis
mode) is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring
repairs.
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on the CONSULT-II screen. The stored
results are not erased until memory erasing is executed.
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
The diagnosis sensor unit for each vehicle model is assigned
with its own, individual classification number. This number will
be displayed on the CONSULT-II screen, as shown. When
replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, refer to the part number for
the compatibility. After installation, replacement with a correct
unit can be checked by confirming this classification number on
the CONSULT-II screen.
After repair, make sure the discriminated number of diagnosis
sensor unit installed to vehicle are same. Refer to SRS-41,
"ECU DISCRIMINATED NO." .
PHIA0218E
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II

From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode
SRS
After selecting AIR BAG on the SELECT SYSTEM screen, User mode automatically changes to Diagnosis
mode.
L
SRS803
From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode

To return to User mode from Diagnosis mode, touch BACK key of CONSULT-II until SELECT SYSTEM
appears, then diagnosis mode automatically changes to User mode.
SRS804
SRS-15
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
A current Self-diagnosis result is displayed on the CONSULT-II screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on SELF-DIAG [CURRENT].
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
Return to the SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] CONSULT-II screen by touching BACK key of CONSULT-II and
select SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch ERASE in SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in SELF-DIAG [PAST] is not erased, the User mode shows the system
malfunction by the operation of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely.
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
The memory of TROUBLE DIAG RECORD cannot be erased.
SRS701
Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)
EHS000O7
The reading of these results is accomplished User mode and Diagnosis mode.
After a malfunction is repaired, turn ignition switch ON. Diagnosis mode returns to the User mode. At that
time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II
PHIA0709E
HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS

After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for at least one second, then back ON. Diagnosis
mode returns to the User mode. At that time, the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
SRS-16
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SRS Operation Check
EHS000MZ
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1
Checking Air Bag Operation by Using AIR BAG Warning Lamp User Mode
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
Compare the SRS air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the
examples.
E
BF-1845D
SRS
SRS-17
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Warning lamp examples
AIR BAG warning lamp operation-User mode-
SRS condition
No malfunction is detected.
No further action is necessary.
The system is malfunctioning and

needs to be repaired as indicated.
Air bag is deployed.
Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed.
Diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning.
Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning.
SRS air bag warning lamp circuit is

malfunctioning.
Reference item
SHIA0011E
Go to SRS-19, "DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE 2" or SRS-28,
"DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5" .
SHIA0012E
Go to SRS-48, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
Go to SRS-28, "Trouble Diagnosis:

AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn OFF" .
SHIA0013E
Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning.
SHIA0014E
SRS-18
http://vnx.su
Go to SRS-29, "Trouble Diagnosis:

AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not
Turn ON" .
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULTII
EHS000O8
Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using CONSULT-II DIAGNOSIS MODE
1.
2.

Connect CONSULT-II to the data link connector.
E
SIIA1249E
3.
4.

SRS
I
BCIA0029E
5.
Touch AIR BAG.

If AIR BAG is not indicated, GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link
BCIA0030E
6.
On the self-diagnosis mode selection screen of CONSULT-II,

select the desired self-diagnosis mode key.
SRS697
SRS-19
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
a.
Touch SELF-DIAG [CURRENT].

Diagnostic code is displayed on SELF-DIAG [CURRENT].
SHIA0203E
i.
If the malfunction is displayed in the SRS Operation Check (Air bag warning lamp blinking) but no malfunction is displayed in the SELF-DIAG [CURRENT], the following possibilities shall be checked. Refer
to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
Low battery voltage (Less than 9 V)
After the malfunction part is repaired, the diagnosis results in SELF-DIAG [PAST] has not been
erased.
An intermittent malfunction has been stored in the past.
NOTE:
Intermittent malfunction is a malfunction that has occurred once in the past, but soon recovered.
Touch SELF-DIAG [PAST].
The diagnostic code is displayed until erasing the memory in
the SELF-DIAG [CURRENT].
b.
SHIA0181E
c.
Touch TROUBLE DIAG RECORD.

The diagnosis results (malfunction parts stored in the diagnosis sensor unit) stored in the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
The memory of TROUBLE DIAG RECORD cannot be
erased.
SHIA0182E
7.
8.
9.
Each diagnostic code is displayed. Refer to SRS-22, "Diagnostic

Code Chart" .
Touch PRINT, if required.
Based on each diagnosis result, repair or replace the malfunction parts.
CAUTION:
Be sure to start the work after the following steps. Turn the
ignition switch OFF, and disconnect both battery cables.
Then wait for at least 3 minutes.
SHIA0180E
SRS-20
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
10. After repairing the malfunction, touch SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]
to check that No DTC IS DETECTED is displayed.
After checking the display, touch ERASE.
If any malfunction is displayed on SELF-DIAG [CURRENT],
repair or replace the malfunctioning again.
11. Touch BACK key of CONSULT-II to SELECT SYSTEM
screen. Touch SELF-DIAG [PAST].
C
SRS701
12. Check that no malfunction is detected on SELF-DIAG [PAST].

If any malfunction is deployed, Touch ERASE in the SELFDIAG [CURRENT] screen, and check the display.
G
SRS702
13. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn off and disconnect CONSULT-II.
14. Turn ignition switch ON, and check the system with the SRS air bag warning lamp (User mode).
15. Check that no malfunction is detected. Now the diagnosis is complete.
SRS
Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Record
If any malfunction is detected in SRS Operation Check, but no malfunction is detected in SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] on CONSULT-II, carry out the following steps.
1. CHECK BATTERY VOLTAGE

Disconnect both battery cables and check that the battery voltage is 9 V or more.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Charge the battery.
2. CONSIDER POSSIBILITY OF NOT ERASING SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT AFTER REPAIRING.

Is it the first time for maintenance of SRS?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Erase the self-diagnostic results, and Check the SRS Operation Check. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS
Operation Check" .
3. CHECK SELF-DIAG [PAST] BY CONSULT-II

Store the memory in SELF-DIAG [PAST].
YES or NO
YES >> Repair the part of SELF-DIAG[PAST].
NO
>> Check the TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, and then repair it. Refer to SRS-22, "Diagnostic Code
Chart" .
SRS-21
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic Code Chart
Diagnostic item
NO DTC IS
DETECTED.
EHS000O9
Explanation
When malfunction is
indicated by the AIR
BAG warning lamp in
User mode.
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement
Low battery voltage (Less than 9V)
Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" after charging the battery.
Self-diagnostic result SELF-DIAG

[PAST] (previously stored in the
memory) might not be erased after
repair.
Go to SRS-21, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3" .
Intermittent malfunction has been

detected in the past.
No malfunction is detected.
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[OPEN]
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit

(including the spiral cable).
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
ASSIST A/B MODULE

[OPEN]
Front passenger air bag module circuit is open.
1. Visually check the wiring harness

connection.
ASSIST A/B MODULE

[VB-SHORT]
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to a power

supply circuit.
2. Replace the harness if it has visible

damage.
ASSIST A/B MODULE

[GND-SHORT]
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
ASSIST A/B MODULE

[SHORT]
Front passenger air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
3. Replace the front passenger air bag

module. (Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the

spiral cable).

connection.
damage.
3. Replace the driver air bag module.
(Before disposal, it must be
deployed.)
4. Replace the spiral cable.
5. Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
6. Replace the related harness.

SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
Front LH side air bag module circuit is open.

connection.
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit.

damage.
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
Front LH side air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
3. Replace the front LH setback

assembly (front LH side air bag
module).
deployed.)
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
Front RH side air bag module circuit is open.

connection.
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit.

damage.
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted to ground.
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
Front RH side air bag module circuit is shorted between lines.
3. Replace the front RH setback

assembly (front RH side air bag
module).
deployed.)
SRS-22
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Diagnostic item
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
Explanation
LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor
Repair order
Recheck SRS at each replacement

connection.
damage.
3. Replace the LH side air bag (Satellite) sensor.

SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor

connection.
damage.
3. Replace the RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor.


PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is open.

connections.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit.

damage.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
Front LH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted between lines.
3. Replace the front LH seat belt.

(Before disposal, it must be activated.)
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is open.

connections.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to a power supply circuit.

damage.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted to ground.
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
Front RH pre-tensioner circuit is shorted between lines.
3. Replace the front RH seat belt.

(Before disposal, it must be activated.)
NOTE:
Follow the procedures in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts. Confirm whether malfunction is eliminated using air bag warning lamp or CONSULT-II each time repair is finished. If malfunction is
still observed, proceed to the next step. When malfunction is eliminated, further repair work is not
required.
Follow the procedure in numerical order when repairing malfunctioning parts, then make the system
check.
The screen contents are the same as the self-diagnosis results, self-diagnosis results SELF-DIAG [CURRENT] and SELF-DIAG [PAST].
SRS-23

connection.
http://vnx.su
SRS

CONTROL UNIT
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II
EHS000OA
CAUTION:
SRS will not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
2. After AIR BAG warning lamp lights for 7 seconds, turn ignition switch OFF within 1 second.
3. Wait more than 3 seconds.
4. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 two times.
6. Compare the number of flashes to Air Bag Warning Lamp Flash Code.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect both battery cables.
8. Repair the system as outlined by the REPAIR ORDER in Warning Lamp Flash Code Chart that corresponds to flash code.
9. After the repairing of malfunction, connect both battery cables, and turn the ignition switch ON.
10. Check that no malfunction is detected.
SRS-24
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART
A
D
PHIA0532E
PHIA0185E
SRS
K
SHIA0028E
SHIA0029E
SRS-25
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SHIA0030E
SHIA0031E
SHIA0032E
SHIA0033E
SRS-26
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
C
SHIA0034E
G
SHIA0035E
SRS
SRS-27
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis: AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF
EHS000OB
1. CHECK THE DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE

Is air bag module deployed?
YES or NO
YES >> Refer to SRS-48, "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS" .
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK THE AIR BAG FUSE

Check 10A fuse [No. 9, located in fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK AIR BAG FUSE AGAIN

Replace AIR BAG fuse and turn ignition switch ON.
Is AIR BAG fuse blown again?
YES >> Repair main harness.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4. CHECK DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

Connect CONSULT-II and touch START.
Is AIR BAG displayed on CONSULT-ll?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Visually check the wiring harness connection of diagnosis sensor unit. If the harness connection check result is
OK, replace diagnosis sensor unit.
SRS771
5. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION

Is harness connection between warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit OK?
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace diagnosis sensor unit.
NG
>> Connect AIR BAG warning lamp and diagnosis sensor unit connector properly. If AIR BAG
warning lamp still does not go off, replace harness.
SRS-28
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Trouble Diagnosis: AIR BAG Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON
EHS000OC
1. CHECK METER FUSE

Check 10A fuse [No. 11, located in fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK METER FUSE AGAIN
Replace meter fuse and turn ignition switch ON.

Is meter fuse blown again?
YES >> Repair the related harness.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTION BETWEEN DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT AND COMBINATION
METER
Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Does AIR BAG warning lamp turn ON?
YES >> Replace diagnosis sensor unit.
NO
>> Replace combination meter assembly.
SRS
SRS-29
http://vnx.su
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE

PFP:K8510
EHS000D7
PHIA0742E
1.
Steering wheel
2.
Side lid
4.
Special bolt
5.
Driver air bag module
3.
Lower lid
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
Always work from the side of driver air bag module.

1. Remove the side lids. Using Tamper resistant TORX bit (T30),
remove the special bolts at right and left.
PHIA0017E
2.
Disconnect the air bag harness connector, and remove the

driver air bag module.
CAUTION:
For installing / removing driver air bag module connector,
insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift
lock and remove connector.
Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into
connector.
PHIA0308E
SRS-30
http://vnx.su

CAUTION:
Always work from the side of driver air bag module.
Always place driver air bag module with pad side facing
upward.
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into

driver air bag module.
Do not attempt to disassemble driver air bag module.
Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
SRS443
Do not expose the driver air bag module to temperatures

exceeding 90C (194F).
Replace air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained
an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
front passenger air bag module.
G
SBF814E
SRS
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal paying attention to the following.
After installing the air bag module, check that the contact clearance of the horn switch is in the specified range in the right.
SHIA0185E
For installing the air bag module, tighten the special bolts with
the center of the horn pad pressed to make the contacts (RH/
LH) ON.
SHIA0184E
SRS-31
http://vnx.su
When installing driver air bag module, fix driver air bag module
harness and harness connector to clip.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that
no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation
Check" .
SHIA0144E
SRS-32
http://vnx.su
SPIRAL CABLE
SPIRAL CABLE
PFP:25554
A
EHS000D8
PHIA0024E
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
SRS
minutes.
1. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SRS-30, "Removal and Installation" .
I
2. Set the steering wheel in the neutral position.
3. Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
J
4. Disconnect the horn connector and the driver air bag module connector.
CAUTION:
Do not tap or bump the steering wheel.
K
5. Remove steering wheel nut.
6. Remove steering wheel with steering wheel puller.
CAUTION:
L
Be careful not to over-tighten puller on steering wheel.
SRS676
7.
8.
Remove the spiral cable fixing screws, and while pushing the upper plastic tab, remove the spiral cable.
CAUTION:
Do not attempt to disassemble spiral cable.
Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
Remove the wiper washer switch and lighting switch from the spiral cable.
SRS-33
http://vnx.su
SPIRAL CABLE
9.
Remove the horn switch connector and then the spiral cable
connector.
CAUTION:
Also, with the steering linkage disconnectedly cable may snap
by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of
turns.
SHIA0193E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the

cable is installed in an improper position.
Also, with the steering linkage disconnectedly cable may

snap by turning the steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned to the left about
2.5 turns from the right end position.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to

check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-17,
"SRS Operation Check" .
SHIA0145E
SRS-34
http://vnx.su
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE

PFP:K8515
A
EHS000D9
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
3 minutes.
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Remove the glove box. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
2. Disconnect the front passenger air bag harness connector.
3. Remove front passenger air bag fixing bolts.
Use Tamper resistant TORX bit (T50) to remove TORX bolts
(T50) or Hex bolts.
PHIA0728E
4.
Pull front passenger air bag module upward. Then remove front
passenger air bag module from instrument panel.
SRS
J
PHIA0026E
CAUTION:
Always place front passenger air bag module with warning

label side facing upward.
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into

front passenger air bag module.
Do not attempt to disassemble front passenger air bagmodule.
Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
Replace front passenger air bag module if it has been

dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temSBF814E

peratures exceeding 90C (194F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the front passenger air bag module.
After front passenger air bag module inflates, the instrument panel assembly should be replaced.
SRS-35
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
TORX bolt (size: T50):
: 19.6 Nm (2.0 kg-m, 14.5 ft-lb)
Hex bolt:
: 24.5 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" .
SRS-36
http://vnx.su
FRONT SIDE AIR BAG MODULE

PFP:K8EH0
A
EHS000DA
PHIA0028E
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
SRS
3 minutes.
Always work from the rear of the front side air bag module.
I
1. Pull up the seatback trim.
2. Remove the nuts securing the inner cloth with seatback frame. Then pull up the inner cloth.
J
3. Remove the side air bag module fixing nuts, and remove the front side air bag module.
CAUTION:
When using a clip removal tool to remove the seatback

board, take care not to damage the harness for front side air
K
bag module.
Always place the front side air bag module standing with
the stud bolt side setting bottom.
L
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdrivers) into front

side air bag module
Do not attempt to disassemble front side air bag module.

M
Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new bolts.
SRS623
Replace side air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not expose the front side air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90C (194F).
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the
front side air bag module.
After front side air bag module inflates, all parts of front
seatback frame (including front seatback flame) should be
replaced.
SBF814E
SRS-37
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Always work from the rear of the front side air bag module.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" .
SRS-38
http://vnx.su
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR

SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
PFP:98830
A
EHS000DB
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner seat belt. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
2. Remove side air bag (Satellite) sensor fixing nuts.
3. Remove the side air bag (Satellite) sensor connector.
CAUTION:
Do not use old nuts, replace with new ones.
Check side air bag (Satellite) sensor to ensure they are free
of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible
signs of damage, replace it with new one.
Do not attempt to disassemble side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
Replace side air bag (Satellite) sensor if it has been

PHIA0029E
dropped or sustained an impact.
When the front side air bag deploys, always replace it with a new one.
INSTALLATION
SRS
CAUTION:
Check side air bag (Satellite) sensor for proper installation.
After replacement of side air bag (Satellite) sensor, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" .
I
SRS-39
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER

FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
To removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
SRS-40
http://vnx.su
PFP:86884
EHS000DC
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT

DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
PFP:28556
A
EHS000DD
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
minutes.
1. Disconnect each harness connector for the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
2. Remove center console. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit connector.
4. Remove ground bolt and diagnosis sensor unit fixing bolts.
Ground bolt:
: 6.9 Nm (0.7 kg-m, 61 in-lb)
Diagnosis sensor unit fixing bolt:
: 24.5 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18.1 ft-lb)

F
CAUTION:
Do not use old bolts. Replace with new ones.
Check diagnosis sensor unit brackets to ensure it is free of

deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it shows any visible
signs of damage, replace it with new one.
Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
PHIA0735E
SRS
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Check the diagnosis sensor unit for proper installation.
After replacement of diagnosis sensor unit, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is
detected. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation Check" .
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.

After replacing air bag sensor unit, confirm control unit discriminated number.
Specification
ECU discriminated No.
Model with driver and passenger air bags and seat belt pre-tensioner
AA12
Model with driver and passenger air bags, seat belt pre-tensioner and front side air bag
AA01
SRS-41
http://vnx.su
DISPOSAL OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER

Caution for Air Bag Module and Seat Belt Pre-tensioner
PFP:00014
EHS000DE
Before disposing of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, or vehicles equipped with such systems,
deploy the systems. If such systems have already been deployed due to an accident, dispose of them as
indicated in SRS-47, "DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .
When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, always use the Special Service Tool;
Deployment tool (SST: KV99106400).
When deploying the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the
deployment component.
When deploying air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner, a fairly loud noise is made, followed by
smoke being released. The smoke is not poisonous, however, be careful not to inhale smoke since it irritates the throat and can cause choking.
Always activate one air bag module at a time.
Due to heat, leave air bag module unattended for more than 30 minutes after deployment. Also leave seat
belt pre-tensioner unattended for more than 10 minutes after deployment.
Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
Never apply water to the deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
Wash your hands clean after finishing work.
Place the vehicle outdoors with an open space of at least 6 m (20 ft) on all sides when deploying air bag
module and seat belt pre-tensioner while mounted in vehicle.
Use a voltmeter to make sure the vehicle battery is fully charged.
Do not dispose of the air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner un-deployed.
CHECKING DEPLOYMENT TOOL

Connecting to Battery
CAUTION:
The battery must show voltage of 9.6 V or more.
Remove the battery from the vehicle and place it on dry wood blocks
approximately 5 m (16 ft) away from the vehicle.
Wait 3 minutes after the vehicle battery is disconnected before

proceeding.
Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal

and black clip to negative terminal.
Make sure the polarity is correct. The right side lamp in the tool,
marked deployment tool power, should glow with a green
light. If the right side lamp glows red, reverse the connections
to the battery.
PHIA0003E
Deployment Tool Check

Press the deployment tool switch to the ON position. The left side
lamp in the tool, marked air bag connector voltage should illuminate. If it does not illuminate, replace the tool.
SBF266H
SRS-42
http://vnx.su

Air Bag Deployment Tool Lamp Illumination Chart (Battery Connected)
A
Switch operation
Left side lamp, green*

AIR BAG CONNECTOR
VOLTAGE
Right side lamp, green*

DEPLOYMENT TOOL
POWER
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
*: If this lamp glows red, the tool is connected to the battery incorrectly. Reverse the connections and make sure the lamp glows green.
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR AIR BAG MODULE (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)

Unless the vehicle is being scrapped, deploying the air bag in the
vehicle is not recommended. This may cause damage to the vehicle
interior.
Anchor air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) in a vise
secured to a firm foundation during deployment.
SRS232-E
Deployment of Driver Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)

1.
2.
Using wire, secure air bag module to air bag module bracket
(SST: KV99105300) at two places.
CAUTION:
Use wire of at least 1 mm (0.04 in) diameter.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) with
air bag module attached in a vise.
SRS
J
SRS233-D
3.
Connect deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99109700) to

deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) to air bag module connector.
PHIA0004E
4.

SRS235-D
SRS-43
http://vnx.su

5.
6.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked deployment tool power, should glow green, not red.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on the tool, marked air bag connector voltage, will illuminate and the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the driver air bag module, stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
Deployment of Front Passenger Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)

1.
2.
Make an 8.5 mm (0.335 in) diameter hole in air bag module

bracket (SST: KV99105300) at the position shown in figure at
right.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) in a
vise.
PHIA0033E
3.
Match the two holes in air bag module bracket (held in vise) and
front passenger air bag module and fix them with two bolts [M8
25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in)].
CAUTION:
If a gap exists between front passenger air bag module and
air bag module bracket, use a piece of wood inserted in the
gap to stabilize the air bag module.
PHIA0032E
4.
5.
6.

deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) connector and front passenger air bag module connector.
The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked deployment tool
power, should glow green, not red.
PHIA0038E
7.
Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
the tool, marked air bag connector voltage, will illuminate and
the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the front passenger air bag module, do not

stand on the deploying side.
Stand at least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
SRS020-A
SRS-44
http://vnx.su

Deployment of Front Side Air Bag Module (Outside of Vehicle)
1.
Make 6.5 mm (0.256 in) diameter holes in air bag module

bracket (SST: KV99105300) at the position shown in figure at
left.
SRS490-C
2.
3.
Firmly secure air bag module bracket (SST: KV99105300) in a

vise.
Insert the stud bolts of side air bag module into the two holes in
air bag module bracket (held in vise) and fix them with two M6
nuts.
CAUTION:
Side air bag module should be secured to air bag module
bracket (SST: KV99105300) in a vise with stud bolt side setting bottom.
G
SRS628-B
4.
SRS

deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) connector and connector
on air bag module.
K
SRS629
5.
6.
7.

the air bag module will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the front side air bag module, stand at
least 5 m (16 ft) away from the air bag module.
SRS020-A
SRS-45
http://vnx.su

DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES FOR SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER (OUTSIDE OF VEHICLE)
1.
Firmly grip pre-tensioner in a vise.
PHIA0034E
2.
Cut the webbing off.
PHIA0035E
3.

deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) connector and front seat
belt pre-tensioner.
PHIA0296E
4.
5.
the tool, marked seat belt pre-tensioner connector voltage, will
illuminate and the seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy.
CAUTION:
When deploying the front seat belt pre-tensioner, stand at
least 5 m (16 ft) away from the seat belt pre-tensioner.
SRS242-D
SRS-46
http://vnx.su

DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER WHILE MOUNTED IN
VEHICLE
A
When disposing of a vehicle, deploy air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioners while they are mounted in
vehicle.
B
CAUTION:
When deploying air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner, ensure vehicle is empty.
1. Disconnect both battery cables and wait 3 minutes.
C
2. Disconnect air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
3. Connect deployment tool (SST: KV99106400) to air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner.
For driver air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99109700) to the tool connector.
For front passenger air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter (SST:KV99108300) to the tool con- D
nector.
For side air bag module, attach deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99109000) to the tool connector.
For seat belt pre-tensioner, attach deployment tool adapter (SST: KV99109700) to the tool connector.
E
4. Connect red clip of deployment tool to battery positive terminal
5. The lamp on the right side of the tool, marked deployment tool
F
6. Press the button on the deployment tool. The left side lamp on
G
the air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner will deploy.
CAUTION:
Activate only one air bag module or seat belt pre-tensioner
SRS
at a time.
SRS006
DISPOSING OF AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER

Deployed air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner are very hot. Before disposing of air bag module and
seat belt pre-tensioner, wait at least 30 minutes, and 10 minutes, respectively. Seal them in a plastic bag
before disposal.
CAUTION:
Never apply water to a deployed air bag module and seat

belt pre-tensioner.
Be sure to wear gloves when handling a deployed air bag

module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
No poisonous gas is produced upon air bag module

deployment. However, be careful not to inhale gas since it
irritates throat and can cause choking.
Do not attempt to disassemble air bag module and seat belt

pre-tensioner.
Air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner cannot be

SBF276H
reused.
Wash your hands clean after finishing work.
SRS-47
http://vnx.su
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
PFP:00015
EHS000DF
To repair the SRS, perform the following steps.
WHEN SRS (EXCEPT THE FRONT SIDE AIR BAG) IS ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.

Remove the air bag modules (except the front side air bag module), bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner
assemblies.
Check the SRS components using the table shown below:
Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation).
Install new air bag modules (except the front side air bag module) and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II or AIR BAG warning lamp. Refer to SRS-17, "SRS Operation
Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN A COLLISION:

1.
2.
Check the SRS components using the table shown below:

Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks and deformation).
Check" for details. Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)

Part
Air bag module
(driver or front passenger air bag module)
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
REPLACE
Install with new bolts.
1. Remove air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with
the wheel.
Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the
instrument panel.
3. No damage found, reinstall with new bolts.

4. If damagedREPLACE. Install air bag modules with new special bolts
Air bag must be deployed before discarding.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
REPLACE
Install seat belt pretensioner with new
bolts.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.

Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and
harness for binding.
2. Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3. Check retractor for smooth operation.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
5. If damagedREPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new bolts.
Seat belt pre-tensioners must be deployed before discarding.
Diagnosis sensor unit
REPLACE
Install with new bolts.
1. Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.

2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall with new bolts and ground bolt.
4. If damagedREPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts and ground
bolt.
Steering wheel
1. Visually check steering wheel for deformities.

2. Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. Install air bag module to check fit or alignment with steering wheel.
4. Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
5. If no damage is found, reinstall with bolts.
6. If damagedREPLACE.
SRS-48
http://vnx.su
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Part
Spiral cable
SRS is activated
SRS is NOT activated
1. Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.

2. Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3. Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall with bolts.

5. If damagedREPLACE.
Harness and Connectors
1. Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
2. Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.

3. If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
4. DamagedREPLACE damaged section of harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any SRS
harness.
Instrument panel
1. Visually check instrumental panel for damage.
2. If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel.

3. If damagedREPLACE the instrument panel with bolts.
For Side Collision
EHS000DG
WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:

1.
2.
3.
Replace the following component:

All parts of front seatback (including front seatback frame) with front side air bag module (on the side on G
which front side air bag is activated)
Side air bag (Satellite) sensor
SRS
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
I
Check" . Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:

1.
2.
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table shown below.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents, cracks,
deformation).
Check" . Ensure entire SRS operation properly.
SRS-49
http://vnx.su
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION)
Part
Front LH or RH side
air bag module
Front side air bag and

side curtain air bag is
activated
REPLACE all parts of
seatback with
deployed front side
air bag module.
Front side air bag and side curtain air bag is NOT activated
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation) of the seatback on
the collision side.
2. If damagedREPLACE the damaged seat parts with new bolts and remove the
front side air bag module.
3. Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the front LH or RH side air bag
module.
4. Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5. If no damaged is found, reinstall the front LH or RH side air bag module with new
nuts.
6. If damagedREPLACE the front LH or RH side air bag module with new nut.
Air bag must be deployed before disposing of it.
LH or RH side air bag

(Satellite) sensor
REPLACE the side

air bag (Satellite) sensor on the collision
side with new nuts.
(Repair the center pillar inner, etc. before
installing new one if
damaged.)
1. Remove the LH or RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor on the collision side. Check
harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the LH or RH
side air bag (Satellite) sensor.
3. Install the LH or RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor to check fit.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the LH or RH side sir bag (Satellite) sensor with
new nuts.
5. If damagedREPLACE the LH or RH side air bag (Satellite) sensor with new nuts.
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with

the new bolts.
1. Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.

2. Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts and ground
bolt.
4. If damagedREPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new bolts and ground bolt.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly
1. Check if the seat belt can be extended smoothly.

If the seat belt cannot be extended smoothly,
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
2. Remove the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly on the collision side. Check harness cover and connectors
for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
3. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
4. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
5. If damagedREPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly with new bolts.
The seat belt pre-tensioner assembly must be deployed before disposing of it.
Seat with front side
air bag
REPLACE all parts of

front seatback
(including front seatback frame)
1. Visually check the seat on the collision side.

2. Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and
deformities.
Harness, connectors and terminals
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front
seat)
3. If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.

4. If damagedREPLACE the damaged seat parts with new bolts.
Center pillar inner
1. Check the center pillar inner on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation).
2. If damagedREPAIR the center pillar inner.
Trim
1. Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation) of the interior trim on the collision side.
2. If damagedREPLACE the damaged trim parts.
SRS-50
http://vnx.su
BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM
I BODY
SECTION
BL
BODY, LOCK & SECURITY SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Work ................................................ 4
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis ................. 4
PREPARATION ........................................................... 5
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..... 6
Work Flow ................................................................ 6
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW ..................................... 6
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE ....... 7
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS ........... 7
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 7
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 7
CONFIRM THE REPAIR ....................................... 8
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting ........... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................... 8
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 8
DOORS ................................................................. 8
TRUNK .................................................................. 9
SUNROOF/HEADLINING ..................................... 9
SEATS ................................................................... 9
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 9
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 10
HOOD ....................................................................... 12
Fitting Adjustment .................................................. 12
LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 12
FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ............... 12
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................... 14
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly .......... 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 15
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control ..... 16
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
Hood Lock Control Inspection ................................ 17
DOOR ....................................................................... 18
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 18

FRONT DOOR .................................................... 18
REAR DOOR ....................................................... 18
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT .................................... 18
Removal and Installation of Front Door .................. 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
Removal and Installation of Rear Door ................... 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
Door Weatherstrip .................................................. 21
REMOVAL ........................................................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .............................. 22
OPERATION ........................................................ 22
Schematic ............................................................... 23
Wiring Diagram D/LOCK ............................... 24
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 29
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 29
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check ............................ 30
Door Key Cylinder Switch Check ............................ 32
Front Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check ....... 34
Front Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check... 35
Rear Door Lock Actuator LH Check ....................... 36
Rear Door Lock Actuator RH Check ....................... 37
Back Door Lock Actuator Check ............................. 38
Door Switch Check ................................................. 39
Door Unlock Sensor Check .................................... 40
Key Switch Check ................................................... 41
POWER DOOR LOCK SUPER LOCK ............ 42
OUTLINE ............................................................. 42
OPERATION ........................................................ 42
Schematic ............................................................... 44
Wiring Diagram S/LOCK ............................... 45
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................. 53
BL-1
http://vnx.su
BL
PRELIMINARY CHECK ....................................... 53

SYMPTOM CHART ............................................. 54
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check ............... 55
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check ............................ 56
Door Key Cylinder Switch Check ............................ 58
Front Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check ....... 60
Front Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check... 61
Rear Door Lock Actuator LH Check ....................... 62
Rear Door Lock Actuator RH Check ....................... 63
Back Door Lock Actuator Check ............................. 64
Door Unlock Sensor Check .................................... 66
Key Switch Check ................................................... 67
Super Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check ............... 68
Super Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check ....... 69
Super Lock Actuator Check / Rear LH ................... 70
Super Lock Actuator Check / Rear RH ................... 71
NATS Release Signal Check .................................. 72
Ignition Switch ON Circuit Check ......................... 73
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 74
FUNCTION .......................................................... 75
LOCK OPERATION ............................................. 75
UNLOCK OPERATION ........................................ 75
HAZARD REMINDER .......................................... 75
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER ID CODE
ENTRY ................................................................ 75
Schematic ............................................................... 76
Wiring Diagram MULTI .................................. 77
Terminal and Reference Value for Multi-remote
Control Unit ............................................................. 80
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 81
Remote Controller Battery Check ........................... 82
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Time
Control Unit ............................................................. 82
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for MultiRemote Control Unit ............................................... 83
Time Control Unit Lock Signal Circuit Check .......... 84
Time Control Unit Unlock Signal Circuit Check ...... 85
Hazard Reminder Check ........................................ 86
ID Code Entry Procedure ....................................... 89
Remote Controller Battery Replacement ................ 90
FRONT DOOR LOCK ............................................... 91
Component Parts Location (Super Lock) ................ 91
Inspection and Adjustment ..................................... 91
OUT SIDE HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT .......... 92
REMOVAL ........................................................... 92
INSTALLATION .................................................... 93
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 93
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 93
DISASSEMBLY (SUPER LOCK) ......................... 93
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 94
REAR DOOR LOCK .................................................. 95
Component Parts Location .....................................95

Component Parts Location (Super Lock) ................95
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................95
OUT SIDE HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT ..........96
REMOVAL ............................................................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................98
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................98
DISASSEMBLY (SUPER LOCK) .........................98
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................98
BACK DOOR .............................................................99
Fitting Adjustment ...................................................99
VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................99
Back Door Assembly ............................................. 100
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ....................... 100
INSPECTION ..................................................... 100
Removal and Installation of Back Door Handle .... 100
REMOVAL .......................................................... 100
INSTALLATION .................................................. 101
Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock and
Actuator ................................................................. 101
REMOVAL .......................................................... 101
INSTALLATION .................................................. 101
Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip.102
REMOVAL .......................................................... 102
INSTALLATION .................................................. 102
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ................................... 103
Component Parts Location ................................... 103
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM ................................... 104
Wiring Diagram THEFT /PRI-WIRE .............. 104
LHD MODELS .................................................... 104
RHD MODELS ................................................... 106
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM) ................. 108
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.108
System Description ............................................... 109
System Composition ............................................. 110
ECM Re-communicating Function ........................ 110
Wiring Diagram NATS .................................. 111
LHD MODELS .................................................... 111
RHD MODELS ................................................... 113
CONSULT-II .......................................................... 115
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE ........ 115
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION .................................................................. 116
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS. 116
NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM
CHART ............................................................... 117
Work Flow ............................................................. 118
Trouble Diagnoses ................................................ 119
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1 .......................... 119
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2 .......................... 121
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM ................... 121
Diagnostic Procedure 1 ......................................... 121
BL-2
http://vnx.su
Diagnostic Procedure 4 ........................................ 126


How to Replace NATS IMMU ............................... 131
BL
BL-3
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS008TY
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions for Work
EIS008P8
After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check
their operation.
Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.
Wiring Diagnosis and Trouble Diagnosis

GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams"
PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING"

GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES"
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident"

Check for any Service bulletins before servicing the vehicle.
BL-4
http://vnx.su
EIS008P9
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EIS008PQ
Tool name
Description
C
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
BL
BL-5
http://vnx.su
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES

Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS008PR
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to BL-10, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to
obtain all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, be sure to diagnose and repair the noise that the customer
is concerned about. This can be accomplished by test driving the vehicle with the customer.
After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
Squeak (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)

Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces=higher pitch noise/softer surfaces=lower pitch noises/edge to surface=chirping
Creak(Like walking on an old wooden floor)

Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch
dependent on materials/often brought on by activity.
Rattle(Like shaking a baby rattle)

Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
Knock (Like a knock on a door)

Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
Tick(Like a clock second hand)

Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
Thump(Heavy, muffled knock noise)

Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often drought on by activity.
Buzz(Like a bumble bee)

Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending upon the person. A noise that you may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
BL-6
http://vnx.su

DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle twist.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T model, drive position on A/T model).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS

After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE

1.
2.
G
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Engine Ear or mechanics stethoscope).
Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
H
removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
BL
tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the J
noise.
placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
K
looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to BL-8, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane tape are available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Each item can be ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 6085 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact.Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) think,
50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
BL-7
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 25 mm (0.59 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair
squeaks and rattles.
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit.
Note: Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting
EIS008PS
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. Cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturate the area with silicone, you will
not be able to recheck the repair.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks to
repair the noise.
BL-8
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat when
G
the noise is present. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
H
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
BL
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
J
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noise can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
BL-9
http://vnx.su

Diagnostic Worksheet
EIS008PT
PIIB0723E
BL-10
http://vnx.su

A
BL
SBT844
BL-11
http://vnx.su
HOOD
HOOD
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:65100
EIS009QH
PIIB1215E
LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove hood lock assembly, loosen the hood hinge nuts and close the hood.
Adjust the lateral and longitudinal clearance, and open the hood to tighten the hood hinge mounting bolts
to the specified torque.
Install the hood lock temporarily, and align the hood striker and lock so that the centers of striker and lock
become vertical viewed from the front, by moving the hood lock laterally.
Tighten hood lock mounting bolts to the specified torque.
FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

1.
Remove the hood lock and adjust the height by rotating the bumper rubber until the hood becomes 1 to1.5
mm (0.04 to 0.059 in) lower than the fender.
BL-12
http://vnx.su
HOOD
2.
Temporarily tighten the hood lock, and position it by engaging it with the hood striker. Check the lock and
striker for looseness, and tighten the hood lock mounting bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Adjust right/left clearance between hood and each part to the following specification.
Hood and front grille (AA)
Hood and fender (BB)
: Less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in)

: Less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in)
BL
BL-13
http://vnx.su
HOOD
SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove hood lock, and adjust the surface height difference of hood, fender and headlamp according to
the fitting standard dimension, by rotating RH and LH bumper rubbers.
Install hood lock temporarily, and move hood lock laterally until the centers of striker and lock become vertical when viewed from the front.
Make sure that the hood lock secondary latch is properly
engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight.
Make sure that the hood lock primary latch is securely engaged
with the hood striker with hood's own weight by dropping hood
from approx. 200 mm(7.87 in) height.
CAUTION:
Do not drop hood from a height of 300 mm (11.81 in) or
more.
Move hood lockup and down until striker smoothly engages the
lock when the hood is closed.
PIIB1082E
When pulling the hood opener lever gently, make sure that front
end of the hood rises by approximately 20 mm (0.79 in) and that hood striker and hood lock primary latch
is disengaged. Also make sure that hood opener returns to the original position.
After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
BL-14
http://vnx.su
HOOD
Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly
EIS009QI
BL
SIIA0154E
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect washer hose at the connection.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood and then the hood assembly.
CAUTION:
Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Before installing hood hinge, apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface of the vehicle
body.
After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to BL-12, "Fitting Adjustment" .
BL-15
http://vnx.su
HOOD
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
EIS009QJ
PIIA3650E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove hood lock cable from hood lock and clip of upper portion of radiator core support and hood ledge.
Remove dash side finisher. Refer to EI-35, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
Remove attaching screw and then the hood opener.
Remove dash panel grommet and pull hood lock cable toward
the passenger compartment.
NOTE:
When pulling the cable, be careful not to strip or scratch the
outer surface.
SIIA0156E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Pass hood lock cable through the opening while keeping the
winding radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or larger.
After confirming that the grommet is properly positioned, push
the grommet securely into the hole.
Apply sealant to the area on the grommet indicated with the *
mark.
PIIA0173E
BL-16
http://vnx.su
HOOD
4.
5.
Connect cable securely to the lock.

After connection, confirm proper adjustment and operation for
both hood lock and hood opener.
C
PIIA3552E
Hood Lock Control Inspection
EIS009QK
CAUTION:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure that the hood lock secondary latch is securely
engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own weight.
2. Make sure that the hood lock primary latch is securely engaged
with the hood striker with hood's own weight by dropping it from
approx 200 mm (7.87 in) height.
CAUTION:
Do not drop hood from a height of 300 mm (11.81 in) or
more.
H
PIIB1082E
3.
4.
When pulling hood opener lever gently, make sure that front end of the hood rises by approximately 20 BL
mm (0.79 in) and that hood striker and hood lock primary latch are disengaged. Also make sure that hood
opener returns to the original position.
Confirm hood lock is properly lubricated. If necessary, apply
J
body grease at the point shown in the figure.
PIIA3550E
BL-17
http://vnx.su
DOOR
DOOR
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:80100
EIS00A67
PIIA3652E
FRONT DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "FENDER PROTECTOR" .

Working from the inside the fender, loosen hinge mount bolts on the body. Lift rear end of the front door to
adjust clearance and surface difference properly.
REAR DOOR
Longitudinal clearance and surface height adjustment at front end
1.
2.
Remove upper and lower garnishes on the center pillar. Refer to EI-35, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
Loosen mounting bolts from outside of vehicle, mounting nuts from inside of vehicle. Open rear door.
Raise rear end of it to adjust.
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust striker until it is parallel to the lock engagement direction.
PIIA0555E
BL-18
http://vnx.su
DOOR
Removal and Installation of Front Door
EIS00A68
CAUTION:
When removing and installing the front door assembly, support the door with a jack and cloth to
protect the door and body.
When removing and installing front door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
Check front door open/close operation after installation.
REMOVAL
1.
Grommet is pulled out, and the front door harness connector is

detached.
PIIB1369E
2.
Remove the mounting bolts of the check link on the vehicle.

H
BL
J
PIIA6020E
3.
Remove the door-side hinge mounting nuts, and remove the

door assembly.
: 20.6 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15 ft-lb)
PIIB1337E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Rear Door
EIS00A69
CAUTION:
When removing and installing the rear door assembly, support the door with a jack and cloth to
protect the door and body.
When removing and installing rear door assembly, be sure to carry out the fitting adjustment.
Check the hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
BL-19
http://vnx.su
DOOR
REMOVAL
1.
Grommet is pulled out, and the Rear door harness connector is

detached.
PIIB1370E
2.
Remove the mounting bolts of the check link on the vehicle.
PIIA6022E
3.
Remove the door-side hinge mounting nuts, and remove the

door assembly.
: 20.6 Nm (2.1 kg-m, 15 ft-lb)
PIIB1336E
INSTALLATION
BL-20
http://vnx.su
DOOR
Door Weatherstrip
EIS00A6A
BL
J
SIIA0157E
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the mounting bolts of the check link on the vehicle. Refer to BL-19, "Removal and Installation of
Front Door" or BL-19, "Removal and Installation of Rear Door" .
2. Remove the weatherstrip clips and remove weatherstrip.
CAUTION:
After removal, do not pull strongly on the weatherstrip.
INSTALLATION
BL-21
http://vnx.su
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM

System Description
PFP:24814
EIS001SE
OPERATION
Power door lock/unlock operation by door key cylinder
With the key inserted into driver's door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors.
With the key inserted into driver's door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch
With lock/unlock switch setting to LOCK will lock all doors.

With lock/unlock switch setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Key reminder system
If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, setting lock/unlock switch, lock
knob, key or multi-remote controller to LOCK locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.
(signal from door unlock sensor driver side)
EIS004DC
PIIA0584E
BL-22
http://vnx.su

Schematic
EIS004DD
BL
TIWA0003E
BL-23
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram D/LOCK
EIS004DE
TIWA0465E
BL-24
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0466E
BL-25
http://vnx.su
TIWA0467E
BL-26
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0468E
BL-27
http://vnx.su

Terminal
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Voltage [V]
(Approximate values)
Battery voltage
Power source (Fuse)
Free
G/R
Passenger and rear door lock

actuator unlock
EIS000KP
Door lock/unlock switch
Unlock
SKIA9232E
10
Power source (C/B)
Battery voltage
Free
11
SB
Driver door lock actuator

unlock

Lock
SKIA9232E
Free
14
R/B
All door lock actuator lock

Unlock operation
Lock
SKIA9232E
16
B/R
17
18
W/L
Key switch
20
GY
Door lock/unlock switch lock

signal
Lock operation (ON)
Other than above (OFF)

unlock signal
Unlock operation (ON)
Other than above (OFF)
23
PU
Ground
Ignition switch (ON)
Battery voltage
Key inserted (ON) key removed from ignition

key cylinder (OFF)
Battery voltage 0
24
LG/R
Door key cylinder lock switch
OFF (Neutral) ON (Locked)
50
25
GY/L
Door key cylinder unlock

switch
OFF (Neutral) ON (Unlocked)
50
28
Y/G
Door unlock sensor

(driver side)
Driver door: Locked Unlocked
10 0
30
SB
Front door switch

(driver side)
Door open (ON) close (OFF)
0 5
BL-28
http://vnx.su

Symptom Chart
EIS001R5
A
Symptom
Malfunctioning system
Power door lock does not operate using any switch
Power supply and ground circuit check
BL-29
Front door lock actuator check (Driver side)
BL-34
Front door lock actuator check (Passenger side)
BL-35
Rear door lock actuator check LH
BL-36
Rear door lock actuator check RH
BL-37
Back door lock actuator check
BL-38
If above systems are OK, replace time control unit.

Power door lock does not operate with lock/unlock
switch.
Door lock/unlock switch check
Power door lock does not operate with door key cylinder
switch.
Door key cylinder switch check
If above system is OK, replace time control unit.
Specific door lock actuator does not operate.
BL-30
BL-32
BL-34
BL-35
Rear door lock actuator LH
BL-36
Rear door lock actuator RH
BL-37
Back door lock actuator
BL-38
Door switch check
BL-39
Door unlock sensor check
BL-40
Key switch check
BL-41
*Key reminder system does not operate.
Reference
page
BL
*:Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS004DF
1.
2.
3.

Check voltage between time control unit connector and ground.
Connector
Terminal (wire
color)
(+)
()
1 (L)
M30
Ground
10 (W)
Ignition switch position
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the following.
10A fuse [No.5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
40A fusible link (letter B , located in fuse and fusible link box.)
Harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse
Harness for open or short between time control unit circuit breaker
BL-29
http://vnx.su
PIIA8640E

16 (B/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuit is OK.
NG
PIIA8641E
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check
EIS004DG
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M31 terminal 20 (GY), 23 (PU) and ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Lock
Neutral or Unlock
Unlock
Neutral or Lock
(-)
20 (GY)
M31
Ground
23 (PU)
PIIB0345E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch.
Connector
Terminals
20
D6
19
21
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
Continuity
Locked
Yes
Neutral or Unlocked
No
Unlocked
Yes
Neutral or Locked
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace power window main switch.
PIIB0346E
BL-30
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH (LOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
2.
20 (GY) 20 (GY)
3.

Check continuity between time control unit harness connector
M31 terminal 20 (GY) and power window main switch harness
connector D6 terminal 20 (GY).

M31 terminal 20 (GY) and ground.
20 (GY) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector.
PIIB0347E
4. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
23 (PU) 21 (PU)
2.

M31 terminal 23 (PU) and power window main switch harness
connector D6 terminal 21 (PU).

M31 terminal 23 (PU) and ground.
23 (PU) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
BL
PIIB0348E
5. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness

connector D6 terminal 19 (B) and ground.
19 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0349E
BL-31
http://vnx.su

Door Key Cylinder Switch Check
EIS004DH
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Terminals (wire color)
Connector
(+)
()
24 (LG/R)
M31
Ground
25 (GY/L)
Condition of door key

cylinder switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Neutral or Unlocked
Unlocked
Neutral or Locked
OK or NG
OK
>> Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA3643E
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1.
2.
Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.

Check continuity between door key cylinder switch.
Connector
Terminals
1
D8

cylinder switch
Continuity
Neutral
No
Lock
Yes
Neutral
No
Unlock
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace door key cylinder switch.
PIIB0350E
BL-32
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
2.
24 (LG/R) 1 (LG/R)
3.

M31 terminal 24 (LG/R) and door key cylinder switch (driver
side) harness connector D8 terminal 1 (LG/R).

M31 terminal 24 (LG/R) and ground.
24 (LG/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
PIIB0351E
4. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
25 (GY/L) 3 (GY/L)
2.

M31 terminal 25 (GY/L) and door key cylinder switch (driver
side) harness connector D8 terminal 3 (GY/L).

M31 terminal 25 (GY/L) and ground.
25 (GY/L) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
BL
PIIB0352E
5. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch (driver side)

harness connector D8 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA8654E
BL-33
http://vnx.su

Front Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check
EIS004DI
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator (driver side)
connector and ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
()
3 (R/B)
D9
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
6 (L)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator (Driver side).
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4284E
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M30 terminal 11(SB), 14(R/B) and door lock actuator (driver
side) harness connector D9 terminal 3(R/B), 6(L).
11 (SB) 6 (L)
14 (R/B) 3 (R/B)
3.


M30 terminal 11 (SB), 14 (R/B) and ground.
11 (SB) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
Connect time control unit connector.

Check signal between time control unit connector and ground.
Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
11 (SB)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
Unlocked
Ground
PIIB0355E
14 (R/B)
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of harness and connector.
NG
BL-34
http://vnx.su

Front Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check
EIS004DJ
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator (passenger
side) connector and ground.
C
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
()
4 (R/B)
D17
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
1 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator (passenger side).
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4287E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector D17 terminal 1(G/R), 4(R/B).
14 (R/B) 4 (R/B)
4 (G/R) 1 (G/R)
3.

BL

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14 (R/B) and ground.
4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0356E
OK or NG
OK
NG
1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-35
http://vnx.su

Rear Door Lock Actuator LH Check
EIS004DK

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect rear door lock actuator LH connector.
Check voltage between door lock actuator connector and
ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door lock/

unlock switch
()
4 (R/B)
D36
1 (G/R)
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear door lock actuator LH.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4289E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and rear door lock actuator LH
harness connector D36 terminal 1(G/R), 4(R/B).
4 (G/R) 1 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 4 (R/B)
3.


4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0357E
OK or NG
OK
NG

1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
Unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-36
http://vnx.su

Rear Door Lock Actuator RH Check
EIS004DL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect rear door lock actuator RH connector.
Check voltage between door lock actuator connector and ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
3 (R/B)
D26

unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
()
Locked
Ground
6 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace rear door lock actuator RH.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
PIIA4291E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14 (R/B) and rear door lock actuator RH
harness connector D26 terminal 3 (R/B), 6 (G/R).
4 (G/R) 6 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 3 (R/B)
3.

BL

4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0358E
OK or NG
OK
NG
1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-37
http://vnx.su

Back Door Lock Actuator Check
EIS004DM

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect back door lock actuator connector.
ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
()

unlock switch
2 (R/B)
D46
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
4 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace back door lock actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIB0360E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and back door lock actuator harness connector D46 terminal 2(R/B), 4(G/R).
4 (G/R) 4 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 2 (R/B)
3.


4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0359E
OK or NG
OK
NG

1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of door
lock/unlock
switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-38
http://vnx.su

Door Switch Check
EIS004DN
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connector
M31
(+)
30 (SB)
(-)
Condition of
driver's door
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Closed
Battery voltage
Open
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA8665E
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH

1.
2.
Disconnect door switch (driver side) connector.

Check continuity between door switch (driver side) terminals.
Connector
Terminal
B16
23
Condition of door switch

(driver side)
Continuity
Pushed
No
Released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace front door switch (driver side).
BL
PIIB0353E
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M31 terminal 30 (R) and front door switch (driver side) harness
connector B16 terminal 2 (R).
30 (R) 2 (R)
3.

M31 terminal 30 (R) and ground.
30 (R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
PIIA8667E
BL-39
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) harness

connector B16 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0361E
Door Unlock Sensor Check
EIS004DO
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connector
M31
(+)
()
28 (Y/G)
Ground
Driver's door lock/

unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
10
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SIIA1216E
2. CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect time control unit connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
M31 terminal 28 (Y/G) and front door lock actuator (driver side)
harness connector D9 terminal 5 (Y/G).
28 (Y/G) 5 (Y/G)
3.

M31 terminal 28 (Y/G) and ground.
28 (Y/G) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0362E

Check continuity between front door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector D9 terminal 5 (B) and ground.
5 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0363E
BL-40
http://vnx.su

Key Switch Check
EIS004DP
1. CHECK KEY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Connector
M31
Terminals
(+)
()
18 (W/L)
Ground
Condition of key
switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
inserted
Battery voltage
removed
OK or NG
OK
>> Key switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
PIIA8670E
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

1.
2.
Disconnect key switch connector.

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
M9
Terminals
1
Condition of key switch
Continuity
inserted
Yes
removed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace key switch.
SIIA1219E
BL
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

M31 terminal 18 (W/L) and key switch harness connector M9
terminal 2 (W/L).
18 (W/L) 2 (W/L)
4.

M31 terminal 18 (W/L) and ground.
18 (W/L) Ground
OK or NG
OK
Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
NG
BL-41
http://vnx.su
M
PIIB0364E
POWER DOOR LOCK SUPER LOCK

System Description
PFP:24814
EIS001R6
OUTLINE
Power door lock system with super lock and key reminder is controlled by time control unit. Super lock has a
higher anti-theft performance than conventional power door lock systems.
When super lock is in released condition, lock knob operation locks or unlocks door.
When super lock is in set condition, lock knob operation cannot lock nor unlock door.
SEL831U
OPERATION
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by door key cylinder
With the key inserted into driver door key cylinder, turning it to LOCK will lock all doors and set super lock.
(Super lock will not be set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
With the key inserted into driver door key cylinder, turning it to UNLOCK will unlock all doors and release
super lock.
Power door lock/unlock and super lock set/release operation by multi-remote controller (If
equipped)
Pressing multi-remote controller LOCK button will lock all doors and set super lock. (Super lock will not be
set while key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.)
Pressing multi-remote controller UNLOCK button once will unlock driver door and release super lock.
Then, if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked.
Power door lock and super lock release operation (by NATS IMMU signal)
When the super lock is set, turning the ignition key switch to ON will release the super lock. All doors will
unlock once, but then immediately lock again.
Power door lock/unlock operation by lock/unlock switch

With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to LOCK will lock all doors.
With lock/unlock switch on driver door trim setting to UNLOCK will unlock all doors.
Lock/unlock switch operation cannot control super lock
BL-42
http://vnx.su

Key reminder system
If the ignition key is in the ignition key cylinder and driver door is open, setting lock/unlock switch, lock
knob, key or multi-remote controller to LOCK locks the door once but then immediately unlocks all doors.
(signal from door unlock sensor driver side)
System initialization
System initialization is required when battery cables are reconnected. Conduct the following to release
super lock once;
insert the key into the ignition key cylinder and turn it to ON.
LOCK/UNLOCK operation using door key cylinder or multi-remote controller.
BL
BL-43
http://vnx.su

Schematic
EIS001R7
TIWA0012E
BL-44
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram S/LOCK
EIS001R8
BL
TIWA0469E
BL-45
http://vnx.su
TIWA0470E
BL-46
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0471E
BL-47
http://vnx.su
TIWA0472E
BL-48
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0473E
BL-49
http://vnx.su
TIWA0474E
BL-50
http://vnx.su

EIS001SR
A
Terminal
Wire
Color
Item
Condition
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Power source (Fuse)
Free
C
3
L/Y
Super lock actuator release
Door key cylinder switch
Released
D
SKIA9232E
Free
G/R
Passenger door and rear door

(LH/RH) lock actuator unlock

Unlocked
SKIA9232E
Free
H
6
Y/R
Super lock actuator set

Set
BL
SKIA9232E
10
Power source (C/B)
Battery voltage
Free
K
11
SB
Front door lock actuator

(driver side)
Locked
L
SKIA9232E
Free
14
R/B
All door lock actuator lock
Locked
SKIA9232E
16
B/R
Ground
17
18
W/L
Key switch
Key inserted (ON) key removed from

Ignition key cylinder (OFF)
20
GY
Power door lock switch lock signal
50
23
PU
Power door lock switch unlock

signal
50
24
LG/R
Door key cylinder lock switch
50
Ignition switch is in ON position
Battery voltage
BL-51
http://vnx.su
Battery voltage 0

Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Terminal
Wire
Color
25
OR/L
Door key cylinder unlock switch
50
28
Y/G
Door unlock sensor (driver side)
10 0
29
Y/L
Door unlock sensor

(passenger side)
Passenger door: Locked Unlocked
50
30
SB
Front door switch (driver side)
Door open (ON) close (OFF)
0 5
32
OR
Key less lock signal
Remote controller button

Lock pressed
(Ignition switch is not at ON position.)
0 5 (For 0.5 seconds)
33
P/L
Key less unlock signal
Remote controller button

Unlock pressed
(Ignition switch is not at ON position.)
34
B/Y
NATS release signal
Item
Condition
BL-52
http://vnx.su
05

Trouble Diagnoses
EIS001R9
PRELIMINARY CHECK
BL
SIIA2239E
After performing preliminary check, go to SYMPTOM CHART.
BL-53
http://vnx.su

SYMPTOM CHART
NOTE:
Before starting trouble diagnoses below, perform preliminary check.
Symptom numbers in the symptom chart correspond with those of Preliminary check.
Symptom
SYMPTOM 1
Power door lock does not operate using any switch
Power supply and ground circuit check
BL-55
BL-60
BL-61
BL-62
BL-63
BL-64

SYMPTOM 2
Power door lock does not operate with lock/unlock
switch.
Door lock/unlock switch check
SYMPTOM 3
Power door lock does not operate with door key cylinder
switch.
SYMPTOM 4
Specific door lock actuator does not operate.
BL-58
BL-61
BL-62
BL-63
BL-64
BL-58
Super lock actuator check (Driver side)
BL-68
Super lock actuator check (Passenger side)
BL-69
Super lock actuator check rear LH
BL-70
Super lock actuator check rear RH
BL-71
Key switch check
BL-67
Ignition switch ON circuit check
BL-73
BL-58
BL-68
BL-69
BL-70
BL-71
SYMPTOM 7
*Super lock cannot be released by ignition key switch.
(Signal from NATS IMMU)
BL-56
BL-60
SYMPTOM 6
*Super lock cannot be released by door key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 5
Super lock cannot be set by door key cylinder.
Reference
page
BL-68
BL-69
BL-70
BL-71
NATS release signal check
BL-72
Ignition switch ON circuit check
BL-73
BL-54
http://vnx.su

Symptom
SYMPTOM 8
Specific super lock actuator does not operate.
BL-68
BL-69
BL-70
BL-71
SYMPTOM 9
*Key reminder system does not operate.
Reference
page
BL-65
Door unlock sensor check
BL-66
Key switch check
BL-67
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS008EF

Connector

(+)
()
1 (L)
M31
Ground
10 (W)
*:Make sure the power door lock system operates properly.
1.
2.
3.
Door switch check

OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
BL
PIIA8640E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
40A fusible link (letter B , located in fuse and fusible link box.)
Harness for open or short between time control unit circuit breaker

16 (B/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA8641E
BL-55
http://vnx.su

Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check
EIS008EG
1. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M31
terminal 20 (GY), 23 (PU) and ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Lock
Neutral or Unlock
Unlock
Neutral or Lock
(-)
20 (GY)
M31
Ground
23 (PU)
PIIB0345E
OK or NG
OK
>> Door lock/unlock switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH

1.
2.

Check continuity between power window main switch.
Connector
Terminals
20
19
21
19
D6
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
Continuity
Locked
Yes
Neutral or Unlocked
No
Unlocked
Yes
Neutral or Locked
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0346E
3. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH (LOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M31 terminal 20 (GY) and power window main switch harness
connector D6 terminal 20 (GY).
20 (GY) 20 (GY)
3.

M31 terminal 20 (GY) and ground.
20 (GY) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
PIIB0347E
BL-56
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
23 (PU) 21 (PU)
2.

M31 terminal 23 (PU) and power window main switch harness
connector D6 terminal 21 (PU).

M31 terminal 23 (PU) and ground.
23 (PU) Ground

D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PIIB0348E
5. CHECK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness

connector D6 terminal 19 (B) and ground.
19 (B) Ground

G
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0349E
BL
BL-57
http://vnx.su

Door Key Cylinder Switch Check
EIS008EH
1. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Connector

(+)
()
24 (LG/R)
M31
Ground
25 (GY/L)

cylinder switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Neutral or Unlocked
Unlocked
Neutral or Locked
OK or NG
OK
>> Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA3643E
2. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door key cylinder switch connector.
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch.
Connector
Terminals
1
D8

cylinder switch
Continuity
Neutral
No
Lock
Yes
Neutral
No
Unlock
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Replace door key cylinder switch.
PIIB0350E
BL-58
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
2.
24 (LG/R) 1 (LG/R)
3.

M31 terminal 24 (LG/R) and door key cylinder switch (driver
side) harness connector D8 terminal 1 (LG/R).

M31 terminal 24 (LG/R) and ground.
24 (LG/R) -Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
PIIB0351E
4. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (UNLOCK) CIRCUIT

1.
25 (GY/L) - 3 (GY/L)
2.

M31 terminal 25 (GY/L) and door key cylinder switch (driver
side) harness connector D8 terminal 3 (GY/L).

M31 terminal 25 (GY/L) and ground.
25 (GY/L) -Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
BL
PIIB0352E
5. CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
Check continuity between door key cylinder switch (driver side)

harness connector D8 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA8654E
BL-59
http://vnx.su

Front Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check
EIS008EI

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator connector and
ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
()
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
3 (R/B)
D9
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
6 (L)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front door lock actuator (Driver side).
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4284E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 11(SB), 14(R/B) and door lock actuator (driver
side) harness connector D9 terminal 3(R/B), 6(L).
14 (R/B) 3 (R/B)
11 (SB) 6 (L)
3.


M30 terminal 11 (SB), 14 (R/B) and ground.
11 (SB) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0354E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG

1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
11 (SB)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
Unlocked
Ground
PIIB0355E
14 (R/B)
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-60
http://vnx.su

Front Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check
EIS008EJ
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
Check voltage between front door lock actuator connector and
ground.
C
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of door
lock/unlock switch
()
4 (R/B)
D17
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
1 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4287E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and door lock actuator (passenger side) harness connector D17 terminal 1(G/R), 4(R/B).
14 (R/B) 4 (R/B)
4 (G/R) 1 (G/R)
3.

BL

4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0356E
OK or NG
OK
NG
1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-61
http://vnx.su

Rear Door Lock Actuator LH Check
EIS008EK

1.
2.
3.

ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)

unlock switch
()
4 (R/B)
D36
1 (G/R)
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA4289E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and rear door lock actuator LH
harness connector D36 terminal 1(G/R), 4(R/B).
4 (G/R) 1 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 4 (R/B)
3.


4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0357E
OK or NG
OK
NG

1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
Unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-62
http://vnx.su

Rear Door Lock Actuator RH Check
EIS008EL
1.
2.
3.

Check voltage between door lock actuator connector and ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
3 (R/B)
D26

unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
()
Locked
Ground
6 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
E
PIIA4291E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14 (R/B) and rear door lock actuator RH
harness connector D26 terminal 3 (R/B), 6 (G/R).
4 (G/R) 6 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 3 (R/B)
3.

BL

4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0358E
OK or NG
OK
NG
1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of
door lock/
unlock switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-63
http://vnx.su

Back Door Lock Actuator Check
EIS008EM

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect back door lock actuator connector.
ground.
Terminals
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
()

unlock switch
2 (R/B)
D46
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
Ground
4 (G/R)
Battery voltage
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace back door lock actuator.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIB0360E

1.
2.

M30 terminal 4 (G/R), 14(R/B) and back door lock actuator harness connector D46 terminal 2(R/B), 4(G/R).
4 (G/R) 4 (G/R)
14 (R/B) 2 (R/B)
3.


4 (G/R) Ground
14 (R/B) Ground

PIIB0359E
OK or NG
OK
NG

1.
2.

Connector
Terminals
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (G/R)
M30
Condition of door
lock/unlock
switch
Signal
(Reference value)
unlocked
Ground
14
(R/B)
PIIB0518E
locked
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-64
http://vnx.su

Door Switch Check
EIS008EN
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connector
M31
(+)
30 (SB)
(-)
Condition of
driver's door
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Closed
Battery voltage
Open
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Door switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA8665E
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH

1.
2.
Disconnect door switch (driver side) connector.

Check continuity between door switch (driver side) terminals.
Connector
Terminal
B16
23
Condition of door switch

(driver side)
Continuity
Pushed
No
Released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
BL
PIIB0353E
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M31 terminal 30 (R) and front door switch (driver side) harness
30 (R) 2 (R)
3.

30 (R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
PIIA8667E
BL-65
http://vnx.su

1.

3 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0361E
Door Unlock Sensor Check
EIS008EO
1. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Terminals
Connector
M31
(+)
()
28 (Y/G)
Ground
Driver's door lock/

unlock switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Locked
10
Unlocked
OK or NG
OK
>> Door unlock sensor is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SIIA1216E
2. CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect time control unit connector and front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
M31 terminal 28 (Y/G) and front door lock actuator (driver side)
harness connector D9 terminal 5 (Y/G).
28 (Y/G) 5 (Y/G)
3.

M31 terminal 28 (Y/G) and ground.
28 (Y/G) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0362E

Check continuity between front door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector D9 terminal 5 (B) and ground.
5 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0363E
BL-66
http://vnx.su

Key Switch Check
EIS008EP

Connector
M31
Terminals (Wire color)

(+)
()
18 (W/L)
Ground
Condition of key
switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
inserted
Battery voltage
removed
OK or NG
OK
>> Key switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
PIIA8670E
2. CHECK KEY SWITCH (INSERT)

1.
2.

Check continuity between key switch terminals 1 and 2.
Connector
M9
Terminals
1
Condition of key switch
Continuity
inserted
Yes
removed
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SIIA1219E
BL
3. CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

M31 terminal 18 (W/L) and key switch harness connector M9
terminal 2 (W/L).
18 (W/L) 2 (W/L)
4.

M31 terminal 18 (W/L) and ground.
18 (W/L) Ground
OK or NG
OK
Harness for open or short between key switch and fuse
NG
BL-67
http://vnx.su
M
PIIB0364E

Super Lock Actuator (Driver Side) Check
EIS001SK
1. CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR SUPER LOCK ACTUATOR

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect front door lock actuator (driver side) connector.
Check voltage for super lock actuator.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
(-)
6 (Y/R)
M30
Condition of
door key cylinder switch
Signal
(Reference value)
Locked (Set)
Ground
3 (L/Y)
Unlocked
(Released)
SKIA9232E
PIIB0519E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check other malfunctioning system, refer to BL-54, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
2. CHECK SUPER LOCK SET SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M30 terminal 6 (Y/R) and front door lock actuator (driver side)
harness connector D9 terminal 4 (Y/R)
6 (Y/R) 4 (Y/R)
3.

M30 terminal 6 (Y/R) and ground
6 (Y/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0365E
3. CHECK SUPER LOCK RELEASE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.

M30 terminal 3 (L/Y) and front door lock actuator (driver side)
harness connector D9 terminal 1 (L/Y)
3 (L/Y) - 1 (L/Y)
2.

M30 terminal 3 (L/Y) and ground
3 (L/Y) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace driver side door lock actuator.
NG
PIIB0366E
BL-68
http://vnx.su

Super Lock Actuator (Passenger Side) Check
EIS008EQ
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
(-)
6 (Y/R)
M30
Ground
3 (L/Y)
Condition of
Signal
(Reference value)
Locked (Set)
Unlocked
(Released)
E
PIIB0519E
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
6 (Y/R) 3 (Y/R)
3.
Disconnect time control unit and front door lock actuator (passenger side) connector.
M30 terminal 6 (Y/R) and front door lock actuator (passenger
side) harness connector D17 terminal 3 (Y/R)
BL

J

6 (Y/R) Ground
PIIB0367E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG

1.
3 (L/Y) 6 (L/Y)
2.

M30 terminal 3 (L/Y) and front door lock actuator (passenger
side) harness connector D17 terminal 6 (L/Y)

3 (L/Y) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL-69
http://vnx.su
PIIB0368E

Super Lock Actuator Check / Rear LH
EIS008ER

1.
2.
3.

Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
(-)
6 (Y/R)
M82
Condition of
Signal
(Reference value)
Locked (Set)
Ground
3 (L/Y)
Unlocked
(Released)
SKIA9232E
PIIB0519E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

M30 terminal 6 (Y/R) and rear door lock actuator LH harness
connector D35 terminal 3 (Y/R)
6 (Y/R) 3 (Y/R)
3.

6 (Y/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0369E

1.

M30 terminal 3 (L/Y) and rear door lock actuator LH harness
connector D35 terminal 3 (L/Y)
3 (L/Y) 6 (L/Y)
2.

3 (L/Y) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0370E
BL-70
http://vnx.su

Super Lock Actuator Check / Rear RH
EIS008ES
1.
2.
3.

Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
(-)
C
Signal
(Reference value)
Locked
(Set)
6 (Y/R)
M82
Condition of
door key
cylinder
switch
Ground
3 (L/Y)
Unlocked
(Released)
PIIB0519E
SKIA9232E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
6 (Y/R) 4 (Y/R)
3.
Disconnect time control unit and rear door lock actuator RH connector.
M30 terminal 6 (Y/R) and rear door lock actuator RH harness
connector D25 terminal 4 (Y/R)
BL

6 (Y/R) - Ground
K
PIIB0371E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG

1.

M30 terminal 3 (L/Y) and rear door lock actuator RH harness
connector D25 terminal 1 (L/Y)
3 (L/Y) 1 (L/Y)
2.

3 (L/Y) Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIB0372E
BL-71
http://vnx.su

NATS Release Signal Check
EIS008FG
1. CHECK NATS SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.
M31 terminal 34 (B/Y) and NATS IMMU harness connector
E109 terminal 3 (B/Y).
34 (B/Y) 3 (B/Y)
4.

M31 terminal 34 (B/Y) and ground.
34 (B/Y) Ground
PIIA8673E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair harness.
2. CHECK NATS RELEASE SIGNAL

1.
2.
Connect time control unit connector and NATS IMMU connector.

Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition of ignition switch
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
()
OFF
M31
34 (R)
Ground
More than 17 seconds after

ignition switch is turned to ON
For 17 seconds after ignition
switch is turned to ON
Pulse
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check NATS system.
PIIA8674E
BL-72
http://vnx.su

Ignition Switch ON Circuit Check
EIS008FH
1. CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL

1.
2.

Connector
M31
Terminal
(wire color)
(+)
()
OFF
ACC
ON
17 (Y/G)
Ground
0V
0V
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Ignition ON signal is OK.
NG
10A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
D
PIIA8675E
BL
BL-73
http://vnx.su
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

PFP:28596
EIS001RD
PIIA0585E
BL-74
http://vnx.su

System Description
EIS001RE
FUNCTION
Multi-remote control system has the following function.
Door lock (and set super lock)
Door unlock (and release super lock)
Hazard reminder
LOCK OPERATION
To lock door by multi-remote controller, the ignition switch must be at OFF.

When the LOCK signal is input to multi-remote control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with multiremote control unit), ground is supplied
through multi-remote control unit terminal 5

Then time control unit operates to lock doors and set super lock (models with super lock).
UNLOCK OPERATION
When the UNLOCK signal is input to multi-remote control unit (the antenna of the system is combined with
multi-remote control unit), ground is supplied
through multi-remote control unit terminal 6

Time control unit operates to unlock driver's door and release super lock (models with super lock).
Then, if an unlock signal is sent from the remote controller again within 5 seconds, all other doors will be
unlocked.
HAZARD REMINDER
When the doors are locked or unlocked by multi-remote controller (signal from driver side unlock sensor), supply power to hazard warning lamp flashes as follows
BL
Lock operation: Flash once
Unlock operation: Flash twice

J
MULTI-REMOTE CONTROLLER ID CODE ENTRY
A maximum of four remote controllers can be entered.
To enter ID code entry, the following signals must be input to the multi-remote control unit.
Signal from remote controller

For detailed procedure, refer to BL-89, "ID Code Entry Procedure" .
BL-75
http://vnx.su

Schematic
EIS008NF
TIWB0029E
BL-76
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram MULTI
EIS001RF
BL
TIWA0475E
BL-77
http://vnx.su
TIWA0476E
BL-78
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWB0030E
BL-79
http://vnx.su

Terminal and Reference Value for Multi-remote Control Unit
EIS001TQ
Condition
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Ground
Power source (Fuse)
Battey voltage
Terminal
Wire
Color
G/Y
OR
Key less lock signal
Remote controller lock button pressed
05
P/L
Key less unlock signal
Remote controller unlock button pressed
05
Y/G
Driver door lock switch signal
G/B
Hazard reminder (Flasher LH)
Item
Hazard reminder (Flasher RH)
Remote controller button pressed
0 Battey voltage
Battey voltage
Unlock (ON)
Lock (OFF)
Remote controller button pressed
0 Battey voltage

Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
EIS008ET
Operation condition
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Power source (Fuse)
Free
3*
L/Y
Super lock actuator
Released
SKIA9232E
Free
G/R
Passenger and rear doors lock

actuator
Unlocked
SKIA9232E
Free
6*
Y/R
Super lock actuator

Set
SKIA9232E
10
Power source (C/B)
Battery voltage
Free
11
SB
Front door lock actuator (driver

side)

Unlocked
SKIA9232E
BL-80
http://vnx.su

Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
Operation condition
Voltage [V]
(Approx.)
Free
B
14
R/B
Door lock actuator
Locked
C
SKIA9232E
16
B/R
17
28
Y/G
Ground
Battery voltage
32
OR
Multi-remote control unit
Remote controller lock button is

pushed.
(Ignition switch is not at ON position)
33
P/L
Remote controller unlock button is

pushed.
(Ignition switch is not at ON position)
10 0
NOTE:
*: With super lock system.
Symptom Chart
EIS001RG
NOTE:
Always check remote controller battery before replacing remote controller.
Symptom
Diagnoses/service procedure
Reference
page
1.Remote controller battery check
BL-82
2.Power supply and ground circuit check for time control unit
BL-82
3.Power supply and ground circuit check for multi-remote control unit
BL-83
4.Replace remote controller.
BL-90
BL-82
2.Power supply and ground circuit check for time control unit
BL-82
3.Power supply and ground circuit check for multi-remote control unit
BL-83
BL-90
BL-82
BL-90
Door lock function does not operate with

remote controller.
Time control unit lock circuit check
BL-84
Door unlock function does not operate with

remote controller.
Time control unit unlock circuit check
BL-85
BL-82
2.Hazard reminder check
BL-86
BL-90
All function of multi-remote control system do

not operate.
The new ID of remote controller cannot be

entered.
Door lock and unlock does not function.

(If the power door lock system does not operate
manually, check power door lock system.)
Hazard reminder does not activate properly

when pressing lock or unlock button of remote
controller.
BL-81
http://vnx.su
BL

Remote Controller Battery Check
EIS001T3
1. CHECK REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERY

Remove battery and measure voltage across battery positive and
negative terminals, (+) and ().
Voltage
: 2.5V 3.0V
NOTE:
Remote controller does not function if battery is not set correctly.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check remote controller battery terminals for corrosion
or damage.
NG
>> Replace battery.
SEL237W
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Time Control Unit
EIS001T4

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit harness connector.
1 (L), 10 (W) and ground.
1 (L) Ground
10 (W) Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
40A fusible link (letter B , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
10A fuse [No. 28, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
Harness for open or short between time control unit and fusible link
PIIA8729E

Check continuity between time control unit connector M30 terminal
16 (B/R) and ground.
16 (B/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG
>> Check ground harness.
PIIA8730E
BL-82
http://vnx.su

Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Multi-Remote Control Unit
EIS008EU
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect multi-remote control unit connector.
Check voltage between multi-remote control unit connector M33
terminal 2 (L) and ground.
2 (L) Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
Harness for open or short between multi-remote control unit and fuse
E
SIIA1228E
2. CHECK IGNITION SWITCH ON CIRCUIT
1.
2.

Check voltage between multi-remote control unit connector M33
terminal 4 (G) and ground.
4 (G) Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
Harness for open or short between multi-remote control unit and fuse
BL
SIIA1229E

1.
2.

Check continuity between multi-remote control unit connector
M33 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Power supply and ground circuits are OK.
NG
SIIA1230E
BL-83
http://vnx.su

Time Control Unit Lock Signal Circuit Check
1. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT
EIS008EV
OUTPUT SIGNAL

Connector
M31
(+)
32 (OR)
(-)
Ground
Condition of
remote controller
Voltage [V]
(Approximate
values)
Lock switch
pressed
5 0
Unlock switch
pressed
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SIIA2240E
2. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and multi-remote control
unit connector.
M31 terminal 32 (OR) and multi-remote control unit harness
connector M33 terminal 5 (OR)
32 (OR) 5 (OR)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace multi-remote control unit.
NG
SIIA2241E
BL-84
http://vnx.su

Time Control Unit Unlock Signal Circuit Check
1. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT
EIS008EW
OUTPUT SIGNAL

Connector
M31
(+)
33 (P/L)
(-)
Ground
Condition of
remote controller
Voltage [V]
(Approximate
values)
Lock switch
pressed
Unlock switch
pressed
50
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
SIIA2242E
2. CHECK TIME CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and multi-remote control
unit connector.
M31 terminal 33 (P/L) and multi-remote control unit harness
connector M33 terminal 6 (P/L)
33 (P/L) 6 (P/L)
OK or NG
OK
NG
BL
SIIA2243E
BL-85
http://vnx.su

Hazard Reminder Check
EIS008EX
1. CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP

Check if hazard warning lamp flashes with hazard switch.
Does hazard warning lamp operate?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check hazard warning lamp circuit. Refer to LT-89, "Wiring Diagram TURN " .
2. CHECK HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION

Check the following at when push the multi-remote control switch.
Check voltage between multi-remote control unit terminal 3 (G/Y), 8
(G/B) and ground.
3 (G/Y) Ground
8 (G/B) Ground
: Battery voltage.
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIB0635E
BL-86
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK HAZARD LAMP LH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect multi-remote control unit, side turn signal lamp LH and front and rear combination lamp LH
connector.
M33 terminal 8 (G/B) and front turn signal lamp LH connector
E47 terminal 1 (G/B).
8 (G/B) 1 (G/B)

D
E
PIIB0373E
4.

M33 terminal 8 (G/B) and rear combination lamp LH connector
B28 terminal 2 (G/B).
8 (G/B) 2 (G/B)
PIIB0374E
5.

M33 terminal 8 (G/B) and side turn signal lamp LH connector
E48 terminal 1 (G/B).
8 (G/B) 1 (G/B)
BL

K
L
PIIB0375E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
BL-87
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK HAZARD LAMP RH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect side turn signal lamp RH and front and rear combination lamp RH connector.
M33 terminal 3 (G/Y) and front turn signal lamp RH connector
E25 terminal 1 (G/Y).
3 (G/Y) 1 (G/Y)
PIIB0376E
4.

M33 terminal 3 (G/Y) and rear combination lamp RH connector
B24 terminal 2 (G/Y).
3 (G/Y) 2 (G/Y)
PIIB0377E
5.

M33 terminal 3 (G/Y) and side turn signal lamp RH connector
E20 terminal 1 (G/Y).
3 (G/Y) 1 (G/Y)
PIIB0378E
OK or NG
OK
>> Hazard lamp circuit is OK.
NG
BL-88
http://vnx.su

ID Code Entry Procedure
EIS008F0
BL
PIIA8773E
BL-89
http://vnx.su

Remote Controller Battery Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove screw on the rear of keyfob.

Place the key with the lower case facing up. Insert a screwdriver
wrapped with tape into A of the lower case and separate the
lower case from the upper case.
When replacing the circuit board assembly, remove circuit board
assembly from the upper case.
(Circuit board assembly: Switch rubber + Board surface)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to touch the printed circuits directly.
When replacing the battery
Remove battery from the lower case and replace it.
Battery
replacement
5.
EIS008EZ
: Coin-type lithium battery (CR2016)
CAUTION:
When replacing battery, be sure to keep the electrode contact area from dirt, grease or other foreign materials.
After replacement, fit the lower and upper cases together,
tighten with the screw.
CAUTION:
After replacing the battery, be sure to check that door locking operates normally using the keyfob.
BL-90
http://vnx.su
PIIA9409E
FRONT DOOR LOCK

FRONT DOOR LOCK
PFP:80502
A
EIS009QL
SIIA0159E
Component Parts Location (Super Lock)
EIS009QM
BL
M
PIIB1432E
1.
Lock knob
2.
Screw
3.
Inside handle
4.
Inside handle escutcheon A
5.
Inside handle rod
6.
Bolt
7.
Lock knob rod
8.
Door lock actuator
9.
Bolt
10. Door lock assembly
11. TORX bolt (T30)
12. Outside handle rod
13. Key lock rod
14. Key cylinder
15. Outside handle
16. Bell crank
17. Lock knob rod

1.
2.
EIS009QN
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .

Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
If sealing screen is reused, cut butyl tape in a way that leaves it on the sealing screen.
BL-91
http://vnx.su
FRONT DOOR LOCK

OUT SIDE HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT
Rotate bushing to obtain the gap between bushing and rod (as
shown in the figure).
NOTE:
The gap must not be 0 mm (0 in). The rod must not be held pressed
against the bushing.
SBT978
EIS009QO
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .

NOTE:
Remove front door glass. Refer to GW-80, "FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
Remove mount bolts and pull upper portion of the rear lower
sash out of the sash.
Remove inside handle escutcheon A.
PIIA0557E
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove inside handle mount screws.

Disconnect bell crank lock knob rod at the joints.
Disconnect inside handle rod (on the door lock assembly).
Slide inside handle rearward and remove it through the hole in
the door panel.
10. Remove rod from the inside handle.
11. Working through the access hole, disconnect key cylinder rod
and outside handle rod (on the handle) at the joint.
SIIA0160E
12. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.

13. Remove mount screw (TORX T30) and remove door lock
assembly through the access hole.
SIIA0144E
BL-92
http://vnx.su
FRONT DOOR LOCK

14. Remove outside handle mount bolts and slide the outside handle rearward to pull the front end of the outside handle escutcheon from the outer panel. Remove outside handle.
C
SIIA0161E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Install the outside handle by pressing it forward and downward while tightening the bolts.
Install each rod by rotating the rod holder until it engages with a tactile feel.
EIS009QP
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
The door lock actuator must be removed and installed with the door lock assembly off the vehicle.
1. Remove mount screws and door lock actuator from door lock
assembly.
2. Pull the door lock actuator straight down to separate it from door
lock assembly.
BL
PIIA0558E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Align door lock actuator pivot with the door lock assembly knob lever cutout.
Move the knob lever and door lock actuator pivot toward the LOCK position to ensure that they are
securely engaged.
EIS009QQ
DISASSEMBLY (SUPER LOCK)

NOTE:
1. Disconnect lock knob rod.
assembly.
lock assembly.
PIIB1433E
BL-93
http://vnx.su
FRONT DOOR LOCK

ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
securely engaged.
BL-94
http://vnx.su
REAR DOOR LOCK

REAR DOOR LOCK
PFP:82502
A
EIS009QR
SIIA0162E
Component Parts Location (Super Lock)
EIS009QS
BL
M
PIIB1467E
1.
Lock knob
2.
Screw
3.
Inside handle
4.
Inside handle escutcheon A
5.
Inside handle rod
6.
Bolt
7.
Bolt
8.
Door lock actuator
9.
Door lock assembly
10. TORX bolt (T30)
11. Outside handle
12. Rod holder
13. Lock knob rod
EIS009QT
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .

2. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
BL-95
http://vnx.su
REAR DOOR LOCK

OUT SIDE HANDLE ROD ADJUSTMENT
Rotate bushing to obtain the gap between bushing and rod (as
shown in the figure).
NOTE:
The gap must not be 0 mm (0 in). The rod must not be held pressed
against the bushing.
SBT978
EIS009QU
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove rear door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "DOOR FINISHER" .

NOTE:
Remove rear lower sash. Refer to GW-83, "REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
Remove rear door glass. Refer to GW-83, "REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR" .
Remove inside handle escutcheon A.
Remove inside handle mount screws.
Disconnect inside handle rod (on the door lock assembly).
Disconnect lock knob rod (on the door lock assembly).
SIIA0164E
9. Pry rod holder off with a slotted screwdriver to remove rod.

10. Slide inside handle rearward and remove it through the hole in
the door panel.
11. Remove rod from the inside handle.
12. Disconnect door lock actuator connector.
PIIA0559E
13. Remove mount screw (TORX T30) and remove door lock
assembly through the access hole.
SIIA0143E
BL-96
http://vnx.su
REAR DOOR LOCK

14. Remove outside handle mount bolts. Slide outside handle rearward to pull front end of the outside handle escutcheon from the
outer panel. Remove outside handle.
C
SIIA0142E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Install the outside handle by pressing it forward and downward while tightening the bolts.
Install each rod by rotating the rod holder until it engages with a tactile feel.
BL
BL-97
http://vnx.su
REAR DOOR LOCK

EIS009QV
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE:
assembly.
lock assembly.
PIIA0560E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
securely engaged.
EIS009QW
DISASSEMBLY (SUPER LOCK)

NOTE:
1. Disconnect lock knob rod.
assembly.
lock assembly.
PIIB1469E
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
securely engaged.
BL-98
http://vnx.su
BACK DOOR
BACK DOOR
Fitting Adjustment
PFP:90100
A
EIS000LF
BL
J
PIIA3653E
VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

1.
2.
3.
With striker removed, loosen hinge mount nuts on the back door and close it.
Make lateral clearance and clearance to rear window glass equal. Open back door to tighten mounting
bolts to specified torque.
If taking the steps above does not result in fine adjustment,
remove headliner and loosen the hinge mount nuts on the vehicle for further adjustment.
SIIA0081E
BL-99
http://vnx.su
BACK DOOR
Back Door Assembly
EIS000LG
SIIA0085E

Removal
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connectors in the back door and encamp the harness. Pull the harness out of the back door.
Support the back door lock with a proper material to prevent it from falling and remove back door stay (gas
stay).
Remove hinge mount nuts on the back door and remove back door assembly.
Installation
INSPECTION
1.
Check hinges for the following items

Abnormal noise or door closing and opening effort
Component wear or damage
Apply Body Grease to the rotating part of the hinge.
2.
PIIA3747E
Removal and Installation of Back Door Handle

REMOVAL
1.
Remove back door trim. Refer to EI-34, "BACK DOOR TRIM" .
BL-100
http://vnx.su
EIS0015D
BACK DOOR
2.
3.
4.
Remove license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-31, "LICENSE LAMP

FINISHER" .
Remove cable clamp and remove cable from the back door handle.
Remove mount nuts and back door handle.
C
SIIA0232E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock and Actuator
EIS000LI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove back door trim. Refer to EI-34, "BACK DOOR TRIM" .

Disconnect back door lock & actuator connector.
Remove bolts from the back door lock and actuator and remove
back door lock & actuator.
H
SIIA0234E
BL
INSTALLATION
BL-101
http://vnx.su
BACK DOOR
Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip
EIS000LJ
SIIA0194E
REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weatherstrip joint.
CAUTION:
After removal, do not pull strongly on the weatherstrip.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Working from the upper section, align weatherstrip mark with vehicle center position mark and install
weatherstrip onto the vehicle.
For the lower section, align the weatherstrip seam with center of the striker.
After installation, pull the weatherstrip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
NOTE:
Make sure the weatherstrip is fit fightly at each corner and back door rear plate.
BL-102
http://vnx.su
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER

FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
PFP:78820
A
EIS000LK
SIIA0166E
BL
BL-103
http://vnx.su
THEFT WARNING SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram THEFT /PRI-WIRE
PFP:25362
EIS001RM
LHD MODELS
TIWA0477E
BL-104
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0478E
BL-105
http://vnx.su

RHD MODELS
TIWA0479E
BL-106
http://vnx.su

A
BL
TIWA0480E
BL-107
http://vnx.su
NATS (NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)

PFP:25386
EIS001RQ
PIIA0586E
BL-108
http://vnx.su

System Description
EIS001RR
NATS (Nissan Anti-Theft System) has the following immobilizer functions:
Since only NATS ignition keys, whose ID Nos. have been registered into the ECM and IMMU of NATS,
allow the engine to run, a vehicle operation without registered key in NATS is prevented by NATS.
That is to say, NATS will immobilize the engine if someone tries to start it without the registered key of
NATS.
This version of NATS has dongle unit to improve its anti-theft performance (RHD models). Dongle unit has
its own ID which is registered into NATS IMMU. So if dongle unit is replaced, initialization must be carried
out.
When malfunction of dongle unit is detected:

The security indicator lamp illuminates for about 15 minutes after ignition switch is turned to ON.
When dongle unit has a malfunction and the indicator lamp is illuminated, engine can not be started. However engine can be started only one time when security indicator lamp turns off in about 15 minutes after
ignition switch is turned to ON.
All of the originally supplied ignition key IDs have been registered in NATS.
If requested by the vehicle owner, a maximum of five key IDs can be registered into the NATS components.
The security indicator blinks when the ignition switch is in OFF or ACC position. Therefore, NATS
warns outsiders that the vehicle is equipped with the anti-theft system.
When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lamp lights up as follows.
Condition IGN ON and
NATS malfunction (except dongle unit) is

detected
Only malfunction of dongle unit is
detected.
Malfunction of NATS and engine related
parts are detected.
With dongle
Without dongle
Security indicator
Security indicator
1. 6 times blinking
2. Staying ON after ignition switch is turned
ON
Staying ON for about 15 minutes after ignition switch is turned ON
Just after initialization of NATS
NATS trouble diagnoses, system initialization and additional registration of other NATS ignition key IDs
must be carried out using CONSULT-II hardware and CONSULT-II NATS software.
When NATS initialization has been completed, the ID of the inserted ignition key is auto matically registered in NATS. Then, if necessary, additional registration of other NATS ignition key IDs can be carried
out.
Regarding the procedures of NATS initialization and NATS ignition key ID registration, refer to CONSULTII operation manual, NATS.
When servicing a malfunction of the NATS (indicated by lighting up of Security Indicator Lamp) or
registering another NATS ignition key ID No., it may be necessary to re-register original key identification. Therefore, be sure to receive ALL KEYS from vehicle owner.
BL-109
BL
Staying ON
http://vnx.su
2. Staying ON after ignition switch is turned

ON
6 times blinking
Staying ON
1. 6 times blinking
Only engine related part malfunction is

detected.

System Composition
EIS001RS
The immobilizer function of the NATS consists of the following:
NATS ignition key
NATS immobilizer control unit (IMMU) located in the ignition key cylinder
Engine control module (ECM)
Dongle unit (RHD models)
Security indicator
SIIA1246E
ECM Re-communicating Function
EIS008F1
Performing following procedure can automatically perform re-communication of ECM and NATS IMMU, but
only when the ECM has been replaced with a new one (*1).
*1: New one means a virgin ECM which has never been energized on-board.
(In this step, initialization procedure by CONSULT-II is not necessary)
NOTE:
When registering new Key IDs or replacing the ECM other than brand new, refer to CONSULT-II
Operation Manual, NATS.
If multiple keys are attached to the key holder, separate them before work.
Distinguish keys with unregistered key ID from those with registered ID.
1. Install ECM.
2. Using a registered key (*2), turn ignition switch to ON.
*2: To perform this step, use the key (except for card plate key) that has been used before performing
ECM replacement.
3. Maintain ignition switch in ON position for at least 5 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
5. Start engine.
If engine can be started, procedure is completed.
If engine cannot be started, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS and initialize control unit.
BL-110
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram NATS
EIS008F2
LHD MODELS
BL
TIWA0481E
BL-111
http://vnx.su
TIWB0025E
BL-112
http://vnx.su

RHD MODELS
A
BL
TIWA0482E
BL-113
http://vnx.su
TIWB0026E
BL-114
http://vnx.su

CONSULT-II
EIS008F3
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1.
2.

Insert NATS program card into CONSULT-II.
Program card
3.
: NATS (AEN02C1)
Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector.

C
D
SIIA1249E
4.
5.

Touch START.
PBR455D
6.
Torch OTHER.
BL
K
PIIA6816E
7.
Select NATS V.5.0.

If "NATS V5.0" is not indicated go to GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
SEL027X
BL-115
http://vnx.su

8.
Perform each diagnostic test mode according to each service

procedure.
For further information, see the CONSULT-II Operation Manual,
NATS.
SEL150X
CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION

CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST
MODE
Description
C/U INITIALIZATION
When replacing any of the following components, C/U initialization and re-registration of all
NATS ignition keys are necessary.
[NATS ignition key/IMMU/ECM/Dongle unit]
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Detected items (screen terms) are as shown in the chart.

BL-117, "NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART"
NOTE:
When any initialization is performed, all ID previously registered will be erased and all NATS ignition keys must be registered again.
The engine cannot be started with an unregistered key. In this case, the system may show DIFFERENCE
OF KEY or LOCK MODE as a self-diagnostic result on the CONSULT-II screen.
When initialization is performed for RHD models, security indicator will flash six times to demonstrate recognition of the dongle unit ID.
In rare case, CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU might be stored as a self-diagnostic result during key registration
procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
SEL151X
BL-116
http://vnx.su

NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ITEM CHART
Detected items
(NATS program card screen terms)
P No. Code
(Self-diagnostic
result of
ENGINE
A
Malfunction is detected when.....
Reference
page
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1613
The malfunction of ECM internal circuit of IMMU communication line is detected.
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1612
Communication impossible between ECM and IMMU

(In rare case, CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU might be stored
during key registration procedure, even if the system is
not malfunctioning.)
BL-122
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1615
IMMU can receive the key ID signal but the result of ID

verification between key ID and IMMU is NG.
BL-125
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1614
IMMU cannot receive the key ID signal.
BL-126
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1611
The result of ID verification between IMMU and ECM is

NG. System initialization is required.
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
LOCK MODE
DON'T ERASE BEFORE CHECKING ENG DIAG
NATS MALFUNCTION
P1610
BL-121
When the starting operation is carried out five or more

times consecutively under the following conditions, NATS
will shift the mode to one which prevents the engine from
being started.
Unregistered ignition key is used.
IMMU or ECM's malfunctioning.
All engine trouble codes except NATS trouble code has

been detected in ECM.
BL-127
BL-129
BL-118
BL
BL-117
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
EIS008F4
SEL729WE
BL-118
http://vnx.su

Trouble Diagnoses
EIS008F5
SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1

Self-diagnosis related item
SYMPTOM
Displayed SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen.
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
Security indicator
lighting up*
Engine cannot be
started
DIFFERENCE OF KEY
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 1
(BL-121 )
PROCEDURE 2
(BL-122 )
PROCEDURE 3
(BL-125 )
PROCEDURE 4
(BL-126 )
PROCEDURE 5
(BL-127 )
BL-119
http://vnx.su
SYSTEM
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
REFERENCE PART NO.

OF ILLUSTRATION ON
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ECM
In rare case, CHAIN OF

ECM-IMMU might be
stored during key registration procedure, even if
the system is not malfunctioning.
Open circuit in battery

voltage line of IMMU circuit
C1
Open circuit in ignition

line of IMMU circuit
C2
Open circuit in ground

line of IMMU circuit
C3
Open circuit in communication line between

IMMU and ECM
C4
Short circuit between

IMMU and ECM communication line and battery
voltage line
C4
Short circuit between

IMMU and ECM communication line and ground
line
C4
BL
ECM
IMMU
Unregistered key
IMMU
Malfunction of key ID
chip
IMMU
Open circuit in ground

line of dongle unit circuit
C6
Open or short circuit in

line between IMMU and
dongle unit
C5
Dongle unit
System initialization has

not yet been completed.
ECM
SYMPTOM
Security indicator
lighting up*
Engine cannot be
started
Displayed SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen.
LOCK MODE
(Reference page)
PROCEDURE 7
(BL-129 )
SYSTEM
(Malfunctioning part or
mode)
LOCK MODE
REFERENCE PART NO.

OF ILLUSTRATION ON
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
When the starting operation is carried out five or
more times consecutively under the following conditions, NATS will
shift the mode to one
which prevents the
engine from being
started.
Unregistered
ignition
key is used.
IMMU
or ECM's malfunctioning.
MIL staying ON
Security indicator
lighting up*
DON'T ERASE
BEFORE CHECKING
ENG DIAG
WORK FLOW
(BL-118 )
Engine trouble data and

NATS trouble data have
been detected in ECM
*: When NATS detects trouble, the security indicator lights up while ignition key is in the ON position.
*: When the vehicle is equipped with a dongle unit (RHD models), the security indicator blinks 6 times just after the ignition switch is
turned to ON. Then the security indicator lights up while the ignition key is in the ON position.
BL-120
http://vnx.su

SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 2
A
Non self-diagnosis related item

SYMPTOM
(Reference page)
Security Ind. does not light up.
PROCEDURE 6
(BL-128 )
Security Ind. does not blink just

after initialization even if the
vehicle is equipped with dongle unit.
Security Ind. does not blink just
after ignition switch is turned to
ON when some malfunction
related to NATS is detected
even if the vehicle is equipped
with dongle unit.
PROCEDURE 8
(BL-130 )
SYSTEM
(Malfunctioning part or mode)
REFERENCE PART NO. OF

ILLUSTRATION ON SYSTEM
DIAGRAM
Security Ind.
Open circuit between Fuse and

IMMU
Continuation of initialization
mode
IMMU
NATS might be initialized without connecting dongle unit

properly.
Open circuit in ground line of

dongle unit circuit
C6
Open or short circuit in communication line between IMMU

and dongle unit
C5
Dongle unit
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
BL
M
SEL028X
Diagnostic Procedure 1
EIS008F6
Self-diagnostic results:
ECM INT CIRC-IMMU displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ECM INT CIRC-IMMU
displayed on CONSULT-II screen. Ref. part No. B.
2. Replace ECM.
3. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual NATS.
SEL152X
BL-121
http://vnx.su

EIS008F7
CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU displayed on CONSULT-II screen
1. CONFIRM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS

Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU
displayed on CONSULT-II screen.
NOTE:
In rare case, CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU might be stored during key
registration procedure, even if the system is not malfunctioning.
Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown in figure?
Yes
>> GO TO 2
No
>> GO TO BL-119, "SYMPTOM MATRIX CHART 1" .
SEL292W
2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NATS IMMU connector.
Check voltage between NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 8 (W/L) and ground with CONSULT-II or tester.
8 (W/L) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
10A fuse (No. 33, located in the fusible link and fuse
box) (Gasoline engine)
20A fuse (No. 43, located in the fusible link and fuse
box) (Diesel engine)
Harness for open or short between fuse and NATS
IMMU connector. Ref. Part No. C1
PIIA8746E
3. CHECK IGN SW. ON SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 7 (G) and ground with CONSULTII or tester.
7 (G) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
Harness for open or short between fuse and NATS
IMMU connector. Ref. part No. C2
PIIA8747E
BL-122
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR IMMU

1.
2.
Turn ignition OFF.

Check harness continuity between NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 4 (B) and ground.
4 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness. Ref. part No. C3
PIIA8748E
5. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector.

Check harness continuity between ECM harness connector M118 terminal 88 (Gasoline engine) or 112
(Diesel engine) and NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 1.
88 (SB) 1 (BR/Y)
112 (SB) 1 (BR/Y)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Repair harness or connector. Ref. part No. C4
BL
J
PIIB0379E
6. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE BATTERY SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Turn ignition ON.

Check voltage between ECM terminal 88 (Gasoline engine), 112 (Diesel engine) or NATS IMMU h terminal 1 and ground.
88 (SB) Ground
112 (SB) Ground
1 (BR/Y) Ground
: Approx. 0V
: Approx. 0V
: Approx. 0V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
Communication line is short-circuited with battery
voltage line or ignition switch ON line
Repair harness or connectors Ref. part No. C4
BL-123
http://vnx.su
PIIB0380E
7. CHECK COMMUNICATION LINE GROUND SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Check continuity between ECM terminal 88 (Gasoline engine), 112 (Diesel engine) or NATS IMMU terminal 1 and ground.
88 (SB) Ground
112 (SB) Ground
1 (BR/Y) Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
Communication line is short-circuited with ground line
Repair harness or connectors Ref. part No. C4
PIIB0381E
8. SIGNAL FROM ECM TO IMMU CHECK

1.
2.
Connect NATS IMMU connector.

Check voltage between NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 3 (B/Y) and ground with analogue
tester.
3 (B/Y) - Ground:
Before turning ignition switch ON
: Voltage: Battery voltage
Just after turning ignition switch ON
: Pointer of tester should move.
OK or NG
OK
>> NATS IMMU is malfunctioning.
Replace NATS IMMU. Ref. part No. A
Perform initialization with CONSULT-II.
For the operation of initialization, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS.
NG
>> ECM is malfunctioning.
Replace ECM. Ref. part No. B
For the operation of initialization, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS.
BL-124
http://vnx.su
PIIA8758E

EIS008F8
DIFFERENCE OF KEY displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS DIFFERENCE OF KEY

Is CONSULT-II screen displayed as shown in the figure?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
E
SEL367X
2. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
For initialization and registration of NATS ignition key IDs, refer to CONSULT-II operation manual NATS.
NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows
above message on the screen.
Can the system be initialized and can the engine be started with reregistered NATS ignition key?
Yes
>> Ignition key ID was unregistered. Ref. part No. D
No
Replace IMMU. Ref. part No. A
SEL297W
BL
BL-125
http://vnx.su

EIS008F9
CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY displayed on CONSULT-II screen

Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
SEL292W
2. CHECK NATS IGNITION KEY ID CHIP

Start engine with another registered NATS ignition key.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> Ignition key ID chip is malfunctioning.
Replace the ignition key. Ref. part No. E
For initialization, refer to CONSULT-II Operation Manual NATS.
No
>> Models without dongle unit
NATS IMMU is malfunctioning.
Models with dongle unit
GO TO 3.
3. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Check harness connector connection between E109 and M80.
Does the engine start?
Yes
>> System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.)
No
>> GO TO 4.
4. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

1.
2.

Check continuity between dongle unit harness connector M80 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PIIA8752E
BL-126
http://vnx.su
5. CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT

1.
2 (PU) 7 (PU)
2.
Check continuity between NATS IMMU harness connector E109

terminal 2 (PU) and dongle unit harness connector M80 terminal
7 (PU).
Check continuity between NATS IMMU harness connector terminal 2 (PU) and ground.
2 (PU) Ground
OK or NG
PIIA8753E
OK
>> Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit Ref. Part No. G
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to CONSULT-II
operation manual NATS.
NG
>> Repair harness.
EIS008FA
ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM displayed on CONSULT-II screen

H
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS ID DISCORD, IMM-ECM displayed on CONSULT-II screen.

NOTE:
ID DISCORD IMMU-ECM:
Registered ID of IMMU is in discord with that of ECM.
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
BL
SEL958W

Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. Re-register all NATS ignition key IDs.
NOTE:
Can the system be initialized?
Yes
>> Start engine. (END)
(System initialization had not been completed. Ref.
part No. B )
No
BL-127
http://vnx.su
SEL297W

EIS008FB
SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP
1. CHECK FUSE
Is 10A fuse OK?
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Replace fuse.
2. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

1.
2.
Install 10A fuse.

4. Start engine and turn ignition switch OFF.
5. Check the security indicator lamp lighting.
Security indicator lamp should be light up.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
Check voltage between security indicator lamp harness connector M28 terminal 2 (L) and ground.
2 (L) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between fuse and
security indicator lamp.
PIIB0382E
4. CHECK SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP

Apply 12V direct current to security indicator lamp harness connector M34 terminals 1 and 2.
Security indicator lamp should illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace security indicator lamp.
PIIB0383E
BL-128
http://vnx.su
5. CHECK IMMU FUNCTION

1.
2.
3.
Connect NATS IMMU connector.

Disconnect security indicator lamp connector.
Check continuity between NATS IMMU harness connector E109 terminal 5 (OR) and ground.
5 (OR) Ground
: Continuity should exist intermittently.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check harness for open or short between security indicator lamp and NATS IMMU.
NG
E
PIIA8755E
EIS008FC
LOCK MODE displayed on CONSULT-II screen
Confirm SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS LOCK MODE is displayed

on CONSULT-II screen.
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
BL
J
SEL960W
2. ESCAPE FROM LOCK MODE

2. Turn ignition switch ON with registered key. (Do not start engine.) Wait 5 seconds.
3. Return the key to OFF position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 twice (total of three cycles).
5. Start the engine.
Does engine start?
Yes
>> System is OK. (Now system is escaped from LOCK MODE.)
No
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK IMMU ILLUSTRATION

Check NATS IMMU installation. Refer to BL-131, "How to Replace NATS IMMU" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Reinstall NATS IMMU correctly.
BL-129
http://vnx.su

NOTE:
If the initialization is not completed or fails, CONSULT-II shows the
Yes
>> System is OK.
No
>> GO TO 5
SEL297W
5. PERFORM INITIALIZATION WITH CONSULT-II AGAIN

1.
2.
Replace NATS IMMU.

NOTE:
the above message on the screen.
Yes
>> System is OK. (NATS IMMU is malfunctioning. Ref. part
No. A )
No
SEL297W
EIS008FD
1. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Check harness connector connection between E109 and M80.
Then initialize NATS. For the initialization operation, refer to CONSULT-II operation NATS.
Does the security indicator blink just after initialization?
Yes
>> System is OK. (The malfunction is caused by improper connector connection.)
No
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR DONGLE UNIT

Check continuity between dongle unit harness connector M80 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
PIIA8756E
BL-130
http://vnx.su
3. CHECK INTERFACE CIRCUIT

1.
2 (PU) 7 (PU)
2.

terminal 2 (PU) and dongle unit harness connector M80 terminal
7 (PU).

terminal 2 (PU) and ground.
2 (PU) Ground
OK or NG
PIIA8757E
OK
>> Dongle unit is malfunctioning.
1. Replace dongle unit.
2. Perform initialization with CONSULT-II. For the initialization procedure, refer to CONSULT-II
Operation Manual NATS.
NG
>> Repair harness.
How to Replace NATS IMMU
EIS008FE
BL
SEL096WC
NOTE:
If NATS IMMU is not installed correctly, NATS system will not operate properly and SELF-DIAG
RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show LOCK MODE.
BL-131
http://vnx.su
BL-132
http://vnx.su
GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS
I BODY
SECTION
GW
GLASSES, WINDOW SYSTEM & MIRRORS
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions .............................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
Diagnostic Worksheet .............................................. 9
WINDSHIELD GLASS AND MOLDING ....................11
REMOVAL ............................................................11
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
SIDE WINDOW GLASS ............................................ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS .............................. 14
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS .............................. 15
REMOVAL ........................................................... 15
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .................................. 17
System Description / LHD Models .......................... 17

System Description / RHD Models ......................... 18
Wiring Diagram DEF / For LHD models ........ 19
Wiring Diagram DEF / For RHD models ........ 21
Terminals and Reference Value for Time Control
Unit (RHD models) ................................................. 23
Rear Window Defogger Relay Power Supply Check
1 .............................................................................. 24
Time Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Check... 25
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check ........ 26
Rear Window Defogger Relay Power Supply Check
2 .............................................................................. 28
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check 1 ................. 30
Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check 2 ................. 31
Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check ....................... 32
Rear Window Defogger Indicator Lamp Check 1 ... 34
Rear Window Defogger Indicator Lamp Check 2 ... 36
Filament Check ....................................................... 38
Filament Repair ...................................................... 38
REPAIR EQUIPMENT ......................................... 38
REPAIRING PROCEDURE ................................. 39
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM .................................... 40
MANUAL OPERATION ........................................ 41
AUTO OPERATION ............................................. 44
POWER WINDOW LOCK ................................... 44
TIMER FUNCTION .............................................. 44
DRIVER WINDOW ANTIPINCH FUNCTION ... 44
Schematic / For LHD models .................................. 45
Wiring Diagram WINDOW / For LHD models ... 46
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
Main Switch / For LHD models ............................... 50
Schematic / For RHD models ................................. 52
Wiring Diagram WINDOW / For RHD models... 53
Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window
Main Switch / For RHD models .............................. 57
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart ....................... 58
Power Window Relay Power Supply and Ground
GW-1
http://vnx.su
GW
Circuit Check .......................................................... 59

Power Window Main Switch Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Check ............................................. 60
Power Window Motor (Driver side) Circuit Check... 61
Power Window Motor Circuit Check ....................... 62
Power Window Switch Check ................................. 63
Power Window (Passenger side) Circuit Check ..... 64
Power Window (Rear LH) Circuit Check ................. 66
Power Window (Rear RH) Circuit Check ................ 68
Limit Switch Circuit Check ...................................... 70
Encoder Circuit Check ............................................ 72
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ............. 80
REMOVAL ........................................................... 80
INSTALLATION .................................................... 81
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................ 81
FITTING INSPECTION ........................................ 82
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR ...............83

REMOVAL ............................................................83
INSTALLATION ....................................................85
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL ........................85
FITTING INSPECTION ........................................85
DOOR MIRROR .........................................................86
Precautions to Handle Retractable Power Door Mirrors ..........................................................................86
Wiring Diagram MIRROR / For LHD models...87
Wiring Diagram MIRROR / For RHD models...89
REMOVAL ............................................................91
INSTALLATION ....................................................91
DISASSEMBLY ....................................................92
ASSEMBLY ..........................................................93
INSIDE MIRROR .......................................................94
REMOVAL ............................................................94
INSTALLATION ....................................................94
GW-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS0045G
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS0045H
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts, which G
may get in the way with cloth.
When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping them with vinyl or tape.
Keep removed parts protected with cloth.

H
If a clip is deformed or damaged, replace it.
If an unreusable part is removed, replace it with a new one.

GW
Tighten bolts and nuts firmly to the specified torque.
After re-assembly has been completed, make sure each part functions correctly.
Remove stains in the following way.

J
Water-soluble stains:
Dip a soft cloth in warm water, and then squeeze it tightly. After wiping the stain, wipe with a soft dry cloth.
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain K
with the cloth. Next, dip the cloth in fresh water and squeeze it tightly. Then clean off the detergent completely.
Then wipe the area with a soft dry cloth.
Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner or benzine.

L
GW-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EIS008NO
Tool name
Description
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
GW-4
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS008NP
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to GW-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
GW
J
K
defining the noise.

Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces=higher pitch noise/softer surfaces=lower pitch noises/edge to surface=chirping

M





GW-5
http://vnx.su

1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.


1.
2.
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
Refer to GW-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

CAUTION:
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 6085 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
GW-6
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
EIS008NQ
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
H
GW
J
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
L
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
GW-7
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
SEATS
noise.
3. Rear seatback lock and bracket
UNDERHOOD
GW-8
http://vnx.su

EIS008NR
GW
SBT843
GW-9
http://vnx.su
SBT844
GW-10
http://vnx.su
WINDSHIELD GLASS AND MOLDING

PFP:72700
A
EIS0045I
PIIB0581E
REMOVAL
1.
Remove the front pillar garnish and headlining. Refer to EI-35, "BODY SIDE TRIM" and EI-39, "HEAD- H
LINING" .
2. Remove the body side welt on the front pillar.
3. Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-20, "COWL TOP" .
GW
4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
After removing moldings, remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
J
If a windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
K
CAUTION:
When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
L
Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
M
PIIA0186E
GW-11
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
PIIA0550E
Repairing Water Leaks

Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
GW-12
http://vnx.su
SIDE WINDOW GLASS

SIDE WINDOW GLASS
PFP:83300
A
EIS0045J
SIIA0168E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove luggage side lower finisher and rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-35, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .
H
Apply protective tape on body panels around side window glass to protect painted surfaces from damage.
Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an

inflatable pump bag.
GW
If a side window glass is to be reused, mark the body and the

glass with mating marks.
WARNING:
J
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety
glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
K
CAUTION:
When a side window is to be reused, do not use a cutting

SBF034B
knife or power cutting tool.
L
INSTALLATION
With a knife, scrape off remaining adhesive left around on the

side of vehicle body to as thin and flat as 2 mm (0.08 in).
SIIA1097E
Use a genuine Nissan Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and follow the instructions furnished with it.
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being forced
out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
GW-13
http://vnx.su
SIDE WINDOW GLASS

Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary unit the urethane adhesive has completely
cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
The materials contained in the Kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
inhaled. if affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the side window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
printed on the box.
They vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time will
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS

Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
GW-14
http://vnx.su
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS

PFP:90300
A
EIS0045K
GW
PIIB0582E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-16, "Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arms" .
Remove rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-18, "Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Nozzle" .
Remove rear defogger connectors.
Apply a protective tape around the back door window glass to prevent the paint surface from being damaged.
5. Cut adhesive using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING:
When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent
glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
When a windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
PIIB0415E
GW-15
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
With a knife, scrape off remaining adhesive left around on the
side of vehicle body to as thin and flat as 2 mm (0.08 in).
Use a genuine Insane Urethane Adhesive Kit or equivalent and

follow the instructions furnished with it.
While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This

will prevent the glass from being forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary

until the urethane adhesive has completely cured (preferably 24
hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
SIIA1097E
WARNING:
The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance of the back door window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
printed on the box.
The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
GW-16
http://vnx.su
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

PFP:25350
A
EIS0045L
PIIA9619E
System Description / LHD Models
EIS0045M
The rear window defogger system is controlled by time control unit. The rear window defogger operates only H
for approximately 15 minutes.
Power is supplied at all times
GW
through 20A fuse (No.25, located in the fuse and fusible link box) and
to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (with door mirror defogger or side air bag) or
to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (without door mirror defogger or side air bag) .
J
through 10A fuse [No.27, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
to rear window defogger relay terminal 6 (with door mirror defogger).

K

With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied

L
to rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and

M
Ground is supplied
to rear window defogger switch terminals 2 and 4 (without auto A/C) or
to A/C auto amp. Terminal 3 (with auto A/C)

When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
through rear window defogger switch terminal 1 (without auto A/C) or
through A/C auto amp, terminal 22 (with auto A/C).

Terminal 27 of the time control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
through rear window defogger relay terminals 5 and 7 (with door mirror defogger or side air bag)
through rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (without door mirror defogger or side air bag)
to the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (with door mirror defogger).
The rear window defogger and door mirror defogger has an independent ground.
GW-17
http://vnx.su

With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog
the rear window and door mirror.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
Power is supplied
through rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (without door mirror defogger or side air bag) or
through rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (with door mirror defogger or side air bag)
to rear window defogger switch terminal 3 (without auto A/C) or
to A/C auto amp, terminal 23 (with auto A/C).
System Description / RHD Models
EIS008O7
The rear window defogger system is controlled by time control unit. The rear window defogger operates only
for approximately 15 minutes.
through 20A fuse (No.25, located in the fuse and fusible link box) and
to rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (with side air bag) or
to rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (without side air bag).

to rear window defogger relay terminal 1 and

Ground is supplied
to rear window defogger switch terminals 2 and 4 (without auto A/C) or
to A/C auto amp. Terminal 3 (with auto A/C)

When the rear window defogger switch is turned ON, ground is supplied
through rear window defogger switch terminal 1 (without auto A/C) or
through A/C auto amp, terminal 22 (with auto A/C).

Terminal 27 of the time control unit then supplies ground to the rear window defogger relay terminal 2.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger relay is energized.
Power is supplied
through rear window defogger terminal 3 (without side air bag) or
through rear window defogger terminal 5 (with side air bag)
to the rear window defogger.

The rear window defogger and door mirror defogger has an independent ground.
With power and ground supplied, the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger filaments heat and defog
the rear window and door mirror.
When the system is activated, the rear window defogger indicator illuminates in the rear window defogger
switch.
Power is supplied
through rear window defogger relay terminal 3 (without side air bag) or
through rear window defogger relay terminal 5 (with side air bag)
to rear window defogger switch terminal 3 (without auto A/C) or
to A/C auto amp, terminal 23 (with auto A/C).
GW-18
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram DEF / For LHD models
EIS0045N
GW
TIWA0444E
GW-19
http://vnx.su
TIWA0445E
GW-20
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram DEF / For RHD models
EIS0045P
GW
TIWA0446E
GW-21
http://vnx.su
TIWA0447E
GW-22
http://vnx.su

Terminals and Reference Value for Time Control Unit (RHD models)
EIS0046H
A
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Power source (Fuse)
Battery voltage
16
Ground
17
Ignition switch ON
Ignition switch positoin

(ON or START)
G/W
Rear window defogger relay control signal
Rear window
defogger switch
: ON
27
: OFF
Battery voltage
Rear window
defogger switch
: ON
: OFF
Battery voltage
35
LG/B
ITEM
Rear window defogger switch signal
Battery voltage
Trouble Diagnoses
EIS0045T
Check that other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
LHD Models
Symptom
Rear window defogger does not operate.
(without door mirror defogger or side air back)
Diagnoses / Service procedure
F
Refer to page
1.
Rear window defogger relay power supply check 1
GW-24
2.
GW-25
3.
Rear window defogger switch circuit check
GW-26
Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger

does not operate.
(with door mirror defogger)
1.
GW-28
2.
GW-25
3.
GW-26

1.
Rear window defogger circuit check
GW-26
Door mirror defogger does not operate.

1.
Door mirror defogger circuit check
GW-32
1.
GW-28
2.
GW-25
3.
GW-26
Rear window defogger switch does not light, but

rear window defogger operates.
(without door mirror defogger or)
1.
Rear window defogger indicator lamp circuit check 1
GW-34

(with side air back)
1.
GW-36

(with side air bag)
Symptom
Diagnoses / Service procedure
Refer to page
1.
GW-24
2.
GW-25
3.
GW-26
1.
GW-28
2.
GW-25
3.
GW-26

(without side air back)
1.
GW-34

(with side air back)
1.
GW-36

(with side air bag)
GW
RHD Models

(without door side air back)
GW-23
http://vnx.su

Rear Window Defogger Relay Power Supply Check 1
EIS008AL
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
NOTE:
Refer to GW-17, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING"
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove rear window defogger relay.
Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness
connector B29 terminal 1, 5 and ground.
1 (G/Y) - Ground
5 (L/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between fuse block (J/B) and
rear window defogger relay.
PIIA9549E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminal 3 and 5.
Terminal
3
Condition
Continuity
12V direct current supply between

terminal 1 and 2
Yes
Not current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger relay
PIIA2636J
GW-24
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Installation rear window defogger relay.
27 and ground.
27 (G/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger relay power supply is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
E
PIIA9550E
5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 27 and rear window defogger relay connector B29 terminal
2.
27 (G/W) - 2 (G/W)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between time control unit and
GW
J
PIIA9551E
Time Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Check
EIS008AM
1. CHECK FUSE

NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
GW-25
http://vnx.su

1.
2.

Check voltage between time control unit connector M30, M31
terminal 1, 17 and ground.
1 (L) - Ground
17 (G) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check time control unit power supply circuit for open or
short.
PIIA9547E

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between time control unit connector M30 terminal 16 and ground.
16 (B/R) - Ground
: Continuity should exist
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check time control unit ground circuit for open or short.
PIIA9548E
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check
EIS008AN
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH OPERATION

1.
2.

Connector
M31

(+)
(-)
35 (LG/B)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window
defogger switch
:ON
:OFF
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA9554E
GW-26
http://vnx.su
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit and rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or A/C auto amp, (with
auto A/C) connector.
(Without auto A/C)
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 35 and rear window defogger switch connector M50 terminal
1.
35 (LG/B) - 1 (LG/B)

D
E
PIIA9552E
(With auto A/C)

Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 35 and A/C auto amp, connector M53 terminal 22.
35 (LG/B) - 22 (LG/B)
OK
NG

H
>> GO TO 3.
rear window defogger relay (without auto A/C) or A/C
auto amp, (with auto A/C).
GW
PIIA9553E

1.
2.
3.

35 and ground.
35 (LG/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.(without auto A/C)
Check A/C auto amp.(with auto A/C). Refer to ATC-34
NG
PIIA9554E
GW-27
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

Rear window defogger switch operate, check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector M50
terminal 1 and 2.
Connector
M50
Terminal
1
Condition
2
Continuity
Rear window: ON
Yes
Defogger switch: OFF
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger switch.
PIIA9555E
5. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH GROUND

Check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector
M50 terminal 2 and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger switch and ground.
PIIA9556E
Rear Window Defogger Relay Power Supply Check 2
EIS008AO
1. CHECK FUSE
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check voltage between rear window defogger relay connector
B6 terminal 1, 3 and ground.
1 (G/Y) - Ground
3 (L/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIA9557E
GW-28
http://vnx.su
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminal 3 and 5, 6 and 7.
Terminal
3
Condition
Continuity

terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
D
SEC202B
4. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

27 and ground.
27 (G/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
H
OK or NG
OK
>> Rear window defogger power supply circuit is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
GW
PIIA9550E

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect time control unit connector and rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between time control unit connector M31 terminal 27 and rear defogger relay connector B6 terminal 2.
27 (G/W) - 2 (G/W)
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA9558E
GW-29
http://vnx.su

Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check 1
EIS008AP
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect rear window defogger connector.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.
Connector
D54
(+)
(-)
1 (B/W)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window
defogger switch
: ON
Battery voltage
: OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA4234E
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Check continuity between rear window defogger connector D61
terminal 2 and ground.
2 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Check filament, Refer to GW-38, "Filament Check"
If filament is OK
Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
If filament is ON
Repair filament.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger and ground.
PIIA4235E

1.
2.
3.

Remove the rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector
B29 terminal 3 and rear window defogger connector D54 terminal 1.
3 (B/W or BR) - 1 (B/W)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger relay and rear window defogger.
PIIA9559E
GW-30
http://vnx.su

Rear Window Defogger Circuit Check 2
EIS008BM
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect rear window defogger connector.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.
Connector
D54
(+)
(-)
1 (B/W)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window
defogger switch
: ON
Battery voltage
: OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
F
PIIA4234E
2. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Check continuity between rear window defogger connector D61
2 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Check filament, Refer to GW-38, "Filament Check"
If filament is OK
Check the condition of the harness and the connector.
If filament is ON
Repair filament.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger and ground.
GW
J
PIIA4235E

1.
2.
3.

Remove the rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between rear window defogger relay connector
B6 terminal 5 and rear window defogger connector D54 terminal
1.
5 (B/W or BR) - 1 (B/W)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger relay and rear window defogger.
PIIA9560E
GW-31
http://vnx.su

Door Mirror Defogger Circuit Check
EIS008AQ
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No.27, located in fuse block (J/B)]
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check voltage between rear window defogger relay harness
connector B6 terminal 6 and ground.
6 (R/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PIIA9561E

Check continuity between rear window defogger relay terminal 6 and 7.
Terminal
6
Condition
7
Continuity
12V direct current supply

between terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
SEC202B
GW-32
http://vnx.su
4. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check voltage between door mirror actuator connector D3 (driver side), D14 (passenger side) terminal 2
and ground.
C
Connector
D3
D14
(+)
(-)
2 (BR/W)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window
defogger switch
: ON
Battery voltage
: OFF
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 6.
PIIA9562E
5. CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER GROUND

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door mirror actuator connector.
Check continuity between door mirror actuator connector D3
(driver side), D14 (passenger side) terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) - Ground
GW
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace malfunction door mirror actuator.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between door mirror actuator
and ground.
PIIA9563E

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect door mirror actuator connector and rear window defogger relay.
Check continuity between door mirror actuator D3 (driver side),
D14 (passenger side) terminal 2 and rear window defogger relay
connector B6 terminal 7.
2 (BR/W) - 7 (BR/W)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between door mirror actuator
and rear window defogger relay.
PIIA9564E
GW-33
http://vnx.su

Rear Window Defogger Indicator Lamp Check 1
EIS008AR
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SIGNAL

1.
2.
Turn both ignition switch and rear window defogger switch ON.
(Without auto A/C)
Check voltage between rear window defogger switch connector
3 (B/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
PIIA9565E
(With auto A/C)

Check voltage between A/C auto amp, connector M53 terminal
23 and ground.
23 (B/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA9566E
GW-34
http://vnx.su

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or A/C auto amp, (with auto A/C) connector
(without auto A/C)
Check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector M50 terminal 3 and rear window defogger relay connector
B29 terminal 3.
3 (B/W) - 3 (B/W or BR)

D
E
PIIA9567E
(with auto A/C)

Check continuity between A/C auto amp, connector M53 terminal 23 and rear window defogger relay connector B29 terminal
3.
23 (B/W) - 3 (B/W or BR)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. (without auto A/C)
Check A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C). Refer to ATC34
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or A/C auto amp, (with
auto A/C) and rear window defogger relay.
GW
PIIA9568E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR LAMP GROUND

K
Check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector M50 terminal 4 and ground.
4 (B) - Ground

L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace indicator lamp bulb.
NG
PIIA9569E
GW-35
http://vnx.su

Rear Window Defogger Indicator Lamp Check 2
EIS008AS
1. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SIGNAL

1.
2.
Turn both ignition switch and rear window defogger switch ON.
(Without auto A/C)
Check voltage between rear window defogger switch connector
3 (B/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
PIIA9565E
(With auto A/C)

Check voltage between A/C auto amp, connector M53 terminal
23 and ground.
23 (B/W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA9566E
GW-36
http://vnx.su

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or A/C auto amp, (with auto A/C) connector
(Without auto A/C)
Check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector M50 terminal 3 and rear window defogger relay connector B6
terminal 3.
3 (B/W) - 3 (B/W or BR)

D
E
PIIA9567E
(With auto A/C)

Check continuity between A/C auto amp, connector M53 terminal 23 and rear window defogger relay connector B6 terminal 5.
23 (B/W) - 5 (B/W or BR)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3. (without auto A/C)
Check A/C auto amp. (with auto A/C). Refer to ATC34
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between rear window defogger switch (without auto A/C) or A/C auto amp, (with
auto A/C) and rear window defogger relay.
GW
PIIA9573E
3. CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR LAMP GROUND

Check continuity between rear window defogger switch connector
4 (B) - Ground

L
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace indicator lamp bulb.
NG
PIIA9569E
GW-37
http://vnx.su

Filament Check
1.
EIS008AU
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe.Then press the foil against the wire with your finder.
SEL122R
2.
Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of

each filament.
SEL263
3.
4.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery

voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament.Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
SEL265
Filament Repair
EIS008AV
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
Conductive silver composition (Dupont NO.4817 or equivalent)

Ruler 30 cm(11.8in) long
Drawing pen
Heat gun
Alcohol
Cloth
GW-38
http://vnx.su

REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line.Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen.Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm(0.20in)] of the break.
PIIA0215E
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity.This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
G
SEL012D
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun.A minimum distance of 3cm(1.2in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
GW
K
SEL013D
GW-39
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
PFP:25401
EIS0045V
PIIA9620E
System Description
EIS0045W
from 40A fusible link (letter B , located in the fuse and fusible link box)
through circuit breaker terminal 1
through circuit breaker terminal 2
to power window relay terminal 3 and
to power window main switch terminal 5 (LHD models) or 3 (RHD models).

With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
through 10A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
to power window relay terminal 1

Ground is supplied
to power window relay terminal 2
through body grounds M27 and M70,
to power window main switch terminal 19
through body grounds M27 and M70.

When power and ground are supplied, the power window relay is energized and then power is supplied
through power window relay terminal 5
to power window main switch terminal 12,
to front power window switch (passenger side) terminal 5,
to rear power window switch LH and RH terminals 5.
GW-40
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

MANUAL OPERATION
Front door (Driver Side)
WINDOW UP
When the driver side switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
through power window main switch terminal 2 (LHD models) or 6 (RHD models).
to driver side power window motor terminal 1

Ground is supplied
Then, the motor raises the window until the switch is released.
WINDOW DOWN
When the driver's window switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied
through power window main switch terminal 1(LHD models) or 7 (RHD models)

Ground is supplied
Then, the motor lowers the window until the switch is released.
Front door (Passenger Side)

POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the passenger side switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
through power window main switch terminal 4 (LHD models) or 5 (RHD models)
to front power window switch (passenger side) terminal 3
to front power window motor (passenger side) terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the passenger side switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied

Ground is supplied
GW-41
http://vnx.su
GW
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the front power window switch (passenger side) is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
through front power window switch (passenger side) terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the front power window switch (passenger side) is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied
through front power window switch (passenger side) terminal 2

Ground is supplied
Rear door LH
WINDOW UP
When the rear LH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
to rear power window switch LH terminal 3
to rear power window motor LH terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the rear LH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied

Ground is supplied
GW-42
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the rear power window switch LH is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
through rear power window switch LH terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the rear power window switch LH is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied
through rear power window switch LH terminal 2

Ground is supplied
Rear door RH
WINDOW UP
When the rear RH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
to rear power window switch RH terminal 3
to rear power window motor RH terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the rear RH switch in the power window main switch is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied

Ground is supplied
GW-43
http://vnx.su
GW
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH OPERATION
WINDOW UP
When the rear power window switch RH is pressed in the up position,
Power is supplied
through rear power window switch RH terminal 1

Ground is supplied
WINDOW DOWN
When the rear power window switch RH is pressed in the down position,
Power is supplied
through rear power window switch RH terminal 2

Ground is supplied
AUTO OPERATION
The power window AUTO feature enables the driver to open or close the driver's window without holding the
window switch in the down or up position.
The AUTO feature operates on the driver's window.
POWER WINDOW LOCK

The power window lock is designed to lock operation of all windows except for driver's window.
When the lock switch is pressed to lock position, ground of the subswitches in the power window main switch
is disconnected.This prevents the power window motors from operating.
TIMER FUNCTION
With the timer function, driver power window can be operated for approximately 15 minutes after ignition
switch is turned OFF (positions other than ON). However, the timer will be cancel when a specific signal, such
as driver door close (door switch OFF) open (door switch ON), or ignition switch OFF ON, is input.
DRIVER WINDOW ANTIPINCH FUNCTION

During raising operation of driver power window, if power window main switch detects that foreign object is
pinched, power window lowers approximately 150 mm (5.91 in).
NOTE:
Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to power window, it
may lower.
Operation conditions
Driver door window is between fully-open and just before fully-closed position (when the limit switch is
ON).
During automatic operation when ignition switch is turned ON.
During automatic or manual operation when ignition switch is other than ON position (when the timer
operates).
GW-44
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Schematic / For LHD models
EIS0045X
GW
TIWA0448E
GW-45
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram WINDOW / For LHD models
EIS0045Y
TIWA0449E
GW-46
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

A
GW
TIWA0450E
GW-47
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
TIWA0451E
GW-48
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

A
GW
TIWA0452E
GW-49
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / For LHD models
EIS0045Z
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
G/B
L/OR
ITEM
CONDITION
When power window motor is
DOWN at operated.
Driver side power window

motor DOWN signal
Other than above.

UP at operated.
Driver side power window

motor UP signal
Other than above.

When passenger switch in
power window main switch is
DOWN at operated.
Passenger side power window

motor DOWN signal
Other than above.
R/W

UP at operated.

motor UP signal
Other than above.

5
6
W
R
Power sourse (fubible link)

Driver side door switch signal
G/R
Encoder power supply
W/B
Limit switch and encoder ground
10
G/OR
R/Y
Limit switch signal
Rear RH side power window

motor UP signal
11
R/L
14
W/R
G/W
Power window relay
Rear LH side power window

motor UP signal

motor DOWN signal
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
OFF (close)
Battery voltage
10
0
Driver side door window is

between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position
(ON).

between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF).
When rear RH switch in

UP at operated.
When rear RH switch in

DOWN at operated.
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0

(ON or START)
Battery voltage
When rear LH switch in

UP at operated.
Battery voltage
Other than above.
15
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Other than above.

12
Other than above.

motor DOWN signal
Battery voltage
ON (open)
Ignition switch position ON and

timer operating
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
When rear LH switch in

DOWN at operated.
Other than above.
GW-50
http://vnx.su
0
Battery voltage
0
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
16
G/Y
ITEM
Encoder pulse signal
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
When power window motor

operates.
C
OCC3383D
19
Ground
GW
GW-51
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Schematic / For RHD models
EIS00461
TIWA0453E
GW-52
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram WINDOW / For RHD models
EIS00462
GW
TIWA0454E
GW-53
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
TIWA0455E
GW-54
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

A
GW
TIWA0456E
GW-55
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
TIWA0457E
GW-56
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch / For RHD models
EIS00463
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
G/R
Driver side door switch signal
Power source (fusible link)
R/W
ITEM
CONDITION
Ignition switch position ON or
timer is operating
Encoder power supply
OFF (close)
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Other than above.
L/OR

DOWN at operated.

motor DOWN signal
Other than above.

6
G/B
Driver side power window motor

UP signal

UP at operated.
Other than above.
Driver side power window motor

DOWN signal
10
ON (open)

UP at operated.

motor UP signal

DOWN at operated.
Other than above.
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
E
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
GW
8
G/Y
Encoder pulse signal
When power window motor

operates.
J
OCC3383D
R/Y

motor UP signal
When rear RH switch is

UP at operated.
Other than above.
10
R/L

motor DOWN signal
When rear RH switch is

DOWN at operated.
Other than above.
12
13
W/R
Power window relay
G/W

motor UP signal
14
L
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
When rear LH switch is

UP at operated.
Battery voltage
When rear LH switch is

DOWN at operated.
Other than above.
GW-57
http://vnx.su

(ON or START)
Other than above.

motor DOWN signal
Battery voltage
0
Battery voltage
0
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

TERMINAL
15
WIRE
COLOR
G/OR
16
W/B
19
ITEM
CONDITION
VOLTAGE (V)
(Approx.)

between fully-open and just
before fully-closed position
(ON).

between just before fully-closed
position and fully-closed position
(OFF).
Limit switch and encoder ground
Ground
Limit switch signal
Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart
EIS00465
Make sure other systems using the signal of the following systems operate normally.
Symptom
None of the power window can be operated
using by any switch
Driver side power window does not operate.
Passenger side power window does not
operate.
Rear LH power window does not operate.
Rear RH power window does not operate.
Repair order
Refer to page
1. Power window relay power supply and ground check
GW-59
2. Power window main switch power supply and ground

circuit check
GW-60
1. Power window motor (driver side) circuit check
GW-61
1. Power window motor circuit check
GW-62
2. Power window switch check
GW-63
3. Power window (passenger side) circuit check
GW-64
GW-62
GW-63
3. Power window (rear LH) circuit check
GW-66
GW-62
GW-63
3. Power window (rear RH) circuit check
GW-68
1. Door window sliding part malfunction
Anti-pinch system does not operate normally

(driver side)
A foreign adheres to window glass or glass run rubber
Glass run rubber wear or deformation.
Sash is tilted to much, or no enough.
2. Limit switch adjusting
GW-81
3. Limit switch circuit check
GW-70
4. Encoder circuit check
GW-72
Auto operation does not operate but manual

operate normally
1. Encoder circuit check
GW-72
Power window retained power operation does

not operate properly
1. Door switch check
GW-77
GW-58
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Power Window Relay Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS008BB
1. CHECK FUSE

Check 40A fusible link (litter B , located in the fuse and fusible link box.)
NOTE:
Refer to GW-40, "Component Parts and Harness Connector Location" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown out, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to
PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW RELAY POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove power window relay.
Check voltage between power window relay connector M3 terminal 1, 3 and ground.
1 (G) - Ground
3 (W) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check power window relay power supply circuit for open
or short.
GW
PIIA9574E
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW RELAY GROUND

1.
2.

Check continuity between power window relay connector M3
2 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Check power window relay ground circuit for open or
short.
PIIA9575E
4. CHECK POWER WINDOW RELAY

Check continuity between power window relay terminal 3 and 5.
Terminal
3
Condition
Continuity

terminals 1 and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Replace power window relay.
PIIA2636E
GW-59
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Power Window Main Switch Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
EIS008BC

1.
2.

Check voltage between power window main switch connector
D7 terminal 5, 12 (LHD) or 3, 12 (RHD) and ground.
(LHD models)
5 (W) - Ground
12 (W/R) - Ground
(RHD models)
3 (W) - Ground
12 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between power window main switch power supply circuit.
PIIA9576E
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between power window main switch connector
D6 terminal 19 and ground.
19 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Power window main switch power supply and ground
circuit is OK.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between power window main
switch and ground.
PIIA9577E
GW-60
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Power Window Motor (Driver side) Circuit Check
EIS008BD
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH SIGNAL

1.
2.

Driver side switch in power window main switch operated, check voltage between
Power window main switch connector and ground.
(LHD)
Connector
C
(+)
1 (L)
D7
Condition
(-)
Ground
2 (G/B)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
PIIA9578E
(RHD)
Connector

(+)
Ground
7 (L)
Voltage (V)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
(-)
6 (G/B)
D7
G
Condition
GW
PIIA9579E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
GW-61
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and front power window motor (driver side) connector.
(LHD models)
D7 terminal 1, 2 and front power window motor (driver side) connector D5 terminal 1, 3.
1 (L) - 3 (L)
2 (G/B) - 1 (G/B)

PIIA9580E
(RHD models)
D7 terminal 6, 7 and front power window motor (driver side) connector D5 terminal 1, 3.
6 (G/B) - 1 (G/B)
7 (L) - 3 (L)

OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor (driver side).
NG
switch and front power window motor (driver side).
PIIA9581E
Power Window Motor Circuit Check
EIS008BE
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH SIGNAL

1.
2.

Power window switch operated, check voltage between power
window switch connector and ground.
Connector

(+)
D16
(Passenger
side)
D24
(Rear RH)
D34
(Rear LH)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
(-)
1 (G or G/Y)
Ground
2 (L)
PIIA9582E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check power window switch. Refer to GW-63 .
GW-62
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW MOTOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window switch and power window motor connector.
Check continuity between power window switch connector D16
(passenger side), D24 (rear RH), D34 (rear LH) terminal 1, 2
and power window motor connector D13 (passenger side), D 22
(rear RH), D32 (rear LH) terminal 1, 2.
1 (G or G/Y) - 1 (G or G/Y)
2 (L) - 2 (L)

OK or NG
OK
>> Replace malfunction power window motor.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between power window
switch and power window motor.
Power Window Switch Check
PIIA9583E
EIS008BF
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.

Check voltage between power window switch connector D16
(passenger side), D24 (rear RH), D34 (rear LH) terminal 5 and
ground.
5 (W/R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
GW
PIIA9584E
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window switch connector and power window relay.
Check continuity between power window switch connector D16
(passenger side), D24 (rear RH), D34 (rear LH) terminal 5 and
power window relay connector M3 terminal 5.
5 (W/R) - 5 (W/R)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between power window
switch and power window relay.
PIIA9585E
GW-63
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
3. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window switch connector.
Power window switch operated, check continuity between power
window switch connector D16 (passenger side), D24 (rear RH),
D34 (rear LH) terminal 1, 2 and 5.
Terminal
1
5
Condition
Continuity
UP
Yes
DOWN
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Power window switch is OK.
NG
>> Replace malfunction power window switch.
PIIA9586E
Power Window (Passenger side) Circuit Check
EIS008BG
1. CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Passenger side switch in power window main switch operated, check voltage between power window
main switch connector and ground.
(LHD models)
Connector
(+)
3 (L/OR)
D7
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
(-)
Ground
4 (R/W)
PIIA9587E
(RHD models)
Connector

(+)
4 (R/W)
D7
Ground
5 (L/OR)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
(-)
PIIA9588E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
GW-64
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and font power window switch (passenger side) connector.
(LHD models)
D6 terminal 3, 4 and front power window switch (passenger
side) connector D16 terminal 3, 4.
3 (L/OR) - 4 (L/OR)
4 (R/W) - 3 (R/W)

E
PIIA9589E
(RHD models)
D6 terminal 4, 5 and front power window switch (passenger
side) connector D16 terminal 3, 4.
4 (RW) - 3 (R/W)
5 (L/OR) - 4 (L/OR)

OK or NG
OK
NG
switch and front power window switch (passenger side).
GW
PIIA9590E
GW-65
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Power Window (Rear LH) Circuit Check
EIS008BH

1.
2.

Rear LH switch in power window main switch operated, check voltage between power window main
switch connector and ground.
(LHD models)
Connector
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(-)
14 (G/W)
D7
Condition
Ground
15 (G)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
PIIA9591E
(RHD models)
Connector

(+)
13 (G/W)
D7
Ground
14 (G)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
(-)
PIIA9592E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
GW-66
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and rear power window switch LH connector.
(LHD models)
D7 terminal 14, 15 and rear power window switch LH connector
D34 terminal 3, 4.
14 (G/W) - 3 (G/W)
15 (G) - 4 (G)

E
PIIA9593E
(RHD models)
D34 terminal 3, 4.
13 (G/W) - 3 (G/W)
14 (G) - 4 (G)

OK or NG
OK
NG
switch and rear power window switch LH.
GW
PIIA9594E
GW-67
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Power Window (Rear RH) Circuit Check
EIS008BI

1.
2.

Rear RH switch in power window main switch operated, check voltage between power window main
switch connector and ground.
(LHD models)
Connector
(+)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(-)
10 (R/Y)
D7
Condition
Ground
11 (R/L)
Closing
Battery voltage
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
PIIA9595E
(RHD models)
Connector

(+)
9 (R/Y)
D7
Ground
10 (R/L)
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Closing
Battery voltage
(-)
Opening
Closing
Opening
Battery voltage
PIIA9596E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
GW-68
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and rear power window switch LH connector.
(LHD models)
D7 terminal 10, 11 and rear power window switch RH connector
D24 terminal 3, 4.
10 (R/Y) - 3 (R/Y)
11 (R/L) - 4 (R/L)

E
PIIA9597E
(RHD models)
D34 terminal 3, 4.
9 (R/Y) - 3 (R/Y)
10 (R/L) - 4 (R/L)

OK or NG
OK
NG
switch and rear power window switch RH.
GW
PIIA9598E
GW-69
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Limit Switch Circuit Check
EIS008BJ
1. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between power window main switch connector and ground.
(LHD models)
Connector
D7
(+)
9 (G/OR)
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Between fully-open and
Just before fully-closed
Position (ON)

Between just before fullyClosed position and fullyClosed position (OFF)
5
PIIA9599E
(RHD models)
Connector
D7
(+)
15 (G/OR)
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)

Between fully-open and Just
before fully-closed Position
(ON)

Between just before fullyClosed position and fullyClosed position (OFF)
5
PIIA9600E
OK or NG
OK
>> Limit switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK LIMIT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window motor (driver
side) connector D5 terminal 8 and ground.
8 (W/B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PIIA9601E
GW-70
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.

(LHD models)
D7 terminal 8 and front power window motor (driver side) connector D5 terminal 8.
8 (W/B) - 8 (W/B)
PIIA9602E
(RHD models)
16 (W/B) - 8 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA9603E
GW

1.
2.

(LHD models)
9 (G/OR) - Ground
: Approx. 5V
L
PIIA9599E
(RHD models)
15 (G/OR) - Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PIIA9600E
GW-71
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.
3.

(LHD models)
9 (G/OR) - 4 (G/OR)
PIIA9604E
(RHD models)
15 (G/OR) - 4 (G/OR)
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Replace power window motor (driver side).
PIIA9605E
Encoder Circuit Check
EIS008BK
1. CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side)
connector D5 terminal 5 and ground.
5 (G/R) - Ground
: Approx. 10V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PIIA9606E
GW-72
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.
3.

(LHD models)
7 (G/R) - 5 (G/R)

D
E
PIIA9607E
(RHD models)
1 (G/R) - 5 (G/R)
OK or NG
OK
NG
GW
PIIA9608E
3. CHECK ENCODER GROUND

1.
2.

Check continuity between front power window motor (driver
side) connector D5 terminal 8 and ground.
8 (W/B) - Ground

L
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
PIIA9601E
GW-73
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
4. CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.

(LHD models)
8 (W/B) - 8 (W/B)
PIIA9602E
(RHD models)
16 (W/B) - 8 (W/B)
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA9603E
GW-74
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
5. CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
Connect front power window motor (driver side) connector.

Check the signal between power window main switch connector and ground with oscilloscope.
(LHD models)
Terminal
(Wire color)
Connector
(+)
Condition
Signal
(Reference value)
(-)
D7
16 (G/Y)
Ground
opening
E
PIIA9609E
OCC3383D
(RHD models)
Connector
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
Condition
Signal
(Reference value)
(-)
D7
8 (G/Y)
Ground
opening
GW
PIIA9610E
OCC3383D
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 6.
GW-75
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
6. CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and front power window motor (driver side) connector.
(LHD models)
16 (G/Y) - 6 (G/Y)
PIIA9611E
(RHD models)
8 (G/Y) - 6 (G/Y)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace front power window motor (driver side).
NG
PIIA9612E
GW-76
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Door Switch Check
EIS008BL
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between power window main switch connector and ground.
B
(LHD models)
Connector
D7
(+)
6 (R)
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OPEN
CLOSE
Battery voltage
E
PIIA9613E
(RHD models)
F
Connector
D7
(+)
2 (R)
(-)
Ground
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
OPEN
CLOSE
Battery voltage
PIIA9614E
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 2.
GW
GW-77
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
2. CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect power window main switch and front door switch (driver side) connector.
(LHD models)
D7 terminal 6 and front door switch (driver side) connector B16
terminal 2.
6 (R) - 2 (R)
PIIA9615E
(RHD models)
D7 terminal 2 and front door switch (driver side) connector B16
terminal 2.
2 (R) - 2 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3
NG
switch and front door switch (driver side).
PIIA9616E
3. CHECK DOOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) connector
B16 terminal 3 and ground.
3 (B) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness between front door switch
(driver side) and ground.
PIIA9617E
4. CHECK DOOR SWITCH

Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) terminal 2
and 3.
Terminal
2
Door switch
Continuity
Pushed
No
Released
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PIIA9618E
GW-78
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

1.
2.
Connect power window main switch connector.

(LHD models)
6 (R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
C
PIIA9613E
(RHD models)
2 (R) - Ground
: Battery voltage
G
OK or NG
OK
NG
PIIA9614E
GW
GW-79
http://vnx.su
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

PFP:80300
EIS00467
SIIA0165E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove front door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .

NOTE:
If sealing screen is reused, cut the butyl-tape so that a part of butyl-tape remains on the sealing screen.
Operate power window main switch to raise or lower the door
window until the carrier plate mounting bolts appear.
Remove carrier plate mounting bolts.
PIIA0551E
GW-80
http://vnx.su

5.
While holding door window, raise it at the rear end to pull glass
out of the sash toward the outside of door.
C
OCC3422D
6.
7.
Disconnect power window motor connector.

Remove regulator assembly and guide rail mounting bolts
through the access hole.
G
PIIA0552E
INSTALLATION
GW
Check regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is

detected, replace or grease it.
Wire wear
Regulator deformation
Grease condition for each sliding part

The arrows in the figure show body grease application points of the
body grease.
L
OCC3424D

Setting of Limit Switch (Driver side)
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
Removal and installation of regulator
Removal and installation of motor from the regulator
Operate regulators as a unit
Removal and installation of glass
Removal and installation of glass run
GW-81
http://vnx.su

Reset Operation
After installing each component to the vehicle, follow the steps
below.
1. Raise glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding reset switch, lower glass to the bottom position.
3. Release reset switch, and check that reset switch returns to the
original position. Then raise glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate glass automatically to raise glass to the top
position.
PIIA0553E
FITTING INSPECTION
Check that glass is securely fit into glass run groove.

While raising and lowering the window, check for abnormal operation.
Lower the glass slightly [approx. 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash
is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator mounting bolts,
guide rail mounting bolts, and glass & carrier plate mounting bolts to correct the glass position.
GW-82
http://vnx.su
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR

PFP:82300
A
EIS00468
GW
SIIA0136E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove door outside molding. Refer to EI-22, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove rear door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .
NOTE:
If sealing screen is reused, cut the butyl-tape so that a part of butyl-tape remains on the sealing screen.
Operating power window switch, raise or lower the door window
until the carrier plate mounting bolts appear.
Remove carrier plate mounting bolts, and place glass on the
door inner.
PIIA0554E
GW-83
http://vnx.su

6.
7.
Using a slotted screwdriver or similar tool, remove clip on the

corner inner cover. Slide upper hook to remove, and remove the
cover.
Slide the corner inner cover sash cover forward to remove.
SIIA0132E
8.
Remove corner outer cover mounting bolts. Disconnect upper

hook, and remove the cover.
SIIA0140E
9.
Remove mounting nuts on upper portion of rear lower sash.
SIIA0133E
10. Remove mounting bolts from lower portion of rear lower sash.
11. Rotate rear lower sash, and remove door window from glass
run.
12. Pull out the door window toward the outside of the door to
remove.
13. Remove glass run from rear lower sash.
14. Remove rear lower sash.
SIIA0134E
15. Disconnect power window motor connector.
GW-84
http://vnx.su

16. Remove regulator assembly and the guide rail mounting bolts
through the access hole.
C
PIIA0556E
INSTALLATION
Check regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is

detected, replace or grease it.
Gear wear
Regulator deformation
Spring damage
Grease condition for each sliding part

The arrows in the figure show body grease application points of the
grease Dow Corning Moly Coat SK 623 or equivalent.
H
OCC3565D
FITTING INSPECTION
Check that glass is securely fit into glass run groove.

While raising and lowering the window, check for abnormal operation.
Lower the glass slightly [approx. 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the clearance to the sash
is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen the regulator mounting bolts,
guide rail mounting bolts, and glass & carrier plate mounting bolts to correct the glass position.
GW
GW-85
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
DOOR MIRROR
Precautions to Handle Retractable Power Door Mirrors
PFP:96301
EIS004JO
Do not manually operate retractable power door mirrors. If mirror

is operated manually, be sure to use the retracting switch to
move mirror fully to the opposite direction until it stops. In this
case, a loud click sound is heard, but it is not abnormal. (If mirror
body is manually moved to the neutral position, door mirror will
have some disturbing symptoms during driving, including vibration, rough retracting movement, or sometimes no retracting.)
CAUTION:
Tilting mirror body forward with excessive force may damage it.
PIIA0513E
When operating retracting switch to move mirror from the neutral position to the fully-closed (backward limit) position, at the
beginning of the movement a faint click sound is heard, but it is not abnormal.
RH and LH retractable power door mirror bodies have different mounting angles in the neutral position.
This is why the RH mirror body delays slightly when operated with the retracting switch.
NOTE:
When the retractable power door mirror body is in the neutral
position, if retracting switch is operated to the opening direction while pressing it forward, mirror body is moved to the forward limit position, but it is not abnormal. In this case, be sure
to operate retracting switch to move mirror to the fully-closed
(backward limit) position.
When the retracting switch is operated continuously 5 times
or more, the retractable power door mirror may be inactivated
to prevent overheating. In this case, wait for approximately 5
minutes to recover.
PIIA0514E
GW-86
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram MIRROR / For LHD models
EIS004JP
GW
TIWA0458E
GW-87
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
TIWA0459E
GW-88
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
Wiring Diagram MIRROR / For RHD models
EIS004JQ
GW
TIWA0460E
GW-89
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
TIWA0461E
GW-90
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
EIS004JR
F
SIIA0186E
1.
Door mirror
2.
Connector
3.
Corner cover
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove corner cover.
Remove door mirror harness connector.
Remove door mirror mounting nuts, and remove door mirror assembly.
GW
INSTALLATION
GW-91
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
EIS004JS
SIIA0187E
1.
Mirror body
2.
Power unit
3.
Bracket
6.
Base
4.
Electric retracting unit
5.
Housing
7.
Packing
8.
Connector
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Pull out all the terminals from the connector.

NOTE:
Before pulling out the terminal, note the connector terminal arrangement.
Turn the mirror glass surface upward.
Apply a protective tape to the housing.
Insert a narrow slotted screwdriver in the concave gap between mirror glass and power unit to push up
tabs (2 locations) on mirror holder to disengage lower part of mirror holder, and remove mirror body
assembly.
NOTE:
When pushing up the tabs, do not forcefully push up only 1 concave but try to push up using 2 concave
positions.
Remove packing.
Remove base.
Remove electric retracting unit.
Remove power unit, and disconnect the connector.
Separate the electric retracting unit from the bracket.
GW-92
http://vnx.su
DOOR MIRROR
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Install bracket to the electric retracting unit.

Connect power unit connector. Install electric retracting unit (bracket).
Install electric retracting unit and base to the housing.
Place power unit and mirror body assembly in a horizontal position.
Engage upper tabs of mirror glass with power unit. Then, press lower part of mirror glass down until the
lower part snaps to allow engagement of lower tabs.
NOTE:
After installation, visually check that the lower tabs (2) are securely engaged when viewed from the bottom of mirror surface.
Install the packing to the base.
Insert the harness terminal into the connector.
NOTE:
Make sure to insert the harness terminal into the correct connector. Do not confuse the locations.
GW
GW-93
http://vnx.su
INSIDE MIRROR
INSIDE MIRROR
PFP:96321
EIS008O4
REMOVAL
Remove the screws securing inside mirror assembly and mirror base
as shown in the figure.
SIIA1024E
INSTALLATION
GW-94
http://vnx.su
ROOF
I BODY
SECTION
RF
ROOF
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SUNROOF/HEADLINER ....................................... 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
SUNROOF ................................................................. 10
RESUMING OPERATION ................................... 10
Wiring Diagram SROOF ................................ 11
Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Switch... 13
Wind Deflector Inspection ....................................... 13
Glass Lid Weatherstrip Inspection .......................... 13
Link and Wire Assembly Inspection ........................ 13
Fitting Adjustment ................................................... 14
LONGITUDINAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT .................................................... 14
SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT .............. 14
SUNROOF UNIT ................................................. 16
GLASS LID .......................................................... 17
SUNSHADE ........................................................ 17
WIND DEFLECTOR ............................................ 18
SUNROOF MOTOR ............................................ 18
RF
RF-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS0044P
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS0044Q
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts, which

Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain
If sunroof motor operation sound is noted but sunroof does not operate, replace motor assembly with
glass lid fully closed.
If sunroof (glass lid and motor) does not operate when using sunroof switch then remove the front cover of
the luggage compartment, and rotate motor gear box drive shaft with the emergency handle (in the tool
box).
RF-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EIS008C7
Tool name
Description
C
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
RF
RF-3
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS008C8
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
customer's comments; refer to RF-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
defining the noise.







RF-4
http://vnx.su

1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.


1.
2.
G
H
RF
temporarily.
noise.
K
Refer to RF-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

CAUTION:
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 6085 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
RF-5
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

EIS008C9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas).Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harness.
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
RF-6
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
SUNROOF/HEADLINER
Noises in the sunroof/headliner area can often be traced to one of the following:
3. Front or rear windshield touching headliner and squeaking
SEATS
G
noise.
H
3. Rear seat back lock and bracket
RF
J
UNDERHOOD
RF-7
http://vnx.su

EIS008CA
PIIB0723E
RF-8
http://vnx.su

A
RF
SBT844
RF-9
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
SUNROOF
System Description
PFP:91210
EIS000MK
Operating sunroof switch allows glass lid slide OPEN/CLOSE, and tilt UP/DOWN.
When sunroof slide switch is pressed firmly toward the OPEN side, glass lid automatically opens and
automatic operation is stopped at a point 180 mm (7.09 in)to the fully open position.
NOTE:
After the emergency handle is used to rotate the motor drive shaft, sunroof switch operation may not correspond to actual glass lid movement. When this happens, conduct resuming operation to restore normal
operation.
RESUMING OPERATION
If actual glass lid operation does not correspond to expected operation, operate sunroof switch to slide glass lid toward area A in the figure. This should result in resumption of normal operation.
CAUTION:
Before normal operation is resumed, expected sunroof switch
operation and actual glass lid movement may not correspond.
Make sure that neither head nor hands protrude from sunroof
and conduct resuming operation.
SIIA0139E
EIS000ML
SIIA0321E
RF-10
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram SROOF
EIS000MM
RF
TIWA0483E
RF-11
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
TIWA0484E
RF-12
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
Terminal and Reference Value for Sunroof Switch
EIS000MN
A
VOLTAGE(V)
(Approx)
TERMINAL
WIRE
COLOR
Sunroof OPEN signal
Ground
Sunroof CLOSE signal
Sunroof switch CLOSE operation
Battery voltage
Sunroof TILT DOWN signal
Sunroof switch TILT DOWN operation
Battery voltage
Sunroof AUTO OPEN signal
Sunroof switch AUTO OPEN operation
Battery voltage
Sunroof TILT UP signal
Sunroof switch TILT UP operation
Battery voltage
ITEM
CONDITION
Sunroof switch OPEN operation
Battery voltage
Wind Deflector Inspection

1.
2.
3.
D
EIS000MO
Open glass lid.

Visually confirm that the mounting condition is correct.
Confirm wind deflector connection is properly greased. If necessary, apply body grease.
H
SIIA0115E
4.
Confirm wind deflector can be properly raised by hand. If excess

wear or damage is detected, remove and visually check it. If it is
damaged, replace it with a new one. If no damage is found, reinstall it properly.
RF
SIIA0114E
Glass Lid Weatherstrip Inspection
If there is water leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and flush with water to determine whether it is from
damaged parts or a gap.
1. Remove glass lid.
2. Visually check weatherstrip for damage, deterioration, or deformation. If excess wear or damage is
detected, replace glass lid.
Link and Wire Assembly Inspection

1.
2.
EIS000MP
EIS000MQ
If the link coating peels off to show the base material and an abnormal noise is heard, replace it.
Visually confirm the wire and rail groove are properly greased. If necessary, apply body grease.
RF-13
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
Fitting Adjustment
EIS000MR
PIIA3748E
LONGITUDINAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tilt up glass lid and then remove side trim.

After loosening glass lid mounting nuts, tilt down glass lid.
Adjust glass lid according to sections AA, BB, CC as shown in the figure.
After adjusting glass lid, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Tilt glass lid 4 to 5 times to check that it smoothly goes up and down.
SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT

1.
2.
Adjust surface height of glass lid and roof panel to 0 1.5 mm

(00.059 in) by altering the number of shims between glass lid
and link assembly. (Standard: 2, max: 4)
After fitting adjustment, use a hose to flush the entire surface of
the roof with water to check for leaks.
SIIA0119E
RF-14
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
EIS000MS
RF
SIIA0120E
RF-15
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
SUNROOF UNIT
Removal
CAUTION:
Removal and installation of sunroof unit require 2 workers.
When taking sunroof unit out, use shop cloths to protect seats and trim from damage.
After installing sunroof unit and glass lid, be sure to carry out the leak test to confirm there is no
more leakage.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to EI-39, "HEADLINING"
2. Disconnect drain hoses.
3. Disconnect interior lamp harness.
4. Remove both sunroof unit-side and body-side front bracket
mounting bolts.
SIIA0130E
5.
Remove both sunroof unit-side and body-side center and rear

bracket mounting bolts.
SIIA0184E
6.
Disconnect connector from sunroof motor and then remove sunroof motor bracket mounting bolt.
SIIA0121E
7.
8.
Remove mounting bolts from the front end and side rails, then
remove sunroof unit from the roof panel.
Take out the sunroof unit from the passenger compartment while
being careful not to damage the seats and trim.
SIIA0183E
RF-16
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
Installation
1.
2.
After bringing sunroof unit into the passenger compartment,

tighten mounting nuts on the side rails start from the one at the
front reference point.
Tighten mounting nuts of the front end.
SIIA0122E
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Align the front bracket to lower face of the rail and roof side
mounting face. Tighten bolts of the sunroof unit side and then
tighten bolts of the roof side.
Align the center and rear brackets to lower face of the rail and
roof side mounting face. Tighten bolts of the sunroof unit side
and then tighten bolts of the roof side.
NOTE:
Install the sunroof bracket evenly so that the roof surface has no
distortion.
Tighten bolts of sunroof motor bracket.
Connect the sunroof motor harness connector.
Connect the interior lamp harness connector.
SIIA0131E
GLASS LID
Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
RF
Tilt up glass lid.

Remove side trim.
Confirm the number of shims between glass lid and link.
NOTE:
Number of shims. Standard: 2, max: 4.
Remove mounting nut and then remove glass lid.
M
SIIA0124E
Installation
NOTE:
Tighten nuts on glass lid diagonally.
After installation, adjust the fit.
SUNSHADE
Removal and installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove glass lid.

Remove rear drain.
Move link assembly to the fully open position.
Loosen the mounting screws of the front LH shade slider.
RF-17
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
5.
6.
7.
8.
As shown in the figure, slide sunshade and then remove it from

the aluminum rail.
Swivel sunshade toward the left, then remove RH shade from
the aluminum rail.
Slide sunshade forward, then remove rear shade sliders as well.
SIIA0126E
WIND DEFLECTOR
Removal and installation
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove deflector arm mounting screws.

Using a pointed tool, pull up the tabs on the bushing.
NOTE:
Do not reuse the bushing after its tabs are pulled up.
Press and pull off the shaft.
SIIA0127E
SUNROOF MOTOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove headlining.
Remove motor mounting screw and mounting nut.
Remove the harness connector from sunroof motor, then
remove the sunroof motor.
NOTE:
Remove the sunroof motor when the sunroof is in the fullyclosed position.
Do not rotate the removed sunroof motor as a single unit.

SIIA0128E
Installation
NOTE:
Move sunroof motor laterally little by little until the gear is completely engaged onto the wire on sunroof
unit and the mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure sunroof motor with screws and nuts.
Before installing sunroof motor, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical and fully
closed position.
RF-18
http://vnx.su
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR
I BODY
SECTION
EI
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions .............................................................. 3
PREPARATION ........................................................... 4
Work Flow ................................................................ 5
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 6
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 6
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 7
DOORS ................................................................. 7
TRUNK .................................................................. 8
SEATS ................................................................... 8
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 8
CLIP AND FASTENER ..............................................11
Clip and Fastener ....................................................11
FRONT BUMPER ..................................................... 14
REMOVAL ........................................................... 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 16
REAR BUMPER ....................................................... 17
REMOVAL ........................................................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
FRONT GRILLE ........................................................ 19
REMOVAL ........................................................... 19
INSTALLATION ................................................... 19
COWL TOP ............................................................... 20

REMOVAL ........................................................... 20
INSTALLATION ................................................... 20
FENDER PROTECTOR ............................................ 21
REMOVAL ........................................................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING ..................................... 22
REMOVAL ........................................................... 22
INSTALLATION ................................................... 23
SIDE GUARD MOLDING .......................................... 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING ...................... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
SIDE SILL PROTECTOR .......................................... 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
ROOF RAIL ............................................................... 27
Removal and Installation (for Hyper Roof Rail) ...... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 27
Removal and Installation (for Roof Rail) ................. 28
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 29
ROOF SPOILER ....................................................... 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER ...................................... 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
EI-1
http://vnx.su
EI
DOOR FINISHER ...................................................... 32

FRONT AND REAR ............................................. 32
BACK DOOR TRIM ................................................... 34
REMOVAL ........................................................... 34
INSTALLATION .................................................... 34
BODY SIDE TRIM ..................................................... 35
CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH ................. 36
CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH .................. 36
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER ................. 36
REAR PILLAR FINISHER ................................... 36
DASHBOARD SIDE FINISHER ........................... 36
BODY SIDE WELT .............................................. 36
FLOOR TRIM .............................................................38

REMOVAL ............................................................38
INSTALLATION ....................................................38
HEADLINING .............................................................39
REMOVAL ............................................................39
INSTALLATION ....................................................40
EI-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS0047M
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS001NX
When removing or disassembling any part, be careful not to damage or deform it. Protect parts, which G

H

EI

J
Oil stain:
Dissolve a synthetic detergent in warm water (density of 2 to 3% or less), dip the cloth, then clean off the stain K

L
EI-3
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EIS008NS
Tool name
Description
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
EI-4
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
PFP:00000
A
EIS008NT
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag- H
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer's comments; refer to EI-9, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
EI
J
K
defining the noise.

Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surL
faces=higher pitch noise/softer surfaces=lower pitch noises/edge to surface=chirping

M





EI-5
http://vnx.su

1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.


1.
2.
temporarily.
feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
Refer to EI-7, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

CAUTION:
NOTE:
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 6085 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)/73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) think, 50
50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
EI-6
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
The following materials, not available through NISSAN Parts Department, can also be used to repair squeaks
and rattles.
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
EIS008NU
INSTRUMENT PANEL
G
H
EI
J
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate wiring harK
ness.
CAUTION:
L
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
EI-7
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
2. Sun-visor shaft shaking in the holder
SEATS
noise.
UNDERHOOD
Causes of transmitted under-hood noise include:
EI-8
http://vnx.su

EIS008NV
EI
PIIB0723E
EI-9
http://vnx.su
SBT844
EI-10
http://vnx.su
CLIP AND FASTENER

CLIP AND FASTENER
Clip and Fastener
PFP:76906
A
EIS000MW
EI
SIIA0315E
EI-11
http://vnx.su
CLIP AND FASTENER
SIIA0316E
EI-12
http://vnx.su
CLIP AND FASTENER

A
EI
SIIA0317E
EI-13
http://vnx.su
FRONT BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER
PFP:F2022
EIS0098W
CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Do not apply strong force to it, and be careful to prevent contact with
oil.
EI-14
http://vnx.su
FRONT BUMPER
A
EI
PIIA0143E
1.
Front bumper fascia
2.
Energy shock absorber
4.
Bumper upper retainer
5.
Bumper stay
EI-15
http://vnx.su
3.
Bumper reinforcement
FRONT BUMPER
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove front grille. Refer to EI-19, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove mounting screws and clips on RH/LH front fender protector.
Remove front bumper fascia mounting screws from RH/LH front fender.
Remove clips from the top surface of front bumper and bolts from the lower surface.
Press down tabs A (1 each on left/right sides) on bumper fascia to remove. Then disengage tabs B (1
each on left/right sides) on the fender and remove bumper fascia assembly.
CAUTION:
When removing bumper fascia, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping.
Remove energy shock absorber.
Remove mounting nuts from bumper reinforcement assembly.
Remove mounting nuts from bumper upper retainer assembly.
Remove mounting bolts from bumper stay assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation, adjust the clearance.
EI-16
http://vnx.su
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER
PFP:H5022
A
EIS000MY
CAUTION:
Bumper fascia is made of resin. Do not apply strong force to it, and be careful to prevent contact with
oil.
EI
PIIB0590E
1.
Rear bumper fascia
2.
Reflector
3.
Chipping protector
4.
Bumper stay
5.
Rear bumper energy absorber
6.
Rear bumper protector
7.
Rear bumper finisher
8.
Rear fog lamp
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove mounting nuts on rear bumper protector.

Remove RH/LH chipping protector.
Remove mounting screws on RH/LH rear fender protector.
EI-17
http://vnx.su
REAR BUMPER
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove mounting bolts and clips on rear bumper fascia.

Spread bumper fascia toward the outside and remove it from the side clips.
Remove rear fog lamp connectors. Pull bumper fascia assembly straight rearward to remove.
CAUTION:
When removing bumper fascia, 2 workers are required so as to prevent it from dropping.
Remove mounting bolts on bumper stay.
Remove rear bumper finisher, or rear fog lamps, and the reflectors from bumper.
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
After installation, adjust the clearance.
EI-18
http://vnx.su
FRONT GRILLE
FRONT GRILLE
PFP:62310
A
EIS000MZ
SIIA0197E
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Apply protection tape around outer circumference of front grille (bumper fascia side).
1. Remove installation clips from top edge of grille.
2. Remove clips from the lower surface of grille, and lift upwards to remove.
EI
INSTALLATION
EI-19
http://vnx.su
COWL TOP
COWL TOP
PFP:66100
EIS000N0
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove wiper arms (left and right). Refer to WW-8, "Removal

and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment for Wiper Arms
Stop Location" .
Remove cowl top seal rubber.
Remove cowl top rubber mounting clips. Then remove cowl top
cover.
SIIA0198E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing cowl top cover, make sure that blind clips are securely fitted in panel holes on
body, and then press them in.
Refer to WW-8, "Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment for Wiper Arms Stop
Location" in WW section for wiper arm installation.
EI-20
http://vnx.su
FENDER PROTECTOR
FENDER PROTECTOR
PFP:63840
A
EIS000N1
G
SIIA0200E
1.
Front fender
2.
Clip
3.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Fender protector
Remove screws and clips of fender protector.

Remove fender protector (front/rear).
EI
INSTALLATION
EI-21
http://vnx.su
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING

PFP:82820
EIS0015E
SIIA0201E
REMOVAL
Front door outside molding
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Roll the front door window all the way up.

Remove corner cover and door mirror. Refer to GW-91, "Removal and Installation" .
Disengage front door outside molding pawl.
Reaching from inner side of door, use a clip clamp tool to disengage front door outside molding from the pawl.
NOTE:
Insert clip clamp tool into the door tab, then disengage by pressing in the direction of arrow. (See figure on the right.)
SIIA0202E
Rear door outside molding

1.
2.
3.
4.
Roll the rear door window all the way up.

Remove rear door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove corner inner cover and corner outer cover. Refer to GW-83, "Removal and Installation" .
Disengage rear door outside mold pawl.
EI-22
http://vnx.su

5.
Reaching from inner side of door, use a clip clamp tool to disengage rear door outside molding from the pawl.
NOTE:
Insert clip clamp tool into the door pawl, then disengage by
pressing in the direction of arrow. (See figure on the right.)
C
SIIA0202E
INSTALLATION
To install, press molding into the outer panel flange and engage the pawls.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to apply excessive force when removing because it is easy to deform parts.
After removal, visually inspect molding, and if it is deformed, replace it with new molding.
EI
EI-23
http://vnx.su
SIDE GUARD MOLDING

SIDE GUARD MOLDING
PFP:76840
EIS000N3
SIIA0204E
1.
Side guard molding (front door)
2.
Side guard molding (rear door)
REMOVAL
Side guard molding (front/rear)
1.
2.
Apply masking tape around outer circumference of side guard molding.

Remove double-faced adhesive tapes with (wide) resin spatula. Disengage clips and remove side guard
molding.
INSTALLATION
1. Remove double-faced adhesive tape remaining on vehicle.
2. Clean contact surface of vehicle (to side guard molding), and install side guard molding to vehicle.
NOTE:
To re-use side guard molding, follow above steps 1 and 2 as well, clean surface after removing double-faced
adhesive tape, apply new double-faced adhesive tape as shown in the figure, then install side guard molding
to vehicle.
CAUTION:
Do not let air between contact surfaces when installing.
To secure contact, do not wash vehicle within 24 hours after installation.
EI-24
http://vnx.su
DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING

DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING
PFP:82877
A
EIS000N4
G
SIIA0206E
1.
Door outside lower molding (front door)
2.
Door outside lower molding (rear door)
REMOVAL
Door outside molding (front/rear)
1.
2.
Remove clips of door outside molding.

Remove door outside molding (front/rear).
EI
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing door outside molding, make sure that blind clips are securely fitted in panel hole on
body and then press them in.
EI-25
http://vnx.su
SIDE SILL PROTECTOR

SIDE SILL PROTECTOR
PFP:86856
EIS000N5
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove screw and clip of side sill protector.

Remove side sill protector.
SIIA0207E
INSTALLATION
EI-26
http://vnx.su
ROOF RAIL
ROOF RAIL
Removal and Installation (for Hyper Roof Rail)
PFP:73820
A
EIS000N6
EI
PIIA6946E
1.
Roof rail
2.
Rear spoiler
3.
Hyper roof rail rear cap
4.
Rear spoiler bracket
5.
Hyper roof rail center bracket (rear)
6.
Hyper roof rail center bracket (front)
7.
Hyper roof rail bracket (rear)
8.
Hyper roof rail bracket (front)
9.
Hyper roof rail front cap
10. Side rail
11. Driving lamp cap (rear)
13. Driving lamp cap (front)
14. Driving lamp bracket
12. Driving lamp assembly
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the body.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Remove driving lamp cap (front).

Remove driving lamp mounting nuts.
Pull driving lamp upward to disconnect clips of driving lamp from roof panel.
Disconnect driving lamp harness connector.
Remove driving lamp assembly.
Remove hyper roof rail caps (front and rear).
Remove side rail mounting bolts and nuts, then remove side rail.
Remove rear spoiler mounting bolts, then remove rear spoiler.
Remove hyper roof rail mounting nuts, then remove hyper roof rail assembly.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-39, "HEADLINING" .
Remove driving lamp bracket, hyper roof rail bracket (front and rear) and roof spoiler bracket.
INSTALLATION
EI-27
http://vnx.su
ROOF RAIL
Removal and Installation (for Roof Rail)
EIS008OQ
SIIA0265E
1.
Roof rail
2.
Front cap
3.
Rear cap
4.
Roof rail cover
5.
Roof rail bracket (front)
6.
Roof rail bracket (rear)
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-35, "BODY SIDE TRIM" .

Remove roof rail mounting nuts and roof rail covers (or roof
spoiler) mounting nuts.
SIIA0214E
EI-28
http://vnx.su
ROOF RAIL
3.
Remove roof rail bracket mounting nuts (front and rear).

A
C
SIIA0215E
4.
5.
Remove roof rail covers (or roof spoiler). For removal of roof spoiler, refer to EI-30, "ROOF SPOILER" .
Remove roof rail mounting clips, and remove roof rails.
INSTALLATION

F
EI
EI-29
http://vnx.su
ROOF SPOILER
ROOF SPOILER
PFP:96030
EIS000N7
SIIA0216E
1.
Cover (left)
2.
Cover (right)
3.
Roof spoiler
CAUTION:
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-39, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove covers (left and right).
Remove roof spoiler mounting nuts (upper and lower roof surfaces).
Pull roof spoiler upwards. Remove tabs (1 each on left/right) which are engaged with the roof rails.
Remove roof spoiler.
INSTALLATION
EI-30
http://vnx.su
LICENSE LAMP FINISHER

LICENSE LAMP FINISHER
PFP:84810
A
EIS001NV
G
SIIA0220E
1.
License lamp finisher
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove back door finisher. Refer to EI-34, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove license plate lamp. Refer to LT-107, "LICENSE PLATE LAMP" .
Remove license lamp finisher mounting nuts and clips and then remove finisher.
EI
INSTALLATION
EI-31
http://vnx.su
DOOR FINISHER
DOOR FINISHER
PFP:80900
EIS000N9
SIIA0203E
1.
Front door finisher
2.
Inside handle escutcheon
3.
Front door armrest
4.
Rear door finisher
5.
Inside handle escutcheon
6.
Rear door armrest
FRONT AND REAR

Removal
1.
Insert a screwdriver, wrapped with a cloth, into door trim cutout

on the inside handle escutcheon. Disengage the pawls on the
front, upper side (2) and lower side (2). Slide rearwards and disengage the rear-side pawls to remove.
SIIA0391E
EI-32
http://vnx.su
DOOR FINISHER
2.
Insert a screwdriver, wrapped with a cloth, into the cutout on the

front edge of power window switch finisher. Unfasten the metal
clip on the front side.
C
SIIA0208J
3.
4.
Insert the screwdriver into the gap and remove metal clips, moving from front to rear.
Disconnect and remove power window switch connector.
G
SIIA0211J
5.
6.
7.
Remove door finisher mounting screw.

Insert a screwdriver, wrapped with a cloth, into the cutout on the
lower part of door finisher. Unfasten the clips.
Pull the door finisher upwards to remove.
EI
K
SIIA0213J
Installation

CAUTION:
Insert a clip driver or clip clamp remover into the part

shown by the arrow (between the body side panel and the
clips). Remove finisher.
To install the finisher, confirm clips are surely aligned with

the holes on the body side panel, then press in.
SIIA0810E
EI-33
http://vnx.su
BACK DOOR TRIM

BACK DOOR TRIM
PFP:90900
EIS000NA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove clips of back door trim.

Remove back door trim.
SIIA0221E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Insert a clip driver or clip clamp remover into the part

shown by the arrow (between the clips and the body side
panel). Remove clips.
When installing, confirm clips are surely aligned with the

holes on the body side panel, then press in.
PIIA0527E
EI-34
http://vnx.su
BODY SIDE TRIM

BODY SIDE TRIM
PFP:76913
A
EIS000NB
CAUTION:
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from garnishes.
EI
PIIB0591E
1.
Front pillar garnish
2.
Dashboard side finisher
3.
Front body side welt
4.
Front kick panel
5.
Center pillar upper garnish
6.
Center pillar lower garnish
7.
Rear body side welt
8.
Rear kick panel
9.
Rear pillar finisher
10. Luggage side lower finisher
11. Front luggage floorboard
13. Luggage floor rear spacer (center)
14. Luggage floor rear spacer (left)
15. Luggage floorboard (right)
16. Rear luggage floorboard
17. Luggage floorboard (left)
18. Luggage rear plate
19. Back door weather strip
20. Hook
21. Net
22. Tonneau cover
EI-35
http://vnx.su
12. Luggage floor rear spacer (right)
BODY SIDE TRIM

CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH
Removal
Remove front and rear kick panels.
Installation
CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH

Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove seat belt shoulder anchor bolt. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
Remove front and rear kick panels.
Remove center pillar lower garnish.
Installation
LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER

Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove luggage floorboards and luggage floor spacers.

Remove luggage rear plate.
Remove rear kick panel.
SIIA0261E
NOTE:
When removing or installing, pay attention to pawl engagement with the rear pillar finisher.
Installation
REAR PILLAR FINISHER

Removal
1.
2.
Removal luggage side lower finisher.

Removal rear seat belt shoulder anchor. Refer to SB-4, "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt" .
Installation
DASHBOARD SIDE FINISHER

Removal
Removal dash side finisher.
Installation
BODY SIDE WELT

Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove kick panels.

Remove center pillar lower garnish.
Remove center pillar upper garnish.
EI-36
http://vnx.su
BODY SIDE TRIM

CAUTION:
Insert a screwdriver, wrapped with a cloth, into the part
shown by an arrow (between the body side panel and
clips). Remove clips.
When installing, confirm clips are aligned with the body
side panel holes, and then press in.
SIIA0810E
EI
EI-37
http://vnx.su
FLOOR TRIM
FLOOR TRIM
PFP:74902
EIS000NC
SIIA0222E
1.
Floor carpet
2.
Foot rest
4.
Model number plate cover
5.
Rear floor carpet
3.
Carpet hook
REMOVAL
1.
Remove front seat and rear seat cushions. Refer to SE-26, "Removal and Installation" and SE-33,
"Removal and Installation" .
2. Remove clips and remove rear floor carpet.
3. Remove center console.
4. Remove lower instrument cover.
5. Remove lower instrument center panel.
6. Remove floor anchor bolt of front seat belt. Refer to SB-3, "Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt" .
7. Remove front and rear kick panels.
8. Remove center pillar lower garnish.
9. Remove front and rear body-side welts.
10. Remove the dashboard side finisher.
11. Remove footrest.
12. Remove carpet hooks and clips.
13. Remove carpet from the carpet anchor clips.
14. Remove floor carpet.
NOTE:
For steps 3-5, refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
For steps 7-10, refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
INSTALLATION
EI-38
http://vnx.su
HEADLINING
HEADLINING
PFP:73910
A
EIS000ND
EI
SIIA0223E
1.
Headlining (standard)
2.
Sun-visor (left)
3.
Sun-visor (right)
4.
Sun-visor holder
5.
Inside mirror
6.
Inside mirror cover
7.
Map lamp
8.
Interior lamp
9.
Assistance grip (fixed type)
10. Luggage compartment lamp
11. Headlining (sunroof)
Assistance grip (retractable

13.
type)
14. Sunroof welt
12. Sunroof switch and map lamp
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front pillar and center pillar garnishes. Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove body side welt. Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove rear pillar finisher. Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" .
EI-39
http://vnx.su
HEADLINING
4.
Remove assistance grip.

NOTE:
When removing the assistant's grip cover from a car with a sunroof, use a clip clamp tool to disengage the upper and lower
tabs, then slide inwards and remove screws (1 each on left/
right).
SIIA0052E
5.
Remove map lamp, interior lamp, and luggage compartment lamp. Refer to LT-143, "INTERIOR ROOM
LAMP" , LT-148, "REMOVAL" , LT-148, "INSTALLATION" and LT-143, "LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP" .
6. Remove inside mirror cover.
7. Remove mounting screw on inside mirror.
8. Remove sun visors (driver side and passenger side).
9. Remove headlining rear clips.
10. Remove sun visor holder.
NOTE:
Insert a screwdriver into the cutout and rotate 90 to remove.
11. Remove headlining through the back door opening.
CAUTION:
Always remove or install in a pair.
Cover surroundings with waste to avoid scratches or
damages.
Do not bend headlining too hard.
SIIA0224J
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing, insert the protrusions on the headlining into
the holes in the upper part of center pillar.
PIIA0561E
EI-40
http://vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL
I BODY
SECTION
IP
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5

CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY ......................... 10
WORK ITEM TABLE ............................................ 11
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
CENTER CONSOLE ........................................... 19
INSTRUMENT CENTER LOWER PANEL .......... 21
IP
IP-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS0046I
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions
EIS001NZ
Disconnect both battery cables in advance.

Disconnect air bag system line in advance.
Never tamper with or force air bag lid open, as this may adversely affect air bag performance.
Be careful not to scratch pad and other parts.

Oil stain:
IP-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EIS008NW
Tool name
Description
C
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
IP
IP-3
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS008NX
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
customer's comments; refer to IP-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
defining the noise.







IP-4
http://vnx.su

1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.


1.
2.
G
H
IP
temporarily.
noise.
K
Refer to IP-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

CAUTION:
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 6085 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
IP-5
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

EIS008NY
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
IP-6
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
SEATS
G
noise.
H
IP
J
UNDERHOOD
IP-7
http://vnx.su

EIS008NZ
PIIB0723E
IP-8
http://vnx.su

A
IP
SBT844
IP-9
http://vnx.su
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY

PFP:68200
EIS008BS
PIIA9898E
IP-10
http://vnx.su

1.
Cluster lid A
2.
Combination meter
3.
Screw
4.
Front speaker grille (LH)
5.
Cup holder (LH)
6.
Side ventilator grille (LH)
7.
Driver box
8.
Nut
9.
Instrument stay
10. Tweeter (LH)
11. Instrument finisher (RHD models)
12. Instrument panel
13. Display unit
14. Center ventilator grille (LH)
15. Instrument driver lower panel
16. Steering column cover (upper)
17. Steering lock escutcheon
18. Steering column cover (lower)
19. A/T control finisher (A/T)
20. Console boot (M/T)
21. Console mask
22. Center console
23. Instrument panel stay cover (RH)
24. Instrument panel lower cover (RH)
25. Instrument panel stay cover (LH)
26. Instrument panel lower cover (LH)
27. Instrument lower panel
28. Cluster lid finisher
29. A/C controller
30. Audio unit
31. Glove box
32. Glove box pin
33. Instrument center lower box
34. Center ventilator grille (RH)
35. Cluster lid C
36. Glove box cover
37. NAVI control unit
38. Upper glove box
39. Side ventilator grille (RH)
40. Tweeter (RH)
41. Front speaker grille (RH)
42. Cup holder (LH)
43. Front passenger air bag module
EIS008BT
WORK ITEM TABLE

Components Parts Location
Refer to
Instrument
panel
Combination
meter
Display unit
Audio
Console
Front speaker grille (LH/RH)
IP-12
[1]
Cluster lid A
IP-12
[2]
[1]
Combination meter
IP-12
[3]
[2]
Driver box
IP-13
[4]
Steering lock escutcheon,

steering column cover (upper/
lower)
IP-13
[5]
Instrument driver lower panel
IP-13
[6]
Instrument panel finisher (RHD

Models)
IP-13
[7]
A/T control finisher (A/T)/Console boot (M/T) fuse block lid
IP-14
IP-14
[8]
[1]
Center console
IP-14
[9]
[2]
Cluster lid C
IP-15
[10]
Audio unit
AV-34
[11]
ATC-120
[12]
AV-109
[13]
Instrument lower panel
IP-15
[14]
Instrument panel lower cover
IP-15
[15]
Instrument panel stay cover

(LH/RH)
IP-16
[16]
Cluster lid finisher
IP-16
[17]
Instrument center lower panel
IP-16
[18]
Glove box
IP-16
[19]
Glove box cover
IP-17
[20]
Upper glove box
IP-17
[21]
NAVI control unit
AV-107
[22]
Front passenger air bag module
SRS-35
[23]
EI-35
[24]
A/C controller
Display unit
Front pillar garnish
IP
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
IP-11
http://vnx.su

Components Parts Location
Instrument panel
Side ventilator grille (LH/RH)
Cup holder
Refer to
Instrument
panel
IP-17
[25]
ATC-138
[26]
IP-18
[27]
Combination
meter
Display unit
Audio
Console
[ ]: The number shows the removal order.
REMOVAL
Front Speaker Grille (LH/RH)
1.
2.
Insert a remover into front speaker grille door side edge, and
then disengage pawls and clips.
Pull forward and remove.
PIIA9899E
Cluster Lid A
Disengage clips by pulling cluster lid A frontward to remove.
CAUTION:
During removal or installation, use shop cloth to protect surrounding area from damage.
PIIA7393E
Combination Meter
1.
2.
Remove screw.
Disconnect connector on back and remove combination meter.
CAUTION:
During removal or installation, use shop cloth to protect
surrounding area from damage.
PIIA7394E
PIIA7394J
IP-12
http://vnx.su

Driver Box
1.
Remove screws.
PIIA9900E
2.
3.
4.
Hold driver box up, and then remove pawls.

Pull driver box forward to remove.
Disconnect power supply socket connector lamp connector.
G
PIIA9901E
Steering Lock Escutcheon, Steering Column Cover (upper/lower)

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove steering lock escutcheon.

Remove screw from the bottom of steering column cover (lower).
Remove steering column cover (lower) and steering column cover (upper).
Remove knee protector from steering shaft.
IP
Instrument Driver Lower Panel

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove fuse block lid.

Remove screws, and pull instrument driver lower panel straight
forward to disengage pawls and clips.
Insert a screwdriver wrapped with a shop cloth from back to
lower side of each switch to disengage lower tabs, and then
remove each switch.
Disconnect connector from each switch.
M
PIIA9902E
Instrument Panel Finisher (RHD Models)

1.
2.
Disengage pawl and clips, and then pull instrument panel finisher straight forward.
Remove screws on back of instrument panel finisher, and then
remove driver ventilator grille. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal of
Driver Ventilator Grille" in ATC section.
PIIA9903E
IP-13
http://vnx.su

A/T Control Finisher (A/T Models)
1.
2.
Insert a screwdriver wrapped with a shop cloth into cutout of finisher front end and hold it up, and then disengage clips of side
surface rear end.
Pull up and remove.
PIIA9904E
Console Boot (M/T Models)

1.
2.
Remove by rotating shift knob.

Hold it from console boot inside and pull up to remove.
PIIA7400E
Center Console
1.
Hold the protrusion of console mask from the bottom of parking

brake lever, and then remove console mask.
PIIA7401E
2.
3.
Remove screw.
Disengage center console front pawls, and then remove center
console while avoiding parking lever.
PIIA7402E
IP-14
http://vnx.su

Cluster lid C
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert a remover into the bottom of cluster lid C, and then disengage pawls and clips.
Pull cluster lid C straight frontward to remove.
Disconnect all connectors.
Remove center ventilator grille (LH/RH). Refer to ATC-137,
"Removal of Center Ventilator Grille" in ATC section.
PIIA9905E
Audio, A/C Controller

Remove screws, and then remove audio and A/C controller. Refer to AV-34, "Removal and Installation of
Audio Unit (With Cassette Deck)" and AV-35, "Removal and Installation of Audio Unit (Without Cassette
Deck)" in AV section and ATC-120, "CONTROLLER" in ATC section.
CAUTION:
Display Unit
Remove screws, and then remove display. Refer to AV-109, "Removal and Installation of Display" in AV section.
CAUTION:
Instrument Lower Panel

1.
2.
Disengage pawls and clips, and then pull instrument panel finisher straight forward.
Remove screws from the back and remove harness bracket.
IP
K
PIIA9906E
Instrument Panel Lower Cover (LH/RH)

Disengage pawls and pull it to rear of vehicle.
PIIA9907E
IP-15
http://vnx.su

Instrument Panel Stay Cover (LH/RH)
1.
2.
Remove screws.
Disengage pawls and pull it to outside of vehicle.
PIIA9908E
Cluster Lid Finisher

1.
2.
Remove screws.
Pull the bottom of cluster lid finisher to the rearward of the vehicle, and remove it so as to avoid interference around upper
screw holes.
PIIA7407E
Instrument Center Lower Panel

Remove screws, and then pull it forward to remove.
CAUTION:
PIIB0334E
Glove Box
Open glove box, and remove glove box pin from inside.
PIIA9919E
IP-16
http://vnx.su

Glove Box Cover
1.
2.
3.
Remove screw.
Remove relay clamp installed to back of glove box cover.
Pull it forward to remove.
PIIA9909E
Upper Glove Box

Disengage pawls and clips, and then pull it straight forward.
PIIA9910E
Passenger Air Bag Module

Remove passenger air bag module after removing bolts. Refer to SRS-35, "FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG
IP
MODULE" in SRS section.
Instrument Mask
Insert a screwdriver wrapped with a shop cloth into cutout on instrument mask. Disengage tab to remove.
Front Pillar Garnish

Pull straight front pillar garnish toward vehicle inside of right and left. Remove metal clip to remove.
Refer to EI-35, "Removal and Installation" in EI section.
Instrument Panel
1.
Remove nuts, and lower steering column.

L
SIIA0040E
IP-17
http://vnx.su

2.
Remove instrument panel by removing all harnesses, bolts, nuts, and screw.
PIIA9911E
Side Ventilator Grille (LH/RH)

1.
2.
Remove front driver side ventilator duct and front passenger side ventilator duct. Refer to ATC-138,
"Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Duct and Side Ventilator Duct" in ATC section.
Remove front driver side ventilator and front passenger side ventilator. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal of
Side Ventilator Grille" in ATC section.
Cup Holder (LH/RH)

Remove screws and remove cup holder.
INSTALLATION
IP-18
http://vnx.su

EIS008BU
CENTER CONSOLE
IP
PIIA7416E
1.
Console box
2.
Console pocket / switch panel
4.
Rear cup holder
5.
Console rear finisher
3.
Console lid
Disassembly
1.
Remove console rear finisher by pulling rear cup holder out

approximately 5 mm (0.2 in) rearward.
PIIA7531E
2.
Remove screws from back of center console, and then pull rear
cup holder rearward to remove.
PIIA7532E
IP-19
http://vnx.su

3.
Remove screws from back of center console, and then remove

console lid.
PIIA7533E
4.
Remove console pocket.
Assembly
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
IP-20
http://vnx.su

INSTRUMENT CENTER LOWER PANEL
A
PIIB0332E
1.
Instrument front lower panel
2.
Screw
3.
Ashtray bracket
4.
Ashtray
5.
Ashtray outer
6.
Instrument finisher C
Disassembly
1.
2.
IP
Remove instrument center lower panel. Refer to IP-16, "Instrument Center Lower Panel" .
Remove screws, and then remove ashtray assembly.
PIIB0333E
3.
4.
Disconnect all connectors from instrument center lower panel.

Remove screws and plastic positioning pin at both right and left end,and then remove instrument finisher
C.
Assembly
IP-21
http://vnx.su
IP-22
http://vnx.su
SEAT
I BODY
SECTION
SE
SEAT
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
Service Notice .......................................................... 2
Precautions .............................................................. 2
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
Work Flow ................................................................ 4
ROOT CAUSE ...................................................... 5
REPAIR THE CAUSE ........................................... 5
CENTER CONSOLE ............................................. 6
DOORS ................................................................. 6
TRUNK .................................................................. 7
SEATS ................................................................... 7
UNDERHOOD ....................................................... 7
POWER SEAT .......................................................... 10
Schematic .............................................................. 10
Wiring DiagramSEAT /For LHD Models ...........11
Wiring DiagramSEAT /For RHD Models ......... 14
HEATED SEAT ......................................................... 17
Schematic .............................................................. 17
Wiring DiagramH/SEAT /For LHD Models ....... 18

Wiring DiagramH/SEAT/For RHD Models ....... 21
FRONT SEAT ............................................................ 24
Component Parts Drawing ..................................... 24
MANUAL SEAT ................................................... 24
POWER SEAT ..................................................... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
Disassembly and Assembly of Seatback ................ 26
SEATBACK TRIM (SIDE AIR BAG EQUIPPED
AND GENUINE LEATHER SEAT) ....................... 26
SEATBACK TRIM [WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAG
(EXCEPT GENUINE LEATHER SEAT)] .............. 28
Disassembly and Assembly of Seat Cushion Trim... 29
MANUAL SEAT ................................................... 29
Disassembly and Assembly of Seat Cushion Trim... 30
POWER SEAT ..................................................... 30
REAR SEAT .............................................................. 31
Component Parts Drawing ..................................... 31
STANDARD SEAT ............................................... 31
SEAT WITH ARMREST ....................................... 32
SEAT CUSHION .................................................. 33
SEATBACK .......................................................... 33
REAR SEAT STRIKER (SIDE) ............................ 34
REAR SEAT CENTER BRACKET ....................... 34
REAR SEAT STRIKER (FLOOR) ........................ 34
REAR SEATBACK LOCK KNOB ......................... 34
ARMREST ........................................................... 34
SE-1
http://vnx.su
SE
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EIS003UN
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Service Notice
EIS003UV
When removing or installing various parts, place a cloth or padding onto the vehicle body to prevent
scratches.
Handle trim, molding instruments, grille, etc. carefully during removing or installing. Be careful not to oil or
damage them.
Apply sealing compound where necessary when installing parts.
When applying sealing compound, be careful that the sealing compound does not protrude from parts.
When replacing any metal parts (for example body outer panel, member, etc.), be sure to take rust prevention measures.
Precautions
EIS001O8
When removing parts with a screwdriver or other tool, protect parts by wrapping tools with vinyl or tape.

Oil stain:
SE-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
EIS008O0
Tool name
Description
C
Engine ear
Location the noise

SIIA0995E
SE
SE-3
http://vnx.su

Work Flow
PFP:00000
EIS008O1
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
customer's comments; refer to SE-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet" . This information is necessary to duplicate the
defining the noise.







SE-4
http://vnx.su

1) Close a door.
3) Rev the engine.
vehicle body.


1.
2.
G
H
SE
temporarily.
noise.
K
Refer to SE-6, "Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting" .
REPAIR THE CAUSE

CAUTION:
76268-9E005: 100 135 mm (3.94 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 85 mm (2.36 3.35 in)/76884-71L02: 15
25 mm (0.59 0.98 in)
50 50 mm (1.97 1.97 in)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 50 mm (1.18 1.97 in)
SE-5
http://vnx.su

FELT CLOTHTAPE
UHMW(TEFLON) TAPE
SILICONE GREASE
SILICONE SPRAY
DUCT TAPE
CONFIRM THE REPAIR

EIS008O2
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION:
CENTER CONSOLE
DOORS
repair the noise.
SE-6
http://vnx.su

TRUNK
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
SEATS
G
noise.
H
SE
J
UNDERHOOD
SE-7
http://vnx.su

EIS008O3
SBT843
SE-8
http://vnx.su

A
SE
SBT844
SE-9
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
POWER SEAT
Schematic
PFP:87016
EIS008NJ
TIWB0014E
SE-10
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
Wiring DiagramSEAT /For LHD Models
EIS008NG
SE
TIWB0015E
SE-11
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
TIWB0016E
SE-12
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
A
SE
TIWB0017E
SE-13
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
Wiring DiagramSEAT /For RHD Models
EIS008NH
TIWB0018E
SE-14
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
A
SE
TIWB0019E
SE-15
http://vnx.su
POWER SEAT
TIWB0020E
SE-16
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
HEATED SEAT
Schematic
PFP:87335
A
EIS008NI
SE
TIWB0031E
SE-17
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
Wiring DiagramH/SEAT /For LHD Models
EIS001P1
TIWA0462E
SE-18
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
A
SE
TIWB0027E
SE-19
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
TIWB0021E
SE-20
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
Wiring DiagramH/SEAT/For RHD Models
EIS001P2
SE
TIWA0463E
SE-21
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
TIWB0028E
SE-22
http://vnx.su
HEATED SEAT
A
SE
TIWB0022E
SE-23
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
FRONT SEAT
Component Parts Drawing
PFP:87000
EIS000NN
MANUAL SEAT
PIIB0340E
1.
Side air bag module
2.
Nut
3.
Seatback frame
4.
Seatback trim
5.
Headrest holder (locked)
6.
Headrest holder (free)
7.
Headrest
8.
Snap pin
9.
Lumbar support lever knob
10. Seatback pad
11. Seat cushion frame
12. Seat cushion heater unit
13. Seat cushion pad
14. Seatback heater unit
15. Seat cushion trim
16. Outer slide cover
17. Reclining lever knob
18. Lifter dial
19. Screw
20. Outer seat cushion finisher
21. Bolt
22. Front seat adjuster
23. Bolt
24. Bolt
25. Rear inner slide cover
26. Inner seat cushion finisher
27. Seat belt buckle
28. Front inner slide cover
SE-24
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
POWER SEAT
A
SE
PIIA9871E
1.
Side air bag module
2.
Nut
3.
Seatback frame
4.
Seatback trim
5.
Headrest holder (locked)
6.
7.
Headrest
8.
Snap pin
9.
Lumbar support lever knob
10. Seatback pad
11. Power seat harness
13. Seat cushion heater unit
12. Seat cushion frame

15. Seatback heater unit
17. Seat reclining switch
18. Seat slide & lifter switch
19. Seat switch escutcheon
20. Screw
21. Power seat switch
22. Outer slide cover
23. Screw
24. Outer seat cushion finisher
25. Bolt
26. Front seat adjuster
27. Bolt
28. Front seat cushion finisher
29. Bolt
30. Seat belt buckle
31. Rear inner slide cover
32. Front inner slide cover
33. Inner seat cushion finisher
SE-25
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
EIS000NO
REMOVAL
1.
Remove slide cover.
SIIA0244E
NOTE:
1. Slide the seat forward.
2. Undo the outer slide cover front fitting and then undo the rear
fitting.
3. Pull cover up rearward.
SIIA0245J
2. Remove vehicle mounting bolts.

3. Disconnect the connector and remove seat.
NOTE:
When removing and installing, using clothes, protect the parts from damage where it may interfere with others.
INSTALLATION
Disassembly and Assembly of Seatback
EIS000NP
SEATBACK TRIM (SIDE AIR BAG EQUIPPED AND GENUINE LEATHER SEAT)
Disassembly
1.
2.
Unfasten fastener on the back of seatback.

Remove lower retainer.
SIIA0246E
SE-26
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
3.
Remove nuts, and remove inner cross fixed stay.

A
C
PIIA0546E
4.
Pull snap ring upward, and remove lumber support lever knob
front seatback frame (for driver seat).
E
G
PIIA1156E
5.
Pick up and push up the headrest holder tab to remove.

NOTE:
Before installing the headrest holder, check its front, rear, right
and left orientation for correct installation.
SE
PIIA0167E
6.
After removing seatback trim & pad, remove hog rings to separate pad and trim.
Assembly
Removal of Seatback Assembly

To remove seatback assembly, follow steps 1 - 2. After that, remove side air bag connector and bolts.
NOTE:
When assembling the seatback frame, make sure that the reclining device are locked on both sides, and be
sure to temporarily tighten the bolts and make sure that the seatback frame is not warped, then tighten them
finally.
Installation of Seatback Assembly

SE-27
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
SEATBACK TRIM [WITHOUT SIDE AIR BAG (EXCEPT GENUINE LEATHER SEAT)]
Disassembly
1.
Disengage retainers in the lower part at the back of seatback.
PIIA0547E
2.
Pull off seatback trim.
SIIA0248E
3.
Pull snap ring upward, and remove lumber support lever knob
front seatback frame (for driver seat).
PIIA1156E
4.
Pick up and push up the headrest holder tab to remove.

NOTE:
Before installing the headrest holder, check its front, rear, right
and left orientation for correct installation.
PIIA0167E
5.
Remove seatback trim.
Assembly
Removal of Seatback Assembly

To remove seatback assembly, follow steps 1 - 2. After that, remove bolts.
SE-28
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
NOTE:
When assembling the seatback frame, make sure that the reclining device are locked on both sides, and be
sure to temporarily tighten the bolts and make sure that the seatback frame is not warped, then tighten them
finally.
Installation of Seatback Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly of Seat Cushion Trim
EIS000NQ
MANUAL SEAT
Disassembly
1.
Pull up tabs of reclining lever from inside. Slide the knob forward
for removal.
PIIA1161E
2.
Hang a wire on the snap ring, and pull upward to remove.

Remove lifter dial.
H
SE
J
PIIA0549E
3.
Remove seat harness and bolts from back of seat cushion.

NOTE:
When installing bolts, make sure both sides of the slide are
locked. Be sure to temporarily tighten the bolts before final tightening.
SIIA0249E
4.
Remove retainer from back side of the cushion.
PIIB0589E
5.
Pull off trim and remove hog rings.
SE-29
http://vnx.su
FRONT SEAT
Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly of Seat Cushion Trim
EIS008BR
POWER SEAT
Disassembly
1.
Remove seat harness and bolts from back of seat cushion.
SIIA0249E
2.
Remove the seat reclining switch and seat slide & lifter switch.
PIIA9872E
3.
Remove the seat switch escutcheon.
PIIA9873E
4.
Remove retainer from back side of the cushion.
PIIB0589E
5.
Pull off trim and remove hog rings.
Assembly
SE-30
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT
Component Parts Drawing
PFP:88300
A
EIS000NR
STANDARD SEAT
B
SE
PIIB0399E
1.
Seatback board
2.
Clip (C101)
3.
TORX bolt
4.
Inner hinge cover
5.
Bolt
6.
Seat lock
7.
Seatback frame
8.
Seatback pad
9.
Seatback lock knob
10. Seatback lock knob finisher
11. Headrest
12. Headrest holder (free)
13. Headrest holder (locked)
14. Seatback trim
15. Screw
16. Seat lock protector
17. Rear back side bracket
18. Seat cushion lock
21. Seat cushion stay
22. Side hinge cover
SE-31
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
SEAT WITH ARMREST
PIIB0400E
1.
Seatback board finisher
2.
Inner hinge cover
3.
Screw
4.
Seatback board
5.
Clip (C101)
6.
Seatback knob
7.
Seatback knob finisher
8.
Headrest
9.
10. Headrest holder (locked)
11. Seatback pad
12. TORX bolt
13. Seat lock
14. Bolt
15. Seatback frame
16. Armrest bracket cover (RH)
17. Clip
18. Tonneau cover hook
19. Anchor bolt
20. Retractor cover
21. Seat belt (center)
22. Armrest
23. Armrest lid board
24. Seatback trim
25. Seat belt escutcheon
26. Seatback side bracket
27. Seat lock protector
29. Seat cushion stay
30. Armrest bracket cover (LH)
31. Seat cushion lock
32. Side hinge cover
SE-32
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
EIS000NS
SEAT CUSHION
1.
2.
3.
Lift to fold seat cushion up.

Pivot pin on rear seat striker downward. Slide it to left of vehicle.
Slide the cushion to the left side of the vehicle. Remove it from
the striker.
D
SIIA0250J
SEATBACK
1.
Remove inner hinge cover.
H
SIIA0251E
2.
Remove bolts on center bracket.
SE
SIIA0252E
3.
Remove finisher and side bracket nuts and bolts. Remove seatback.
SIIA0253E
SE-33
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
REAR SEAT STRIKER (SIDE)
1.
2.
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to EI-35, "Removal

and Installation" .
Remove bolts.
SIIA0254E
REAR SEAT CENTER BRACKET

1.
2.
Remove rear seatback.

Remove nuts and bolt.
SIIA0255E
REAR SEAT STRIKER (FLOOR)

1.
2.
Remove rear seat cushion.

Remove bolt.
SIIA0256E
EIS000NT
REAR SEATBACK LOCK KNOB

Turn knob counterclockwise to remove.
SIIA0259J
ARMREST
1.
2.
Push armrest and lid forward. Remove clip.

Slide armrest and lid to the left, and pull out the pin from the hole on the seatback.
SE-34
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
3.
Slide armrest and lid to the right and remove from the seatback pin.
A
SIIA0334E
SE
SE-35
http://vnx.su
REAR SEAT
SE-36
http://vnx.su
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
J AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
ATC
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 4
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)..... 4
General Refrigerant Precautions .............................. 5
Lubricant Precautions .............................................. 5
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection ................... 5
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT
CONNECTION ...................................................... 6
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..... 7
Precautions for Servicing Compressor ................... 10
Precautions for Service Equipment ........................ 10
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT ............ 10
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR ...................... 10
VACUUM PUMP ................................................. 10
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET .................................... 10
SERVICE HOSES ................................................11
SERVICE COUPLERS .........................................11
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE .......................11
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE ...............11
CHARGING CYLINDER ...................................... 12
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye ....................... 12
IDENTIFICATION ................................................ 13
IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE ........... 13
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis ................ 13
PREPARATION ......................................................... 14
Special Service Tools ............................................. 14
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE (CWV-615M COMPRESSOR) ......................................................... 14
WITH DIESEL ENGINE (DKV-11G COMPRESSOR) ................................................................... 14
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment... 15
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM ..................................... 18
Refrigerant Cycle ................................................... 18
REFRIGERANT FLOW ....................................... 18
FREEZE PROTECTION (WITH GASOLINE
ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR) .............. 18
Refrigerant System Protection ............................... 18
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR (WITH
GASOLINE ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR) ................................................................... 18

DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH (WITH DIESEL
ENGINE: DKV-11G COMPRESSOR) .................. 18
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (WITH GASOLINE
ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR) .............. 18
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (With Gasoline Engine: CWV-615M Compressor) .................. 19
GENERAL INFORMATION ................................. 19
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 20
Component Layout ................................................. 23
LUBRICANT .............................................................. 24
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor... 24
LUBRICANT ........................................................ 24
LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION .................. 24
LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR
COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT
COMPRESSOR .................................................. 25
LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT ....................... 25
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL ............................... 27
Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System... 27
System Construction .............................................. 27
OPERATION ........................................................ 27
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION
ORDER ............................................................... 28
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL) ..................................... 29
FAN SPEED CONTROL ...................................... 29
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL ................................. 29
OUTLET DOOR CONTROL ................................ 29
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL ........................... 29
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM ............................ 29
Description of Control System ................................ 30
Control Operation ................................................... 31
MODE CONTROL DIAL ...................................... 31
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (POTENTIO
TEMPERATURE CONTROL) .............................. 31
FAN CONTROL DIAL .......................................... 31
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ............. 31
ATC-1
http://vnx.su
ATC
INTAKE SWITCH ................................................. 31

A/C SWITCH ....................................................... 31
Discharge Air Flow ................................................. 32
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION... 33
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ...................................................... 34
WORK FLOW ...................................................... 34
SYMPTOM TABLE .............................................. 34
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 35
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT .......................... 36
Schematic ............................................................... 37
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE ................................. 37
WITH DIESEL ENGINE ....................................... 38
Wiring Diagram A/C ......................................... 39
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE / LHD MODELS ....... 39
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE / RHD MODELS ...... 43
WITH DIESEL ENGINE / LHD MODELS ............ 47
WITH DIESEL ENGINE / RHD MODELS ............ 51
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value ............ 55
PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT ............ 55
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR
AUTO AMP. ......................................................... 55
Self-diagnosis Function .......................................... 57
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 57
FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE ...... 59
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE
SETTING TRIMMER ........................................... 63
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION
SETTING TRIMMER ........................................... 63
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION ................................................. 64
Operational Check .................................................. 65
CHECKING BLOWER ......................................... 65
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR ............................ 65
CHECKING INTAKE DOOR ................................ 65
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE ......... 66
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE .......... 66
CHECKING A/C SWITCH ................................... 66
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp. ... 67
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 67
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................ 67
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM... 68
LAN System Circuit ................................................ 69
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT .................................................................... 69
Mode Door Motor Circuit ........................................ 73
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 73
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE
DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 75
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit ...................................... 76
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 76
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX
DOOR MOTOR ....................................................78

Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................79
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................79
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .....................................80
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................81
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE
DOOR MOTOR ....................................................81
Blower Motor Circuit ................................................82
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................82
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER
MOTOR ................................................................84
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................87
Magnet Clutch Circuit ..............................................88
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................88
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET
CLUTCH ..............................................................89
COMPONENT INSPECTION ...............................94
Insufficient Cooling ..................................................96
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................96
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS ..................98
PERFORMANCE CHART .................................. 100
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE ................................................................. 102
Insufficient Heating ............................................... 105
INSPECTION FLOW .......................................... 105
Noise ..................................................................... 107
INSPECTION FLOW .......................................... 107
Self-diagnosis ....................................................... 108
INSPECTION FLOW .......................................... 108
Ambient Sensor Circuit ......................................... 109
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION .......................... 109
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS .109
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT
SENSOR ............................................................ 109
COMPONENT INSPECTION ............................. 111
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit ....................................... 111
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE
SENSOR ............................................................ 112
Sunload Sensor Circuit ......................................... 114
SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS ........................... 114
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD
SENSOR ............................................................ 114
Intake Sensor Circuit ............................................. 117
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR ................................................................... 117
CONTROLLER ........................................................ 120
REMOVAL .......................................................... 120
INSTALLATION .................................................. 120
ATC-2
http://vnx.su
AMBIENT SENSOR ................................................ 121

REMOVAL ......................................................... 121
INSTALLATION ................................................. 121
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR ............................................ 122
REMOVAL ......................................................... 122
INSTALLATION ................................................. 122
SUNLOAD SENSOR .............................................. 123
REMOVAL ......................................................... 123
INSTALLATION ................................................. 123
INTAKE SENSOR ................................................... 124
REMOVAL ......................................................... 124
INSTALLATION ................................................. 124
BLOWER UNIT ....................................................... 125
REMOVAL ......................................................... 125
INSTALLATION ................................................. 125
Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 126
BLOWER MOTOR .................................................. 127
REMOVAL ......................................................... 127
INSTALLATION ................................................. 127
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ......................................... 128
REMOVAL ......................................................... 128
INSTALLATION ................................................. 128
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER .................................. 129
REMOVAL ......................................................... 129
INSTALLATION ................................................. 129
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER ................................... 130
FUNCTION ........................................................ 130
REPLACEMENT TIMING .................................. 130
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES ..................... 130
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY .............. 131
REMOVAL ......................................................... 131
INSTALLATION ................................................. 132
Disassembly and Assembly ................................. 132
MODE DOOR MOTOR ........................................... 134
REMOVAL ......................................................... 134
INSTALLATION ................................................. 134
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR ......................................... 135
REMOVAL ......................................................... 135
INSTALLATION ................................................. 135
HEATER CORE ...................................................... 136
REMOVAL ......................................................... 136
INSTALLATION ................................................. 136
DUCTS AND GRILLES .......................................... 137
REMOVAL ......................................................... 137
INSTALLATION ................................................. 140
REFRIGERANT LINES ........................................... 141

HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure ............... 141
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................ 141
Components ......................................................... 143
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE ............................... 143
WITH DIESEL ENGINE ..................................... 144
Removal and Installation of Compressor .............. 144
REMOVAL ......................................................... 144
INSTALLATION ................................................. 146
Removal and Installation of Compressor Clutch . 146
REMOVAL ......................................................... 146
INSTALLATION ................................................. 150
Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible
Hose ..................................................................... 153
REMOVAL ......................................................... 153
INSTALLATION ................................................. 154
Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible
Hose ..................................................................... 154
REMOVAL ......................................................... 154
INSTALLATION ................................................. 155
Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe . 155
REMOVAL ......................................................... 155
INSTALLATION ................................................. 155
Removal and Installation of Condenser ................ 155
REMOVAL ......................................................... 155
INSTALLATION ................................................. 156
Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank ............... 156
REMOVAL ......................................................... 156
INSTALLATION ................................................. 157
Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure
Sensor .................................................................. 157
REMOVAL ......................................................... 157
INSTALLATION ................................................. 157
Removal and Installation of Dual-pressure Switch. 158
REMOVAL ......................................................... 158
INSTALLATION ................................................. 158
Removal and Installation of Evaporator ................ 158
REMOVAL ......................................................... 158
INSTALLATION ................................................. 159
Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve ....... 159
REMOVAL ......................................................... 159
INSTALLATION ................................................. 159
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks ............................ 160
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent
Leak Detector ....................................................... 160
Dye Injection ......................................................... 160
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector .................... 161
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK
DETECTOR ....................................................... 161
CHECKING PROCEDURE ............................... 161
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .... 164
Compressor .......................................................... 164
Lubricant ............................................................... 164
Refrigerant ............................................................ 164
Engine Idling Speed ............................................. 164
Belt Tension .......................................................... 164
ATC-3
http://vnx.su
ATC
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EJS004YA
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)
EJS000T1
WARNING:
CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant are not compatible. These refrigerants
must never be mixed, even in the smallest amount. If the refrigerants are mixed and compressor
malfunction is likely to occur.
Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components. If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor malfunction is likely to occur.
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following handling precautions must be observed:
When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to
minimize the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just
before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the entry of moisture into system.
Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
Do not allow lubricant (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or R) to come in contact with styrofoam
parts. Damage may result.
ATC-4
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
General Refrigerant Precautions
EJS000T2
WARNING:
Do not release refrigerant into the air. Use approved recovery/recycling equipment to capture the
refrigerant every time an air conditioning system is discharged.
Always wear eye and hand protection (goggles and gloves) when working with any refrigerant or
air conditioning system.
Do not store or heat refrigerant containers above 52C (125F).
Do not heat a refrigerant container with an open flame; if container warming is required, place the
bottom of the container in a warm pail of water.
Do not intentionally drop, puncture, or incinerate refrigerant containers.
Keep refrigerant away from open flames: poisonous gas will be produced if refrigerant burns.
Refrigerant will displace oxygen, therefore be certain to work in well ventilated areas to prevent
suffocation.
Do not pressure test or leak test HFC-134a (R-134a) service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning systems with compressed air during repair. Some mixtures of air and HFC-134a (R-134a)
have been shown to be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause
injury or property damage. Additional health and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
Lubricant Precautions
EJS0027Y
G
Use only specified lubricant for the HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system and HFC-134a (R-134a) components.
If lubricant other than that specified is used, compressor malfunction is likely to occur.
The specified HFC-134a (R-134a) lubricant rapidly absorbs moisture from the atmosphere. The following H
handling precautions must be observed:
When removing refrigerant components from a vehicle, immediately cap (seal) the component to minimize
the entry of moisture from the atmosphere.
I
When installing refrigerant components to a vehicle, do not remove the caps (unseal) until just before connecting the components. Connect all refrigerant loop components as quickly as possible to minimize the
entry of moisture into system.
ATC
Only use the specified lubricant from a sealed container. Immediately reseal containers of lubricant. Without proper sealing, lubricant will become moisture saturated and should not be used.
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat.
Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant. If acciden- K
tal system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety
information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
Do not allow lubricant (Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or R) to come in contact with styrofoam parts. Dam- L
age may result.
Precautions for Refrigerant Connection
EJS000T4
A new type refrigerant connection has been introduced to all refrigerant lines except the following location.
Expansion valve to cooling unit
Refrigerant pressure sensor to liquid tank
ATC-5
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
The O-ring has been relocated. It has also been provided with a groove for proper installation. This eliminates the chance of the O-ring being caught in, or damaged by, the mating part. The sealing direction of
the O-ring is now set vertically in relation to the contacting surface of the mating part to improve sealing
characteristics.
The reaction force of the O-ring will not occur in the direction that causes the joint to pull out, thereby facilitating piping connections.
SHA815E
ATC-6
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION
With Gasoline Engine
ATC
RJIA2817E
NOTE:
This illustration is for RHD models. The blower and heater & cooling unit layouts for LHD models are symmetrically opposite.
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
ATC-7
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
With Diesel Engine
RJIA2818E
NOTE:
This illustration is for RHD models. The blower and heater & cooling unit layouts for LHD models are symmetrically opposite.
CAUTION:
The new and former refrigerant connections use different O-ring configurations. Do not confuse Orings since they are not interchangeable. If a wrong O-ring is installed, refrigerant will leak at, or
around, the connection.
O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications

Connection type
O-ring
size
New
Former
Former
8
10
New
Former
12
New
Former
SHA814E
16
New
Former
19
Part number
mm (in)
mm (in)
92471 N8210
6.8 (0.268)
1.85 (0.0728)
92470 N8200
6.07 (0.2390)
1.78 (0.0701)
J2476 89956
9.25 (0.3642)
1.78 (0.0701)
92472 N8210
10.9 (0.429)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 71L00
11.0 (0.433)
2.4 (0.094)
92473 N8210
13.6 (0.535)
2.43 (0.0957)
92475 72L00
14.3 (0.563)
2.3 (0.091)
92474 N8210
16.5 (0.650)
2.43 (0.0957)
92477 N8200
17.12 (0.6740)
1.78 (0.0701)
WARNING:
Make sure all refrigerant is discharged into the recycling equipment and the pressure in the system is
less than atmospheric pressure. Then gradually loosen the discharge side hose fitting and remove it.
ATC-8
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION:
When replacing or cleaning refrigerant cycle components, observe the following.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
Malfunction to do so will cause lubricant to enter the low-pressure chamber.
When connecting tubes, always use a torque wrench and a back-up wrench.
After disconnecting tubes, immediately plug all openings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
When installing an air conditioner in the vehicle, connect the pipes as the final stage of the operation. Do not remove the seal caps of pipes and other components until just before required for
connection.
Allow components stored in cool areas to warm to working area temperature before removing seal
caps. This prevents condensation from forming inside A/C components.
Thoroughly remove moisture from the refrigeration system before charging the refrigerant.
Always replace used O-rings.
When connecting tube, apply lubricant to circle of the O-rings shown in illustration. Be careful not
to apply lubricant to threaded portion.
Lubricant name
Part number
With gasoline engine

(CWV-615M compressor)
: Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
: KLH00-PAGS0
With diesel engine

(DKV-11G compressor)
Nissan A/C System Oil Type R
KLH00-PAGR0
O-ring must be closely attached to dented portion of tube.

When replacing the O-ring, be careful not to damage O-ring and tube.
Connect tube until you hear it click, then tighten the nut or bolt by hand until snug. Make sure that
the O-ring is installed to tube correctly.
After connecting line, conduct leak test and make sure that there is no leakage from connections.
When the refrigerant leaking point is found, disconnect that line and replace the O-ring. Then
tighten connections of seal seat to the specified torque.
ATC
RHA861F
ATC-9
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Servicing Compressor
EJS000T5
Plug all openings to prevent moisture and foreign matter from entering.
When the compressor is removed, store it in the same position as it is when mounted on the car.
When replacing or repairing compressor, follow Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor exactly. Refer to ATC-24, "Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor" .
Keep friction surfaces between clutch and pulley clean. If the surface is contaminated, with lubricant, wipe it off by using a clean waste cloth moistened with thinner.
After compressor service operation, turn the compressor shaft by hand more than five turns in
both directions. This will equally distribute lubricant inside the compressor. After the compressor
is installed, let the engine idle and operate the compressor for one hour.
After replacing the compressor magnet clutch, apply voltage to the new one and check for usual
operation.
Precautions for Service Equipment
EJS000T6
RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT
Be certain to follow the manufacturers instructions for machine operation and machine maintenance. Never
introduce any refrigerant other than that specified into the machine.
ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR

Be certain to follow the manufacturers instructions for tester operation and tester maintenance.
VACUUM PUMP
The lubricant contained inside the vacuum pump is not compatible
with the specified lubricant for HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C systems.
The vent side of the vacuum pump is exposed to atmospheric pressure. So the vacuum pump lubricant may migrate out of the pump
into the service hose. This is possible when the pump is switched off
after evacuation (vacuuming) and hose is connected to it.
To prevent this migration, use a manual valve placed near the hoseto-pump connection, as follows.
Usually vacuum pumps have a manual isolator valve as part of

the pump. Close this valve to isolate the service hose from the
pump.
For pumps without an isolator, use a hose equipped with a manual shut-off valve near the pump end. Close the valve to isolate
the hose from the pump.
If the hose has an automatic shut-off valve, disconnect the hose

from the pump. As long as the hose is connected, the valve is
open and lubricating oil may migrate.
Some one-way valves open when vacuum is applied and close
under a no vacuum condition. Such valves may restrict the pump's
ability to pull a deep vacuum and are not recommended.
RHA270DA
MANIFOLD GAUGE SET

Be certain that the gauge face indicates HFC-134a or R-134a. Be
sure the gauge set has 1/2-16 ACME threaded connections for service hoses. Confirm the set has been used only with refrigerant
HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants.
SHA533D
ATC-10
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
SERVICE HOSES
A
Be certain that the service hoses display the markings described

(colored hose with black stripe). All hoses must include positive shutoff devices (either manual or automatic) near the end of the hoses
opposite the manifold gauge.
RHA272D
SERVICE COUPLERS
Never attempt to connect HFC-134a (R-134a) service couplers to a
CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system. The HFC-134a (R-134a) couplers will
not properly connect to the CFC-12 (R-12) system. However, if an
improper connection is attempted, discharging and contamination
may occur.
Shut-off valve rotation
A/C service valve
Clockwise
Open
Counterclockwise
Close
RHA273D
REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE

Verify that no refrigerant other than HFC-134a (R-134a) and specified lubricants have been used with the scale. If the scale controls
refrigerant flow electronically, the hose fitting must be 1/2-16
ACME.
ATC
RHA274D
CALIBRATING ACR4 WEIGHT SCALE

Calibrate the scale every three months.
To calibrate the weight scale on the ACR4:
1. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
2. Press 8787 . A1 will be displayed.
3. Remove all weight from the scale.
4. Press 0 , then press Enter . 0.00 will be displayed and change to A2 .
5. Place a known weight (dumbbell or similar weight), between 4.5 and 8.6 kg (10 and 19 lb) on the center of
the weight scale.
6. Enter the known weight using four digits. (Example 10 lb = 10.00, 10.5 lb = 10.50)
7. Press Enter the display returns to the vacuum mode.
8. Press Shift/Reset and Enter at the same time.
9. Press 6 the known weight on the scale is displayed.
10. Remove the known weight from the scale. 0.00 will be displayed.
11. Press Shift/Reset to return the ACR4 to the program mode.
ATC-11
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
CHARGING CYLINDER
Using a charging cylinder is not recommended. Refrigerant may be vented into air from cylinder's top valve
when filling the cylinder with refrigerant. Also, the accuracy of the cylinder is generally less than that of an
electronic scale or of quality recycle/recharge equipment.
Precautions for Leak Detection Dye
EJS0027Z
The A/C system contains a fluorescent leak detection dye used for locating refrigerant leaks. An ultraviolet
(UV) lamp is required to illuminate the dye when inspecting for leaks.
Always wear fluorescence enhancing UV safety goggles to protect your eyes and enhance the visibility of
the fluorescent dye.
The fluorescent dye leak detector is not a replacement for an electronic refrigerant leak detector. The fluorescent dye leak detector should be used in conjunction with an electronic refrigerant leak detector to (J41995) pin-point refrigerant leaks.
For your safety and your customers satisfaction, read and follow all manufacture's operating instructions
and precautions prior to performing the work.
A compressor shaft seal should not be repaired because of dye seepage. The compressor shaft seal
should only be repaired after confirming the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector.
Always remove any remaining dye from the leak area after repairs are complete to avoid a misdiagnosis
during a future service.
Do not allow dye to come into contact with painted body panels or interior components. If dye is spilled,
clean immediately with the approved dye cleaner. Fluorescent dye left on a surface for an extended period
of time cannot be removed.
Do not spray the fluorescent dye cleaning agent on hot surfaces (engine exhaust manifold, etc.).
Do not use more than one refrigerant dye bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) per A/C system.
Leak detection dyes for HFC-134a (R-134a) and CFC-12 (R-12) A/C systems are different. Do not use
HFC-134a (R-134a) leak detection dye in CFC-12 (R-12) A/C system or CFC-12 (R-12) leak detection
dye in HFC-134a (R-134a) A/C system or A/C system damage may result.
The fluorescent properties of the dye will remain for over three (3) years unless a compressor malfunction
occurs.
ATC-12
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
IDENTIFICATION
NOTE:
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have a green label.
Vehicles without factory installed fluorescent dye have a blue label.
IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE
Vehicles with factory installed fluorescent dye have this identification

label on the front side of hood.
C
E
RJIA2721E
I
SHA867F

GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section.
PG-3, "Wiring Diagram POWER " in PG section.

GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" in GI section.
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section.
EJS000T9
ATC
ATC-13
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
EJS001F1
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE (CWV-615M COMPRESSOR)

Tool number
Tool name
KV99106100
Clutch disc wrench
Description
S-NT232
Removing shaft nut and clutch disc
RJIA0194E
KV99232340
Clutch disc puller
Removing clutch disc
S-NT376
KV99106200
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
S-NT235
WITH DIESEL ENGINE (DKV-11G COMPRESSOR)

Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV99231260
Clutch disc wrench
Removing shaft nut and clutch disc
RJIA0475E
KV992T0001
Clutch disc puller
Removing clutch disc
RJIA0476E
ATC-14
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
B
KV992T0002
Pulley installer
Installing pulley
C
RJIA0477E
D
KV99233130
Pulley puller
Removing pulley
E
RJIA0478E
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment
EJS00286
Never mix HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant and/or its specified lubricant with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant and/or
its lubricant.
Separate and non-interchangeable service equipment must be used for handling each type of refrigerant/lubricant.
Refrigerant container fittings, service hose fittings and service equipment fittings (equipment which handles
refrigerant and/or lubricant) are different between CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). This is to avoid
mixed use of the refrigerants/lubricant.
Adapters that convert one size fitting to another must never be used: refrigerant/lubricant contamination will
occur and compressor malfunction will result.
Tool number
Tool name
Description
ATC
Container color: Light blue
Container marking: HFC-134a (R134a)
Fitting size: Thread size
HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant
Large container 1/2 -16 ACME
S-NT196
Gasoline engine (CWV-615M):

KLH00-PAGS0
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
(DH-PS)
Diesel engine (DKV-11G):
KLH00-PAGR0
(DH-PR)
S-NT197
ATC-15
http://vnx.su
L
Gasoline engine (CWV-615M):
Type: Polyalkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type S (DH-PS)
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a)
wobble (swash) plate compressors
(Nissan only)
Diesel engine (DKV-11G):
Type: Polyalkylene glycol oil (PAG),
type R (DH-PR)
Application: HFC-134a (R-134a) vane
rotary compressors (Nissan only)
Lubricity: 40 m (1.4 Imp fl oz)
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
Recovery/Recycling
Recharging equipment
Function: Refrigerant recovery,

recycling and recharging
RJIA0195E
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
Electrical leak detector
SHA705EB
(J-43926)
Refrigerant dye leak detection kit
Kit includes:
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce
bottle
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
Power supply:
DC 12V (Battery terminal)
ZHA200H
(J-42220)
UV lamp and UV safety goggles
SHA438F
Power supply: DC 12V (Battery

terminal)
For checking refrigerant leak when
fluorescent dye is installed in A/C
system
Includes: UV lamp and UV safety
goggles
Application: For HFC-134a (R-134a)
PAG oil
Container: 1/4 ounce (7.4cc) bottle
(Includes self-adhesive dye
identification labels for affixing to
vehicle after charging system with
dye.)
(J-41447)
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent
leak detection dye
(Box of 24, 1/4 ounce bottles)
SHA439F
ATC-16
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
Tool number
Tool name
Description
(J-41459)
HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector
Use with J-41447, 1/4 ounce
bottle
For injecting 1/4 ounce of fluorescent

leak detection dye into A/C system
C
SHA440F
D
(J-43872)
Refrigerant dye cleaner
For cleaning dye spills
E
SHA441F
Identification:
Manifold gauge set (with hoses

and couplers)
The gauge face indicates HFC-134a

(R-134a).
1/2 -16 ACME
RJIA0196E
Hose color:
Service hoses
High-pressure side hose
Low- pressure side hose
Utility hose
Low hose: Blue with black stripe
High hose: Red with black stripe
Utility hose: Yellow with black stripe

or green with black stripe
Hose fitting to gauge:

S-NT201
ATC
1/2-16 ACME
L
Service couplers
High-pressure side coupler
Low -pressure side coupler
Hose fitting to service hose:
M14 1.5 fitting is optional or

permanently attached.
S-NT202
For measuring of refrigerant

Refrigerant weight scale
1/2 -16 ACME
S-NT200
Capacity:
Vacuum pump
(Including the isolator valve)
Air displacement: 4 CFM
Micron rating: 20 microns
Oil capacity: 482 g (17 oz.)

S-NT203
ATC-17
http://vnx.su
1/2 -16 ACME
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Refrigerant Cycle
PFP:KA990
EJS000TD
REFRIGERANT FLOW
The refrigerant flows in the standard pattern, that is, through the compressor, the condenser with liquid tank,
through the evaporator, and back to the compressor. The refrigerant evaporation through the evaporator coil is
controlled by an externally equalized expansion valve, located inside the evaporator case.
FREEZE PROTECTION (WITH GASOLINE ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR)

Under usual operating conditions, when the A/C is switched on, the compressor runs continuously, and the
evaporator pressure, and therefore, temperature is controlled by the V-6 variable displacement compressor to
prevent freeze up.
Refrigerant System Protection
EJS000TE
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR (WITH GASOLINE ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR)

The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high- or low-pressures by the refrigerant pressure sensor, located on the liquid tank. If the system pressure rises above, or falls below the specifications, the refrigerant pressure sensor detects the pressure inside the refrigerant line and sends the voltage signal to the ECM.
ECM makes the A/C relay go OFF and stops the compressor when pressure on the high-pressure side
detected by refrigerant pressure sensor is over about 2,746 kPa (27.46 bar, 28 kg/cm2 , 398 psi), or below
about 134 kPa (1.34 bar, 1.4 kg/cm2 , 20 psi).
DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH (WITH DIESEL ENGINE: DKV-11G COMPRESSOR)

The refrigerant system is protected against excessively high- or low-pressures by the dual-pressure switch,
located on the liquid tank. If the system pressure rises above or falls below the specifications, the dual-pressure switch opens to interrupt the compressor operation.
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (WITH GASOLINE ENGINE: CWV-615M COMPRESSOR)

The refrigerant system is also protected by a pressure relief valve, located in the rear head of the compressor.
When the pressure of refrigerant in the system increases to an unusual level [more than 3,727 kPa (37.27 bar,
38 kg/cm2 , 540 psi)], the release port on the pressure relief valve automatically opens and releases refrigerant into the atmosphere.
RJIA0676E
ATC-18
http://vnx.su
V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor (With Gasoline Engine: CWV-615M
Compressor)
EJS000TF
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The V-6 variable compressor differs from previous units. The vent temperatures of the V-6 variable compressor do not drop too far below 5C (41F) when:
Evaporator intake air temperature is less than 20C (68F).
Engine is running at speeds less than 1,500 rpm.
This is because the V-6 compressor provides a means of capacity control.
The V-6 variable compressor provides refrigerant control under varying conditions. During cold winters, it
may not produce high refrigerant pressure discharge (compared to previous units) when used with air
conditioning systems.
A clanking sound may occasionally be heard during refrigerant charge. The sound indicates that the tilt
angle of the wobble (swash) plate has changed and is not a malfunction.
For air conditioning systems with the V-6 compressor, the clutch remains engaged unless: the system
main switch, fan switch or ignition switch is turned OFF. When ambient (outside) temperatures are low or
when the amount of refrigerant is insufficient, the clutch is disengaged to protect the compressor.
A constant range of suction pressure is maintained when engine speed is greater than a certain value. It
normally ranges from 147 to 177 kPa (1.47 to 1.77 bar, 1.5 to 1.8 kg/cm2 , 21 to 26 psi) under varying conditions.
In previous compressors, however, suction pressure was reduced with increases in engine speed.
ATC
ATC-19
http://vnx.su
DESCRIPTION
General
The variable compressor is basically a swash plate type that changes piston stroke in response to the required
cooling capacity.
The tilt of the wobble (swash) plate allows the pistons stroke to change so that refrigerant discharge can be
continuously changed from 13.5 to 146 cm3 (0.824 to 8.91 cu in).
SJIA0631E
ATC-20
http://vnx.su
Operation
1.
2.
Operation Control Valve

Operation control valve is located in the suction port (low-pressure) side, and opens or closes in response
to changes in refrigerant suction pressure.
Operation of the valve controls the internal pressure of the crankcase.
The angle of the wobble (swash) plate is controlled between the crankcases internal pressure and the
piston cylinder pressure.
Maximum Cooling
Refrigerant pressure on the low-pressure side increases with an increase in heat loads.
When this occurs, the control valves bellows compress to open the low-pressure side valve and close the
high-pressure side valve.
This causes the following pressure changes:
The crankcases internal pressure to equal the pressure on the low-pressure side;
The cylinders internal pressure to be greater than the crankcases internal pressure.
Under this condition, the wobble (swash) plate is set to the maximum stroke position.
ATC
RHA473C
3.
Capacity Control
Refrigerant pressure on suction side is low during high speed driving or when ambient or interior temperature is low.
The bellows expands when refrigerant pressure on the suction pressure side drops below approximately
177 kPa (1.77 bar, 1.8 kg/cm2 , 26 psi).
Since suction pressure is low, it makes the suction port close and the discharge port open. Thus, crankcase pressure becomes high as high-pressure enters the crankcase.
The force acts around the journal pin near the swash (wobble) plate, and is generated by the pressure difference between before and behind the piston.
The drive lug and journal pin are located where the piston generates the highest pressure. Piston pressure is between suction pressure Ps and discharge pressure Pd, which is near suction pressure Ps. If
crankcase pressure Pc rises due to capacity control, the force around the journal pin makes the wobble
(swash) plate angle decrease and also the piston stroke decrease. In other words, crankcase pressure
ATC-21
http://vnx.su
increase triggers pressure difference between the piston and the crankcase. The pressure difference
changes the angle of the wobble (swash) plate.
RHA474C
ATC-22
http://vnx.su
Component Layout
EJS00280
NOTE:
This illustration is for RHD models. The layout for LHD models is symmetrically opposite.
ATC
RJIA2819E
ATC-23
http://vnx.su
LUBRICANT
LUBRICANT
Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor
PFP:KLG00
EJS000TH
The lubricant in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add lubricant to compressor when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage occurred. It is important to maintain the
specified amount.
If lubricant quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
Lack of lubricant: May lead to a seized compressor
Excessive lubricant: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
LUBRICANT
Name
Part number

(CWV-615M Compressor)
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S
KLH00-PAGS0
With diesel engine

(DKV-11G Compressor)
KLH00-PAGR0
LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION

Adjust the lubricant quantity according to the test group shown below.
1. CHECK LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION

Can lubricant return operation be performed?
A/C system works properly.
There is no evidence of a large amount of lubricant leakage.

CAUTION:
If excessive lubricant leakage is noted, do not perform the lubricant return operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
2. PERFORM LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION, PROCEEDING AS FOLLOWS:

1.
2.
3.
Start engine, and set the following conditions:

Test condition
Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
A/C switch: ON
Blower speed: Max. position
Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 to 30C (77 to 86F).]
Intake position: Recirculation (REC)
Perform lubricant return operation for about 10 minutes.
Stop engine.
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK REPLACEMENT PART

Should the compressor be replaced?
YES >> GO TO ATC-25, "LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT" .
NO
>> GO TO ATC-25, "LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR" .
ATC-24
http://vnx.su
LUBRICANT
LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of lubricant to the system.
Amount of lubricant to be added
B
Lubricant to be added to system

Part replaced
Amount of lubricant
m (Imp fl oz)
Remarks
Evaporator
75 (2.6)
Condenser
35 (1.2)
Liquid tank
10 (0.4)
30 (1.1)
Large leak
Small leak *1
In case of refrigerant leak

*1: If refrigerant leak is small, no addition of lubricant is needed.
LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Before connecting ACR4 to vehicle, check ACR4 gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If F
NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure lubricant discharged into
the recovery/recycling equipment.
G
Drain the lubricant from the old (removed) compressor into a graduated container and recover the amount
of lubricant drained.
Drain the lubricant from the new compressor into a separate, clean container.
H
Measure an amount of new lubricant installed equal to amount drained from old compressor. Add this
lubricant to new compressor through the suction port opening.
Measure an amount of new lubricant equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this lubricant
I
to new compressor through the suction port opening.
If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add another 5 m (0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant at this time.
Do not add this 5 m (0.2 Imp fl oz) of lubricant only when replaces the compressor.
ATC
ATC-25
http://vnx.su
LUBRICANT
RHA065DI
ATC-26
http://vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL

Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System
PFP:27500
A
EJS000TI
The LAN (Local Area Network) system consists of auto amp., mode door motor, air mix door motor and intake
door motor.
A configuration of these components is shown in the diagram below.
E
RJIA0480E
System Construction
EJS000TJ
A small network is constructed between the auto amp., air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door
motor. The auto amp. and motors are connected by data transmission lines and motor power supply lines. The
G
LAN network is built through the ground circuits of each door motor.
Addresses, motor opening angle signals, motor stop signals and error checking messages are all transmitted
through the data transmission lines connecting the auto amp. and each door motor.
The following functions are contained in LCUs built into air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door H
motor.
Address
Motor opening angle signal

I
Data transmission
Motor stop and drive decision

ATC
Opening angle sensor (PBR function)
Comparison
Decision (Auto amp. indicated value and motor opening angle comparison)
K
RHA350H
OPERATION
The auto amp. receives data from each of the sensors. The auto amp. sends mode door, air mix door and
intake door opening angle data to the mode door motor LCU, air mix door motor LCU and intake door motor
LCU.
The mode door motor, air mix door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
address signal. Opening angle indication signals received from the auto amp. and each of the motor position
sensors is compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently,
HOT/COLD, DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection data is
returned to the auto amp.
ATC-27
http://vnx.su
RHA351H
TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER

Auto amp. data is transmitted consecutively to each of the door motors following the form shown in figure
below.
Start:
Initial compulsory signal sent to each of the door motors.
Address:
Data sent from the auto amp. is selected according to data-based decisions made by the air mix door motor,
mode door motor and intake door motor.
If the addresses are identical, the opening angle data and error check signals are received by the door motor
LCUs. The LCUs then make the appropriate error decision. If the opening angle data is usual, door control
begins.
If an error exists, the received data is rejected and corrected data received. Finally, door control is based upon
the corrected opening angle data.
Opening Angle:
Data that shows the indicated door opening angle of each door motor.
Error Check:
Procedure by which sent and received data is checked for errors. Error data is then compiled. The error check
prevents corrupted data from being used by the air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor.
Error data can be related to the following symptoms.
Malfunction electrical frequency
Poor electrical connections
Signal leakage from transmission lines
Signal level fluctuation
ATC-28
http://vnx.su

Stop Signal:
At the end of each transmission, a stop operation, in-operation, or internal malfunction message is delivered to
the auto amp. This completes one data transmission and control cycle.
G
RHA352H
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)

The air mix door is automatically controlled so that in-vehicle temperature is maintained at a predetermined
value by the temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature and amount of sunload.
FAN SPEED CONTROL
I
Blower speed is automatically controlled by the temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and air mix door position.
With FAN control dial set to AUTO, the blower motor starts to gradually increase air flow volume.
When engine coolant temperature is low, the blower motor operation is delayed to prevent cool air from flow- ATC
ing.
INTAKE DOOR CONTROL

The intake doors are automatically controlled by the temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature, amount of sunload and ON-OFF operation of the compressor.
OUTLET DOOR CONTROL
The outlet door is automatically controlled by the temperature setting, ambient temperature, in-vehicle temperature, intake temperature and amount of sunload.
M
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL

The ECM controls compressor operation using input signals from the throttle position sensor, refrigerant pressure sensor (or dual-pressure switch) and auto amp.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
The self-diagnostic system is built into the auto amp. to quickly locate the cause of symptoms.
ATC-29
http://vnx.su

Description of Control System
EJS000TK
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the auto amp. (microcomputer) and outputs.
The relationship of these components is shown in the diagram below:
RJIA3093E
ATC-30
http://vnx.su

Control Operation
EJS004G9
F
SJIA0386E
MODE CONTROL DIAL

Controls the air discharge outlets.
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside air position.
When shifting mode control dial to DEF under the following conditions, compressor is turned ON. (A/C LED
ON)
FAN: ON
A/C: OFF
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL)

Increase or decrease the set temperature.
ATC
FAN CONTROL DIAL

Automatically or Manually control the blower speed. Twenty-five speeds are available for manual control.
Shifting fan control dial to AUTO, compressor is turned ON automatically.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH

When illumination is ON, rear window is defogged.
INTAKE SWITCH
When intake switch is ON, REC indicator turns ON, and air inlet is fixed to REC.
When press intake switch again, FRE indicator turns ON, and air inlet is fixed to FRE.
When intake switch is pressed for approximately 1.5 seconds or longer, REC and FRE indicators blink
twice. Then, automatic control mode is entered. Inlet status is displayed even during automatic control.
When DEF position or FRE indicator is turned ON, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC
switch is automatically turned OFF (fixed to FRE mode).
REC mode can be re-entered by pressing intake switch again. (Except DEF position)
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
(Pressing the A/C switch when the fan control dial is ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.)
ATC-31
http://vnx.su

Discharge Air Flow
EJS000TM
SJIA0441E
ATC-32
http://vnx.su

System Description
EJS000TN
SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION
I
SJIA0448E
ATC
RJIA2822E
ATC-33
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00004
EJS004GO
WORK FLOW
SHA900E
*1
ATC-65, "Operational Check".
SYMPTOM TABLE
Symptom
A/C system does not come on.
Reference Page
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for A/C System.
Air outlet does not change.
ATC-67, "Power
Supply and
Ground Circuit for
Auto Amp."
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-73, "Mode
Door Motor Circuit"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Air Mix Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-76, "Air Mix

Door Motor Circuit"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor. (LAN)
ATC-79, "Intake
Door Motor Circuit"
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning

under out of starting fan speed control.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor.
ATC-82, "Blower
Motor Circuit"
Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Magnet Clutch.
ATC-88, "Magnet
Clutch Circuit"
Insufficient cooling
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Cooling.
ATC-96, "Insufficient Cooling"
Insufficient heating
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
ATC-105, "Insufficient Heating"
Noise
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Noise.
ATC-107, "Noise"
Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Self-diagnosis.
Mode door motor does not operate normally.

Discharge air temperature does not change.
Air mix door motor does not operate normally.
Intake door does not change.
Intake door motor does not operate normally.
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
ATC-34
http://vnx.su
ATC-108, "Selfdiagnosis"
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EJS004GP
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ATC
RJIA0677E
ATC-35
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
RJIA2823E
ATC-36
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Schematic
EJS004GQ
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE
ATC
TJWA0077E
ATC-37
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WITH DIESEL ENGINE
TJWA0086E
ATC-38
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram A/C
EJS004GR
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE / LHD MODELS
ATC
TJWA0078E
ATC-39
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0079E
ATC-40
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ATC
TJWA0080E
ATC-41
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0081E
ATC-42
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE / RHD MODELS
A
ATC
TJWA0082E
ATC-43
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0083E
ATC-44
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ATC
TJWA0084E
ATC-45
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0085E
ATC-46
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WITH DIESEL ENGINE / LHD MODELS
A
ATC
TJWA0087E
ATC-47
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0088E
ATC-48
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ATC
TJWA0089E
ATC-49
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0090E
ATC-50
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
WITH DIESEL ENGINE / RHD MODELS
A
ATC
TJWA0091E
ATC-51
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0092E
ATC-52
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ATC
TJWA0093E
ATC-53
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0094E
ATC-54
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value
EJS004GS
Measure voltage between each terminal and ground by following terminals and reference value for auto amp.
D
RJIA2824E
PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT

E
RJIA0489E
TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR AUTO AMP.

Terminal No.
Wire
color
Ignition
switch
Condition
BR/Y
Power supply for IGN
ON
2
3
Power supply for BAT
OFF
Battery voltage
Ground
ON
Approx. 0
L/R
A/C (Compressor ON) signal
ON
Power supply for each door

motor
ON
In-vehicle sensor
R/B
Ambient sensor
10
OR
Sunload sensor
11
12
R/L
Item
Voltage
(V)
Battery voltage
Compressor: ON
Approx. 0
Compressor: OFF
Approx. 5
ATC
Battery voltage
Illumination ground
ON
Light switch: ON
Approx. 0
Power supply for illumination
ON
Light switch: ON
Approx. 12
Approx. 5.5
15
LAN signal
ON
HAK0652D
17
L/Y
18
19
LG/B
Fan control amp. control signal
ON
Blower motor feed back
ON
Fan ON signal (With gasoline

engine)
ON
Fan speed: 1-24th
Approx. 2.5 - 3.5
Fan speed: 25th
Approx. 9.0
Fan speed: 1st
Approx. 8.0
Blower fan: ON
Approx. 0
Blower fan: OFF
Approx. 5
ATC-55
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Terminal No.
Wire
color
20
L/W
Item
Power supply for IGN2
Ignition
switch
Condition
ON
Voltage
(V)
Battery voltage
At idle [after warming up,

approx. 80C (176F)]
21
GY
Water temperature sensor
ON
CAUTION:
The waveforms vary depending on coolant temperature
SKIA0056J
22
23
LG/B
B/W
Rear window defogger ON

signal
ON
Rear window defogger feed

back signal
ON
Rear window defogger: ON
Approx. 0
Rear window defogger: OFF
Approx. 12
Rear window defogger: ON
Approx. 12
Rear window defogger: OFF
Approx. 0
24
B/Y
Sensor ground
ON
25
BR/Y
Intake sensor
28
Power supply for ambient

temperature display
ON
Approx. 5
Approx. 0
30
PU
Compressor feed back signal
ON
When refrigerant pressure sensor connector is disconnected
Approx. 5
ATC-56
http://vnx.su
Approx. 0
-
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Self-diagnosis Function
EJS004GT
DESCRIPTION
The self-diagnostic system diagnoses sensors, door motors, blower motor, etc. by system line.
Self-diagnosis is step-1 to 7. There are two ways of changing method during self-diagnosis.
Switching to self-diagnosis step-1 to 4.

Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by starting the engine (turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON) and pressing A/C switch for at least 5 seconds. The A/C switch must
be pressed within 10 seconds after starting the engine (ignition switch is turned ON). This system will be
canceled by either pressing intake switch or turning the ignition switch OFF. Shifting from one step to
another is accomplished be means of turning fan control dial, as required.
Switching to self-diagnosis step-5 to 7 (Auxiliary mechanism).

Shifting from usual control to the self-diagnostic system is accomplished by starting the engine (turning
the ignition switch from OFF to ON) and pressing intake switch for at least 5 seconds. The intake switch
must be pressed within 10 seconds after starting the engine (ignition switch is turned ON). This system
will be canceled by either pressing A/C switch or turning the ignition switch OFF. Shifting from one step to
another is accomplished by means of turning fan control dial, as required.
ATC
ATC-57
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
RJIA2106E
ATC-58
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
A
1. SET IN SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE (STEP-1 TO 4)

1.
2.
3.
Set the fan control dial to OFF position.

Set in self-diagnostic mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting engine (ignition switch is turned
ON.), press A/C switch for at least 5 seconds.
CAUTION:
If battery voltage drops below 12V during diagnosis step-3, actuator speed becomes slower and as a
result, the system may generate an error even when operation is usual. To avoid this, start engine
before performing this diagnosis.
>> GO TO 2.
E
2. STEP-1: LEDS ARE CHECKED
Check intake and A/C switch LEDs illumination.

OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Refer to ATC-108, "Self-diagnosis" .
SJIA0389E
3. CHECK TO ADVANCE SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP-2

1.
Turn fan control dial to AUTO position.

CAUTION:
When switched to STEP-2, LED of REC position blinks for
approximately 25 seconds.
2. Advance to self-diagnosis STEP-2?
Check A/C switch LED illumination.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace controller.
ATC
SJIA0390E
4. CHECK TO RETURN SELF-DIAGNOSIS STEP-1

Turn fan control dial to OFF position.
Return to self-diagnosis STEP-1?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace controller.
ATC-59
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. STEP-2: SENSOR CIRCUITS ARE CHECKED FOR OPEN OR SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.

Turn mode control dial to AUTO position.
CAUTION:
3. Check A/C switch LED is illuminate.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
SJIA0391E
6. STEP-3: MODE DOOR AND INTAKE DOOR POSITIONS ARE CHECKED

1.
2.
Turn fan control dial to 1st12th speed.

Check A/C switch LED is illuminate.
CAUTION:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> GO TO 10.
SJIA0392E
7. STEP-4: OPERATION OF EACH ACTUATOR IS CHECKED

1.
2.
Turn fan control dial to 13th25th speed.

Change operation status of air conditioner by changing mode control dial position.
>> GO TO 8.
ATC-60
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. CHECK ACTUATORS
Refer to the following chart and confirm discharge air flow, air temperature, blower motor voltage and compressor operation.
B
D
RJIA0492E
E
Mode control dial position
STEP-No.*1
STEP-41
STEP-42
STEP-43
STEP-44
STEP-45
STEP-46
AUTO
VENT
B/L
FOOT or
FOOT2
D/F or D/F2
DEF
Mode door position
VENT
VENT
B/L
FOOT*2
D/F
DEF
Intake door position
REC
REC
REC
FRE
FRE
FRE
Air mix door position
FULL COLD
FULL COLD
FULL COLD
FULL HOT
FULL HOT
FULL HOT
Blower motor voltage
Approx. 4.5V
Approx. 10.5V
Approx. 8.5V
Approx. 8.5V
Approx. 8.5V
Approx. 12V
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Compressor
Checks must be made visually, by listening to any noise, or by touching air outlets with your hand, etc. for
I
improper operation.
*1: Step No. 41 to 46 are for differentiation and will not be displayed.
*2: FOOT position during automatic control. Refer to ATC-63, "AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION
ATC
SETTING TRIMMER" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Turn ignition switch OFF or intake switch ON.
K
2. INSPECTION END
NG
>> Air outlet does not change.
Go to Mode Door Motor Circuit. Refer to ATC-73, "Mode Door Motor Circuit" .
L
Go to Intake Door Motor Circuit. Refer to ATC-79, "Intake Door Motor Circuit" .
M
Go to Blower Motor Circuit. Refer to ATC-82, "Blower Motor Circuit" .
Magnet clutch does not engage.
Go to Magnet Clutch Circuit. Refer to ATC-88, "Magnet Clutch Circuit" .
Go to Air Mix Door Motor Circuit. Refer to ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit" .
ATC-61
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
9. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING SENSOR

Refer to the following chart.
*1: Perform self-diagnosis STEP-2 under sunshine.
When performing indoors, aim a light (more than 60W) at sunload
sensor, otherwise LED of A/C switch will not indicate despite that
sunload sensor is functioning properly.
CAUTION:
SJIA0393E
Unusual
VENT
B/L
FOOT or FOOT2
A/C LED: OFF
D/F or D/F2
DEF
Malfunctioning sensor (Including circuits)
Reference page
Ambient sensor
*2
In-vehicle sensor
*3
Sunload sensor *1
*4
Intake sensor
*5
Air mix door motor (LCU) PBR
*6
*2: ATC-109, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR" .

*3: ATC-112, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR" .
*4: ATC-114, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR" .
*5: ATC-117, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR" .
*6: ATC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT" .
>> INSPECTION END
10. CHECK MALFUNCTIONING DOOR MOTOR POSITION SWITCH

Mode and/or intake door motor position switch(es) is/are malfunctioning.
CAUTION:
Unusual
Mode or intake door position
Reference page
REC LED: ON
Mode door motor
*1
FRE LED: ON
Intake door motor
*2
*1: ATC-75, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR

MOTOR" .
*2: ATC-81, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR" .
>> INSPECTION END
ATC-62
http://vnx.su
SJIA0394E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER
The trimmer compensates for differences in range of 3C between temperature setting (Temperature control
dial position) and temperature felt by driver.
Operating procedures for this trimmer are as follows:
1. Set temperature at 25C.
2. Set fan control dial to OFF.
4. Set in self-diagnostic mode as follows. Within 10 seconds after starting engine (ignition switch is turned
ON.), press intake switch for at least 5 seconds.
5. Turn temperature control dial as desired. Temperature will change at a rate of 1C each time a dial is
turned.
LED status of each switch

Setting temperature
FRE
REC
A/C
3C
ON
ON
ON
2C
ON
ON
OFF
1C
ON
OFF
ON
0C (Initial setting)
OFF
OFF
OFF
1C
OFF
OFF
ON
2C
OFF
ON
OFF
3C
OFF
ON
ON
When battery cable is disconnected, trimmer operation is canceled. Temperature set becomes that of initial
condition, i.e. 0C.
I
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER
Wind distribution ratio in FOOT mode can be set.

ATC
1. Set temperature at 25C.
2. Set fan control dial to AUTO.
K
5. Turn temperature control dial as desired.
L
RJIA2825E
ATC-63
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
LED status of each switch
Type
FRE
REC
A/C
Type-A (initial setting)
OFF
OFF
ON
Type-B
OFF
ON
OFF
Type-C
OFF
ON
ON
Type-D
ON
OFF
OFF
AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION

When ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON, inlet port can be set to AUTO or manual.
1. Set fan control dial to 1st-25th speed.
4. Press intake switch as desired.
LED status
of FRE
position
LED status
of REC position
Setting status
OFF
OFF
AUTO control
AUTO control
OFF
ON
AUTO control (Initial setting)
Manual REC status is memorized.

(Initial setting)
ON
OFF
Manual FRE status is memorized.
AUTO control
ON
ON
Manual FRE status is memorized.
Manual REC status is memorized.
FRE
REC
ATC-64
http://vnx.su
Setting changeover method
Intake SW: ON
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operational Check
EJS004GU
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
: Engine running at usual operating temperature

B
CHECKING BLOWER
1.
Turn fan control dial to 1st speed. Blower should operate on low
speed.
2. Turn fan control dial to 2nd speed, and continue checking
blower speed until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on Max. speed.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-82, "Blower Motor
Circuit" .
If OK, continue the check.
E
SJIA0395E
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR

1.
Turn mode control dial to each position.
I
SJIA0396E
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to ATC-32, "Discharge Air Flow" .
Intake door position is checked in the next step.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-73, "Mode Door
Motor Circuit" .
NOTE:
Confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged (sound or visual
inspection) and intake door position is at FRESH when the D/F, D/F2
or DEF position is selected.
ATC
RJIA0492E
CHECKING INTAKE DOOR

1.
2.
3.
Press intake switch. Recirculation indicator should illuminate.

Press intake switch again. Fresh indicator should illuminate.
Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-79, "Intake Door
Motor Circuit" .
SJIA0397E
ATC-65
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Turn temperature control dial until 18C.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-96, "Insufficient
Cooling" .
SJIA0398E
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE

1. Turn temperature control dial until 32C.
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-105, "Insufficient
Heating" .
SJIA0399E
CHECKING A/C SWITCH

1.
2.

Press A/C switch.
Confirm that the compressor clutch engages (sound or visual
inspection). (Discharge air and blower speed will depend on
ambient, in-vehicle, and set temperatures.)
If NG, go to ATC-67, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto
Amp." , then if necessary, trouble diagnosis procedure for ATC-88,
"Magnet Clutch Circuit" .
If all operational checks are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go
to Incident Simulation Tests in GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving conditions environment. If symptom appears, refer to
ATC-34, "SYMPTOM TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
ATC-66
http://vnx.su
SJIA0400E
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp.
EJS004GV
SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
RJIA2826E
*1
*2
ATC
ATC-68, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM".
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Auto Amp. (Automatic Amplifier)
The auto amp. has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor, mode door motor, intake door motor,
blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The auto amp. is unitized with control mechanisms. Signals from
various switches and Potentio Temperature Control (PTC) are
directly entered into auto amp.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into auto amp. to provide
quick check of malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system.
RJIA2824E
ATC-67
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Potentio Temperature Control (PTC)
The PTC is built into the auto amp. It can be set at an interval of 1C
in the 18C to 32C temperature range by turning the temperature
control dial.
SJIA0402E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM

SYMPTOM: A/C system does not come on.
RJIA0504E
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
Disconnect auto amp. connector.

Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 1 (BR/Y), 2 (L), 20 (L/W) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
OFF
ACC
ON
1 (BR/Y)
Approx.
0V
Approx.
0V
Battery
voltage
M52
2 (L)
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
M52
20 (L/W)
Approx.
0V
Approx.
0V
Battery
voltage
Auto amp.
connector
Terminal No.
(wire color)
M52
(-)
Ground
RJIA2856E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check 10A fuses (Nos. 15 and 28) and 15A fuses (Nos. 19 and 24), located in the fuse block (J/
B). Refer to PG-78, "FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)" .
If fuses are OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace if necessary.
If fuses are NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace if necessary.
ATC-68
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AUTO AMP.

1.
2.

Check continuity between auto amp. harness connector M52
terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace auto amp.
NG
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
RJIA2857E
LAN System Circuit
EJS004L0
SYMPTOM: Mode door motor, intake door motor and/or air mix door motor(s) does not operate normally.
F
ATC
K
RJIA0507E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AUTO AMP.
1.
2.

Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 5 (W) and ground.
5 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
RJIA2858E
ATC-69
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK SIGNAL FOR AUTO AMP.

Confirm A/C LAN signal between auto amp. harness connector M52
terminal 15 (G) and ground using an oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Voltage
Auto amp.
connector
Terminal No.
(wire color)
()
M52
15 (G)
Ground
RJIA3128E
HAK0652D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR EACH DOOR MOTOR

Check voltage between mode door motor harness connector M37
terminal 1 (W), air mix door motor harness connector M38 terminal 1
(W) or intake door motor harness connector M47 terminal 1 (W) and
ground.
1 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
RJIA1988E
4. CHECK SIGNAL FOR EACH DOOR MOTOR

Confirm A/C LAN signal between mode door motor harness connector M37 terminal 3 (G), air mix door motor harness connector M38
terminal 3 (G) or intake door motor harness connector M47 terminal
3 (G) and ground using an oscilloscope.
Terminals
(+)
Door motor
connector
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Mode door
: M37
3 (G)
Air mix door

: M38
3 (G)
Intake door
: M47
3 (G)
()
Voltage
RJIA1989E
Ground
HAK0652D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
ATC-70
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect each door motor connector.
Check continuity between mode door motor harness connector
M37 terminal 2 (B), air mix door motor harness connector M38
terminal 2 (B) or intake door motor harness connector M47 terminal 2 (B) and ground.
2 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
D
RJIA1990E
6. CHECK MOTOR OPERATION

2. Disconnect each door motor connector.
3. Reconnect each door motor connector.
5. Confirm each door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Return to operate normally.)
Poor contact in motor connector.
NG
>> (Does not operate normally.)
GO TO 7.
7. CHECK AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
2. Disconnect mode, air mix, and intake door motor connectors.
3. Reconnect air mix and intake door motor connectors.
5. Confirm air mix door motor and intake door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Air mix and intake door motors operate normally.)
Replace mode door motor.
NG
>> (Air mix and intake door motors does not operate normally.)
GO TO 8.
8. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR OPERATION

2. Disconnect air mix door motor connector.
3. Reconnect mode door motor connector.
5. Confirm mode door motor and intake door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Mode and intake door motors operate normally.)
Replace air mix door motor.
NG
>> (Mode and intake door motors does not operate normally.)
GO TO 9.
ATC-71
http://vnx.su
ATC
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
9. CHECK MODE DOOR MOTOR AND AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR OPERATION
2. Disconnect intake door motor connector.
3. Reconnect air mix door motor connector.
5. Confirm mode door motor and air mix door motor operation.
OK or NG
OK
>> (Mode and air mix door motors operate normally.)
Replace intake door motor.
NG
>> (Mode and air mix door motors does not operate normally.)
Replace auto amp.
ATC-72
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door Motor Circuit
EJS004GX
SYMPTOM:
Mode door motor does not operate normally.
INSPECTION FLOW
C
ATC
RJIA3095E
*1
ATC-32, "Discharge Air Flow".
*2
*3
ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No. 1.
*4
ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No. 5 to

7.
*5
ATC-109, "Ambient Sensor Circuit".
*6
ATC-111, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit".
*7
ATC-114, "Sunload Sensor Circuit".
*8
ATC-117, "Intake Sensor Circuit".
*9
ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
ATC-73
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*10 ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No. 9.
*11 ATC-69, "LAN System Circuit".
*12 ATC-134, "MODE DOOR MOTOR".
*13 ATC-34, "SYMPTOM TABLE".
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
Auto amp.
Mode door motor (LCU)
A/C LAN system (PBR built-in air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Sunload sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The auto amp. receives data from each of the sensors. The auto amp. sends air mix door, mode door and
intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor
LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEF/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection
data is returned to the auto amp.
RJIA2828E
Mode Door Control Specification
RHA384HA
ATC-74
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It
rotates so that air is discharged from the outlet set by the auto amp.
Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which activates the mode door.
D
RJIA0513E
H
RJIA0514E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR

SYMPTOM: Mode door motor does not operate normally.
Perform diagnostic procedure. Refer to ATC-69, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT" .
ATC
ATC-75
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
EJS004GY
SYMPTOM:
Air mix door motor does not operate.
INSPECTION FLOW
RJIA3097E
*3
*1
*2
*4
*5
ATC-111, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit". *6
*7
*8
ATC-78, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR

MOTOR".
*11 ATC-69, "LAN System Circuit".
ATC-76
http://vnx.su
*9
ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No. 5 to 7.

ATC-34, "SYMPTOM TABLE".
*12 ATC-135, "AIR MIX DOOR

MOTOR".
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
Auto amp.
Air mix door motor (LCU)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Sunload sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The auto amp. receives data from each of the sensors. The auto amp sends air mix door, mode door and
intake door opening angle data to the air mix door motor LCU, mode door motor LCU and intake door motor
LCU.
The air mix door motor, mode door motor and intake door motor read their respective signals according to the
sensors are compared by the LCUs in each motor with the existing decision and opening angles. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEF/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION operation is selected. The new selection
data is returned to the auto amp.
ATC
RHA424GB
Air Mix Door Control Specification
RHA457H
ATC-77
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door Motor
The air mix door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It
rotates so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set
by the auto amp. The air mix door position is fed back to the auto
amp. by PBR built-in air mix door motor.
RJIA0516E
RJIA0517E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR

SYMPTOM: Discharge air temperature does not change.
ATC-78
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor Circuit
EJS004YM
SYMPTOM:
INSPECTION FLOW
C
ATC
RJIA3099E
*2
*3
ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No.5 to

7.
*4
*5
ATC-111, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit". *6
*7
*8
ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". *9
*11
ATC-69, "LAN System Circuit".
*1
ATC-79
http://vnx.su
*12 ATC-128, "INTAKE DOOR

MOTOR".
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
Auto amp.
Intake door motor (LCU)
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Sunload sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
The intake door control determines intake door position based on the ambient temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When set mode control dial to D/F, D/F2 or DEF position, or OFF
position, the auto amp. sets the intake door at the FRESH position.
RJIA2831E
Intake Door Control Specification
RHA383H
ATC-80
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that
air is drawn from inlets set by the auto amp. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
D
RJIA0519E
H
RJIA0520E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR

SYMPTOM: Intake door motor does not operate normally.
ATC
ATC-81
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Blower Motor Circuit
EJS004YN
SYMPTOM:
Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under out of starting fan speed control.
INSPECTION FLOW
RJIA3101E
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
ATC-111, "In-vehicle Sensor Circuit".
ATC-82
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*7
*8
*10
*11 ATC-84, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR".
*9
*12
QR engine; (WITH EURO-OBD) EC164, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR" .

QR engine; (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)
EC-649, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
YD engine; (WITH EURO-OBD) EC1087, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
YD engine; (WITHOUT EURO-OBD)
EC-1435, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Fan speed control system components are:
Auto amp.
Fan control amp.
In-vehicle sensor
Ambient sensor
Sunload sensor
Intake sensor
System Operation
ATC
RJIA2833E
Automatic Mode
In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the auto amp. based on input from the PBR,
in-vehicle sensor, sunload sensor, intake sensor and ambient sensor.
The blower motor applied voltage ranges from approximately 4 volts (lowest speed) to 12 volts (highest
speed).
The control blower speed (in the range of 4 to 12V), the auto amp. supplies a gate voltage to the fan control
amp. Based on this voltage, the fan control amp. controls the voltage supplied to the blower motor.
ATC-83
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Starting Fan Speed Control
Start Up from COLD SOAK Condition (Automatic mode)
In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 56C (133F), the blower will not
operate for a short period of time (up to 150 seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the
ambient and engine coolant temperature.
In the most extreme case (very low ambient) the blower starting delay will be 150 seconds as described
above. After this delay, the blower will operate at low speed until the engine coolant temperature rises above
56C (133F), and then the blower speed will increase to the objective speed.
Start Up from Usual or HOT SOAK Condition (Automatic mode)
The blower will begin operation momentarily after the A/C switch is pushed. The blower speed will gradually
rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time depends on the objective
blower speed).
Blower Speed Compensation

Sunload
When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be operating at low
speed. The low speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower
low speed is usual low speed (approx. 4V). During high sunload conditions, the auto amp. causes the blower
fan speed to increase.(Approx. 7V)
Fan Speed Control Specification
RJIA0522E
Fan Control Amp.
The fan control amp. is located on the intake unit. The fan control
amp. receives a gate voltage from the auto amp. to steplessly maintain the blower fan motor voltage in the 4 to 12 volt range.
RJIA0523E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR

SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
RHA467GA
ATC-84
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect blower motor connector.

Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M65
1 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 19 and
24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78,
"FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)" .
If OK, check harness for open circuit. Repair or replace if necessary.
If NG, replace fuse and check harness for short circuit. Repair or replace if necessary.
D
RJIA2860E
2. CHECK FAN FEED BACK CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Reconnect blower motor connector.

Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 18 (R) and ground.
18 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 9.
I
RJIA2861E
3. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR
ATC
Refer to ATC-87, "Blower Motor" .

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace blower motor.
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.

Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
Terminals
(+)
Fan control
amp. connector
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(-)
M67
3 (R)
Ground
Condition
Voltage
Fan speed: 1st
Approx. 8V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
RJIA2862E
ATC-85
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR FAN CONTROL AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect fan control amp. connector.
Check continuity between fan control amp. harness connector
1 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
RJIA2863E
6. CHECK FOR AUTO AMP. OUTPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
Reconnect fan control amp. connector.

Check voltage between fan control amp. harness connector
M67 terminal 2 (L/Y) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Fan control
amp. connector
M67
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(-)
Condition
Voltage
Fan speed: 1st

- 24th
Approx. 2.5 3.5V
Fan
speed:25th
Approx. 9.0V
RJIA2864E
2 (L/Y)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> If the voltage is less than 2.5V: GO TO 7.
If the voltage is more than 9.0V: GO TO 8.
7. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AUTO AMP. AND FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect auto amp. connector and fan control amp. connector.
terminal 17 (L/Y) and fan control amp. harness connector M67
terminal 2 (L/Y).
17 2
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace fan control amp.
NG
RJIA2865E
ATC-86
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
8. CHECK FAN CONTROL AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect fan control amp. connector.
Check continuity between fan control amp. connector M67 terminal 2 and 1.
2 1
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fan control amp.
D
SJIA0476E
9. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AUTO AMP. AND FAN CONTROL AMP.
1.
2.

terminal 18 (R) and fan control amp. harness connector M67 terminal 3 (R).
18 3
OK or NG
OK
NG
H
RJIA2867E
Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of blower motor.
Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside intake unit.
ATC
L
RJIA0532E
ATC-87
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Magnet Clutch Circuit
EJS004YO
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
INSPECTION FLOW
RJIA3103E
*3
ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE", see No. 5 to

7.
*1
*2
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
ATC-89, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH".
*9
ATC-102, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE".
ATC-88
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Auto amp. controls compressor operation by ambient temperature, intake air temperature (with diesel engine)
and signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control (With Gasoline Engine)
Auto amp. will turn compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by ambient sensor.
When ambient temperatures are higher than 2C (28F), compressor turns ON. Compressor turns OFF when ambient temperatures
are lower than 5C (23F).
E
RHA094GB
Evaporator Freeze Protection Control (With Diesel Engine)

F
Auto amp. will turn compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by intake sensor.
When intake air temperatures are higher than 4C (39F), compressor turns ON. Compressor turns OFF when intake temperatures are
lower than 2.5C (37F).
RHA094GD
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH

SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
ATC
RJIA2835E
ATC-89
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect compressor connector.

Start the engine.
Press A/C switch.
Check voltage between compressor harness connector E34 terminal 1 (L/R) and ground.
1 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
RJIA2869E
2. CHECK MAGNET CLUTCH CIRCUIT

Check for operation sound when applying battery voltage direct current to terminal.
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Repair harness or connector.
2. Go to self-diagnosis procedure ATC-59, "FUNCTION
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" and perform selfdiagnosis STEP-4. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is usual.
NG
>> 1. Replace magnet clutch. Refer to ATC-146, "Removal
and Installation of Compressor Clutch" .
RJIA2005E
2. Go to self-diagnosis procedure ATC-59, "FUNCTION
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" and perform self-diagnosis STEP-4. Confirm that magnet
clutch operation is usual.
3. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND COMPRESSOR

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect A/C relay connector.
Check continuity between A/C relay harness connector E5 terminal 5 (L/R) and compressor harness connector E34 terminal 1
(L/R).
51
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
RJIA2870E
ATC-90
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR A/C RELAY

1.
2.

Check voltage between A/C relay harness connector E5 terminal 1 (BR/Y), 3 (BR/Y) and ground.
1 Ground
3 Ground
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 10A fuse [No. 15
located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78, "FUSE
BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)" .
D
RJIA2871E
5. CHECK A/C RELAY AFTER DISCONNECTING IT
Refer to ATC-94, "A/C Relay" .

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> 1. Replace A/C relay.
2. Go to self-diagnosis procedure ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" and
perform self-diagnosis STEP-4. Confirm that magnet clutch operation is usual.
6. CHECK COIL SIDE CIRCUIT OF A/C RELAY

1.
2.
3.
4.

Reconnect A/C relay connector.
Start the engine.
Check voltage between ECM harness connector F43 terminal
105 (BR/W) or 19 (L) and ground.
105 Ground (Gasoline engine)
19 Ground (Diesel engine)
ATC
: Battery voltage
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
L
RJIA2836E
7. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Refer to ATC-109, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" .

OK or NG
OK
>> With gasoline engine: GO TO 8.
With diesel engine: GO TO 14.
NG
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part(s).
8. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR (QR ENGINE)

Refer to ATC-94, "Refrigerant Pressure Sensor (With Gasoline Engine)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
ATC-91
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
9. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR AUTO AMP. (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL)

1.
2.

Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 4 (L/R) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Auto amp.
connector
Condition
Terminal No.
(wire color)
M52
4 (L/R)
Voltage
(-)
Ground
A/C SW: ON
(Blower motor
operates.)
Approx. 0V
A/C SW: OFF
Approx. 5V
RJIA2873E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
>> If the voltage is approx. 5V when the A/C switch is ON: Replace the auto amp.
If the voltage is approx. 0V when the A/C switch is OFF: GO TO 12.
10. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR AUTO AMP. (FAN ON SIGNAL)

Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal
19 (LG/B) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Auto amp.
connector
Condition
Terminal No.
(wire color)
M52
19 (LG/B)
Voltage
(-)
Ground
Blower fan: ON
(Blower motor
operates.)
Approx. 0V
Fan contorol dial:

OFF
Approx. 5V
RJIA2874E
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> If the voltage is approx. 5V when the blower motor is ON: Replace the auto amp.
If the voltage is approx. 0V when the blower motor is OFF: GO TO 11.
11. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect ECM connector and auto amp. connector.
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F43 terminal
96 (LG/B) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 19
(LG/B).
96 19
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
RJIA2837E
ATC-92
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
12. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN ECM AND AUTO AMP. (QR ENGINE)
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect ECM connector and auto amp. connector.
Check continuity between ECM harness connector F43 terminal
110 (L/R) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 4 (L/
R).
110 4
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 13.
NG
D
RJIA2838E
13. CHECK VOLTAGE FOR AUTO AMP. (COMPRESSOR ON SIGNAL)
Check voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal

4 (L/R) and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Auto amp.
connector
M52
4 (L/R)
Condition
Voltage
A/C SW: ON
(Blower motor
operates.)
Approx. 0V
A/C SW: OFF
Approx. 5V
(-)
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Ground
H
RJIA2873E
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 17.
ATC
14. CHECK DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH (YD ENGINE)

Refer to ATC-95, "Dual-pressure Switch (With Diesel Engine)" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 15.
NG
>> Replace the dual-pressure switch.
15. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AUTO AMP. AND DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect the auto amp. connector.
terminal 4 (L/R) and dual-pressure switch harness connector
E40 terminal 2 (L/R).
42
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 16.
NG
RJIA0545E
ATC-93
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
16. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH AND COMBINATION

METER
1.
2.
Disconnect the combination meter connector.

Check continuity between dual-pressure switch harness connector E40 terminal 1 (PU/W) and combination meter harness
connector M44 terminal 7 (SB).
17
OK or NG
OK
>> Check DI-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptom" in
DI.
NG
SJIA0432E
17. CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR

Refer to EC-473, "REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR" (WITH EUR-OBD) or EC-911, "REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE SENSOR" (WITHOUT EURO-OBD).
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END.
NG
A/C Relay
Check continuity between terminal Nos. 3 and 5.
Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminal Nos. 1

and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
If NG, replace relay.
RHA638H
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor (With Gasoline Engine)

The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the liquid tank.
RJIA0690E
ATC-94
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
C
RJIA2954E
Dual-pressure Switch (With Diesel Engine)

Compressor: ON
Compressor: OFF
kPa (bar, kg/cm2 , psi)
Low-pressure side
186 (1.86, 1.9, 27)
177 (1.77, 1.8, 26)
High-pressure side
1,569 (15.7, 16, 228)
2,746 (27.5, 28, 398)
G
RJIA0691E
Thermal Protector (With diesel engine)

Check continuity between compressor harness terminal and field
coil.
ATC
K
RHA671H
ATC-95
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Cooling
EJS004H2
SYMPTOM: Insufficient cooling
INSPECTION FLOW
SJIA0408E
*3
*1
*2
*4
QR engine; EM-13, "Checking Drive

Belts" or YD engine; EM-137,
"Checking Drive Belts" .
*5
ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit". *6
*7
ATC-63, "AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING

TRIMMER".
*8
ATC-96
http://vnx.su
*9

ATC-100, "Test Reading (QR
Engine)" or ATC-101, "Test Reading
(YD Engine)" .
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*10
*13
ATC-82, "Blower Motor Circuit".
*11 ATC-88, "Magnet Clutch Circuit".
ATC-98, "PERFORMANCE TEST

DIAGNOSIS".
*12 QR engine; (WITH EURO-OBD) EC351, "System Description" .

EC-752, "System Description" .
YD engine; (WITH EURO-OBD) EC1116, "System Description" .
EC-1465, "System Description" .
ATC
ATC-97
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS
RJIA1601E
*1
ATC-100, "PERFORMANCE
CHART".
*4
ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
*2
ATC-100, "PERFORMANCE
CHART".
ATC-98
http://vnx.su
*3
ATC-102, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE".
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
A
ATC
RJIA3107E
*1
ATC-146, "Removal and Installation

of Compressor Clutch".
*2
ATC-82, "Blower Motor Circuit" .
ATC-99
http://vnx.su
*3

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
PERFORMANCE CHART
Test Condition
Testing must be performed as follows:
Vehicle location
Indoors or in the shade (in a well-ventilated place)
Doors
Closed
Door windows
Open
Hood
Open
TEMP.
Max. COLD
Mode control dial
(Ventilation) set
Intake switch
(Recirculation) set
Max. speed set
Fan (blower) speed

Engine speed
Idle speed
Operate the air conditioning system for 10 minutes before taking measurements.
Test Reading (QR Engine)

Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table
Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator

C (F)
Air temperature
C (F)
50 - 60
60 - 70
25 (77)
10.0 - 11.6 (50 - 53)
30 (86)
13.9 - 16.2 (57 - 61)
35 (95)
17.8 - 21.4 (64 - 71)
25 (77)
11.6 - 13.9 (53 - 57)
30 (86)
16.2 - 18.9 (61 - 66)
35 (95)
21.4 - 24.5 (71 - 76)
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table

Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
50 - 70
High-pressure (Discharge side)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
Air temperature
C (F)
kPa (bar, kg/cm , psi)
30 (86)
980 - 1,180
(9.8 - 11.8, 9.99 - 12.04, 142 - 171)
230 - 270
(2.3 - 2.7, 2.35 - 2.75, 33 - 39)
35 (95)
1,180 - 1,390
(11.8 - 13.9, 12.04 - 14.18, 171 - 202)
260 - 310
(2.6 - 3.1, 2.65 - 3.16, 38 - 45)
40 (104)
1,400 - 1,580
(14.0 - 15.8, 14.28 - 16.12, 203 - 229)
300 - 350
(3.0 - 3.5, 3.06 - 3.57, 44 - 51)
ATC-100
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Test Reading (YD Engine)
A
Recirculating-to-discharge Air Temperature Table

Inside air (Recirculating air) at blower assembly inlet
Relative humidity
%
Air temperature
C (F)
50 - 60
60 - 70
Discharge air temperature at center ventilator

C (F)
20 (68)
6.5 - 9.0 (44 - 48)
25 (77)
12 - 14 (54 - 57)
30 (86)
15.5 - 18.8 (60 - 66)
35 (95)
20.4 - 24.0 (69 - 75)
20 (68)
9.0 - 11.0 (48 - 52)
25 (77)
14.0 - 16.5 (57 - 62)
30 (86)
18.8 - 21.5 (66 - 71)
35 (95)
24 - 27 (75 - 81)
Ambient Air Temperature-to-operating Pressure Table

F
Ambient air
Relative humidity
%
50 - 70
High-pressure (Discharge side)
Low-pressure (Suction side)
Air temperature
C (F)
20 (68)
765 - 922
(7.65 - 9.22, 7.8 - 9.4, 111 - 134)
177 - 226
(1.77 - 2.26, 1.8 - 2.3, 26 - 33)
25 (77)
922 - 1,020
(9.22 - 10.20, 9.4 - 10.4, 134 - 148)
196 - 245
(1.96 - 2.45, 2.0 - 2.5, 28 - 36)
30 (86)
1,177 - 1,451
(11.77 - 14.51, 12.0 - 14.8, 171 - 210)
235 - 284
(2.35 - 2.84, 2.4 - 2.9, 34 - 41)
35 (95)
1,373 - 1,667
(13.73 - 16.67, 14.0 - 17.0, 199 - 242)
275 - 333
(2.75 - 3.33, 2.8 - 3.4, 40 - 48)
40 (104)
1,618 - 1,961
(16.18 - 19.61, 16.5 - 20.0, 235 - 284)
333 - 392
(3.33 - 3.92, 3.4 - 4.0, 48 - 57)
ATC
ATC-101
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE
Whenever systems high and/or low side pressure(s) is/are unusual, diagnose using a manifold gauge. The
marker above the gauge scale in the following tables indicates the standard (usual) pressure range. Since the
standard (usual) pressure, however, differs from vehicle to vehicle, refer to above table (Ambient air temperature-to-operating pressure table).
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High

Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Pressure is reduced soon after

water is splashed on condenser.
Excessive refrigerant charge in

refrigeration cycle
Air suction by cooling fan is

insufficient.
Insufficient condenser cooling

performance
1. Condenser fins are clogged.
Corrective action
Reduce refrigerant until specified pressure is obtained.
Clean condenser.
Check and repair cooling fan

as necessary.
2. Improper fan rotation of cooling fan

Both high- and low-pressure
sides are too high.
AC359A
Low-pressure pipe is not

cold.
When compressor is stopped
high-pressure value quickly
drops by approximately 196
kPa (1.96 bar, 2 kg/cm2 , 28
psi). It then decreases gradually thereafter.
Engine tends to overheat.
An area of the low-pressure

pipe is colder than areas
near the evaporator outlet.
Plates are sometimes covered with frost.
Poor heat exchange in condenser

(After compressor operation
stops, high-pressure decreases
too slowly.)
Air in refrigeration cycle
Evacuate repeatedly and

recharge system.
Engine cooling systems malfunction.
Check and repair each engine

cooling system.
Excessive liquid refrigerant

on low-pressure side
Excessive refrigerant discharge flow
Expansion valve is open a little compared with the specification.
Replace expansion valve.
Improper expansion valve

adjustment
High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low

Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
High-pressure side is too high and

low-pressure side is too low.
Upper side of condenser and
high-pressure side are hot,
however, liquid tank is not so
hot.
High-pressure tube or parts

located between compressor
and condenser are clogged or
crushed.
AC360A
ATC-102
http://vnx.su
Check and repair or replace

malfunctioning parts.
Check lubricant for contamination.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High
Gauge indication
High-pressure side is too low and
low-pressure side is too high.
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
High- and low-pressure sides

become equal soon after compressor operation stops.
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
Damaged inside compressor

packings
No temperature difference
between high- and low-pressure sides
Compressor pressure operation is improper.
Damaged inside compressor

packings.
AC356A
Corrective action
Replace compressor.
C
Replace compressor.
Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low

Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Both high- and low-pressure sides

are too low.
AC353A
There is a big temperature

difference between liquid
tank outlet and inlet. Outlet
temperature is extremely
low.
Probable cause
Liquid tank inside is slightly

clogged.
Corrective action
Replace liquid tank.
Liquid tank inlet and expansion valve are frosted.

Temperature of expansion
valve inlet is extremely low
as compared with areas
near liquid tank.
Expansion valve inlet may
be frosted.
There is a big temperature difference between expansion

valve inlet and outlet while the
valve itself is frosted.
High-pressure pipe located

between liquid tank and
expansion valve is clogged.
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
Low refrigerant charge
Leaking fittings or components

Expansion valve closes a little
compared with the specification.
1. Improper expansion valve

adjustment
2. Malfunctioning expansion
valve
Check refrigerant for leaks.

Refer to ATC-160, "Checking
for Refrigerant Leaks" .
Air flow volume is not enough

or is too low.
Low-pressure pipe is clogged

or crushed.
Evaporator is frozen.
ATC-103
http://vnx.su
ATC
Remove foreign particles by

using compressed air.
Replace expantion valve.
3. Outlet and inlet may be

clogged.
An area of the low-pressure
pipe is colder than areas near
the evaporator outlet.
Temperature difference
occurs somewhere in highpressure side
Expansion valve and liquid

tank are warm or only cool
when touched.
Check and repair malfunctioning parts.
Check intake sensor circuit.

Refer to ATC-117, "Intake
Sensor Circuit" (With diesel engine)
Replace compressor.
Repair evaporator fins.
Refer to ATC-82, "Blower

Motor Circuit" .
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative
Gauge indication
Low-pressure side sometimes
becomes negative.
Refrigerant cycle
AC354A
Air conditioning system

does not function and does
not cyclically cool the compartment air.
The system constantly functions for a certain period of
time after compressor is
stopped and restarted.
Probable cause
Refrigerant does not discharge cyclically.
Moisture is frozen at expansion valve outlet and inlet.
Water is mixed with refrigerant.
Corrective action
Drain water from refrigerant

or replace refrigerant.
Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative

Gauge indication
Refrigerant cycle
Probable cause
Corrective action
Leave the system at rest until
no frost is present. Start it
again to check whether or not
the malfunction is caused by
water or foreign particles.
If water is the cause, initially

cooling is okay. Then the
water freezes causing a
blockage. Drain water from
refrigerant or replace refrigerant.
If due to foreign particles,

remove expansion valve
and remove the particles
with dry and compressed air
(not shop air).
If either of the above methods cannot correct the malfunction, replace expansion
valve.
Low-pressure side becomes negative.

Liquid tank or front/rear side of
expansion valves pipe is
frosted or dewed.
High-pressure side is closed

and refrigerant does not flow.
Expansion valve or liquid tank

is frosted.
AC362A
ATC-104
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Heating
EJS004H3
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
B
ATC
SJIA0409E
ATC-105
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*3
*5
QR engine: CO-9, "Changing
Engine Coolant" or YD engine: CO32, "Changing Engine Coolant" .
QR engine; CO-13, "Checking Radi- *6

ator Cap" or YD engine; CO-36,
"Checking Radiator Cap" .

QR engine; (WITHOOUT EUROOBD) EC-649, "DTC P0117, P0118
ECT SENSOR" .
SENSOR" .
EC-1435, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
ATC-82, "Blower Motor Circuit".
*1
*4
*7
*2
*8
*10 ATC-76, "Air Mix Door Motor Circuit".
ATC-106
http://vnx.su
*9
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Noise
EJS004H4
SYMPTOM: Noise
INSPECTION FLOW
B
ATC
RJIA3108E
ATC-107
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*1
Compressor clutch ATC-146,

"REMOVAL" .
*2
Compressor clutch ATC-150,

"INSTALLATION" .
*4
*5

*3
ATC-24, "Maintenance of Lubricant

Quantity in Compressor".
Self-diagnosis
EJS004H5
SYMPTOM: Self-diagnosis cannot be performed.
INSPECTION FLOW
RJIA3109E
*1
*2
ATC-67, "Power Supply and Ground

Circuit for Auto Amp.".
ATC-108
http://vnx.su
*3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Ambient Sensor Circuit
EJS004YP
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the hood lock stay. It detects
ambient temperature and converts it into a resistance value which is
then input into the auto amp.
RJIA0048E
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS

The auto amp. includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the temperature
detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the auto amp. function. It only
allows the auto amp. to recognize an ambient temperature increase of 0.33C (0.6F) per 100 seconds.
As an example, consider stopping for a few minutes after high speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the
heat from the engine compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR

SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted.
LED of A/C switch does not illuminate as a result of performing selfdiagnosis STEP-2.
ATC
RHA051GD
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND GROUND

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect ambient sensor connector.

Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E38
terminal 1 (R/B) and ground.
1 Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
RJIA2017E
ATC-109
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK CIRCUIT BETWEEN CONTINUITY AMBIENT SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E38 terminal 2 (B/Y) and auto amp. harness connector M53 terminal 24 (B/Y).
2 24
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
RJIA1951E

Refer to ATC-111, "Ambient Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> 1. Replace auto amp.
2. Go to self-diagnosis ATC-59, "FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE" and perform selfdiagnosis STEP-2.
NG
>> 1. Replace ambient sensor.
4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between ambient sensor harness connector
E38 terminal 1 (R/B) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 9 (R/B).
19
4.
Check continuity between ambient sensor harness counector

E38 terminal 1 (R/B) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 9 (R/B) and ground.
RJIA2877E
1 Ground
: Continuity not should exist.
OK or NG
OK
NG
ATC-110
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Ambient Sensor
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E38, measure resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor side, using the table
below.
Temperature C (F)
Resistance k
15 (5)
12.73
10 (14)
9.92
5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
SJIA0433E
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
EJS004YQ
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor is located on instrument driver lower panel. It

converts variations in temperature of compartment air drawn from
the aspirator into a resistance value. It is then input into the auto
amp.
ATC
L
RJIA2841E
Aspirator
The aspirator is located on front side of heater & cooling unit. It produces vacuum pressure due to air discharged from the heater &
cooling unit, continuously taking compartment air in the aspirator.
RJIA0557E
ATC-111
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
RJIA1402E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR

SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted.
RJIA0745E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND GROUND

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect in-vehicle sensor connector.

Check voltage between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M34 terminal 1 (P) and ground.
1 Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
RJIA2022E
2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M34 terminal 2 (B/Y) and auto amp. harness connector M53 terminal 24 (B/Y).
2 24
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SJIA0434E
ATC-112
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
3. CHECK IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Refer to ATC-113, "In-vehicle Sensor" .

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> 1. Replace in-vehicle sensor.
4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN IN-VEHICLE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between in-vehicle sensor harness connector
M34 terminal 1 (P) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 8 (P).
18
4.

G
Check continuity between in-vhicle sensor harness connector

M34 terminal 1 (P) and ground.
1 Ground
SJIA0456E
OK or NG
OK
NG
ATC
In-vehicle Sensor
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M34, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at sensor side, using the table
below.
Temperature C (F)
Resistance k
15 (5)
12.73
10 (14)
9.92
5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
SJIA0436E
If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
ATC-113
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Sunload Sensor Circuit
EJS004YR
The sunload sensor is located on the defroster grille (left side). It
detects sunload entering through windshield by means of a photo
diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which is
then input into the auto amp.
RJIA0050E
SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS

The auto amp. also includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload over a
period of time. This prevents drastic swings in the ATC system operation due to small or quick variations in
detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The sunload
detected by the sunload sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant) effect of the trees momentarily
obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC system operation. On the other hand, shortly
after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR

SYMPTOM: Sunload sensor circuit is open or shorted.
SHA601F
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND GROUND

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect sunload sensor connector.

Check voltage between sunload sensor harness connector M74
terminal 1 (OR) and ground.
1 Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
RJIA2027E
ATC-114
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between sunload sensor harness connector
M74 terminal 2 (B/Y) and auto amp. harness connector M53 terminal 24 (B/Y).
2 24
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
D
SJIA0437E
3. CHECK SUNLOAD SENSOR.
1. Reconnect sunload sensor connector and auto amp. connector.

2. Refer to ATC-116, "Sunload Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> 1. Replace sunload sensor.
4. CHECK
1.
2.
3.
CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN SUNLOAD SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.
4.
L
RJIA2882E
OK or NG
OK
NG
ATC-115
http://vnx.su
ATC

M74 terminal 1 (OR) and ground.
1 Ground

M74 terminal 1 (OR) and auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 10 (OR).
1 10
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Sunload Sensor
Measure voltage between auto amp. harness connector M52 terminal 10 (OR) and ground.
If NG, replace sunload sensor.
RJIA0566E
When checking sunload sensor, select a place where sun shines directly on it.
SHA930E
ATC-116
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Sensor Circuit
EJS004L6
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit. It converts
temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the auto amp.
RJIA0051E
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR

SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted.
H
RJIA0567E
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND GROUND

1.
2.
3.
ATC
Disconnect intake sensor connector.
Check voltage between intake sensor harness connector M68 (Gasoline engine) or M69 (Diesel engine)
K
terminal 1 (BR/Y) and ground.
RJIA0568E
1 Ground
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
ATC-117
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
2. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M68 (Gasoline engine) or M69 (Diesel
engine) terminal 2 (B/Y) and auto amp. harness connector M53 terminal 24 (B/Y).
RJIA0569E
2 24
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CHECK INTAKE SENSOR

Refer to ATC-119, "Intake Sensor" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> 1. Replace intake sensor.
ATC-118
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN INTAKE SENSOR AND AUTO AMP.

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between intake sensor harness connector M68 (Gasoline engine) or M69 (Diesel
engine) terminal 1 (BR/Y) and auto amp. harness connector M53 terminal 25 (BR/Y).
E
SJIA0440E
1 25
OK or NG
OK
NG
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector M68 (Gasoline engine)

or M69 (Diesel engine), measure resistance between terminals 1
and 2 at sensor side, using the table below.
Temperature C (F)
ATC
Resistance k
With diesel engine
15 (5)
12.34
18.63
10 (14)
9.62
14.15
5 (23)
7.56
10.86
0 (32)
6.00
8.41
5 (41)
4.80
6.58
10 (50)
3.87
5.19
15 (59)
3.15
4.12
20 (68)
2.57
3.30
25 (77)
2.12
2.67
30 (86)
1.76
2.17
35 (95)
1.47
1.78
40 (104)
1.23
1.46
45 (113)
1.04
1.21
If NG, replace intake sensor.
ATC-119
http://vnx.su
SJIA0439E
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
PFP:27500
EJS004GD
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove fixing screws, and then remove controller.
RJIA2402E
INSTALLATION
Installation is basically the reverse order of removal.
ATC-120
http://vnx.su
AMBIENT SENSOR
AMBIENT SENSOR
PFP:27722
A
EJS004GA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front grille. Refer to EI-19, "FRONT GRILLE" .

Disconnect ambient sensor connector, and then remove ambient sensor.
E
RJIA0048E
INSTALLATION
ATC
ATC-121
http://vnx.su
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
PFP:27720
EJS004GB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument driver lower panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove mounting screw, and then remove in-vehicle sensor.
RJIA2842E
INSTALLATION
ATC-122
http://vnx.su
SUNLOAD SENSOR
SUNLOAD SENSOR
PFP:27721
A
EJS004GC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove sunload sensor garnish.

Disconnect sunload sensor connector, and then remove sunload
sensor.
RJIA0050E
INSTALLATION
F
ATC
ATC-123
http://vnx.su
INTAKE SENSOR
INTAKE SENSOR
PFP:27723
EJS004GI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove evaporator. Refer to ATC-158, "Removal and Installation of Evaporator" .

Remove intake sensor.
RJIA0051E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace O-rings for A/C piping with new ones. Before installing, apply compressor oil to them.
Make sure mounting position of intake sensor bracket.
When recharging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ATC-124
http://vnx.su
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT
PFP:27200
A
EJS000UL
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove glove box assembly.

Remove glove box cover, instrument passenger lower panel and instrument reinforcement. Refer to IP-11,
Remove ECM with ECM bracket attached.
Remove instrument panel mounting screw.
Remove blower unit mounting bolt and screw.
Disconnect blower motor connector and fan control amp. connector.
Disconnect intake door motor connector and harness clips.
Remove blower unit.
CAUTION:
Slide the blower unit toward the right, remove location pins
RJIA3161E
(2 pieces), then move it downward.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Make sure location pins (2 pieces) are securely installed.
ATC
ATC-125
http://vnx.su
BLOWER UNIT
EJS000UM
NOTE:
RJIA0053J
1.
Fan control amplifier
2.
Screw
3.
Cooling hose
4.
Blower motor assembly
5.
Washer
6.
Blower fan
Screw
9.
Bell mouth
7.
Nut
8.
10.
Intake door lever 2
11. Intake door lever 1
12. Intake door link
13.
Intake door motor
14. Screw
15. Upper case 2
16.
Intake door 2
17. Intake door 1
18. Upper case 1
19.
Screw
20. Air conditioner filter
21. Filter cover
CAUTION:
If retaining tabs are damaged while disassembling blower unit,
use 9 screws (27111-2Y000) to assemble blower unit.
RJIA0097E
ATC-126
http://vnx.su
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
PFP:27226
A
EJS004GH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove blower unit. Refer to ATC-125, "BLOWER UNIT" .

Separate blower unit.
E
RJIA0054E
3.
Remove cooling hose, fan control amp. and blower fan.
RJIA0055E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
ATC
M
RJIA0097E
ATC-127
http://vnx.su
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR

INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
PFP:27730
EJS004GL
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove mounting screws, and then intake door motor from
blower unit.
RJIA0056E
RJIA0571E
INSTALLATION
ATC-128
http://vnx.su
FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER

FAN CONTROL AMPLIFIER
PFP:27761
A
EJS004GE
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove fan control amp.
E
RJIA0572E
INSTALLATION
ATC
ATC-129
http://vnx.su
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER
PFP:27277
EJS005RT
FUNCTION
Air inside passenger compartment is kept clean at either recirculation or fresh mode by installing air conditioner filter into blower unit.
SJIA0446E
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Refer to MA-7, "Periodic Maintenance" .
Caution label is fixed inside the glove box.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove glove box. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove filter cover.
Take out air conditioner filter from blower unit.
Replace with new one and reinstall on blower unit.
Reinstall glove box.
SJIA0447E
ATC-130
http://vnx.su
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY

PFP:27110
A
EJS000UT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use a refrigerant collecting equipment (for HFC-134a) to discharge refrigerant.

Drain coolant from cooling system. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine Coolant" for QR engine or CO-32,
"Changing Engine Coolant" for YD engine.
Disconnect two heater hoses from heater core pipe.
Remove mounting bolt from low-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such
as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove the blower unit. Refer to ATC-125, "BLOWER UNIT" .
Remove clips of vehicle harness from steering member.
RJIA0060E
7.
Remove mounting nuts, and then remove instrument stay.

G
I
RJIA0061E
8.
ATC
Remove mounting bolts from heater & cooling unit.
RJIA2444E
ATC-131
http://vnx.su

9.
Remove steering member.
RJIA2404E
10. Remove heater & cooling unit.

CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with a new one,
and then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.

NOTE:
When filling radiator with coolant, refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine Coolant" for QR engine or CO-32, "Changing Engine Coolant" for YD engine.
EJS000UU
NOTE:
ATC-132
http://vnx.su

A
RJIA0064J
1.
Cooler grommet
4.
Screw
7.
Expansion valve
2.
Screw
3.
Heater pipe support
5.
Expansion valve cover
6.
Bolt
8.
Insulator
9.
Evaporator
10. Slide door unit (Air mix door)
11. Evaporator cover
12. Screw
13. Screw
14. Air mix door motor
15. mode door motor
16. Screw
17. Ventilator door link 1
19. Ventilator door lever
20. Rod
21. Rod holder
22. Main link
23. Max. cool door lever
24. Defroster door lever
25. Screw
26. Foot duct (right)
27. Heater core
28. Heater core cover
29. Foot duct (left)
30. Intake sensor bracket
31. Intake sensor
32. Screw
33. Aspirator
34. Screw
35. Heater & cooling unit case (right)
36. Defroster door
37. Ventilator door
38. Max. cool door
39. Heater & cooling unit case (left)
ATC-133
http://vnx.su
ATC
MODE DOOR MOTOR

MODE DOOR MOTOR
PFP:27731
EJS004GN
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove rod from rod holder.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove mode door motor.
Disconnect mode door motor connector.
RJIA0065E
RJIA0574E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Install rod to mode door.

Reconnect mode door motor connector.
Install mode door motor.
Turn mode control dial to VENT position.
Turn side link clockwise, and then install rod to rod holder.
ATC-134
http://vnx.su
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR

AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
PFP:27732
A
EJS004GK
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set the temperature control dial at 18C.

Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Disconnect air mix door motor connector.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove air mix door motor.
E
RJIA0066E
I
RJIA0575E
INSTALLATION
ATC
ATC-135
http://vnx.su
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
PFP:27140
EJS004GJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove heater & cooling unit. Refer to ATC-131, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY" .
Remove heater pipe support.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove foot duct and
heater core cover.
Remove heater core from heater & cooling unit.
RJIA0069E
INSTALLATION
ATC-136
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

DUCTS AND GRILLES
PFP:27860
A
EJS004GM
REMOVAL
B
RJIA2406J
1.
Side defroster duct (right)
2.
Defroster nozzle
3.
Side defroster duct (left)
4.
Side ventilator duct (left)
5.
Front speaker grille (left)
6.
Cup holder (left)
7.
Side ventilator grille (left)
8.
Multi-box (Instrument center lower

panel)
9.
Side ventilator grille (right)
10. Cup holder (right)
11. Front speaker grille (right)
12. Side ventilator duct (right)
13. Adaptor
14. Center ventilator grille (left)
15. Multi-box duct
16. Center ventilator grille (right)
17. Driver ventilator grille
NOTE:
Removal of Center Ventilator Grille

1.
2.

Remove mounting clips, and then remove center ventilator grille.
RJIA2407E
ATC-137
http://vnx.su
ATC
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Side Ventilator Grille
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove side ventilator ducts. Refer to ATC-138, "Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Duct and Side Ventilator
Duct" .
Remove mounting screws, and then side ventilator grille.
RJIA2408E
Removal of Driver Ventilator Grille

1.
2.
Remove instrument finisher. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove mounting screws, and then remove driver ventilator
grille.
RJIA2409E
Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Duct and Side Ventilator Duct

1.
2.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove side defroster ducts with defroster nozzle.
RJIA2410E
3.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove side ventilator ducts.
ATC-138
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Adaptor
1.
2.
3.
Remove heater & cooling unit. Refer to ATC-131, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY" .
Remove mounting screw and clip.
Slide adaptor toward vehicle front, and then remove adaptor.
D
RJIA2411E
Removal of Multi-box Duct

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove mounting screws, and then disconnect multi-box duct
from heater & cooling unit.
Remove mounting bolts, and then remove heater & cooling unit
bracket.
Remove multi-box duct from left side.
H
RJIA2412E
Removal of Foot Duct

1.
2.
Remove multi-box duct.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove foot duct.
ATC
RJIA0069E
ATC-139
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Floor Duct
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front seats. Refer to SE-24, "FRONT SEAT" .

Remove multi-box (Instrument center lower panel). Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Peel back the floor trim to a point where the floor duct is visible.
Remove mounting bolts and clips, then remove rear floor duct.
RJIA0071E
5.
Remove mounting clips, and then remove front floor duct.
RJIA0070E
INSTALLATION
ATC-140
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
PFP:92600
A
EJS000V7
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING:
Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Use only approved recovery/recycling equipment to discharge HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant. If
accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. Additional health
and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.
I
SHA539DE
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
ATC
SHA540DC
ATC-141
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
RJIA1940E
*1
ATC-24, "LUBRICANT RETURN

OPERATION".
*4
ATC-98, "PERFORMANCE TEST

DIAGNOSIS".
*2
ATC-160, "Checking for Refrigerant

Leaks".
ATC-142
http://vnx.su
*3
ATC-161, "CHECKING PROCEDURE".
REFRIGERANT LINES
Components
EJS00287
Refer to page ATC-5, "Precautions for Refrigerant Connection" .
WITH GASOLINE ENGINE

B
ATC
K
RJIA2843E
NOTE:
This illustration is for RHD models. The blower unit and heater & cooling unit layouts for LHD models are symmetrically opposite.
ATC-143
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
WITH DIESEL ENGINE
RJIA2844E
NOTE:
This illustration is for RHD models. The blower unit and heater & cooling unit layouts for LHD models are symmetrically opposite.
Removal and Installation of Compressor
EJS000V9
REMOVAL
With Gasoline Engine
RJIA3185E
ATC-144
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
With Diesel Engine
A
F
RHA667H
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Use a refrigerant collecting equipment (for HFC-134a) to discharge the refrigerant.
Remove engine undercover.
Remove compressor-alternator belt. Refer to EM-13, "DRIVE BELTS" for QR engine, EM-137, "DRIVE H
BELTS" for YD engine.
Remove mounting nut (bolts) from high-pressure flexible hose
and low-pressure flexible hose.
I
CAUTION:
ATC
Disconnect compressor connector.
K
RJIA3175E
RJIA0579E
ATC-145
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
7.
Remove mounting bolts from compressor.

Remove compressor from the lower side of the vehicle.
RJIA0021E
RJIA0580E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose with a new one,
then apply compressor oil to it when installing it.
Removal and Installation of Compressor Clutch
EJS000VA
REMOVAL
Overhaul (With Gasoline Engine: CWV-615M Compressor)
1.
When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with wrench.
RHA136E
ATC-146
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
A
C
RHA399FA
2.
Remove clutch disc using clutch disc puller.

E
G
RHA124FA
3.
Remove snap ring using external snap ring pliers.
ATC
K
RHA138E
4.
Position the center pulley puller on the end of the drive shaft,
and remove pulley assembly using any commercially available
pulley puller.
To prevent the pulley groove from being deformed, the puller
claws should be positioned into the edge of the pulley assembly.
RHA139E
ATC-147
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
5.
Remove field coil harness clip using a pair of pliers.
RHA125F
6.
RHA145E
Overhaul (With Diesel Engine: DKV-11G Compressor)

1.
Remove two screws holding connector bracket, thermal protector to compressor.
RHA669H
2.
When removing center bolt, hold clutch disc with clutch disc
wrench.
SHA097EA
ATC-148
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove drive plate using clutch disc puller.

Insert holder's three pins into the drive plate. Rotate holder
clockwise to hook it onto plate.
Tighten center bolt to remove drive plate.
While tightening center bolt, insert a screwdriver between two of
the pins (as shown in the figure) to prevent rotation.
After removing drive plate, remove shims from either drive shaft
or drive plate.
C
ZHA093H
8.

E
G
RHA072C
9.
Remove pulley assembly with puller using a commercially available pulley puller. (Position center of puller on end of drive
shaft.)
For pressed pulleys:
To prevent deformation of pulley groove, puller claws should be
hooked under (not into) pulley groove.
For machine lathed pulleys:
Align pulley puller groove with pulley groove, and then remove
pulley assembly.
ATC
K
SHA099EA
10. Remove field coil harness clip using a screwdriver.

11. Then remove three field coil fixing screws and remove field coil.
RHA074C
ATC-149
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
Inspection
Clutch disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat,
replace clutch disc and pulley.
RJIA0582E
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of
pulley shows signs of excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and
pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be
cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
RJIA0583E
Coil
Check coil for loose connection or cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
With Gasoline Engine (CWV-615M Compressor)
1.
2.
Install field coil.

Be sure to align the coil's pin with the hole in the compressors
front head.
Install field coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
RHA142E
3.
Install pulley assembly using installer and a hand press, and

then install snap ring using snap ring pliers.
RHA143E
ATC-150
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
4.
Install clutch disc on drive shaft, together with original shim(s).

Press clutch disc down by hand.
C
RHA127F
5.
Using the holder to prevent clutch disc rotation.

Tightening torque
: 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates smoothly.
F
G
RHA086E
6.
Check clearance around the entire periphery of clutch disc.

Disc to pulley clearance
: 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)

I
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting

spacer and readjust.
ATC
K
RHA087E
With Diesel Engine (DKV-11G Compressor)

1.
2.
Install field coil.

Be sure to align the coils pin with the hole in the compressors
front head.
Install field coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
RHA076C
ATC-151
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
Install pulley assembly using installer and a hand press, and

then install snap ring using snap ring pliers.
ZHA094H
4.
Install drive plate on drive shaft, together with original shim(s).

Press clutch disc down by hand.
RHA078C
5.
Using the holder to prevent clutch disc rotation.

Tightening torque
: 14 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
After tightening the bolt, check that the pulley rotates smoothly.
SHA101EA
ATC-152
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
Check clearance around the entire periphery of clutch disc.

Disc to pulley clearance
: 0.2 - 0.5 mm (0.008 - 0.020 in)
If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace adjusting

spacer and readjust.
G
RHA080CA
Break-In Operation
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always carry out the break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about thirty times. Break-in operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS000VB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove extension cowl top panel.
Remove clips from low-pressure flexible hose.
Remove mounting bolts from low-pressure flexible hose bracket.
Remove harness bracket mounting bolt (With QR engine).
ATC
M
RJIA3177E
RJIA0584E
ATC-153
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
6.
Remove mounting bolts (nut) from low-pressure flexible hose.

CAUTION:
RJIA3178E
7.
Remove mounting bolt, and then remove low-pressure flexible

hose.
CAUTION:
RJIA3179E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible Hose
EJS000VC
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove high-pressure flexible hose mounting clip.
Remove mounting bolt and nut from high-pressure flexible hose,
and then remove it.
CAUTION:
RJIA3180E
RJIA3181E
ATC-154
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe
EJS000VD
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove low-pressure flexible hose. Refer to ATC-153, "Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose" .
Remove high-pressure pipe from clip.
G
RJIA3182E
4.
5.
Remove mounting bolt from high-pressure pipe.

CAUTION:
Remove high-pressure pipe.
ATC
K
RJIA2419E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-ring of high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
Removal and Installation of Condenser
EJS0028A
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect high-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe
from condenser.
CAUTION:
Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND
AIR DUCT" . (With QR engine)
Remove battery and battery tray.
RJIA2419E
ATC-155
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
5.
Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor connector (With QR

engine) or dual-pressure switch connector (With YD engine).
RJIA0690E
RJIA0691E
6.
7.
8.
Remove front grille and radiator mounting bracket.

Remove mounting nuts from condenser.
Remove radiator from lower mount, move it to engine side, and
then remove condenser between radiator and radiator core support.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the core surface of condenser and
radiator.
RJIA0081E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-rings of high-pressure pipe and high-pressure flexible hose with new ones, then
apply compressor oil to them after installing them.

Condenser mounting nuts
Tightening torque : 4.2 Nm (0.43 kg-m, 37 in-lb)
Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank

REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove condenser. Refer to ATC-155, "Removal and Installation of Condenser" .

Clean liquid tank and its surrounding area, and remove dirt and rust from liquid tank.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean carefully.
ATC-156
http://vnx.su
EJS0028C
REFRIGERANT LINES
3.
Remove mounting bolt for liquid tank.

CAUTION:
Cap or wrap joint of condenser pipe with a suitable material
such as a vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
C
RJIA2895E
4.
5.
Lift liquid tank upward. Remove bracket from protruding part of

condenser.
Slide liquid tank upward, and then remove liquid tank.
G
RJIA1440E
INSTALLATION
Installation liquid tank, and then install liquid tank bracket on condenser.
CAUTION:
Make sure liquid tank bracket is securely at protrusion of

condenser. (Make sure liquid tank bracket does not move to
a position below center of liquid tank.)
Replace the O-rings of condenser pipe with new ones, then

apply compressor oil to them after installing them.
ATC
K
RJIA1441E
Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
EJS004GF
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove liquid tank. Refer to ATC-156, "Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank" .
Using a vise, secure liquid tank, and remove refrigerant pressure sensor.
RJIA2148E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Apply compressor oil to O-ling of refrigerant pressure sensor when installing it.
ATC-157
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
Removal and Installation of Dual-pressure Switch
EJS00289
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Remove liquid tank. Refer to ATC-156, "Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank" .
Using a vise, secure liquid tank, and remove dual-pressure
switch.
RJIA0699E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Apply compressor oil to O-ling of dual pressure switch when installing it.

Tightening torque
:10.8 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8.0 ft-lb)
Removal and Installation of Evaporator
EJS000VG
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe
from evaporator.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of low-pressure flexible hose and
high-pressure pipe with a suitable material such as a vinyl
tape to avoid the entry of air.
RJIA0082E
4.
5.
6.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove expansion valve

cover.
Remove mounting bolts, and then remove expansion valve.
RJIA2423E
ATC-158
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
7.
8.
9.
Remove foot duct (passenger side).

Remove mounting screws, and then remove evaporator cover.
Slide evaporator, and then remove it from heater & cooling unit.
C
RJIA0084E
10. Remove intake sensor from evaporator, and then remove evaporator.
E
G
RJIA0051E
INSTALLATION
H
CAUTION:
Replace the O-rings of low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then
I
apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Mark the mounting position of intake sensor bracket.

ATC
Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve
EJS004GG
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe from evaporator.
CAUTION:
Cap or wrap the joint of low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure pipe with a suitable material
such as a vinyl tape to avoid the entry of air.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove expansion valve
cover.
Remove mounting bolts, and then remove expansion valve.
RJIA2423E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Replace the O-rings of expansion valve and piping with new ones, and then apply compressor oil
to them when installing them.
ATC-159
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
EJS000VJ
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of A/C lubricant
leakage, damage and corrosion. A/C lubricant leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow
extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak detector or fluorescent
dye leak detector.
If dye is observed, confirm the leak with an electronic refrigerant leak detector. It is possible a prior leak was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional leaks at all
system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic leak detector, move the probe along the suspected
leak area at 1 to 2 inches per second and no further than 1/4 inch from the component.
CAUTION:
Moving the electronic leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected leak area will improve
the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector
EJS000VK
1.
Check A/C system for leaks using the UV lamp and safety goggles (J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area
without windows preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain opening indicates an evaporator core assembly (tubes, core or expansion valve) leak.
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean shop rag or
cloth, with the UV lamp for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using dye cleaner (J-43872) to prevent future misdiagnosis.
4. Perform a system performance check and verify the leak repair with an approved electronic refrigerant
leak detector.
NOTE:
Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze, windshield
washer fluid, solvents and lubricants, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the surfaces to be
checked are clean.
Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
Do not allow the sensor tip of the detector to contact with any substance. This can also cause false readings
and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
EJS000VL
(This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has seized and was
replaced.)
Check A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.45 bar, 3.52 kg/cm2 , 50
psi).
2. Pour one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of the A/C refrigerant dye into the injector tool (J-41459).
3. Connect the injector tool to the A/C LOW-PRESSURE side service fitting.
4. Start engine and switch A/C ON.
5. When the A/C operating (compressor running), inject one bottle (1/4 ounce / 7.4 cc) of fluorescent dye
through the low-pressure service valve using dye injector tool J-41459 (refer to the manufacture's operating instructions).
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the injector tool from the service fitting.
CAUTION:
Be careful the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the dye directly into the open system connection and proceed with the service procedures.
7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the dye with the system oil. Depending on the
leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take from minutes to days for the dye to
penetrate a leak and become visible.
1.
ATC-160
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
EJS000VM
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
When performing a refrigerant leak check, use an A/C leak detector

or equivalent. Ensure that the instrument is calibrated and set properly per the operating instructions.
The leak detector is a delicate device. In order to use the leak detector properly, read the operating instructions and perform any specified maintenance.
D
SHA705EB
1.
Position probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from point to

be checked.
H
SHA707EA
2.
When testing, circle each fitting completely with probe.

I
ATC
K
SHA706E
3.
Move probe along component approximately 25 to 50 mm (1 to

2 in)/sec.
M
SHA708EA
CHECKING PROCEDURE
To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop chemicals, or cigarette
smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in calm area (low air/wind movement) so that the
leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn engine OFF.
2. Connect a suitable A/C manifold gauge set to the A/C service valves.
ATC-161
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
Check if the A/C refrigerant pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.45 bar, 3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi) above 16C
(61F). If less than specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of
refrigerant.
NOTE:
At temperatures below 16C (61F), leaks may not be detected since the system may not reach 345 kPa (3.45
bar, 3.52 kg/cm2 , 50 psi).
4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (compressor discharge a to evaporator inlet g) to the
low-pressure side (evaporator drain hose h to shaft seal k). Refer to ATC-143, "Components" . Perform a
leak check for the following areas carefully. Clean the component to be checked and move the leak
detected probe completely around the connection/component.
Compressor
Check the fitting of high- and low- pressure hoses, relief valve and shaft seal.
Liquid tank
Check the refrigerant pressure sensor or dual pressure switch.
Service valves
Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves (to prevent leaks).
NOTE:
After removing A/C manifold gauge set from service valves, wipe any residue from valves to prevent any
false readings by leak detector.
3.
Cooling unit (Evaporator)

With engine OFF, turn blower fan on High for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any refrigerant trace in the
cooling unit. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes accumulation time (refer to the manufacturers recommended
procedure for actual wait time) before inserting the leak detector probe into the drain hose.
Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe tip with water
or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
5. If a leak detector detects a leak, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into area of suspected
leak, then repeat check as outlined above.
6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to check for additional leaks at all system components.
If no leaks are found, perform steps 7-10.
7. Start engine.
8. Set the heater A/C control as follows;
a. A/C switch: ON
b. Mode control dial: VENT (Ventilation)
c. Intake position: Recirculation
d. Max. cold temperature
e. Fan speed: High
9. Run engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
10. Turn engine off and perform leak check again following steps 4 through 6 above.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after stopping the
engine. Begin with the leak detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high-pressure side will gradually drop after refrigerant
circulation stops and pressure on the low-pressure side will gradually
rise, as shown in the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected
when pressure is high.
SHA839E
11. Discharge A/C system using approved refrigerant recovery equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component if necessary.
12. Evacuate and recharge A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm no refrigerant leaks.
ATC-162
http://vnx.su
REFRIGERANT LINES
13. Conduct A/C performance test to ensure system works properly.
A
ATC
ATC-163
http://vnx.su

Compressor
Model
cm
(cu in)/rev
With YD engine
Calsonic Kansei make CWV-615M
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL make

DKV-11G
V-6 variable displacement
Vane rotary
Max.
146 (8.91)
Min.
13.5 (0.824)
Cylinder bore stroke

mm (in)
EJS00281
With QR engine
Type
Displacement
PFP:00030
110 (6.71)
35.2 (1.386) [2.3 - 25.0 (0.091 - 0.984)]
Direction of rotation
Clockwise (viewed from drive end)
Drive belt
Poly V
Lubricant
EJS00282
With QR engine
With YD engine
Calsonic Kansei make CWV-615M
ZEXEL VALEO CLIMATE CONTROL

make DKV-11G
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS)
Nissan A/C System Oil Type R (DH-PR)
KLH00-PAGS0
KLH00-PAGR0
Model
Name
Part number
Capacity
m (lmp fl oz)
Total in system
180 (6.3)
Compressor (Service part)

charging amount
180 (6.3)
Refrigerant
EJS00283
Type
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity
kg (lb)
0.55 (1.21)
Engine Idling Speed
EJS00284
Refer to EC-44, "Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check" for QR engine (WITH EURO-OBD), EC-555, "Idle
Speed and Ignition Timing Check" for QR engine (WITHOUT EURO-OBD), EC-1007, "Basic Inspection" for
YD engine (WITH EURO-OBD) or EC-1369, "Basic Inspection" for YD engine (WITHOUT EURO-OBD).
Belt Tension
EJS00285
Refer to EM-13, "DRIVE BELTS" for QR engine or EM-137, "DRIVE BELTS" for YD engine.
ATC-164
http://vnx.su
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
J AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
MTC
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS .............................................. 3
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and
Accurate Repair ....................................................... 3
WORK FLOW ........................................................ 3
SYMPTOM TABLE ................................................ 3
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT ........................... 4
Discharge Air Flow ................................................... 5
Wiring Diagram HEATER .................................. 6
Operational Check ................................................... 7
CHECKING BLOWER ........................................... 7
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR .............................. 7
CHECKING RECIRCULATION ............................. 7
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE .......... 8
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE ............ 8
Mode Door ............................................................... 9
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................. 9
Air Mix Door ........................................................... 10
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 10
Intake Door Motor Circuit ........................................11
INSPECTION FLOW ............................................11
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE
DOOR MOTOR ................................................... 12
Blower Motor Circuit ............................................... 15
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 15
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER
MOTOR ............................................................... 16
Insufficient Heating ................................................. 19
INSPECTION FLOW ........................................... 19
CONTROLLER ......................................................... 21
REMOVAL ........................................................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 21
BLOWER UNIT ......................................................... 22
REMOVAL ........................................................... 22
INSTALLATION ................................................... 22
BLOWER MOTOR .................................................... 24
REMOVAL ........................................................... 24
INSTALLATION ................................................... 24
BLOWER FAN RESISTOR ....................................... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR ........................................... 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
HEATER UNIT ........................................................... 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
HEATER CORE ......................................................... 30
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
MODE DOOR ............................................................ 31
Control Linkage Adjustment ................................... 31
MODE DOOR CONTROL CABLE ....................... 31
AIR MIX DOOR ......................................................... 32
Control Linkage Adjustment ................................... 32
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL CABLE .................... 32
DUCTS AND GRILLES ............................................. 33
REMOVAL ........................................................... 33
INSTALLATION ................................................... 36
MTC-1
http://vnx.su
MTC
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EJS004L7
WARNING:
harness connectors.

GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section.
PG-3, "Wiring Diagram POWER " in PG section.

GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses" in GI section.
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section.
MTC-2
http://vnx.su
EJS000WA
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
How to Perform Trouble Diagnoses for Quick and Accurate Repair
PFP:00004
A
EJS001FB
WORK FLOW
B
SHA900E
*1
MTC-7, "Operational Check".
SYMPTOM TABLE
F
Symptom
Reference Page
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Mode Door.
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure Air Mix Door.
MTC-10, "Air Mix

Door"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Intake Door Motor Circuit.
MTC-11, "Intake
Door Motor Circuit"
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Blower Motor Circuit.
MTC-15, "Blower
Motor Circuit"
Insufficient heating
Go to Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for Insufficient Heating.
MTC-19, "Insufficient Heating"

MTC-9, "Mode
Door"
MTC
MTC-3
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
EJS001FC
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
RJIA2845E
MTC-4
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Discharge Air Flow
EJS001HF
MTC
SJIA0441E
MTC-5
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Wiring Diagram HEATER
EJS001FD
TJWA0076E
MTC-6
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Operational Check
EJS001FE
The purpose of the operational check is to confirm that the system operates properly.
Conditions
:Engine running at usual operating temperature

B
CHECKING BLOWER
1.
Turn fan switch to 1st-speed. Blower should operate on low

speed.
2. Then turn fan switch to 2nd-speed, and continue checking
blower speed until all speeds are checked.
3. Leave blower on Max. speed.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-15, "Blower Motor
Circuit" .
If OK, continue with the check.
E
RJIA0587E
CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR

1.
Turn mode control dial to each position.
I
RJIA0588E
2.
Confirm that discharge air comes out according to the air distribution table. Refer to MTC-5, "Discharge Air Flow" .
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-9, "Mode Door" .
MTC
RJIA0492E
CHECKING RECIRCULATION
1.
2.
Press REC switch. Recirculation indicator should eliminate.

Press REC switch again. Recirculation indicator should not illuminate.
3. Listen for intake door position change (you should hear blower
sound change slightly).
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-11, "Intake Door
Motor Circuit" .
RJIA0589E
MTC-7
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE
1. Turn temperature control dial to full cold position.
2. Check for cold air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-10, "Air Mix Door"
RJIA0590E
CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE

1. Turn temperature control dial to full hot position.
2. Check for hot air at discharge air outlets.
If NG, go to trouble diagnosis procedure for MTC-19, "Insufficient
Heating" .
If all operational check are OK (symptom cannot be duplicated), go
to Incident Simulation Tests in GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" and perform tests as outlined to simulate driving conditions environment. If symptom appears, refer to
MTC-3, "SYMPTOM TABLE" and perform applicable trouble diagnosis procedures.
RJIA0591E
MTC-8
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Mode Door
EJS001FF
SYMPTOM: Air outlet does not change.
INSPECTION FLOW
B
MTC
RJIA0592E
*1
MTC-5, "Discharge Air Flow".
*4
MTC-3, "SYMPTOM TABLE".
*2
MTC-9
http://vnx.su
*3
MTC-31, "MODE DOOR".
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Air Mix Door
EJS001FG
SYMPTOM: Air mix door does not change.
INSPECTION FLOW
RJIA0593E
*1
MTC-32, "AIR MIX DOOR".
*2
MTC-10
http://vnx.su
*3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Intake Door Motor Circuit
EJS004HC
SYMPTOM:
INSPECTION FLOW
C
MTC
RJIA0594E
*1
MTC-11, "Intake Door Motor Circuit". *2
*3
Intake Door Motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that
air is drawn from inlets set by the heater control panel. Motor rotation
is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
RJIA0519E
MTC-11
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
SYMPTOM: Intake door does not operate normally.
RJIA2846E
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR HEATER CONTROL PANEL

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect heater control panel connector.

Check voltage between heater control panel harness connector
M55 terminal 1 (BR/Y) and ground.
1 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 10 A fuse [No. 15,
located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78, "FUSE
RJIA2923E
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR HEATER CONTROL PANEL

1.
2.

Check continuity between heater control panel harness connector M55 terminal 5 (B) and ground.
5 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
RJIA2924E
3. CHECK RECIRCULATION SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Press REC (recirculation) switch.

Check continuity between heater control panel harness connector M55 terminal 1 (BR/Y) and 5 (B).
1 () 5 (+)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> Replace heater control panel.
RJIA2925E
MTC-12
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR

1.
2.
3.
Reconnect heater control panel connector.

Check voltage between intake door motor harness connector M48 terminal 1 (Y/R: RHD models, R/W:
LHD models) and 2 (R/W: RHD models, L/R: LHD models).
E
RJIA2847E
F
Terminals
(+)
Model
Intake door motor
connector
RHD
models
M48
LHD
models
M48
(-)
Terminal No.
(wire color)
2 (R/W)
Intake door motor

connector
M48
1 (Y/R)
1 (R/W)
M48
2 (Y/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace intake door motor.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
Condition
Voltage
Approx. 12V
Terminal No.
(wire color)
1 (Y/R)
REC SW: ON
2 (R/W)
REC SW: OFF
2 (Y/R)
REC SW: ON
1 (R/W)
REC SW: OFF
Approx. 12V
MTC
MTC-13
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
5. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN HEATER CONTROL PANEL AND INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect heater control panel connector and intake door motor connector.
Check continuity between heater control panel harness connector M55 terminal 10 (R/W) and intake door
motor harness connector M48 terminal 2 (R/W: RHD models) or 1 (R/W: LHD models).
Check continuity between heater control panel harness connector M55 terminal 11 (Y/R) and intake door
motor harness connector M48 terminal 1 (Y/R: RHD models) or 2 (Y/R: LHD models).
RJIA3145E
Terminals
Heater control panel connector
Intake door motor connector
Connector
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Connector
M55
10 (R/W)
M48
Continuity
Terminal No.
(wire color)
2 (R/W): RHD models
1 (R/W): LHD models
1 (Y/R): RHD models
M55
11 (Y/R)
M48
2 (Y/R): LHD models
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace heater control panel.
NG
MTC-14
http://vnx.su
Yes
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Blower Motor Circuit
EJS001FI
INSPECTION FLOW
B
RJIA0601E
*1
MTC-16, "DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR".
*4
*2
*3
MTC
MTC-15
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
RJIA0602E
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR BLOWER MOTOR

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect blower motor connector.

Check voltage between blower motor harness connector M65
1 Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check power supply circuit and 15A fuses [Nos. 19 and
24, located in the fuse block (J/B)]. Refer to PG-78,
"FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)" .
RJIA2929E
2. CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR BLOWER MOTOR

1.
2.
3.

Turn fan switch to 1-speed.
Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M65
terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
RJIA2930E
3. CHECK BLOWER MOTOR

Refer to MTC-18, "Blower Motor" .
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> Replace blower motor.
MTC-16
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
4. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND FAN RESISTOR

1.
2.
Disconnect fan resistor connector.

Check continuity between fan resistor harness connector M66
terminal 1 (L/B) and blower motor harness connector M65 terminal 2 (L/B).
12
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
D
RJIA2931E
5. CHECK FAN RESISTOR
Refer to MTC-18, "Fan Resistor" .

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace fan resistor.
6. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN FAN RESISTOR AND HEATER CONTROL PANEL
1.
2.
Disconnect heater control panel connector.

Check continuity between fan resistor harness connector M66
terminal 2 (L/R), 3 (L/Y) or 4 (L/W) and heater control panel harness connector M54 terminal 14 (L/W), 15 (L/Y) or 16 (L/R).
2 16
3 15
4 14

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
MTC
RJIA2932E
7. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR AND HEATER CONTROL PANEL
L
Check continuity between blower motor harness connector M65 terminal 2 (L/B) and heater control panel harness connector M54 terminal 17 (L/B).
2 17
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
RJIA2933E
8. CHECK FAN SWITCH

Refer to MTC-18, "Fan Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
>> Replace fan switch.
MTC-17
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS

Check continuity between heater control panel harness connector
13 Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
RJIA2934E
Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the intake unit.
RJIA0609E
Fan Switch
Check continuity between heater control connector M54 terminals at
each switch position.
Switch position
Terminals
Continuity
OFF
13 - 14, 15, 16, 17
No
13 - 14
13 - 15
13 - 16
13 - 17
Yes
RJIA0610E
Fan Resistor
Check resistance between fan resister connector M66 terminals.
Resistance ()
Terminals
LHD
RHD
0.25 - 0.31
0.28 - 0.34
0.58 - 0.70
0.79 - 0.97
1.33 - 1.63
1.84 - 2.24
RJIA0611E
MTC-18
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Insufficient Heating
EJS001FJ
SYMPTOM: Insufficient heating
INSPECTION FLOW
B
MTC
SJIA0482E
MTC-19
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
*1
QR engine; CO-9, "Changing Engine *2

Coolant" or YD engine; CO-32,
"Changing Engine Coolant" .
QR engine; CO-13, "Checking Radiator Cap" or YD engine; CO-36,

"Checking Radiator Cap" .
*3

EC-649, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
SENSOR" .
EC-1435, "DTC P0117, P0118 ECT
SENSOR" .
*4
QR engine; CO-9, "Changing Engine *5

Coolant" or YD engine; CO-32,
"Changing Engine Coolant" .
MTC-7, "Operational Check" .
*6
MTC-20
http://vnx.su
CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
PFP:27500
A
EJS004HA
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove mode door cable and air mix door cable from heater unit. Refer to MTC-31, "MODE DOOR" and
MTC-32, "AIR MIX DOOR" .
Remove mounting screws from heater control panel.
Remove heater control panel, and then remove heater control
panel connector.
RJIA0089E
INSTALLATION
G
EJS004HB
MTC
M
RJIA3153E
1.
Mode door cable
2.
Clamp
3.
4.
Heater panel
5.
Finisher
6.
Dial
7.
Air mix door cable
8.
Fan switch
9.
Bulb
MTC-21
http://vnx.su
Case assembly
BLOWER UNIT
BLOWER UNIT
PFP:27200
EJS004YB
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove glove box assembly.

Remove glove box cover, instrument passenger lower panel and instrument reinforcement. Refer to IP-11,
Remove ECM with ECM bracket attached.
Remove instrument panel mounting screw.
Remove blower unit mounting bolt and screw.
Disconnect blower motor connector and fan resistor connector.
Disconnect intake door motor connector and harness clips.
Remove blower unit.
CAUTION:
Slide the blower unit toward the right, remove location pins
(2 pieces), then move it downward.
RJIA3161E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Make sure location pins (2 pieces) are securely installed.
MTC-22
http://vnx.su
BLOWER UNIT
EJS004YC
I
SJIA0483E
1.
Upper case 2
2.
Filter cover
3.
Fan resistor
4.
Screw
5.
Blower fan motor assembly
6.
Washer
7.
Cooling hose
8.
Intake door motor
9.
Motor bracket
10. Intake door link
13. Intake door 2
14. Intake door 1
15. Nut
16. Blower fan
17. Bell mouth
MTC
12. Upper case 1
NOTE:
This illustration is for LHD models. The layout for RHD models is symmetrically opposite.
CAUTION:
RJIA3155E
MTC-23
http://vnx.su
BLOWER MOTOR
BLOWER MOTOR
PFP:27226
EJS004HD
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Separate blower unit.
RJIA0054E
3.
Remove cooling hose, fan resistor and blower fan.
RJIA0092E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
RJIA0097E
MTC-24
http://vnx.su
BLOWER FAN RESISTOR

BLOWER FAN RESISTOR
PFP:27150
A
EJS004HE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove glove box cover. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove mounting screws, and then remove fan resistor.
CAUTION:
Do not repair the thermal fuse of the fan resistor.
E
RJIA0093E
INSTALLATION
MTC
MTC-25
http://vnx.su
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR

INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
PFP:27730
EJS004HG
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove intake door motor
from blower unit.
RJIA0056E
RJIA0571E
INSTALLATION
MTC-26
http://vnx.su
HEATER UNIT
HEATER UNIT
PFP:27100
A
EJS001F9
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain coolant from cooling system. Refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine Coolant" for QR engine or CO-32,
"Changing Engine Coolant" for YD engine.
Disconnect two heater hoses from heater core pipe.
Remove blower unit. Refer to MTC-22, "BLOWER UNIT" .
Remove clips of vehicle harness from steering member.
F
RJIA0060E
6.
Remove mounting nuts, and then remove instrument stay.

H
MTC
RJIA0061E
7.
Remove mounting bolts from heater (& cooling) unit.
RJIA2444E
MTC-27
http://vnx.su
HEATER UNIT
8.
Remove steering member.
9.
NOTE:
Remove heater unit.
RJIA2404E
INSTALLATION
NOTE:
When filling radiator with coolant, refer to CO-9, "Changing Engine Coolant" for QR engine or CO-32, "Changing Engine Coolant" for YD engine.
MTC-28
http://vnx.su
HEATER UNIT
EJS001FA
NOTE:
RJIA0613E
1.
Screw
2.
Air mix door link
3.
Air mix door gear
4.
Screw
5.
Cable bracket
6.
Screw
7.
Foot duct (right side)
8.
Screw
9.
Ventilator door link 2
11. Ventilator door lever
12. Main link
13. Max. cool door lever
14. Defroster door lever
15. Heater case (right side)
16. Defroster door
17. Ventilator door
18. Max. cool door
19. Heater case (left side)
20. Screw
21. Heater pipe support
22. Evaporator cover
23. Screw
24. Heater core
25. Heater core cover
26. Foot duct (left side)
27. Screw
MTC-29
http://vnx.su
MTC
HEATER CORE
HEATER CORE
PFP:27140
EJS004HF
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove heater (& cooling) unit. Refer to MTC-27, "HEATER UNIT" .

Remove heater pipe support.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove foot duct and
heater core cover.
Remove heater core from heater (& cooling) unit.
RJIA0069E
INSTALLATION
MTC-30
http://vnx.su
MODE DOOR
MODE DOOR
Control Linkage Adjustment
PFP:27181
A
EJS001DA
MODE DOOR CONTROL CABLE

1.
2.
3.
Turn the mode control dial to VENT position.

Move side link by hand and hold mode door in VENT position.
Pull on the cable cover in the direction of the arrow, and then
clamp it.
NOTE:
After positioning control cable, make sure it operates properly.
E
RJIA0095E
RJIA0614E
MTC
MTC-31
http://vnx.su
AIR MIX DOOR

AIR MIX DOOR
Control Linkage Adjustment
PFP:27180
EJS001DB
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL CABLE

1.
2.
Turn the temperature control dial to full cold position.

Move air mix door lever by hand and hold it at the full cold position.
3. Pull on the cable cover in the direction of the arrow, and then
clamp it.
NOTE:
After positioning control cable, make sure it operates properly.
RJIA0085E
RJIA0615E
MTC-32
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

DUCTS AND GRILLES
PFP:27860
A
EJS004HH
REMOVAL
B
RJIA2406J
1.
Side defroster duct (right)
2.
Defroster nozzle
3.
Side defroster duct (left)
4.
Side ventilator duct (left)
5.
Front speaker grille (left)
6.
Cup holder (left)
7.
Side ventilator grille (left)
8.
Multi-box (Instrument center lower

panel)
9.
Side ventilator grille (right)
10. Cup holder (right)
11. Front speaker grille (right)
12. Side ventilator duct (right)
13. Adaptor
14. Center ventilator grille (left)
15. Multi-box duct
16. Center ventilator grille (right)
17. Driver ventilator grille
NOTE:
Removal of Center Ventilator Grille

1.
2.

Remove mounting clips, and then remove center ventilator grille.
RJIA2407E
MTC-33
http://vnx.su
MTC
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Side Ventilator Grille
1.
2.
3.

Remove side ventilator ducts. Refer to MTC-34, "Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Duct and Side Ventilator
Duct" .
Remove mounting screws, and then remove side ventilator
grille.
RJIA2408E
Removal of Driver Ventilator Grille

1.
2.
Remove instrument finisher. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove mounting screws, and then remove driver ventilator
grille.
RJIA2409E
Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Duct and Side Ventilator Duct

1.
2.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove side defroster ducts with defroster nozzle.
RJIA2410E
3.
Remove mounting screws, and then remove side ventilator ducts.
MTC-34
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Adaptor
1.
2.
3.
Remove heater (& cooling) unit. Refer toMTC-27, "HEATER UNIT" .

Remove mounting screw and clip.
Slide adaptor toward vehicle front, and then remove adaptor.
D
RJIA2411E
Removal of Multi-box Duct

1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove mounting screws, and then disconnect multi-box duct
from heater (& cooling) unit.
Remove mounting bolts, and then remove heater (& cooling)
unit bracket.
Remove multi-box duct from left side.
H
RJIA2412E
Removal of Foot Duct

1.
2.
Remove multi-box duct.

Remove mounting screws, and then remove foot duct.
MTC
RJIA0069E
MTC-35
http://vnx.su
DUCTS AND GRILLES

Removal of Floor Duct
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the front seats. Refer to SE-24, "FRONT SEAT" .

Remove multi-box (Instrument center lower panel). Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Peel back the floor trim to a point where the floor duct is visible.
Remove mounting bolts and clips, then remove rear floor duct.
RJIA0071E
5.
Remove mounting clips, and then remove front floor duct.
RJIA0070E
INSTALLATION
MTC-36
http://vnx.su
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
SC
STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
BATTERY .................................................................... 3
How to Handle Battery ............................................. 3
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE ............................................................... 3
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL .................... 3
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK ............................... 4
Battery Test and Charging Chart .............................. 5
CHART I ................................................................ 5
CHART II ............................................................... 6
A: SLOW CHARGE ............................................... 7
B: STANDARD CHARGE ...................................... 8
C: QUICK CHARGE ............................................ 10
CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................... 12
System Description ................................................ 12
Wiring Diagram CHARGE /WITH GASOLINE
ENGINE ................................................................. 13
Wiring Diagram CHARGE /WITH DIESEL
ENGINE ................................................................. 14
Trouble Diagnosis .................................................. 15
WITH IC REGULATOR ....................................... 15
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR .............................. 15
REMOVAL (QR ENGINE MODELS) ................... 16
REMOVAL (YD ENGINE MODELS) ................... 16
ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION (QR
ENGINE MODELS) ............................................. 16
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
QR ENGINE MODELS ........................................ 18
YD ENGINE MODELS ........................................ 19
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 19
INSPECTION ...................................................... 20
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 21
STARTING SYSTEM ................................................. 22
M/T MODELS ...................................................... 22
A/T MODELS ....................................................... 22
Wiring Diagram START /M/T models ............ 23
Wiring Diagram START /A/T models ............. 24
Trouble Diagnosis ................................................... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSTALLATION ................................................... 26
QR ENGINE MODELS ........................................ 27
YD ENGINE MODELS ........................................ 29
Inspection ............................................................... 30
MAGNETIC SWITCH CHECK ............................. 30
PINION/CLUTCH CHECK ................................... 30
BRUSH CHECK .................................................. 30
YOKE CHECK ..................................................... 31
ARMATURE CHECK ........................................... 32
Assembly ................................................................ 33
PINION PROTRUSION LENGTH ADJUSTMENT .................................................................. 33
Battery .................................................................... 35
Starter ..................................................................... 35
Alternator ................................................................ 35
SC-1
http://vnx.su
SC
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS007AR
WARNING:
harness connectors.

PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit in PG section

SC-2
http://vnx.su
EKS00312
BATTERY
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
PFP:00011
A
EKS00313
CAUTION:
If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE

D
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery.
The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept

clean and dry.
The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.

This also applies to batteries designated as low maintenance
and maintenance-free.
G
MEL040F
When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of

time, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. (If
the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)
ELA0349D
Check the charge condition of the battery.

Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a
close check on charge condition to prevent over-discharge.
SC
MEL042F
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNING:
Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery, do not touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
SC-3
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.

Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
MEL043F
Sulphation
A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended
for a long time and the specific gravity will become less than
1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been sulphated, note its voltage
and current when charging it. As shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of
charging sulphated batteries.
A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.
PKIA2353E
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK

1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
2. Convert into specific gravity at 20 C (68 F).
Example:
When electrolyte temperature is 35 C (95 F) and specific gravity of electrolyte is 1.230, converted specific gravity at 20 C (68
F) is 1.240.
When electrolyte temperature is 0 C (32 F) and specific gravity

of electrolyte is 1.210, converted specific gravity at 20 C (68 F)
is 1.196.
MEL042FA
SEL007Z
SC-4
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
Battery Test and Charging Chart
EKS00314
CHART I
SC
PKIA3696E
*1: SC-4, "SPECIFIC GRAVITY

CHECK"
*2: SC-6, "CHART II"
*4: SC-8, "B: STANDARD CHARGE"
*5: SC-10, "C: QUICK CHARGE"
SC-5
http://vnx.su
*3: SC-7, "A: SLOW CHARGE"
BATTERY
CHART II
SEL755W
*:
SC-5, "CHART I"
Fig. 1 Discharging Current (Load Tester)
Type
Current (A)
28B19R(L)
90
34B19R(L)
99
46B24R(L)
135
55B24R(L)
135
50D23R(L)
150
55D23R(L)
180
65D26R(L)
195
80D23R(L)
195
80D26R(L)
195
75D31R(L)
210
95D31R(L)
240
115D31R(L)
240
025 [YUASA type code]
240
285
110D26R(L)
300
95E41R(L)
300
325
130E41R(L)
330
375
Check battery type and determine the specified current using the table.
SC-6
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
A: SLOW CHARGE
A
SEL756W

CHECK"
Fig. 2 Initial Charging Current Setting (Slow Charge)
7.0 (A)
8.0 (A)
8.5
(A)
9.0
(A)
After starting charging, adjustment of charging current is not necessary.
SC-7
http://vnx.su
130E41R(L)
95E41R(L)
110D26R(L)
115D31R(L)
SC
95D31R(L)
80D26R(L)
80D23R(L)
65D26R(L)
55D23R(L)
50D23R(L)
55B24R(L)
46B24R(L)
5.0 (A)
75D31R(L)
4.0 (A)
Below 1.100
34B19R(L)
CONVERTED
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
28B19R(L)
BATTERY TYPE
M
10.0 (A)
14.0
(A)
BATTERY
Fig. 3 Additional Charge (Slow Charge)
SEL757W
*:
SC-6, "CHART II"
CAUTION:
Set charging current to specified value in Fig. 2. If charger is not capable of producing specified
current value, set its charging current as close to that value as possible.
Keep battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
When connecting charger, connect leads first, then turn on charger. Never turn on charger first, as
this may cause a spark.
If battery temperature rises above 55 C (131 F), stop charging. Always charge battery when its
temperature is below 55 C (131 F).
B: STANDARD CHARGE
SEL758W

CHECK"
Fig. 4 Initial Charging Current Setting (Standard Charge)
130E41R(L)
95E41R(L)
110D26R(L)
115D31R(L)
95D31R(L)
75D31R(L)
80D26R(L)
80D23R(L)
65D26R(L)
55D23R(L)
50D23R(L)
55B24R(L)
46B24R(L)
34B19R(L)
CONVERTED
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
28B19R(L)
BATTERY TYPE
1.100 - 1.130
4.0 (A)
5.0 (A)
6.0 (A)
7.0 (A)
8.0
(A)
9.0 (A)
13.0
(A)
1.130 - 1.160
3.0 (A)
4.0 (A)
5.0 (A)
6.0 (A)
7.0
(A)
8.0 (A)
11.0
(A)
SC-8
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
1.160 - 1.190
1.190 - 1.220
2.0 (A)
2.0 (A)
3.0 (A)
2.0 (A)
4.0 (A)
3.0 (A)
5.0 (A)
6.0
(A)
4.0 (A)
5.0
(A)
7.0 (A)
9.0
(A)
5.0 (A)
7.0
(A)
130E41R(L)
95E41R(L)
110D26R(L)
115D31R(L)
95D31R(L)
A
75D31R(L)
80D26R(L)
80D23R(L)
65D26R(L)
55D23R(L)
50D23R(L)
55B24R(L)
46B24R(L)
34B19R(L)
CONVERTED
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
28B19R(L)
BATTERY TYPE
Fig. 5 Additional Charge (Standard Charge)
I
SEL759W
*:
SC-6, "CHART II"
J
CAUTION:
Never use standard charge method on a battery whose specific gravity is less than 1.100.
Set charging current to specified value in Fig. 4. If charger is not capable of producing specified
SC
current value, set its charging current as close to that value as possible.
L
M
SC-9
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
C: QUICK CHARGE
SEL760W
*:
SC-6, "CHART II"
CONVERTED SPECIFIC GRAVITY
CURRENT [A]
10 (A)
15 (A)
20 (A)
25 (A)
1.100 1.130
2.5 hours
1.130 1.160
2.0 hours
1.160 1.190
1.5 hours
1.190 1.220
1.0 hours
Above
1.220
0.75 hours (45 min.)
30 (A)
130E41R(L)
95E41R(L)
110D26R(L)
115D31R(L)
95D31R(L)
75D31R(L)
80D26R(L)
80D23R(L)
65D26R(L)
55D23R(L)
50D23R(L)
55B24R(L)
46B24R(L)
34B19R(L)
BATTERY TYPE
28B19R(L)
Fig. 6 Initial Charging Current Setting and Charging Time (Quick Charge)
40
(A)

CAUTION:
Never use quick charge method on a battery whose specific gravity is less than 1.100.
Set initial charging current to specified value in Fig. 6. If charger is not capable of producing specified current value, set its charging current as close to that value as possible.
Be careful of a rise in battery temperature because a large current flow is required during quickcharge operation.
Never exceed the charging time specified in Fig. 6, because charging battery over the charging
time can cause deterioration of the battery.
SC-10
http://vnx.su
BATTERY
EKS00315
Observe the following to ensure proper servicing.

CAUTION:
When disconnecting, disconnect the battery cable from the

negative terminal first. But when connecting, connect the
battery cable to the positive terminal first.
Tighten parts to the specified torque shown below.
Battery fix frame mounting nut:

: 3.5 - 5.3 Nm (0.36 - 0.54 kg-m, 31 - 46 in-lb)
Battery cable tightening nut:
D
SKIA0068E
: 3.0 - 5.0 Nm (0.31 - 0.51 kg-m, 27 - 44 in-lb)

E
SC
SC-11
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:00011
EKS00316
The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC regulator.
through 10A fuse (No. 34, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
to alternator terminal 4 (S terminal).

Terminal B supplies power to charge the battery and operate the vehicle's electrical system. Output voltage is
controlled by the IC regulator at terminal 4 (S terminal) detecting the input voltage. The charging circuit is
protected by the 120A (Gasoline engine models) or 100A (Diesel engine models) fusible link (letter A, located
in the fuse and fusible link box).
The alternator is grounded to the engine block.
to combination meter terminal 2 for the charge warning lamp.

Ground is supplied with power and ground supplied
to terminal 5 of the combination meter
through alternator terminal 3 (L terminal)
to alternator terminal E (Gasoline engine models) or through ground (Diesel engine models)
through ground E30 (Gasoline engine models).

The charge warning lamp will illuminate. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine
running, the ground is opened and the charge warning lamp will go off.
If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.
SC-12
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram CHARGE /WITH GASOLINE ENGINE
EKS00317
SC
TKWA1513E
SC-13
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram CHARGE /WITH DIESEL ENGINE
EKS00EAF
TKWA1514E
SC-14
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS00319
Before performing an alternator test, make sure that the battery is fully charged. A 30-volt voltmeter and suitable test probes are necessary for the test. The alternator can be checked easily by referring to the Inspection
Table.
Before starting, inspect the fusible link.
Use fully charged battery.
WITH IC REGULATOR
SC
L
PKIA3570E
NOTE:
If the inspection result is OK even though the charging system is malfunctioning, check the B terminal
connection. (Check the tightening torque and voltage drop.)
Check condition of rotor coil, rotor slip ring, brush and stator coil. If necessary, replace malfunctioning
parts with new ones.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR
The IC regulator warning function activates to illuminate charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur while alternator is operating:
Excessive voltage is produced.
No voltage is produced.
SC-15
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
EKS0031A
REMOVAL (QR ENGINE MODELS)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.

Remove alternator drive belt. Refer to EM-13, "Checking Drive Belts" in EM section.
Remove alternator harness mounting bolt, ground mounting
bolt, alternator connector and B terminal mounting nut.
Remove alternator mounting bolts.
Remove alternator assembly upward.
PKIA2496E
REMOVAL (YD ENGINE MODELS)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove alternator harness mounting bolt, alternator connector
and B terminal mounting nut.
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-137, "Checking Drive Belts" in
EM section.
Remove alternator bracket mounting bolts and alternator
bracket.
Remove alternator mounting bolts.
Remove alternator assembly upward.
MEL948N
ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION (QR ENGINE MODELS)

One-Way Clutch Pulley Check
Fix rotor with inserting a suitable tool rolled with a cloth.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
1. Check for locking. (Outer ring is turned clockwise when viewed
from the front.)
If it rotates in both directions... Replace pulley.
2. Check for dragging. (Outer ring is turned counterclockwise when
viewed from the front.)
If it locks or unusual resistance is felt... Replace pulley.
SKIB0529E
SC-16
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-13, "Tension Adjustment" (QR engine models) or
EM-137, "Tension Adjustment" (YD engine models) in ENGINE MECHANICAL (EM) section.
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten B terminal mounting nut carefully.
QR engine models
B terminal nut:
: 7.9 - 11.0 Nm (0.8 - 1.11 kg-m, 6.0 - 8.0 ft-lb)
Ground bolt:
: 2.3 - 2.6 Nm (0.23 - 0.27 kg-m, 20 - 23 in-lb)
Alternator mounting bolt:
: 59 - 69 Nm (6.1 - 7.1 kg-m, 45 - 51 ft-lb)
YD engine models
B terminal nut:
: 7.9 - 11.0 Nm (0.8 - 1.11 kg-m, 6.0 -8.0 ft-lb)
Ground bolt:
: 2.3 - 2.6 Nm (0.23 - 0.27 kg-m, 20 - 23 in-lb)
Alternator mounting bolt (upper side):
: 16 - 20 Nm (1.6 - 2.1 kg-m, 12 - 15 ft-lb)
Alternator mounting bolt (lower side):
: 38 - 50 Nm (3.8 - 5.1 kg-m, 28 - 36 ft-lb)
SC
SC-17
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
EKS0031B
QR ENGINE MODELS
PKIB7676E
1.
Stator
2.
Rear bearing
3.
Rotor
4.
Retainer
5.
Front bearing
6.
Front cover
7.
Pulley
8.
Fan guide
9.
Labyrinth seal
10. IC voltage regulator assembly
11. Diode assembly
13. Terminal assembly
14. Through-bolt
SC-18
http://vnx.su
12. Rear cover
CHARGING SYSTEM
YD ENGINE MODELS
A
PKIB9810E
1.
Rear bearing
2.
Rotor
3.
Retainer
4.
Front bearing
5.
Through-bolt
6.
Front cover
7.
Pulley
8.
Pulley nut
9.
Stator
11.
Diode assembly
12. Rear cover
10. IC voltage regulator assembly
13. B terminal
SC
DISASSEMBLY
Rear Cover
1.
2.
Remove through-bolt (4).

Remove rear cover.
NOTE:
Rear cover may be hard to remove because a ring is used to
lock outer race of rear bearing. To facilitate removal of rear
cover, heat just bearing box section with a 200 W soldering iron
until the temperature increases by about 30 C.
CAUTION:
Never use a heat gun, as it can damage diode assembly.
SEL032Z
SC-19
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
Front Cover (For LR1110-713V)
1.
2.
Set rotor to the vise.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
Use copper plate or thick cloth for rotor in the vise.
Remove pulley cap, using suitable tool.
SKIB0531E
3.
Remove alternator pulley, using alternator pulley adaptor [SST].
SKIB0731E
INSPECTION
Rotor Check
1.
Resistance test
Resistance
: Refer to SDS. SC-35,

"Alternator" .
Not within the specified values... Replace rotor.

Insulator test
Continuity exists... Replace rotor.
Check slip ring for wear.
2.
3.
Slip ring minimum

outer diameter

"Alternator" .
SKIB4525E
Not within the specified values... Replace rotor.
Brush Check
1.
2.
Check smooth movement of brush.

Not smooth... Check brush holder and clean.
Check brush for wear.
Replace brush if it is worn down to the limit line.
SKIB4526E
SC-20
http://vnx.su
CHARGING SYSTEM
Stator Check
1.
Continuity test
No continuity... Replace stator.
SKIB4527E
2.
Ground test
Continuity exists... Replace stator.
G
SKIB4528E
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.

CAUTION:
Note the tightening torque shown, in the figure.
Rear Bearing
CAUTION:
Never reuse rear bearing. Replace with a new one.
Never lubricate rear bearing outer race.
SC
Rear Cover Installation

1.
Fit brush assembly, diode assembly, regulator assembly and

stator.
L
SKIB4529E
2.
Push brushes up with fingers and install them to rotor.

Take care not to damage slip ring sliding surface.
SKIB4530E
SC-21
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:00011
EKS0031F
M/T MODELS
through 30A fusible link (letter J, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
to ignition switch terminal 1.

With the ignition switch in the START position, power is supplied
from ignition switch terminal 5
to starter motor harness connector terminal 1.

The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the
engine starts.
A/T MODELS
through 30A fusible link (letter J, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
to ignition switch terminal 1.

from ignition switch terminal 5
to park/neutral position relay terminal 5.

to park/neutral position relay terminal 1.

With the selector lever in the P or N position, ground is supplied
to park/neutral position relay terminal 2
through the park/neutral position switch terminals 1 and 2, and
through grounds F9 and F10.

Then park/neutral position relay is energized and power is supplied
from park/neutral position relay terminal 3
to starter motor harness connector terminal 1.

The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and starter motor. The
starter motor is grounded to the engine block. With power and ground supplied, cranking occurs and the
engine starts.
SC-22
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram START /M/T models
EKS0031G
SC
TKWA0056E
SC-23
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram START /A/T models
EKS0031H
TKWA0057E
SC-24
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Trouble Diagnosis
EKS0031I
If any malfunction is found, immediately disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
SC
SEL761W
SC-25
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
EKS0031J
REMOVAL
M/T models
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove air duct. Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR
DUCT" (QR engine models) or EM-139, "AIR CLEANER AND
AIR DUCT" (YD engine models).
Disconnect S connector and B terminal from starter motor.
Remove starter motor mounting bolts.
Remove starter motor upward.
PKIA2741E
A/T models
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove air duct and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-16, "AIR
CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" (QR engine models).
Remove A/T selector cable and harness from bracket.
Disconnect S connector and B terminal from starter motor.
Remove starter motor upward.
PKIA2742E
INSTALLATION
QR engine models (M/T)

B terminal nut:
: 9.81 - 11.8 Nm (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 87 - 104 in-lb)
Starter motor mounting bolt:
: 98.1 - 127.0 Nm (10.0 - 13.0 kg-m, 73 - 94 ft-lb)
QR engine models (A/T)

B terminal nut:
: 7.3 - 9.8 Nm (0.75 - 1.00 kg-m, 65 - 87 in-lb)

Upper side:
: 41.2 - 52.0 Nm (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 31 - 38 ft - lb)
Lower side:
: 98.1 - 127.0 Nm (10.0 -13.0 kg-m, 73 -94 ft-lb)
YD engine models
B terminal nut:
: 9.81 - 11.8 Nm (1.0 - 1.2 kg-m, 87 - 104 in-lb)
: 41.2 - 52.0 Nm (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 31 - 38 ft-lb)
SC-26
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
EKS0031K
QR ENGINE MODELS
M/T Models
I
PKIA0464E
1.
Sleeve bearing
4.
Pinion stopper
5.
Pinion assembly
6.
Internal gear
7.
Plate
8.
Packing
9.
Adjusting plate
10. Magnetic switch assembly
2.
Gear case
3.
11. Planetary gear
Stopper clip
12. Ball
13. Packing
14. Yoke
15. Armature
16. Brush holder assembly
17. Rear bearing
18. Rear cover
SC
Through-bolt:
: 4.1 - 7.4 Nm (0.45 - 0.72 kg-m, 39.1 - 62.5 in-lb)
SC-27
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
A/T Models
PKIA0466E
1.
Pinion stopper clip
2.
Pinion stopper
4.
Pinion spring
5.
Gear case assembly
6.
Shift lever set
7.
Dust cover kit
8.
Magnetic switch assembly
9.
Clutch assembly
10. E-ring
3.
Pinion
11. Thrust washer
12. Center bracket (P)
13. Packing
14. Planetary gear
15. Internal gear
16. Center bracket (A)
17. Yoke assembly
18. Armature assembly
20. Brush (-)
21. Brush spring
22. Thrust washer
23. Rear cover assembly
Through-bolt:
: 4.9 - 6.4 Nm (0.50 - 0.65 kg-m, 43.4 - 56.4 in-lb)
SC-28
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
YD ENGINE MODELS
A
PKIA0465E
1.
Stopper clip
2.
Pinion stopper
3.
Pinion
4.
Spring
5.
Gear case
6.
Plate
7.
Packing
8.
Adjusting plate
9.
Magnetic switch assembly
11.
Retainer ring
12. Over running clutch
10. Snap ring

13. Internal gear
14. Planetary gear
15. Ball
16. Packing
17. Cover
18. Yoke
19. Armature
20. Washer
21. Rear bearing
23. Brush spring
24. Brush (-)
25. Rear cover
SC
Through-bolt:
M
: 5.6 - 10.4 Nm (0.57 - 1.06 kg-m, 49.5 - 92.0 in-lb)
SC-29
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Inspection
EKS0031L
MAGNETIC SWITCH CHECK
1.
Before starting to check, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Disconnect M terminal of starter motor.
Continuity test (between S terminal and switch body).
No continuity... Replace.
SKIB0458E
2.
Continuity test (between S terminal and M terminal).

SKIB0459E
PINION/CLUTCH CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Inspect pinion teeth.

Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check
condition of ring gear teeth.)
Inspect reduction gear teeth (If equipped).
Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also
check condition of armature shaft gear teeth.)
Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates
smoothly in the opposite direction.
If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is
evident.... Replace.
MEL139L
BRUSH CHECK
Brush
Check wear of brush.
Wear limit length
: Refer to SDS. SC-35, "Starter" .
Excessive wear... Replace.
SEL014Z
SC-30
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Brush Spring Check
A
Check brush spring tension with brush spring detached from brush.
Spring tension
(with new brush)

B
Not within the specified values... Replace.
SEL015Z
Brush Holder
1.
2.
Perform insulation test between brush holder (positive side) and

its base (negative side).
Continuity exists.... Replace.
Check brush to see if it moves smoothly.
If brush holder is bent, replace it; if sliding surface is dirty,
clean.
SC
SEL016Z
YOKE CHECK
Magnet is secured to yoke by bonding agent. Check magnet to see

that it is secured to yoke and for any cracks. Replace malfunctioning
parts as an assembly.
CAUTION:
Never clamp yoke in a vice or strike it with a hammer.
SEL305H
SC-31
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
ARMATURE CHECK
1.
2.
Continuity test (between two segments side by side).

Insulation test (between each commutator bar and shaft).
Continuity exists.... Replace.
SKIB0461E
3.
Check commutator surface.

Rough... Sand lightly with No. 500 - 600 emery paper.
SEL020Z
4.
Check diameter of commutator.

Commutator minimum
diameter

"Starter" .
Less than specified value... Replace.
SEL021Z
SC-32
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
5.
Check depth of insulating mold from commutator surface.

Less than 0.2 mm (0.008 in)... Undercut to 0.5 to 0.8 mm
(0.020 to 0.031 in).
G
SEL022Z
Assembly
EKS0031M
Apply high-temperature grease to lubricate the bearing, gears and frictional surface when assembling the
starter.
Carefully observe the following instructions.
PINION PROTRUSION LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

Clearance [QR (M/T)]
With pinion driven out by magnetic switch, push pinion back to
remove slack and measure clearance L between the front edge of
the pinion and the pinion stopper.
Clearance L
SC
SKIB0229E
Not in the specified value... Adjust by adjusting plate.
SEL633BA
SC-33
http://vnx.su
STARTING SYSTEM
Movement [QR (A/T), YD]
Compare movement L in height of pinion when it is pushed out with
magnetic switch energized and when it is pulled out by hand until it
touches stopper.
Movement L
SKIB0230E
Not in the specified value...Adjust by adjusting plate.
SEL633BA
SC-34
http://vnx.su

Battery
PFP:00030
A
EKS0031Q
QR20, QR25 engine

Applied model
Except
for Northern Europe
For Northern
Europe
YD22 engine
55D23L
80D23L
110D26L
12-48
12-52
12-64
Type
Capacity
[V - AH]
Starter
C
EKS0031R
QR20, QR25 engine
Applied model
Type
YD22 engine
A/T
M/T
S114-844
M0T87081
HITACHI make
M8T71471
MITSUBISHI make
Reduction
System voltage
No-load
[V]
12
Terminal voltage
[V]
11.0
Current
[A]
Revolution
[rpm]
Less than 90
Less than 90
Less than 145
More than 2,700
More than 2,500
More than 3,300
Minimum diameter of commutator
[mm (in)]
28.0 (1.102)
28.8 (1.134)
31.4 (1.236)
Minimum length of brush
[mm (in)]
10.5 (0.413)
7.0 (0.276)
11.0 (0.433)
16.2 (1.65, 3.64)
15.0 - 20.4
(1.5 - 2.1, 3.4 - 4.6)
26.7 - 36.1
(2.7 - 3.7, 6.0 - 8.2)
Brush spring tension
[N (kg, lb)]
Less than 0.2 (0.008)
[mm (in)]
Clearance L between pinion front edge and pinion

stopper
[mm (in)]
0.5 - 2.0
(0.020 - 0.079)
Movement L in height of pinion assembly
[mm (in)]
0.3 - 2.5
(0.012 - 0.098)
0.5 - 2.0
(0.020 - 0.079)
EKS0031S
Applied model
Type
Nominal rating
[V - A]
QR20, QR25 engine
YD22 engine
LR1110-713V
A3TB0771
HITACHI make
MITSUBISHI make
12-110
12-90
Ground polarity
Minimum revolutions under no-load
(When 13.5 V is applied)
Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied)
Negative
[rpm]
[A/rpm]
Less than 1,100
Less than 1,300
(More than 35/1,300)

More than 70/1,800
More than 91/2,500
More than 110/5,000
More than 29/1,300

More than 76/2,500
More than 88/5,000
Regulated output voltage
[V]
[mm (in)]
More than 6.0 (0.236)
More than 5.0 (0.197)
[N (g, oz)]
1.0 - 3.43
(102 - 350, 3.60 - 12.34)
4.8 - 6.0
(490 - 610, 17.28 - 21.51)
[mm (in)]
More than 26.0 (1.024)
More than 22.1 (0.870)
2.16 - 2.46
2.1 - 2.5
Slip ring minimum diameter

Rotor coil resistance at 20 C (68 F)
[]
SC-35
http://vnx.su
SC
Minimum length of brush

Brush spring pressure
Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft
Alternator
14.1 - 14.7
SC-36
http://vnx.su
LIGHTING SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LT
LIGHTING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................................ 4
Precaution ................................................................ 4
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE - ................................... 5
DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 5
LOW BEAM OPERATION ..................................... 5
HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS
OPERATION ......................................................... 5
DRIVING LAMP OPERATION .............................. 6
XENON HEADLAMP ............................................. 7
Schematic ................................................................ 8
Wiring Diagram H/LAMP ................................. 9
Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp ............................ 18
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING .............. 18
LOW BEAM ......................................................... 18
ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT
SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE) ............ 19
Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp ....................... 19
ADJUSTING ........................................................ 20
Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance
Lamp ...................................................................... 20
HEADLAMP (UPPER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM... 20
HEADLAMP (LOWER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM... 21
CLEARANCE LAMP ........................................... 21
Bulb Replacement of Driving Lamp ........................ 21
Removal and Installation of Headlamp .................. 21
REMOVAL ........................................................... 21
INSTALLATION ................................................... 22
Disassembly and Assembly ................................... 22
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 22
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 22
Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp .............. 23
REMOVAL ........................................................... 23
INSTALLATION ................................................... 23
Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp Switch... 24
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE - .................. 25
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 25
LOW BEAM OPERATION ................................... 25
OPERATION ........................................................ 25
DRIVING LAMP OPERATION ............................. 25
Schematic ............................................................... 27
Wiring Diagram H/LAMP ............................... 28
LHD MODELS ..................................................... 28
RHD MODELS .................................................... 31
Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp ............................ 35
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM ........................... 35
Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp ....................... 36
ADJUSTING ........................................................ 37
Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance
lamp ........................................................................ 37
HEAD LAMP ........................................................ 37
CLEARANCE LAMP ............................................ 37
Bulb Replacement of Driving Lamp ........................ 38
Removal and Installation of Headlamp ................... 38
REMOVAL ........................................................... 38
INSTALLATION ................................................... 38
Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp .............. 39
REMOVAL ........................................................... 39
INSTALLATION ................................................... 39
Removal and Installation for Driving Lamp Switch... 40
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE - ... 41
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 41
LT-1
http://vnx.su
LT
LOW BEAM OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT

SYSTEM CANCEL OPERATION) ....................... 41
OPERATION ........................................................ 42
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION ............ 42
XENON HEADLAMP ........................................... 43
Schematic ............................................................... 44
Wiring Diagram DTRL ..................................... 45
Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 50
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
TABLE ................................................................. 50
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 50
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 50
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL
TYPE - ....................................................................... 51
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 51
LOW BEAM OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT
SYSTEM CANCEL OPERATION) ....................... 51
OPERATION ........................................................ 52
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION ............ 52
Schematic ............................................................... 54
Wiring Diagram DTRL ..................................... 55
Trouble Diagnoses .................................................. 60
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
TABLE ................................................................. 60
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 60
Aiming Adjustment .................................................. 60
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (MANUAL) ........... 61
Wiring Diagram H/AIM ................................... 61
Switch Circuit Inspection ........................................ 62
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (AUTO) ................ 63
OUTLINE ............................................................. 63
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL OPERATION... 64
Schematic ............................................................... 65
Wiring Diagram H/AIM ................................... 66
LHD MODELS ..................................................... 66
Terminals and Reference Values of Daytime Light
Control Unit ............................................................. 68
Terminals and Reference Values for Height Sensor... 68
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis ................ 68
CONSULT-II Functions (HEADLAMP LEVELIZER)... 69
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION ....................... 69
WORK SUPPORT ............................................... 70
DATA MONITOR .................................................. 70
ACTIVE TEST ..................................................... 71
SELF-DIAG RESULTS ........................................ 71
Check Aiming Control System ................................ 73
Symptom Chart ....................................................... 74
Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (Both
Sides) ..................................................................... 74
Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (One

Side) ........................................................................77
DTC B2081 [INITIAL NOT DONE] ..........................78
DTC B2082 [SENSOR OUT OF RANGE] ...............79
DTC B2083 [SEN SIG NOT PLAUSIBLE] ..............79
DTC B2084 [VOLTAGE UNDER LIMIT] ..................80
DTC B2085 [LOW BEAM SIG OPEN LINE] ...........81
DTC B2086 [FRQ. OVER LIMIT] ............................82
DTC B2087 [SHORT TO GROUND] .......................82
DTC B2088 [SHORT TO BATTERY] ......................84
Removal and Installation of Height Sensor .............86
REMOVAL ............................................................86
INSTALLATION ....................................................86
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS...87
System Description .................................................87
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION ...............................87
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION .............................88
Wiring Diagram TURN ...................................89
LHD MODELS ......................................................89
RHD MODELS .....................................................91
Trouble Diagnoses ..................................................93
Electrical Components Inspection ...........................93
COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK ...........93
Bulb Replacement ...................................................94
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP .............................94
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP .................................94
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP ...............................94
Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp...94
REMOVAL ............................................................94
INSTALLATION ....................................................94
Removal and Installation of Side Turn Signal Lamp...95
REMOVAL ............................................................95
INSTALLATION ....................................................95
Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...95
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH ................96
REMOVAL ............................................................96
INSTALLATION ....................................................96
Switch Circuit Inspection .........................................96
HAZARD SWITCH .....................................................97
REMOVAL ............................................................97
INSTALLATION ....................................................97
STOP LAMP ..............................................................98
Wiring Diagram STOP/L ................................98
Bulb Replacement ...................................................99
STOP LAMP ........................................................99
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP ...........................99
STOP LAMP ........................................................99
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP ...........................99
BACK-UP LAMP ..................................................... 100
Wiring Diagram BACK/L .............................. 100
GASOLINE ENGINE .......................................... 100
DIESEL ENGINE ............................................... 101
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 102
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS .... 103
Wiring Diagram TAIL/L ................................. 103
LT-2
http://vnx.su
LHD MODELS ................................................... 103

RHD MODELS .................................................. 105
Bulb Replacement ................................................ 107
PARKING AND TAIL LAMPS ............................ 107
LICENSE PLATE LAMP .................................... 107
PARKING AND TAIL LAMPS ............................ 107
LICENSE PLATE LAMP .................................... 107
FRONT FOG LAMP ................................................ 108
System Description .............................................. 108
DESCRIPTION .................................................. 108
FOG LAMP OPERATION .................................. 108
Wiring Diagram F/FOG ............................... 109
Aiming Adjustment ................................................110
Bulb Replacement ................................................. 111
REMOVAL .......................................................... 111
INSTALLATION .................................................. 111
REAR FOG LAMP ...................................................112
System Description ...............................................112
DESCRIPTION ...................................................112
FOG LAMP OPERATION ...................................112
Wiring Diagram -R/FOG-/Without Front Fog Lamp..113
Wiring Diagram -R/FOG-/With Front Fog Lamp ....114
Bulb Replacement .................................................115
REMOVAL ..........................................................115
INSTALLATION ..................................................115
CLEARANCE LAMP/TAIL LAMP ............................116
Bulb Replacement (Clearance Lamp) ...................116
Bulb Replacement (Tail lamp) ...............................116
Removal and Installation of Clearance Lamp .......116
Removal and Installation of Tail lamp ....................116
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP ...............................117
REAR COMBINATION LAMP .................................118
Wiring Diagram STOP/L .................................118
REMOVAL ..........................................................119
INSTALLATION ..................................................119
COMBINATION SWITCH ........................................ 120
Switch Circuit Inspection ...................................... 120
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION ..................................... 121

Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation ....... 121
ILLUMINATION ....................................................... 122
Schematic ............................................................. 123
Wiring Diagram ILL ........................................ 124
LHD MODELS ................................................... 124
RHD MODELS .................................................. 128
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP ........................................ 132
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND .................... 132
SWITCH OPERATION ...................................... 132
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION. 133
ON-OFF CONTROL .......................................... 133
Wiring Diagram -ROOM/L- ................................... 134
LHD MODELS ................................................... 134
RHD MODELS .................................................. 136
Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Operate ...... 138
Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Cancel ....... 141
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .................................. 142
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP .................................. 142
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP .................................. 143
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP .................................. 143
STEP LAMP ............................................................ 144
Wiring Diagram STEP/L .............................. 144
LHD MODELS ................................................... 144
RHD MODELS .................................................. 145
REMOVAL ......................................................... 146
INSTALLATION ................................................. 146
MAP LAMP ............................................................. 147
Wiring Diagram INT/L .................................... 147
MAP LAMP (WITHOUT SUNROOF) ................. 148
MAP LAMP (WITH SUNROOF) ........................ 148
REMOVAL ......................................................... 148
INSTALLATION ................................................. 148
BULB SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 149
Headlamp ............................................................. 149
Exterior Lamp ....................................................... 149
Interior Lamp/Illumination ..................................... 149
LT-3
http://vnx.su
LT
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTION
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS0079M
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precaution
EKS003KS
Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it. Do not
touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
Do not leave bulb out of headlamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. may affect
the performance of the headlamp. When replacing the bulb, be sure to replace it with a new one.
Adjust aiming by tightening aiming screw. (To adjust it toward loosening side, first loosen adjusting screw,
and then make adjustment by tightening.)
To remove soil or sealant of bulbs, do not use organic solvent (thinner, gasoline, etc.)
When replacing bulb, be sure to hold bulb socket and pull it out straight. If wiring harness of the bulb is
pulled at an angle, the bulb may be caught in the lamp, making it difficult to take out.

When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the followings:
Refer to GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams" in GI section
Refer to PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" for power distribution circuit in PG section
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the followings:
Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section
Refer toGI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section
LT-4
http://vnx.su
EKS003KT
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE System Description
PFP:26010
A
EKS00N4V
DESCRIPTION
The headlamps are controlled by the lighting switch which is built in the combination switch.
through 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible link box)
to lighting switch terminal 8,
through 30A fusible link (letter M, located in fuse and fusible link box)
through 20A fuse (No. 52, located in fuse block)
to HID relay LH terminal 5, and
to HID relay RH terminal 5,
to driving lamp relay-1 terminal 8.
LOW BEAM OPERATION

When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position, power is supplied
through lighting switch terminal 10
to HID relay LH terminal 1,
through HID relay LH and RH terminal 3
to headlamp LH and RH terminal 2.

Ground is supplied
to HID relay LH and RH terminal 2
through grounds E24 and E50,
to headlamp LH and RH terminals 4
through grounds E24 and E50.

With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps illuminate.
HIGH BEAM OPERATION/FLASH-TO-PASS OPERATION

When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH BEAM position or PASSING position, power is supplied
to headlamp LH terminal 1
to HID relay LH terminal 1, and
to combination meter terminal 20,
to headlamp RH terminal 1, and
through HID relay LH and RH terminal 3

Ground is supplied
to headlamp LH and RH terminal 3, and
to headlamp LH and RH terminal 4
LT-5
http://vnx.su
LT
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE to combination meter terminal 19

through grounds M27and M70.
With power and ground supplied, low beam and high beam headlamps, and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
DRIVING LAMP OPERATION

To illuminate the driving lamp, push the driving lamp switch when the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH BEAM position or PASSING position, power is supplied
to HID relay LH terminal 1
to driving lamp relay-1 terminal 1
to driving lamp switch terminal 7, and
to driving lamp relay-2 terminal 5,
through driving lamp relay-2 terminal 3
to driving lamp switch terminal 6,
to driving lamp LH and RH terminal 2.

Ground is supplied
to driving lamp switch terminal 4
to driving lamp LH terminal 1
through ground R8,
to driving lamp RH terminals 1 and 3
through ground R8,
through grounds M27 and M70.

With power and ground supplied, low beam and high beam headlamps, driving lamp and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
LT-6
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE XENON HEADLAMP

Xenon type lamps are used for to the low beam headlamps. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead, they
produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture of
xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to strong lighting power, electronic control of
the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Followings are some advantages of the xenon type headlamp.
The light produced by the headlamps is white color similar to sunlight that is easy to the eyes.
Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
Counter-reflected luminance increases and the contrast enhances on the wet road in the rain. That makes
visibility go up more than the increase of the light volume.
Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
LT
LT-7
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE Schematic
EKS00N4W
TKWB1115E
LT-8
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE Wiring Diagram H/LAMP
EKS00N4X
LT
TKWB1116E
LT-9
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -
TKWB1117E
LT-10
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE A
LT
TKWB1118E
LT-11
http://vnx.su
TKWB1119E
LT-12
http://vnx.su
LT
TKWB1120E
LT-13
http://vnx.su
TKWB1121E
LT-14
http://vnx.su
LT
TKWB1122E
LT-15
http://vnx.su
TKWB1123E
LT-16
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00N4Y
WARNING:
Xenon headlamp has a high-tension current generating area. Be extremely careful when removing
and installing. Be certain to disconnect battery negative cable prior to removing or installing.
When xenon headlamp is lit, do not touch harness (covered with red or amber insulation), bulb
itself or bulb socket with your bare hands
Never service a xenon headlamp with wet hands.
When checking body side harness with a circuit tester, be certain to disconnect harness connector from xenon headlamp.
When xenon headlamp is lit, xenon bulb must be installed in headlamp housing. (Never turn on
xenon headlamp, if bulb is out of headlamp housing.)
CAUTION:
Make sure to install bulb securely; if xenon bulb is improperly installed in its socket, high-tension current leaks occur. This may lead to a melted bulb and/or bulb socket.
Symptom
Possible cause
Headlamp does not operates.
Headlamp LH (low and high beam)

does not operate, but headlamp RH
(low and high beam) does operate.
2. HID relay circuit
2. Check lighting switch.
3. Lighting switch
4. Headlamp ground circuit
3. Check harness between lighting switch terminal and

ground.
1. 15A fuse
1. Check 15A fuse (No.40, located in fuse and fusible link

box).
2. 20A fuse

box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at terminal
5 of HID relay LH.
3. HID relay LH
4. HID relay LH circuit
3. Check HID relay LH.

box).
1. 15A fuse
Headlamp RH (low and high beam)
does not operate, but headlamp LH
(low and high beam) does operate.
Repair order
1. Check 30A fuse (letter M, located in fuse and fusible link
box).
1. 30A fuse
2. 20A fuse
2. Check 20A fuse (No. 51, located in fuse and fusible link
5 of HID relay RH.
3. HID relay RH
4. HID relay RH circuit
3. Check HID relay RH.
LT
1. Check bulb.
LH high beam does not operate, but
LH low beam operates.
1. Bulb
2. Open in high beam LH circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Headlamp LH ground circuit
Harness between headlamp LH and lighting switch for

open circuit.

4. Check harness between headlamp LH and ground.
1. Check 20A fuse (No52, located in fuse and fusible link
5 of HID relay LH.
LH low beam does not operate, but

LH high beam operates.
1. 20A fuse
2. Check HID relay LH.
2. HID relay LH
3. Open in LH low beam circuit
3. Check harness between HID relay LH terminal 3 and

headlamp LH terminal 2 for an open circuit.
4. LH low beam ground circuit
4. Check harness between headlamp LH and ground.
5. Xenon bulb
5. Replace xenon bulb with other side bulb or new one. (If
headlamps illuminate correctly, replace bulb.)
6. HID control unit
6. Replace HID control unit with other side control unit or

new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace control unit.)
LT-17
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
1. Check bulb.
RH high beam does not operate, but

RH low beam operates.
1. Bulb
2. Open in high beam RH circuit
3. Lighting switch
4. Headlamp RH ground circuit
Harness between headlamp RH and lighting switch for

open circuit.

4. Check harness between headlamp RH and ground.
5 of headlamp RH relay.
RH low beam does not operate, but

RH high beam operates.
1. 20A fuse
2. Check HID relay RH.
2. HID relay RH
3. Open in RH low beam circuit
3. Check harness between HID relay RH terminal 3 and

headlamp RH terminal 2 for an open circuit.
4. RH low beam ground circuit
4. Check harness between headlamp RH and ground.
5. Xenon bulb
5. Replace xenon bulb with other side bulb or new one. (If
headlamps illuminate correctly, replace bulb.)
6. HID control unit
6. Replace HID control unit with other side control unit or

new one. (If headlamps illuminate correctly, replace control unit.)
High beam indicator does not work.
1. Bulb
1. Check bulb in combination meter.
2. Open in high beam circuit
2. Check the harness circuit.
Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp
EKS00N4Z
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING

For details, refer to the regulations in your own country.
Before performing aiming adjustment, check the following.
1. Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
2. Place vehicle on level ground.
3. Set that there is no-load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
Coolant, engine oil filled up to correct level and full fuel tank.
LOW BEAM
1.
Turn headlamp low beam on.
2.
Use adjustment screws to perform aiming adjustment.
PKIA7165E
LT-18
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)

A
PKIC0481E
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming.
Use the aiming chart shown in the figure.
Basic illumination area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart.
Adjust headlamp accordingly.
Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp
EKS00N50
Turn aiming adjustment screw to adjust.

For positions of adjustment screws and direction to turn, refer to
the figures.
When adjusting for right or left side, adjust upper and lower
adjustment screws at the same time.
LT

LT-19
PKIA3394E
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)
PKIA3395E
ADJUSTING
1.
2.
3.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of driving lamp lens as shown in the figure.
Turn headlamp switch high and driving lamp switch ON so that front driving lamps turn ON.
Adjust driving lamps using adjusting screws make sure of the following.
When performing this adjustment, cover headlamps and the opposite driving lamp, if necessary.
Vertical deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand at 218 mm (8.58 in) below driving lamp height (h).
Horizontal deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand within 0 125 mm (0 4.92
in) against line (V) on screen where a line passing through driving lamp center, parallel to vehicle center
line, cross screen.
Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance Lamp
EKS00N51
HEADLAMP (UPPER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Turn lighting switch OFF.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal or
remove power fuse.
Disconnect headlamp connector.
Remove air cleaner duct (when replacing LH bulb). Refer to EM16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" , EM-139, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" in ENGINE MECHANICAL (EM) section.
Turn plastic cap counterclockwise and unlock it.
Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Unlock retaining spring and remove bulb from headlamp.
Headlamp (Upper side), For Low Beam
8.
: 12V - 35W (D2R)
LT-20
http://vnx.su
SKIA1465E
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE HEADLAMP (LOWER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal or remove power fuse.
Remove air cleaner duct (when replacing LH bulb). Refer to EM-16, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" ,
EM-139, "AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT" in ENGINE MECHANICAL (EM) section.
Disconnect terminal connected to bulb.
Unlock retaining spring and remove bulb from headlamp.
Headlamp (Lower side), For High Beam
8.

Remove bulb from headlamp.
: 12V - 5W
5. Installation is the reverse order of removal.

CAUTION:
Never touch glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it.
Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
Never leave bulb out of headlamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of headlamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
When bulb is installed, be sure to install plastic cap and bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
Bulb Replacement of Driving Lamp

2.
3.
EKS00N52
Remove driving lamp. Refer to LT-23, "Removal and Installation

of Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP -XENON TYPE-.
Disconnect driving lamp connector.
Driving lamp
4.

LT-21
http://vnx.su

CAUTION:
Never touch glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease
and other oily matters away from it. Never touch bulb by
PKIA3396E
hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning
may result.
When replacing bulb, prepare new bulb first of all. Never leave bulb out of driving lamp housing
for a long period, because dust, moisture or smoke will cause performance lowering (fouling,
cloud, etc.) of driving lamp reflector and lens.
REMOVAL
LT
: 12 V - 65 W (H1R1)
Removal and Installation of Headlamp

1.
2.
Clearance lamp
1.
: 12V - 55W (H1)
CLEARANCE LAMP
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS00N53
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE 3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove front turn signal lamps. Refer to LT-94, "Removal and

Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp" .
Disconnect connector of headlamp and clearance lamp.
Remove front grille. Refer to EI-19, "FRONT GRILLE" in
EXTERIOR & INTERIOR (EI) section.
Remove headlamp mounting bolts.
Pull headlamp toward front of the vehicle.
PKIA5555E
INSTALLATION
Headlamp mounting bolts
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
EKS00N54
DISASSEMBLY
SKIA1466E
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.
Xenon bulb socket
2.
Xenon bulb
3.
Halogen bulb
4.
HID control unit
5.
Screws
6.
Plastic cap
7.
Clearance lamp bulb socket
8.
Clearance lamp bulb
9.
Retaining springs

Disconnect terminal connected to halogen bulb.
Turn xenon bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Unlock retaining spring, and then remove xenon bulb and halogen bulb.
Turn clearance bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Remove clearance bulb from clearance bulb socket.
Remove HID control unit mounting screws and remove HID control unit.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
HID control unit mounting screws
: 3.2 Nm (0.33 kg-m, 28 in-lb)
CAUTION:
When HID control unit is removed, reinstall it securely and avoid any looseness.
After installing bulb, be sure to install plastic cap and bulb socket securely to ensure watertightness.
LT-22
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp
EKS00N55
I
PKIA5556E
1.
Cap (rear)
2.
Driving lamp assembly
3.
Nut
4.
Cap (front)
5.
Driving lamp bracket
6.
Grommet
7.
Roof rail
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
LT
Remove cap (front) and cap (rear).

Remove driving lamp mounting nut.
Pull the front of driving lamp toward upper side so that undo the
pin from roof panel.
Remove rear end of driving lamp from roof rail.
Pull out driving lamp from vehicle and disconnect connector.
PKIA3400E
INSTALLATION
Driving lamp mounting nut
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
LT-23
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE CAUTION:

Make sure pawl shown in figure be connected correctly.
PKIA3398E
PKIA3399E
Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp Switch

1.
2.
EKS00N56
Remove instrument lower driver panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal

and Installation" in INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY (IP)
section.
Press driving lamp switch fixing pawls and remove it from Instrument lower driver panel.
PKIA7164E
LT-24
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE System Description
PFP:26010
A
EKS00N57
DESCRIPTION
The headlamps are controlled by the lighting switch which is built in the combination switch.
LOW BEAM OPERATION

When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position, power is supplied
to headlamp LH terminal 3,
to headlamp RH terminal 3.
Ground is supplied


When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH BEAM position or PASSING posiI
tion, power is supplied
to headlamp LH terminal 1, and

J

LT
Ground is supplied

L

M
With power and ground supplied, the high beam headlamps and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.

LT-25
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Ground is supplied
through driving lamp relay2 terminal 7
through ground R8,
through ground R8,

With power and ground supplied, high beams lamps, driving lamp and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
LT-26
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Schematic
EKS00N58
LT
TKWB0105E
LT-27
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Wiring Diagram H/LAMP
EKS00N59
LHD MODELS
TKWA1516E
LT-28
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE A
LT
TKWA1517E
LT-29
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE -
TKWB0080E
LT-30
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE RHD MODELS

A
LT
TKWA1518E
LT-31
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE -
TKWA1519E
LT-32
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE A
LT
TKWA1520E
LT-33
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00N5A
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
1. Check bulb.
Headlamp LH do not operate.
1. Bulb
2. Check grounds E24 and E50.
2. Grounds E24 and E50
3. Check 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse and fusible

link box). Verify battery positive voltage is present at
terminal 8 of lighting switch.
3. 15A fuse
4. Lighting switch

1. Check bulb.
Headlamp RH do not operate.
1. Bulb

terminal 5 of lighting switch.
3. 15A fuse
4. Lighting switch

1. Check bulbs.
1. Bulb
High beam LH do not operate,
but low beam LH operates.

3. Lighting switch

1. Check bulb.
1. Bulb
Low beam LH does not operate,
but high beam LH operates.
2. Open in low beam LH circuit

3. Lighting switch
1. Check bulbs.

3. Lighting switch
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 6 and

1. Check bulb.
1. Bulb
Low beam RH does not operate,
but high beam RH operates.
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 10

and headlamp LH terminal 3 for an open circuit.
1. Bulb
High beam RH do not operate,
but low beam RH operates.

headlamp LH terminal 1 for an open circuit.
2. Open in low beam RH circuit

3. Lighting switch

LT-34
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Symptom
Possible cause
1. Bulb
High beam indicator does not
work.
Repair order
2. Check grounds M27 and M70.
2. Grounds M27 and M70


combination meter terminal 20 for an open circuit.
terminal 3 of driving lamp relay-1.

driving lamp switch terminal 7 for an open circuit.
3. Check driving lamp switch.

1. 15A fuse
4. Check driving lamp relay-2.
2. Open in driving lamp switch
5. Check the wire between driving switch terminal 4 and

driving lamp relay-2 terminal 1 for an open circuit.
Check the wire between driving switch terminal 6 and
Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and
Check the wire between driving lamp relay-1 terminal
2 and driving lamp relay-2 terminal 7 for an open circuit.
3. Driving lamp switch circuit

4. Driving lamp relay-2
5. Open in driving lamp relay-2 circuit
Driving lamp does not operate,
but high beam LH operates.

7. Driving lamp relay-1
8. Open in driving lamp relay-1 circuit
9. Open driving lamp circuit
10.Ground R8

7. Check driving lamp relay-1.
11.Bulb

9. Check the wire between driving lamp relay-1 terminal
5 and driving lamp terminal 2 for an open circuit.
10.Check ground R8.

11.Check bulbs.
Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp
EKS00N5B

For Details, Refer To the Regulations In Your Own Country.
LT
2. Place vehicle on flat surface.
L
LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM

1.
Turn headlamp low beam ON.
PKIA5554E
2.
Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
LT-35
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)
PKIC0481E
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aiming.
Use the aiming chart shown in the figure.
Basic illumination area for adjustment should be within the range shown on the aiming chart.
Adjust headlamp accordingly.
CAUTION:
Be sure aiming switch is set to 0 when performing aiming adjustment.
Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp
EKS00N5C
Turn the aiming adjusting screw to adjust.

For positions of the adjustment screws and direction to turn,
refer to the figures.
PKIA3394E

LT-36
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)

A
PKIA3395E
ADJUSTING
1.
2.
3.
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the driving lamp lens as shown in the figure.
J
Turn head lamp switch high and driving lamp switch ON so that front driving lamps turn ON.
When performing this adjustment, cover the headlamps and the opposite driving lamp, if necessary.
LT
Vertical deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand at 21.8cm (8.58in) below driving lamp height (h).
Horizontal deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand within 0 12.5cm (08.58in)
L
against line (V) on screen where a line passing through driving lamp center, parallel to vehicle center
line, cross screen.
Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance lamp
EKS00N5D
HEAD LAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connector of headlamp.

Remove rubber cap.
Unlock retaining spring, then remove bulb.
Headlamp (High/Low)
4.
: 12V - 60/55 W(H4)
SKIA0073E
CLEARANCE LAMP
1.
2.
Turn the clearance lamp bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock them.
Remove the bulb from its socket.
LT-37
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Clearance lamp
: 12V - 5W
3. Installation is the reverse of order removal.

CAUTION:
Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it.
Never touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
When replacing bulb, prepare new bulb first of all. Never leave bulb out of headlamp housing for a
long period, because dust, moisture or smoke will cause performance lowering (fouling, cloud,
etc.) of headlamp reflector and lens.
When bulb is installed, be sure to lock rubber cap to ensure watertightness.
Bulb Replacement of Driving Lamp

1.
2.
3.
Remove the driving lamp. Refer to LT-39, "Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP.
Driving lamp
4.
EKS00N5E
: 12 V - 65 W (H1R1)

CAUTION:
Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep
grease and other oily matters away from it. Never touch
PKIA3396E
bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off.
Burning may result.
When replacing bulb, prepare new bulb first of all. Never leave bulb out of driving lamp housing
Removal and Installation of Headlamp
EKS00N5F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front turn signal lamps. Refer toLT-94, "Removal

and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp" .
Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-19, "FRONT GRILLE" in
"EXTERIOR & INTERIOR (EI)" section.
Remove the headlamp mounting bolts.
Pull the headlamp toward the front of the vehicle.
PKIA5555E
INSTALLATION
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
LT-38
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp
EKS00N5G
I
PKIA5556E
1.
Cap (rear)
2.
3.
Nut
4.
Cap (front)
5.
6.
Grommet
7.
Roof rail
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
LT

pin from the roof panel.
PKIA3400E
INSTALLATION
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
LT-39
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - CONVENTIONAL TYPE CAUTION:
Make sure the pawl shown in figure be connected correctly.
PKIA3398E
PKIA3399E
Removal and Installation for Driving Lamp Switch

1.
2.
EKS00N5H
Remove the Instrument lower driver panel. Refer to IP-11,

"Removal and Installation" in INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY (IP) section.
Press the driving lamp switch fixing pawls and remove it from
the Instrument lower driver panel.
PKIA3525E
LT-40
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE System Description
PFP:26010
A
EKS00N5I
DESCRIPTION
The headlamp system on vehicles for North Europe contains a daytime light control unit. The unit activates the B
following whenever the engine is running with the lighting switch in the OFF position:
Low beam headlamps
Parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination.

C
to daytime light control unit terminal 1, and

D
E
F
through 30A fusible link (letter M, located in fuse and fusible link box)
G
to daytime light relay LH terminal 5, and

H
to daytime light relay RH terminal 5,
I

through 10A fuse [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)]

J
to daytime light control unit terminal 7,
through combination meter terminal 2

LT
to daytime light control unit terminal 8.

L

M
Ground is supplied
to daytime light control unit terminal 9
LOW BEAM OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM CANCEL OPERATION)

When the lighting switch is turned to the 1ST or 2ND position, power is supplied
to daytime light relay LH terminal 1,
through daytime light relay LH and RH terminal 3

Ground is supplied
LT-41
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE to daytime light relay LH and RH terminal 2


to combination meter terminal 20, and

Ground is supplied
to daytime light relay LH and RH terminal 2

With power and ground supplied, low beam and high beam headlamps, and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION

With the engine running and the lighting switch in the OFF position, power is supplied
from alternator terminal 3
through daytime light control unit terminal 5
to headlamp LH and RH terminal 2,
to parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination.

Ground is supplied

With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps, parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination
illuminate.

LT-42
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE to headlamp LH terminal 1

A
to daytime light relay LH terminal 1

B

C

D

E
to driving lamp LH and RH terminal 2,

F
Ground is supplied

G

H

I
through ground R8,

J
through ground R8,

LT

L

With power and ground supplied, low beam and high beam headlamps, driving lamp and the HIGH BEAM indiM
cator illuminate.
XENON HEADLAMP
Xenon type lamps are used for to the low beam headlamps. Xenon bulbs do not use a filament. Instead, they
produce light when a high voltage current is passed between two tungsten electrodes through a mixture of
xenon (an inert gas) and certain other metal halides. In addition to strong lighting power, electronic control of
the power supply gives the headlamps stable quality and tone color.
Followings are some advantages of the xenon type headlamp.
The light produced by the headlamps is white color similar to sunlight that is easy to the eyes.
Light output is nearly double that of halogen headlamps, affording increased area of illumination.
Counter-reflected luminance increases and the contrast enhances on the wet road in the rain. That makes
visibility go up more than the increase of the light volume.
Power consumption is approximately 25 percent less than halogen headlamps, reducing battery load.
LT-43
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE Schematic
EKS00N5J
TKWB1124E
LT-44
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE Wiring Diagram DTRL
EKS00N5K
LT
TKWB1125E
LT-45
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE -
TKWB1126E
LT-46
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE A
LT
TKWB1127E
LT-47
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE -
TKWB1128E
LT-48
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE A
LT
TKWB1129E
LT-49
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - XENON TYPE Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00N5L
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE

Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
INPUT (I)/
OUTPUT (O)
Operated condition
Voltage
G/W
Power source for illumination &

tail lamp
Battery voltage
LG
Power source for headlamp LH
Battery voltage
R/W
Power source for headlamp RH
Battery voltage
SB
Headlamp RH
ON (daytime light operating*)
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
OR
Headlamp LH
OFF
6
B/Y
BR
Y/R
10
R/L
11
R/L
Start signal
IGN power supply
Alternator L terminal
Ground
Illumination & tail lamp
Lighting switch
Battery voltage
ON, ACC or OFF
Approx. 0V
ON or START
Battery voltage
ACC or OFF
Approx. 0V
Running
Battery voltage
Stopped
Approx. 0V
Ignition switch
Ignition switch
Approx. 0V
START
Engine
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
1ST2ND position
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
*: Daytime light operating: Lighting switch in OFF position with engine running.
Bulb Replacement
EKS00N5M
Refer to LT-20, "Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance Lamp" or LT-21, "Bulb Replacement of Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP -XENON TYPE-.
Aiming Adjustment
EKS00N5N
Refer to LT-18, "Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp" or LT-19, "Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP -XENON TYPE-.
EKS00N5O
Refer to LT-21, "Removal and Installation of Headlamp" or LT-23, "Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp"
in HEADLAMP -XENON TYPE-.
LT-50
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE System Description
PFP:26010
A
EKS00N5P
DESCRIPTION
The headlamp system on vehicles for North Europe contains a daytime light control unit. The unit activates the B
Low beam headlamps
Parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination.

C

D
E
F
G

H
I

J

LT
Ground is supplied

L
LOW BEAM OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM CANCEL OPERATION)

When the lighting switch is turned to the 1ST or 2ND position, power is supplied
to daytime light relay LH terminal 1, and
through daytime light relay LH terminal 5
through daytime light relay LH terminal 3
through daytime light relay RH terminal 5
through daytime light relay RH terminal 3
Ground is supplied
LT-51
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE through grounds E24 and E50,


to headlamp LH terminal 1, and
Ground is supplied

With power and ground supplied, high beam headlamps and HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM OPERATION

to headlamp RH terminal 3,
to parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination.

Ground is supplied

With power and ground supplied, low beam headlamps, parking, license plate and tail lamps, and illumination
illuminate.

to headlamp RH terminal 1,

Ground is supplied
LT-52
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE to driving lamp relay-1 terminal 2

through ground R8,
through ground R8,

With power and ground supplied, high beam headlamps, driving lamp and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
LT
LT-53
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Schematic
EKS00N5Q
TKWA1521E
LT-54
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Wiring Diagram DTRL
EKS00N5R
LT
TKWB1769E
LT-55
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE -
TKWB1770E
LT-56
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE A
LT
TKWA1523E
LT-57
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE -
TKWA1524E
LT-58
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE A
LT
TKWB0081E
LT-59
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00N5S
DAYTIME LIGHT CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE

Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
INPUT (I)/
OUTPUT (O)
Operated condition
Voltage
G/W
Power source for illumination &

tail lamp
Battery voltage
LG
Power source for headlamp LH
Battery voltage
R/W
Power source for headlamp RH
Battery voltage
G/Y
Headlamp RH
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
Y/G
Headlamp LH
OFF
6
B/Y
BR
Y/R
10
R/L
11
R/L
Start signal
IGN power supply
Alternator L terminal
Ground
Lighting switch
Battery voltage
ON, ACC or OFF
Approx. 0V
ON or START
Battery voltage
ACC or OFF
Approx. 0V
Running
Battery voltage
Stopped
Approx. 0V
Ignition switch
Ignition switch
Approx. 0V
START
Engine
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
1ST2ND position
Battery voltage
OFF
Approx. 0V
*: Daytime light operating: Lighting switch in OFF position with engine running.
Bulb Replacement
EKS00N5T
Refer to LT-37, "Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance lamp" or LT-38, "Bulb Replacement of Driving
Lamp" in HEADLAMP-CONVENTIONAL TYPE-.
Aiming Adjustment
EKS00N5U
Refer to LT-35, "Aiming Adjustment of Headlamp" or LT-36, "Aiming Adjustment of Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP-CONVENTIONAL TYPE-.
EKS00N5V
Refer to LT-38, "Removal and Installation of Headlamp" or LT-39, "Removal and Installation of Driving Lamp"
in HEADLAMP-CONVENTIONAL TYPE-.
LT-60
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (MANUAL)

Wiring Diagram H/AIM
PFP:25190
A
EKS003BF
LT
TKWA1525E
LT-61
http://vnx.su

1.
2.
EKS003CA

"Removal and Installation" in INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY (IP) section.
Press the headlamp aiming switch fixing pawls and remove it
from the Instrument lower driver panel.
PKIA3402E
Switch Circuit Inspection
EKS003CB
Using a circuit tester, check continuity between the headlamp aiming

switch connector terminals in each operation status of the aiming
switch.
PKIA5759E
LT-62
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL (AUTO)

PFP:53821
A
EKS00N5W
J
PKIC0425E
LT
System Description
EKS00N5X
With the lighting switch in the 1ST or 2ND position, the height sensor detects change in the vehicle height and
transmits a corresponding signal to the headlamp aiming motors. The signal drives the headlamp aiming
motors, which adjusts the low beam reflector of each headlamp to an angle appropriate for the vehicle height.
When the vehicle is stationary, the motors move the reflectors if the vehicle height changes to a certain height
and the height is maintained for a predetermined period. When the vehicle is running (excluded when accelerating/decelerating), the reflector angle is adjusted at predetermined intervals.
OUTLINE
through 10A fuse (No.31, located in fuse and fusible link box)
to lighting switch terminal 11, and
to daytime light control unit terminal 1 (with daytime light system).

to height sensor terminal 2, and
to headlamp aiming motor RH and LH terminal 1.

Ground is supplied
to height sensor terminal 5
through grounds B107 and B119,
to headlamp aiming motor RH and LH terminal 3
LT-63
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL OPERATION

The height sensor is located on the right side of the rear suspension member and detects vehicle height
change by sensing the displacement of the suspension arm.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, power is supplied
through 10A fuse [No. 12 located in fuse block (J/B)]
to height sensor terminal 2, and

At the same time, the vehicle height signal (voltage signal that corresponds to the vehicle height) is applied
through height sensor terminal 3

Ground is supplied
to front combination lamp RH and LH terminal 3
through grounds B107 and B119.

And the voltage level of this signal is maintained.
When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position, power is supplied (without daytime light system)
to height sensor terminal 8.

When the lighting switch is placed in the 1ST or 2ND position, power is supplied (with daytime light system)
to height sensor terminal 8.

Ground is supplied

The height sensor starts the aiming control.
When the stopped vehicle changes the height and keeps it for more than 10 seconds, the height sensor outputs a headlamp aiming motor drive signal. And height sensor keeps signal voltage to headlamp aiming motor.
(Voltage depends on the vehicle height.)
Upon reception of the headlamp aiming motor drive signal, both headlamp aiming motors cause the low beam
reflectors to move to the position commanded by the signal.
When the vehicle is running (excluded when accelerating/decelerating), the height sensor transmits headlamp
aiming motor drive signal to headlamp aiming motors at the predetermined intervals. The voltage level of
every signal input is maintained unchanged until the next signal is input.
Upon reception of the headlamp aiming motor drive signal, both headlamp aiming motors cause the low beam
reflectors to move to the position commanded by the signal.
When the vehicle is accelerating or decelerating, the height sensor keeps the same headlamp aiming motor
drive signal voltage level rather than changing it, so that the low beam reflectors of both headlamps do not
operate.
When the lighting switch is turned OFF, the height sensor retains the headlamp aiming motor drive signal level
at that moment and stops transmitting the signal.
Height Sensor Control Operation

Vehicle is stopped *1
height sensor
operating
control interval
Vehicle is running *2
Headlamp aiming motor starts after vehicle is stopped for approx. 10 seconds.
Up to 31 seconds, and
every 10 seconds
after starting running
with a constant speed
About 41
seconds
About 82
seconds
About 161
seconds
About 323
seconds
*1 Included when running at to 4 km/h (2.48 MPH) or less, but exclude when accelerating/decelerating.
*2 Included when running at more than 4 km/h (2.48 MPH), but exclude when accelerating/decelerating.
LT-64
http://vnx.su
After 323 seconds

or more, every 323
seconds

Schematic
EKS00N5Y
LT
TKWB1130E
LT-65
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram H/AIM
EKS00N5Z
LHD MODELS
TKWB1131E
LT-66
http://vnx.su

A
LT
TKWB1132E
LT-67
http://vnx.su

Terminals and Reference Values of Daytime Light Control Unit
EKS00N60
Terminal
No.
Wire color
Connections
Operated condition
Voltage
G/W
Power source for illumination & tail

lamp
Battery Voltage
Battery voltage
10
R/L
OFF
Approx. 0V
1ST2ND position
Battery voltage
11
R/L
Lighting switch
OFF
Approx. 0V
*: Daytime light operating : Lighting switch in OFF position with engine running.
Terminals and Reference Values for Height Sensor
EKS00N62
Measuring condition
Terminal
No.
Wire color
Signal name
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
ON
ON
Battery voltage
about 40 km/h (25 MPH)
PKIA1935E
Output signal for aiming

motor
ON
Lighting switch 1ST position

and vehicle speed 0 km/h
(0 MPH)
Approx. 5.8 - 9.4V
Ground
ON
K LINE
Tail lamp signal
Lighting switch
1ST position
OFF
2V or less
ON
Battery voltage
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.

Understand operation description and function description. Refer to LT-63, "System Description" .
Perform self-diagnosis by CONSULT-II. Refer to LT-71, "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" .
Check symptom and repair or replace the cause of malfunction.
Does the headlamp aiming control operate normally? If YES, GO TO 6. If NO, GO TO 4.
INSPECTION END
LT-68
http://vnx.su
EKS00N63

CONSULT-II Functions (HEADLAMP LEVELIZER)
EKS00N64
CONSULT-II can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test mode shown following.
Diagnosis mode
Description
WORK SUPPORT
Height sensor can be initialized.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
The result of self-diagnosis for height sensor can be displayed and erased.
DATA MONITOR
Displays height sensor inputs and outputs in real time.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation of headlamp aiming motor can be confirmed with MAX, MID or MIN touched.
ECU PART NUMBER
Height sensor part number can be read.
CONFIGURATION
(Not be used.)
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION

CAUTION:
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector, and then turn
the ignition switch ON.
PBIB1300E
2.

J
LT
L
BCIA0029E
3.
Touch HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on SELECT SYSTEM

screen. If HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER is not indicated, refer to
GI-35, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit" .
BCIA0030E
LT-69
http://vnx.su

WORK SUPPORT
Display Item List
Item
Description
Make it memorize height sensor stroke of unloaded vehicle condition.
Perform when replacing height sensor.
SENSOR INITIALISE
Operation Procedure
Height sensor initialize
1. Set the vehicle in unladen condition. (Removal all loads in driver, passenger and trunk rooms.)
2. Touch HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on SELECT SYSTEM screen.
3. Touch WORK SUPPORT on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
4. Touch SENSOR INITIALISE.
5. Touch WRITE.
6. INITIALISE COMPLETE will be displayed.
7. Touch END.
Instruction of initialized results

Item
Description of indications
INITIALISE COMPLETE
Initialization completed.
INCORRECT CONDITION
Improper condition. (Wrong connection of height sensor connector or CONSULT-II connector.)
NO CAR TYPE SELECT
Program error of the height sensor.
INITIALISE NOT DONE
Initialization uncompleted.
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
Touch HEADLAMP LEVELIZER on SELECT SYSTEM screen.

Touch DATA MONITOR on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
Touch either ALL SIGNALS or SELECTION FROM MENU on SELECT MONITOR ITEM screen.
ALL SIGNALS
Monitors all the signals.
SELECTION FROM MENU
Selects items and monitors them.
4.
5.
6.
When SELECTION FROM MENU is selected, touch items to be monitored. When ALL SIGNALS is
selected, all the items will be monitored.
Touch START.
Touch RECORD while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Display Item List

Monitor item
Contents
INT SENSOR VALUE
Displays the ratio between the maximum sensor lever angle which the height sensor can recognize
and the current sensor angle.
ACT OUTPUT
Displays the ratio between the headlamp aiming motor drive signal voltage calculated by the height
sensor and the height sensor power supply voltage.
ACT MEASURED
Displays the ratio between the headlamp aiming motor drive signal voltage and the height sensor
power supply voltage.
SPEED SIG
km/h
Displays vehicle speed calculated from the vehicle speed signal (8-pulse).
LIGHT SIGNAL
Displays the condition either tail lamps ON (power supply voltage) or tail lamps OFF (2 V or less)
judged from the tail lamp signal.
INT SEN VOLT
Displays the condition of IGN power supply.
EXT SEN
VOLT NOTE
EXT SEN SIG NOTE
LT-70
http://vnx.su

NOTE:
This item is displayed, but does not function.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on SELECT SYSTEM screen.

Touch ACTIVE TEST on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
Touch LAMP TEST, then MAX, MID or MIN to change aiming line.
Touch END after the test.
Display Item List

Item (CONSULT-II screen terms)
LAMP TEST
Test item
Description
Aiming direction change
Operation of headlamp aiming motor can be confirmed with

MAX, MID or MIN touched.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1.
2.
Touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS on the SELECT DIAG MODE screen.

Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
Description of DTC and Solutions after Detection

CONSULT-II can detect DTC (Diagnosis trouble code). The descriptions and solutions of DTC are listed
below.
Fail-safe
Details of error
indication
detected
by CONSULT-II
Conditions of
error detection
Code
storage
Within 5 seconds
after ignition switch
ON, or vehicle speed
less than or equal to
4 km/h (2.48 MPH).
[B2080]
[ECU TROUBLE]
ECU error of the

height sensor.
YES
[B2081]
[INITIAL NOT DONE]
Initialization has not

completed.
[B2082]
[SENSOR OUT OF
RANGE]
Vehicle height
detected by height
sensor is unusual.
NO
5 seconds and more

ON, or vehicle
speed more than to
4 km/h (2.48 MPH).
Fix headlamp aiming motor drive signal

around 0 V.
Maintain a current position of light axis.
Set and maintain light axis downward.
H
Reference
I
Replace height sensor, and
initialize it. Refer to LT-86,
"Removal and Installation of
Height Sensor" .
Refer to LT-78, "DTC B2081

[INITIAL NOT DONE]" .
LT

[SENSOR OUT OF RANGE]"
.
LT-71
http://vnx.su

Fail-safe
Details of error
indication
detected
by CONSULT-II
Conditions of
error detection
[B2083]
[SEN SIG NOT
PLAUSIBLE]
Vehicle height
detected by height
sensor while running does not
change more than 5
minutes stretch.
[B2084]
[VOLTAGE UNDER
LIMIT]
Voltage of height
sensor terminal 1
kept having less
than or equal to 9 V
for 1.5 seconds and
over.
[B2085]
[LOW BEAM SIG
OPEN LINE]
height sensor terminal 6 had less than

6 V at lighting
switch 1ST, or had
more than 2V for
1.5 seconds or
more at lighting
switch OFF.
[B2086]
[FRQ. OVER LIMIT]
Vehicle speed signal kept showing

over 340 km/h
(221.3 MPH) for
more than 1.5 seconds.
[B2087]
[SHORT TO
GROUND]
height sensor terminal 7 had short-circuit with a ground

more than 1.5 seconds.
[B2088]
[SHORT TO BATTERY]
height sensor terminal 7 had short-circuit with a power

supply line more
than 1.5 seconds.
[B208A]
Program error of
the height sensor.
Code
storage
Within 5 seconds
ON, or vehicle speed
less than or equal to
4 km/h (2.48 MPH).
5 seconds and more

ON, or vehicle
speed more than to
4 km/h (2.48 MPH).
Reference

[SEN SIG NOT PLAUSIBLE]"
.

[VOLTAGE UNDER LIMIT]" .
Set and maintain

light axis downward.
Maintain a current
position of light axis.

[LOW BEAM SIG OPEN
LINE]" .
YES
[FRQ. OVER LIMIT]" .

[SHORT TO GROUND]" .
[SHORT TO BATTERY]" .
Fix headlamp aiming motor drive signal

around 0 V.
Replace height sensor, and

initialize it. Refer to LT-86,
"Removal and Installation of
Height Sensor" .
CAUTION:
As for [B2084] to [B2086], fail-safe is performed in accordance with running condition when code is detected, and maintains the condition until ignition switch is turned OFF.
When ignition switch is turned ON, fail-safe is set to within 5 seconds after starting vehicle or vehicle speed less than
or equal to 4 km/h (2.48 MPH). Perform fail-safe only when having a current abnormality.
As for [B2084] to [B2088], perform fail-safe only when having a current abnormality.
LT-72
http://vnx.su

Check Aiming Control System
EKS00N65
LT
PKIB8647E
*1
Refer to FSU-5, "FRONT SUSPEN- *2

SION ASSEMBLY" in FSU section
and RSU-5, "REAR SUSPENSION
ASSEMBLY" in RSU section.
*4
Refer to LT-71, "Description of DTC

and Solutions after Detection" .
*5
Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Instal- *3

lation of Height Sensor" .
Refer to LT-71, "SELF-DIAG

RESULTS" .
Refer to LT-71, "ACTIVE TEST" .
Refer to LT-21, "Removal and Installation of Headlamp" in HEADLAMP.
LT-73
http://vnx.su
*6

*7
Refer to LT-69, "CONSULT-II Functions (HEADLAMP LEVELIZER)" .
*10 Refer to DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with ESP]" , DI-26,
"Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection
[without ESP]" in DI section.
*8
Refer to LT-64, "Height Sensor Con- *9

trol Operation" and LT-70, "DATA
MONITOR" .
Refer to LT-70, "DATA MONITOR" .
*11 Refer to LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT"

.
CAUTION:
If the vehicle height is outside the proper height, aiming control may not be performed normally even
when the headlamp aiming control system is normal.
Symptom Chart
EKS00N66
Symptom
Reference
Headlamp aiming motor does not operate (Both sides)
Refer to LT-74, "Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (Both Sides)" .
Headlamp aiming motor does not operate (One side)
Refer to LT-77, "Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (One Side)" .
Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (Both Sides)
EKS00N67
1. CHECK DIAGNOSIS RESULT-1

Select HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on CONSULT-II.
Is HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER displayed?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
PKIC0553E

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect height sensor sub harness connector.
Check voltage between height sensor sub harness connector
B142 terminal 2 (G) and ground.
2 (G) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
Harness for open or short between 10A fuse (No.5) and height sensor
Harness connector
LT-74
http://vnx.su
PKIC0554E

1.
2.

Check continuity between height sensor sub harness connector
B142 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
1 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86,
"Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" , LT-70,
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
D
PKIB9425E
4. CHECK DIAGNOSIS RESULT - 2
1.
Select HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on CONSULT-II, and select

SELF-DIAG RESULTS on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
2. Check display content in self-diagnostic results.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Check with obeying indicated DTC. Refer to LT-71,
"Description of DTC and Solutions after Detection" .
NO
>> GO TO 5.
H
PKIB0115E
5. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect headlamp aiming motor RH and LH connector.
Lighting switch is turned 2ND position.
Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor RH harness
connector E28 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 (L/B) Ground
: Voltage elevates after about 10 sec. when a load
imposes on rear axle. Voltage drops after about 10
sec. when remove a load.
6.
LT
L
PKIC0555E
Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor LH harness connector E44 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 (L/B) Ground
: Voltage elevates after about 10 sec. when a load
imposes on rear axle. Voltage drops after about 10
sec. when remove a load.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> 1. There is no change even though voltage is from about 5V through 10V.
: Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height
Sensor" , LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
2. Voltage is 0V.
: GO TO 8.
LT-75
http://vnx.su

1.
2.

Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor RH harness
connector E28 terminal 1 (R/L) and ground.
1 (R/L) Ground
3.
: Battery voltage.
Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor LH harness

connector E44 terminal 1 (R/L) and ground.
1 (R/L) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
PKIC0556E
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
Harness for open or short between 10A fuse [No.5, located in fuse block (J/B)] and front combination lamp
Harness connector

1.
2.

Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor RH harness
connector E28 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) Ground
3.
Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor LH harness

connector E44 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace headlamp. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
Installation of Headlamp" in HEADLAMP.
NG
PKIC0557E
8. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF, and lighting switch OFF.

Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor RH harness
connector E28 terminal 2 (L/B) and height sensor sub harness
connector B142 terminal 6 (L/B).
2 (L/B) 6 (L/B)
4.
Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor LH harness

connector E44 terminal 2 (L/B) and height sensor sub harness
connector B142 terminal 6 (L/B).
PKIC0558E
2 (L/B) 6 (L/B)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" , LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
LT-76
http://vnx.su

Headlamp Aiming Motor Does Not Operate (One Side)
EKS00N68

1.
2.
3.
Disconnect headlamp aiming motor connector which does not

operate.
Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor RH or LH harness connector E28 or E44 terminal 1 (R/L) and ground.
1 (R/L) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
D
PKIC0559E

1.
2.

Check continuity between headlamp aiming motor RH or LH
harness connector E28 or E44 terminal 3 (B) and ground.
3 (B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
PKIC0557E
3. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between headlamp aiming motor RH or LH harness connector E28 or E44 terminal 2 (L/B) and ground.
2 (L/B) Ground
LT
: Approx. 5 - 10 V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace headlamp. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
Installation of Headlamp" in HEADLAMP.
NG
PKIC0560E
LT-77
http://vnx.su

DTC B2081 [INITIAL NOT DONE]
EKS00N69
1. INITIALIZE HEIGHT SENSOR

1.
2.

Set the vehicle in unloaded condition. (Removal all loads in passenger and trunk rooms.)
3. Select HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on CONSULT-II, and select
WORK SUPPORT on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
4. Select SENSOR INITIALISE on SELECT WORK ITEM
screen.
5. Touch WRITE.
6. When INITIALISE COMPLETE is indicated, touch END.
PKIC0537E
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> When INCORRECT CONDITION is displayed, check connect CONSULT-II and height sensor
connector, and then initialize again. Refer to LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
When INITIALISE NOT DONE is displayed, initialize again. If INITIALISE NOT DONE is displayed again, replace height sensor and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of
Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
LT-78
http://vnx.su

DTC B2082 [SENSOR OUT OF RANGE]
EKS00N6A
1. CHECK HEIGHT SENSOR

1.
2.
3.
Select HEAD LAMP LEVELIZER on CONSULT-II and DATA

MONITOR on SELECT DIAG MODE screen.
Lighting switch is turned 1ST position.
Check INT SEN VALUE in unloaded condition. (Remove all
loads in the passenger and trunk room.)
INT SEN VALUE
: Should not be approx. 0% or

approx. 100%.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis result and perform the selfPKIB7209E
diagnosis again.
[B2082] is displayed again: Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal
and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
NO DTC is displayed: INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF HEIGHT SENSOR
Check height sensor and linkage for deformation or damage.

NOTE:
[B2082] may be displayed when the vehicle is lifted up.
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
>> Adjust height sensor, or replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and
Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
DTC B2083 [SEN SIG NOT PLAUSIBLE]
J
EKS00N6B

1.
2.
3.

Check if the INT SEN VALUE changes as the rear height of the
vehicle changes.
INT SEN VALUE
: Should vary as rear height of the

vehicle changes.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis result and perform the selfPKIB7209E
diagnosis again.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LT-79
http://vnx.su
LT
2. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF HEIGHT SENSOR

Check height sensor and linkage for deformation or damage.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Adjust height sensor, or replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and
Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
DTC B2084 [VOLTAGE UNDER LIMIT]
EKS00N6C

1.
2.

Check voltage on INT SEN VOLT screen.
INT SEN VOLT
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis result and perform the selfdiagnosis again.
[B2084] is displayed again: Replace height sensor,
and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
PKIB7209E
2. CHECK HEIGHT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

1.
2.
3.
4.

B142 terminal 2 (G) and ground.
2 (G) Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
"Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70,
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
LT-80
http://vnx.su
PKIC0554E

DTC B2085 [LOW BEAM SIG OPEN LINE]
EKS00N6D

1.
2.

Check voltage on LIGHT SIGNAL screen when lighting switch
OFF and 1ST position.
Item
LIGHT SIGNAL
Condition
Voltage
lighting switch OFF position
2V or less
lighting switch 1ST position
6V or more
NOTE:
The height sensor performs the self-diagnosis to check the
PKIB7209E
open-circuit of the low-beam circuit.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis result and perform the self-diagnosis again.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK TAIL LAMP RELAY SIGNAL

H
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

B142 terminal 5 (R/L*1 , LG/B*2 ) and ground.
5 (R/L*1 , LG/B*2 ) Ground
: Battery voltage.
LT
*1: LHD models, *2: RHD models
PKIC0561E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace height sensor, and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height SenL
sor" and LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
M
LT-81
http://vnx.su

DTC B2086 [FRQ. OVER LIMIT]
EKS00N6E

1.
2.
3.
Start engine and place vehicle in a driving condition.

Check the vehicle speed on SPEED SIG screen.
SPEED SIG
: Correct vehicle speed should be

displayed.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis. After drive the vehicle more
than 5 minutes, perform the self-diagnosis again.
PKIB7209E
and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK
SUPPORT" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL

Check the waveform of voltage between combination meter. harness
connector M44 terminal 11 (L/G) and ground when the vehicle is in
driving condition at a speed of about 40 km/h (25 MPH).
11 (LG) Ground:
PKIA1935E
PKIC0562E
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Refer to DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with ESP]" , DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal
Inspection [without ESP]" in DI section.
DTC B2087 [SHORT TO GROUND]
EKS00N6F

1.

2. Lighting switch is turned 1ST position.
3. Check if ACT OUTPUT and ACT MEASURED indicated the
same value.
NOTE:
If shorted to ground, ACT MEASURED indicates approx. 0%.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis and perform the self-diagnosis
again.
PKIB7209E
and initialize it. Refer to LT-86, "Removal and Installation of Height Sensor" and LT-70, "WORK
SUPPORT" .
NG
>> GO TO 2.
LT-82
http://vnx.su
2. CHECK HEADLAMP LEVELIZER
1.
2.
3.

same value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
D
PKIB7209E
3. CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEIGHT SENSOR AND HEADLAMP LEVELIZER

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between height sensor sub harness connector
B142 terminal 6 (L/B) and ground.
6 (L/B) Ground
OK or NG
OK
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
H
PKIC0563E
4. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR RH

1.
2.
3.
Connect headlamp aiming motor RH connector only.

Check if ACT OUTPUT and ACT MEASURED indicated the
same value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace headlamp RH. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
Installation of Headlamp" .
LT
PKIB7209E
5. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR LH

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect headlamp aiming motor RH connector.
Connect headlamp aiming motor LH connector.
same value.
OK or NG
OK
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
>> Replace headlamp LH. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
LT-83
http://vnx.su
PKIB7209E

DTC B2088 [SHORT TO BATTERY]
EKS00N6G

1.

same value.
NOTE:
If shorted to battery, ACT MEASURED indicates approx.
100%.
OK or NG
OK
>> Erase the self-diagnosis and perform the self-diagnosis
PKIB7209E
again.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
2. CHECK HEADLAMP LEVELIZER

1.
2.
3.
4.

Lighting switch is turned OFF position.
same value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
PKIB7209E
3. CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT BETWEEN HEIGHT SENSOR AND HEADLAMP LEVELIZER

1.
2.
3.
4.

Lighting switch is turned OFF position.
B142 terminal 6 (L/B) and ground.
6 (L/B) Ground
: Approx. 0 V
OK or NG
OK
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
LT-84
http://vnx.su
PKIC0564E
4. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR RH
1.
2.
3.
Connect headlamp aiming motor RH connector only.

same value.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> Replace headlamp RH. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
D
PKIB7209E
5. CHECK HEADLAMP AIMING MOTOR LH
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect headlamp aiming motor RH connector.
Connect headlamp aiming motor LH connector.
same value.
OK or NG
OK
"WORK SUPPORT" .
NG
>> Replace headlamp LH. Refer to LT-21, "Removal and
H
PKIB7209E
LT
LT-85
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Height Sensor
EKS00N6H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Lift-up the vehicle.
Remove linkage mounting bolt.
Remove height sensor mounting bolt and remove height sensor
from vehicle.
PKIC0424E
INSTALLATION
Height sensor mounting bolt
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
Linkage mounting bolt
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
NOTE:
Initialize whenever replacing the height sensor. Refer to LT-70, "WORK SUPPORT" .
LT-86
http://vnx.su
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS

System Description
PFP:26120
A
EKS003BX
TURN SIGNAL OPERATION

With the hazard switch in the OFF position and the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
through hazard switch terminal 2
to combination flasher unit terminal 1,
through combination flasher unit terminal 3
to turn signal switch terminal 1.

Ground is supplied
to combination flasher unit terminal 2
LH Turn Signal Lamp
F
When the turn signal switch is moved to the left position, power is supplied
through turn signal switch terminal 3

G
to front turn signal lamp LH terminal 1
to side turn signal lamp LH terminal 1

H
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2.

Ground is supplied

I

J
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 4

LT

.With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the LH turn signal
L
lamps.
RH Turn Signal Lamp

When the turn signal switch is moved to the right position, power is supplied
through turn signal switch terminal 2
to front turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
to side turn signal lamp RH terminal 1
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2.

Ground is supplied
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 4
LT-87
http://vnx.su

.With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the RH turn signal
lamps.
HAZARD LAMP OPERATION

to hazard switch terminal 3.

With the hazard switch in the ON position, power is supplied
to combination flasher unit terminal 1,
through combination flasher unit terminal 3
to hazard switch terminal 4.

Ground is supplied
to combination flasher unit terminal 2

Power is supplied
to rear combination lamp LH terminal 2,
to rear combination lamp RH terminal 2.

Ground is supplied
to front turn signal lamp LH and RH terminal 2
to side turn signal lamp LH and RH terminal 2
through groundsE24 and E50,
to rear combination lamp LH and RH terminal 4

With power and ground supplied, the combination flasher unit controls the flashing of the hazard warning
lamps.
LT-88
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram TURN
EKS003BY
LHD MODELS
LT
TKWA1526E
LT-89
http://vnx.su
TKWA0073E
LT-90
http://vnx.su

RHD MODELS
A
LT
TKWA1527E
LT-91
http://vnx.su
TKWA1528E
LT-92
http://vnx.su

Trouble Diagnoses
EKS003BG
A
Symptom
Possible cause
1. Hazard switch
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps do

not operate.
2. Combination flasher unit

3. Open in combination flasher unit circuit
2. Hazard switch
3. Turn signal switch
4. Open in turn signal switch circuit
2. Refer to combination flasher unit check.
2. Hazard switch
3. Open in hazard switch circuit
2. Check hazard switch.
3. Check turn signal switch.

4. Check the wire between combination
flasher unit terminal 3 and turn signal
switch terminal 1 for open circuit.
3. Check the wire between combination

flasher unit terminal 3 and hazard switch
terminal 4 for open circuit.
Front turn signal lamp LH or RH does not

operate.
1. Bulb
1. Check bulb.
Rear turn signal lamp LH or RH does not

operate.
1. Bulb
1. Check bulb.
2. Grounds B8 and B18
2. Check grounds B8 and B18.
Side turn signal lamp LH or RH does not

operate.
1. Bulb
1. Check bulb.
LH and RH turn indicators do not operate.
1. Ground
LH or RH turn indicator does not operate.
1. Bulb
Electrical Components Inspection
3. Check wiring to combination flasher unit

for open circuit.
1. Check 10A fuse (No. 35, located in the

fuse and fusible link box). Verify battery
positive voltage is present at terminal 3
of hazard switch.
1. 10A fuse
Hazard warning lamps do not operate but
turn signal lamps operate.
1. Check 10A fuse [No. 2, located in fuse

block (J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and
verify battery positive voltage is present
at terminal 2 of hazard switch.
1. 10A fuse
Turn signal lamps do not operate but hazard warning lamps operate.
Repair order
LT
EKS0034C
COMBINATION FLASHER UNIT CHECK
Before checking, ensure that bulbs meet specifications.

Connect a battery and test lamp to the combination flasher unit,
as shown. Combination flasher unit is properly functioning if it
blinks when power is supplied to the circuit.
SEL122E
LT-93
http://vnx.su

Bulb Replacement
EKS0034D
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP

1.
2.
3.
Remove the front turn signal lamp. Refer toLT-94, "Removal and
Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp"
Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Front turn signal lamp
4.
: 12V - 21W (amber)
SKIA0053E
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LAMP

1.
2.
3.
Remove side turn signal lamp. Refer toLT-95, "Removal and

Installation of Side Turn Signal Lamp"
Side turn signal lamp
4.
: 12V - 5W
PKIA0468E
REAR TURN SIGNAL LAMP

Refer to LT-119, "Bulb Replacement" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp
EKS003BH
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Press the upper pawl to remove front turn signal lamp toward
the front of the vehicle.
Disconnect front turn signal lamp connector.
SKIA0054E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Connect front turn signal lamp connector.

Insert the pawl into head lamp hole, and install front turn signal lamp.
LT-94
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Side Turn Signal Lamp
EKS003BI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Push the side turn signal lamp toward A direction in the figure,
and pull up B direction in the figure.
Disconnect the side turn signal lamp connector.
D
PKIA0469E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp

Refer to LT-119, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.
EKS003BJ
LT
LT-95
http://vnx.su
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
PFP:25540
EKS0034F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the steering column cover. Refer to PS-11, "STEERING

COLUMN" in POWER STEERING SYSTEM (PS) section.
Remove two screws, then remove the lighting and turn signal
switch from the spiral cable.
Disconnect the lighting and turn signal switch connector.
SKIA0018E
INSTALLATION
EKS0034G
Using circuit tester, check continuity between the lighting and turn signal switch connector terminals in each
operation status of the switch.
Lighting switch is refer to LT-28, "Wiring Diagram H/LAMP " .
Turn signal lamp switch is refer to LT-89, "Wiring Diagram TURN " .
Front fog lamp switch is refer to LT-109, "Wiring Diagram F/FOG " .
Rear fog lamp switch is refer to LT-113, "Wiring Diagram -R/FOG-/Without Front Fog Lamp" ,LT-114, "Wiring
Diagram -R/FOG-/With Front Fog Lamp" .
LT-96
http://vnx.su
HAZARD SWITCH
HAZARD SWITCH
PFP:25290
A
EKS003BZ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL

ASSEMBLY" in INSTRUMENT PANEL (IP) section.
Press the hazard switch fixing pawls and remove it from the
cluster lid C.
PKIA8617E
INSTALLATION
F
LT
LT-97
http://vnx.su
STOP LAMP
STOP LAMP
Wiring Diagram STOP/L
PFP:26550
EKS0034I
TKWA1529E
LT-98
http://vnx.su
STOP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS0034K
STOP LAMP
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP

1.
2.
3.
High-mounted Stop Lamp

4.
Remove the high-mounted stop lamp cover. Refer to LT-99,

"HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP" .
Turn the high-mounted stop lamp bulb socket counterclockwise
and unlock it.
Remove the bulb.
: 12V - 5W

E
PKIA0496E
EKS0034L
STOP LAMP
Refer toLT-119, "Removal and Installation" in REAR COMBINATION LAMP.

Removal
1.
2.
Pull the edge of the cover (A in the figure below) to each side in
turn downward until the pawls inside the cover are released.
Pull down the cover toward under the vehicle.
J
PKIA8618E
3.
4.
LT
Remove the high-mounted stop lamp mounting bolts.

Disconnect the high-mounted stop lamp connector and remove
it from the vehicle.
PKIA5577E
Installation
LT-99
http://vnx.su
BACK-UP LAMP
BACK-UP LAMP
Wiring Diagram BACK/L
PFP:26550
EKS003C3
GASOLINE ENGINE
TKWA1530E
LT-100
http://vnx.su
BACK-UP LAMP
DIESEL ENGINE
A
LT
TKWA1531E
LT-101
http://vnx.su
BACK-UP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS003C4
EKS003C5
LT-102
http://vnx.su
PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS

Wiring Diagram TAIL/L
PFP:26550
A
EKS003C0
LHD MODELS
B
LT
TKWA1532E
LT-103
http://vnx.su
TKWA0066E
LT-104
http://vnx.su

RHD MODELS
A
LT
TKWA1533E
LT-105
http://vnx.su
TKWA1534E
LT-106
http://vnx.su

Bulb Replacement
EKS003C1
PARKING AND TAIL LAMPS

Refer to LT-119, "Bulb Replacement" .
LICENSE PLATE LAMP

1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove license plate lamp mounting screws.

Remove lens of license plate lamp.
Remove bulb from its socket.
Installation is the reverse of removal.
License plate lamp
: 12V - 5W
E
PKIA8753E
EKS003C2
PARKING AND TAIL LAMPS
Refer to LT-119, "Removal and Installation" .
LICENSE PLATE LAMP

Removal
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the license lamp finisher. Refer to EI-31, "LICENSE

LAMP FINISHER" in EXTERIOR & INTERIOR (EI) section.
Remove the harness from installation pawl for harness.
Remove license plate lamp mounting screws (2 each, RH and
LH).
Pull out license plate lamp from license lamp finisher.
J
PKIA5760E
Installation
LT

License plate lamp mounting screws
: 1.4 Nm (0.15 kg-m, 13 in-lb)
LT-107
http://vnx.su
FRONT FOG LAMP

FRONT FOG LAMP
System Description
PFP:00011
EKS003DF
DESCRIPTION
to front fog lamp relay terminal 3.

With the lighting switch in the 2ND position, power is supplied
to fog lamp switch terminal 32.
FOG LAMP OPERATION

The front and rear fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 1ST
or 2ND position for front fog lamp operation.
With the fog lamp switch in the FRONT FOG ON position or FRONT & REAR FOG ON position, power is supplied
through fog lamp switch terminal 31
to front fog lamp relay terminal 2.

Ground is supplied
to front fog lamp relay terminal 1

The front fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied
through front fog lamp relay terminal 5
to front fog lamp LH and RH terminal 1, and
to combination meter terminal 15.

Ground is supplied
to front fog lamp terminal 2

With power and ground supplied, the front fog lamps and FRONT FOG indicator illuminate.
LT-108
http://vnx.su
FRONT FOG LAMP

Wiring Diagram F/FOG
EKS003DG
LT
TKWA1535E
LT-109
http://vnx.su
FRONT FOG LAMP

Aiming Adjustment
1.
2.
EKS003DH
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog
lamp lens as shown at left.
Turn front fog lamps ON.
PKIB1672E
3.
Insert a phillips screwdriver into the access hole and engage the
tip of the screwdriver with the gear of the adjuster as shown at
left. The aiming adjuster can now be turned by turning the
screwdriver.
PKIA5558E
4.
Adjust front fog lamps so that the top edge of the high intensity
zone is 100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp centers
as shown at left.
When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp.
PKIB1673E
LT-110
http://vnx.su
FRONT FOG LAMP

Bulb Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
EKS003DI
Remove fog lamp. Refer to LT-111, "Removal and Installation" .

Front fog lamp
:12V - 55W (H11)
CAUTION:
Never touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease

and other oily matters away from it. Never touch bulb by
hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning
PKIA5559E
may result.
Never leave bulb out of fog lamp housing for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc. May
affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
EKS003DJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect fog lamp connector.
Remove fog lamp mounting nuts from fog lamp bracket.
Pull out fog lamp from vehicle and disconnect connector.
PKIA5560E
INSTALLATION
Fog lamp mounting bolt
: 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 in-lb)
LT
LT-111
http://vnx.su
REAR FOG LAMP

REAR FOG LAMP
System Description
PFP:26550
EKS00ESB
DESCRIPTION
Power is supplied at all times (without front fog lamp)
to rear fog lamp relay terminal 3.

Power is supplied at all times (with front fog lamp)

With the lighting switch in the 2ND position, power is supplied (without front fog lamp)

With the lighting switch in the 2ND position, power is supplied (with front fog lamp)
FOG LAMP OPERATION

The front and rear fog lamp switch is built into the combination switch. The lighting switch must be in the 1ST
or 2ND position for rear fog lamp operation.
With the fog lamp switch in the REAR FOG ON position, ground is supplied
through fog lamp switch terminal 33

Ground is supplied
to rear fog lamp relay terminal 1

The rear fog lamp relay is energized and power is supplied
through rear fog lamp relay terminal 5
to rear fog lamp terminal 1, and

Ground is supplied
to rear fog lamp terminal 2

With power and ground supplied, the rear fog lamps and FRONT FOG indicator illuminate.
LT-112
http://vnx.su
REAR FOG LAMP

Wiring Diagram -R/FOG-/Without Front Fog Lamp
EKS003BV
LT
TKWA1536E
LT-113
http://vnx.su
REAR FOG LAMP

Wiring Diagram -R/FOG-/With Front Fog Lamp
EKS003BW
TKWA1537E
LT-114
http://vnx.su
REAR FOG LAMP

Bulb Replacement
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear fog lamp. Refer to LT-115, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove bulb.
Rear fog lamp
4.
EKS0015L
: 12V - 21W
C
D
SKIA0052E
EKS0015M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove rear fog lamp mounting screws.

Take out rear fog lamp from bumper, then disconnect connector.
F
H
SKIA0090E
INSTALLATION
I

Rear fog lamp mounting screws
: 1.4 Nm (0.14 kg-m, 12 in-lb)

J
LT
LT-115
http://vnx.su
CLEARANCE LAMP/TAIL LAMP

CLEARANCE LAMP/TAIL LAMP
Bulb Replacement (Clearance Lamp)
PFP:26010
EKS001UR
Refer to LT-20, "Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance Lamp" in HEADLAMP-XENON TYPE- or
LT-37, "Bulb Replacement of Headlamp and Clearance lamp" in HEADLAMP-CONVENTIONAL TYPE-.
Bulb Replacement (Tail lamp)
EKS001US
Removal and Installation of Clearance Lamp
EKS001UT
Refer to LT-21, "Removal and Installation of Headlamp" in HEADLAMP-XENON TYPE- or LT-38, "Removal
and Installation of Headlamp" in HEADLAMP-CONVENTIONAL TYPE-.
Removal and Installation of Tail lamp

LT-116
http://vnx.su
EKS001UU

Bulb Replacement
PFP:26590
A
EKS0034W
Refer to LT-99, "Bulb Replacement" in STOP LAMP.

B
EKS0034X
Refer to LT-99, "Removal and Installation" in STOP LAMP.

C
LT
LT-117
http://vnx.su
REAR COMBINATION LAMP

Wiring Diagram STOP/L
PFP:26554
EKS003C6
TKWA0067E
LT-118
http://vnx.su

Bulb Replacement
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00164
Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts.

Pull rear combination lamp toward rear of vehicle. Disengage
locating pins.
Remove bulb.
Stop/tail lamp
Rear turn signal lamp
Back-up lamp
: 12V - 21/5W
: 12V - 21W
: 12V - 21W
D
SKIA0057E
EKS00165
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove luggage-side lower finisher. Refer to EI-35, "BODY

SIDE TRIM" in "EI EXTERIOR & INTERIOR" section.
Disconnect rear combination lamp connector.
Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts.
Pull rear combination lamp toward rear of vehicle. Disengage
locating pins.
From outside the vehicle, pull harness grommet rearward, and
remove harness.
H
PKIA8620E
INSTALLATION

Rear combination lamp mounting bolts
: 5.4 Nm (0.55 kg-m, 48 in-lb)

J
LT
LT-119
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION SWITCH
COMBINATION SWITCH
PFP:25567
EKS001V6
Refer to SRS-33, "SPIRAL CABLE" in "SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)" section for details.
EKS001V7
Refer to LT-96, "Switch Circuit Inspection" in "LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH" section, and WW-8,
"Terminal and Reference Values for Combination Switch" , WW-16, "Terminal and Reference Values for Combination Switch" in WW Wiper/Washer Horn section for details.
LT-120
http://vnx.su
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION
Bulb Replacement, Removal and Installation
1.
2.
3.
A
EKS00F86
Remove the instrument center lower panel. Refer to IP-10,

"INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" in IP section.
Pull the bulb from socket.
Ashtray illumination lamp
4.
PFP:25860
: 12V - 1.4W

D
PKIA6440E
LT
LT-121
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
ILLUMINATION
System Description
PFP:27545
EKS003C7
to lighting switch terminal 11.

The lighting switch must be in the 1ST or 2ND position for illumination.
The following chart shows the power and ground connector terminals for the components included in the illumination system.
Component
Connector No.
Power terminal
Ground terminal
Headlamp washier switch
M23
Headlamp aiming switch
M24
Door mirror remote control switch
M26
10
ESP off switch
M25
Hazard switch
M51
4WD mode switch
M39
Rear window defogger switch
M50
A/C auto amp.
M52
12
11
Combination meter (LHD models)
M46
56
66
Combination meter (RHD models)
M46
45
56
Audio
M42
CD auto changer
M82
34
35
Heater control panel
M55
A/T device
M58
Cigarette lighter
M56
Heated seat switch LH (LHD models)
B131
Heated seat switch RH (LHD models)
B132
Heated seat switch LH (RHD models)
B35
Heated seat switch RH (RHD models)
B34
LT-122
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
EKS003BL
LT
TKWA1538E
LT-123
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram ILL
EKS003BM
LHD MODELS
TKWB1133E
LT-124
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
A
LT
TKWA1540E
LT-125
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
TKWA1541E
LT-126
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
A
LT
TKWA1542E
LT-127
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
RHD MODELS
TKWA1543E
LT-128
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
A
LT
TKWA1544E
LT-129
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
TKWA1545E
LT-130
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
A
LT
TKWA1546E
LT-131
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
System Description
PFP:26410
EKS003BQ
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND

to key switch terminal 1, and
to time control unit terminal 1,
to interior room lamp terminal 1
to luggage room lamp terminal 1, and
to map lamp terminal 1 (with sunroof).

When the key is removed from ignition key cylinder, power is interrupted
through key switch terminal 2

With the ignition key switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied

Ground is supplied
through grounds terminals M27 and M70.

When the front door (driver side) is opened, ground is supplied
through front door switch (driver side) terminal 2
through front door switch (driver side) terminal 3

When other door is opened, ground is supplied
through front door switch (passenger side) terminal 1
through case ground of front door switch (passenger side),
through rear door switch LH and RH terminal 1
through case ground of rear door switch LH and RH, and
through back door switch terminal 1
through back door switch terminal 3
through ground D53.

When the front door (driver side) is unlocked, the time control unit receives a ground signal
through front door lock actuator (driver side) terminal 5
through front door lock actuator (driver side) terminal 2

When a signal, or combination of signals is received by the time control unit, ground is supplied
to interior room lamp terminal 2, and
to map lamp terminal 3 (with sunroof)
through time control unit terminal 26.

With power and ground supplied, the interior room lamp and map lamp (with sunroof) illuminates.
SWITCH OPERATION
When interior room lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied
to interior room lamp.
through case grounds of interior room lamp.
LT-132
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

When map lamp switch is ON, ground is supplied (with sunroof)
to map lamp terminal 2
through ground M27 and M70.
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION

When interior room lamp and map lamp (with sunroof) switch is in the DOOR position, the time control unit
keeps the interior room lamp and map lamp (with sunroof) illuminated for about 30 seconds when
unlock signal is supplied from driver's door unlock sensor while all doors are closed and key is out of ignition key cylinder
key is removed from ignition key cylinder while all doors are closed
driver's door is opened and then closed while key is out of the ignition key cylinder. (However, if the
driver's door is closed with the key inserted in the ignition key cylinder after the driver's door is opened
with the key removed, the timer is operated.)
The timer is canceled when
driver's door is locked,
driver's door is opened, or
ignition switch is turned ON.
ON-OFF CONTROL
When the front door (driver side and passenger side), and rear door LH or RH is opened, the interior room
lamp and map lamp (with sunroof) turns on while the interior room lamp and map lamp (with sunroof) switch is
in the DOOR position.
LT
LT-133
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Wiring Diagram -ROOM/L-
EKS003BR
LHD MODELS
TKWA1547E
LT-134
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

A
LT
TKWA1548E
LT-135
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

RHD MODELS
TKWA1549E
LT-136
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

A
LT
TKWA1550E
LT-137
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Operate
EKS0079P
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY SIGNAL

1.
2.
3.

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M30
terminal 1 (L/B) and ground.
1 (L/B) - Ground
: Battery voltage.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between time control
unit and fuse.
PKIA5561E
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector and
ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector
M31
30 (R)
Condition
Voltage
OFF (closed)
Approx. 5V
ON (open)
Approx. 0V
(-)
Ground
PKIA5562E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)

1.
2.
Disconnect front door switch (driver side) connector.

Check continuity front door switch (driver side) terminal.
Connector
B16
Terminal
2
Condition
Continuity
OFF (closed)
No
ON (open)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
Front door switch (driver side) ground circuit condition
Harness for open or short between time control unit
and front door switch (driver side)
NG
>> Replace driver side door switch.
LT-138
http://vnx.su
PKIA5563E
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
4. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL (DRIVER SIDE)

ground.
B
Terminal
(+)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage
Locked
Approx. 5V
Unlocked
Approx. 0V
M31
28 (Y/G)
C
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PKIA5564E
5. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR (DRIVER SIDE)

1.
2.
Disconnect front door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.

Check continuity front door lock actuator terminal.
Connector
D9
Terminal
2
Condition
Continuity
Locked
No
Unlocked
Yes
OK or NG
OK
Front door lock actuator ground circuit
and front door lock actuator
NG
>> Replace front door lock actuator (driver side).
LT
L
PKIA5565E
6. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES (EXCEPT DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector
M31
31 (R/W)
(-)
Ground
Condition
(Except driver
side door)
Voltage
ON (open)
Approx. 0V
OFF (closed)
Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
>> GO TO 7.
PKIA5566E
LT-139
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
7. CHECK DOOR SWITCHES (EXCEPT DRIVER SIDE)

1.
2.
Disconnect door switch harness connector.

Check continuity between door switch terminal and ground.
Connector
Front door switch
(passenger side)
B118
Rear door switch LH*1 ,
B20
Rear door switch RH*2

Rear door switch
B121
LH*1
Condition
Continuity
OFF
(closed)
No
Ground
ON
(open)
Rear door switch RH*2
D45
*1
Terminal
Yes
Back door switch

:LHD models, *2 :RHD models
OK or NG
OK
Door switch ground condition
and door switch
NG
>> Replace door switch.
PKIA5567E

ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector
M31
18 (W/L)
Condition
Voltage
Inserted
Battery voltage
Removed
Approx. 0V
(-)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 9.
PKIA5568E
9. CHECK KEY SWITCH

1.
2.

Check continuity key switch terminal.
Connector
M9
Terminal
1
Condition
Continuity
Inserted
Yes
Removed
No
OK or NG
OK
Harness for open or short between key switch and
fuse
Harness for open or short between time control unit and key switch
NG
LT-140
http://vnx.su
PKIA5569E
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Interior Room Lamp Timer Does Not Cancel
EKS0079Q
1. CHECK IGNITION ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.

ground.
C
Terminal
(+)
Connector
M31
17 (G)
(-)
OFF
Ground
0V
ACC
ON
0V
Battery
voltage
D
PKIA5570E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check harness for open or short between time control unit and fuse.
2. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL

1.
2.

ground.
Terminal
(+)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage
OFF (closed)
Approx. 5V
ON (open)
Approx. 0V
M31
30 (R)
Ground
PKIA5571E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
>> GO TO 3.
LT

1.
2.

Check continuity front door switch (driver side) terminal.
Connector
B16
Terminal
2
Condition
Continuity
OFF (closed)
No
ON (open)
Yes
OK or NG
OK
Driver side door switch ground circuit condition
and driver side door switch
NG
>> Replace driver side door switch.
LT-141
http://vnx.su
PKIA5563E
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
4. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL (DRIVER SIDE)

ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Connector
M31
28 (Y/G)
Condition
Voltage
Locked
Approx. 5V
Unlocked
Approx. 0V
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> GO TO 5.
PKIA5564E
5. CHECK FRONT DOOR UNLOCK SENSOR (DRIVER SIDE)

1.
2.
Disconnect front door lock actuator (driver side) harness connector.

Check continuity between front door lock actuator (driver side)
terminal.
Connector
D9
Terminals
2
Condition
Continuity
Locked
No
Unlocked
Yes
OK or NG
OK
Front door lock actuator ground circuit
and front door lock actuator
NG
>> Replace front door lock actuator.
PKIA5565E
Bulb Replacement
EKS003DB
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

1.
2.
Insert a narrow slotted screwdriver in the cutout, and remove

lens.
Remove the bulb.
Room lamp
3.
: 12V - 10W
PKIA0471E
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP

Refer to LT-142, "Bulb Replacement" in INTERIOR ROOM LAMP.
LT-142
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

EKS003DC
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Removal
1.
2.
3.
Insert a narrow slotted screwdriver in the cutout, and remove

lens.
Remove room lamp mounting screws, and remove room lamp.
Disconnect the interior room lamp connector.
PKIA0471E
Installation
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP

Refer to LT-143, "Removal and Installation" in INTERIOR ROOM LAMP.
LT
LT-143
http://vnx.su
STEP LAMP
STEP LAMP
Wiring Diagram STEP/L
PFP:26420
EKS00F8B
LHD MODELS
TKWA1551E
LT-144
http://vnx.su
STEP LAMP
RHD MODELS
A
LT
TKWA1552E
LT-145
http://vnx.su
STEP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1.
2.
Remove lens using a clip driver or a suitable tool.

Remove bulb.
Step lamp
3.
EKS00N7Q
: 12V - 2.7W
PKIA7192E
EKS00N7R
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove lens.
Using a clip driver or a suitable tool, press and remove metal clip
of step lamp.
Disconnect step lamp connector.
PKIA7193E
INSTALLATION
LT-146
http://vnx.su
MAP LAMP
MAP LAMP
Wiring Diagram INT/L
PFP:26430
A
EKS00F88
LT
TKWA1553E
LT-147
http://vnx.su
MAP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
EKS00F89
MAP LAMP (WITHOUT SUNROOF)

1.
2.
3.
Remove the lens using a clip driver or a suitable tool.

Remove the shade mounting screw and remove the shade from
the map lamp.
Remove the bulb.
Map lamp (Without sunroof)
4.
: 12V - 8W
PKIA5761E
MAP LAMP (WITH SUNROOF)

1.
2.
Remove the lens using a clip driver or a suitable tool.

Remove the bulb.
Map lamp (With sunroof)
3.
: 12V - 10W
SKIA0065E
EKS00F8A
REMOVAL
Map Lamp (Without Sunroof)
1.
2.
Using a clips driver or a suitable tool, press and remove the

metal clip of the map lamp.
Disconnect the map lamp connector.
PKIA0472E
Map Lamp (With Sunroof)

1.
2.
Using a clips driver or a suitable tool, press and remove the

metal clip of the map lamp.
Disconnect the map lamp connector and sunroof connector.
SKIA0066E
INSTALLATION
LT-148
http://vnx.su
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
PFP:26297
A
EKS003GS
Item
Xenon type
Conventional type
Wattage (W)
Low
35 (D2R)
High
55 (H1)
High/Low
60/55 (H4)
Driving lamp
EKS003GT
D
Item
Wattage (W)
Clearance lamp
21 (amber)
Fog lamp
Rear combination lamp
Front fog lamp
55 (H11)
Rear fog lamp
21
Stop/Tail lamp
21/5
Turn signal lamp
21
Back-up lamp
21
License plate lamp
High-mounted stop lamp
Interior Lamp/Illumination
H
EKS003GU
Item
Wattage (W)
Interior room lamp

Map lamp
65 (H1R1)
Exterior Lamp
Front combination lamp
10
Without sunroof
With sunroof
10
Luggage room lamp
10
Step lamp
2.7
Ashtray illumination lamp
1.4
LT
LT-149
http://vnx.su
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
LT-150
http://vnx.su
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
DI
DRIVER INFORMATION SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
COMBINATION METERS ........................................... 4
UNIFIED CONTROL METER ................................ 4
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/
TRIP METER ........................................................ 4
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ........ 4
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........................ 4
TACHOMETER ..................................................... 5
SPEEDOMETER ................................................... 5
FUEL GAUGE ....................................................... 5
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR .............. 5
CAN Communication ................................................ 6
TYPE 1/TYPE 2 .................................................... 7
TYPE 3 .................................................................. 8
TYPE 4/TYPE 5 .................................................... 9
TYPE 6 ................................................................ 10
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location....11
Combination Meter ................................................. 12
CHECK ................................................................ 12
Schematic/LHD Models .......................................... 13
Wiring Diagram METER /LHD Models ........... 14
Schematic/RHD Models ......................................... 16
Wiring Diagram METER /RHD Models .......... 17
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination
Meter ...................................................................... 19
Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter ........ 19
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .......................... 19
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE ....... 19
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis ........................ 20
Diagnosis Flow ....................................................... 20
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection ........ 21
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptom ................... 22
DIAGNOSIS RESULTS ....................................... 22
Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Gasoline Engine
Models] ................................................................... 23
FUEL GAUGE ..................................................... 23
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 23
Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Diesel Engine Models] .......................................................................... 24
FUEL GAUGE ..................................................... 24
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ............................. 24
Engine Speed Signal Inspection ............................. 26
Water Temperature Signal Inspection .................... 26
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with ESP] ........... 26
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [without ESP] ...... 26
The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator
Wrong Value or Varies ............................................ 26
The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL position... 27
Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [without
Auto A/C] ................................................................ 28
Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [with Auto
A/C] ......................................................................... 29
Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 30
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK/GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS ..................................... 30
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK/DIESEL
ENGINE MODELS .............................................. 30
AMBIENT SENSOR CHECK ............................... 31
Removal and Installation for Combination Meter ... 31
REMOVAL ........................................................... 31
INSTALLATION ................................................... 31
Disassembly and Assembly for Combination Meter... 32
DISASSEMBLY ................................................... 32
ASSEMBLY ......................................................... 32
WARNING LAMPS .................................................... 33
Schematic ............................................................... 33
Wiring Diagram WARN /LHD Models ............. 34
Wiring Diagram WARN /RHD Models ............ 42
Electrical Components Inspection .......................... 50
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK ..................... 50
DIODE CHECK ................................................... 50
A/T INDICATOR ........................................................ 51
Wiring Diagram AT/IND /LHD Models ............ 51
DI-1
http://vnx.su
DI
Wiring Diagram AT/IND /RHD Models ............ 52

A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate ........................... 53
WARNING CHIME ..................................................... 54
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ....... 54
LIGHT WARNING CHIME ................................... 54
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ........................... 54
KEY REMINDER WARNING CHIME [FOR RHD
MODELS] ............................................................ 54
Wiring Diagram CHIME /LHD Models .............55

Wiring Diagram CHIME /RHD Models ............56
Symptom Chart .......................................................58
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection .........58
Front Door Switch (driver side) Inspection ..............59
Lighting Switch Input Signal Inspection ..................60
CLOCK ......................................................................61
Wiring Diagram CLOCK .................................61
DI-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS00367
WARNING:
harness connectors.


EKS00368
DI
DI-3
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
COMBINATION METERS
System Description
PFP:24814
EKS00EGZ
UNIFIED CONTROL METER
Speedometer, odo/trip meter, tachometer, fuel gauge and water temperature gauge are controlled by the
unified meter control unit, which is built into the combination meter.
Digital meter is adopted for odo/trip meter.*
*The record of the odo meter is kept even if the battery cable is disconnected. The record of the trip meter
is erased when the battery cable is disconnected.
Odo/trip meter segments can be checked in diagnosis mode.
Meter/gauge can be checked in diagnosis mode.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER
The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by the
combination meter and the mileage is displayed.
Ambient temperature indicator indicates signal from ambient sensor processed by combination meter.
Depressing the odo/trip meter switch toggles the mode in the following order.
SKIA8917E
The odo/trip meter display mode toggling and trip display resetting can be identified by the amount of time
that elapses from pressing the odo/trip meter switch to releasing it.
When resetting with trip A displayed, only trip A display is reset (The same way for trip B).
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT


to combination meter terminals 2.

Ground is supplied
to combination meter terminals 21
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature.
ECM provides an engine coolant temperature signal to combination meter for water temperature gauge with
CAN communication line.
DI-4
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
ECM provides an engine speed signal to combination meter for tachometer with CAN communication line.
SPEEDOMETER
ESP/TCS/ABS control unit (with ESP) or ABS actuator and electric unit (without ESP) provides a vehicle
speed signal to the combination meter for the speedometer with CAN communication line.
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank.
The fuel gauge is regulated by a variable ground signal supplied
from grounds B8 and B18 (LHD models)
from grounds B107 and B119 (RHD models)
through terminal 1 and 4 of the fuel level sensor unit
through terminal 3 and 1 of the sub fuel level sensor unit and
to combination meter terminal 8 for the fuel gauge.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

The ambient temperature is indicated by the signal from ambient sensor.
Combination meter inputs voltage conversed from resistance which ambient sensor detects.
Indication range is between 30 and 55 C (22 and 131 F). When ambient air temperature is less than 30
C (22 F) or more than 55 C (131 F), display shows ---C. When indicated temperature becomes less
than 3 C (37 F), ambient temperature indicator flashes as a sign of warning.
Without Auto A/C
Power is supplied
to ambient sensor terminal 1.

Ground is supplied
through ambient sensor terminal 2.

Signal is supplied
through ambient sensor terminal 1
DI
With Auto A/C

Power is supplied
through auto amp terminal 9
to ambient sensor terminal 1.

Ground is supplied
to combination meter terminal 28 and auto amp terminal 24
through ambient sensor terminal 2.

And combination meter receives ambient sensor signal from ambient sensor
through ambient sensor terminal 1

NOTE:
Combination meter distinguishes whether or not the combination meter terminal 29 receives voltage (VAC signal) from auto amp terminal 28. If the terminal receives, combination meter discerns as auto A/C.
Indication When Turning Ignition Switch OFF
In a case that temperature detected by ambient sensor is higher than indicated temperature before turning ignition switch OFF.
In a case of more than 3.5 hours after turning ignition switch OFF, temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated when turning ignition switch ON.
In a case of less then 3.5 hours after turning ignition switch OFF, temperature at the time of turning ignition
switch off is indicated.
DI-5
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
In a case that temperature detected by ambient sensor is lower than indicated temperature before turning
ignition switch OFF.
Temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated when turning ignition switch ON.
Indication During Running

Though temperature detected by ambient sensor temporarily changed, indicating temperature continentally
indicates.
In a case that temperature detected by ambient sensor is higher than indicated temperature.
If vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (13 MPH), elevation of indicating temperature is limited according to
the speed until temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated.
NOTE:
Vehicle speed 20 km/h (13 MPH): 256 sec., 25 km/h (16 MPH): 238 sec., 35 km/h (22 MPH): 200 sec., 50
km/h (31 MPH): 144 sec., 65 km/h (40 MPH): 88 sec., more than 80 km/h (50 MPH): 32 sec.
If vehicle speed is more than 20 km/h (13 MPH), and that temperature detected by ambient sensor
becomes 8 C (46 F) more than indicating temperature, indicating temperature will be elevated unit the
degree becomes same as temperature detected by ambient sensor with limiting elevation of indicating
temperature 1 C par a minute.
If vehicle speed is less than 20 km/h (13 MPH), indicating temperature is continually kept.
In a case that temperature detected by ambient sensor is lower than indicated temperature.
Temperature detected by ambient sensor is indicated during running.
CAN Communication
EKS00EH0
EKS00MXI
Body type
Wagon
Axle
Engine
4WD
YD22DDTi
Transmission
M/T
Brake control
CAN system type
QR20DE/QR25DE
YD22DDTi
A/T
M/T
ABS
1
DI-6
http://vnx.su
QR25DE
A/T
ESP
COMBINATION METERS
TYPE 1/TYPE 2
System diagram
PKIA6458E

Signals
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
H
4WD control unit
Combination meter
ECM
Engine speed signal
MI signal
R
R
R
DI
R
R

A/C switch signal*
DI-7
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
TYPE 3
System diagram
PKIA6457E

ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM

TCM
R
T

Engine speed signal
MI signal

R
R
R
R
R
T
PN range signal
R
R

R
T
T
R
T
DI-8
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Signals
ECM
TCM
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
TYPE 4/TYPE 5
System diagram
PKIA9634E
Signals
ECM
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
Steering angle
sensor

2
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
A/C switch signal*1

T
T
Engine speed signal
R
R
R
R
MI signal

R
R
T
DI-9
http://vnx.su
DI
COMBINATION METERS
TYPE 6
System diagram
PKIA9635E

ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
R
T
Engine speed signal
R
R
R
R
R
R
T
R
R

MI signal


Steering
angle sensor

TCM
PN range signal
T
T
DI-10
http://vnx.su
R
T
COMBINATION METERS
Signals
ECM
TCM
ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
Steering
angle sensor
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
B
R
T
EKS00EH2
DI
M
SKIA8918E
DI-11
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Combination Meter
EKS00EHO
CHECK
SKIA8933E
DI-12
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Schematic/LHD Models
EKS00EH4
DI
TKWB1134E
DI-13
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Wiring Diagram METER /LHD Models
EKS00EH5
TKWA1606E
DI-14
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
A
DI
TKWA1607E
DI-15
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Schematic/RHD Models
EKS00EHL
TKWB1135E
DI-16
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Wiring Diagram METER /RHD Models
EKS00EHM
DI
TKWA1609E
DI-17
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
TKWA1610E
DI-18
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter
EKS00EH6
A
Condition
Terminal
No.
Wire
Color
Y/G
Item
Reference Value
Ignition
switch
Operation or condition
OFF
Battery voltage
ON
Battery voltage
Fuel level sensor signal
Refer to DI-30, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT

CHECK/GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS" or DI30, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK/DIESEL ENGINE MODELS" .
21
Ground
Approx. 0 V
22
CAN H
23
CAN L
27
R/B
Ambient sensor signal
Refer to DI-31, "AMBIENT SENSOR CHECK" .
28
B/Y
Ambient sensor ground
29*1
VAC signal
ON
Approx. 5 V
NOTE:
*1: With auto A/C
Meter/Gauges Operation and Odo/Trip Meter
EKS00EH7
SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Odo/trip meter segment operation can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.

Meters/gauges can be checked in self-diagnosis mode.
HOW TO ALTERNATE DIAGNOSIS MODE

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
I
Turn ignition switch ON, and switch the odo/trip meter to trip A or trip B.
NOTE:
If the diagnosis function is activated with the trip meter A displayed, the mileage on the trip meter A will J
indicate 0.0 miles, but the actual trip mileage will be retained (The same way for trip B).
While pushing the odo/trip meter switch, turn ignition switch ON again.
DI
Make sure that the trip meter displays 0.0.
Push the odo/trip meter switch at least 3 times (Within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON).
All the segments on the odo/trip meter illuminate, and simultaneously the low-fuel warning lamp indicator L
illuminates. At this time, the unified meter control unit is turned to diagnosis mode.
NOTE:
If any of the segments is not displayed, replace the combination
M
meter.
SKIA8920E
DI-19
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
7.
Push the odo/trip meter switch. Each meter/gauge should indicate as shown in the figure while pushing odo/trip meter switch.
(At this time, the low-fuel warning lamp goes off.)
SKIA8921E
How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
EKS00EH8
Confirm the symptom or customer complaint.

Perform diagnosis according to diagnosis flow. Refer to DI-20, "Diagnosis Flow" .
According to the trouble diagnosis chart, repair or replace the cause of the symptom. Refer to DI-22,
"Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptom" .
Does the meter operate normally? If so, go to 5. If not, go to 2.
INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Flow
EKS00EH9
1. CHECK WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION

2. Make sure that warning lamps (such as MIL and oil pressure warning lamp) illuminate.
Does warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check ignition power supply circuit of combination meter. Refer to DI-21, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Inspection" .
2. CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS OPERATION

Perform combination meter self-diagnosis. Refer to DI-19, "SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION" .
Does self-diagnosis function operate?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check battery power supply of combination meter and ground system. Refer to DI-21, "Power
Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection" .
3. CHECK ODO/TRIP METER OPERATION

Check segment display status of odo/trip meter.
Is the display normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
SKIA8920E
DI-20
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
4. CHECK LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP ILLUMINATION
During fuel warning lamp check, confirm illumination of low-fuel warning lamp.
Condition of odo/trip meter switch
Fuel warning lamp
Pushed
Does not illuminate.
Released
Illuminates.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
5. CHECK METER CIRCUIT

Check indication of each meter/gauge in self-diagnosis mode.
OK or NG
OK
>> Go to diagnosis results. Refer to DI-22, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptom" .
NG
SKIA8921E
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
EKS00EHA
1. CHECK FUSES
Check for blown combination meter fuses.

Unit
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
28
11
Combination meter
OK or NG
DI
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-79, "FUSE AND
FUSIBLE LINK BOX" .
L

Check voltage between combination meter and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
M44

()
OFF
ON
0V
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Battery voltage

2 (Y/G)
1 (L)
Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check harness between combination meter and fuse.
DI-21
http://vnx.su
SKIA8922E
COMBINATION METERS

1.
2.
3.

Check continuity between combination meter harness connector
M44 terminals 21 (B) and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIB0601E
Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptom
EKS00EHB
DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Trouble phenomenon
Possible cause
Tachometer indication is malfunction.
Refer to DI-26, "Engine Speed Signal Inspection" .
Fuel warning lamp indication is irregular.

Fuel gauge indication is malfunction.
Refer to DI-23, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Gasoline Engine Models]" or DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Diesel Engine Models]" .
Water temperature gauge indication is malfunction.
Refer to DI-26, "Water Temperature Signal Inspection" .
Indication is irregular for the speedometer and odo/trip meter.
Refer to DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with ESP]" or

DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [without ESP]".
A/T position indicator is malfunction.
Refer to DI-53, "A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate" .
Ambient temperature indicator is malfunction.
Refer to DI-28, "Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [without Auto

A/C]" or DI-29, "Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [with Auto A/
C]" .
DI-22
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Gasoline Engine Models]
EKS00EHC
The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction.
FUEL GAUGE
Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstance, the fuel level changes and the pointer may fluctuate.
If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the pointer will move slowly.
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP

Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstance, the fuel level changes and the warning lamp ON timing
may change.
1. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit terminals (meter side, unit side, harness side) for looseness or bent terminals.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair terminal or connector.
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector and sub fuel level sensor unit connector.
M44 terminal 8 (G) and sub fuel level sensor unit harness connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 1 (G).

3.

M44 terminal 8 (G) and ground.
J
Continuity should not exist.
SKIA8924E
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
DI
3. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit connector.

Check continuity between sub fuel level sensor unit harness
connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 3 (Y) and fuel level sensor
unit harness connector B31*1 or B123*2 terminal 4 (Y).
3.

connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 3 (Y) and ground.
SKIA8925E
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
DI-23
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS

Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector
B31*1 or B123*2 terminal 1 (B) and ground.
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
SKIA8926E
5. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Check fuel level sensor units. Refer to DI-23, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Gasoline Engine Models]" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit or sub fuel level sensor unit.
6. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION

Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the
internal components in the fuel tank.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Install fuel level sensor unit properly.
Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Diesel Engine Models]
EKS00EJA
The following symptoms do not indicate a malfunction.
FUEL GAUGE
Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstance, the fuel level changes and the pointer may fluctuate.
If the vehicle is fueled with the ignition switch ON, the pointer will move slowly.
LOW-FUEL WARNING LAMP

Depending on vehicle posture or driving circumstance, the fuel level changes and the warning lamp ON timing
may change.
1. CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR

Check combination meter and fuel level sensor unit terminals (meter side, unit side, harness side) for looseness or bent terminals.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
DI-24
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
2. CHECK COMBINATION METER CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect combination meter connector and sub fuel level sensor unit connector.
M44 terminal 8 (G) and sub fuel level sensor unit harness connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 1 (G).

3.

D
SKIA8924E
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit connector.

connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 3 (Y) and fuel level sensor
unit harness connector B32*1 or B124*2 terminal 4 (Y).

3.

connector B125*1 or B21*2 terminal 3 (Y) and ground.
J

SKIA9172E
NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
DI

Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector
B32*1 or B124*2 terminal 1 (B) and ground.

NOTE:
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
SKIA9173E
5. CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

Check fuel level sensor units. Refer to DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Diesel Engine Models]" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit or sub fuel level sensor unit.
DI-25
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
6. CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION

Check fuel level sensor unit installation, and check whether the float arm interferes or binds with any of the
internal components in the fuel tank.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Install fuel level sensor unit properly.
Engine Speed Signal Inspection
EKS00EHD
1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-102, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [QR (WITH EURO-OBD)],
EC-601, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [QR (WITHOUT EURO -OBD)] or EC-1029, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [YD].
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Perform Diagnostic Procedure in displayed DTC.
Water Temperature Signal Inspection
EKS00EHE
1. CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Perform ECM self-diagnosis. Refer to EC-102, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [QR (WITH EURO-OBD)],
EC-601, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [QR (WITHOUT EURO - OBD)] or EC-1029, "CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)" [YD].
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Perform Diagnostic Procedure in displayed DTC.
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with ESP]
EKS00EHF
1. CHECK ESP/TCS/ABS CONTROL UNIT SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Preform ESP/TCS/ABS control unit self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-77, "CONSULT-II Functions" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check applicable parts.
Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [without ESP]
EKS00EJB
1. CHECK ABS ACTUATOR CONTROL UNIT SELF-DIAGNOSIS

Preform ABS actuator and electric unit self-diagnosis. Refer to BRC-25, "CONSULT- II Functions" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check applicable parts.
The Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies
EKS00EHG
1. CHECK FUEL GAUGE FLUCTUATION

Test drive vehicle to see if gauge fluctuates only during driving or at the instant of stopping.
Does the indication value vary only during driving or at the instant of stopping?
YES >> The pointer fluctuation may be caused by fuel level change in the fuel tank. Condition is normal.
NO
>> Ask the customer about the situation when the symptom occurs in detail, and perform the trouble
diagnosis.
DI-26
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
The Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL position
EKS00EHH
1. QUESTION 1
Does it take a long time for the pointer to move to FULL position?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2. QUESTION 2
Was the vehicle fueled with the ignition switch ON?
YES or NO
YES >> Be sure to fuel the vehicle with the ignition switch OFF. Otherwise, it will take a long time to move
to FULL position because of the characteristic of the fuel gauge.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3. QUESTION 3
F
Is the vehicle parked on an incline?

YES or NO
YES >> Check the fuel level indication with vehicle on a level surface.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4. QUESTION 4
During driving, does the fuel gauge pointer move gradually toward EMPTY position?
YES or NO
YES >> Check fuel level sensor unit. Refer to DI-23, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Gasoline Engine Models]" or DI-24, "Fuel Level Sensor Inspection [Diesel Engine Models]" .
NO
>> The float arm may interfere or bind with any of the components in the fuel tank.
DI
DI-27
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [without Auto A/C]
EKS00EJ6
1. CHECK VOLTAGE BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR AND GROUND

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect ambient sensor harness connector.
Check voltage between ambient sensor harness connector E38
terminal 1 (R/B) and ground.
Approx. 5 V
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> GO TO 4.
SKIA9198E
2. CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR CIRCUIT BETWEEN AMBIENT SENSOR AND COMBINATION METER
1.
2.
3.

M44 terminal 28 (B/Y) and ambient sensor harness connector
E38 terminal 2 (B/Y).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SKIA9134E

Check ambient sensor. Refer to DI-31, "AMBIENT SENSOR CHECK" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Replace ambient sensor.
1.
2.
3.

M44 terminal 27 (R/B) and ambient sensor connector E38 terminal 1 (R/B).
4.

M44 terminal 27 (R/B) and ground.
SKIA9135E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace combination.
NG
DI-28
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Ambient Temperature Signal Inspection [with Auto A/C]
EKS00EJ7
1. CHECK AUTO A/C RECOGNITION SIGNAL INPUT

1.
2.
3.
4.

Check voltage between combination meter harness connector
M44 terminal 29 (Y) and ground.
Approx. 5 V
D
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
SKIA9136E
2. CHECK AUTO A/C RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector.
M44 terminal 29 (Y) and A/C auto amp. harness connector M53
terminal 28(Y).

4.

M44 terminal 29 (Y) and ground.
SKIB0604E
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace A/C auto amp.
NG
1.
2.
3.
DI

Disconnect ambient sensor connector.
M44 terminal 27 (R/B) and ambient sensor connector E38 terminal 1 (R/B).

4.

M44 terminal 27 (R/B) and ground.
SKIA9135E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
4. CHECK A/C AUTO AMP. CIRCUIT

Check A/C auto amp. circuit. Refer to ATC-109, "Ambient Sensor Circuit" in ATC section.
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts.
DI-29
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
EKS00INH
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK/GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS

For removal, refer to FL-4, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY" for
Gasoline engine models.
Fuel level sensor unit

Check resistance between terminals 1 and 4.
Terminal
4
Float position
[mm (in)]
Resistance value
*1
Full
24 (0.94)
Approx. 5
*2
Empty
167 (6.57)
Approx. 80
[]
*1 and *2: When float rod is in contact with stopper.
SKIA0904E
Sub fuel level sensor unit

Terminal
1
Float position
[mm (in)]
Resistance value
*1
Full
35 (1.38)
Approx. 1
*2
Empty
186 (7.32)
Approx. 40
[]
SKIA1032E
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CHECK/DIESEL ENGINE MODELS

For removal, refer to FL-19, "FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT" for Diesel engine models.
Fuel level sensor unit

Terminal
1
Float position
[mm (in)]
Resistance value
*1
Full
24 (0.94)
Approx. 5
*2
Empty
170 (6.69)
Approx. 80
[]
SKIA0909E
Sub fuel level sensor unit

Terminal
1
Float position
[mm (in)]
Resistance value
*1
Full
34 (1.34)
Approx. 1
*2
Empty
186 (7.32)
Approx. 40
[]
SKIA0910E
DI-30
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
AMBIENT SENSOR CHECK
Ambient Sensor
After disconnecting ambient sensor harness connector, measure

resistance between terminals 2 and 1 at sensor harness side, using
the table below.
Temperature [C (F)]
Resistance [k]
15 (5)
12.73
10 (14)
9.92
5 (23)
7.80
0 (32)
6.19
5 (41)
4.95
10 (50)
3.99
15 (59)
3.24
20 (68)
2.65
25 (77)
2.19
30 (86)
1.81
35 (95)
1.51
40 (104)
1.27
45 (113)
1.07
RJIA0684E
If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Removal and Installation for Combination Meter
EKS00EHJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL

ASSEMBLY" .
Remove the screws (4), and pull out combination meter.
Disconnect connectors and remove combination meter.
DI
L
SKIA8927E
INSTALLATION
M
DI-31
http://vnx.su
COMBINATION METERS
Disassembly and Assembly for Combination Meter
EKS00EHK
SKIA7344J
1.
Front cover
4.
Meter cover
2.
Upper housing
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Disengage the tabs (8) to separate front cover.

Disengage the tabs (8) to separate upper housing.
Disengage the tabs (8) to separate meter cover.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
DI-32
http://vnx.su
3.
Unified meter control unit assembly
WARNING LAMPS
WARNING LAMPS
Schematic
PFP:24814
A
EKS002HE
DI
TKWB1136E
DI-33
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram WARN /LHD Models
EKS002HH
TKWA1612E
DI-34
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB1511E
DI-35
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWB1667E
DI-36
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB1137E
DI-37
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWA1616E
DI-38
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWA1617E
DI-39
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWB0070E
DI-40
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB0071E
DI-41
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
Wiring Diagram WARN /RHD Models
EKS0031U
TKWA1618E
DI-42
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB1512E
DI-43
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWB1513E
DI-44
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB1138E
DI-45
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWA1622E
DI-46
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWA1623E
DI-47
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
TKWB0072E
DI-48
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
A
DI
TKWB0073E
DI-49
http://vnx.su
WARNING LAMPS
EKS002HK
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CHECK

Check continuity between the terminals of oil pressure switch and
ground.
Condition
Oil pressure
[kPa (bar, kg/cm2 ,

psi)]
Continuity
Engine running
More than 29 (0.30, 0.3, 4)
No
Engine stopped
Less than 29 (0.30, 0.3, 4)
Yes
ELF0044D
DIODE CHECK
Check continuity using tester.

Diode is functioning properly if test results are as shown in the
figure.
Check diodes at the combination meter harness connector
instead of on the combination meter assembly. Refer toDI-34,
"Wiring Diagram WARN /LHD Models" or DI-42, "Wiring
Diagram WARN /RHD Models" .
NOTE:
Specification may vary depending on the type of tester. Before
performing this inspection, be sure to refer to the instruction
manual for the tester to be used.
DI-50
http://vnx.su
SKIB0607E
A/T INDICATOR
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram AT/IND /LHD Models
PFP:24814
A
EKS002HL
DI
TKWA1624E
DI-51
http://vnx.su
A/T INDICATOR
Wiring Diagram AT/IND /RHD Models
EKS00EKF
TKWA1625E
DI-52
http://vnx.su
A/T INDICATOR
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
EKS00ES6
1. CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
Perform TCM self-diagnosis. Refer to AT-40, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" [EUROOBD] or AT-242, "ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION" [EXC.F/EURO-OBD].
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Go to TCM trouble diagnosis.
DI
DI-53
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
WARNING CHIME
System Description
PFP:24814
EKS002XF
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

to combination switch terminal 11 and
to daytime light control unit terminal 1 (with daytime light system)
through 10A fuse (No. 31, located in fuse and fusible link box), and
to key switch terminal 1 (RHD models) and
through 10A fuse [No. 28, located in the fuse block (J/B)].
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
through 10A fuse [No. 5, located in the fuse block (J/B)].

Ground is supplied
LIGHT WARNING CHIME

With ignition switch OFF position, driver side door open, and lighting switch in 1ST or 2ND position, warning
chime will sound. Power is supplied
from the lighting switch terminal 12 or daytime light control unit terminal 11 (with daytime light system)

Ground is supplied
through front door switch (driver side) terminal 2.

Front door switch (driver side) terminal 3 is grounded through grounds B8 and B18.
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME

When the vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h (16 MPH) with driver side or passenger seat belt unfastened (seat
belt switch ON), warning chime will sound. Refer to SB-6, "SEAT BELT WARNING SYSTEM" .
KEY REMINDER WARNING CHIME [FOR RHD MODELS]

Key reminder chime will sound, at the same time, key reminder system will start operating.
When the following three conditions are simultaneously met.
Key is inserted in the ignition key cylinder.
Driver side door is opened.
The setting of driver side door lock knob is LOCK.

For information regarding key reminder system, refer to BL-43, "Key reminder system" in BL section.
DI-54
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram CHIME /LHD Models
EKS002XJ
DI
TKWA1626E
DI-55
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram CHIME /RHD Models
EKS00EKI
TKWA1628E
DI-56
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
A
DI
TKWA1629E
DI-57
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Symptom Chart
EKS002XQ
Symptom
Diagnoses/Service procedure
Perform the following inspections.
1. DI-58, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection"
2. DI-59, "Front Door Switch (driver side) Inspection"
Light warning chime does not activate.
3. DI-60, "Lighting Switch Input Signal Inspection"

Replace time control unit, found normal function in the above inspections.
Key reminder warning chime does not activate.
Perform key reminder system trouble diagnosis.

Refer to BL-54, "SYMPTOM CHART" .
Seat belt warning chime does not activate.
Perform seat belt warning system trouble diagnosis.

Refer to SB-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom" .
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection
EKS002YF
1. CHECK FUSES
Check for blown time control unit fuses.
Unit
Power source
Fuse No
Battery
28 (10A)
5 (10A)
Time control unit
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-78, "FUSE

Terminals
(+)
()
OFF
ON
1 (L)
Ground
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
17 (G)
Ground
0V
Battery voltage
Connector
M30
M31
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SKIA9645E

OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIA9646E
DI-58
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Front Door Switch (driver side) Inspection
EKS002YH
1. CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M31 terminal 30 (SB) and ground.
When driver door is opened
When driver door is closed
: Approx. 0 V
: Approx. 12 V
OK or NG
OK
>> Front door switch (driver side) is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2.
D
SKIA1001E

1.
2.

Check continuity between front door switch (driver side) B16 terminals 2 and 3.
When door switch is
released
When door switch is
pushed

H
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
I
SKIA4498E
3. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT

1.
2.

M31 terminal 30 (SB) and front door switch (driver side) harness
DI

3.

M31 terminal 30 (SB) and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
SKIA9647E
4. CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT

OK or NG
OK
NG
SKIA4418E
DI-59
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Lighting Switch Input Signal Inspection
EKS002XU
1. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL

Check voltage between time control unit harness connector M31 terminal 19 (R/L) and ground.
Lighting switch (1st or 2nd position)
Lighting switch (OFF)
: Approx.12 V
: Approx. 0 V
OK or NG
OK
>> Lighting switch is OK.
NG
>> GO TO 2 (without daytime light control unit).
GO TO 3 (with daytime light control unit).
SKIA0996E
2. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM)

1.
2.
Disconnect time control unit connector and combination switch connector.

M31 terminal 19 (R/L) and combination switch harness connector E110 terminal 12 (R/L).
3.

M31 terminal 19 (R/L) and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> Check combination switch. Refer to LT-120, "COMBINATION SWITCH" .
NG
SKIA9653E
3. CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM)

1.
2.
Disconnect time control unit connector and daytime light control unit connector.
M31 terminal 19 (R/L) and daytime light control unit harness
connector E115 terminal 11 (R/L).
3.

M31 terminal 19 (R/L) and ground.
OK or NG
SKIA9654E
OK
>> Check daytime light control unit. Refer to LT-50, "Trouble Diagnoses" in HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) XENON TYPE - or LT-60, "Trouble Diagnoses" in HEADLAMP (WITH DAYTIME) - CONVENTIONAL TYPE -.
NG
DI-60
http://vnx.su
CLOCK
CLOCK
Wiring Diagram CLOCK
PFP:25820
A
EKS002I5
DI
TKWA1630E
DI-61
http://vnx.su
CLOCK
DI-62
http://vnx.su
WIPER, WASHER & HORN
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
WW
WIPER, WASHER & HORN
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 4
WIPER OPERATION ............................................ 4
WASHER OPERATION ......................................... 5
Wiring Diagram WIPER .................................. 6
Wiring Diagram WIPER /LHD models .............. 7
Terminal and Reference Values for Combination
Switch ....................................................................... 8
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms,
Adjustment for Wiper Arms Stop Location ............... 8
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Drive
Assembly .................................................................. 9
REMOVAL ........................................................... 10
INSTALLATION ................................................... 10
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .....................................11
Washer Tube Layout ...............................................11
Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle ........... 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Inspection for Washer Nozzle ................................ 12
CHECK VALVE ................................................... 12
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer
Switch ..................................................................... 12
REMOVAL ........................................................... 12
INSTALLATION ................................................... 12
Removal and Installation of Washer Tank .............. 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............ 13
REMOVAL ........................................................... 13
INSTALLATION ................................................... 13
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM .................. 14
Wiring Diagram WIP/R .................................. 14
Terminal and Reference Values for Combination
Switch ..................................................................... 16
Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arms ........ 16

WIPER ARMS ..................................................... 16
Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor ....... 17
REMOVAL ........................................................... 17
INSTALLATION ................................................... 17
Washer Nozzle Adjustment .................................... 18
Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Nozzle... 18
REMOVAL ........................................................... 18
INSTALLATION ................................................... 18
Inspection for Washer Nozzle ................................. 18
CHECK VALVE .................................................... 18
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer
Switch ..................................................................... 19
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 19
Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 19
HEADLAMP WASHER ............................................. 20
Wiring Diagram HLC ....................................... 21
Wiring Diagram HLC/RHD models .................. 23
Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle ........... 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
Inspection for Washer Nozzle ................................. 25
CHECK VALVE .................................................... 25
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor ............. 25
Washer Tube Layout .............................................. 26
HORN ........................................................................ 27
Wiring Diagram HORN .................................. 27
REMOVAL ........................................................... 28
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
CIGARETTE LIGHTER ............................................. 29
Wiring Diagram CIGAR ................................. 29
REMOVAL ........................................................... 30
INSTALLATION ................................................... 30
POWER SOCKET ..................................................... 31
Wiring Diagram POWER SOCKET ................. 31
WW-1
http://vnx.su
WW
Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket ... 32

REMOVAL ........................................................... 32
INSTALLATION ....................................................32
Removal and Installation of Rear Power Socket .....32
REMOVAL ............................................................32
INSTALLATION ....................................................32
WW-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS0079K
WARNING:
harness connectors.

Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in GI section
Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in GI section
EKS0079L
WW
WW-3
http://vnx.su
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM

System Description
PFP:28810
EKS0032N
WIPER OPERATION
The wiper switch is controlled by a lever built into the combination switch.
There are three wiper switch positions:
LO speed
HI speed
INT (Intermittent)
to front wiper motor terminal 2, and
to front wiper and washer switch terminal 15.

Ground is supplied
to front wiper and washer switch terminal 17
Low and High Speed Wiper Operation

When the wiper switch is placed in the LO position, ground is supplied
to front wiper motor terminal 3
through front wiper and washer switch terminal 14,
through front wiper and washer switch terminal 17

With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at low speed.
When the wiper switch is placed in the HI position, ground is supplied
through front wiper and washer switch terminal 16,

With power and ground supplied, the wiper motor operates at high speed.
Auto Stop Operation

With wiper switch turned OFF, wiper motor will continue to operate until wiper arms reach windshield base.
When wiper arms are not located at base of windshield with wiper switch OFF, ground is provided
through front wiper and washer switch terminal 14, in order to continue wiper motor operation at low
speed.
Ground is supplied
through front wiper motor terminal 4
through front wiper motor terminal 1

When wiper arms reach base of windshield, front wiper motor terminals 2 and 4 are connected instead of terminals 1 and 4. Wiper motor will then stop wiper arms at the STOP position.
Intermittent Operation
The front wiper motor operates the wiper arms one time at low speed at a set interval of approximately 1 to 13
seconds. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier (INT SW) combined with front wiper and washer
switch.
When the wiper switch is placed in the INT position, ground is supplied to wiper amplifier.
The desired interval time is input to wiper amplifier (INT VR) from wiper volume switch combined with front
wiper and washer switch.
Then intermittent ground is supplied
WW-4
http://vnx.su

through wiper amp.
The wiper motor operates at low speed at the desired interval.
WASHER OPERATION
to front washer motor terminal 1.

Ground is supplied

When the washer switch is pulled to the ON position, ground is supplied
to front washer motor terminal 2
through front wiper and washer switch terminal 17, and

With power and ground supplied, the washer motor operates.
When the washer switch is pulled to the ON position for one second or more, the wiper motor operates at low
speed for approximately 3 seconds to clean windshield. This feature is controlled by the wiper amplifier in the
same manner as the intermittent operation.
WW
WW-5
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram WIPER
EKS0032O
TKWA1554E
WW-6
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram WIPER /LHD models
EKS00ES7
WW
TKWA1555E
WW-7
http://vnx.su

Terminal and Reference Values for Combination Switch
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
13
L/Y
14
Measuring condition
Signal name
Ignition switch
Wiper auto
Stop signal
ON
ON
Y/G
ON
16
L/B
Wiper motor
Operation signal (HI)
ON
Ground
OFF
Washer switch signal
ON
B/W
18
Wiper is moving
Approx. 0V
OFF
Wiper switch
LO
15
17
Reference value
Condition or operation
Wiper while the vehicle is stopped
Wiper motor
Operation signal (LO)
EKS0032P
HI
Wiper switch
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
OFF
Wiper switch
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
Approx. 0V
WASH
OFF
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment for Wiper Arms Stop
Location
EKS0032Q
1.
2.
3.
Prior to front wiper arm installation, turn on wiper switch to operate front wiper motor and then turn it OFF (auto stop).
Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface to set
the blade center to clearance L1 & L2 immediately before
tightening nut.
Eject washer fluid. Turn on front wiper switch to operate front
wiper motor and then turn it OFF.
PKIA5548E
4.
Ensure that front wiper blades stop within clearance L1 & L2.
Clearance L1
Clearance L2
: 49.2 - 64.2 mm (1.937 - 2.528 in)

: 39.3 - 54.3 mm (1.547 - 2.138 in)
Tighten front wiper arm nuts to specified torque.

Front wiper arm nut
: 23.6 N-m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
PKIA5763E
Before reinstalling front wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as

illustrated. This will reduce possibility of front wiper arm looseness.
SEL024J
WW-8
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Drive Assembly
EKS0032R
F
PKIC0593E
1.
Rubber
2.
Wiper frame
3.
Wiper link
4.
Motor arm
5.
Wiper Motor
6.
Rubber
7.
Wiper link
WW
PKIC0594E
1.
Rubber
2.
Wiper frame
3.
Wiper link
4.
Motor arm
5.
Wiper Motor
6.
Rubber
7.
Wiper link
WW-9
http://vnx.su

REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Operate the front wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position.
Remove front wiper arm from the vehicle.
Remove the cowl top cover. Refer to EI-20, "COWL TOP" .
Remove 4 screws and remove front wiper drive assembly from
the vehicle.
Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
Remove wiper link from wiper frame.
SKIA0016E
7.
Remove front wiper motor from wiper frame.
PKIA0475E
INSTALLATION
1.
Connect front wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch

ON to operate front wiper motor, then turn the front wiper switch
OFF (auto stop).
2. Disconnect wiper motor connector.
3. Install front wiper motor to the wiper frame.
4. Install front wiper drive assembly to the vehicle.
5. Install wiper link to the wiper motor arm.
6. Connect front wiper motor connector. Turn the front wiper switch
ON to operate the front wiper motor, then turn wiper switch OFF
(auto stop)
7. Rotate motor arm to the upper limit position.
8. Install front wiper drive assembly to the vehicle.
9. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate the Wiper motor, then turn
wiper switch OFF (auto stop)
10. Install cowl top cover. Refer to EI-20, "COWL TOP" .
11. Install wiper arm to the vehicle.
Motor arm mounting
nut
Wiper motor mounting screw
Front wiper drive
assembly mounting
bolt
SKIA0092E
: 17.7 N-m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

: 4.5 N-m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
PKIA0476E
: 7.7 N-m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Never drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint (at retainer). Apply grease if
necessary.
WW-10
http://vnx.su

Washer Nozzle Adjustment
EKS0032S
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure.

Adjustable range
: 10 (In any direction)

B
D
PKIA0478E
Unit: mm (in)
*1
395 (15.55)
*5
100 (3.94)
*2
395 (15.55)
*6
100 (3.94)
*3
395 (15.55)
*7
400 (15.88)
*4
395 (15.55)
*8
400 (15.88)
NOTE:
*: The diameters of these circles are less than 80 mm (3.15 in).
PKIA5764E
WW
PKIA5765E
Washer Tube Layout
EKS0032T
PKIA0539E
WW-11
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle
EKS0032U
REMOVAL
Push washer nozzle pawl toward engine hood to pull out.
PKIA9740E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
After connecting washer hose, press nozzle from cowl top cover surface.
Assemble nozzle and socket.
Adjust nozzle injection position.
Inspection for Washer Nozzle
EKS0032V
CHECK VALVE
Blow air in the injection direction, and check that air flows only one
way. Make sure that the reverse direction (inhale) is not possible.
PKIA9741E
Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
EKS0032W
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove steering column cover.

Remove wiper washer switch connector.
Remove two screws then remove wiper washer switch from the
spiral cable.
SKIA0018E
INSTALLATION
WW-12
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Washer Tank
EKS0032X
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove washer tank inlet mounting screw and pull out washer
tank inlet.
Remove washer motor connector.
Remove washer tank mounting screw and pawl.
D
PKIA0484E
5.
Remove washer hose, and remove the washer tank from the
vehicle.
PKIA8885E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer tank inlet, and check for water leaks.
Washer tank mounting screw
: 4.5 Nm (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
Removal and Installation of Washer Motor
J
EKS0032Y
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
WW
Remove fender protector. Refer to EI-21, "FENDER PROTECTOR"

Remove washer motor connector and hose.
Pull out washer motor in the direction of the arrow in the figure,
and remove the washer motor from the washer tank.
PKIC0591E
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
When installing washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
WW-13
http://vnx.su
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram WIP/R
PFP:28710
EKS0032Z
TKWA1556E
WW-14
http://vnx.su

A
WW
TKWA1557E
WW-15
http://vnx.su

Terminal and Reference Values for Combination Switch
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
21
22
LG/B
Measuring condition
Signal name
Ignition switch
Wiper motor
Operation signal (ON)
Washer switch signal
ON
ON
Reference value
Condition or operation
Wiper switch
Wiper switch
OFF
BR/Y
Wiper motor
Operation signal
ON
Battery voltage
ON
Approx. 0V
WASH
Approx. 0V
OFF
23
EKS00330
Battery voltage
Wiper switch: INT
SKIA0083J
24
B/W
Ground
OFF
Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arms
EKS00331
WIPER ARMS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor and then turn it

OFF (auto stop).
Lift the blade up and then set it down onto glass surface. Set the
black center to clearance L immediately before tightening the
nut.
Eject washer fluid. Turn on wiper switch to operate wiper motor
and then turn it OFF.
Ensure that wiper blades stop on the lowest heat wire.
Clearance L
Tighten wiper arm nut to specified torque.

Rear wiper arm nuts
: 55.6 - 70.6 mm (2.189 - 2.780 in)

SKIA0077E
: 15.2 N-m (1.6 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Before reinstalling wiper arm, clean up the pivot area as illustrated. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness.
SEL024J
WW-16
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor
EKS00332
F
PKIC0595E
1.
Wiper motor
2.
Rubber
3.
4.
Wiper arm
5.
Wiper blade
Nut cover
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the back door finisher. Refer to EI-34, "BACK DOOR TRIM" .
Operate the wiper motor, and stop it at the auto stop position.
Disconnect wiper motor connector.
Remove wiper arm from the vehicle.
Remove wiper motor form the vehicle.
Remove rubber from the vehicle.
WW
SKIA0040E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install rubber to the vehicle.

Install wiper motor to the vehicle.
Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn the wiper
switch OFF (auto stop).
Install wiper arm to the vehicle.
Install back door finisher. Refer to EI-34, "BACK DOOR TRIM" .
Rear wiper motor mounting bolt
: 4.5 N-m (0.46 kg-m, 40 in-lb)
CAUTION:
Never drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
Check the grease conditions of the motor arm and wiper link joint (at retainer). Apply grease if
necessary.
WW-17
http://vnx.su

Washer Nozzle Adjustment
EKS00333
Adjust washer nozzle with suitable tool as shown in the figure at left.
Adjustable range
: 10 (In any direction)
PKIA0487E
Unit: mm (in)
*H
90 (3.54)
*L
150 (5.91)
*: The diameter of this circle is less than 40 mm (1.57in).
SKIA0091E
Removal and Installation of Rear Washer Nozzle
EKS00334
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove washer hose from washer nozzle.

Remove washer nozzle installation screw and remove washer
nozzle.
PKIA5552E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
After connecting washer hose, press nozzle from cowl top cover surface.
Assemble nozzle and socket.
Adjust nozzle injection position.
EKS00335
CHECK VALVE
way. Make sure that the reverse direction (inhale) is not possible.
SKIA0042E
WW-18
http://vnx.su

Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch
EKS00336
Refer to WW-12, "Removal and Installation of Wiper and Washer Switch" .
EKS00337
Refer to WW-13, "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" .
EKS00338
Refer to WW-13, "Removal and Installation of Washer Motor" .
Washer Tube Layout
EKS00339
I
PKIA0540E
WW
WW-19
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
HEADLAMP WASHER
System Description
PFP:28620
EKS0036H
The headlamp washer is controlled by the headlamp washer timer. With power and ground supplied, the headlamp washer motor operates.
through 30A fusible link (letter E, located in fuse and fusible link box)
to headlamp washer motor terminal 1,

With ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied (with xenon headlamp)
to headlamp washer timer terminal 4.

With ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied (without xenon headlamp)
to headlamp washer timer terminal 4.

Ground is supplied
to headlamp washer timer terminal 5

When headlamp washer switch is pushed during lighting switch is in 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied
(with xenon headlamp)
to headlamp washer motor terminal 2
through headlamp washer timer terminal 2,

When headlamp washer switch is pushed during lighting switch is in 1ST or 2ND position, ground is supplied
(without xenon headlamp)
to headlamp washer motor terminal 2
through headlamp washer timer terminal 2,
through headlamp washer switch terminal 2
through headlamp washer switch terminal 1

With power and ground supplied, the headlamp washer motor operates.
WW-20
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
Wiring Diagram HLC
EKS0036I
WW
TKWB1139E
WW-21
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
TKWB1140E
WW-22
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
Wiring Diagram HLC/RHD models
EKS00ES9
WW
TKWB1141E
WW-23
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
TKWB1142E
WW-24
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP WASHER
Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle
EKS0036J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove front bumper. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER"

Remove hose clip and washer nozzle metal clip.
Remove washer nozzle from front bumper.
D
PKIA0490E
INSTALLATION
EKS0036K
CHECK VALVE
way. Make sure that the reverse direction is not possible.
G
I
PKIA0491E
EKS0036L
Refer to WW-13, "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" .
EKS0036M
1.
2.
3.
Remove front bumper. Refer to EI-14, "FRONT BUMPER"

Remove washer motor connector and hose.
Pull out washer motor in the direction of the arrow in the figure,
and remove the washer motor from the washer tank.
CAUTION:
When installing washer motor, there should be no packing
twist, etc.
PKIC0596E
WW-25
http://vnx.su
WW
HEADLAMP WASHER
Washer Tube Layout
EKS0036N
PKIA0539E
WW-26
http://vnx.su
HORN
HORN
Wiring Diagram HORN
PFP:25610
A
EKS0033A
WW
TKWA1560E
WW-27
http://vnx.su
HORN
EKS0033B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-19, "FRONT GRILLE"

Disconnect horn connector.
Remove horn.
SKIA0027E
INSTALLATION
Horn mounting bolt
: 17 Nm (1.7 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
WW-28
http://vnx.su
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
Wiring Diagram CIGAR
PFP:35330
A
EKS0033C
WW
TKWA1561E
WW-29
http://vnx.su
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
EKS0033D
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument center lower panel, refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .
Disconnect cigarette lighter and illumination lamp connector.
Pull out socket from instrument lower center panel.
PKIA6439E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal aligning notches of cigarette lighter ring and instrument lower center panel.
WW-30
http://vnx.su
POWER SOCKET
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram POWER SOCKET
PFP:253A2
A
EKS0036E
WW
TKWA1561E
WW-31
http://vnx.su
POWER SOCKET
Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket
EKS0036F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the driver's glove box, refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT

PANEL ASSEMBLY"
Disconnect power socket connector.
Pull out inner socket from socket ring.
Pull out socket ring from driver's glove box.
PKIA5553E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal aligning notches of power socket and inner case.
Removal and Installation of Rear Power Socket
EKS0036G
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove luggage side lower finisher, refer toEI-36, "LUGGAGE

SIDE LOWER FINISHER"
Disconnect power socket connector.
Pull out inner socket from luggage side lower finisher.
SKIA0081E
INSTALLATION
Installation is the reverse order of removal aligning notches of power socket and installation hole.
WW-32
http://vnx.su
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
BCS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 2
TIME CONTROL UNIT ............................................... 3
Description ................................................................ 3
OUTLINE ............................................................... 3
INPUT/OUTPUT .................................................... 3
Schematic ................................................................. 4
Time Control Unit Inspection Table ........................... 5
BCS
BCS-1
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS0079N
WARNING:
harness connectors.


GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in PG section
GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in PG section
BCS-2
http://vnx.su
EKS0079O
TIME CONTROL UNIT

TIME CONTROL UNIT
Description
PFP:28491
A
EKS002ZU
OUTLINE
The time control unit totally controls the following body electrical system operations.
Power door lock
Warning chime
Rear window defogger
Interior lamp
Seat belt warning
INPUT/OUTPUT
System
Input
Output
Power door lock
Door lock and unlock switch

Door switches
Door unlock sensor
Door key cylinder switch (driver side)
Warning chime
Key switch (Insert)

Lighting switch (1st)
Door unlock sensor
Warning chime (located in time control unit)
Rear window defogger

Rear window defogger relay
Interior lamp
Door switches
Door unlock sensor
Key switch (Insert)
Interior lamp
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)

Seat belt buckle switch (passenger side)
Combination meter (vehicle speed signal)
Warning chime (located in time control unit)

Combination meter (Seat belt warning lamp)
Seat belt warning
Door lock actuators
BCS
BCS-3
http://vnx.su
TIME CONTROL UNIT

Schematic
EKS002ZV
TKWA1515E
BCS-4
http://vnx.su
TIME CONTROL UNIT

Time Control Unit Inspection Table
EKS002ZW
A
Terminal
No.
Wire
color
Connections
Operation condition
Voltage (Approximate values)
12V
Power source (Fuse)
Free
0V
C
3 *1
L/Y
Super lock actuator
Released
D
SKIA9232E
Free
G/R
Passenger and rear doors lock

actuator
0V

Unlocked
SKIA9232E
Free
0V
H
6 *1
Y/R
Super lock actuator

Set
I
SKIA9232E
10
Combination meter
[seat belt (driver side)]
12V
Seat belt warning lamp (driver side) is

not illuminated (seat belt is fastened).
0V
Power source (C/B)
SB
Front door lock actuator

(driver side)
BCS
12V
Free
11
Seat belt warning lamp (driver side) is

illuminated (seat belt is unfastened).
0V
Unlocked
SKIA9232E
Free
14
R/B
Door lock actuator
0V

Locked
SKIA9232E
BCS-5
http://vnx.su
TIME CONTROL UNIT

Terminal
No.
15
Wire
color
W/G
16
B/R
17
18
W/L
19
20
21
22
Connections

(passenger side)
Operation condition
Seat belt warning lamp (passenger

side) is illuminated (seat belt is unfastened).
12V
Seat belt warning lamp (passenger

side) is not illuminated (seat belt is
unfastened).
0V
Ground
0V
12V
Ignition key switch (Insert)
Key inserted key removed from Ignition key cylinder
12V 0V
R/L
Lighting switch
1ST, 2ND position: ON OFF
12V 0V
GY
Neutral Locked
5V 0V
BR/W

(driver side)
G/OR

(passenger side)
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) is

unfastened.*2
0V
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side) is

fastened.*2
12V
Seat belt buckle switch (passenger

side) is unfastened.
0V
Seat belt buckle switch (passenger

side) is fastened.
12V
23
PU
Neutral Door lock/Unlock switch is

pushed.
5V 0V
24
LG/R

(driver side)
OFF (neutral) ON (locked)
5V 0V
25
GY/L

(driver side)
OFF (neutral) ON (unlocked)
5V 0V
26
R/Y
Interior room lamp
When interior room lamp is operated

using remote controller
(Lamp switch is DOOR position.)
12V 0V
27
G/W
Rear window defogger relay
OFF ON
(Ignition key is ON position.)
12V 0V
28
Y/G
10V 0V
29*1
Y/L
Door unlock sensor

(passenger side)
Passenger door: Locked Unlocked
5V 0V
30
SB
OFF (closed) ON (open)
5V 0V
31
R/W
Passenger and rear doors switch
OFF (closed) ON (open)
5V 0V
32
OR
Remote controller lock button is pushed.

(Ignition switch is not ON position.)
0V 5V
33
P/L
Remote controller unlock button is

pushed.
(Ignition switch is not ON position.)
0V 5V
34
B/Y
NATS release signal
Ignition switch ONOFF
0V 5V
BCS-6
http://vnx.su
TIME CONTROL UNIT

Terminal
No.
35
Wire
color
LG/B
Connections
Operation condition
Rear window defogger switch is

pushed.
0V
Rear window defogger switch is not

pushed.
5V
C
36
*3
Combination meter
When the vehicle speed is approx. 40

km (25 MPH).
D
ELF1080D
NOTE:
*1: With super lock system.
*2: When seat pressure switch is ON.
*3: Wire color is different depending on vehicle. Each wire color is as follows:
Vehicle
Wire color
A/T models
L/B
M/T models
L/Y
BCS
BCS-7
http://vnx.su
TIME CONTROL UNIT
BCS-8
http://vnx.su
LAN SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
LAN
LAN SYSTEM
CONTENTS
CAN
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 3
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 3
Precautions For Harness Repair .............................. 3
CAN SYSTEM ....................................................... 3
CAN COMMUNICATION ............................................ 4
TYPE 1/TYPE 2 .................................................... 4
TYPE 3 .................................................................. 5
TYPE 4/TYPE 5 .................................................... 6
TYPE 6 .................................................................. 7
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1) ............................................. 9
Wiring Diagram CAN ..................................... 10
Work Flow .............................................................. 12
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 13
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............. 14
Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) and 4WD Control Unit Circuit ........... 19
ECM Circuit Inspection ........................................... 20
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
Inspection ............................................................... 21
4WD Control Unit Circuit Inspection ....................... 21
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection .................... 22
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection ................. 22
Component Inspection ........................................... 24
CHECK ECM AND COMBINATION METER
INTERNAL CIRCUIT ........................................... 24
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2) ........................................... 25
System Description ................................................ 25
Work Flow .............................................................. 28
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 29

Inspection ............................................................... 37
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection ..................... 38
Component Inspection ............................................ 40
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3) ........................................... 41
Work Flow ............................................................... 44
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 45
Inspection Between TCM and ABS Actuator and
Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit ........................... 53
TCM Circuit Inspection ........................................... 58
Inspection ............................................................... 58
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4) ........................................... 66
Work Flow ............................................................... 69
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 70
LAN-1
http://vnx.su
LAN
Inspection Between ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit

and 4WD Control Unit Circuit ................................. 77
ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit Inspection ........ 79
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection ............... 79
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection .................. 81
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5) ........................................... 84
Work Flow ............................................................... 87
CHECK SHEET ................................................... 88
and 4WD Control Unit Circuit ................................. 95
ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit Inspection ........ 97
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection ............... 97
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection ..................99

Component Inspection .......................................... 101
INTERNAL CIRCUIT .......................................... 101
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6) .......................................... 102
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.102
Wiring Diagram CAN ................................... 103
Work Flow ............................................................. 105
CHECK SHEET ................................................. 106
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE) ............ 107
Inspection Between TCM and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit ...................................................... 115
and 4WD Control Unit Circuit ................................ 117
ECM Circuit Inspection ......................................... 119
TCM Circuit Inspection .......................................... 120
ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit Inspection ...... 120
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection .............. 121
4WD Control Unit Circuit Inspection ..................... 121
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection ................... 122
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection ................ 123
Component Inspection .......................................... 127
INTERNAL CIRCUIT .......................................... 127
LAN-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
[CAN]
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00001
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
[CAN]
EKS001U0
WARNING:
harness connectors.
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.

Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
Be sure to turn ignition switch off and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precautions For Harness Repair
EKS001U2
CAN SYSTEM
EKS001U1
CAN SYSTEM
Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted
line must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
J
LAN
L
PKIA0306E
Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts.

(The spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics
of twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
LAN-3
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
PFP:23710
EKS001U3
EKS00EGL
Go to CAN system, when selecting your CAN system type from the following table.
Body type
Wagon
Axle
4WD
Engine
YD22DDTi
Transmission
QR20DE/QR25DE
M/T
Brake control
YD22DDTi
A/T
M/T
ABS
CAN system type

CAN system trouble diagnosis
QR25DE
A/T
ESP
LAN-9
LAN-25
LAN-41
LAN-66
LAN-84
LAN-102
TYPE 1/TYPE 2
System diagram
PKIA6458E

Signals
ECM
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control unit
Combination meter
Engine speed signal
R
R
R
R
LAN-4
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ABS actuator and

electric unit
(control unit)
ECM
MI signal
4WD control unit
Combination meter

A/C switch signal*
TYPE 3
System diagram
LAN
L
PKIA6457E

ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM

TCM
R
T

T
R
R
LAN-5
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
Engine speed signal
MI signal

TCM
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
R
R
T
R
PN range signal
T
T
TYPE 4/TYPE 5
System diagram
PKIA9634E

4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
Steering angle
sensor
A/C compressor feedback signal*2
A/C switch signal*1

T
T

R
T
R
R
R
R
LAN-6
http://vnx.su
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
Engine speed signal
ECM
ESP/TCS/ABS
control unit
Steering angle
sensor
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
MI signal

C
R

TYPE 6
System diagram
LAN
PKIA9635E

ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
4WD control
unit
Combination
meter
Signals
ECM
R
T

Steering
angle sensor

TCM
LAN-7
http://vnx.su
R
R
CAN COMMUNICATION
[CAN]
Signals
ECM
TCM
Engine speed signal
ESP/TCS/
ABS control
unit
R
T
Combination
meter

4WD control
unit

MI signal
Steering
angle sensor
PN range signal
R
T
R
T
LAN-8
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

System Description
PFP:23710
A
EKS00LTX
EKS00LTY
SKIA9768E
LAN
LAN-9
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LTZ
TKWB1669E
LAN-10
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
A
LAN
TKWB0107E
LAN-11
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LU0
Print all the data of SELF-DIAG RESULTS for ENGINE, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/4WD displayed
on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
Print all the data of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for ENGINE, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/4WD displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
Attach the printed sheet of SELF-DIAG RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR onto the check
sheet. Refer to LAN-13, "CHECK SHEET" .
Based on the results of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, put a check marks onto the items with NG or
UNKWN in the check sheet table. Refer to LAN-13, "CHECK SHEET" .
NOTE:
If a check mark is put on NG on INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis), replace the control unit.
The CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR items, which are not in check sheet table, are not related to diagnostic procedure on service manual.
So it is not necessary to check the status of the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR items not in check
sheet table.
According to the check sheet results (example), start inspection. Refer to LAN-14, "CHECK SHEET
RESULTS (EXAMPLE)" .
LAN-12
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
A
NOTE:
LAN
PKIB9041E
LAN-13
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
NOTE:
Case 1
Check harness between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and 4WD control unit. Refer to LAN-19,
"Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and 4WD Control Unit Circuit" .
PKIB9042E
PKIA6502E
LAN-14
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Case 2
A
Check ECM circuit. Refer to LAN-20, "ECM Circuit Inspection" .
D
PKIB9043E
J
PKIA6503E
LAN
LAN-15
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Case 3
Check ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) circuit. Refer to LAN-21, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit
(Control Unit) Circuit Inspection" .
PKIB9044E
PKIA6504E
LAN-16
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check 4WD control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-21, "4WD Control Unit Circuit Inspection" .
D
PKIB9045E
J
PKIA6505E
LAN
LAN-17
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Case 5
Check combination meter circuit. Refer to LAN-22, "Combination Meter Circuit Inspection" .
PKIB9046E
PKIA6506E
Case 6
Check CAN communication circuit. Refer to LAN-22, "CAN Communication Circuit Inspection" .
PKIB9047E
LAN-18
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and 4WD
Control Unit Circuit
EKS00LXR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and
harness side).
Harness connector E116

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and harness connector E116.
LHD models
unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W), 23 (R) and harness connector E116 terminals 14 (W), 5 (R).
20 (W) - 14 (W)
23 (R) - 5 (R)

SKIA9574E
RHD models
20 (W) - 9 (W)
23 (R) - 2 (R)
LAN

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9575E
LAN-19
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
Check continuity between harness connector M75 terminals 14
(W), 5 (R) and 4WD control unit harness connector M107 terminals 8 (W), 16 (R).
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to
LAN-12, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9577E
ECM Circuit Inspection
EKS00LU2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side
and harness side).
ECM connector

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-20
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]

1.
2.

Check resistance between ECM harness connector M118 terminals 95 (G/R) and 87 (GY/R).
95 (G/R) - 87 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
D
SKIB0120E
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
E
EKS00LXS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) for damage, bend and loose
connection (control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.

Check resistance between ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W) and 23 (R).
20 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness between ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) and harness connector E116.
LAN
SKIA9769E
4WD Control Unit Circuit Inspection
EKS00LU5
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of 4WD control unit for damage, bend and loose connection (control unit
side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-21
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]

1.
2.

M107 terminals 8 (W) and 16 (R).
8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness between 4WD control unit and combination meter.
SKIB0043E
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
EKS00LU6
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (meter side
and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

Check resistance between combination meter harness connector M44 terminals 22 (W) and 23 (R).
22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness between combination meter and 4WD
control unit.
SKIA9780E
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection
EKS00LU7
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side,
control unit side, meter side, connector side and harness side).
ECM
4WD control unit
Combination meter
Between ECM and combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-22
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR SHORT CIRCUIT

1.
2.
Disconnect ECM connector and harness connector M75.

Check continuity between ECM harness connector M118 terminals 95 (G/R) and 87 (GY/R).
95 (G/R) - 87 (GY/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and harness connector
M75.
D
SKIB0120E

Check continuity between ECM harness connector M118 terminals
95 (G/R), 87 (GY/R) and ground.
95 (G/R) - Ground
87 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M75.
SKIB0121E

1.
2.

unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W) and 23 (R).
20 (W) - 23 (R)
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
M
SKIA9769E

unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W), 23 (R) and ground.
20 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
SKIA9778E
LAN-23
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1)

[CAN]

1.
2.
Disconnect 4WD control unit connector and combination meter connector.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
>> Check the following harness. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
Harness between combination meter and 4WD control unit
Harness between combination meter and harness
connector M75
SKIA9780E

M44 terminals 22 (W), 23 (R) and ground.
22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
Harness between combination meter and harness connector M75
SKIA9980E
8. CHECK ECM AND COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT

Check components inspection. Refer to LAN-40, "CHECK ECM AND COMBINATION METER INTERNAL
CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
>> Connect all the connectors and diagnose again. Refer to LAN-12, "Work Flow" .
NG
>> Replace ECM and/or combination meter.
Component Inspection
EKS00LU8
CHECK ECM AND COMBINATION METER INTERNAL CIRCUIT
Remove ECM and combination meter from vehicle.

Check resistance between ECM terminals 95 and 87.
Check resistance between combination meter terminals 22 and
23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
95 - 87
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-24
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

System Description
PFP:23710
A
EKS00LU9
EKS00LUA
SKIA9768E
LAN
LAN-25
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LUB
TKWB1670E
LAN-26
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
A
LAN
TKWB1671E
LAN-27
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LUC
on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
NOTE:
sheet table.
LAN-28
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
A
NOTE:
LAN
PKIB9041E
LAN-29
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
NOTE:
Case 1
PKIB9042E
PKIA6502E
LAN-30
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Case 2
A
D
PKIB9043E
J
PKIA6503E
LAN
LAN-31
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Case 3
PKIB9051E
PKIA6504E
LAN-32
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Case 4
A
D
PKIB9052E
J
PKIA6505E
LAN
LAN-33
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
Case 5
PKIB9046E
PKIA6506E
Case 6
PKIB9054E
LAN-34
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]
EKS00LUD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
LHD models
20 (W) - 14 (W)
23 (R) - 5 (R)

SKIA9574E
RHD models
20 (W) - 9 (W)
23 (R) - 2 (R)
LAN

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9575E
LAN-35
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9577E
EKS00LUE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
ECM connector

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-36
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
D
PKIA9592E
E
EKS00LUF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

20 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
LAN
SKIA9769E
EKS00LUG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-37
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]

1.
2.

8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
SKIB0043E
EKS00LUH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
control unit.
SKIA9780E
EKS00LUI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

ECM
4WD control unit
Combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-38
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
M75.
D
PKIA9592E

94 (G/R) - Ground
86 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M75.
PKIA9593E

1.
2.

20 (W) - 23 (R)
LAN
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
M
SKIA9769E

20 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
SKIA9778E
LAN-39
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
connector M75
SKIA9780E

22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
SKIA9980E

CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
EKS00LUJ

23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-40
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

System Description
PFP:23710
A
EKS00LUK
EKS00LUL
SKIB0084E
LAN
LAN-41
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LUM
TKWB1672E
LAN-42
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
A
LAN
TKWB1673E
LAN-43
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LUN
Print all the data of SELF-DIAG RESULTS for ENGINE, A/T, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/4WD displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
Print all the data of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for ENGINE, A/T, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/
4WD displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
NOTE:
sheet table.
LAN-44
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
A
NOTE:
LAN
PKIB9055E
LAN-45
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
NOTE:
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to LAN-53, "Inspection
Between TCM and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit" .
PKIB9056E
PKIA6495E
LAN-46
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 2
D
PKIB9057E
PKIA6496E
LAN
LAN-47
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 3
PKIB9058E
PKIA6497E
LAN-48
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 4
A
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-58, "TCM Circuit Inspection" .
D
PKIB9059E
J
PKIA6498E
LAN
LAN-49
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 5
PKIB9060E
PKIA6499E
LAN-50
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 6
A
D
PKIB9061E
J
PKIA6500E
LAN
LAN-51
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Case 7
PKIB9062E
PKIA6501E
Case 8
PKIB9063E
LAN-52
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
Inspection Between TCM and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
EKS00LUO
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).
LHD models
Harness connector F41
RHD models

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN
LAN-53
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

LHD models
1. Disconnect TCM connector and harness connector F41.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R), 6 (GY/R) and harness connector F41 terminals 21
(G/R), 8 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 21 (G/R)
6 (GY/R) - 8 (GY/R)

SKIB0085E
3.
4.
Disconnect harness connector M75.

(L/R), 8 (B/W) and harness connector M75 terminals 13 (L/R), 4
(B/W).
21 (L/R) - 13 (L/R)
8 (B/W) - 4 (B/W)

SKIB0086E
RHD models
(G/R), 5 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 4 (G/R)
6 (GY/R) - 5 (GY/R)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0087E
LAN-54
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
Check continuity between harness connector E116 terminals 13
(W), 4 (R) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W), 23 (R).
13 (W) - 20 (W)
4 (R) - 23 (R)

E
SKIB0088E
RHD models
(W), 5 (R) and ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector E69 terminals 20 (W), 23 (R).
4 (W) - 20 (W)
5 (R) - 23 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
SKIB0089E
J
EKS00LUP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-55
http://vnx.su
LAN
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.
LHD models
20 (W) - 14 (W)
23 (R) - 5 (R)

SKIA9574E
RHD models
20 (W) - 9 (W)
23 (R) - 2 (R)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9575E
LAN-56
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

E
SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
SKIA9577E
EKS00LUQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

LAN
and harness side).
L
ECM connector

M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-57
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and TCM.
PKIA9592E
TCM Circuit Inspection
EKS00LUR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector.

Check resistance between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R) and 6 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> LHD models
Repair harness between TCM and harness connector
F41.
RHD models
F36.
SKIB0094E
EKS00LUS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-58
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

20 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
D
SKIA9769E
EKS00LUT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
LAN
SKIB0043E
M
EKS00LUU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-59
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
control unit.
SKIA9780E
EKS00LUV
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

ECM
TCM
4WD control unit
Combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
M61.
PKIA9592E
LAN-60
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

94 (G/R) - Ground
86 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M61.
D
PKIA9593E
LAN
LAN-61
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

LHD models
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
2. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R) and 6 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
SKIB0094E
3.
4.

(L/R) and 8 (B/W).
21 (L/R) - 8 (B/W)
SKIB0096E
RHD models
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> LHD models
Check the following harness. If any harness is damaged, repair the harness.
Harness between TCM and harness connector F41
Harness between harness connector M61 and harness connector M75
RHD models
Repair harness between TCM and harness connector F36.
LAN-62
http://vnx.su
SKIB0094E
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]
LHD models
1. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R), 6 (GY/R) and ground.
5 (G/R) - Ground
6 (GY/R) - Ground

D
SKIB0099E
2.

(L/R), 8 (B/W) and ground.
21 (L/R) - Ground
8 (B/W) - Ground

H
SKIB0100E
RHD models
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R), 6 (GY/R) and ground.
5 (G/R) - Ground
6 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> LHD models
Harness between harness connector M61 and Harness connector M75
RHD models
LAN-63
http://vnx.su
LAN
L
SKIB0099E
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

LHD models
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
20 (W) - 23 (R)
SKIA9769E
RHD models
1. Disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector and harness connector E116.
2. Check continuity between ABS actuator and electric unit (control
20 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
SKIA9769E

20 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
SKIA9778E
LAN-64
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
connector M75
D
SKIA9780E

22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
I
SKIA9980E

Check components inspection. Refer to LAN-65, "CHECK ECM AND COMBINATION METER INTERNAL LAN
CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
L
NG
EKS00LUW

23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-65
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

System Description
PFP:23710
EKS00LUX
EKS00LUY
SKIB0125E
LAN-66
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LUZ
LAN
TKWB0112E
LAN-67
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
TKWB0113E
LAN-68
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LV0
on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
I
J
NOTE:
LAN
L
sheet table.
M
LAN-69
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
PKIB9064E
LAN-70
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
A
NOTE:
Case 1
Check harness between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and 4WD control unit. Refer to LAN-77, "Inspection
Between ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and 4WD Control Unit Circuit" .
PKIB9065E
LAN
PKIA9636E
LAN-71
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Case 2
PKIB9066E
PKIA9637E
LAN-72
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Case 3
Check ESP/TCS/ABS control unit circuit. Refer to LAN-79, "ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit Inspection" .
D
PKIB9067E
J
PKIA9638E
LAN
LAN-73
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Case 4
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to LAN-79, "Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection" .
PKIB9068E
PKIA9639E
LAN-74
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Case 5
A
D
PKIB9069E
J
PKIA9640E
LAN
LAN-75
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Case 6
PKIB9070E
PKIA9641E
Case 7
PKIB9071E
LAN-76
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]
Inspection Between ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit and 4WD Control Unit Circuit
EKS00LV1
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector and harness connector E116.

LHD models
Check continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness
connector E122 terminals 61 (W), 63 (R) and harness connector
E116 terminals 14 (W), 5 (R).
61 (W) - 14 (W)
63 (R) - 5 (R)

1.
2.

SKIB0109E
RHD models
61 (W) - 9 (W)
63 (R) - 2 (R)
LAN

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0110E
LAN-77
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9577E
EKS00LV2
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
ECM connector

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-78
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

1.
2.

95 (G/R) - 87 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
D
SKIB0120E
ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit Inspection
E
EKS00LV3
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of ESP/TCS/ABS control unit for damage, bend and loose connection
(control unit side and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

Check resistance between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness
connector E122 terminals 61 (W) and 63 (R).
61 (W) - 63 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit and
harness connector E116.
LAN
PKIA9632E
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection
M
EKS00LV4
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (sensor
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-79
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

1.
2.
Disconnect steering angle sensor connector.

Check resistance between steering angle sensor harness connector M81 terminals 4 (W) and 5 (R).
4 (W) - 5 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace steering angle sensor.
NG
>> Repair harness between steering angle sensor and
4WD control unit.
SKIA6870E
EKS00LV5
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness between 4WD control unit and steering
angle sensor.
SKIB0043E
EKS00LV6
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-80
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
control unit.
D
SKIA9780E
E
EKS00LV7
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

control unit side, sensor side, meter side, connector side and harness side).
ECM
4WD control unit
Combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
LAN

95 (G/R) - 87 (GY/R)

M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
M75.
SKIB0120E
LAN-81
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

95 (G/R) - Ground
87 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M75.
SKIB0121E

1.
2.

61 (W) - 63 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PKIA9632E

Check continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector E122 terminals 61 (W), 63 (R) and ground.
61 (W) - Ground
63 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
PKIA9633E
LAN-82
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4)

[CAN]

1.
2.
Disconnect following connectors.

Steering angle sensor connector
4WD control unit connector
Combination meter connector
22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
Harness between combination meter and steering
angle sensor
SKIA9780E

22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
Harness between combination meter and steering angle sensor
SKIA9980E
CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
EKS00LV8

23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
95 - 87
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-83
http://vnx.su
LAN
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

System Description
PFP:23710
EKS00LV9
EKS00LVA
SKIB0125E
LAN-84
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LVB
LAN
TKWB1674E
LAN-85
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
TKWB1675E
LAN-86
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LVC
on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
I
J
NOTE:
LAN
L
sheet table.
M
LAN-87
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
PKIB9064E
LAN-88
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
A
NOTE:
Case 1
PKIB9065E
LAN
PKIA9636E
LAN-89
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Case 2
PKIB9066E
PKIA9637E
LAN-90
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Case 3
D
PKIB9067E
J
PKIA9638E
LAN
LAN-91
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Case 4
PKIB9068E
PKIA9639E
LAN-92
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Case 5
A
D
PKIB9077E
J
PKIA9640E
LAN
LAN-93
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
Case 6
PKIB9070E
PKIA9641E
Case 7
PKIB9071E
LAN-94
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]
EKS00LVD
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

LHD models
61 (W) - 14 (W)
63 (R) - 5 (R)

1.
2.

SKIB0109E
RHD models
61 (W) - 9 (W)
63 (R) - 2 (R)
LAN

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0110E
LAN-95
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIA9577E
EKS00LVE
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
ECM connector

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-96
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit.
D
PKIA9592E
E
EKS00LVF
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

61 (W) - 63 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
LAN
PKIA9632E
M
EKS00LVG
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-97
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

1.
2.

4 (W) - 5 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
4WD control unit.
SKIA6870E
EKS00LVH
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
angle sensor.
SKIB0043E
EKS00LVI
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-98
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
control unit.
D
SKIA9780E
E
EKS00LVJ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

ECM
4WD control unit
Combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
LAN

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)

M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
M75.
PKIA9592E
LAN-99
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

94 (G/R) - Ground
86 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M75.
PKIA9593E

1.
2.

61 (W) - 63 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PKIA9632E

61 (W) - Ground
63 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
PKIA9633E
LAN-100
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
angle sensor
SKIA9780E

22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
SKIA9980E
CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
EKS00LVK

23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-101
http://vnx.su
LAN
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

System Description
PFP:23710
EKS00LVL
EKS00LVM
SKIB0127E
LAN-102
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Wiring Diagram CAN
EKS00LVN
LAN
TKWB1676E
LAN-103
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
TKWB1677E
LAN-104
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Work Flow
1.
EKS00LVO
Print all the data of SELF-DIAG RESULTS for ENGINE, A/T, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/4WD displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8260E
2.
Print all the data of CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR for ENGINE, A/T, ABS and ALL MODE AWD/
4WD displayed on CONSULT-II.
PKIA8343E
3.
4.
5.
I
J
NOTE:
LAN
L
sheet table.
M
LAN-105
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
CHECK SHEET
NOTE:
PKIB9080E
LAN-106
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
A
NOTE:
Case 1
Check harness between TCM and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit. Refer to LAN-115, "Inspection Between TCM
and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit" .
PKIB9081E
LAN
PKIA9642E
LAN-107
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 2
PKIB9082E
PKIA9643E
LAN-108
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 3
A
D
PKIB9083E
J
PKIA9644E
LAN
LAN-109
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 4
Check TCM circuit. Refer to LAN-120, "TCM Circuit Inspection" .
PKIB9084E
PKIA9645E
LAN-110
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 5
D
PKIB9085E
J
PKIA9646E
LAN
LAN-111
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 6
PKIB9086E
PKIA9647E
LAN-112
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 7
A
D
PKIB9087E
J
PKIA9648E
LAN
LAN-113
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Case 8
PKIB9088E
PKIA9649E
Case 9
PKIB9089E
LAN-114
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
Inspection Between TCM and ESP/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit
EKS00LVP
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

harness side).
LHD models
RHD models

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN
LAN-115
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

LHD models
(G/R), 8 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 21 (G/R)
6 (GY/R) - 8 (GY/R)

SKIB0085E
3.
4.

(L/R), 8 (B/W) and harness connector M75 terminals 13 (L/R), 4
(B/W).
21 (L/R) - 13 (L/R)
8 (B/W) - 4 (B/W)

SKIB0086E
RHD models
(G/R), 5 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 4 (G/R)
6 (GY/R) - 5 (GY/R)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0087E
LAN-116
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
(W), 4 (R) and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector
13 (W) - 61 (W)
4 (R) - 63 (R)

E
SKIB0123E
RHD models
(W), 5 (R) and ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness connector
4 (W) - 61 (W)
5 (R) - 63 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
SKIB0124E
EKS00LVQ
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
LAN
L
harness side).

M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
1.
2.
3.
LAN-117
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
61 (W) - 14 (W)
63 (R) - 5 (R)

SKIB0109E
RHD models
61 (W) - 9 (W)
63 (R) - 2 (R)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Repair harness.
SKIB0110E
LAN-118
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

LHD models
14 (W) - 8 (W)
5 (R) - 16 (R)

E
SKIA9576E
RHD models
9 (W) - 8 (W)
2 (R) - 16 (R)

OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Repair harness.
I
SKIA9577E
EKS00LVR
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

LAN
and harness side).
L
ECM connector

M
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-119
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace ECM.
NG
>> Repair harness between ECM and TCM.
PKIA9592E
TCM Circuit Inspection
EKS00LVS
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

Check terminals and connector of TCM for damage, bend and loose connection (control module side and
harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
Disconnect TCM connector.

Check resistance between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R) and 6 (GY/R).
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace TCM.
NG
>> LHD models
F41.
RHD models
F36.
SKIB0094E
EKS00LVT
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-120
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

61 (W) - 63 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
D
PKIA9632E
E
EKS00LVU
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

4 (W) - 5 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
4WD control unit.
LAN
SKIA6870E
EKS00M48
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
LAN-121
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

8 (W) - 16 (R)
: Approx. 54 - 66
OK or NG
OK
NG
angle sensor.
SKIB0043E
EKS00LVW
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

and harness side).
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
: Approx. 108 - 132
OK or NG
OK
NG
control unit.
SKIA9780E
LAN-122
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
EKS00LVX
1. CHECK CONNECTOR
1.
2.
3.

ECM
TCM
4WD control unit
Combination meter

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

1.
2.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
M61.
PKIA9592E

94 (G/R) - Ground
86 (GY/R) - Ground

94 (G/R) - 86 (GY/R)

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
M61.
PKIA9593E
LAN-123
http://vnx.su
LAN
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

LHD models
1. Disconnect TCM connector.
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
SKIB0094E
3.
4.

(L/R) and 8 (B/W).
21 (L/R) - 8 (B/W)
SKIB0096E
RHD models
5 (G/R) - 6 (GY/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
>> LHD models
RHD models
LAN-124
http://vnx.su
SKIB0094E
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
LHD models
1. Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R), 6 (GY/R) and ground.
5 (G/R) - Ground
6 (GY/R) - Ground

D
SKIB0099E
2.

(L/R), 8 (B/W) and ground.
21 (L/R) - Ground
8 (B/W) - Ground

H
SKIB0100E
RHD models
Check continuity between TCM harness connector F46 terminals 5 (G/R), 6 (GY/R) and ground.
5 (G/R) - Ground
6 (GY/R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6.
NG
>> LHD models
RHD models
LAN-125
http://vnx.su
LAN
L
SKIB0099E
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

LHD models
1. Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector.
2. Check continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness
61 (W) - 63 (R)
PKIA9632E
RHD models
1. Disconnect ESP/TCS/ABS control unit connector and harness connector E116.
2. Check continuity between ESP/TCS/ABS control unit harness
61 (W) - 63 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
PKIA9632E

61 (W) - Ground
63 (R) - Ground

OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 8.
NG
PKIA9633E
LAN-126
http://vnx.su
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]

1.
2.

22 (W) - 23 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 9.
NG
angle sensor
SKIA9780E

22 (W) - Ground
23 (R) - Ground

OK or NO
OK
>> GO TO 10.
NG
SKIA9980E
CIRCUIT" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
EKS00LVY

23.
Unit
Terminal
ECM
94 - 86
Combination meter
22 - 23
Resistance ()
(Approx.)
108 - 132
PKIA0830E
LAN-127
http://vnx.su
LAN
CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6)

[CAN]
LAN-128
http://vnx.su
AUDIO VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
AV
AUDIO VISUAL, NAVIGATION & TELEPHONE

SYSTEM
CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS .......................................................... 3
AUDIO ......................................................................... 4
WITH CASSETTE DECK ...................................... 4
WITHOUT CASSETTE DECK .............................. 6
Component Parts Location ....................................... 8
Wiring Diagram AUDIO (With Cassette Deck)..... 9
LHD MODELS ....................................................... 9
RHD MODELS .....................................................11
Schematic (Without Cassette Deck) ...................... 13
LHD MODELS ..................................................... 13
RHD MODELS .................................................... 14
Wiring Diagram AUDIO (Without Cassette
Deck) ...................................................................... 15
LHD MODELS WITH NAVIGATION .................... 15
LHD MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION ............ 18
RHD MODELS WITH NAVIGATION ................... 21
RHD MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION ............ 24
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit With
Cassette Deck ........................................................ 27
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit Without Cassette Deck .................................................. 28
Audio Steering Wheel Switch Resistance Check ... 29
AUDIO UNIT ....................................................... 30
Inspection ............................................................... 30
AUDIO UNIT ....................................................... 30
ANTENNA ........................................................... 30
Audio Steering wheel Switch Does Not Operate
(With Cassette Deck) ............................................. 31
Audio Steering Wheel Switch Does Not Operate
(Without Cassette Deck) ........................................ 31
Speed Sensitive Volume System Does Not Work
(With Cassette Deck) ............................................. 33
Removal and Installation of Audio Unit (With Cassette Deck) ............................................................. 34
REMOVAL ........................................................... 34
INSTALLATION ................................................... 34
Removal and Installation of Audio Unit (Without
Cassette Deck) ....................................................... 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 35
INSTALLATION ................................................... 35
Removal and Installation of Speakers .................... 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 35
INSTALLATION ................................................... 35
Removal and Installation of Tweeters ..................... 35
REMOVAL ........................................................... 35
INSTALLATION ................................................... 36
AUDIO ANTENNA .................................................... 37
Antenna Route ........................................................ 37
Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna ............. 37
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ............................................. 38
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ....................................... 38
Component Description .......................................... 41
NAVI CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 41
GPS ANTENNA ................................................... 41
DISPLAY .............................................................. 42
NAVI SWITCH ..................................................... 42
TRANSFER UNIT ................................................ 43
VOICE CHANGE RELAY .................................... 43
TMC TUNER ....................................................... 43
System Operation Description ................................ 44
NAVIGATION SYSTEM ....................................... 44
MAP VIEWING STYLE ........................................ 44
MAP DISPLAY ..................................................... 45
FUNCTION OF NAVI SWITCH ............................ 46
Precautions for NAVI Control Unit Replacement ... 49
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
... 50
Schematic ............................................................... 51
Wiring Diagram NAVI .................................... 52
LHD MODELS ..................................................... 52
RHD MODELS .................................................... 57
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control
Unit ......................................................................... 62
AV-1
http://vnx.su
AV
Terminals and Reference Value for Display ............ 64

Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Switch ... 65
Terminals and Reference Value for Transfer Unit ... 66
Terminals and Reference Value for TMC Tuner ...... 68
Terminals and Reference Value for Voice Change
Relay ...................................................................... 68
Self-Diagnosis Function .......................................... 70
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 70
DIAGNOSIS ITEM ............................................... 70
Self-Diagnosis Mode .............................................. 71
OPERATION PROCEDURE ................................ 71
SELFDIAGNOSIS RESULT ............................... 72
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT Mode ................. 73
OPERATION PROCEDURE ................................ 73
DISPLAY .............................................................. 74
VEHICLE SIGNALS ............................................. 75
HISTORY OF ERRORS ...................................... 75
NAVIGATION ....................................................... 78
FEATURE RESTRICTION SETTING .................. 79
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Control Unit ............................................................. 80
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display... 81
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI
Switch ..................................................................... 82
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Transfer Unit .................................................................... 83
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for TMC
Tuner ...................................................................... 84
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Control
Unit and TMC Tuner) .............................................. 85
Communication Line Check (Between Display and
NAVI switch) ........................................................... 85
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Switch
and Transfer Unit) ................................................... 86
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Control
Unit and Transfer Unit) ........................................... 86
Communication Line Check (Between Transfer Unit
and Display) ............................................................ 88
Vehicle Speed Signal Check .................................. 89
Illumination Signal Check ....................................... 90
Ignition Signal Check .............................................. 90
Reverse Signal Check ............................................ 91
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper ......................... 91
RGB Screen Is Not Shown ..................................... 93
RGB Screen Is Rolling ............................................ 94
Guide Sound Is Not Heard ..................................... 95
Display Quality Control Cannot Change Screen ... 97
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction ..... 98
BASIC OPERATIONS ......................................... 98
VEHICLE MARKS ............................................... 98
MAP DVD-ROM ................................................... 99
DESTINATION, WAY POINTS OR MENU CONTENTS CANNOT BE CHOSEN OR SET ............99

VOICE GUIDANCE ..............................................99
ROUTE CALCULATION ....................................100
EXAMPLES OF VEHICLE MARK DISPLACEMENT ................................................................. 101
VEHICLE MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH
IS COMPLETELY WRONG ............................... 104
VEHICLE MARK JUMPS ................................... 104
VEHICLE MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA ......... 105
VEHICLE MARK AUTOMATICALLY ROTATES.105
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES VEHICLE MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE
AND SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE ........ 105
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW ..................................................... 105
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS
GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN
TO CORRECT LOCATION ................................ 105
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................................. 105
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN .......... 105
Program Loading .................................................. 106
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit ...... 107
REMOVAL .......................................................... 107
INSTALLATION .................................................. 107
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna ............ 107
REMOVAL .......................................................... 107
INSTALLATION .................................................. 107
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna Feeder.108
REMOVAL .......................................................... 108
INSTALLATION .................................................. 108
Removal and Installation of NAVI Switch .............. 109
REMOVAL .......................................................... 109
INSTALLATION .................................................. 109
Removal and Installation of Display ...................... 109
REMOVAL .......................................................... 109
INSTALLATION .................................................. 109
Removal and Installation of Transfer Unit ............. 110
REMOVAL .......................................................... 110
INSTALLATION .................................................. 110
Removal and Installation of TMC Tuner ................ 110
REMOVAL .......................................................... 110
INSTALLATION .................................................. 110
Removal and Installation of Voice Change Relay . 110
REMOVAL .......................................................... 110
INSTALLATION .................................................. 110
TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE) ...................................... 111
Wiring Diagram PHONE .............................. 111
AV-2
http://vnx.su
PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS
PFP:00011
BELT PRE-TENSIONER
EKS00ECJ
WARNING:
harness connectors.

Refer to GI-10, "HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES" in PG section
Refer to GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident" in PG section
EKS00ECK
AV
AV-3
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
AUDIO
System Description
PFP:28111
EKS00INI
WITH CASSETTE DECK

Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
through 15A fuse [No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box]
to audio unit terminal 6.

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied

When audio switch is pushed, audio signals are supplied
through audio unit terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 13, 14, 15, and 16
to terminals 1 and 2 of front door speaker LH and RH
to terminals 1 and 2 of rear speaker LH and RH
to terminals 1 and 2 of tweeter LH and RH.

When one of audio steering wheel switches is pushed to volume up, seek up, or source, resistance in steering
switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. This will change voltage. Power is supplied
from audio unit terminal 26
through combination switch (spiral cable) terminal 4 and 15
to audio steering wheel switch terminal 1.

Ground is supplied
from audio steering wheel switch terminal 2

When one of audio steering wheel switches is pushed to volume down, seek down, or special, resistance in
steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. This will change voltage. Power is supplied

Ground is supplied
Speed Sensitive Volume System

Volume level of this system gone up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. And the control level can be selected by the customer.
AV-4
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
NATS Audio Link
Description
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the audio unit can basically only be operated if connected to the
matching NATS IMMU to which the audio unit was initially fitted on the production line.
Since radio operation is impossible after the link with the NATS is disrupted theft of the audio unit is basically
useless since special equipment is required to reset the audio unit.
Initialization process for audio units that are linked to the NATS IMMU
New audio units will be delivered to the factories in the NEW state, i.e. ready to be linked with the vehicle's
NATS. When the audio unit in NEW state is first switched on at the factory, it will start up communication with
the vehicle's immobilizer control unit (IMMU) and send a code (the audio unit Code) to the IMMU. The IMMU
will then store this code, which is unique to each audio unit, in its (permanent) memory.
Upon receipt of the code by the IMMU, the NATS will confirm correct receipt of the audio unit code to the audio
unit. Hereafter, the audio unit will operate as normal.
During the initialization process, NEW is displayed on the audio unit display. Normally though, communication between audio unit and IMMU takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio unit seems to switch on
directly without showing NEW on its display.
Normal operation
Each time the audio unit is switched on afterwards, the audio unit code will be verified between the audio unit
and the NATS before the audio unit becomes operational. During the code verification process, WAIT is
shown on the audio unit display. Again, the communication takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio
unit seems to switch on directly without showing WAIT on its display.
When the radio is locked
In case of an audio unit being linked with the vehicle's NATS (immobilizer system), disconnection of the link
between the audio unit and the IMMU will cause the audio unit to switch into the lock (SECURE) mode in
which the audio unit is fully inoperative. Hence, repair of the audio unit is basically impossible, unless the
audio unit is reset to the NEW state for which special decoding equipment is required.
Clarion has provided their authorized service representatives with so called decoder boxes which can bring
the audio unit back to the NEW state, enabling the audio unit to be switched on after which repair can be carried out. Subsequently, when the repaired audio unit is delivered to the final user again, it will be in the NEW
state to enable re-linking the audio unit to the vehicle's immobilizer system. As a result of the above, repair of
the audio unit can only be done by an authorized Clarion representative (when the owner of the vehicle
requests repair and can show personal identification).
Service Procedure
Item
Service procedure
Description
Battery disconnection
No additional action required.
AV
Radio needs repair
Repair needs to be done by authorized

representative of radio manufacturer since
radio cannot be operated unless it is reset
to NEW state, using special decoding
equipment.
Replacement of radio by new part
Transferring radio to another vehicle/

replacement of radio by an old part
Radio needs to be reset to NEW state by

authorized representative of radio manufacturer.
Replacement of IMMU

authorized representative of Clarion.
After switching on the radio, it will display

SECURE after 1 minute.
No communication from IMMU to radio
1. If NATS is malfunctioning, check NATS

system.
After switching on the radio, the radio will

display SECURE after 1 minute. Further
use of radio is impossible until communication is established again, or after radio is
reset by authorized representative of Clarion.
2. After NATS is repaired, reset radio to

NEW state by authorized representative
of Clarion.
When initialized between ECM and IMMU.
Radio needs to be reset to NEW status by

AV-5
http://vnx.su
Radio is delivered in NEW state.

AUDIO
Personal Audio Setting
Description
The radio is designed to store several settings (volume, bass, treble, preset stations) with every NATS
ignition key used. Up to a maximum of 4 NATS keys can be registered. During the communication mentioned under Anti-Theft System, the radio will recognize the used ignition key and select the accompanying settings.
WITHOUT CASSETTE DECK

Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
through 15A fuse [No. 32, located in the fuse and fusible link box]

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied

When audio switch is pushed, audio signals are supplied
through audio unit terminals 7, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and 16
to terminals 1 and 2 of front door speaker LH and RH
to terminals 1 and 2 of rear speaker LH and RH
to terminals 1 and 2 of tweeter LH and RH.

When one of audio steering wheel switches is pushed to volume up, seek up, or source, resistance in steering
switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. This will change voltage. Power is supplied

Ground is supplied

When one of audio steering wheel switches is pushed to volume down, seek down, or special, resistance in
steering switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. This will change voltage. Power is supplied

Ground is supplied
AV-6
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
NATS Audio Link
Description
The link with the NATS IMMU implies that the audio unit can basically only be operated if connected to the
matching NATS IMMU to which the audio unit was initially fitted on the production line.
Since radio operation is impossible after the link with the NATS is disrupted theft of the audio unit is basically
useless since special equipment is required to reset the audio unit.
Initialization process for audio units that are linked to the NATS IMMU
New audio units will be delivered to the factories in the NEW state, i.e. ready to be linked with the vehicle's
NATS. When the audio unit in NEW state is first switched on at the factory, it will start up communication with
the vehicle's immobilizer control unit (IMMU) and send a code (the audio unit Code) to the IMMU. The IMMU
will then store this code, which is unique to each audio unit, in its (permanent) memory.
Upon receipt of the code by the IMMU, the NATS will confirm correct receipt of the audio unit code to the audio
unit. Hereafter, the audio unit will operate as normal.
During the initialization process, NEW is displayed on the audio unit display. Normally though, communication between audio unit and IMMU takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio unit seems to switch on
directly without showing NEW on its display.
Normal operation
Each time the audio unit is switched on afterwards, the audio unit code will be verified between the audio unit
and the NATS before the audio unit becomes operational. During the code verification process, WAIT is
shown on the audio unit display. Again, the communication takes such a short time (300 ms) that the audio
unit seems to switch on directly without showing WAIT on its display.
When the radio is locked
In case of an audio unit being linked with the vehicle's NATS (immobilizer system), disconnection of the link
between the audio unit and the IMMU will cause the audio unit to switch into the lock (SECURE) mode in
which the audio unit is fully inoperative. Hence, repair of the audio unit is basically impossible, unless the
audio unit is reset to the NEW state for which special decoding equipment is required.
Clarion has provided their authorized service representatives with so called decoder boxes which can bring
the audio unit back to the NEW state, enabling the audio unit to be switched on after which repair can be carried out. Subsequently, when the repaired audio unit is delivered to the final user again, it will be in the NEW
state to enable re-linking the audio unit to the vehicle's immobilizer system. As a result of the above, repair of
the audio unit can only be done by an authorized Clarion representative (when the owner of the vehicle
requests repair and can show personal identification).
Service Procedure
Item
Service procedure
Description
Battery disconnection
AV
Radio needs repair
Repair needs to be done by authorized

representative of radio manufacturer since
radio cannot be operated unless it is reset
to NEW state, using special decoding
equipment.
Replacement of radio by new part
Transferring radio to another vehicle/

replacement of radio by an old part

authorized representative of radio manufacturer.
Replacement of IMMU


No communication from IMMU to radio
1. If NATS is malfunctioning, check NATS

system.
After switching on the radio, the radio will

display SECURE after 1 minute. Further
use of radio is impossible until communication is established again, or after radio is
reset by authorized representative of Clarion.
2. After NATS is repaired, reset radio to

NEW state by authorized representative
of Clarion.
When initialized between ECM and IMMU.
Radio needs to be reset to NEW status by

AV-7
http://vnx.su
Radio is delivered in NEW state.

AUDIO
Personal Audio Setting
Description
The radio is designed to store several settings (volume, bass, treble, preset stations) with every NATS
ignition key used. Up to a maximum of 4 NATS keys can be registered. During the communication mentioned under Anti-Theft System, the radio will recognize the used ignition key and select the accompanying settings.
EKS00EHR
SKIA9197E
AV-8
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram AUDIO (With Cassette Deck)
EKS00ECN
LHD MODELS
AV
TKWA1578E
AV-9
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWB1143E
AV-10
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
RHD MODELS
A
AV
TKWA1580E
AV-11
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWB1144E
AV-12
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Schematic (Without Cassette Deck)
EKS00ECM
LHD MODELS
AV
TKWA1582E
AV-13
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
RHD MODELS
TKWA1589E
AV-14
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram AUDIO (Without Cassette Deck)
EKS00FB9
LHD MODELS WITH NAVIGATION
AV
TKWB1147E
AV-15
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWA1584E
AV-16
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
A
AV
TKWA1585E
AV-17
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
LHD MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION
TKWA1586E
AV-18
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
A
AV
TKWA1587E
AV-19
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWA1588E
AV-20
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
RHD MODELS WITH NAVIGATION
A
AV
TKWB1148E
AV-21
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWA1591E
AV-22
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
A
AV
TKWA1592E
AV-23
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
RHD MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATION
TKWA1593E
AV-24
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
A
AV
TKWA1594E
AV-25
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWA1595E
AV-26
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit With Cassette Deck
EKS00EHS
A
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
()
2
(L)
1
(B/W)
Item
Audio sound
signal front
LH
Signal
input/
output
Output
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
ON
Example of symptom
Operation
No sound from front

door speaker and
tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
D
SKIA0177E
E
4
(BR)
3
(B/R)
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from front

door speaker and
tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
5
(Y/R)
Ground
Antenna
signal
Output
ACC
More than approx. 10V
6
(Y/G)
Ground
Battery
power
Input
Battery voltage
Ground
Lighting switch
ON (1st position)
Approx.12V
Lighting
switch signal
Lighting switch
OFF
Approx. 0V
8
(R/L)
10
(GY/L)
Ground
ACC power
14
(LG)
13
(B/Y)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Input
Input
ON
ACC
Battery voltage
Receiving status of
radio broadcast
becomes bad.
System does not work

properly.
Audio unit illumination

does not function
when lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
System does not work

properly.
AV
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from rear

speaker LH.
L
SKIA0177E
M
16
(OR)
15
(B/P)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from rear

speaker RH.
SKIA0177E
22
(L/W)
Ground
Vehicle
speed signal (2-pulse)
Input
ON
When vehicle
speed is
approx.40km/h
(25MPH)
Speed sensitive volume system does not

work properly.
SKIA0168E
24
(PU)
Immobilizer
AV-27
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
26
(L/B)
27
(L/R)
29
(B)
Item
()
Ground
Ground
Ground
Remote control A
Remote control B
Remote control ground
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
ON
ON
Example of symptom
Operation
Press SOURCE
switch
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
Approx. 1.7V
Press VOL UP
switch
Approx. 3.3V
Except for above
Approx. 5V
Press SPECIAL
switch
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK
DOWN switch
Approx. 1.7V
Press VOL
DOWN switch
Approx. 3.3V
Except for above
Approx. 5V
Approx. 0V
ON
Steering wheel audio

controls do not function.
Steering wheel audio

controls do not function.
Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit Without Cassette Deck
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
1
(R/L)
Item
()
Ground
Lighting
switch signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
EKS00EHT
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
Lighting switch
ON (1st position)
Approx. 12V
Lighting switch
OFF
Approx. 0V
Example of
symptom
Audio unit illumination does not
function when
lighting switch is
ON (position 1).
System does not
work properly.
3
(GY/L)
Ground
ACC power
Input
ACC
Battery voltage
5
(PU)
immobilizer
6
(Y/R)
Ground
Antenna
signal
Output
ON
More than approx. 10V
Receiving status
of radio broadcast
becomes bad.
9
(Y/G)
Ground
Battery power
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
Output
ON
11
10
(SB)*1
(GY)*1
(L)*2
(B/W)*2
Audio sound
signal front
LH
No sound from
front door speaker
or tweeter LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
12
(LG)
13
(B/Y)
Audio sound
signal rear
LH
Output
ON
No sound from
rear door speaker
LH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
AV-28
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Terminal
(Wire color)
(+)
Item
()
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of
symptom
B
15
14
(SB)*3
(GY)*3
(BR)*4
(B/R)*4
Audio sound
signal front
RH
Output
ON
No sound from
front door speaker
or tweeter RH.
Receive audio
signal
SKIA0177E
16
(OR)
7
(B/P)
Audio sound
signal rear
RH
Output
ON
Receive audio
signal
No sound from
rear speaker RH.
*5
*5
Remote control A
22
(B)
20
(L/B)
21*5
(L/R)
22*5
(B)
22*5
(B)
Remote control B
Ground
Input
Input
Remote control ground
*1: LHD model with navigation system
*2: Except *1
*3: RHD model with navigation system
*4: Except *3
*5: With audio steering wheel switch only
ON
ON
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK UP
switch
Approx. 1.7V
Press VOL UP
switch
Approx. 3.3V
Approx. 5V
Press SPECIAL
switch
Approx. 0V
Press SEEK
DOWN switch
Approx. 1.7V
Press VOL
DOWN switch
Approx. 3.3V
Except for above
Approx. 5V
Approx. 0V
2
3
Steering wheel
audio controls do
not function.
I
Steering wheel
audio controls do
not function.
AV
Audio Steering Wheel Switch Resistance Check

Terminal
Except for above
ON
SKIA0177E
Press SOURCE
switch
Signal name
EKS00EHW
Resistance
()
Condition
Source
Depress source switch.
Approx.0
Seek up (next)
Depress (station) up switch.
Approx.165
Volume (up)
Depress volume up switch.
Approx.652
Special
Depress special switch.
Approx.0
Seek up (previous)
Depress (station) down

switch.
Approx.165
Volume (down)
Depress volume down

switch.
Approx.652
PKIB8676E
AV-29
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Trouble Diagnoses
EKS00EHY
AUDIO UNIT
Symptom
Audio unit inoperative (no digital
display and no sound from speakers).
Possible causes
Repair order
1. Check 10A fuse [No. 4, located in fuse block
(J/B)]. Turn ignition switch ON and verify that
battery positive voltage is present at terminal
10 (with cassette deck), 3 (without cassette
deck) of audio unit.
1. 10A fuse
2. 15A fuse
3. Audio unit ground
4. Audio unit
2. Check 15A fuse (No. 32, located in fuse and

fusible link box) and verify that battery positive voltage is present at terminal 6 (with cassette deck), 9 (without cassette deck) of
audio unit.
3. Check audio unit ground.
4. Remove audio unit for repair.
Individual rear speaker is noisy or
inoperative.
1. Each speaker
1. Check speaker.
2. Output circuit to each speaker
2. Check the output circuits to each speaker

between audio unit and each speaker.
AM/FM stations are weak or noisy.
1. Roof antenna
1. Check roof antenna.
2. Audio unit ground
2. Check audio unit ground condition.
3. Audio unit
1. Poor audio unit ground
2. Loose or missing ground bonding straps
2. Check ground bonding straps.
3. Ignition condenser or rear window defogger

noise suppressor condenser
3. Replace ignition condenser or rear window

defogger noise suppressor condenser.
4. Ignition coil
4. Check ignition coil.
5. Audio unit
1. Poor audio unit ground
2. Antenna
2. Check antenna.
3. Accessory ground
3. Check accessory ground.
4. Malfunctioning accessory
4. Replace accessory.
Audio unit generates noise in AM

and FM modes with engine running.
Audio unit generates noise in AM

and FM modes with accessories
on (switch pops and motor noise).
Inspection
EKS00EHX
AUDIO UNIT
All voltage inspections are made with:
Ignition switch ON or ACC
Audio unit ON
Audio unit connected
ANTENNA
Using a jumper wire, clip an auxiliary ground between antenna and body.
If reception improves, check antenna ground (at body surface).
If reception does not improve, check main feeder cable for short circuit or open circuit.
AV-30
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Audio Steering wheel Switch Does Not Operate (With Cassette Deck)
1.
1.
2.
EKS00EJ1
AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH RESISTANCE CHECK

Disconnect audio steering wheel switch connector.
Check resistance audio steering wheel switch. Refer to AV-29, "Audio Steering Wheel Switch Resistance
Check" .
Resistance value is OK?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace audio steering wheel switch.
2. AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
26 (L/B)- 4 (L/B)
27 (L/R)- 5 (L/R)
29 (B) - 7 (B)
3.
Disconnect audio unit connector and combination switch (spiral cable) connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M41 terminal 26 (L/B), 27 (L/R), 29 (B) and combination switch (spiral
cable) harness connector M11terminal 4 (L/B), 5 (L/R), 7 (B).

Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M41 terminal 26 (L/B), 27 (L/R), 29 (B) and ground.
H
SKIA9123E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CONTROL SIGNAL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Connect audio unit connector and combination switch (spiral cable) connector.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M41 terminal 26 (L/B), 27 (L/R) and 29 (B).
26 (L/B) - 29 (B)
27 (L/R) - 29 (B)
AV
: Approx. 5V
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Check combination switch (spiral cable).
NG
>> Replace audio unit.
SKIA9124E
Audio Steering Wheel Switch Does Not Operate (Without Cassette Deck)
EKS00EJ3
1. AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH RESISTANCE CHECK

1.
2.
Disconnect audio steering wheel switch connector.

Check resistance audio steering wheel switch. Refer to AV-29, "Audio Steering Wheel Switch Resistance
Check" .
Resistance value is OK?
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Replace audio steering wheel switch.
AV-31
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
2. AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
Disconnect audio unit connector and combination switch (spiral cable) connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal 20 (L/B), 21 (L/R), 22 (B) and combination switch (spiral
cable) harness connector M11terminal 4 (L/B), 5 (L/R), 7 (B).
20 (L/B)- 4 (L/B)
21 (L/R)- 5 (L/R)
22 (B) - 7 (B)
3.

Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M41 terminal 20 (L/B), 21 (L/R), 22 (B) and ground.
SKIA9125E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. CONTROL SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
Connect audio unit connector and combination switch (spiral cable) connector.
Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M43 terminal 20 (L/B), 21 (L/R) and 22 (B).
20 (L/B) - 22 (B)
21 (L/R) - 22 (B)
: Approx. 5V
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Check combination switch (spiral cable).
NG
SKIA9126E
AV-32
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Speed Sensitive Volume System Does Not Work (With Cassette Deck)
EKS00EJ4
1. VEHICLE SPEED OPERATION CHECK
Does speedometer is operated normally?

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check combination meter trouble diagnosis. Refer toDI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection [with
ESP]" in COMBINATION METERS.
2. VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).

Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M41
terminal 22 (L/W) and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
22 (L/W) Ground
:Refer to AV-27, "Terminals and

Reference Value for Audio Unit
With Cassette Deck" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> GO TO 3.
G
SKIA9127E
3. HARNESS CHECK
H
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Disconnect audio unit connector and combination meter connector.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M41 terminal 22 (L/W) and Unified meter control unit harness connector
M44 terminal 33 (L/W).
22 (L/W) - 33 (L/W)
4.
Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M42 terminal 22 (L/W) and ground.
AV
SKIA9128E

OK or NG
OK
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-20, "Diagnosis Flow"
METERS.
NG
>> Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
Repair harness or connector.
AV-33
http://vnx.su
in COMBINATION
M
AUDIO
Removal and Installation of Audio Unit (With Cassette Deck)
EKS00EKR
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove screws (4) and connector, and remove audio unit.
SKIA9194E
3.
Remove screws (8) and bracket.
SKIA9195E
INSTALLATION
AV-34
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Removal and Installation of Audio Unit (Without Cassette Deck)
EKS00ECQ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove screws (2) and remove audio unit.
B
SKIA9170E
3.
Remove screws (4), and bracket.

F
H
SKIA9171E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Speakers
EKS00ECT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove door finisher. Refer to EI-32, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove screws (3) and remove speakers.
AV
M
SKIA0001E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Tweeters

REMOVAL
1.
Remove front speaker grille. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
AV-35
http://vnx.su
EKS00ECU
AUDIO
2.
Remove screws (2) and remove tweeters.
SKIA0002E
INSTALLATION
AV-36
http://vnx.su
AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
Antenna Route
PFP:28200
A
EKS00ECV
J
PKIB9383E
Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna

1.
2.
AV
EKS00ECW
Remove headlining.
Refer to EI-39, "HEADLINING" in Exterior/Interior (EI) section.
Remove roof antenna mounting nuts, antenna plug, and power
connector. Then remove roof antenna.
SKIA9663E
SKIA0009E
AV-37
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Description
PFP:25915
EKS00M7F
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Location Detection Principle
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current
position according to the following three signals:
Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle

speed sensor
Turning angle of the vehicle as determined by the gyroscope

(angular velocity sensor)
Direction of vehicle travel as determined by the GPS antenna

(GPS information)
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the
calculated vehicle position with map data read from the map DVDSKIB1058E
ROM, which is stored in the DVD-ROM drive (map-matching), and
indicated on the screen as a vehicle mark. More accurate data is judged and used by comparing vehicle position detection results found by the GPS with the result by map-matching.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the distance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
Travel distance
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed
sensor input signal. Therefore, the calculation may become
incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic
distance correction function has been adopted.
Travel direction
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a
gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS antenna (GPS
information). They have both advantages and disadvantages.
Type
Advantage
SEL684V
Disadvantage
Gyroscope
(angular velocity sensor)
Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite

accurately.
Direction errors may accumulate when vehicle is

driven for long distances without stopping.
GPS antenna
(GPS information)
Can detect the vehicle's travel direction

(North/South/East/West).
Correct direction cannot be detected when vehicle speed is low.
More accurate traveling direction is detected because priorities are set for the signals from these two
devices according to the situation.
AV-38
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Map-Matching
A
Map-matching compares a current location detected by the method

in the Location Detection Principle (refer to AV-38 ) with a road map
data from Map DVD-ROM stored in DVD-ROM drive.
NOTE:
The road map data is based on data stored in the map DVD-ROM.
SEL685V
The vehicle position may not be corrected under the following circumstances and after driving for a certain
time when GPS information is difficult to receive. In this case, the vehicle mark on the display must be corrected manually.
In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will

be shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is
currently driven has been judged and the vehicle mark has been
repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, alternative routes
will be shown in different order of priority, and the incorrect road
can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority.
Therefore, the vehicle mark may appear on either of them alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road.
SEL686V
Map-matching does not function correctly when a road on which

the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded in the map DVDROM, or when road pattern stored in the map data and the
actual road pattern are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching function may find another road and position the vehicle mark
on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the vehicle mark
may change to it.
Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel
direction calculated by the distance and direction with the road
data read from the map DVD-ROM is limited. Therefore, when
there is an excessive gap between current vehicle position and
the position on the map, correction by map-matching is not possible.
AV-39
http://vnx.su
AV
L
SKIA0613E
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS (Global Positioning System)
GPS (Global Positioning System) was developed for and is controlled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellites (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an
orbit around the earth at an altitude of approximately 21,000 km.
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimensions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimensional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calculated previously with radio waves from four or more GPS satellites
SEL526V
(two-dimensional positioning).
Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.
Accuracy of GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions:
In two-dimensional positioning, GPS accuracy will deteriorate when altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
The accuracy can be even lower depending on the arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
Position detection is not possible when vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
NOTE:
Even a high-precision three dimensional positioning, the detection result has an error about 10 m (30 ft).
Because the signals of GPS satellite is controlled by the Tracking and Control Center in the United States,
the accuracy may be degraded lower intentionally or the radio waves may stop.
Traffic Information (RDS-TMC)

The Traffic Information broadcast allows to you to avoid delays due to traffic incidents.
Traffic jams, roadwork, closed roads around your current location, etc. are represented graphically on the map
by icons depicting the nature of the event.
Incidents on the route are automatically brought to your attention when they are approached.
The Traffic Information feature gives you the opportunity to forecast traffic incidents, determine how serious
they are and, via the guidance mode, allows you to detour around traffic problems.
The navigation system receives traffic information from best available sources and enables the RDS-TMC
(Radio Data System-Traffic Message Channel) to inform and guide you.
The RDS-TMC broadcast is fed by a dedicated FM tuner so that you can still tune your radio station while Traffic Information is being broadcasted.
AV-40
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Component Description
EKS00M7G
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
The gyro (angular speed sensor) and the DVD-ROM drive are
built-in units that control the navigation functions.
Signals are received from the gyro, the vehicle speed sensor,
and the GPS antenna. Vehicle location is determined by combining this data with the data contained in the DVD-ROM map.
Location information is shown on liquid crystal display panel.
D
PKIA0248E
DVD-ROM Drive
Maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information can

be easily read from the DVD-ROM disc.
F
H
PKIA0249E
Map DVD-ROM
The map DVD-ROM has maps, traffic control regulations, and other pertinent information.
To improve DVD-ROM map matching and route determination functions, the DVD-ROM uses an exclusive
Nissan format. Therefore, the use of a DVD-ROM provided by other manufacturers cannot be used.
Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)
The oscillator gyro sensor is used to detect changes in vehicle steering angle.
The gyro is built into the navigation (NAVI) control unit.
AV
GPS ANTENNA
The GPS antenna receives and amplifies the radio waves from the GPS satellites, and then transmits the GPS
signal to NAVI control unit.
AV-41
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Antenna Route
PKIB9383E
DISPLAY
Images on the display include RGB image such as map screen

and rear view image displayed when setting the select lever to R
range.
NAVI control unit controls images on the display.
PKIB9465E
NAVI SWITCH
NAVI switch connects to the display and transfer unit with communication lines. NAVI switch transmits the demand signal and
the response signal with the serial transmission.
Communication form of the operation signal is conversed in
transfer unit to NAVI switch. The operation signal is transmitted
to NAVI control unit.
PKIB9465E
AV-42
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TRANSFER UNIT
Transfer unit interfaces the communication signal among NAVI

switch, display and transfer unit to the communication signal
between transfer unit and NAVI control unit.
Transfer unit outputs ON signal and voice guidance signal to
voice change relay.
PKIB9466E
VOICE CHANGE RELAY

Voice change relay converses the voice signal transmitted from audio unit and the voice guidance signal
transmitted from NAVI control unit through transfer unit. And voice change relay outputs the voice signal and
the voice guidance signal to driver-side speaker.
TMC TUNER
TMC tuner connects to NAVI control unit with a communication line.

TMC tuner transmits traffic message channel information to NAVI
control unit, and indicates the traffic message channel information on
the display. Also TMC tuner receives the receivable channel list from
NAVI control unit.
I
PKIB9467E
AV
AV-43
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
System Operation Description
EKS00M7H
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Here is an example of functions. For details, refer to the owner's manual or navigation system owner's manual.
MAP VIEWING STYLE
The NISSAN Navigation System gives you a choice of two map viewing styles, a normal 2-dimensional
PLAN VIEW map and 3-dimensional BIRDVIEW map.
The 3-dimensional BIRDVIEW map depicts a geographic area as seen from an elevated perspective.
PLAN VIEW Map
SKIA1377E
BIRDVIEW Map
SKIA1378E
Description
Display area: Trapezoidal representation showing approximate

distances (Wn, D, and Wd).
Ten horizontal grid lines indicate display width while six vertical
grid lines indicate display depth and direction.
Pushing the ZOOM IN button during operation displays the
scale change and the view point height on the left side of the
screen.
The height of the view point increases or decreases when
ZOOM or WIDE is selected with the joystick.
SKIA5613E
AV-44
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MAP DISPLAY
Function of each icon is as follows:
1. Direction indicator
This indicates the direction of the map.
2. Vehicle mark (cross pointer)
This indicates your vehicle position and the direction of travel.
3. GPS indicator
This indicates the strength of the GPS signal received.
4. Distance indicator
This indicates the distance on the screen according to the
map scale.
SKIA1379E
AV
AV-45
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION OF NAVI SWITCH
DEST Button
This key is used to set the destination (and way points).
Easy Mode
SKIA9542E
Expert Mode
SKIA9142E
The function of each icon is as follows:

Mode
Icon
Easy
Address Book
Description
Expert
Use this category item if you want to go to places stored in the address book.
Address (City / Street)
Use this category item if you know the city name, street name and house number of the
destination (and way points).
Point of Interest (POI)
Use this category item if you want to go to a restaurant, hotel, gas station or other facility.
Phone Number
Use this category item when the destination phone number is known.
Previous Dest.
The ten previous destinations are registered automatically, thereby deleting the older ones.
Intersection
Sets a destination using the intersection of 2 streets.
City Centre
Sets the destination (way point) on the map screen of the area around the input city.
Map
Use this category item if you want to choose the place directly on the map display.
Home
Help
When you set your home in the address book, a route home will be calculated by selecting
this key.
You can see the explanation of the navigational functions.
MAP Button
The map will be displayed.
AV-46
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ROUTE Button
A
This key is used to set useful functions for the route guidance to the destination.
Easy Mode
D
SKIA1382E
Expert Mode
SKIA1383E

Mode
Icon
Description
Easy
Expert
Quick Stop
This key is used to set the destination (and way points) from a list of commonly used
facilities.
Where am I?
This key is used to show the next, current, and previous streets on the screen.
Route Info.
This key is used to show the route to the destination in three different ways.
Edit Route
This key is used to alter or reset the pre-set destination (and way points).
Route Calculation
This key is used to start the route calculation after all the settings are completed.
Help
AV
AV-47
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
INFO Button
This button is used to show the drive information and maintenance information on the screen.
DRIVE INFORMATION screen is displayed when pressing

INFO button once.
SKIB3592E
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION screen is displayed when

pressing INFO button twice.
SKIB3593E
Display items
DRIVE INFORMATION
Display/Setting contents
Elapsed Time
Displays driving time with a range of 0:00:00 to 9999:59:59.
Journey Distance
Displays journey distance with a range of 0.0 to 99999.9.
Average Speed
Displays average speed with a range of 0.0 to 999.9.
Reminder 1
MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Reminder 2
Maintenance intervals of vehicle's consumable and setting of cycles.
Reminder 3
AV-48
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
SETTING Button
A
This button is used to set various navigational functions for convenient use.
SKIA9143E
Icon
Description
Display
The key also adjusts the display Brightness/Contrast/Map Background.
Language
This key is used to choose one of the languages shown on the display.
Navigation
Changes various settings of the navigation system.
Navigation Expert Mode
This key changes between Expert Mode and Easy Mode.
Guidance Volume
Adjusts or turns off volume of the voice guidance.
Help (only easy mode)
VOICE Button
When the guidance volume is set off, and the VOICE button is pushed, the guidance volume will be set to
ON, and the system will announce the current vehicle location.
BACK Button
This button has two functions:

To return to the previous screen
J
When this key is pushed during set-up, set-up will be cancelled, and the screen display will return to the
previous screen.
To finish the set-up
AV
When this key is pushed after set-up is completed, the settings will be renewed as directed, and the
screen will return to the map.
L
ZOOM IN/ZOOM OUT Button

Use the ZOOM IN/ZOOM OUT button to change the scale of the display and height view.
CANCEL Button
This button has two functions:
Operation is cancelled when pushed during operation.
The CONFIRMATION screen is displayed during route guidance in the present location map.
DAY/NIGHT Button
To change the display brightness, push the
button.
Precautions for NAVI Control Unit Replacement
EKS00F2T
When replacing the NAVI control unit, eject the map DVD-ROM before disconnecting the battery.
The NAVI control unit has the following information stored in its memory. Record the memory contents
before replacing the control unit, and input them in the new unit as necessary.
AV-49
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
<Image quality>
<Navigation mode>
Brightness of light when ON/OFF

Dimming switching
Display color switching
Latest status (map screen/BIRDVIEW , reduced scale, rotation angle
of map screen, route guide ON/OFF, track ON/OFF, etc.)
Current position
Destination, passing point 1 - 5
Registered places, their names, etc.
NOTE:
Only removing the battery does not erase the memory.
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
EKS00F2U
PKIB8911E
AV-50
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Schematic
EKS00F2V
AV
TKWB1149E
AV-51
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram NAVI
EKS00F2W
LHD MODELS
TKWA1597E
AV-52
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
AV
TKWA1598E
AV-53
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TKWB1150E
AV-54
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
AV
TKWB1186E
AV-55
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TKWB1187E
AV-56
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
RHD MODELS
A
AV
TKWB1188E
AV-57
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TKWB1189E
AV-58
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
AV
TKWB1190E
AV-59
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TKWB1191E
AV-60
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A
AV
TKWB1192E
AV-61
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Item
(+)
()
1 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Battery power
supply
Ground
Ground
Ground
ACC power
supply
8 (R)
Voice guide
signal
2 (Y/G)
3 (Y/G)
4 (B/R)
6 (GY/L)
7 (G)
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
Example of
symptom
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
ON
Approx. 0V
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Input
Input
Output
EKS00F2X
ACC
ON
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
Push the VOICE

switch.
SKIB3597E
Shield
12 (Y)
19
RGB area
signal
Output
ON
RGB screen is
not shown.
SKIB3600E
15 (R)
19
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Output
ON
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
RGB screen
looks yellowish.
SKIB3602E
16 (L)
19
RGB
synchronizing
signal
Output
ON
RGB screen is
rolling.
SKIB3603E
18 (BR)
19
RGB signal
(R: red)
Output
ON
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
RGB screen
looks bluish.
SKIB3604E
19
Shield
AV-62
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
Item
()
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of
symptom
21 (W)
19
RGB signal
(G: green)
Output
ON
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
RGB screen
looks reddish.
SKIB3605E
25 (R/L)
26 (G)
Ground
Ground
Illumination
signal
IGN signal
Input
Input
ON
ON
Lighting switch
position 1st or 2nd
Approx.12V
Lighting switch
position OFF
Approx. 0V
Select R-position
27 (Y/G)
28 (LG)
Ground
Ground
Reverse
signal
Vehicle speed
signal
(8-pulse)
Input
Input
ON
ON
Other position
D
Night
illumination for
switches does
not illuminate.
Battery voltage.
Approx.12V
Vehicle
information
setting is not
possible.
The navigation
current-location
mark moves
strangely when
the vehicle is
moving
backwards.
Approx. 0V
Navigation
current-location
mark does not
indicate the
correct position.
When vehicle
speed is approx. 40
km/h (25 MPH)
ELF1084D
43
shield
43
Communication signal (+)
44
(BR)*1
(R/L)*2
Input/
output
ON
System does not

work properly.
AV
M
SKIA0175E
45 (Y)
43
Communication signal ()
Input/
output
ON
System does not

work properly.
SKIA0176E
46
Shield
47 (P)
46
Input/
output
ON
System does not

work properly.
SKIA0175E
AV-63
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Item
(+)
()
48 (L)
46
49
Ground
GPS antenna
signal
50
Signal
input/
output
Input/
output
Condition
Example of
symptom
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
System does not

work properly.
SKIA0176E
*1: LHD models
*2: RHD models
Shield
Input
ON
Connector is not
connected.
GPS correction
is not possible.
Approx. 5V
Terminals and Reference Value for Display

Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
1 (BR)
Item
()
RGB signal
(R: red)
Signal
input/
output
Input
EKS00F2Y
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
ON
Operation
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
Example of
symptom
RGB screen
looks bluish.
SKIB3604E
2 (W)
RGB signal
(G: green)
Input
ON
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
RGB screen
looks reddish.
SKIB3605E
3 (R)
RGB signal
(B: blue)
Input
ON
Select Color bar

of
CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT
function.
RGB screen
looks yellowish.
SKIB3602E
Shield
7 (L)
RGB
synchronizing
signal
Input
ON
RGB screen is
rolling.
SKIB3603E
AV-64
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
Condition
Signal
input/
output
Item
()
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of
symptom
8 (Y)
Ground
RGB area
signal
Input
ON
RGB screen is
not shown.
SKIB3600E
15 (R)
Ground
Communication signal
(DISP-SW)
Output
ON
System does
not work properly.
16 (L)
17
Input
ON
System does
not work properly.
SKIB3606E
(NAVI-DISP)
H
SKIB3607E
17
Shield
Ground
ACC power
supply
Input
ACC
Battery voltage
System does
not work
properly.
21 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery power
supply
Input
Battery voltage
System does
not work
properly.
22 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
23 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery power
supply
Input
Battery voltage
24 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
19
(GY/L)
Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Switch

Terminal No.
(wire color)
Item
(+)
()
1
(GY/L)
Ground
ACC power
supply
3 (B/R)
Illumination
signal
2 (R/L)
Signal
input/
output
Input
Input
Reference value
Operation
ACC
ON
Battery voltage
Lighting switch position 1st or 2nd
Approx. 12V
Lighting switch position OFF
Approx. 0V
AV-65
http://vnx.su
AV
System does
not work
properly.
EKS00F2Z
Condition
Ignition
switch
Example of
symptom
All operations do
not work.
Night illumination
for switches does
not illuminate.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
()
4 (R)
Ground
Condition
Signal
input/
output
Item
(DISP-SW)
Example of
symptom
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Input
System does not

work properly.
SKIB3606E
5 (G)
(SW-NAVI)
7 (B/R)
Ground
System does not

work properly.
Output
ON
Shield
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
SKIB3611E
All operations do
not work.
Terminals and Reference Value for Transfer Unit

Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
1 (G/Y)
Item
()
2 (L/Y)
Voice guide
signal
Signal
input/
output
Output
EKS00F30
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Push the VOICE

switch.
Example of
symptom
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
SKIB3609E
6 (P)
4 (B/W)
Voice change
relay ON signal
Output
ON
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
Push the VOICE

switch.
SKIB3610E
8 (G)
10 (R)
Shield
Voice guide
signal
Input
ON
Push the VOICE

switch.
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
SKIB3597E
Shield
AV-66
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
Item
()
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of
symptom
B
11
(BR)*1
(R/L)*2
Input/
output
ON
System does not

work properly.
SKIA0175E
13 (Y)
Input/
output
ON
System does not

work properly.
Shield
SKIA0176E
15
G
18 (G)
15
(SW-NAVI)
19
Shield
19
(NAVI-DISP)
Input
ON
System does not

work properly.
SKIB3611E
20 (L)
J
Input
ON
System does not

work properly.
AV
SKIB3607E
25 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
27 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
29
(GY/L)
Ground
ACC power
supply
Input
ACC
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
31 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery power
supply
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
32 (Y/G)
Ground
Battery power
supply
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
System does not

work properly.
*1: LHD models
*2: RHD models
AV-67
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminals and Reference Value for TMC Tuner
Terminal
(Wire color)
Signal
input/
output
Item
1 (P)
Ground
Communication
signal (+)
Input/
output
EKS00LYJ
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
SKIA0175E
2 (L)
Ground
Communication
signal ()
Input/
output
ON
SKIA0176E
Shield
5 (Y/G)
Ground
Input
OFF
Battery voltage
7 (GY/L)
Ground
ACC power supply
Input
ACC
Battery voltage
8 (B/R)
Ground
Ground
ON
Approx. 0V
Terminals and Reference Value for Voice Change Relay

Terminal No.
(wire color)
Item
(+)
2 (P)
()
1 (B/W)
Voice change
relay ON signal
Signal
input/
output
Input
EKS00F31
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
ON
Push the VOICE

switch.
Example of
symptom
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
SKIB3610E
3 (SB)
5 (GY)
Audio sound
signal
(passenger
side)
Input
ON
No sound from
door speaker
and tweeter (passenger side).
Receive audio signal.
SKIB3609E
AV-68
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Terminal No.
(wire color)
(+)
Item
()
Signal
input/
output
Condition
Reference value
Ignition
switch
Operation
Example of
symptom
B
4
(L)*1
(B/W)*1
(BR)*2
(B/R)*2
Voice guide
signal
Output
ON
Only route guide

and operation
guide are not
heard.
Push the VOICE

switch.
SKIB3609E
6 (G/Y)
7 (L/Y)
Voice guide
signal
Input
ON
SKIB3609E
*1: LHD models.
*2: RHD models.
D
Only route guide
and operation
guide are not
heard.
Push the VOICE

switch.
AV
AV-69
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Function
EKS00F32
DESCRIPTION
Diagnosis function consists of the self-diagnosis mode performed automatically and the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode operated manually.
Self-diagnosis mode checks for connections between the units constituting this system, analyzes each
individual unit at the same time, and displays the results on the LCD screen.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode is used to perform trouble diagnosis that require operation and
judgment by an operator (trouble that cannot be automatically judged by the system), to check/change the
set value, and to display the History of Errors of the navigation system.
DIAGNOSIS ITEM
Mode
Description
NAVI Control unit diagnosis (DVD-ROM drive will not be diagnosed when no
map DVD-ROM is in it.).
Performs diagnosis of each unit and connections between control unit and GPS
antenna, as well as between control unit and each unit.
Self-diagnosis
Display
Color tone and shading of the screen can be checked by the display of a color bar
and a gray scale.
Vehicle signals
Analyzes the following vehicle signals: Vehicle speed signal, light signal, ignition
switch signal, and reverse signal.
History of Errors
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory (before turning ignition switch
ON) are displayed in this mode. Time and location when/where the errors occurred
are also displayed.
Display Longitude
& Latitude
Display the map. Use the joystick to adjust position. Longitude and latitude will be
displayed.
Speed Calibration
Under ordinary conditions, the navigation system distance measuring function will
automatically compensate for minute decreases in wheel and tire diameter caused
by tire wear or low pressure. Speed calibration immediately restores system accuracy in cases such as when distance calibration is needed because of the use of
tire chains in inclement weather.
Angle Adjustment
Corrects difference between actual turning angle of a vehicle and turning angle of
the car mark on the display.
Initialize Location
This mode is for initializing the current location. Use when the vehicle is transported a long distance on a trailer, etc.
Confirmation /
Adjustment
Navigation
Feature Restriction Setting
Operations of navigation system that are performed while driving can be restricted
by using this function.
AV-70
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Self-Diagnosis Mode
EKS00F33
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Start the engine.

Push and hold MAP and
switches simultaneously for 5
seconds or more.
Push the BACK switch and the initial system screen will be
shown.
D
SKIA9191E
3.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items

Self-Diagnosis and Confirmation / Adjustment will become
selective.
SKIA0381E
4.
Perform self-diagnosis by selecting the Self-Diagnosis.

Self-diagnosis subdivision screen will be shown and the operation enters the self-diagnosis mode.
A bar graph shown below the self-diagnosis subdivision
screen indicates progress of the diagnosis.
AV
SKIA0382E
5.
On the SELF-DIAGNOSIS screen, each unit name will be colored according to the diagnosis result, as follows.
Green
Yellow
Red
Gray
: No malfunctioning.
: Cannot be judged by self-diagnosis results.
: Unit is malfunctioning.
: Diagnosis has not been done.
NOTE:
Navigation Unit = NAVI control unit
Communication converter = Transfer unit
SKIB3619E
Satellite Switch = NAVI switch
RDSTMC Tuner = TMC tuner
If multiple malfunctions occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined
according to the following order of priority: red > yellow > gray.
Display when it is normal
Between Navigation Unit and GPS antenna, Communication Converter and Display, Display and Satellite Switch are connected in green.
Between Navigation Unit and Communication Converter, Navigation Unit and RDS-TMC tuner are connected in gray.
AV-71
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Refer to AV-85, "Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Control Unit and TMC Tuner)" and repair
the malfunction part unless displayed RDS-TMC Tuner on self-diagnosis screen despite TMC tuner is
installed on the vehicle.
Select a switch on the SELF-DIAGNOSIS screen and comments for the diagnosis results will be shown.
6.
SKIA9193E
SELFDIAGNOSIS RESULT
Quick reference table
1.
2.
3.
Select an applicable diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference table.
Find estimated malfunctioning system in the diagnosis No. table and perform check.
Turn the ignition switch to OFF and perform self-diagnosis again.
Diagnosis result quick reference table

Screen switch
Diagnosis No.
Switch color
Navigation Unit
Red
Gray
Yellow
GPS antenna
Method of diagnosis for malfunctioning system

When system does not start, indicate malfunction connection between units by outbreak sound from system.
Diagnosis procedure
1. Turn ignition switch ON. Make sure whether or not route guide start sound which is output from NAVI control unit indicate 10 seconds after.
2. Push and hold MAP and
switches simultaneously for 5 seconds or more. Make sure whether or not
2 times of beep sound or route guide start sound indicate.
3. According to the former two steps, Select an proper diagnosis No. in the diagnosis result quick reference
table.
4. Find estimated malfunctioning system from the diagnosis No. table and perform check.
Diagnosis result quick reference table

Procedure 1
Procedure 2
10 seconds after turn ignition switch ON

switches simultaneously for 5 seconds or more.
Route guide start sound appears
There is no sound
*: Indicated when pushing both MAP and
Diagnosis No.
Route guide start sound indicates
There is no sound
Two times of beep sound from NAVI switch *
There is no sound
simultaneously. (Unnecessary to push them 5 seconds or more.)
AV-72
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Selfdiagnosis codes
Diagnosis
No.
Possible cause
Reference
page
NAVI control unit malfunction
NAVI control unit judged no map DVD-ROM is inserted.
When DVD-ROM error. Please check disc. is shown

1. Eject map DVD-ROM and check if it is compatible with the system.
3
2. Check ejected DVD-ROM for dirt, damage, and warpage.
3. If no error is found, insert a known good map DVD-ROM of the same type and perform self-diagnosis
again. If same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is malfunctioning. If result is normal, the map DVDROM is malfunctioning.
4
If Error found in DVD-ROM or DVD-ROM driver in control unit. Please perform diagnosis in accordance
with service manual is shown, carry out same inspection as diagnosis No. 3.
GPS antenna system

1. Visually check for a broken wire in the GPS antenna coaxial cable.
5
2. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector and check that approximately 5V is supplied from NAVI control
unit. If not, the NAVI control unit is inoperative. If the voltage is supplied, replace the GPS antenna and
perform self-diagnosis again. If the same result is shown, the NAVI control unit is inoperative.
Display power supply and ground circuit

Communication line between display and NAVI switch
AV-85
NAVI switch power supply and ground circuit

Communication line between NAVI switch and transfer unit
AV-86
NAVI control unit power supply and ground circuit

Communication line between NAVI control unit and transfer unit
AV-86
Transfer unit power supply and ground circuit

Communication line between transfer unit and display
AV-88
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT Mode
EKS00F34
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Start the engine.

switches simultaneously for 5
seconds or more.
Push the BACK switch and the initial system screen will be
shown.
AV
M
SKIA9191E
3.
The initial trouble diagnosis screen will be shown, and items

Self-Diagnosis and Confirmation/Adjustment will become
selective.
SKIA0381E
AV-73
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4.
5.
When Confirmation/Adjustment is selected on the initial trouble

diagnosis screen, the operation will enter the CONFIRMATION/
ADJUSTMENT mode. In this mode, check and adjustment of
each item will become possible.
Select each switch on Confirmation/Adjustment screen to display the relevant diagnosis screen.
SKIB3621E
DISPLAY
SKIA2251E
CAUTION:
When Display Color Spectrum Bar screen is completed after BACK switch is Pushed, the screen
color changes once. This is normal.
When RGB signal error occurred in the RGB system, tone of the color bar will change as follows.
R (red) signal error
G (green) signal error
B (blue) signal error
: Screen looks bluish.

: Screen looks reddish.
: Screen looks yellowish.
When the color of the screen looks unusual, refer to AV-91, "Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper" .
AV-74
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VEHICLE SIGNALS
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal

and the signals recognized by the system.
SKIA1997E
Diagnosis item
Vehicle speed
Display
ON
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
OFF
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Light
IGN
Reverse
Remarks
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
ON
Lighting switch ON
OFF
Lighting switch OFF
ON
Ignition switch ON
OFF
Ignition switch ACC
ON
Selector lever in R-position
OFF
Selector lever in other than R-position
Condition
H
Changes in indication may be delayed by
approx. 1.5 seconds. This is normal.
Ignition switch in ACC position
If vehicle speed is NG, refer to AV-89, "Vehicle Speed Signal Check" .

If light is NG, refer to AV-90, "Illumination Signal Check" .
If IGN is NG, refer to AV-90, "Ignition Signal Check" .
If reverse is NG, refer to AV-91, "Reverse Signal Check" .
HISTORY OF ERRORS
AV
Diagnosis results of self-diagnosis depend on if any error occurred during the time after selecting Self-Diagnosis until self-diagnosis results is displayed.
Meanwhile, when an error occurs before selecting Self-Diagnosis, and if an error does not occur until selfdiagnosis results is displayed, a diagnosis result is judged as normal.
Consequently, a diagnosis needs to be performed with History of Error for the past error that is not available
with self-diagnosis.
History of Error displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
Correct time of the error occurrence may not be displayed when the GPS antenna substrate within the
NAVI control unit has malfunctioned.
Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the vehicle mark at the time when the error
occurred. If the vehicle mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occurrence
may be located correctly.
AV-75
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
History of Error stores error occurrences up to 50, and errors after the 51st are displayed as the 50th.
SKIA9553E
Diagnosis by History of Errors

When having a difficulty on the investigation of cause due to multiple errors with a reproducible malfunction,
turn ON the ignition switch from OFF mode after making a memo of the item and number of time (or delete
History of Error). Check History of Error again after the malfunction was reproduced, and then perform
diagnosis focusing on the item of which number of time increased.
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
Action/symptom
Communications malfunction between NAVI control unit and internal gyro.
Gyro sensor
disconnected
Perform self-diagnosis.
When the NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis,

the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference.
Communication error between NAVI control unit and internal GPS

substrate.
GPS disconnected

Navigation location detection performance

has deteriorated.
(Angular velocity cannot be detected.)

has deteriorated.
(Location correction using GPS is not performed.)
GPS receiving status remains gray.
During self-diagnosis, GPS diagnosis is not

performed.

has deteriorated.
Malfunctioning transmission wires to NAVI control unit and internal

GPS substrate.
GPS transmission cable
malfunction

Malfunctioning receiving wires to NAVI control unit and internal

GPS substrate.
GPS input
line connection error

AV-76
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Possible causes
Error item
Example of symptom
Action/symptom
Oscillating frequency of the GPS substrate frequency synchronizing oscillation circuit exceeded (or below) the specification.
GPS TCX0
over
GPS TCX0
under

the symptom may be intermittent, caused by strong radio interference, or the control unit may have been subjected to excessively high or low temperatures.
Contents of ROM (or RAM) in GPS substrate are malfunctioning.

GPS ROM
malfunction
GPS RAM
malfunction

Clock IC in GPS substrate is malfunctioning.

GPS RTC
malfunction

has deteriorated.
Location detection accuracy of the navigation

system will deteriorate, depending on the error
area in the memory, because GPS cannot
make correct positioning.
Correct time may not be displayed.
After the power is turned on, the system

always takes some time until GPS positioning
becomes possible. (The GPS receiver starts
positioning without re-collecting the whole satellite information when it judged the data
stored in the receiver is correct.)
Malfunctioning connection between GPS substrate in NAVI control

unit and GPS antenna.
GPS antenna
disconnected
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna

is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
The power voltage supplied to the GPS circuit board has

decreased.
Low voltage
of GPS
When connection between NAVI control unit and GPS antenna

is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the symptom may be intermittent, caused by impact or vibration.
Correct time of error occurrence may not be

stored in the History of Errors.
has deteriorated.

has deteriorated.
AV
L
-
Dedicated map DVD-ROM is in the system, but the data cannot be

read.
The map of a particular location cannot be displayed.
Specific guidance information cannot be displayed.
Is map DVD-ROM damaged, warped, or dirty?
If damaged or warped, the map DVD-ROM is malfunctioning.
If dirty, wipe the DVD-ROM clean with a soft cloth.
Map display is slow.
Guidance information display is slow.
When NAVI control unit is judged normal by self-diagnosis, the

symptom is judged intermittent, caused by vibration.
System has been affected by vibration.
Malfunctioning NAVI control unit.

DVD-ROM
malfunction
DVD-ROM
read error
DVD-ROM
response
Error
AV-77
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION
Display Longitude & Latitude
Adjust the pointer with using the joystick and touch Set.
SKIA1616E
The longitude and latitude are displayed.
SKIA1617E
Speed Calibration
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and

tire pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic distance correction function. This function, on the other
hand, is for immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with
tire chain fitted on tires.
SKIA0365E
Angle Adjustment
Adjusts turning angle output detected by the gyroscope.
SKIA0364E
AV-78
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Initialize Location
Description
Location data for GPS in the Center control unit is initialized in Europe by this mode. Then it is possible for
Center control unit to receive GPS signals for short time.
How to perform Initialize Location mode
1. select Initialize Location, and push ENTER.
E
SKIA1618E
A message Please wait. is displayed and then backs to

another display of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
NOTE:
To continue GPS initialized operation, operate as follows back to

Map screen.
Push BACK button twice.
Push MAP button.
After above operation, GPS indicator changes to green color

within half a minute, unless improper GPS located condition.
This operation should be performed in out side field.
2.
SKIA1619E
FEATURE RESTRICTION SETTING

Operations of navigation system that are performed while driving
can be restricted by using this function.
CAUTION:
Once operational restrictions are imposed, they can not be cancelled even when the software is updated or the languageswitching program is loaded.
AV
SKIB3742E
AV-79
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit
EKS00F35
1. CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the NAVI control unit are not blown.
Terminals
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
32
Ignition switch ACC or ON

2 (Y/G)
NAVI control unit

M116
3 (Y/G)
6 (GY/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of problem before installing new fuse. Refer to PG-2,
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .
2. POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK

Check voltage between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Connector
(-)
Terminal
(wire color)
2 (Y/G)
NAVI control
unit
M116
3 (Y/G)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
6 (GY/L)
SKIA8719E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
3. GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI control unit connector.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Connector
NAVI control unit

M116
1 (B/R)
Ground
Continuity
Yes
4 (B/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIA8720E
AV-80
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Display
EKS00F36
1. CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the display are not blown.
B
Terminals
Unit
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
32

21 (Y/G)
Display
M112
23 (Y/G)
19 (GY/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

F
Check voltage between display and ground.

Terminals
(+)
Unit
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
21 (Y/G)
Display
M112
23 (Y/G)
Ground
19 (GY/L)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
I
SKIA9491E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
AV

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect display connector.
Check continuity between display and ground.
Terminals
Unit
(+)
Connector
Display
M112
M
(-)
Continuity

22 (B/R)
Ground
Yes
24 (B/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIA9492E
AV-81
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Switch
EKS00F37
1. CHECK FUSE
Check 10A fuse [No.4, located in fuse block (J/B)].
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

Check voltage between NAVI switch and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Unit
NAVI
switch
(-)
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
M113
1 (GY/L)
Ground
OFF
ACC
ON
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SKIA8724E

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI switch connector.
Check continuity between NAVI switch harness connector M113
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIA8725E
AV-82
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for Transfer Unit
EKS00F38
1. CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuses of the transfer unit are not blown.
B
Terminals
Unit
Connector
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
32

31 (Y/G)
Transfer unit
M111
32 (Y/G)
29 (GY/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG

F
Check voltage between transfer unit and ground.

Terminals
(+)
Unit
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
31 (Y/G)
Transfer
unit
M111
32 (Y/G)
Ground
29 (GY/L)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
I
SKIA9079E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
AV

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transfer unit connector.
Check continuity between transfer unit and ground.
Terminals
Unit
(+)
Connector
Transfer unit
M111
M
(-)
Continuity

25 (B/R)
Ground
Yes
27 (B/R)
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIA9081E
AV-83
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check for TMC Tuner
EKS00LYK
1. CHECK FUSE
Make sure that the following fuses of TMC tuner are not blown.
Terminals
Unit
Connector
TMC tuner
Power source
Fuse No.
5 (Y/G)
Battery
32
7 (GY/L)
M123
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. Refer to PG2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING" .

Check voltage between TMC tuner harness connector terminals and
ground.
Terminals
(+)
Unit
Connector
Terminal
(wire color)
(-)
5 (Y/G)
TMC
tuner
M123
Ground
7 (GY/L)
OFF
ACC
ON
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
0V
Battery
voltage
Battery
voltage
SKIB4007E
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect TMC tuner connector.
Check continuity between TMC tuner harness connector M123
8 (B/R) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
SKIB4008E
AV-84
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Control Unit and TMC Tuner)
EKS00LYL
Symptom: RDS-TMC Tuner is not displayed on self-diagnosis screen.
1. CHECK TMC TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check TMC tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-84, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check
for TMC Tuner" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI control unit and TMC tuner connectors.
Check continuity between NAVI control unit harness connector
M117 terminals 47 (P), 48 (L) and TMC tuner harness connector
M123 terminals 1 (P), 2 (L).
47 (P) 1 (P)
48 (L) 2 (L)
4.

G

M117 terminals 47 (P), 48 (L) and ground.
47 (P), 48 (L) Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
H
SKIB3991E
3. CHECK NAVI CONTROL UNIT AND TMC TUNER

J
1. Replace NAVI control unit or TMC tuner.

3. Start self-diagnosis, and check if any malfunction is detected from the self-diagnosis result.
Is any malfunction detected from self-diagnosis result?
YES >> Replace the other unit.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Communication Line Check (Between Display and NAVI switch)
AV
L
EKS00F39
1. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check system of power supply and ground circuit display. Refer to AV-81, "Power Supply and Ground Circuit
Check for Display" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
>> Check the malfunctioning parts.
AV-85
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect display connector and NAVI switch connector.
Check continuity between display harness connector M112 terminal 15 (R) and NAVI switch harness connector M113 terminal
4 (R).
15 (R) - 4 (R)
4.
Check continuity between display harness connector M112 terminal 15 (R) and ground.
15 (R) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display.
NG
SKIA9222E
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Switch and Transfer Unit)
EKS00F3A

Check system of power supply and ground circuit NAVI switch. Refer to AV-82, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check for NAVI Switch" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI switch connector and transfer unit connector.
terminal 5 (G), 6 and transfer unit harness connector M111 terminal 18 (G), 15.
5 (G) - 18 (G)
6 - 15
4.


terminal 5 (G), 6 and ground.
5 (G), 6 - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI switch.
NG
SKIA9223E
Communication Line Check (Between NAVI Control Unit and Transfer Unit)
EKS00F3B

Check system of power supply and ground circuit NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-80, "Power Supply and
Ground Circuit Check for NAVI Control Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
AV-86
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and transfer unit connector.
Check continuity between and NAVI control unit harness connector M117 terminal 43, 44 * , 45 (Y) and transfer unit harness
connector M111 terminal 9, 11*, 13 (Y).
43 - 9
44* - 11*
45 (Y) - 13 (Y)

*: LHD model (BR), RHD model (R/L)

M117 terminal 43, 44*, 45 (Y) and ground.
4.
PKIC0534E
43, 44*, 45 (Y) - Ground : Continuity should not exist.

*: LHD model (BR), RHD model (R/L)
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace NAVI control unit.
NG
AV
AV-87
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Communication Line Check (Between Transfer Unit and Display)
EKS00F3C

Check system of power supply and ground circuit transfer unit. Refer to AV-83, "Power Supply and Ground
Circuit Check for Transfer Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
2. CHECK HARNESS
1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transfer unit connector and display connector.
Check continuity between transfer unit harness connector M111
terminal 19, 20 (L) and display harness connector M112 terminal
17, 16 (L).
19 - 17
20 (L) - 16 (L)
4.


terminal 19, 20 (R/L) and ground.
19, 20 (L) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace transfer unit.
NG
SKIA9225E
AV-88
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Vehicle Speed Signal Check
EKS00F3D
1. VEHICLE SPEED OPERATION CHECK
Does speedometer operate normally?

Yes or No
Yes
>> GO TO 2.
No
>> Check combination meter trouble diagnosis. Refer to DI-26, "Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection
[with ESP]" in COMBINATION METERS.
2. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
3.
28 (LG) - 11 (LG)
4.

Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and combination meter connector.
M117 terminal 28 (LG) and Unified meter control unit harness
connector M44 terminal 11 (LG).

M117 terminal 28 (LG) and ground.
28 (LG) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
SKIA9105E
3. VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
Connect NAVI control unit and combination meter connector.

Start engine and drive vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25MPH).
Check the signal between NAVI control unit harness connector
M117 terminal 28 (LG) and ground with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
28 (LG) Ground
AV
: Refer to AV-62, "Terminals and

Reference Value for NAVI Control
Unit" .
OK or NG
OK
NG
>> Check combination meter system. Refer to DI-20, "Diagnosis Flow"
METERS.
AV-89
http://vnx.su
L
SKIA9106E
in COMBINATION
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Illumination Signal Check
EKS00F3E
1. TAIL LAMP OPERATION CHECK

When lighting switch turned 1st or 2nd position, does tail lamp illuminate?
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Go to tail lamp trouble diagnosis.
2. ILLUMINATION SIGNAL CHECK

Terminals
Voltage
()
Lighting
switch
position
1st or 2nd
position
Battery voltage
Ground
OFF
Approx. 0V
(+)
Connector
M117
25 (R/L)
OK or NG
OK
NG
SKIA9107E
Ignition Signal Check
EKS00F3F
1. IGNITION SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch ON.

Check voltage between NAVI control unit harness connector
26 (G) - Ground
: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK
NG
10A fuse [No. 5, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Harness for open or short between NAVI control unit
and fuse
AV-90
http://vnx.su
SKIA9108E
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Reverse Signal Check
EKS00F3G
1. REVERSE LAMP CHECK
With the A/T selector lever in R-position, does R in the shift position indicator turned on? (With A/T)
With the shift lever in R-position, are reverse lamps turned on? (With M/T)
YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check BACK-UP LAMP system.
2. REVERSE SIGNAL CHECK
Terminals
()
Connector
M117
27 (Y/G)
Shift the A/T selector lever in R-position. (With A/T)

Shift the shift lever in R-position. (With M/T)
(+)
Ground
A/T selector
lever
position
Voltage (V)
R-position
Battery voltage
Other than
R-position
Approx. 0
OK or NG
SKIA8728E
OK
NG
Harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and park/neutral position switch (A/T models)
Harness for open or short between NAVI control unit and back-up lamp switch (M/T models)
Color of RGB Image Is Not Proper
EKS00F3H
1. COLOR BAR DIAGNOSIS CHECK

Check color tone by SCREEN ADJUSTMENT of CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT function.
OK or NG
OK
>> INSPECTION END
NG
>> GO TO 2.
AV
AV-91
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. RGB HARNESS CHECK

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and display connector.
Check continuity as following.
When the screen looks bluish
Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
Display
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
18 (BR)
M116
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
1 (BR)
M112
19
Yes
Terminals
Connector
Continuity
SKIA9226E
18(BR)
M116
Ground
19
No
When the screen looks reddish

Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
M116
Display
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
21 (W)
Continuity
Terminal (wire
color)
2 (W)
M112
19
Yes
4
Terminals
Connector
Continuity
21 (W)
M116
SKIA9227E
Ground
No
19
When the screen looks yellowish

Terminals
NAVI control unit
Connector
M116
Display
Terminal
(wire color)
Connector
15 (R)
M112
19
Continuity
Terminal
(wire color)
3 (R)
Yes
4
Terminals
Connector
M116

15 (R)
Continuity
SKIA9228E
Ground
No
19
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
AV-92
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3. RGB SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect NAVI control unit connector and display connector.

Display Color bar by CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT mode.
Check the following with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
When the screen looks bluish
Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector M116 terminal 18 (BR) and 19.
18 (BR) 19
: Refer to AV-62, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit" .
D
SKIA9493E
When the screen looks reddish

Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector M116 terminal 21 (W) and 19.
21 (W) 19
F
When the screen looks yellowish

Voltage signal between NAVI control unit connector M116 terminal 15 (R) and 19.
15 (R) 19
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display.
NG
RGB Screen Is Not Shown
EKS00F3I
1. HARNESS CHECK
1.
2.
3.

M116 terminal 12 (Y), 19 and display harness connector M112
terminal 8 (Y), 4.
12 (Y) - 8 (Y)
19 - 4
4.
12 (Y), 19 - Ground
AV


M112 terminal 12 (Y), 19 and ground.
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
AV-93
http://vnx.su
SKIA9109E
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. RGB AREA SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.

Push INFO switch.
Check the signal between NAVI control unit connector M116 terminals 12 (Y) and 19 with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
12 (Y) - 19
: Refer to AV-62, "Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit"
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display.
NG
SKIA9110E
RGB Screen Is Rolling
EKS00F3J
1. RGB SYNCHRONIZING CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
3.

M116 terminals 16 (L), 19 and display harness connector M112
terminals 7 (L), 4.
16 (L) - 7 (L)
19 - 4
4.


M116 terminal 16 (L), 19 and ground.
16 (L), 19 - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 2.
NG
SKIA9111E
2. RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.

Push the MAP switch.
M116 terminals 16 (L) and 19 with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
16 (L) - 19
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace display.
NG
SKIA9112E
AV-94
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Guide Sound Is Not Heard
EKS00F3K
1. CHECK VOICE GUIDE SETTING
While driving in the dark pink route, voice guide does not operate.
NOTE:
Voice guide is only available at intersections that satisfy certain conditions (indicated by on the map).
Therefore, guidance may not be given even when the route on the map changes direction.
Is volume setting not switched ON?

YES or NO
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Switch the setting ON and turn the volume up.
2. VOICE GUIDE CIRCUIT CHECK

1.
2.
3.
7 (G) - 8 (G)
8 (R) - 10 (R)
4.


M116 terminal 7 (G), 8 (R) and ground.
7 (G), 8 (G) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 3.
NG
>> Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
Repair harness or connector.
3. VOICE GUIDE SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect NAVI control unit connector and transfer unit connector.
M116 terminal 7 (G), 8 (R), and transfer unit harness connector
M111 terminal 8 (G), 10 (R).
SKIA9115E
(NAVI CONTROL UNIT)

AV
Connect NAVI control unit connector and transfer unit connector.

Push VOICE switch.
M116 terminal 7 (G) and 8 (R) with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
7 (G) - 8 (R)
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 4.
NG
SKIA9113E
AV-95
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
4. VOICE CHANGE RELAY CIRCUIT CHECK 1

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transfer unit connector and voice change relay connector.
terminal 1 (G/Y), 2 (L/Y) and voice change relay harness connector M104 terminal 6 (G/Y), 7 (L/Y).
1 (G/Y) - 6 (G/Y)
2 (L/Y) - 7 (L/Y)
4.


terminal 1 (G/Y), 2 (L/Y) and ground.
1 (G/Y), 2 (L/Y) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 5.
NG
PKIC0533E
5. VOICE GUIDE SIGNAL CHECK (TRANSFER UNIT)

1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect transfer unit connector and voice change relay connector.

Push VOICE switch.
Check the between transfer unit harness connector M111 terminal 1 (G/Y) and 2 (L/Y) with CONSULT-II or oscilloscope.
1 (G/Y) - 2 (L/Y)
: Refer to AV-66, "Terminals and

Reference Value for Transfer Unit"
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 6
NG
SKIA9118E
6. VOICE CHANGE RELAY CIRCUIT CHECK 2

1.
2.
3.

Disconnect transfer unit connector and voice change relay connector.
terminal 6 (P), 4 (B/W) and voice change relay harness connector M104 terminal 2 (P), 1 (B/W).
6 (P) - 2 (P)
4 (B/W) - 1 (B/W)
4.


terminal 6 (P), 4(B/W) and ground.
6 (P), 4 (B/W) - Ground
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 7.
NG
SKIA9121E
AV-96
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
7. VOICE CHANGE RELAY ON SIGNAL CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect voice transfer unit connector.

Turn ignition ON.
Push VOICE switch.
Check voltage between transfer unit harness connector M111
terminal 6 (P) and 4 (B/W).
6 (P) - 4 (B/W)
: Approx. 5V
OK or NG
OK
>> Replace voice change relay.
NG
E
SKIA9119E
Display Quality Control Cannot Change Screen
1. SYMPTOM CHECK
Do other systems operate normally?
YES or NO
YES >> Replace display.
NO
>> Check symptom again.
EKS00F3L
AV
AV-97
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Example of Symptoms Judged Not Malfunction
EKS00F3N
BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
The brightness adjustment is at the lowest setting.
Adjust to brighter setting.
No map DVD-ROM is inserted, or it is inserted

upside down.
Insert the DVD-ROM correctly.
The map display mode is switched off.
Push the MAP button.
No voice guidance is available. or

The volume is not high enough.
The volume is not set correctly or it is turned

off.
Adjust the volume correctly.
The screen is too dim. The movement is slow.
The temperature in the vehicle is low.
Wait for the temperature to rise.
There are darker or brighter dots

in the display.
It is inherent to LC displays.
No image comes on.
No map comes on the screen.
VEHICLE MARKS
Symptom
Possible cause
Remedy
This is because the displayed information is

reduced so that the screen does not become
too crowded. There is also a chance that
names of the roads or locations will be repeatedly displayed. The name appearing on the
screen may be different because of the processing procedure.
It should not be regarded as malfunction.
The vehicle mark is not shown

correctly.
The vehicle might have moved with the ignition

off, for example on a ferry boat or car transporter.
Drive the vehicle with GPS on for some distance.
The screen does not switch to

night mode even after turning the
headlights on.
The last time the lights were turned on, your

setting was in daytime mode.
Turn the headlights on again, go to DISPLAY

SETTINGS screen and set it to the night
mode.
The map does not scroll even

when the vehicle is traveling.
The display is not switched to the map screen.
The vehicle mark does not show

up.
The display is not switched to the map screen.
GPS signals are not received because the vehicle is indoors or in the shade of buildings.
Move the vehicle outdoors with a clear view of

the sky.
GPS satellites are in poor locations.
Wait for the satellites to move to better locations.
The location names differ between

PLAN VIEW and BIRDVIEW .
GPS indicator on the screen

remains gray.
Driving on slippery road surface
Driving on slanted area
The location of the vehicle mark

does not match the actual position.
If the vehicle mark does not move to the correct position even after the vehicle has been
driven for approximately 10 km (6 miles),
adjust the current location. If necessary, adjust
the moving speed of the vehicle.
Rough or violent driving.
If the position maker does not move to the correct position even after the vehicle has been
driven for approximately 10 km (6 miles),
adjust the current location.
GPS indicator remains gray.
Please check the GPS indicator on the screen

to see if it remains gray.
Errors (gain or loss) result in calculating the

speed from the speed pulse because the vehicle has tire chains on, or the system was transferred to a different vehicle.
It will move by driving the vehicle for 30 minutes [in case it is running at 30 km/h (19
MPH)]. If you still notice errors, adjust moving
speed.
The map data has an error or is incomplete (if

the location error always happens in the same
area).
Please wait for the updated Map
AV-98
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MAP DVD-ROM
Symptom
The message Error appears
after operation.
Possible cause
Remedy
Check the DVD-ROM and wipe it clean with a
soft cloth.
Map DVD-ROM is soiled or partially damaged.
In case you see any damage, replace the

DVD-ROM.
DESTINATION, WAY POINTS OR MENU CONTENTS CANNOT BE CHOSEN OR SET

Symptom
Possible cause
Set the destination and request route calculation.
The vehicle mark is not on the suggested route.
Please drive the vehicle along the suggested

route.
Route guidance is off.
Turn the route guidance on.
The system has judged that the vehicle has

already passed the point.
If you want to go to that point again, edit the

route again.
Route calculation has not yet been requested.
Set the destination and request route calculation.
The vehicle mark is not on the suggested route.
Please drive the vehicle along the suggested

route.
Route guidance is off.
Route is not calculated automatically.
The vehicle is not running on a route that can

be calculated from.
Enter the route that can be calculated from.

Alternatively, you can calculate the route manually. In this case, the entire route will be calculated again.
It is impossible to request a
detour.
Your vehicle is not running on the suggested

route.
Restart route calculation or join the suggested

route.
The detour found is the same as

the previous suggestion.
The system took many conditions into consideration, but the same result was obtained.
The number of way points exceeds 5.
It is impossible to set more than 5 way points.

Please divide them in groups to find them all.
In re-routing, the way points are

not included in the calculation.
Route information is not displayed.
It is impossible to set the waypoints.
The voice guidance is not available.
AV
VOICE GUIDANCE
Symptom
Remedy
Route calculation has not yet been requested.

Turn list is not displayed.
Possible cause
Remedy
Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections marked with . In some cases, the
guidance is not available even when the vehicle
should make a turn.
System is not malfunction.
The vehicle is off the suggested route.
Return to the recommended route or re-search

the route.
Voice guidance is set off.
Turn the voice guidance on.
Route guidance is set off.
The content of the voice guidance may vary,

The guidance content does not
depending on the types of junctions to make
correspond to the actual condition.
turns on.
AV-99
http://vnx.su
Follow the actual rules and regulations.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ROUTE CALCULATION
Symptom
Although the system is set with
the moving direction as the preference, it does not find the route by
matching the preference.
Route is not indicated.
Possible cause
Remedy
There is no route found in that direction.
There is no road close to the destination that

can be found by this system.
Reset the destination close to the road displayed with orange, or wider ones. Especially
with roads which have separate lanes for
opposite directions, be careful in setting the
destination or way points on it, as results may
differ depending on the lane you choose.
The starting point to the destination is too close.
Set more distant destinations.
The route is not displayed continuously at way points that are for
example not calculated routes
from the vehicle's current position.
Suggested routes may be displayed discontinuously near way points as route calculation is
done at each way point.
The suggested route the vehicle

has travelled is erased.
Suggested routes are stored in memory by the

blocks; if the vehicle travels past way point 1,
the former data will be erased.
A very detoured route is suggested.
If there are restrictions (such as one-way traffic)

on roads close to the starting point or destination, the system may suggest a detoured route.
Try slightly moving the starting point or destination.
The landmark description does

not correspond to the actual one.
It may be caused by insufficient or incorrect

data on the DVD-ROM.
Please wait for the update Map DVD-ROM.
The suggested route does not

exactly connect to the starting
point, way points, or destination.
There is no data for route calculation closer to

these points.
Set these points on the main road displayed in

thick orange. Please note that in some cases
even main roads lack the data for route calculation.
NOTE:
Except for the ordinance-designated cities and the prefectural capitals. (Applicable areas may be changed in the updated map disc.)
AV-100
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
EXAMPLES OF VEHICLE MARK DISPLACEMENT
Vehicle's travel amount is calculated by reading its travel distance and turning angle. Therefore, if the vehicle
is driven in the following manner, an error will occur in the vehicle's current location display. If correct location
has not been restored after driving the vehicle for a while, perform location correction.
SEL698V
AV
AV-101
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
Driving condition
Remarks (correction, etc.)
Yintersections
At a Y intersection or similar gradual division of roads, error the direction of travel
deduced by the sensor may result in the
vehicle mark appearing on the wrong road.
ELK0192D
Spiral roads
When driving on a large, continuous spiral
road (such as loop bridge), turning angle
error is accumulated and the vehicle mark
may deviate from the correct location.
ELK0193D
Straight roads
Road
configuration
When driving on a long, straight road and

slow curve without stopping, map-matching does not work effectively enough and
distance errors may accumulate. As a
result, the vehicle mark may deviate from
the correct location when the vehicle
turned at a corner.
ELK0194D
Zigzag roads
When driving on a zigzag road, the map
may be matched to other roads in the similar direction nearby at every turn, and the
vehicle mark may deviate from the correct
location.
ELK0195D
Roads laid out in a grid pattern

When driving at where roads are laid out in
a grid pattern, where many roads are running in the similar direction nearby, the
map may be matched to them by mistake
and the vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct location.
ELK0196D
Parallel roads
When two roads are running in parallel
(such as highway and sideway), the map
may be matched to the other road by mistake and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
ELK0197D
AV-102
http://vnx.su
If after traveling about 10 km (6

miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction, and if necessary, direction correction.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
Driving condition
In a parking lot
SEL709V
When driving in a parking lot, or other location where there are no roads on the map,
matching may place the vehicle mark on a
nearby road. When the vehicle returns to
the road, the vehicle mark may have deviated from the correct location.
When driving in circle or turning the steering wheel repeatedly, direction errors accumulate, and the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct location.
Turntable
When the ignition switch is off, the navigation system cannot get the signal from the
gyroscope (angular speed sensor). Therefore, the displayed direction may be wrong
and the correct road may not be easily
returned to after rotating the vehicle on a
turntable with the ignition off.
Place
SEL710V
Slippery roads
F
On snow, wet roads, gravel, or other roads
where tires may slip easily, accumulated
mileage errors may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
Slopes
When parking in sloped garages, when

traveling on banked roads, or in other
cases where the vehicle turns when tilted,
an error in the turning angle will occur, and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the
road.
If after traveling about 10km

(6miles) the correct location
has not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
Road not displayed on the map screen

When driving on new roads or other roads
not displayed on the map screen, map
matching does not function correctly and
matches the location to a nearby road.
When the vehicle returns to a road which is
on the map, the vehicle mark may deviate
from the correct road.
AV
SEL699V
Map data
Different road pattern

(Changed due to repair)
If the road pattern stored in the map data

and the actual road pattern are different,
map matching does not function correctly
and matches the location to a nearby road.
The vehicle mark may deviate from the
correct road.
ELK0201D
Use of tire chains

Vehicle
When tire chains are used, the mileage is

not correctly detected, and the vehicle
mark may deviate from the correct road.
AV-103
http://vnx.su
Drive the vehicle for a while. If

the distance is still deviated,
adjust it by using the distance
adjustment function. (If the tire
chain is removed, recover the
original value.)
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Cause (condition)
Driving condition
Just after the engine is started
Precautions
for driving
Continuous driving without stopping
Abusive driving
If the vehicle is driven off just after the

engine is started when the gyroscope
(angular speed sensor) correction is not
completed, the vehicle can lose its direction and may have deviated from the correct location.
Wait for a short while before

driving after starting the engine.
When driving long distances without stopping, direction errors may accumulate, and
the vehicle mark may deviate from the correct road.
Stop and adjust the orientation.
Spinning the wheels or engaging in other

kinds of abusive driving may result in the
system being unable perform correct
detection, and may cause the vehicle mark
to deviate from the correct road.
If after traveling about 10 km (6

miles) the correct location has
not been restored, perform
location correction and, if necessary, direction correction.
If the accuracy of location settings is poor,

accuracy may be reduced when the correct
road cannot be found, particularly in places
where there are many roads.
Enter in the road displayed on

the screen with an accuracy of
approx. 1mm.
Caution: Whenever possible,
use detailed map for the correction.
If the accuracy of location settings during

correction is poor, accuracy may be
reduced afterwards.
Perform direction correction.
Position correction accuracy
How to
correct
location
SEL701V
Direction when location is corrected
SEL702V
VEHICLE MARK SHOWS A POSITION WHICH IS COMPLETELY WRONG

In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear on completely different position in the map depending on
the GPS satellite signal receiving conditions. In this case, perform location correction and direction correction.
When location correction has not been done
If the receiving conditions of the GPS satellite signal is poor, if the vehicle mark becomes out of place, it
may move to a completely different location and not come back if location correction is not done. The
position will be corrected if the GPS signal can be received.
When the vehicle has traveled by ferry, or when the vehicle has been being towed
Because calculation of the current location cannot be done when traveling with the ignition off, for example when traveling by ferry or when being towed, the location before travel is displayed. If the precise location can be detected with GPS, the location will be corrected.
VEHICLE MARK JUMPS

In the following cases, the vehicle mark may appear to jump as a result of automatic correction of the current
location.
When map matching has been done
If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when map matching is done, the vehicle mark
may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be corrected to the wrong road or to a location which is
not on a road.
When GPS location correction has been done
If the current location and the vehicle mark are different when the location is corrected using GPS measurements, the vehicle mark may seem to jump. At this time, the location may be corrected to a location
which is not on a road.
AV-104
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
VEHICLE MARK IS IN A RIVER OR SEA
The navigation system moves the vehicle mark with no distinction between land and rivers or sea. If the vehicle mark is somehow out of place, it may appear that the vehicle is driving in a river or the sea.
VEHICLE MARK AUTOMATICALLY ROTATES

The system wrongly memorizes the rotating status as stopping when the ignition switch is turned ON with the
turntable rotating. That causes the vehicle mark to rotate when the vehicle is stopped.
WHEN DRIVING ON SAME ROAD, SOMETIMES VEHICLE MARK IS IN RIGHT PLACE AND
SOMETIMES IT IS WRONG PLACE
The conditions of the GPS antenna (GPS data) and gyroscope (angular speed sensor) change gradually.
Depending on the road traveled and the operation of the steering wheel, the location detection results will be
different. Therefore, even on a road on which the location has never been wrong, conditions may cause the
vehicle mark to deviate.
LOCATION CORRECTION BY MAP-MATCHING IS SLOW
The map matching function needs to refer to the data of the surrounding area. It is necessary to drive
some distance for the function to work.
Because map matching operates on this principle, when there are many roads running in similar directions in the surrounding area, no matching determination may be made. The location may not be corrected until some special feature is found.
ALTHOUGH GPS RECEIVING DISPLAY IS GREEN, VEHICLE MARK DOES NOT RETURN TO
CORRECT LOCATION
The GPS accuracy has an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft). In some cases the vehicle mark may not be
on the correct street, even when GPS location-correction is done.
The navigation system compares the results of GPS location detection with the results from map-matching location detection. The one which is determined to have higher accuracy is used.
GPS location correction may not be performed when the vehicle is stopped.
NAME OF CURRENT PLACE IS NOT DISPLAYED

The current place name may not be displayed if there are no place names displayed on the map screen.
CONTENTS OF DISPLAY DIFFER FOR BIRDVIEW AND THE (FLAT) MAP SCREEN
Difference of the BIRDVIEW Screen From the Flat Map Screen Are As Follows
The current place name displays names which are primarily in the direction of vehicle travel.
The amount of time before the vehicle travel or turn angle is updated on the screen is longer than for the
(flat) map display.
The conditions for display of place names, roads, and other data are different for nearby areas and for
more distant areas.
Some thinning of the character data is done to prevent the display becoming to complex. In some cases
and in some locations, the display contents may differ.
The same place name, street name, etc. may be displayed multiple times.
AV-105
http://vnx.su
AV
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Program Loading
EKS00F3O
NOTE:
Program loading is operated when the version of soft is upgraded to the latest one, or when language is
switched.
SKIA9552E
AV-106
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit
EKS00F3P
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove upper grove box. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove screws (4) and remove NAVI control unit.
B
SKIA9174E
3.
Remove screws (4) and remove bracket.

F
H
SKIA9175E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna
EKS00F3Q
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .

Remove screws (2) and remove GPS antenna.
AV
M
PKIB9384E
INSTALLATION
AV-107
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna Feeder
EKS00F3R
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove combination meter. Refer to IP-10, "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY" .

Remove NAVI control unit. Refer to AV-107, "Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit" .
Remove front passenger air bag module. Refer to SRS-35,
PKIB9385E
4.
Remove clips (2) and remove GPS antenna feeder.
PKIB9386E
INSTALLATION
AV-108
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of NAVI Switch
EKS00F3S
REMOVAL
1.
2.

Remove screws (2) and remove NAVI switch.
B
SKIA9177E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Display
EKS00F3T
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation"

.
Remove screws (4) and remove display.
Remove screws (4), and remove bracket.
I
PKIB8908E
INSTALLATION
AV
AV-109
http://vnx.su
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Removal and Installation of Transfer Unit
EKS00F3U
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove combination meter. Refer to DI-31, "Removal and Installation for Combination Meter" .
Remove screws (2), and remove transfer unit.
PKIB8909E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of TMC Tuner
EKS00LYN
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove display. Refer to AV-109, "Removal and Installation of Display" .

Remove screws (4), and remove TMC tuner.
PKIB8910E
INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation of Voice Change Relay
EKS00F3V
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument lower driver panel. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation" .
Remove screw (1) and remove voice change relay.
SKIA9181E
INSTALLATION
AV-110
http://vnx.su
TELEPHONE (PRE WIRE)

Wiring Diagram PHONE
PFP:28342
A
EKS00F2R
AV
TKWB0102E
AV-111
http://vnx.su
AV-112
http://vnx.su
AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
ACS
AUTO CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)..... 2
Description ............................................................... 2
ACS
ACS-1
http://vnx.su
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Description
PFP:18930
EKS00M7I
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-527, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" (QR engine models with EURO-OBD), EC-965, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)"
(QR engine models without EURO-OBD), EC-1327, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (YD
engine models with EURO-OBD), EC-1673, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" (YD engine
models without EURO-OBD).
ACS-2
http://vnx.su
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS
K ELECTRICAL
SECTION
PG
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS
CONTENTS
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING ...................................... 2
Schematic ................................................................ 2
Wiring Diagram POWER ................................. 3
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW.
IN ANY POSITION ................................................ 3
ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION
SW. IN ACC OR ON ......................................... 7
IGNITION POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW.
IN ON AND/OR START .................................... 8
Fuse ....................................................................... 12
Fusible Link ............................................................ 12
Circuit Breaker ....................................................... 12
GROUND .................................................................. 13
Ground Distribution ................................................ 13
MAIN HARNESS/LHD MODELS ........................ 13
MAIN HARNESS/RHD MODELS ........................ 16
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/LHD MODELS ....... 19
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/RHD MODELS ....... 21
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS ................................ 23
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/GASOLINE
ENGINE MODELS .............................................. 24
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/DIESEL
ENGINE MODELS .............................................. 25
BODY HARNESS/LHD MODELS ....................... 26
BODY HARNESS/RHD MODELS ....................... 27
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/LHD MODELS ............. 28
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/RHD MODELS ............ 29
ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 30
BACK DOOR SUB HARNESS/REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER HARNESS ..................................... 31
HARNESS ................................................................. 32
Harness Layout ...................................................... 32
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUTS ............... 32
OUTLINE/LHD MODELS .................................... 33
OUTLINE/RHD MODELS .................................... 34
MAIN HARNESS/LHD MODELS ........................ 35
MAIN HARNESS/RHD MODELS ........................ 37

ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/LHD MODELS ........ 39
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/RHD MODELS ....... 45
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS .......................... 50
BODY HARNESS/LHD MODELS ....................... 55
BODY HARNESS/RHD MODELS ....................... 56
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/LHD MODELS ............. 57
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/RHD MODELS ............. 58
ROOM LAMP HARNESS .................................... 59
FRONT DOOR HARNESS/LHD MODELS .......... 60
FRONT DOOR HARNESS/RHD MODELS ......... 61
REAR DOOR HARNESS .................................... 62
BACK DOOR HARNESS .................................... 63
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes) ...................... 64
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION ............................ 68
Electrical Units Location ......................................... 68
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 68
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/LHD MODELS... 69
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/RHD MODELS... 71
HARNESS CONNECTOR ......................................... 73
Description .............................................................. 73
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING
TYPE) .................................................................. 73
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING
TYPE) .................................................................. 74
ELECTRICAL UNITS ................................................ 75
Terminal Arrangement ............................................ 75
STANDARDIZED RELAY .......................................... 76
Description .............................................................. 76
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND
MIXED TYPE RELAYS ........................................ 76
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS ................. 76
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B) .................... 78
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX .............................. 79
PG-1
http://vnx.su
PG
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING

Schematic
PFP:00011
EKS00322
TKWB1152E
PG-2
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram POWER
EKS00323
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
PG
TKWA1634E
PG-3
http://vnx.su
TKWA1635E
PG-4
http://vnx.su

A
PG
TKWB1153E
PG-5
http://vnx.su
TKWB1154E
PG-6
http://vnx.su

ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW. IN ACC OR ON
A
PG
TKWB0327E
PG-7
http://vnx.su

IGNITION POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW. IN ON AND/OR START
TKWB1155E
PG-8
http://vnx.su

A
PG
TKWB1156E
PG-9
http://vnx.su
TKWB1514E
PG-10
http://vnx.su

A
PG
TKWB0331E
PG-11
http://vnx.su

Fuse
EKS00324
If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before

installing new fuse.
Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
Remove fuse for ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT) if vehicle is not
used for a long period of time.
CEL083
Fusible Link
EKS00325
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by

feeling with finger tip. If its condition is questionable, use circuit
tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit

(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted.
In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of malfunction.
Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:

Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl
or rubber parts.
Circuit Breaker
CKWA0098E
EKS00326
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The

temperature (and resistance) of the thermistor element varies with
current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the
electrical resistance will rise sharply to control the circuit current.
Reduced current flow will cause the element to cool. Resistance falls
accordingly and normal circuit current flow is allowed to resume.
SEL109W
PG-12
http://vnx.su
GROUND
GROUND
Ground Distribution
PFP:00011
A
EKS0032H
MAIN HARNESS/LHD MODELS

B
PG
CKIB0106E
PG-13
http://vnx.su
GROUND
CKIB0120E
PG-14
http://vnx.su
GROUND
A
PG
CKIA0363E
PG-15
http://vnx.su
GROUND
MAIN HARNESS/RHD MODELS
CKIB0107E
PG-16
http://vnx.su
GROUND
A
PG
CKIB0121E
PG-17
http://vnx.su
GROUND
CKIA0366E
PG-18
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/LHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIB0108E
PG-19
http://vnx.su
GROUND
CKIB0109E
PG-20
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS/RHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIB0110E
PG-21
http://vnx.su
GROUND
CKIB0111E
PG-22
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ENGINE ROOM HARNESS
A
PG
CKIA0369E
PG-23
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS
CKIA0370E
PG-24
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/DIESEL ENGINE MODELS
A
PG
CKIA0371E
PG-25
http://vnx.su
GROUND
BODY HARNESS/LHD MODELS
CKIB0001E
PG-26
http://vnx.su
GROUND
BODY HARNESS/RHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIA0372E
PG-27
http://vnx.su
GROUND
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/LHD MODELS
CKIB0112E
PG-28
http://vnx.su
GROUND
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/RHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIB0113E
PG-29
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
CKIA0375E
PG-30
http://vnx.su
GROUND
BACK DOOR SUB HARNESS/REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER HARNESS
A
PG
CKIA0376E
PG-31
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
HARNESS
Harness Layout
PFP:00011
EKS0032I
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUTS

The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate
connectors on the figures:
Main Harness
Engine Room Harness
SEL252V
To Use the Grid Reference

1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list.
2. Find the grid reference.
3. On the figure, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row.
4. Find the connector number in the crossing zone.
5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Main symbols of connector (in Harness Layout) are indicated in the below.
SKIA0404E
PG-32
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
OUTLINE/LHD MODELS
A
PG
TKIA0131E
PG-33
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
OUTLINE/RHD MODELS
TKIA0132E
PG-34
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIB0222E
PG-35
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0223E
PG-36
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIB0224E
PG-37
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0225E
PG-38
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Engine Compartment for Gasoline Engine Models
PG
TKIB0226E
PG-39
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0227E
PG-40
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Engine Compartment for Diesel Engine Models
A
PG
TKIB0228E
PG-41
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0229E
PG-42
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Passenger Compartment
A
PG
TKIB0230E
PG-43
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0231E
PG-44
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Engine compartment for Gasoline Engine Models
PG
TKIB0232E
PG-45
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0233E
PG-46
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Engine Compartment for Diesel Engine Models
A
PG
TKIB0234E
PG-47
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIB0235E
PG-48
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIB0236E
PG-49
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS
QR25 Engine Models with A/T
TKIA0147E
PG-50
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
QR25 Engine Models with M/T
A
PG
TKIA0148E
PG-51
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
QR20 Engine Models with A/T
TKIB0040E
PG-52
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
QR20 Engine Models with M/T
A
PG
TKIA0149E
PG-53
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Diesel Engine Models
TKIB0237E
PG-54
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BODY HARNESS/LHD MODELS
A
PG
TKIA0151E
PG-55
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BODY HARNESS/RHD MODELS
TKIA0152E
PG-56
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/LHD MODELS
A
PG
TKIB0238E
PG-57
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BODY NO. 2 HARNESS/RHD MODELS
TKIB0239E
PG-58
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
A
PG
TKIA0155E
PG-59
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
FRONT DOOR HARNESS/LHD MODELS
LH Side
TKIA0156E
RH Side
TKIA0157E
PG-60
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
FRONT DOOR HARNESS/RHD MODELS
LH Side
I
TKIA0159E
RH Side
PG
TKIA0158E
PG-61
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
REAR DOOR HARNESS
LH Side
TKIA0160E
RH Side
TKIA0161E
PG-62
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BACK DOOR HARNESS
A
PG
TKIB0244E
PG-63
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)
EKS0032J
Use the chart below to find out what each wiring diagram code stands for.
Refer to the wiring diagram code in the alphabetical index to find the location (page number) of each wiring
diagram.
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
1STSIG
AT
A/T 1st Signal
2NDSIG
AT
A/T 2nd Signal
3RDSIG
AT
A/T 3rd Signal
4THSIG
AT
A/T 4th Signal
4WD
TF
4WD Control system
A/C
ATC
Air Conditioner
ABS
BRC
Anti-Lock Brake System
APP1PW
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 1 Power Supply
APP2PW
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor 2 Power Supply
APPS1
EC
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
APPS2
EC
APPS3
EC
ASC/BS
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Brake Switch
ASC/SW
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Steering Switch
ASCBOF
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Brake Switch
ASCIND
EC
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) Indicator
AT/IND
DI
A/T Indicator Lamp
AUDIO
AV
Audio
BA/FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and TCM Power Supply
BACK/L
LT
Back-Up Lamp
BOOST
EC
Turbocharger Boost Sensor
BRK/SW
EC
Brake Switch
CAN
AT
CAN
EC
CAN
LAN
CAN System
CHARGE
SC
Charging System
CHIME
DI
Warning Chime
CIGAR
WW
Cigarette Lighter
CKPS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor
CLOCK
DI
Clock
CMPS
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor
COOL/F
EC
Cooling Fan Control
D/LOCK
BL
Power Door Lock
DEF
GW
Rear Window Defogger
DTRL
LT
Headlamp - With Daytime Light System
ECM/PW
EC
ECM Power Supply for Back-Up
ECMRLY
EC
ECM Relay
ECTS
EC
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
EGRVLV
EC
EGR Volume Control Valve
EGVC/V
EC
EGR Volume Control Valve
ENGSS
AT
Engine Speed Signal
PG-64
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
ESP
BRC
ESP/TCS/ABS Control System
ETC1
EC
Electric Throttle Control Function
ETC2
EC
Electric Throttle Control Motor Relay
ETC3
EC
Electric Throttle Control Motor
F/FOG
LT
Front Fog Lamp
F/PUMP
EC
Fuel Pump
FIAR
EC
Fuel Injector Adjustment Resistor
FRO2
EC
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor
FRO2/H
EC
Front Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
FRPS
EC
Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor
FTP
EC
Fuel Transport Pump
FTS
AT
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit
FTS
EC
Fuel Temperature Sensor
FUEL
EC
Fuel Injection System Function
GLORLY
EC
Glow Relay
GLOW
EC
Glow Control System
H/AIM
LT
Headlamp Aiming Control System
H/LAMP
LT
Headlamp
HEATER
MTC
Heater System
HLC
WW
Headlamp Cleaner
HO2S1
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1
HO2S1H
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 1 Heater
HO2S2
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2
HO2S2H
EC
Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
HORN
WW
Horn
HSEAT
SE
Heated Seat
IATS
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IATSEN
EC
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
IGNSYS
EC
Ignition System
ILL
LT
Illumination
INJ/PW
EC
Fuel Injector Power Supply Circuit
INJECT
EC
Injector
INT/L
LT
Map Lamp
IVC
EC
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
KS
EC
Knock Sensor
LOAD
EC
Electrical Load Signal
LPSV
AT
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
MAFS
EC
Mass Air Flow Sensor
MAIN
AT
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
MAIN
EC
Main Power Supply and Ground Circuit
METER
DI
Speedometer, Tachometer, Temp. and Fuel Gauges
MIL/DL
EC
MIL & Data Link Connector
MIRROR
GW
Door Mirror
MULTI
BL
Multi-Remote Control System
PG-65
http://vnx.su
PG
HARNESS
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
NATS
BL
Nissan Anti-Theft System
NAVI
AV
Navigation System
NONDTC
AT
Non-Detective Items
OVRCSV
AT
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve
PGC/V
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
PHASE
EC
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
PHONE
AV
Telephone (Pre-wire)
PNP/SW
AT
Park/Neutral Position Switch
PNP/SW
EC
PNPSW1
EC
POS
EC
Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKPS) (POS)
POWER
PG
Power Supply Routing
PRGVLV
EC
EVAP Canister Purge Volume Control Solenoid Valve
PRWIRE
BL
Theft Warning System (Pre-wire)
PS/SEN
EC
Power Steering Pressure Sensor
PST/SW
EC
Power Steering Oil Pressure Switch
R/FOG
LT
Rear Fog Lamp
ROOM/L
LT
Interior Room Lamp
RP/SEN
EC
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
RRO2
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor
RRO2/H
EC
Rear Heated Oxygen Sensor Heater
S/LOCK
BL
Power Door Lock - Super Lock
S/SIG
EC
Start Signal
S/WARN
SB
Seat Belt Warning System
SEAT
SE
Power Seat
SEN/PW
EC
Sensor Power Supply
SHIFT
AT
A/T Shift Lock System
SROOF
RF
Sunroof
SRS
SRS
Supplemental Restraint System
SSV/A
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve A
SSV/B
AT
Shift Solenoid Valve B
START
SC
Starting System
STEP/L
LT
Step Lamp
STOP/L
LT
Stop Lamp
TAIL/L
LT
Parking, License and Tail Lamps
TCC/V
EC
Turbocharger Boost Control Solenoid Valve
TCCSV
EC
Turbocharger Boost Control Solenoid Valve
TCV
AT
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
TPS
AT
Throttle Position Sensor
TPS1
EC
Throttle Position Sensor (Sensor 1)
TPS2
EC
Throttle Position Sensor (Sensor 2)
TPS3
EC
Throttle Position Sensor
TURN
LT
Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Lamp
VIAS
EC
Variable Induction Air Control System
PG-66
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Code
Section
Wiring Diagram Name
VSSA/T
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)
VSSMTR
AT
Vehicle Speed Sensor MTR
WARN
DI
Warning Lamps
WINDOW
GW
Power Window
WIP/R
WW
Rear Wiper and Washer
WIPER
WW
Front Wiper and Washer
PG
PG-67
http://vnx.su
ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION

Electrical Units Location
PFP:25230
EKS0032K
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CKIB0114E
PG-68
http://vnx.su

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/LHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIB0115E
PG-69
http://vnx.su
CKIB0116E
PG-70
http://vnx.su

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/RHD MODELS
A
PG
CKIB0117E
PG-71
http://vnx.su
CKIB0118E
PG-72
http://vnx.su
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
PFP:00011
A
EKS0032B
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)

The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to the figure below.
Refer to the next page for description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
E
PG
SEL769DA
PG-73
http://vnx.su
HARNESS CONNECTOR
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially those
related to OBD.
The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or disconnection.
The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the figure
below.
CAUTION:
Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
SEL769V
PG-74
http://vnx.su
ELECTRICAL UNITS
ELECTRICAL UNITS
Terminal Arrangement
PFP:00011
A
EKS0032D
PG
CKIA0382E
PG-75
http://vnx.su
STANDARDIZED RELAY
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
PFP:00011
EKS0032E
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS

Relays can mainly be divided into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
SEL881H
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS

1M 1 Make
2M
1T 1 Transfer
1M1B 1 Make 1 Break
2 Make
SEL882H
PG-76
http://vnx.su
STANDARDIZED RELAY
A
PG
SEL188W
PG-77
http://vnx.su
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)

FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
PFP:24350
EKS0032F
CKIA0383E
PG-78
http://vnx.su
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX

PFP:24381
A
EKS0032G
PG
CKIB0119E
PG-79
http://vnx.su
PG-80
http://vnx.su
SUNROOF
Wiring Diagram SROOF
EIS000MM
To ESM
TIWA0333E
RF-4
http://vnx.su

Schematic
PFP:00011
To ESM
EKS00322
TKWA1111E
PG-2
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram POWER
EKS00323
BATTERY POWER SUPPLY IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION
To ESM
C
PG
TKWA1112E
PG-3
http://vnx.su

A
PG
TKWA1113E
PG-5
http://vnx.su
GROUND
GROUND
Ground Distribution
PFP:00011
To ESM
A
EKS0032H

B
PG
CKIA0304E
PG-13
http://vnx.su
GROUND
A
To ESM
PG
CKIA0305E
PG-15
http://vnx.su
GROUND
To ESM
CKIA0300E
PG-18
http://vnx.su
GROUND
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
CKIA0301E
PG-27a
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
To ESM
PG
TKIA0056E
PG-32
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0044E
PG-33
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
To ESM
PG
TKIA0057E
PG-34
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0045E
PG-35
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Gasoline Engine Models
To ESM
PG
TKIA0046E
PG-36
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0047E
PG-37
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIA0048E
PG-38
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0049E
PG-39
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIA0050E
PG-40
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
Gasoline Engine Models
To ESM
TKIA0051E
PG-41
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIA0052E
PG-42
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0053E
PG-43
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
A
PG
TKIA0054E
PG-44
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
TKIA0058E
PG-45
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
BODY NO.2 HARNESS/LHD MODELS
To ESM
TKIA0059E
PG-53
http://vnx.su
HARNESS
ROOM LAMP HARNESS
To ESM
TKIA0055E
PG-55
http://vnx.su

Electrical Units Location
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
PFP:25230
To ESM
EKS0032K
CKIA0302E
PG-63
http://vnx.su

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/LHD MODELS
A
To ESM
PG
CKIA0306E
PG-64
http://vnx.su

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT/RHD MODELS
A
To ESM
PG
CKIA0307E
PG-66
http://vnx.su

PFP:24381
To ESM
EKS0032G
CKIA0303E
PG-75
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP
System Description
PFP:26010
To ESM
EKS003CD
DESCRIPTION
The headlamps are controlled by the lighting switch which is built into the combination switch.
to lighting switch terminal 8
to lighting switch terminal 5
to driving lamp relay terminal 3.
LOW BEAM OPERATION

When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in LOW (B) position, power is supplied
from lighting switch terminal 10
to terminal 3 of the headlamp LH, and
to terminal 3 of the headlamp RH.

Terminal 2 of each headlamp supplies ground through body grounds E24 and E50.
With power and ground supplied, the low beams will illuminate.

When the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position and placed in HIGH (A) position or PASS (C) position, power is supplied
to terminal 1 of the headlamp RH, and
to terminal 1 of the headlamp LH, and
to combination meter terminal 61 (LHD models) or 50 (RHD models) for the HIGH BEAM indicator.
Ground is supplied to terminal 60 (LHD models) or 49 (RHD models) of the combination meter through body
grounds M27 and M70.
Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each headlamp through body grounds E24 and E50.
With power and ground supplied, the high beams and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.

To turn the driving lamp on, push the driving lamp switch when the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position
and placed in HIGH (A) position or PASS (C) position, power is supplied
to terminal 1 of the headlamp LH
to terminal 1 of the driving lamp relay, and
to terminal 1 of the driving lamp switch
to terminal 5 of the driving lamp relay2
through terminal 2 of the driving lamp switch
from driving lamp relay terminal 5
to terminal 2 of the driving lamp LH and RH.

Ground is supplied
to terminal 2 of driving lamp relay, through terminal 7 of the driving lamp relay2.
to terminal 6 of the driving lamp relay2, through body grounds M27 and M70.
to terminal 3 of the driving lamp switch, through terminal 1 of the driving lamp relay2.
LT-4a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
to terminal 1 of the driving lamp LH, through body ground R8.
to terminal 1 and 3 of the driving lamp RH, through body ground R8.
to terminal 60 (LHD models) or 49 (RHD models) of the combination meter, through body grounds M27
and M70.
and M70.
to terminal 2 of each headlamp, through body grounds E24 and E50.

With power and ground supplied, the high beams, driving lamp and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
LT
LT-4b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Schematic
EKS00APE
TKWA1208E
LT-5a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Wiring Diagram H/LAMP
EKS003CE
LHD MODELS
LT
TKWA1096E
LT-5b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
TKWA1209E
LT-5c
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
A
LT
TKWA1097E
LT-5d
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
RHD MODELS
TKWA1210E
LT-5e
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
A
LT
TKWA1211E
LT-5f
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
TKWA1212E
LT-5g
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Trouble Diagnoses
EKS003CF
A
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
1. Check bulb.
Headlamp LH do not operate.
1. Bulb
3. Check 15A fuse (No. 40, located in fuse

and fusible link box). Verify battery positive
voltage is present at terminal 8 of lighting
switch.
3. 15A fuse
4. Lighting switch

1. Check bulb.
Headlamp RH do not operate.
1. Bulb

voltage is present at terminal 5 of lighting
switch.
3. 15A fuse
4. Lighting switch

1. Check bulbs.
1. Bulb
High beam LH do not operate, but low
beam LH operates.

3. Lighting switch
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and headlamp LH terminal 1 for an
open circuit.

1. Check bulb.
1. Bulb
Low beam LH does not operate, but high
beam LH operates.
2. Open in low beam LH circuit

3. Lighting switch
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 10 and headlamp LH terminal 3 for
an open circuit.
1. Check bulbs.
1. Bulb
High beam RH do not operate, but low
beam RH operates.

3. Lighting switch
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 6 and headlamp RH terminal 1 for an
open circuit.

1. Check bulb.
1. Bulb
Low beam RH does not operate, but high
beam RH operates.
2. Open in low beam RH circuit

3. Lighting switch
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 7 and headlamp RH terminal 3 for an
open circuit.
LT
LT-6a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Symptom
Possible cause
Repair order
High beam indicator does not work.
1. Bulb
3. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and combination meter terminal
61(LHD models) or 50(RHD models) for an
open circuit.

voltage is present at terminal 3 of driving
lamp relay.
2. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and driving lamp switch terminal 1
for an open circuit.
3. Check driving lamp switch.
4. Check driving lamp relay2.
1. 15A fuse
10.Ground R8
5. Check the wire between driving switch terminal 3 and driving lamp relay 2 terminal
1 for an open circuit.
Check the wire between driving switch terminal 2 and driving lamp relay 2 terminal
Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and driving lamp relay 2 terminal
Check the wire between driving lamp relay
terminal 2 and driving lamp relay2 terminal 7 for an open circuit.
11.Bulb
2. Open in driving lamp swich

3. Driving lamp switch circuit
4. Driving lamp relay2
5. Open in driving lamp relay 2 circuit
Driving lamp does not operate, but high
beam LH operates.

7. Driving lamp relay
8. Open in driving lamp relay circuit
9. Open driving lamp circuit
7. Check driving lamp relay.

8. Check the wire between lighting switch terminal 9 and driving lamp relay terminal 1
for an open circuit.
9. Check the wire between driving lamp relay
terminal 5 and driving lamp terminal 2 for
an open circuit.
10.Check ground R8.
11.Check bulbs.
Aiming Adjustment for Headlamp
EKS003CG
When performing headlamp aiming adjustment, use an aiming machine, aiming wall screen or headlamp
tester. Aimers should be in good repair, calibrated and operated in accordance with respective operation manuals.
If any aimer is not available, aiming adjustment can be done as follows:
Keep all tires inflated to correct pressures.
Place vehicle and tester on one and same flat surface.
See that there is no-load in vehicle (coolant, engine oil filled up to correct level and full fuel tank) other
than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position).
CAUTION:
LOW BEAM
1.
Turn headlamp low beam on.
LT-6b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
LHD models
A
PKIA0459E
RHD models
E
G
SKIA0047E
2.
H
Use adjusting screws to perform aiming adjustment.
First tighten the adjusting screw all the way and then make adjustment by loosening the screw.
If the vehicle front body has been repaired and/or the headlamp assembly has been replaced, check aimI
ing. Use the aiming chart shown in the figure.
Adjust headlamps so that main axis of light is parallel to center line of body and is aligned with point P shown in illustraJ
tion.
Figure to the right shows headlamp aiming pattern for driving
on right side of road; for driving on left side of road, aiming
LT
pattern is reversed.
Dotted lines to point P in illustration show center of headlamp.
L
"H"
: Horizontal center line of headlamps
"WL "
: Distance between each headlamp center
"L"
: 25,000mm (984.25 in)
M
"C"
: 315mm (12.40 in) 315mm(12.40in)+60mm
(2.36 in)
Basic illuminating area for adjustment should be within the

range shown at right. Adjust headlamps accordingly.
CAUTION:
Be sure aiming switch is set to 0 when preforming aiming
adjustment.
PKIA3537E
LT-7a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Aiming Adjustment for Driving Lamp
EKS00AP6
Turn the aiming adjusting screw to adjust.

For positions of the adjustment screws and direction to turn,
refer to the figures.
PKIA3394E

3. Set that there is no-load in vehicle other than the driver (or equivalent weight placed in driver's position),
coolant, engine oil filled up to correct level, full fuel tank and spare tire, jack, and tools.
LT-7b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)
A
I
PKIA3395E
ADJUSTING
1.
2.
3.
J
Set the distance between the screen and the center of the driving lamp lens as shown in the figure.
Turn head lamp switch high and driving lamp switch ON so that front driving lamps turn ON.
LT
When performing this adjustment, cover the headlamps and the opposite driving lamp, if necessary.
Vertical deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand at 21.8 (0 - +11.0)cm below
driving lamp hight (h).
L
Horizontal deflection of maximum illuminance point to be adjusted to stand within 0 12.5cm against
line (V) on screen where a line passing through driving lamp center, parallel to vehicle center line,
croses screen.
M
CAUTION:
LT-7c
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
Bulb Replacement for Headlamp and Clearance lamp
EKS003CH
HEAD LAMP
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect connector of headlamp.

Remove rubber cap.
Unlock retaining spring, then remove bulb.
Headlamp (High/Low)
: 12V
60/55 W(H4)
SKIA0073E
CLEARANCE LAMP
1.
2.
Turn the RH bulbsocket clockwise and unlock it.

Turn the LH bulbsocket counterclockwise and unlock it.
Clearance lamp
: 12V
5W
CAUTION:
Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily matters away from it.
Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
When replacing bulb, prepare new bulb first of all. Do not leave bulb out of driving lamp housing
When bulb is installed, be sure to lock rubber cap to ensure watertightness.
Bulb Replacement for Driving Lamp

1.
2.
3.
Remove the driving lamp. Refer to LT-8b, "Removal and Installation for Driving Lamp" in HEADLAMP.
Driving lamp
4.
EKS00AP9
: 12 V - 65 W (H1R1 halogen)

CAUTION:
Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep
grease and other oily matters away from it. Do not touch
PKIA3396E
bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off.
Burning may result.
When replacing bulb, prepare new bulb first of all. Do not leave bulb out of driving lamp housing
Removal and Installation for Headlamp
EKS003CI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the front turn signal lamps. Refer toLT-37, "Removal

and Installation for Front Turn Signal Lamp"
Remove the front grille. Refer to EI-11, "FRONT GRILLE" in
"EXTERIOR & INTERIOR (EI)" section.
Remove the headlamp mounting bolts.
Pull the headlamp toward the front of the vehicle.
SKIA0050E
LT-8a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal, taking care of the following points.
Tightening torque
: 4.5 - 6.4 N-m (0.45 - 0.65 kg-m, 39 - 56 in-lb)
Removal and Installation for Driving Lamp
EKS00APA
J
PKIA3401E
1.
Cap (rear)
2.
3.
Nut
4.
Cap (front)
5.
6.
Grommet
7.
Roof rail
LT
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

pin from the roof panel.
PKIA3400E
INSTALLATION
Install driving lamp in the reverse order of removal, observing the tightening torque shown below.
Tightening torque
: 5.1 - 6.3 Nm (0.52 - 0.64 kg-m, 46 - 55 in-lb)
LT-8b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP
CAUTION:
Make sure the pawl shown in figure be connected correctly.
PKIA3398E
PKIA3399E
Removal and Installation for Driving Lamp Switch

1.
2.
EKS00APD

"Removal and Installation" in INSTRUMENT PANEL (IP) section.
Press the driving lamp switch fixing pawls and remove it from
the Instrument lower driver panel.
PKIA3525E
LT-8c
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM System Description
DESCRIPTION
PFP:26010
To ESM
A
EKS003BB
The headlamp system on vehicles for North Europe contains a daytime light control unit. The unit activates the
Low beam headlamps
Parking, license, tail and illumination lamps

to daytime light control unit terminal 1 and

Power is also supplied at all times

Power is also supplied at all times


HEADLAMP OPERATION (DAYTIME LIGHT CANCEL OPERATION)
J
When the lighting switch is turned to the 1st or 2nd position, power is supplied
through lighting switch terminal 12,

LT

Then daytime light will be canceled. And the lighting system operation will be the same as no daytime light
system.
L
DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION
to terminal 3 of headlamp LH,
to terminal 3 of headlamp RH and
to tail lamp and illumination.

Ground is supplied to terminal 2 of each headlamp through body grounds E24 and E50.

To turn the driving lamp on, push the driving lamp switch when the lighting switch is turned to the 2ND position
and placed in HIGH (A) position or PASS (C) position, power is supplied
to terminal 1 of the headlamp LH
to terminal 1 of the driving lamp relay, and
LT-9a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM to terminal 1 of the driving lamp switch

through terminal 2 of the driving lamp switch
from driving lamp relay terminal 5
to terminal 2 of the driving lamp LH and RH.

Ground is supplied
to terminal 2 of driving lamp relay, through terminal 7 of the driving lamp relay2.
to terminal 3 of the driving lamp switch, through terminal 1 of the driving lamp relay2.
to terminal 1 of the driving lamp LH, through body ground R8.
to terminal 1 and 3 of the driving lamp RH, through body ground R8.
and M70.
and M70.
to terminal 2 of each headlamp, through body grounds E24 and E50.

With power and ground supplied, the high beams, driving lamp and the HIGH BEAM indicator illuminate.
LT-9b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Schematic
EKS003BC
LT
TKWA1098E
LT-10
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM Wiring Diagram -DTRL-
EKS003BD
TKWA1099E
LT-11
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM A
LT
TKWA0062E
LT-12
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
TKWA1100E
LT-13a
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM A
LT
TKWA1213E
LT-13b
http://vnx.su
HEADLAMP - DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM -
TKWA1101E
LT-13c
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram TURN
EKS003BY
TKWA1102E
LT-19
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram TAIL/L
PFP:26550
A
EKS003C0
To ESM
B
LT
TKWA1103E
LT-30
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
Schematic
EKS003BL
To ESM
LT
TKWA1203E
LT-46
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram -ILL-
EKS003BM
LHD MODELS
TKWA1204E
LT-47
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
TKWA1205E
LT-49
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
RHD MODELS
TKWA1206E
LT-51
http://vnx.su
ILLUMINATION
TKWA1207E
LT-53
http://vnx.su
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP

Wiring Diagram -ROOM/L-
EKS003BR
To ESM
TKWA1104E
LT-57
http://vnx.su
SPOT LAMPS
SPOT LAMPS
Wiring Diagram -INT/L-
PFP:26470
To ESM
EKS003C8
TKWA1105E
LT-65
http://vnx.su
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
BULB SPECIFICATIONS
Headlamp
PFP:26297
To ESM
Item
EKS003GS
Wattage (W)
Low/High
55 /60(H4)
Driving lamp
65(H1R1)
Exterior Lamp
EKS003GT
Item
Front combination lamp
Wattage (W)
Clearance lamp
21(amber)
Fog lamp
Rear combination lamp
Front fog lamp
55(H3)
Rear fog lamp
21
Stop/Tail lamp
21/5
Turn signal lamp
21
Back-up lamp
21
License plate lamp
High-mounted stop lamp
Interior Lamp/Illumination
EKS003GU
Item
Wattage (W)
Interior room lamp

Spot lamp
10
Without sunroof
With sunroof
10
Luggage room lamp
10
LT-67
http://vnx.su
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

Wiring Diagram WINDOW (RHD models)
EIS00462
To ESM
TIWA0359E
GW-34
http://vnx.su
ROOF RAIL
ROOF RAIL
PFP:73820
A
EIS000N6
To ESM
C
EI
PIIA6946E
1.
Roof rail
2.
Rear spoiler
3.
Roof rail rear cap
4.
Rear spoiler bracket
5.
Roof rail center bracket (rear)
6.
Roof rail center bracket (front)
7.
Roof rail bracket (rear)
8.
Roof rail bracket (front)
9.
Roof rail front cap
10. Side rail
11. Driving lamp cap (rear)
13. Driving lamp cap (front)
14. Driving lamp bracket
12. Driving lamp
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove headlining. Refer to EI-29, "Removal and Installation" .

Disconnect driving lamp harness connector.
Remove driving lamp bracket nuts and driving lamp brackets.
SIIA0214E
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove driving lamps.

Remove roof rail caps (front and rear).
Remove roof rail fixing nuts.
Remove rear spoiler bolts, then remove rear spoiler.
EI-19
http://vnx.su
ROOF RAIL
8. Remove roof rail bracket mounting nuts (front and rear).
9. Remove rear spoiler bracket nuts.
10. Remove roof rails.
SIIA0215E
INSTALLATION
EI-20
http://vnx.su
DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)

[QR20(WITH EURO-OBD)]
Wiring Diagram
EBS00MXD
To ESM
TBWA0410E
EC-958
http://vnx.su

[YD]

Wiring Diagram
To ESM
PFP:27500
EBS0035Z
TBWA0411E
EC-1572
http://vnx.su
WARNING CHIME
Wiring Diagram CHIME
EKS002XJ
To ESM
B
DI
TKWA1106E
DI-59
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram D/LOCK
EIS004DE
To ESM
B
BL
TIWA0330E
BL-13
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram S/LOCK
EIS001R8
To ESM
TIWA0355E
BL-32
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram MULTI
EIS001RF
To ESM
BL
TIWA0331E
BL-57
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram THEFT /PRI-WIRE
LHD MODELS
PFP:25362
To ESM
EIS001RM
TIWA0356E
BL-76
http://vnx.su

Wiring Diagram NATS
EIS001RT
To ESM
GASOLINE ENGINE MODELS
BL
TIWA0357E
BL-83
http://vnx.su

DIESEL ENGINE MODELS
To ESM
TIWA0358E
BL-84
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
Wiring Diagram AUDIO
EKS002F4
LHD MODELS
To ESM
TKWA1107E
AV-6
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
TKWA1108E
AV-8
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
RHD MODELS
A
AV
TKWA1109E
AV-9
http://vnx.su
AUDIO
A
AV
TKWA1110E
AV-11
http://vnx.su
To ESM
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
TJWA0054E
ATC-42
http://vnx.su
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
16. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN AUTO AMP. AND DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH
Disconnect the auto amp. connector.

Terminals
Auto amp.
B
Dual-pressure switch
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
M52
4 (L/R)
E40
2 (R)
Continuity
C
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> GO TO 17.
NG
D
RJIA0545E
17. CHECK CIRCUIT CONTINUITY BETWEEN
DUAL-PRESSURE SWITCH AND ECM
Disconnect the ECM connector.

F
Terminals
Dual-pressure switch connector
ECM connector
Continuity
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
Connector
Terminal (Wire
color)
E40
1 (PU/W)
F34
D23 (PU/W)
G
Yes
OK or NG
OK
>> Check EC-1572, "AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL" in
ECM.
NG
A/C Relay
H
RJIA0546E
To ESM
ATC
Check continuity between terminal Nos. 3 and 5.

Conditions
Continuity
12V direct current supply between terminal Nos. 1

and 2
Yes
No current supply
No
If NG, replace relay.
RHA638H
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor (With Gasoline Engine)

The refrigerant pressure sensor is attached to the liquid tank (condenser).
RJIA0690E
ATC-84
http://vnx.su
MAINTENANCE
L MAINTENANCE
SECTION
MA
MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ........................................................... 3
DESCRIPTION ............................................................ 4
Pre-delivery Inspection Items ................................... 4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ....................................... 6
General Maintenance ............................................... 6
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................... 7
Periodic Maintenance ............................................... 7
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL
ENGINE) ............................................................... 7
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE
(QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE) ....... 8
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE) ................ 9
(YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE) .............................. 9
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING
CONDITIONS ...................................................... 10
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL
ENGINE) ............................................................. 12
(QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE) ..... 13
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE) .............. 14
(YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE) ............................ 14
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING
CONDITIONS ...................................................... 15
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 17
Fluids and Lubricants ............................................. 17
SAE Viscosity Number ........................................... 18
GASOLINE ENGINE ........................................... 18
DIESEL ENGINE ................................................. 18
Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio ................................ 19
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR20DEQR25DE) ........ 20
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 20
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 20
Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 20

DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT .......................... 20
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 21
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 22
Checking Cooling System ...................................... 22
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ........... 22
CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 22
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 22
CHECKING RADIATOR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS... 23
Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 24
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 24
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 24
Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 24
Changing Oil Filter .................................................. 25
REMOVAL ........................................................... 25
INSTALLATION ................................................... 25
Checking and Changing Spark Plugs ..................... 26
REMOVAL ........................................................... 26
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL (EXCEPT FOR
RUSSIA) .............................................................. 26
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL (FOR RUSSIA) ..................................................................... 27
INSTALLATION ................................................... 28
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines .................................. 28
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI) .................... 29
Checking Drive Belts .............................................. 29
Tension Adjustment ................................................ 29
A/C COMPRESSOR BELT .................................. 30
ALTERNATOR AND WATER PUMP BELT .......... 30
Changing Engine Coolant ....................................... 30
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT .......................... 30
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT ......................... 31
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM ......................... 32
Checking Cooling System ...................................... 32
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES ........... 32
CHECKING RADIATOR ...................................... 32
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP .............................. 33
CHECKING RADIATOR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS... 33
Checking Fuel Lines ............................................... 34
MA-1
http://vnx.su
MA
Changing Fuel Filter ............................................... 34

REMOVAL ........................................................... 34
INSTALLATION .................................................... 35
Changing Air Cleaner Filter .................................... 35
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE ..................................... 35
Changing Engine Oil ............................................... 35
Changing Oil Filter (TYPE A) .................................. 36
REMOVAL ........................................................... 36
INSTALLATION .................................................... 36
Changing Oil Filter (TYPE B) .................................. 37
REMOVAL ........................................................... 37
INSTALLATION .................................................... 38
Draining Water ........................................................ 38
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE ................... 39
Checking Exhaust System ...................................... 39
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks ................. 39
Checking Clutch System ........................................ 39
Checking M/T Oil .................................................... 39
Changing M/T Oil .................................................... 40
Checking A/T Fluid ................................................. 40
Changing A/T Fluid ................................................. 41
Checking Transfer Oil ............................................. 41
Changing Transfer Oil ............................................. 41
Checking Propeller Shaft ........................................ 42
Checking Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42
Changing Differential Gear Oil ................................ 42
Balancing Wheels ................................................... 43
Rotation .................................................................. 43
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks ...................43

Checking Brake Lines and Cables ..........................43
Changing Brake Fluid .............................................44
Checking Disc Brake ...............................................44
ROTOR ................................................................44
CALIPER ..............................................................44
PAD ......................................................................44
Checking Steering Gear and Linkage .....................45
STEERING GEAR ...............................................45
STEERING LINKAGE ..........................................45
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines ..............45
Axle and Suspension Parts .....................................45
Drive Shaft ..............................................................46
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches .........46
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors
and Adjusters ..........................................................46
Checking Body Corrosion .......................................47
HEMMED PANELS ..............................................47
PANEL JOINT ......................................................47
PANEL EDGE ......................................................47
PARTS CONTACT ...............................................47
PROTECTORS ....................................................47
ANTI-CORROSION MATERIALS ........................47
DRAIN HOLES .....................................................47
Standard and Limit ..................................................48
BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION ...................48
RADIATOR ...........................................................48
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY ..........................48
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) ........48
SPARK PLUG ......................................................48
MA-2
http://vnx.su
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
PFP:00002
A
ELS000B6
Tool number
Tool name
Description
KV10115801
Oil filter wrench
Removing and installing oil filter

(QR20DE and QR25DE engine models)
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
D
S-NT375
EG17650301
Radiator cap tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap

and radiator filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
ELS000K9
Tool name
Description
Spark plug wrench
Removing and installing spark plug

(QR20DE and QR25DE engine models)
S-NT047
Fuel filter wrench
J
Removing fuel filter
(YD22DDTi engine model)
MA
PBIC0519E
Radiator cap tester
Checking radiator and radiator cap
PBIC1982E
MA-3
http://vnx.su
DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Pre-delivery Inspection Items
PFP:00000
ELS000Y5
Shown below are Pre-delivery Inspection Items required for the new vehicle. It is recommended that
necessary items other than those listed here be added, paying due regard to the conditions in each
country.
Perform applicable items on each model. Consult text of this section for specifications.
Install vehicle protection kit
Fit all accessories ordered (if applicable) (e.g. towbar, audio, navigation, air conditioner, styling kit)
UNDER HOOD engine off
Check coolant level and cooling system for leaks
Charge battery and check terminals for condition
Check drive belts tension (diesel only)
Check fuel filter for water or dust (diesel only) and fuel system for leaks
Check engine oil level and for oil leaks
Check brake and clutch fluid levels and fluid lines for leaks
Check and top up washer reservoirs
Check power steering fluid level and fluid lines for leaks (if applicable)
Check air conditioning system for gas leaks (if applicable)
ON INSIDE AND OUTSIDE
Install transit fuse if removed for vehicle storage
Check instruments, gauges, lamps, horn and accessories for operation
Check wipers and washers for operation and adjustment
Check interior and door mirrors and sun visors for operation
Set radio code and set clock
Check parking brake adjustment
Check clutch pedal adjustment
Check steering lock operation
Check seat adjusters and seat belts for operation
Check all windows for operation and alignment
Check mouldings, trim and fittings for fit and alignment
Check weatherstrips for fit and adhesion
Check hood, trunk lid, door panels and fuel lid for fit and alignment
Check latches, keys, remote key, door locks and remote trunk lid and fuel lid release for operation
Check wheel nut torques
Check tyre pressure (incl. spare tyre)
Check tool kit and jack for operation
Check automatic transmission/transaxle starter inhibitor (if applicable)
Check sunroof for operation and alignment (if applicable)
UNDER BODY
Check manual transmission/transaxle, differential and transfer box for oil level and oil leaks
Tighten bolts and nuts steering linkage and gear box, axle/suspension parts, propeller and exhaust system
Check brake and clutch lines, and oil/fluid reservoirs for leaks
Remove front suspension spacer blocks (if applicable)
Check body mounting torque (if applicable)
MA-4
http://vnx.su
DESCRIPTION
ROAD TEST
A
Check clutch operation

Check foot brake operation
Check parking brake operation
Check steering operation, self-centering and steering wheel alignment

Check engine performance
Check for squeaks, rattles and noise from interior, suspension and brakes
Check heating, ventilation and air conditioning operation
Check radio, cassette and CD player operation
Check odometer and trip meter operation and cancelling
Check instruments for operation
Check automatic transmission/transaxle shift pattern and kickdown operation (if applicable)
Check cruise control and navigation system operation (if applicable)
ENGINE OPERATING AND HOT
Check idle speed

Check automatic transmission/transaxle oil level (if applicable)
FINAL INSPECTION
Remove vehicle protection kit
Fit interior mats and wheel covers
Check for interior and exterior metal and paint damage
Wash, clean interior and exterior

I
: Not applicable to this model
MA
MA-5
http://vnx.su
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General Maintenance
PFP:00000
ELS000AL
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform the
checks and inspections themselves or they can have their NISSAN dealers do them for a nominal charge.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Windshield wiper
blades
Doors and engine
hood
Tire rotation
Reference page
Check the pressure with a gauge periodically when at a service station, including the spare, and adjust to the specified pressure if necessary. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Check for cracks or wear if not functioning correctly.
Check that all doors, the engine hood, the trunk lid and back door operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure
that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check for
lubrication frequently.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 km (3,000 miles).
BL-12, BL-18
MA-43
INSIDE THE VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the
vehicle, etc.
Item
Reference page
Lamps
Warning lamps and

chimes
Steering wheel
Seat belts
Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and
other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp aim.
Make sure that all warning lamps and buzzers/chimes are operating properly.
Check that it has the specified play.

Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard
steering or strange noises.
Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in)
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and
retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
MA-46
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel.
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer
fluid
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Engine coolant level
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
MA-20 (QR20DE,
QR25DE)
MA-30 (YD22DDTi)
Engine oil level
Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the
engine.
MA-24 (QR20DE,
QR25DE)
MA-35 (YD22DDTi)
Brake and clutch fluid

levels
Make sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are between the MAX and
MIN lines on the reservoir.
MA-39, MA-43
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN
lines.
MA-6
http://vnx.su
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Periodic Maintenance
PFP:00026
A
ELS000AM
The following tables show the normal maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required.
Periodic maintenance beyond the last period shown on the tables requires similar maintenance.
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE)
(Annual Mileage <30,000 Km/year)

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
[ ] = At the specified mileage only.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Perform on a kilometer basis, but on an annual

basis when driving less than 15,000 km (9,000
miles) per year
km x
1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
Months
15
(9)
12
30
(18)
24
45
(27)
36
60
(36)
48
75
(45)
60
90
(54)
72
105
(63)
84
120
(72)
96
Reference
page
Intake and exhaust valve clearance
See
NOTE (1)
EM-64
Drive belt
See
NOTE (2)
MA-20
R
MA-24
MA-25
MA-20
MA-22
MA-24
MA-24
equivalent)
See
NOTE (3)
Cooling system
I
I
Fuel lines
R
I
I
Air cleaner filter

See
NOTE (4)
Fuel filter (In-tank type)
FL-4
Spark plugs (Conventional type)

See
NOTE (5)
Spark plugs (Platinum-tipped type)
Engine oil filter (Use NISSAN genuine part or
Engine anti-freeze coolant (Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent.)
Engine compartment and under vehicle
Engine oil (Use recommended oil.)
EVAP vapor lines (With carbon canister)
MA-26
[R]
[R]
[R]
[R]
MA-26
MA-28
NOTE:
MA
Maintenance items with

Conditions.
should be performed more frequently according to Maintenance Under Severe Driving
(1)Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
(2) Replace the drive belt if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.
(3) First replace at 90,000 Km (54,000 miles)/60 months, then every 60,000 km (36,000 miles)/48 months. Perform "I"
(Checking the mixture ratio and correcting the mixture ratio if necessary) at the middle of replacement interval.
(4) Fuel filter is maintenance-free. For service procedures, refer to FL section.
(5) For Russia only.
MA-7
http://vnx.su
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE)
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary,
R = Replace,
L = Lubricate.
Perform on a kilometer basis, but on an

annual basis when driving less than
15,000 km (9,000 miles) per year
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
Months
15
(9)
12
30
(18)
24
45
(27)
36
60
(36)
48
75
(45)
60
90
(54)
72
105
(63)
84
120
(72)
96
Reference
page
Underhood and under vehicle

Headlamp aiming
LT-35
Brake & clutch, systems and fluid (For

level & leaks)
MA-39,
MA-43
Brake fluid
MA-44
Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve
BR-25
Power steering fluid & lines (For level &

leaks)
MA-45
Manual transaxle gear oil (For leaks)
MA-39
MA-40
MA-41
MA-42,
MA-42
Automatic transaxle fluid (For level &

leaks)
Transfer gear oil (For level & leaks)
Differential gear oil (For level & leaks or
replace)
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, propeller shaft, front drive
MA-45,
MA-45,
MA-42,
MA-46,
MA-39
FSU-6,
MA-43
MA-44,
MA-44,
MA-44
BR-6,
PB-3,
CL-5
ATC-130
shafts & exhaust system

Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate &
balance wheels)
Brake pads, rotors & other brake components
Foot brake, parking brake & clutch (For
free play, stroke & operation)
Air conditioner filter

Body corrosion
See
NOTE (1)
MA-47
NOTE:
(1) Inspect once per year.

Conditions.
MA-8
http://vnx.su
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE)
A

R = Replace, D = Check filter and drain water
Perform on a kilometer basis, but on an annual basis

when driving less than 15,000 km (9,000 miles) per
year
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
Months
20
(12)
12
40
(24)
24
60
(36)
36
80
(48)
48
100
(60)
60
120
(72)
72
Reference page

See
NOTE (1)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance
EM-182
Drive belts
MA-29
Engine oil (recommended oil.)
See
NOTE (2)
MA-35
Engine oil filter (Use Eco filter or equivalent)
See
NOTE (3)
MA-36
Engine anti-freeze coolant (Use Genuine Nissan

Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent)
See
NOTE (4)
Cooling system
Fuel lines
MA-30
I
R
Air cleaner filter

D
Fuel filter
MA-32
MA-34
MA-35
MA-34
See
NOTE (5)
Fuel injector
EM-164
NOTE:

Conditions.
(1) If valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
(2) Never use CG-4 oil.
(3) Oil filter element assembly and O-ring seal are replacement parts.
(4) First replace at 100,000 Km (60,000 miles)/60 months, then every 60,000Km (36,000 miles)/36 months. After first
replacement, perform "I" (checking the mixture ratio and correcting the mixture ratio if necessary) at the middle of
replacement interval.
(5) If engine power decreases, black exhaust smoke is emitted or engine noise increases, perform this maintenance item. MA
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE)

miles) per year
L = Lubricate.
km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months
20
(12)
12
40
(24)
24
60
(36)
36
80
(48)
48
100
(60)
60
120
(72)
72
Reference
page

Headlamp aiming
LT-35
Brake & clutch, systems and fluid (For level &

leaks)
MA-43,
MA-39
Brake fluid
MA-44
Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections &

check valve
BR-25
Power steering fluid & lines (For level & leaks)
MA-45
MA-39
MA-41
MA-9
http://vnx.su

miles) per year
km x 1,000
(Miles x 1,000)
Months

replace)
20
(12)
12
40
(24)
24
60
(36)
36
80
(48)
48
100
(60)
60
120
(72)
72
Reference
page
MA-42
MA-45,
MA-45,
MA-42,
MA-46 ,
MA-39
FSU-6,
MA-43
MA-44,
MA-44 ,
MA-44
Foot brake, parking brake & clutch (For free

play, stroke & operation)
BR-6,
PB-3,
CL-5
ATC-130
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension

parts, propeller shaft, front drive shafts &
exhaust system
Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate & balance wheels)
Body corrosion
See
NOTE (1)
MA-47
NOTE:

Conditions.
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is
mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
Severe driving conditions
A Driving in dusty conditions
B Repeatedly driving short distances
C Towing a trailer or caravan
D Extensive idling
E Driving in extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either
extremely low or extremely high
F Driving in high humidity or mountainous areas
G Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials
H Driving on rough and/or muddy roads or in the desert
I Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas
J Frequent off road use or driving in water
K Sustained high speed driving
L For models without Euro-OBD system
Maintenance operation: Check = Check and correct or replace as necessary.
MA-10
http://vnx.su
Maintenance item
Driving condition
C D
C .
G H .
G H I
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles) or 24
months
MA-24
Diesel models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles) or 18
months
MA-35
Petrol models
Replace
Every 7,500 km (4,500

miles) or 6 months
MA-24,
MA-25
Diesel models
Replace
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles) or 6 months
MA-35,
MA-36
Check &
drain
water
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles) or 6 months
FL-17
Replace
Every 20,000 km
(12,000 miles) or 12
months
MA-34
Petrol models
Replace
Every 15,000 km (9,000

miles) or 12 months
MA-44
Diesel models
Replace
Every 20,000 km
(12,000 miles) or 12
months
MA-44
Petrol models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles) or 24
months
MA-42
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles) or 18
months
MA-42
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles) or 24
months
MA-41
Every 7,500 km (4,500

miles) or 6 months
MA-45,
MA-45 ,
MA-42 ,
MA-46 ,
MA-39
Engine oil &

engine oil filter
Diesel models
Brake fluid
Differential gear
oil
Automatic transaxle fluid
Reference
page
Replace
Air cleaner filter
Fuel filter
Maintenance interval
Petrol models
Diesel models
Maintenance
operation
Petrol models
Diesel models
Inspect
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles) or 6 months
MA-45,
MA-45 ,
MA-42 ,
MA-46 ,
MA-39
Brake pads,
rotors & other
brake components
Petrol models
Inspect
Every 7,500 km (4,500

miles) or 6 months
MA-44,
MA-44 ,
MA-44
Diesel models
Inspect
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles) or 6 months
MA-44,
MA-44 ,
MA-44
Petrol models
Replace
Every 15,000 km (9,000

miles) or 12 months
ATC-130
Diesel models
Replace
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles) or 6 months
ATC-130
MA-11
http://vnx.su
Petrol models
Air conditioner
filter
Steering gear &

linkage, axle &
suspension
parts, propeller
shaft, front drive
shafts & exhaust
system
Inspect
MA
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE)
(Annual Mileage >30,000 Km/year)
R = Replace,.
Perform at number of kilometers (miles) basis

only.
km x
1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
15
(9)
30
(18)
45
(27)
60
(36)
75
(45)
90
(54)
105
(63)
120
(72)
Reference
page

Intake and exhaust valve clearance
See
NOTE (1)
Drive belt
See
NOTE (2)

Engine oil filter (Use NISSAN genuine part or
equivalent)
Engine anti-freeze coolant (Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent.)
EM-64
I
MA-20
MA-24
MA-25
MA-20
MA-22
See
NOTE (3)
Cooling system
I
I
Fuel lines
MA-24
Air cleaner filter
MA-24
See
NOTE (4)
Fuel filter (In-tank type)

Spark plugs (Conventional type)
See
NOTE (5)
Spark-plugs (Platinum-tipped type)
FL-4
R
MA-26
MA-26
MA-28
EVAP vapor lines (With carbon canister)
NOTE:

Conditions.
(1)Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
(2) Replace the drive belt if found damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.
(3) First replace at 90,000 Km (54,000 miles), then every 60,000 km (36,000 miles). Perform "I" (Checking the mixture ratio
and correcting the mixture ratio if necessary) at the middle of replacement interval.
(4) Fuel filter is maintenance-free. For service procedures, refer to FL section.
(5) For Russia only.
MA-12
http://vnx.su
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (QR20DE AND QR25DE PETROL ENGINE)
A

L = Lubricate.
Perform at number of kilometers (miles)

basis only.
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
15
(9)
30
(18)
45
(27)
60
(36)
75
(45)
90
(54)
105
(63)
120
(72)
Reference
page

Headlamp aiming
LT-35
Brake & clutch, systems and fluid (For

level & leaks)
MA-39,
MA-43
Brake fluid
MA-44
Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections & check valve
BR-25
Power steering fluid & lines (For level &

leaks)
MA-45
MA-39
MA-40
MA-41
MA-42,
MA-42
Automatic transaxle fluid (For level &

leaks)
replace)
MA-45,
MA-45,
MA-42,
MA-46,
MA-39
FSU-6,
MA-43
MA-44,
MA-44,
MA-44
Foot brake, parking brake & clutch (For

free play, stroke & operation)
BR-6,
PB-3
CL-5
MA
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts, propeller shaft, front drive
shafts & exhaust system
Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate &
balance wheels)
Body corrosion
See
NOTE (1)
ATC-130
MA-47
NOTE:

Conditions.
MA-13
http://vnx.su
ENGINE AND EMISSION CONTROL MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE)
R = Replace,
D = Check filter and drain water
Perform at number of kilometers (miles) basis only.
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
20
(12)
40
(24)
60
(36)
80
(48)
100
(60)
120
(72)
Reference page

See
NOTE (1)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance
EM-182
Drive belts
MA-29
See
NOTE (2)
MA-35
Engine oil filter (Use Eco filter or equivalent)
See
NOTE (3)
MA-36
Engine anti-freeze coolant (Use Genuine NISSAN

Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent)
See
NOTE (4)
Cooling system
MA-30
MA-32
Fuel lines
MA-34
Air cleaner filter
MA-35
MA-34
Fuel filter
See
NOTE (5)
Fuel injector
EM-164
NOTE:

Conditions.
(1) If valve noise increases, check valve clearance.
(2) Never use CG-4 oil.
(3) Oil filter element assembly and O-ring seal are replacement parts.
(4) First replace at 100,000 Km (60,000 miles), then every 60,000Km (36,000 miles). After first replacement, perform "I"
(checking the mixture ratio and correcting the mixture ratio if necessary) at the middle of replacement interval.
(5) If engine power decreases, black exhaust smoke is emitted or engine noise increases, perform this maintenance item.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI DIESEL ENGINE)

only.
R = Replace,
L = Lubricate.
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
20
(12)
40
(24)
60
(36)
80
(48)
100
(60)
120
(72)
Reference
page

Headlamp aiming
Brake & clutch, systems and fluid (For level &
leaks)
I
I
I
I
LT-35
MA-43,
MA-39
Brake fluid
MA-44
Brake booster vacuum hoses, connections &

check valve
BR-25
MA-45
MA-39
MA-41
Power steering fluid & lines (For level & leaks)

I
I
MA-14
http://vnx.su
I
I

only.
km x 1,000
(Miles x
1,000)
Reference
page
20
(12)
40
(24)
60
(36)
80
(48)
100
(60)
120
(72)
MA-42
MA-45,
MA-45,
MA-42,
MA-46,
MA-39
FSU-6,
MA-43

replace)
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension
parts, propeller shaft, front drive shafts &
exhaust system
Wheel alignment (If necessary, rotate & balance wheels)
MA-44,
MA-44,
MA-44
Foot brake, parking brake & clutch (For free

play, stroke & operation)
BR-6,
PB-3
CL-5
ATC-130
See
NOTE (1)
Body corrosion
MA-47
NOTE:

Conditions.
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is
mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
K
Severe driving conditions
A Driving in dusty conditions
B Repeatedly driving short distances
C Towing a trailer or caravan
MA
D Extensive idling
E Driving in extremely adverse weather conditions or in areas where ambient temperatures are either
extremely low or extremely high
M
F Driving in high humidity or mountainous areas
G Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials
H Driving on rough and/or muddy roads or in the desert
I Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas
J Frequent off road use or driving in water
K Sustained high speed driving
L For models without Euro-OBD system
Maintenance operation: Check = Check and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item
Driving condition
Maintenance
operation
Reference
page
Petrol models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-24
Diesel models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-35
Air cleaner filter
MA-15
http://vnx.su
C D
C .
G H .
G H I
Reference
page
Petrol models
Replace
Every 7,500 km (4,500

miles)
MA-24,
MA-25
Diesel models
Replace
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles)
MA-35,
MA-36
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles)
FL-17
Diesel models
Check &
drain
water
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-34
Petrol models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-44
Diesel models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-44
Petrol models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-42
Diesel models
Replace
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-42
Petrol models
Replace
Every 60,000 km
(36,000 miles)
MA-41
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-45,
MA-45 ,
MA-42 ,
MA-46 ,
MA-39
Maintenance item
Driving condition
Maintenance
operation
Engine oil &

engine oil filter
Fuel filter
Brake fluid
Differential gear
oil
Steering gear &

linkage, axle &
suspension
parts, propeller
shaft, front drive
shafts & exhaust
system
Petrol models
Inspect
Diesel models
Inspect
Every 30,000 km
(18,000 miles)
MA-45,
MA-45 ,
MA-42 ,
MA-46 ,
MA-39
Brake pads,
rotors & other
brake components
Petrol models
Inspect
Every 15,000 km (9,000

miles)
MA-44,
MA-44 ,
MA-44
Diesel models
Inspect
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles)
MA-44,
MA-44 ,
MA-44
Petrol models
Replace
Every 15,000 km (9,000

miles)
ATC-130
Diesel models
Replace
Every 10,000 km (6,000

miles)
ATC-130
Air conditioner
filter
MA-16
http://vnx.su
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Fluids and Lubricants
PFP:00000
A
ELS000C8
Capacity (Approximate)
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Liter
Imp measure
QR20DE,
QR25DE
4.1
3-5/8 qt
YD22DDTi
5.2
4-5/8 qt
QR20DE,
QR25DE
3.7
3-1/4 qt
YD22DDTi
4.9
4-3/8 qt
QR20DE,
QR25DE
4.7
4-1/8 qt
YD22DDTi
6.3
5-1/2 qt
QR20DE,
QR25DE
7.1
6-1/4 qt
YD22DDTi
9.5
8-3/8 qt
QR20DE,
QR25DE
0.7
5/8 qt
YD22DDTi
0.7
5/8 qt
2.2
3-7/8 pt
Transfer gear oil
0.31
1/2 pt
API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*1
Differential gear oil
0.55
1 pt
API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*1
8.5
7-1/2 qt
Genuine NISSAN ATF or equivalent*4
Power steering fluid
DEXRONTM III type ATF or equivalent
Brake and clutch fluid
Multi-purpose grease
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
With oil filter

change
Engine oil
Drain and refill
Without oil filter
change
Dry engine (engine overhaul)
Cooling system (with reservoir)
Reservoir tank
Gasoline engine
API SG, SH, SJ or SL *1
ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II or GF-III *1
ACEA A2
Diesel engine
API CF-4*1, *2
ACEA B1
Manual transaxle gear oil
Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant (L250)

or equivalent in its quality*3
Genuine NISSAN gear oil or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85
DOT 3 or DOT 4 (US FMVSS No. 116)*5
*1: For further details, see SAE Viscosity Number.

*2: Never use API CG-4.
*3: Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid possible aluminum corrosion within the
engine cooling system caused by the use of non-genuine engine coolant.
Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using non-genuine engine coolant may not be
covered by the warranty even if such incidents occurred during the warranty period.
MA
*4: Contact a NISSAN dealership for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended brand(s) of DEXRONTM III/
MERCONTM Automatic Transmission Fluid.
*5: Never mix different types of fluids (DOT 3 and DOT 4).
MA-17
http://vnx.su

SAE Viscosity Number
ELS000C9
GASOLINE ENGINE
5W-30 is preferable.
If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, from the chart, that
is suitable for the outside temperature range.
CAUTION:
5W-20 should only be used for QR engine models.
5W-20 is not suitable for sustained high speed driving.
SLIA0021E
DIESEL ENGINE
5W-30 is preferable.
If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity, from the chart, that
is suitable for the outside temperature range.
SMA204D
MA-18
http://vnx.su

Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio
ELS000AN
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality,

year-round and extended life engine coolant. The high quality engine
coolant contains the specific solutions effective for the anti-corrosion
and the anti-freeze function. Therefore, additional cooling system
additives are not necessary.
CAUTION:
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant (L250) or equivalent.
Because L250 is premixed type coolant.
The use of other types of engine coolant may damage your
SMA089D
cooling system.
When checking the engine coolant mixture ratio by the coolant

hydrometer, use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading (specific gravity) according to coolant
temperature.
Mixed coolant specific gravity

Unit: specific gravity
Coolant temperature C (F)
Engine coolant mixture

ratio
15 (59)
25 (77)
35 (95)
45 (113)
30%
1.046 - 1.050
1.042 - 1.046
1.038 - 1.042
1.033 - 1.038
50%
1.076 - 1.080
1.070 - 1.076
1.065 - 1.071
1.059 - 1.065
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down.
MA
MA-19
http://vnx.su
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (QR20DEQR25DE)

Checking Drive Belts
PFP:00100
ELS000ZC
PBIC2622E
WARNING:
Be sure to perform this step when the engine is stopped.
Make sure that the indicator (notch on fixed side) of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the possible use
range (between three line notches on moving side).
NOTE:
Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
When new drive belt is installed, the indicator (notch on fixed side) should be within the range a in the
figure.
Visually check entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks.
If the indicator (notch on fixed side) is out of the possible use range or belt is damaged, replace drive belt.
Tension Adjustment
ELS000ZD
Belt tensioning is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by drive belt auto-tensioner.
Changing Engine Coolant
ELS000ZE
WARNING:
To avoid being scalded, do not change engine coolant when engine is hot.
Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter
of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belt.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT

1.
2.
Remove RH and LH undercovers.

Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
PBIC2250E
MA-20
http://vnx.su
3.
4.
When drain all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plug on cylinder block. Refer to
EM-86, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Remove reservoir tank as necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration. If contaminated,
flush the engine cooling system. Refer to MA-22, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" .
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT

1.
2.
3.
Install reservoir tank if removed, and radiator drain plug.

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean radiator drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plug on cylinder block is removed, close and tighten it. Refer to EM-86, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Make sure that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
Fill radiator and reservoir tank to specified level.
Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck
slowly of less than 2 (1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute to allow air
in system to escape.
Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to
MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
Engine coolant capacity

(with reservoir tank at MAX level)
: Approx. 7.1
(6-1/4 lmp qt)
SMA182B
Reservoir tank capacity (at MAX level)

: 0.7
(5/8 lmp qt)
K
SMA412B
MA
Install radiator cap.
Warm up until opening thermostat and water control valve. Standard for warming-up time is approximately
10 minutes at 3,000 rpm.
M
Make sure thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat the engine.
6. Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50C (122F).
Cool down using fan to reduce the time.
If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
7. Refill reservoir tank to MAX level line with engine coolant.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 6 two or more times with radiator cap installed until the engine coolant level no
longer drops.
9. Check cooling system for leaks with the engine running.
10. Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running the engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between COOL and WARM.
Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
11. Repeat step 10 three times.
12. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 3 through 6 until the engine coolant
level no longer drops.
4.
5.
MA-21
http://vnx.su

FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plug on cylinder block is removed, close and tighten it. Refer to EM-86, "CYLINDER BLOCK" .
Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
Drain water from the system. Refer to MA-20, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.
Checking Cooling System
ELS000ZF
WARNING:
Do not remove radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns occur from high-pressure
engine coolant escaping from radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter
of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES

Check hoses for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
CHECKING RADIATOR
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator
shroud and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surface once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar, 5 kg/cm2 , 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
5.
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
Check valve seat of radiator cap.

Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top.
Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.
PBIC2816E
MA-22
http://vnx.su
Pull negative-pressure valve to open it, and make sure that it is

completely closed when released.
Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of
radiator cap negative-pressure valve.
Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and
closing conditions of negative-pressure valve.
C
SMA967B
Check radiator cap relief pressure.

Standard:
E
2
78 - 98 kPa (0.78 - 0.98bar, 0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm , 11 - 14 psi)

Limit:
F
59 kPa (0.59bar, 0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi)
When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter [SST],
apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
G
SLC755AC
Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.

CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue
or foreign material.
CHECKING RADIATOR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with

a radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and a radiator
cap tester adapter (special service tool).
Testing pressure:
157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6
kg/cm2
, 23 psi)
WARNING:
Do not remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns
could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from
radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
MA-23
http://vnx.su
MA
SLC134B

Checking Fuel Lines
ELS000ZG
Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration. If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
SMA803A
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
ELS000ZH
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE

The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between
replacement intervals. Refer to MA-7, "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE" .
PBIC0526E
Changing Engine Oil
ELS000ZI
WARNING:
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer; try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Warm up engine, put vehicle horizontally and check for oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU7, "ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE" .
2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap and then remove drain plug.
4. Drain engine oil.
5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to EM-27, "OIL PAN
AND OIL STRAINER" .
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug:
: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
6.
Refill with new engine oil.

Engine oil specification and viscosity:
Refer to MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
PBIC2410E
Engine oil capacity (Approximate):

Unit:
Drain and refill
With oil filter change
4.1 (3-5/8)
Without oil filter change
3.7 (3-1/4)
Dry engine (Overhaul)
4.7 (4-1/8)
MA-24
http://vnx.su
(lmp qt)
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION:
The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in the engine.
Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level.
PBIC0249E
Changing Oil Filter
ELS000ZJ
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Open oil filter installation/removal cover on RH undercover.

Using an oil filter wrench (special service tool), remove oil filter.
CAUTION:
Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use Genuine Nissan
Oil Filter or equivalent.
Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil
may be hot.
When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any
engine oil leakage or spillage.
Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.
Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine
and vehicle.
J
KBIA0303E
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.

Apply new engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.
MA
SMA010
MA-25
http://vnx.su

3.
Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,

then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification.
Oil filter:
: 17.6 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
SMA229B

1.
2.
3.
Start engine, and make sure there is no leaks of engine oil.

Check the engine oil level and adjust engine oil. Refer to MA-24, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Checking and Changing Spark Plugs
ELS000ZK
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-31, "IGNITION COIL" .

Remove spark plug with spark plug wrench (commercial service
tool).
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock it.
SEM294A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL (EXCEPT FOR RUSSIA)

Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
Frequent engine starts
Low ambient temperatures

Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
Extended highway driving
Frequent high engine revolution

Make
Standard type
LFR5A-11
Hot type
LFR4A-11
Cold type
LFR6A-11
Check plug gap of each spark plug.

Standard
NGK
:1.0 - 1.1 mm (0.039 - 0.043 in)
If out of standard, adjust or replace spark plug.

Use a wire brush for cleaning, if necessary.
SMA476
MA-26
http://vnx.su

INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL (FOR RUSSIA)
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
Hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions such as:
Frequent engine starts
Low ambient temperatures

Cold type spark plug is suitable when spark plug knock occurs with standard type spark plug under conditions
such as:
Extended highway driving
Frequent high engine revolution

Make
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
PLFR6A-11
Gap (Nominal)
NGK
Standard type
: 1.1 mm (0.043 in)

F
CAUTION:
Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Do not use wire brush for cleaning.
If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may
be used.
Cleaner air pressure:
H
2
Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm , 85 psi)

Cleaning time:
Less than 20 seconds
SMA773C
Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between

change intervals.
K
MA
M
SMA806CA
MA-27
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
Spark plug:
: 24.5 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
Checking EVAP Vapor Lines
ELS000ZL
1.
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
2. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc.
Refer to EC-521, "EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING" .
MA-28
http://vnx.su
ENGINE MAINTENANCE (YD22DDTI)

Checking Drive Belts
PFP:00100
A
ELS000CC
Before inspecting the engine, make sure the engine has cooled
down; wait approximately 30 minutes after the engine has been
stopped.
Visually inspect all belts for wear, damage or cracks on contacting surfaces and edge areas.
When measuring deflection, apply 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) at the
marked point ( ).
CAUTION:
When checking belt deflection immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value. Then, after turning the crankshaft two turns or more, re-adjust to the
specified value to avoid variation in deflection between
pulleys.
Tighten idler pulley lock nut by hand and measure deflection without looseness.
D
PBIC1251E
Belt Deflection:
Belt deflection with 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) force applied* mm (in)
Applied belt
A/C compressor belt
Alternator and water pump belt
New
Adjusted
Limit for re-adjusting
4 - 5 (0.16 - 0.20)
6 - 7 (0.24 - 0.28)
8.5 (0.335)
9.0 - 10.5 (0.354 - 0.413)
11.0 - 12.5 (0.433 - 0.492)
16.5 (0.650)
*: When engine is cold.
Tension Adjustment
ELS000K5
Adjust belts with the parts shown below.

Applied belt
Belt adjustment method
A/C compressor belt
Adjusting bolt on idler pulley
Adjusting bolt on alternator
CAUTION:
K
When a new belt is installed as a replacement, adjust it to the specified value under New value
because of insufficient adaptability with pulley grooves.
If the belt deflection of the current belt is out of the Limit for re-adjusting, adjust to the MA
Adjusted value.
When checking belt deflection immediately after installation, first adjust it to the specified value.
Then, after turning crankshaft two turns or more, re-adjust it to the specified value to avoid variaM
tion in deflection between pulleys.
Make sure the belts are fully fitted into the pulley grooves during installation.
Handle with care to avoid smearing the belts with engine oil or engine coolant etc.
Do not twist or bend the belts with strong force.
MA-29
http://vnx.su

A/C COMPRESSOR BELT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove RH engine undercover.

Loosen idler pulley lock nut (A).
Turn adjusting bolt (B) to adjust.
Refer to MA-29, "Checking Drive Belts" .
Tighten lock nut (A).
Nut A:
: 35 N-m (3.6 kg-m, 26 ft-lb)
PBIC1252E
ALTERNATOR AND WATER PUMP BELT

1.
2.
3.
4.
Loosen adjusting lock nut (C).

Loosen alternator fixing bolts (D) (each on front and rear).
Turn adjusting bolt (E) to adjust.
Refer to MA-29, "Tension Adjustment" .
Tighten nut (C) and bolt (D) in this order.
Nut C:
: 21.5 N-m (2.2 kg-m, 16 ft-lb)
Bolt D:
: 50.5 N-m (5.2 kg-m, 37 ft-lb)
Changing Engine Coolant
ELS000CD
WARNING:
To avoid being scalded, never change the engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap and carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a turn
to release built-up pressure. Then turn the cap all the way.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT

1.
2.
Remove engine undercover.

Open radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and remove
radiator cap.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive
belts.
Cover the exhaust tube heat shield to prevent from
splashing engine coolant.
PBIC0236E
MA-30
http://vnx.su
3.
4.
When draining all engine coolant in the system, open water drain plug on engine cylinder block.
Refer to EM-224, "DISASSEMBLY".
Remove reservoir tank, drain engine coolant, then clean reservoir tank.
Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If contaminated, flush engine cooling system. Refer to MA-32, "FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM" .
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT

1.
2.
Install reservoir tank, and radiator drain plug.

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean radiator drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plug on cylinder block is removed, close and tighten it. Refer to EM-228, "ASSEMBLY" .
Remove air relief plug.
G
PBIC3608E
3.
Fill radiator and reservoir tank to the specified level.

Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck
slowly of less than 2 (1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute to allow air
in system to escape.
Use Genuine NISSAN Anti-freeze Coolant or equivalent
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to
MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS".
Engine coolant capacity

(with reservoir tank at MAX level)
: Approx. 9.5
(8-3/8 lmp qt)
SMA182B
Reservoir tank capacity (at MAX level)

: 0.7
MA
(5/8 lmp qt)
When engine coolant overflows air relief hole, install air relief
plug with new copper washer.
Air relief plug

: 7.4 Nm (0.75 kg-m, 65 in-lb)
SMA412B
4.
5.
6.
Install radiator cap.

Warm up until opening thermostat and water control valve. Standard for warming-up time is approximately
10 minutes at 3,000 rpm.
Make sure thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.
Stop engine and cool down to less than approximately 50C(122F).
Cool down using a fan to reduce the time.
If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
MA-31
http://vnx.su

7.
8.
Refill reservoir tank to MAX level line with engine coolant.

Repeat steps 3 through 6 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no longer
drops.
9. Check cooling system for leaks with engine running.
10. Warm up engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to 3,000
rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between COOL and WARM.
Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
11. Repeat step 10 three times.
12. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating steps 3 through 6 until engine coolant level
no longer drops.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
If water drain plug on cylinder block is removed, close and tighten it. Refer to EM-228, "ASSEMBLY" .
Fill radiator with water until water spills from the air relief hole, then close air relief plug. Fill radiator and
reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
Run engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Rev engine two or three times under no-load.
Stop engine and wait until it cools down.
Drain water from the system. Refer toMA-30, "DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT" .
Repeat steps 1 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.
Checking Cooling System
ELS000C4
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure
engine coolant escaping from the radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter
turn to allow built-up pressure to escape. Carefully remove the cap by turning it all the way.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM HOSES

Check hoses for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
CHECKING RADIATOR
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan, radiator
shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downwards.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surface once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from the radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downwards.
Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (4.9 bar, 5 kg/cm2 , 71psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 in).
Blow air again into all the radiator core surface once per minute until no water sprays out.
5.
MA-32
http://vnx.su

CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
Check valve seat of radiator cap.

Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the top.
Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.
PBIC2816E
Pull negative-pressure valve to open it, and make sure that it is

completely closed when released.
Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of
radiator cap negative-pressure valve.
Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and
closing conditions of negative-pressure valve.
SMA967B
Check radiator cap relief pressure.

Standard:
78 - 98 kPa (0.78 - 0.98bar, 0.8 - 1.0 kg/cm2 , 11 - 14 psi)

Limit:
59 kPa (0.59bar, 0.6 kg/cm2 , 9 psi)
When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (special
service tool), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
K
SLC755AC
Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.

CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue
or foreign material.
MA
CHECKING RADIATOR SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
To check for leaks, apply pressure to the cooling system with

radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and radiator cap
tester adapter (special service tool).
Testing pressure:
157 kPa (1.57 bar, 1.6 kg/cm2 , 23 psi)
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high pressure engine coolant
escaping from the radiator.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator
damage.
MA-33
http://vnx.su
SLC134B
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
Checking Fuel Lines
ELS000CE
Inspect fuel lines, filler cap and tank for improper attachment, leaks,
cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or deterioration.
If necessary, repair or replace faulty parts.
SMA803A
Changing Fuel Filter
ELS000CF
PBIC2501E
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove air duct, air cleaner case and mass air flow sensor assembly. Refer to EM-139, "AIR CLEANER
AND AIR DUCT" .
Remove fuel filter protector.
Remove fuel hoses from fuel filter bracket.
CAUTION:
Plug the pipe to prevent fuel from draining.
Remove fuel filter with fuel filter bracket.
CAUTION:
Do not splash fuel during removal. If fuel is splashed,
immediately wipe it off.
SBIA0135E
5.
6.
7.
Using band-type fuel filter wrench (commercial service tool),

remove fuel filter.
Turn fuel filter upside down to drain fuel.
Remove drain plug from fuel filter.
SBIA0136E
MA-34
http://vnx.su

INSTALLATION
A
Install in reverse order of removal, paying attention to following:
Replace O-ring on drain plug with new one.

Fuel filter drain plug:
: 4.9 Nm (0.50 kg-m, 43 in-lb)
Screw the fuel filter by hand until packing contacts sealing surface of bracket. Then tighten it by turning
approximately 2/3 turn.
After installation, bleed air from fuel path. Refer to FL-18, "Air Bleeding" .
Make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps.
Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
Changing Air Cleaner Filter
ELS000CG
VISCOUS PAPER TYPE

The viscous paper type air cleaner filter does not require any cleaning operation between renewal.
PBIC0526E
Changing Engine Oil
ELS000CH
WARNING:
J
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer: try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
K
1. Warm up engine, put vehicle horizontally and check for engine oil leakage from engine components.
2. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
MA
3. Loosen oil filter cap and then remove drain plug.
4. Drain engine oil.
5. Install drain plug with new washer. Refer to EM-154, "OIL PAN
M
AND OIL STRAINER" .
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug:
: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
6.
Refill with new engine oil.

Engine oil specification and viscosity:
PBIC0527E
Engine oil capacity (Approximate):

Unit:
Drain and refill
5.2 (4-5/8)
4.9 (4-3/8)
6.3 (5-1/2)
MA-35
http://vnx.su
(lmp qt)
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION:
The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
Always use the dipstick to the determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine.
Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage.
Check the engine oil level.
PBIC0249E
Changing Oil Filter (TYPE A)
ELS000CI
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Open oil filter installation/ removal cover on RH engine undercover.

Using the oil filter wrench, remove the oil filter.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot.
When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
Completely wipe off any engine oil that adhere to the engine and the vehicle.
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.

Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter.
SMA010
3.
Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 1/2 turn. Or tighten to
specification.
Oil filter:
: 18 Nm (1.8 Kg-m, 13 ft-lb)

1.
2.
3.
Start engine, and check there is no leak of engine oil.

Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to MA-35, "Changing Engine Oil" .
MA-36
http://vnx.su

Changing Oil Filter (TYPE B)
ELS000ZM
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil are
hot.
When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine

oil leakage or spillage.
Do not allow engine oil to adhere to drive belts.
Completely wipe off any engine oil that adhere to engine

and vehicle.
H
PBIC2536E
1.
2.
Open oil filter installation/removal cover on RH engine undercover.

Using a socket wrench [plane-to-plane width: 17 mm (0.67 in)],
loosen oil filter body approximately four turns.
MA
JLC290B
3.
4.
Drain engine oil after matching the "DRAIN" arrow mark at the
bottom of oil filter body to the protrusion on oil filter bracket.
Catch engine oil with a pan or cloth.
CAUTION:
The drained engine oil flows over the right surface of
oil filter body.
Completely wipe clean any engine oil remaining on oil
filter body or vehicle.
Remove oil filter body, then remove oil filter.
JLC291B
MA-37
http://vnx.su

5.
Remove O-ring from oil filter body.

Push O-ring in one direction, lift the slack part using fingers,
and remove O-ring from oil filter body.
CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdrivers etc. as they may cause damage to oil filter body.
JLC292B
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Completely remove all foreign objects adhering to the inside of oil filter body or O-ring mounting area
(body side and bracket side).
Install oil filter and O-ring to oil filter body.
Push oil filter into filter body completely.
Install oil filter body to oil filter bracket.
Oil filter body:
: 22 Nm (2.2 Kg-m, 16 ft-lb)

1.
2.
3.
After warming up engine, check there is no leaks of engine oil.

Check the engine oil level and add engine oil. Refer to MA-35, "Changing Engine Oil" .
Draining Water
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ELS000CJ
Prepare a tray at the drain hose open end.

Loosen drain cock, and operate priming pump to drain water
from fuel filter.
CAUTION:
Water in filter is drained with fuel. Prepare larger capacity
pan than fuel filter volume.
Drained water is mixed with fuel. Prevent fuel from adhering to rubber parts such as engine mount insulator.
After draining, close drain cock by hand.
CAUTION:
If drain cock is tightened excessively, it may be damaged
and fuel will leak. Do not use tools to tighten drain cock.
Bleed air in fuel piping. Refer to FL-18, "Air Bleeding" .
Start engine and make sure there is no fuel leakage.
MA-38
http://vnx.su
SBIA0138E

Checking Exhaust System
PFP:00100
A
ELS000B9
Check exhaust pipes, muffler and mounting for improper attachment,

leaks, cracks, damage, chafing or deterioration.
D
SMA211A
Checking Clutch Fluid Level and Leaks
E
ELS000BA
If fluid level is extremely low, check clutch system for leaks.

F
H
SFIA0066J
Checking Clutch System
ELS000BB
Check fluid lines and operating cylinder for improper attachment,

cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
MA
SMA859
Checking M/T Oil
ELS000BC
Check for oil leakage.
MA-39
http://vnx.su

Changing M/T Oil
1.
2.
ELS000BD
Drain oil from drain plug and refill with new gear oil.
Check oil level.
Oil grade and viscosity:
Refer to MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
Oil level L
:165.0-171.0 mm (6.50-6.73 in)
Oil capacity (reference):
Refer to MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS" .
Filler plug and drain plug:
PCIB1478E
: 34.5 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
Checking A/T Fluid

1.
2.
ELS000BV
Warm up engine.
Check for fluid leakage.
SMA146B
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
Before driving, fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30 to 50C (86 to 122F) using COLD
range on A/T fluid level gauge.
Park vehicle on level surface and set parking brake.
Start engine and move selector lever through each gear position. Leave selector lever in P position.
Check fluid level with engine idling.
Remove A/T fluid level gauge and wipe clean lint-free paper.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not cloth one.
Re-insert A/T fluid level gauge into charging pipe as far as it will go.
CAUTION:
To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the A/T fluid
charging pipe, with the A/T fluid level gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions.
Remove A/T fluid level gauge and note reading. If reading is at low side of range, add fluid to the A/T fluid
charging pipe.
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
Drive vehicle for approximately 5 minutes in urban areas.
Re-check fluid level at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80C (122 to 176F) using HOT range on A/T fluid
level gauge.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not cloth one.
MA-40
http://vnx.su

To check fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the end of the A/T fluid
charging pipe, with the A/T fluid level gauge reversed from the normal attachment conditions.
Check fluid condition.
If fluid is very dark or smells burned, refer to AT section for
checking operation of A/T. Flush cooling system after repair of
A/T.
If A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent
and compressed air after repair of A/T. Refer to CO-12,
"RADIATOR" , CO-15, "RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)" .
Install the removed A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging
pipe.
6.
7.
SMA853B
Changing A/T Fluid

1.
2.
3.
ELS000BW
Warm up A/T fluid.

Stop engine.
Drain A/T fluid from drain plug and refill with new A/T fluid.
Always refill same volume with drained fluid.
Fluid grade:
Genuine NISSAN ATF or equivalent. Refer to
MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS" .
Fluid capacity (With torque converter):

Approx. 8.5
SMA052D
(7-1/2 lmp qt)

I
Drain plug:
: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
J
4.
5.
Run engine at idle speed for five minutes.

Check fluid level and condition. Refer to MA-40, "Checking A/T Fluid" . If fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2
through 5.
Checking Transfer Oil
ELS000BT
Check for oil leakage and oil level.

CAUTION:
Never start engine while checking oil level.
MA
Filler plug:
: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 in-lb)
SDIA0513E
Changing Transfer Oil

1.
ELS000BU
MA-41
http://vnx.su

2.
Check oil level.

CAUTION:
Carefully fill the oil. (Fill up for Approx. 3 minutes.)
Oil grade:
API GL-5
Viscosity:
Refer toMA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND
LUBRICANTS"
Oil capacity:
: Approx. 0.31
Drain plug:
SDIA0512E
(1/2 lmp pt)
: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 in-lb)

Filler plug:
: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 in-lb)
Checking Propeller Shaft
ELS000BE
Check propeller shaft for damage, looseness or grease leakage.

Tightening torque:
Refer to PR-3, "REAR PROPELLER SHAFT" .
SMA118A
Checking Differential Gear Oil
ELS000BF
Check for oil leakage and oil level.

Filler plug:
: 34.5 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
Gaskets are not reusable. Never reuse them.
SMA012C
Changing Differential Gear Oil

1.
2.
ELS000BG
Check oil level.
Oil grad and Viscosity:
Capacity:
0.55
(1 lmp pt)
Drain plug:
: 34.5 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
SDIA1151E
MA-42
http://vnx.su

Filler plug:
A
: 34.5 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)

CAUTION:
Gaskets are not reusable. Never reuse them.
Balancing Wheels
ELS000BH
Adjust wheel balance using the road wheel center.

Wheel balance (Maximum allowable unbalance):
Refer to WT-6, "SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)" .
Rotation
D
ELS000BI
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for
1,000 km (600 miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
CAUTION:
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
Tightening torque of wheel nut:

98 - 117 Nm (10 - 12 kgm, 73 - 86 ftlb)
H
SMA829C
Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks
ELS000BJ
If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
SFIA0066J
Checking Brake Lines and Cables
MA
ELS000BK
Check brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper
attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, etc.
SBR389C
MA-43
http://vnx.su

Changing Brake Fluid
1.
2.
ELS000BL
Drain brake fluid from each bleed valve.

Refill until new brake fluid comes out from each bleed valve.
Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill
brake fluid.
Refer to BR-8, "Changing Brake Fluid" .
Refill with recommended brake fluid DOT 3 or DO4.
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
SBR419C
Checking Disc Brake
ELS000BM
ROTOR
Check condition, wear, and damage.
Applied
Front
Brake model
Rear
AD31VD
AD9VA
Standard thickness
28.0 mm (1.102 in)
16.0 mm (0.630 in)
Maximum runout
0.04 mm (0.0016 in)
0.07 mm (0.0028 in)
Minimum thickness (Wear limit)
26.0 mm (1.024 in)
14.0 mm (0.551 in)
CALIPER
Check for leakage.
SMA922A
PAD
Check for wear or damage.

Brake model
AD31VD
AD9VA
Standard thickness
11 mm (0.43 in)
8.5 mm (0.335 in)
Minimum thickness
(Wear Limit)
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
BRA0010D
MA-44
http://vnx.su

Checking Steering Gear and Linkage
ELS000BO
STEERING GEAR
Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and

grease leakage.
Check connection with steering column for looseness.
D
SLIA0014E
STEERING LINKAGE
Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.
Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines
ELS000BP
Check fluid level in reservoir tank with engine off.

Use HOT range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80C (122 to 176F)
or COLD range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30C (32 to 86F).
CAUTION:
Do not overfill.
Recommended fluid is DEXRONTM III type ATF or equivalent.

Refer to MA-17, "RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS"
I
SST850C
Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.
MA
SST851C
Axle and Suspension Parts
ELS000BQ
Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear or other damage.
Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.
Check wheel bearings for smooth operation.
Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage.
Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint
dust cover for cracks or other damage.
SMA525A
MA-45
http://vnx.su
SFA392B
Drive Shaft
ELS000CL
Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and
grease leakage.
SFA108A
Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latches

Front door
Refer to BL-18, "DOOR" .
Back door
Refer to BL-99, "BACK DOOR" .
Checking Seat Belts, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters
ELS000BR
ELS000BS
SMA854C
MA-46
http://vnx.su

Checking Body Corrosion
ELS000C0
Visually check body panels for collision damage (scratches, chipping, rubbing, etc.) or damage to the anti-corrosion materials. In particular, check the following locations.
HEMMED PANELS
Hood front end, door lower end, trunk lid rear end, etc.
PANEL JOINT
Side sill of rear fender and center pillar, rear wheel housing of rear fender, around strut tower in engine compartment, etc.
PANEL EDGE
Trunk lid opening, sunroof opening, fender wheel-arch flange, fuel filler lid flange, around holes in panel, etc.
PARTS CONTACT
Waist moulding, windshield moulding, bumper, etc.
PROTECTORS
Damage or condition of mudguard, fender protector, chipping protector, etc.
ANTI-CORROSION MATERIALS
Damage or separation of anti-corrosion materials under the body.
G
DRAIN HOLES
Condition of drain holes at door and side sill. When repairing corroded areas, refer to the Corrosion Repair
Manual.
MA
MA-47
http://vnx.su

Standard and Limit
PFP:00030
ELS000K3
BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION

QR20DE and QR25DE
Tensions of drive belts
Auto-adjustment by auto-tensioner
YD22DDTi
Belt deflection with 98 N (10 kg, 22 lb) force applied* mm (in)
Applied belt
A/C compressor belt
New
Adjusted
Limit for re-adjusting
4 - 5 (0.16 - 0.20)
6 - 7 (0.24 - 0.28)
8.5 (0.335)
9.0 - 10.5 (0.354 - 0.413)
11.0 - 12.5 (0.433 - 0.492)
16.5 (0.650)
*: When engine is cold.
RADIATOR
Unit: kPa (bar, kg/cm2 , psi)
Standard
78 - 98 (0.78 - 0.98, 0.8 - 1.0, 11 - 14)
Limit
59 (0.59, 0.6, 9)
Cap relief pressure

Leakage test pressure
157 (1.57, 1.6, 23)
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY

QR20DE and QR25DE
Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level)
Unit:
(lmp qt)
Unit:
(lmp qt)
Unit:
(lmp qt)
Unit:
(lmp qt)
7.1 (6-1/4)
Reservoir tank coolant capacity (At MAX level)
0.7 (5/8)
YD22DDTi
Coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at MAX level)
9.5 (8-3/8)
Reservoir tank coolant capacity (At MAX level)
0.7 (5/8)
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)

QR20DE and QR25DE
Drain and refill
4.1 (3-5/8)
3.7 (3-1/4)
4.7 (4-1/8)
YD22DDTi
Drain and refill
5.2 (4-5/8)
4.9 (4-3/8)
6.3 (5-1/2)
SPARK PLUG
QR20DE and QR25DE
Unit: mm (in)
Destination
Except Russia
Make
For Russia
NGK
Standard type
LFR5A-11
PLFR5A-11
Hot type
LFR4A-11
PLFR4A-11
Cold type
Spark plug gap
LFR6A-11
PLFR6A-11
Standard: 1.0 - 1.1 (0.039 - 0.043)
Nominal: 1.1 (0.043)
MA-48
http://vnx.su
M INDEX
SECTION
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
IDX
IDX-1
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Numerics
4WD - Wiring diagram ....................................... TF-23
4WD control unit inspection table ...................... TF-30
A
A/C air flow ......................................... ATC-32, MTC-5
A/C component layout ..................................... ATC-23
A/C compressor clutch removal and installation ...........
ATC-146
A/C compressor precaution ............................. ATC-10
A/C compressor special service tool ................ ATC-14
A/C diagnostic work flow (auto A/C) ................ ATC-34
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ........ ATC-4
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure .......
ATC-141
A/C HFC134a (R134a) system service tools ... ATC-15
A/C HFC134a system service equipment precaution ...
ATC-10
A/C lubricant (R134a) ...................................... ATC-24
A/C operational check ......................... ATC-65, MTC-7
A/C performance test diagnoses ..................... ATC-98
A/C reray .......................................................... ATC-94
A/C self-diagnoses (auto A/C) ......................... ATC-57
A/C system description (auto A/C) ................... ATC-27
A/C trouble diagnoses (auto A/C) ....... ATC-34, MTC-3
A/C, A - Wiring diagram ................................... ATC-39
A/T fluid checking .................................. AT-16, MA-40
A/T fluid replacement ............................. AT-17, MA-41
A/T fluid temperature sensor ........................... AT-111
A/T IND - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-51
A/T indicator ........................................................ DI-51
A/T shift lock system ........................................ AT-398
A/T shift lock system - Wiring diagram ............ AT-399
A/T trouble diagnoses .......................... AT-57, AT-251
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 1ST ........................... AT-127
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 2ND .......................... AT-132
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 3RD .......................... AT-137
A/T Wiring diagram AT - 4TH .......................... AT-143
A/T Wiring diagram AT - BA/FTS ..................... AT-376
A/T Wiring diagram AT - CAN .............. AT-98, AT-330
A/T Wiring diagram AT - ENG SS ...... AT-121, AT-383
A/T Wiring diagram AT - FTS .......................... AT-108
A/T Wiring diagram AT - LPSV .......... AT-156, AT-389
A/T Wiring diagram AT - MAIN ........................ AT-395
A/T Wiring diagram AT - OVRCSV .... AT-180, AT-364
A/T Wiring diagram AT - PNP/SW ................... AT-102
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/A ......... AT-163, AT-352
A/T Wiring diagram AT - SSV/B ......... AT-169, AT-358
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TCV ............ AT-150, AT-370
A/T Wiring diagram AT - TPS ............ AT-175, AT-347
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSS A/T ..... AT-114, AT-334
A/T Wiring diagram AT - VSSMTR .... AT-194, AT-341
Accelerator control system ............................... ACC-2
Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor ........ EC-408,
EC-415, EC-431, EC-812, EC-819, EC-835, EC-1093,
EC-1130, EC-1274, EC-1441, EC-1478, EC-1607
Accelerator pedal released position learning .... EC-45,
EC-556
Air bag .............................................................. SRS-3
Air bag disposal .............................................. SRS-42
Air bleeding (hydraulic clutch) .............................. CL-8
Air bleeding for brake system .............................. BR-9
Air cleaner and air duct(QR20DEQR25DE) .... EM-16
Air cleaner and air duct(YD22DDTi) ............... EM-139
Air cleaner filter replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) ........
MA-24
Air cleaner filter replacement(YD22DDTi) ......... MA-35
Air cleaner filter(QR20DEQR25DE) ................ EM-16
Air cleaner filter(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-139
Air conditioner cut control .... EC-38, EC-549, EC-984,
EC-1352
Air flow meter - See Mass air flow sensor ....... EC-150,
EC-641
Air mix door control linkage adjustment ......... ATC-78,
ATC-135, MTC-10, MTC-32
Air mix. door motor ......................... ATC-76, ATC-135
Air spoiler, rear ................................................... EI-30
Alternator ........................................................... SC-12
Ambient sensor ............. ATC-109, ATC-111, ATC-121
Angular tightening application(QR20DEQR25DE) ......
EM-5
Angular tightening application(YD22DDTi) ..... EM-127
Antenna - See Power antenna ........................... AV-37
APP2PW - Wiring diagram ........... EC-1231, EC-1563
APPS - Wiring diagram . EC-1094, EC-1443, EC-1609
APPS1 - Wiring diagram ................... EC-410, EC-814
APPS2 - Wiring diagram .. EC-417, EC-821, EC-1131,
EC-1480
APPS3 - Wiring diagram ... EC-433, EC-837, EC-1275
ASC/BS - Wiring diagram ............. EC-1199, EC-1531
ASC/SW - Wiring diagram EC-378, EC-779, EC-1210,
EC-1542
ASCBOF - Wiring diagram ................ EC-506, EC-944
ASCD ................................................ EC-527, EC-965
ASCD brake switch EC-386, EC-505, EC-787, EC-943
ASCD indicator lamp ........................ EC-513, EC-951
ASCD steering switch ....................... EC-376, EC-777
ASCIND - Wiring diagram EC-514, EC-952, EC-1330,
EC-1676
Ashtray illumination .......................................... LT-121
Audio .................................................................... AV-4
Auto air conditioner - Wiring diagram ............. ATC-39
Automatic amplifier ........................... ATC-55, ATC-67
Automatic transmission fluid replacement ....... MA-40,
MA-41
Axle ................................................................... MA-45
B
Back door ........................................................... BL-99
Back door window ............................................ GW-15
Back window .................................................... GW-15
BACK/L - Wiring diagram ................................. LT-100
Back-up lamp ...................................... LT-100, LT-118
Back-up lamp switch (M/T) ............................... MT-13
Barometric pressure (BARO) sensor ............ EC-1291,
IDX-2
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
EC-1624
Basic inspection .. EC-78, EC-575, EC-1007, EC-1369
Battery ................................................................. SC-3
Baulk ring (M/T) .................................... MT-20, MT-38
Blower motor .... ATC-82, ATC-87, ATC-127, MTC-15,
MTC-18, MTC-24
Blower resistor ................................................ MTC-25
Blower unit ....................... ATC-125, MTC-22, MTC-24
BOOST - Wiring diagram ............... EC-1144, EC-1493
Boring/horning cylinder block(QR20DEQR25DE) .......
EM-108
Brake booster .................................................... BR-23
Brake fluid change ............................................... BR-8
Brake fluid level ................................................. MA-43
Brake fluid level and line check ........................... BR-8
Brake hydraulic line ........................................... BR-10
Brake inspection ................................................ MA-44
Brake lines and cables inspection ..................... MA-43
Brake master cylinder ........................................ BR-14
Brake pedal ......................................................... BR-6
Brake switch ..... EC-404, EC-806, EC-1301, EC-1647
BRK/SW - Wiring diagram EC-405, EC-808, EC-1302,
EC-1648
Bulb specifications ............................................ LT-149
Bumper, front ....................................................... EI-14
Bumper, rear ........................................................ EI-17
C
Camshaft inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) .......... EM-58
Camshaft inspection(YD22DDTi) .................... EM-178
Camshaft position sensor (CMPS) EC-1160, EC-1166,
EC-1509, EC-1515
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) .. EC-256, EC-698
Camshaft(QR20DEQR25DE) ........................... EM-56
Camshaft(YD22DDTi) ...................................... EM-177
CAN - Wiring diagram ....... EC-133, EC-631, EC-1051,
EC-1412, LAN-10, LAN-26, LAN-42, LAN-67, LAN-85,
LAN-103
CAN (Controller Area Network) ........... BRC-8, LAN-9,
LAN-25, LAN-41, LAN-66, LAN-84, LAN-102
CAN communication EC-39, EC-132, EC-550, EC-630,
EC-985, EC-1050, EC-1353, EC-1411, AT-32, AT-97,
AT-329, TF-45, BRC-8, LAN-9, LAN-25, LAN-41,
LAN-66, LAN-84, LAN-102
Canister-See EVAP canister ............. EC-523, EC-961
CHARGE - Wiring diagram .................... SC-13, SC-14
Charging system ................................................ SC-12
Chassis and body maintenance ........................ MA-39
CHIME - Wiring diagram ................ DI-52, DI-55, DI-56
CIGAR - Wiring diagram .................................. WW-29
Cigarette lighter ............................................... WW-29
Circuit breaker ................................................... PG-12
CKPS - Wiring diagram EC-1053, EC-1149, EC-1155,
EC-1414, EC-1498, EC-1504
Clearance lamp ................................................ LT-116
Clock ................................................................... DI-61
CLOCK - Wiring diagram .................................... DI-61
Closed loop control .............................. EC-36, EC-547
Clutch cover ....................................................... CL-16

A
Clutch disc ......................................................... CL-16
Clutch master cylinder ......................................... CL-9
Clutch operating cylinder ................................... CL-12
Clutch pedal ......................................................... CL-5
B
Clutch release bearing ....................................... CL-14
Clutch release mechanism ................................ CL-14
Clutch withdrawal lever ...................................... CL-14
C
CMPS - Wiring diagram EC-1053, EC-1161, EC-1167,
EC-1414, EC-1510, EC-1516
Coil spring (rear) ............................................... RSU-8
D
Collision diagnosis .......................................... SRS-48
Combination meter ............................................... DI-4
Combination switch ............................................. LT-96
Component Location (auto A/C) ......... ATC-35, MTC-4
E
Compression pressure(QR20DEQR25DE) ..... EM-70
Compression pressure(YD22DDTi) ................ EM-206
Compressor clutch removal and installation .. ATC-146
F
Compressor special service tool ...................... ATC-14
Condenser ..................................................... ATC-155
Connecting rod bearing clearance(QR20DEQR25DE)
G
EM-106
Connecting rod bearing clearance(YD22DDTi) EM-245
Connecting rod bushing clearance(YD22DDTi) EM-239
Connecting rod(QR20DEQR25DE) ............... EM-106
H
Connecting rod(YD22DDTi) .............. EM-235, EM-241
CONSULT for engine ......................... EC-102, EC-601
CONSULT-II for engine ................. EC-1029, EC-1392
I
Control lever (M/T) ............................................. MT-14
Control unit ..................................... ATC-120, MTC-21
Control units (terminal arrangement) ................. PG-75
J
Controller Area Network (CAN) ........... BRC-8, LAN-9,
LAN-25, LAN-41, LAN-66, LAN-84, LAN-102
Converter housing installation ......................... AT-523
COOL/F - Wiring diagram EC-355, EC-756, EC-1119,
K
EC-1468
Coolant replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) ........ MA-20
Coolant replacement(YD22DDTi) ..................... MA-30
L
Cooling circuit (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) ....... CO-7
Cooling circuit (engine)(YD22DDTi) ................. CO-30
Cooling fan ............................................ CO-19, CO-37
Cooling fan relay EC-366, EC-767, EC-1129, EC-1477 IDX
Coupling sleeve (M/T) ........................... MT-20, MT-38
Cowl top .............................................................. EI-20
Cowl top cover .................................................... EI-20
Crankcase ventilation system .......... EC-985, EC-1353
Crankcase ventilation system - See Positive crankcase
ventilation ........................................... EC-525, EC-963
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) ..... EC-249, EC-690
Crankshaft position sensor (TDC) EC-1148, EC-1154,
EC-1497, EC-1503
Crankshaft(QR20DEQR25DE) ........................ EM-87
Cylinder block boring(QR20DEQR25DE) ...... EM-109
Cylinder block boring(YD22DDTi) ................... EM-243
Cylinder block(QR20DEQR25DE) ................... EM-86
Cylinder block(YD22DDTi) .............................. EM-223
Cylinder head bolt tightening(QR20DEQR25DE) ........
EM-73
Cylinder head bolt tightening(YD22DDTi) ....... EM-208
IDX-3
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Cylinder head gasket selection(YD22DDTi) ... EM-209
Cylinder head(QR20DEQR25DE) ................... EM-70
Cylinder head(YD22DDTi) .............................. EM-206
Data link connector ............................ EC-516, EC-954

Data link connector for Consult ......... EC-104, EC-603,
EC-1029, EC-1392
DEF - Wiring diagram ....................................... GW-21
Desiccant Assembly ...................................... ATC-156
Diagnosis sensor unit ..................................... SRS-41
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) ...................... EC-1359
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for OBD system EC-19,
EC-54, EC-531, EC-562, EC-969, EC-993, EC-1339
Diagnostic trouble code (DTC) inspection priority chart
EC-76, EC-573, EC-1005, EC-1368
Differential gear (FF M/T) ..................... MT-23, MT-41
DLC - Wiring diagram ........................ EC-516, EC-954
Door glass ........................................... GW-80, GW-83
Door glass Fitting Adjustment ............. GW-80, GW-83
Door lock ................................................. BL-91, BL-95
Door mirror ........................................................ GW-86
Door trim ............................................................. EI-32
Door, front .......................................................... BL-18
Door, rear ........................................................... BL-18
Drive belt inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) ......... MA-20
Drive belt inspection(YD22DDTi) ...................... MA-29
Drive belt(QR20DEQR25DE) .......................... EM-13
Drive belt(YD22DDTi) ..................................... EM-137
Drive shaft (front) ............................................. FAX-11
Drive shaft (rear) ............................................. RAX-10
Driver air bag .................................................. SRS-30
Dropping resistor (A/T) ...................... AT-160, AT-393
DTC work support ............................................ EC-111
Dual pressure switch ........ ATC-18, ATC-95, ATC-158
Duct and grilles ............................... ATC-137, MTC-33
Engine control component parts location .......... EC-87,

EC-585
Engine control module (ECM) .......... EC-282, EC-713,
EC-1217, EC-1219, EC-1549, EC-1551
Engine control system diagram and chart ........ EC-30,
EC-541, EC-980, EC-1348
Engine coolant temperature sensor (ECTS) ... EC-164,
EC-649, EC-1087, EC-1435
Engine coolant(QR20DEQR25DE) .................... CO-9
Engine coolant(YD22DDTi) .............................. CO-32
Engine fail-safe system ....................... EC-77, EC-574
Engine oil filter replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) .........
MA-25
Engine oil filter replacement(YD22DDTi) MA-36, MA-37
Engine oil precautions .......................................... GI-7
Engine oil replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) ..... MA-24
Engine oil replacement(YD22DDTi) .................. MA-35
Engine oil(QR20DEQR25DE) ............................. LU-7
Engine oil(YD22DDTi) ....................................... LU-20
Engine removal(QR20DEQR25DE) ................ EM-82
Engine removal(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-219
ETC1 - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-296, EC-725
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve ....
EC-268, EC-520, EC-881, EC-958
EVAP vapor lines inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) ........
MA-28
Evaporative emission (EVAP) system EC-520, EC-958
Evaporator .................................................... ATC-158
Exhaust manifold(QR20DEQR25DE) .............. EM-25
Exhaust manifold(YD22DDTi) ......................... EM-148
Exhaust system ................................................... EX-2
Exhaust system inspection ..................... EX-2, MA-39
Expansion valve ............................................ ATC-159
Exterior EI-21, EI-22, EI-24, EI-25, EI-26, EI-27, EI-28,
EI-30, EI-31
ECM input/output signal ....................... EC-94, EC-592

ECM power supply EC-124, EC-285, EC-622, EC-716
ECM/PW - Wiring diagram ................. EC-286, EC-717
ECTS - Wiring diagram .... EC-166, EC-651, EC-1089,
EC-1437
EGR function ................ EC-1177, EC-1184, EC-1634
EGR volume control valve ............ EC-1177, EC-1184,
EC-1634
EGRC/V - Wiring diagram ............. EC-1179, EC-1186,
EC-1636
Electric sunroof .................................................. RF-10
Electric throttle control actuator ........ EC-293, EC-295,
EC-313, EC-720, EC-723, EC-742
Electrical load signal circuit ................ EC-479, EC-917
Electrical unit ..................................................... PG-75
Electrical units location ...................................... PG-68
Electronic ignition (EI) system ............. EC-37, EC-548
Engine control circuit diagram ............ EC-92, EC-590,
EC-1020, EC-1383
F/FOG - Wiring diagram ..................... LT-108, LT-109

F/PUMP - Wiring diagram EC-466, EC-904, EC-1259,
EC-1592
Fan control amp. ............................. ATC-84, ATC-129
Fan switch ....................................................... MTC-18
FIAR - Wiring diagram .................. EC-1243, EC-1575
Final drive (FF M/T) .............................. MT-23, MT-41
Finisher, interior - See Trim ................................ EI-32
Finisher, rear panel ............................................. EI-31
Floor trim ............................................................. EI-38
Flow charts ......................................................... GI-23
Fluid temperature sensor (A/T) ........................ AT-111
Fluorescent leak detector ............................. ATC-160
Flywheel (clutch) ................................................ CL-16
Flywheel runout(QR20DEQR25DE) EM-113, EM-248
Fog lamp, front ................................................. LT-108
Fork rod (M/T) ....................................... MT-22, MT-40
Freeze frame data EC-55, EC-563, EC-994, EC-1360
FRO2 - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-844, EC-859
IDX-4
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Front bumper ....................................................... EI-14
Front disc brake ................................................. BR-27
Front door ........................................................... BL-18
Front Door Trim ................................................... EI-32
Front fog lamp .................................................. LT-108
Front passenger air bag .................................. SRS-35
Front seat .......................................................... SE-24
Front seat belt ...................................................... SB-3
Front seat belt pre-tensioner .... SB-2, SRS-3, SRS-40
Front side air bag ............................................. SRS-37
Front suspension ............................................... FSU-5
Front washer ...................................................... WW-4
Front wiper ......................................................... WW-4
FRPS - Wiring diagram .................. EC-1104, EC-1453
FTS - Wiring diagram .................... EC-1100, EC-1449
FUEL - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-220, EC-226
Fuel check valve ................................ EC-520, EC-958
Fuel cut control (at no load high engine speed) EC-38,
EC-549, EC-984, EC-1352
Fuel filler lid ...................................................... BL-103
Fuel filter .......................................... EC-989, EC-1357
Fuel filter replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) .......... FL-4
Fuel filter replacement(YD22DDTi) ....... FL-17, MA-34
Fuel gauge ............................................................ DI-4
Fuel injection control system ........... EC-982, EC-1350
Fuel injection system ......................... EC-218, EC-224
Fuel injector adjustment resistor .... EC-1241, EC-1573
Fuel injector and fuel tube(QR20DEQR25DE) . EM-34
Fuel injector and fuel tube(YD22DDTi) ............ EM-164
Fuel line inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) . FL-3, MA-24
Fuel line inspection(YD22DDTi) ............ FL-16, MA-34
Fuel pressure check ............................ EC-48, EC-559
Fuel pressure release .......................... EC-48, EC-559
Fuel pump .......... EC-465, EC-903, EC-989, EC-1253,
EC-1585
Fuel pump and gauge(QR20DEQR25DE) .......... FL-4
Fuel rail pressure sensor ............... EC-1103, EC-1452
Fuel system(QR20DEQR25DE) .......................... FL-3
Fuel system(YD22DDTi) ..................................... FL-16
Fuel tank(QR20DEQR25DE) ............................ FL-11
Fuel tank(YD22DDTi) ......................................... FL-23
Fuel temperature sensor ............... EC-1099, EC-1448
Fuse ................................................................... PG-12
Fuse and fusible link box ................................... PG-79
Fusible link ......................................................... PG-12
G
Gauges ................................................................. DI-4
Gear components (M/T) ....................... MT-20, MT-38
Generator .......................................................... SC-12
Generator - See Alternator ................................ SC-12
Generic scan tool (GST) .................. EC-112, EC-1035
Glass .................................................. GW-80, GW-83
GLOW - Wiring diagram EC-1174, EC-1294, EC-1627
Glow plug ....................................... EC-1293, EC-1626
Glow plug(YD22DDTi) ..................................... EM-159
Glow relay ...................... EC-1173, EC-1293, EC-1626
Grille - See Exterior ............................................. EI-19
Ground distribution ............................................ PG-13

A
H
H/LAMP - Wiring diagram ......................... LT-9, LT-28
H/MIRROR - Wiring diagram ............................ GW-21
Harness connector ............................................. PG-73
Harness layout ................................................... PG-32
Headlamp ............................................................. LT-5
Headlamp aiming control .................................... LT-66
Headlamp washer ............................................ WW-20
Headlining - See Roof trim .................................. EI-39
Heated oxygen sensor 1 .... EC-178, EC-185, EC-195,
EC-321, EC-327, EC-663, EC-670, EC-858
Heated oxygen sensor 1 heater ......... EC-138, EC-843
Heated oxygen sensor 2 .... EC-203, EC-210, EC-333,
EC-341, EC-864
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater ......... EC-144, EC-848
Heated seat ........................................... SE-18, SE-21
HEATER - Wiring diagram ................................ MTC-6
Heater and cooling unit (Heater core) ............ ATC-131
Heater mirror ..................................................... GW-21
Heater system - Wiring diagram ....................... MTC-6
Heater unit (heater core) .. ATC-136, MTC-27, MTC-30
HFC134a (R134a) system precaution ............... ATC-4
HFC134a (R134a) system service procedure ATC-141
HFC134a (R134a) system service tools .......... ATC-15
HFC134a system service equipment precaution ..........
ATC-10
HO2S1 - Wiring diaram ...... EC-180, EC-188, EC-198,
EC-665, EC-672
HO2S1H - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-140
HO2S2 - Wiring diagram .... EC-205, EC-213, EC-336,
EC-344
HO2S2H - Wiring diagram ............................... EC-146
Hood .................................................................. BL-12
Horn ................................................................. WW-27
HORN - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-27
How to erase DTC ........................... EC-563, EC-1359
How to erase DTC for OBD system ..... EC-62, EC-994
I
IATS - Wiring diagram .... EC-160, EC-1083, EC-1431
IATSEN - Wiring diagram ................................ EC-854
Identification ...................................... ATC-12, ATC-13
Idle air volume learning ........................ EC-46, EC-557
Idle speed ........... EC-78, EC-575, EC-1007, EC-1369
Ignition coil ......................................... EC-439, EC-870
Ignition coil(QR20DEQR25DE) ....................... EM-31
Ignition control system ....................... EC-439, EC-870
Ignition timing ....................................... EC-78, EC-575
IGNSYS - Wiring diagram .................. EC-440, EC-871
ILL - Wiring diagram ......................................... LT-122
Illumination ........................................................ LT-122
In vehicle sensor ........... ATC-111, ATC-113, ATC-122
INJE/PW - Wiring diagram ............. EC-1282, EC-1615
INJECT - Wiring diagram . EC-451, EC-889, EC-1112,
EC-1249, EC-1286, EC-1461, EC-1581, EC-1619
IDX-5
http://vnx.su
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Injection nozzle(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-164
Injector ............................................... EC-450, EC-888
Input shaft (FF M/T) .............................. MT-20, MT-38
Intake air temperature sensor ........... EC-158, EC-853,
EC-1082, EC-1429
Intake door control linkage adjustment ............ ATC-81
Intake door motor ATC-79, ATC-128, MTC-11, MTC-26
Intake manifold(QR20DEQR25DE) ................. EM-18
Intake manifold(YD22DDTi) ............................ EM-143
Intake sensor ................................................. ATC-117
Intake valve timing control ................. EC-135, EC-633
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve ....... EC-289
Interior ....................... EI-32, EI-34, EI-35, EI-38, EI-39
Interior lamp ...................................................... LT-132
Interior lamp on-off control .................. LT-132, LT-133
ISO 15031-5 Mode 1 - 9 ...................... EC-51, EC-991
IVC - Wiring diagram ....................................... EC-290
J
Joint connector (J/C) .......................................... PG-78
EC-1360
Mass air flow sensor (MAFS) ........... EC-150, EC-641,
EC-1069, EC-1077, EC-1424
Master cylinder (brake) ...................................... BR-14
Master cylinder (clutch) ........................................ CL-9
Meter ..................................................................... DI-4
METER - Wiring diagram ......................... DI-14, DI-17
MIL/DL - Wiring diagram ............... EC-1336, EC-1682
MIRROR - Wiring diagram ............................... GW-87
Mirror defogger ................................................ GW-21
Mirror, door ...................................................... GW-86
Mirror, out side ................................................. GW-86
Misfire .............................................................. EC-238
Mode door control linkage adjustment ........... ATC-75,
ATC-134, MTC-9, MTC-31
Mode door motor ............................ ATC-73, ATC-134
Molding - See Exterior ................... EI-22, EI-24, EI-25
Mud guard - See Exterior .................................... EI-24
MULTI - Wiring diagram ..................................... BL-77
Multiport fuel injection (MFI) system ... EC-35, EC-546
Multiport fuel injection precautions ....................... GI-6
Multi-remote control system ............................... BL-74
K
N
Keyless entry system - See Multi-remote control system
BL-74
Knock sensor (KS) ............................. EC-244, EC-685
KS - Wiring diagram ........................... EC-245, EC-686
L
LAN system circuit ........................................... ATC-69
License lamp ..................................................... LT-103
Line pressure test (A/T) ....................... AT-68, AT-260
Liquid gasket application ......................... LU-3, LU-17
Liquid gasket application(QR20DEQR25DE) ... EM-6,
EM-128, CO-3, CO-26
LOAD - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-480, EC-918
Location of electrical units ................................. PG-68
Lock, door ............................................... BL-91, BL-95
Lubricant (R134a) A/C ........................ ATC-5, ATC-24
Lubrication circuit (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) .. LU-5
Lubrication circuit (engine)(YD22DDTi) ............. LU-19
Lubrication oil A/C .......................................... ATC-164
Lubrication-locks, hinges and hood latches ...... MA-46
M
M/T major overhaul ............................... MT-19, MT-37
M/T removal and installation .............................. MT-17
MAFS - Wiring diagram ... EC-152, EC-643, EC-1071,
EC-1078, EC-1425
Magnet clutch ................................. ATC-88, ATC-146
MAIN - Wiring diagram .... EC-124, EC-622, EC-1041,
EC-1402
Mainshaft (M/T) ..................................... MT-20, MT-38
Maintenance (engine)(YD22DDTi) ................... MA-29
Major overhaul (Transfer) .................................. TF-59
Malfunction indicator (MI) .... EC-63, EC-565, EC-996,
NATS - Wiring diagram .................................... BL-111

NATS (Nissan anti-theft system) ..................... BL-108
NATS (Nissan anti-theft system) precautions ....... GI-3
NVH troubleshooting (BR) ................................... BR-5
NVH troubleshooting (Transfer) ........................... TF-9
O
Oil cooler (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) ............. LU-11
Oil cooler (engine)(YD22DDTi) .......................... LU-28
Oil filter(QR20DEQR25DE) .............................. LU-10
Oil filter(YD22DDTi) ........................................... LU-23
Oil pan (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) ................ EM-27
Oil pan (engine)(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-154
Oil pressure (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) ........... LU-7
Oil pressure (engine)(YD22DDTi) ...................... LU-20
Oil pump (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) .............. LU-13
Oil pump (engine)(YD22DDTi) ........................... LU-30
Oil seal replacement (engine)(QR20DEQR25DE) ......
EM-46, EM-70, EM-86
On board diagnostic system . EC-51, EC-562, EC-991
Operating cylinder (clutch) ................................. CL-12
Out side mirror ................................................. GW-86
Overdrive control switch .................... AT-240, AT-327
Overheat ........... EC-351, EC-752, EC-1116, EC-1465
Oversize piston(QR20DEQR25DE) ............... EM-109
Oversize piston(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-243
P
Park/Neutral position switch ............ EC-397, EC-799,
EC-1310, EC-1656
Park/neutral position switch (A/T) .................... AT-100
Park/neutral position switch (M/T) .................... MT-13
IDX-6
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
PCV (positive crankcase ventilation) . EC-525, EC-963
PGC/V - Wiring diagram .................................. EC-270
PHASE - Wiring diagram ................... EC-257, EC-700
Pilot bushing replacement - See Pilot
converter(QR20DEQR25DE) ........................... EM-86
Piston assembly(QR20DEQR25DE) .............. EM-108
Piston pin inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) ....... EM-104
Piston pin inspection(YD22DDTi) .................... EM-235
Piston ring inspection(QR20DEQR25DE) ...... EM-105
Piston ring inspection(YD22DDTi) ................... EM-240
Piston to bore clearance(QR20DEQR25DE) . EM-108
Piston to bore clearance(YD22DDTi) .............. EM-243
PNP/SW - Wiring diagram EC-399, EC-801, EC-1311,
EC-1657
POS - Wiring diagram ........................ EC-250, EC-692
POWER - Wiring diagram .................................... PG-3
Power antenna .................................................. AV-37
Power door lock .................................................. BL-22
Power seat ......................................................... SE-10
Power socket ................................................... WW-31
Power steering fluid level ......................... PS-6, MA-45
Power steering gear .......................................... PS-16
Power steering oil pressure switch EC-1314, EC-1660
Power steering oil pump .................................... PS-27
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor .......... EC-277,
EC-708
Power steering system bleeding .......................... PS-6
Power supply routing ........................................... PG-2
Power window .................................................. GW-40
Precations for Leak detection dye ................... ATC-12
Precautions (General) .......................................... GI-4
Pre-delivery inspection ........................................ MA-4
Pressure plate - See Clutch cover ..................... CL-16
PRGVLV - Wirng diagram ............................... EC-882
Propeller shaft ..................................................... PR-3
Propeller shaft on vehicle service ........................ PR-3
PS/SEN - Wiring diagram .................. EC-278, EC-709
PST/SW - Wiring diagram ............. EC-1315, EC-1661
Q
Quick-glow system ........................ EC-1293, EC-1626
R
R/FOG - Wiring diagram ................................... LT-112
Radiator(QR20DEQR25DE) ................ CO-12, CO-15
Radiator(YD22DDTi) ............................ CO-35, CO-39
Radio - See Audio ............................................... AV-4
Rear air spoiler .................................................... EI-30
Rear bumper ........................................................ EI-17
Rear disc brake ................................................. BR-32
Rear door ............................................................ BL-18
Rear fog lamp ................................................... LT-112
Rear panel finisher .............................................. EI-31
Rear seat ........................................................... SE-31
Rear seat belt ...................................................... SB-4
Rear side window ............................................. GW-13
Rear suspension ............................................... RSU-5
Rear washer .................................................... WW-14

Rear window defogger ...................................... GW-17
Rear wiper ....................................................... WW-14
Refrigerant connection precaution ..................... ATC-5
Refrigerant discharging evacuating charging ATC-141
Refrigerant general precaution .......................... ATC-5
Refrigerant lines ............................................. ATC-141
Refrigerant pressure sensor EC-473, EC-911, ATC-18,
ATC-94, ATC-157
Refrigeration cycle ........................................... ATC-18
Release bearing (clutch) .................................... CL-14
Removal and installation (A/T) ......................... AT-413
Removal and installation (Transfer) ................... TF-57
Reverse idler shaft (M/T) ...................... MT-20, MT-38
Reverse lamp switch (M/T) - See Back-up lamp switch
(M/T) .................................................................. MT-13
Reverse main gear (M/T) ...................... MT-20, MT-38
Rocker cover(QR20DEQR25DE) .................... EM-44
Rocker cover(YD22DDTi) ............................... EM-175
Room lamp ....................................................... LT-132
Room lamp - See Interior lamp ......................... LT-132
ROOM/L - Wiring diagram ................................ LT-132
RP/SEN - Wiring diagram .................. EC-474, EC-912
RRO2 - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-849, EC-865
H
S
S/LOCK - Wiring diagram ....................... BL-24, BL-45
S/SIG - Wiring diagram .................. EC-1333, EC-1679
SCTC/V - Wiring diagram ............. EC-1222, EC-1254,
EC-1260, EC-1265, EC-1270, EC-1554, EC-1587,
EC-1593, EC-1598, EC-1603
SEAT - Wiring diagram ...................................... SE-11
Seat belt inspection .......................................... MA-46
Seat belt pre-tensioner disposal ..................... SRS-42
Seat belt, front ..................................................... SB-3
Seat belt, rear ...................................................... SB-4
Seat, front .......................................................... SE-24
Seat, rear ........................................................... SE-31
Self-diagnosis (Transfer) ................................... TF-32
SEN/PW - Wiring diagram ................. EC-372, EC-773
Sheft warning system ...................................... BL-104
SHIFT - Wiring diagram ................................... AT-399
Shift control components (M/T) ............. MT-22, MT-40
Shift fork (M/T) ...................................... MT-22, MT-40
Shift lever ........................................................... MT-14
Shift lock system .............................................. AT-398
Shift schedule .................................................. AT-530
Shift solenoid valve A (A/T) ............................. AT-128
Shift solenoid valve B (A/T) ............................. AT-128
Side air bag (satellite) sensor ......................... SRS-39
Side window - See Rear side window ............... GW-13
Spark plug replacement(QR20DEQR25DE) ... MA-26
Spark plug(QR20DEQR25DE) ........................ EM-32
Specification value ............................. EC-119, EC-617
Speedometer ........................................................ DI-4
Spiral cable ..................................................... SRS-33
SROOF - Wiring diagram ................................... RF-11
SRS - See Supplemental Restraint System ..... SRS-6
IDX-7
http://vnx.su
IDX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
SRS - Wiring diagram/LHD ............................. SRS-11
SRS - Wiring diagram/RHD ............................ SRS-13
SRS Trouble diagnoses .................................... SRS-8
Stall test (A/T) ...................................... AT-65, AT-257
Standardized relay ............................................. PG-76
START - Wiring diagram ........................ SC-23, SC-24
Start signal ..................................... EC-1333, EC-1679
Starter ................................................................ SC-22
Starting system .................................................. SC-22
Steering gear and linkage inspection ................ MA-45
Steering knuckle ................................................ FAX-7
Steering linkage ................................................. PS-16
Steering wheel and column ..................... PS-8, PS-11
Steering wheel turning force ................................ PS-8
Stop lamp .............................................. LT-98, LT-118
Stop lamp switch ................................ EC-404, EC-806
STOP/L - Wiring diagram ...................... LT-98, LT-118
Suction control valve .... EC-1221, EC-1264, EC-1269,
EC-1553, EC-1597, EC-1602
Sunload sensor ............. ATC-114, ATC-116, ATC-123
Sunroof .............................................................. RF-10
Super lock .......................................................... BL-42
Supplemental Restraint System ....................... SRS-6
Supplemental restraint system - Wiring diagram/LHD ..
SRS-11
Supplemental restraint system - Wiring diagram/RHD .
SRS-13
Suspension ....................................................... MA-45
Symbols and abbreviations ........................ GI-9, GI-22
Symptom matrix chart .......................... EC-83, EC-581
Synchronizer (M/T) ............................... MT-20, MT-38
System readiness test (SRT) code .................... EC-55
Timing chain(YD22DDTi) .................. EM-190, EM-195

Torque converter installation ............. AT-415, AT-523
TPS1 - Wiring diagram ..................... EC-232, EC-679
Transmission case (M/T) ...................... MT-19, MT-37
Trouble diagnoses .............................................. GI-10
Turbocharger charge air cooler(YD22DDTi) ... EM-141
Turbocharger precautions ..................................... GI-6
Turbocharger(YD22DDTi) ............................... EM-148
TURN - Wiring diagram .......................... LT-87, LT-89
Turn signal lamp ................................... LT-87, LT-118
Two trip detection logic ....................... EC-51, EC-562
V
Vacuum hose (brake system) ............................ BR-25
Vacuum hose drawing (Engine control) EC-32, EC-543
Vacuum pump(YD22DDTi) ............................. EM-160
Valve clearance(QR20DEQR25DE) ................ EM-64
Valve clearance(YD22DDTi) ........................... EM-182
Valve guide ....................................................... EM-77
Valve guide(QR20DEQR25DE) ....................... EM-77
Valve lifter(QR20DEQR25DE) ......................... EM-56
Valve lifter(YD22DDTi) ................................... EM-180
Valve seat(QR20DEQR25DE) ......................... EM-79
Valve seat(YD22DDTi) ................................... EM-216
Valve spring(QR20DEQR25DE) ...................... EM-80
Variable induction air control system (VIAS) ... EC-456,
EC-894
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) EC-275, EC-402, EC-706,
EC-804
VIAS - Wiring diagram ...................... EC-458, EC-896
T
W
Tachometer ........................................................... DI-4
Tail lamp ............................................. LT-103, LT-116
TAIL/L - Wiring diagram ...................... LT-103, LT-144
Tailgate lamp .................................................... LT-103
TC boost control solnoid valve ...... EC-1055, EC-1491,
EC-1642
TC boost sensor ............................................ EC-1142
TCC/V - Wiring diagram ................. EC-1056, EC-1643
TCM circuit diagram ........................................... AT-21
TCM inspection table ........................... AT-94, AT-286
THEFT - Wiring diagram .................................. BL-104
Thermal protector ............................................ ATC-95
Thermostat(QR20DEQR25DE) ....................... CO-23
Thermostat(YD22DDTi) .................................... CO-46
Three way catalyst function ............................. EC-263
Three way catalyst precautions ............................ GI-5
Three way catalyst(QR20DEQR25DE) ........... EM-25
Throttle control motor relay ................ EC-305, EC-734
Throttle position sensor (TPS) .......... EC-170, EC-230,
EC-367, EC-369, EC-423, EC-655, EC-677, EC-768,
EC-770, EC-827
Throwout bearing - See Clutch release bearing CL-14
Time control system .......................................... BCS-3
Timing chain(QR20DEQR25DE) ..................... EM-46
WARN - Wiring diagram .......................... DI-34, DI-42

Warning chime .................................................... DI-54
Warning lamps .................................................... DI-33
Washer, front ..................................................... WW-4
Washer, rear .................................................... WW-14
Water control valve(QR20DEQR25DE) ........... CO-23
Water pump(QR20DEQR25DE) ...................... CO-21
Water pump(YD22DDTi) ................................... CO-43
Water temperature gauge ..................................... DI-4
Weatherstrip - See Exterior ............................... BL-21
Wheel alignment (front) .................................... FSU-6
Wheel alignment (rear) ..................................... RSU-6
Wheel balance ....................................... WT-4, MA-43
Wheel bearing (rear) ......................................... RAX-6
Wheel hub (front) ............................................... FAX-7
Wheel hub (rear) ............................................... RAX-6
Wheel sensors (ABS) ..................................... BRC-45
WINDOW - Wiring diagram .............................. GW-46
Window, back .................................................. GW-15
Window, back door .......................................... GW-15
Window, door ...................................... GW-80, GW-83
Window, rear side ............................................ GW-13
Window, side - See Rear side window ............ GW-13
IDX-8
http://vnx.su
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
WIP/R - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-14
WIPER - Wiring diagram ................................... WW-6
Wiper and washer .............................................. WW-4
Wiper, front ........................................................ WW-4
Wiper, rear ....................................................... WW-14
Wiring Diagram (Cell code) list .......................... PG-64
Wiring diagrams .................................................. GI-14
Withdrawal lever (clutch) ................................... CL-14
Wrist pin - See Piston pin inspection(QR20DEQR25DE)
..........................................................................EM-104
IDX
IDX-9
http://vnx.su

vnx.su x trail t30 sm - Часть2 PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

vnx.su x trail t30 sm - Часть2 PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

TRANSFER

BASIC CONCEPT ............................................... 20

Engine Control Signal ............................................. 44

4WD CONTROL UNIT ...............................................54

Before connecting or disconnecting the 4WD control unit

When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

Before replacing 4WD control unit, perform 4WD control

After overhaul refill the transfer with new transfer oil.

Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis

GI-14, "How to Read Wiring Diagrams".

PG-2, "POWER SUPPLY ROUTING".

GI-10, "How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses".

GI-23, "How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident".

Measuring preload torque

Removing drive pinion

Removing pinion rear bearing outer race

Removing pinion front bearing outer race

Removing gear ring oil seal

Removing pinion front bearing inner race

Removing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing companion flange

Removing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing gear ring bearing outer race

Installing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing gear ring bearing outer race

Installing transfer case oil seal

Installing gear ring oil seal

Installing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing gear ring bearing inner race

Installing pinion rear bearing outer race

Installing pinion front bearing outer race

Installing pinion sleeve oil seal

Installing pinion front bearing outer race

Installing pinion front bearing inner race

Installing side oil seal (installing adapter case

Installing gear ring bearing outer race

Installing gear ring bearing outer race

NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING

Transfer oil leakage

GEAR (Worn or damaged)

BEARING (Worn or damaged)

OIL SEAL (Worn or damaged)

O-RING (Worn or damaged)

TRANSFER OIL (Level too high)

TRANSFER OIL (Wrong)

TRANSFER OIL (Level low)

(1/2 lmp pt)

OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL

ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING

Transmission torque to the rear wheels is determined according to command current.

4WD CONTROL UNIT

4WD controls distribution of drive power between front-wheel

ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM

4WD INDICATOR LAMP AND LOCK INDICATOR LAMP

4WD indicator lamp

LOCK indicator lamp

Turns ON for approx. 1 second when ignition switch is turned ON.

4WD WARNING LAMP

4WD Warning Lamp Indication

4WD warning lamp

Rapid flashing: 2 times/second

ALL MODE 4X4 SYSTEM